Professional Documents
Culture Documents
CONCRETE
MANUAL
PART 2
A Water
Resources
Technical
Publication
NINTH EDITION
PART 2
Ninth Edition
11|
Mission: As the Nation's principal conservation agency, the
Department of the Interior has responsibility for most of our
nationally-owned public lands and natural and cultural resources.
This includes fostering wise use of our land and water resources,
protecting our fish and wildlife, preserving the environmental and
cultural values of our national parks and historical places, and
providing for the enjoyment of life through outdoor recreation.
The Department assesses our energy and mineral resources and
works to assure that their development is in the best interests
of all our people. The Department also promotes the goals of the
Take Pride in America campaign by encouraging stewardship and
citizen responsibility for the public lands and promoting citizen
participation in their care. The Department also has a major
responsibility for American Indian reservation communities and
for people who live in Island Territories under U.S. administration.
ST METRIC
iv
PREFACE
The Ninth Edition of the Concrete Manual continues a Bureau of Reclamation tradition for providing its technical
staff with current information on concrete technology and testing procedures that will help in construction and
maintenance of Reclamation's water resources projects throughout the western United States. Unlike previous editions,
the Ninth Edition contains two parts. This volume (Part 2) contains standard Reclamation test procedures related
to concrete technology and replaces the test designations in the appendix of the Eighth Edition. Part 1, will contain
the text on concrete technology.
Evolving from a set of loose-leaf, blue-print instructions, the first tentative edition of the manual was published
in 1936. Previous editions to this Ninth Edition have had approximately 153,000 copies distributed throughout the
world. The Concrete Manual is issued primarily for Bureau of Reclamation staff use; however, it has received widespread
acceptance throughout the United States and in many foreign countries.
Since the fundamentals of good concrete practice change little over the years, continued research and construction
experience advance the technology to make concrete more versatile, dependable, and economical. This volume (Part 2)
presents test procedures that reflect advances in concrete technology. The procedures are published primarily for
Reclamation's staff in administering construction and repair specifications and contracts. Some procedures in Part 2
are directly referred to by Bureau of Reclamation specifications. When this is done, these referenced procedures have
the full effect of specification requirements. In instances where procedures in Part 2 of the Concrete Manual are
at variance with specifications requirements, the specifications take precedence.
The Ninth Edition of the Concrete Manual and earlier editions represent the expertise of individuals too numerous
to mention. Their contributions are acknowledge since each edition is based upon the technically sound foundation
of previous editions.
The Materials Engineering Branch, Research and Laboratory Services Division, Denver Office of the Bureau of
Reclamation is responsible for preparing the Concrete Manual.
James S. Pierce, Chief of the Materials Engineering Branch, supervised production of the Ninth Edition and made
substantial technical contributions. The existence of Part 2, in large part, is due to the relentless efforts of E. E
(Sam) Samuelson (retired Reclamation engineer) of the Materials Engineering Branch, Field Operations Team, who
devoted nearly a decade to production, documentation, and review of the test procedures. He enlisted the help of
many engineers and technical specialists in the Materials Engineering Branch and throughout the Bureau of Reclamation
to ensure the accuracy of the test procedures. Significant contributions were also made by individuals outside Reclamation.
Ed Harboe, a retired Reclamation engineer, returned and contributed his more than 40 years of concrete technology
experience to the test procedures. Edwin R. Dunstan, Jr., a former Reclamation engineer, and Robert E. Philleo
(deceased, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers) wrote several procedures under contracts with Reclamation.
Editorial review of the test procedures was provided by Marlene Johnson, and by technical editors Ron Mohr and
Richard Waiters of the Denver Office. Typesetting and graphics personnel of the Denver Office assisted in producing
all 94 test procedures. Coordination for publication was done by Kathy Bauer. Their assistanceand many other individuals,
past and present, who contributed to this publication is gratefully acknowledged.
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction ............................................................ 1
USBR No.
1104 Load Verification of Testing Machines ............................................ 3
3100 Sampling of Water ........................................................ 15
3105 Hydrogen Ion Activity (pH) of Water and Water-Based Fluids ........................... . 27
3110 Turbidity of Water ........................................................ 41
3115 Particulate, Dissolved, or Total Matter in Water ..................................... 48
3120 Sulfate Ion in Water ....................................................... 55
4029 Density and Voids in Aggregate ................................................ 67
4031 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in Field .................................. 73
4O39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ............................... 88
4040 Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete ................................... 97
4042 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams or Cubes of Concrete and Shotcrete ......... 99
4075 Sampling Aggregates ....................................................... 1l5
4087 Effect of Organic hnpurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar ....................... 128
4088 Soundness of Aggregates Using Sodit, m Sulfate ...................................... 137
4094 Specifications for Ready-mixed Concrete .......................................... 143
4109 Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars Using 2-Inch or 50-Millimeter Cube Specimens . . . 160
4117 Materials Finer Than No. 200 (75-#m) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing ................ 168
4123 Low Density Pieces in Aggregate ............................................... 171
4127 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate .................................. 176
4128 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate ................................... 183
4131 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size, Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and hnpact
in Los Angeles Machine ................................................... 188
4136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ....................................... 192
4138 Density, Yield, Clean Separation, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete ................... 199
4140 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units ...................................... 208
4142 Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates ...................................... 216
4143 Slump of Concrete ........................................................ 218
415l Autoclave Expansion of Portland Cement ......................................... 222
4172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete .............................................. 229
4173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Volumetric Method ............................ 235
4183 Sampling and Acceptance of Hydraulic Cement ...................................... 239
4185 Air Content of Hydraulic Cement Mortar .......................................... 247
4186 Heat of Hydration of Hydraulic Cement .......................................... 252
4187 Normal Consistency of Hydraulic Cement ......................................... 264
4188 Density of Hydraulic Cementitious Materials ....................................... 268
419l Time-of-Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat Needle ................................. 272
4192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in Laboratory .............................. 276
4204 Fineness of Cementitious Materials by Air Permeability Apparatus ......................... 290
4211 Selecting Proportions for Concrete Mixtures ........................................ 301
4215 Fundamental Transverse, Longitudinal, and Torsional Frequencies of Concrete Specimens .......... 330
4227 Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method) ............. 339
4231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Pressure Method .............................. 352
4232 Bleeding of Concrete ....................................................... 371
4233 Testing Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete ..................................... 377
4266 Time-of-Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Gilhnore Needles .............................. 382
4295 Petrographic Examination of Aggregate for Concrete .................................. 385
4305 Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement Pastes and Mortars of Plastic Consistency ............... 397
43ll Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture
in Portland Cement Concrete ................................................ 400
4341 Length Change of Drilled or Sawed Specimens of Cement Mortar and Concrete ................. 423
4359 Early Stiffening of Portland Cement (Mortar Method) ................................. 427
4403 Time-of-Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance ........................... 43 l
4426 Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Block ............................................. 437
4430 Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by No 325 (45-#m) Sieve ............................... 446
4441 Effectiveness of Mineral Admixtures in Preventing Excessive Expansion of Concrete Due
to Alkali-Aggregate Reaction ................................................ 450
4451 Early Stiffening of Portland Cement (Paste Method) .................................. 454
4457 Microscopial Determination of Air-Void Content and Parameters of Air-Void System
in Hardened Concrete ..................................................... " 458
4469 Static Modulus of Elasticity and Poisson's Ratio of Concrete in Compression ................... 476
4496 Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete specimens ............................. 486
vi
CONTENTS -- Continued
USBRNo. Page
4497 Testing Concrete Pipe, Sections, or Tile ................................................... 491
4500 Testing Asbestos-Cement Pipe .......................................................... 501
4512 Creep of Concrete in Compression .......................... ............................ 507
4535 Resistanceto Degradation of Large-Size, Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact
in Los Angeles Machine .............................................................. 524
4566 Total Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying ............................................. 527
4597 Pulse Velocity Through Concrete ........................................................ 529
4617 Capping Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ................................................... 535
4642 Density, Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete ........................................ 542
4666 Resistanceof Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing ....................................... 546
4671 Critical Dilation of Concrete Specimens Subjected to Freezing .................................. 556
4672 Scaling Resistanceof Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Deicing Chemicals ........................... 561
4684 Making, Accelerated Curing, and Testing of Concrete Compression Test Specimens .................. 564
4702 Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size ......................................... 573
4803 Penetration Resistanceof Hardened Concrete ............................................... 577
4805 Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete ................................................... 585
4823 Examination and Sampling of Hardened Concrete in Construction ............................... 589
4856 Petrographic Examination of Hardened Concrete ............................................ 597
4900 Pullout Strength of Hardened Concrete or Shotcrete .......................................... 616
4901 Drying Shrinkage of Hardened Concrete ................................................... 622
4902 Index of Aggregate Particle Shape and Texture .............................................. 631
4903 Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse and Fine Aggregates .............. . ..................... 638
4904 Percentage of Crushed Particles in Coarse and Fine Aggregates ................................. 649
4905 Consistency and Density of No-Slump Concrete With Vibratory Table ............................ 654
4906 Casting No-Slump Concrete in Cylinder Molds Using Vibratory Table ............................ 663
4907 Specific Heat of Aggregates, Concrete, and Other Materials .................................... 667
4908 Length Change of Hardened Concrete Exposed to Alkali Sulfates ................................ 680
4909 Thermal Diffusivity of Concrete ................................................... ; ..... 685
4910 Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Concrete ......................................... 695
4911 Temperature Rise of Concrete ........................................................... 701
4913 Water Permeability of Concrete ......................................................... 714
4914 Direct Tensile Strength, Static Modulus of Elasticity, and Poisson's Ratio of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens in Tension ........................................................ 726
4915 Direct Shear of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ............................................. 732
4916 Loss of Entrained Air With Various Fly Ashes (Foam Index) ................................... 738
4917 Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete ................................................. 741
4918 Cement Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete ................................................ 754
REFERENCEDDESIGNATIONS
vii
INTRODUCTION
The Ninth Edition of the Concrete Manual, unlike previous editions, has two parts. Part 1 will contain the text
on concrete technology. This volume, Part 2, is a compilation of concrete test procedures currently used by the Bureau
of Reclamation.
Part 2 includes many procedures that were not in the Eighth Edition Appendix. A few procedures in the Eighth
Edition are outdated; consequently, they were not reproduced in this edition. Some of the previous procedures were
combined into a single procedure in this edition; other procedures were modified. While some of the new procedures
are based upon previous procedures, attempt is not made to cross reference the procedures in Part 2 (9th ed.) with
those in the Eighth Edition (app.).
These test procedures are frequently referenced in Reclamation construction specifications and thereby become a part
of a construction contract. If the specifications reference test procedures in Concrete Manual, Eighth Edition, those
procedures in the Eighth Edition become part of the contract and no attempt should be made to use an updated
version in the Ninth Edition for that particular contract. If the specifications reference test procedures in Part 2,
Ninth Edition, those procedures become a part of the contract; procedures from previous editions do not apply.
Where specifications requirements are at variance with referenced test procedures, the specifications take precedence.
The format presenting the standard Bureau of Reclamation laboratory procedures follows a Modified Decimal Numbering
system and a sequence of presentation similar to that used by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
Each procedure has a four-digit number corresponding to the following categories:
For some categories, standards or methods are not yet developed, are under development, or are found in other
Reclamation publications such as the Earth Manual, Part 2.
Whenever possible, ASTM standards were consulted as a basis for the Bureau of Reclamation procedures; however,
these procedures are written in a more detailed step-by-step format. Therefore, this volume serves as a testing handbook
as well as a collection of standards. In Part 2, test procedures include examples of Reclamation's data forms and
worksheets to illustrate what data are required and where they are to be recorded. Checking data computations is
as important as performing the test; the test is not considered complete until the data form has been checked. Checkmarks
are not shown on the example data forms so that required data are illustrated neatly and legibly. Instructions for
checking, and an example of a typically checked data form, are presented in USBR 9300: Checking, Rounding, and
Reporting of Laboratory Data. This document should be reviewed and understood as it is considered part of every
test procedure.
A number of procedures for equipment calibration were developed for Reclamation's Earth Manual, Part 2. They
are noted in the contents as Referenced Designations. Regular calibration and inspection of equipment are as important
as adhering to proper testing procedures to ensure acceptable accuracyof results.
Currently, many laboratory tests are performed using computer equipment for running the test, collecting data, and
computing and presenting results. In Part 2, the test procedures provide the necessary information for handwritten
recording of data and for computing results. Regardless of the methods used, the test procedure requirements are
the same. Computerized operations must conform to the test requirements and to the specified accuracies. It is essential
that engineers and technicians using computerized operations completely understand the handwritten operations so
that the accuracy of results can be confirmed.
Occasionally, references are made to proprietary materials or products. Such references are for clarity only, and must
not he construed as an endorsement. The Bureau of Reclamation does not and cannot endorse proprietary products
or processesof manufacturers or the services of commercial firms for advertising, publicity, sales, or other purposes.
Each test procedure has a fixed USBR procedure number followed by the year of acceptance or the year of last
revision. Revisions will be issued, as required, and the user must ascertain that the latest revision is being used.
Bureau of Reclamation organizational units are noted in the introduction of each test procedure and within the text
of others. Recent organizational changes make those references obsolete; all references to the Concrete and Structural
Branch should be to the Materials EngineeringBranch.
After each test procedure was written, it was checked, validated whenever practical, and extensively reviewed. However,
because the procedures are presented in a new format covering both new procedures and revisions to existing procedures,
errors and omissions may exist. User comments and suggestionsfor improvement are invited and should be directed to:
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
RESEARCH AND LABORATORY SERVICES DIVISION
MATERIALS ENGINEERING BRANCH D=3730
PO BOX 25007
DENVER CO 80225-0007
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 1104-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 1104; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: E4-83a.
2.1 ASTM Standards: NOTE 3.-The term "error" shall be used with numerical values.
E 4 Standard Practices for Load Verification of Testing For example, "At a load of 30,000 lbf (133.4 kN), the error
Machines of the testing machine was +15 lbf (+0.07 kN)."
E 74 Standard Methods of Calibration of Force-Measuring
Instruments for Verifying the Load Indication of Testing 3.5 Percent Error.-For a testing machine, the percent
Machines2 error is the ratio, expressed as a percent, of the error to
correct value of applied load.
3. Terminology 3.5.1 The test load, as indicated by testing machine,
and applied load, as computed from readings of verification
3.1 Testing Machine.-A mechanical, load-measuring device, shall be recorded at each test point. The error and
device for applying a load (force) to a specimen. percent error shall be calculated from these loads as follows:
3.2 Load.-In the case of testing machines, a force
measured in units such as pound-force, kilogram-force, or E= A - B (1)
newtons (note 1).
A-B
NOTE 1.-A pound-force is that force when acting on a 1- Ep -- B (100) (2)
pound mass will give to that mass an acceleration of 32.1740
ft/s2 (9.80665 m/s2). Similarly, a newton is that force when acting
on a 1-kilogram mass will give to that mass an acceleration of where:
1 m/s 2 (3.2808 ft/s2).
E = error, in pound force (newtons);
A = load indicatedby machine being verified, in
3.3 Accuracy.-The specified permissible variation from pound force (newtons);
correct value. A testing machine is said to be accurate if B = correct value of applied load as determined by
calibration device, in pound force (new-
tons); and
I Annual Book ofASTMStandards, vols. 03.0l, 04.02, 07.01, 08.03.
2 Annual Book ofASTMStandards, vol. 03.01. Ep = percent error.
USBR 1104
4. Calibration Devices
: ig u r ., 2 - ',,', ] ttcd t::,,r :,',,, i ,; J g i ]: tg 7,1111, (1,'11) , 11,3,2 (g]i 5,00C1-,00CI 2'5,00'-300Cl
7/11 1 ( 11 1' ',l I 3/1l ( 91 5,) 11CI',,0'OCI- 30,0CIO 5 0100 - "115, OOCII
is 'used urJ,der cae'{ul sL]pe[vi:sion b,7 oMy one persc:,n, a 5/8 (10) 11,,"2 (t3) 4Ch,,000-FJO,00Cl 20 C)00-30000
few dimes a year, 5 or 10' yes, Is between calibratiorJS may Tie, (22)' 3f4 (19) ll0Ci,,0iOO, 50 00el,
U:,.e satJisk>:tory. H,owe'ver,, wh, ere Hng is, in daH: use b v 11 -'11 ' 2: < 38i ) I (25 ]1 20iCl,, 000' 1 rJi 0 {11CI 0'
a variety of persm:,nd, yeatiy caliito[ti,ons are adviisalo.fle. "11-,3;/4; (414,5) '1-11/4 (32]1' 3O, Qi,,'0,00 1:5'CI 0'00
5,. Precautions,
5.] This
tes prc,,c:edure may invc, lve. l-az:ad,:us
mctteriaL, i, ]nl eqt.]J:pmet,, ,l-ld @Des riot ,L.:IIJ:JHI-*
i[_)pe]][[il[)ls:,
'C, address :I] s.Jety pr.b, lems as.s.o,:iared v,irh, its use. ]r
is m]e. respc,.nsJibJ!liity ,a,{ d-e aser t,:,. ce,,n, SLd, r a e,.d es:abilish
ap.prc:,F,.iace sa{e:y rJ,.t he?l{h, F:,,act:]ce:s. ac,.d determine
app]lJtcabil]ty ,:_{ re:gu, laoy ]h:nh:aic,.ns F:,i<:,r to ]s.e.
scla ]i,0,ading. A SL]:ffcJier:t capac:J[t} rJing will s,u, si:hs vise F[,gurL- G (ll]L>]tJ!r], Lt I:SI:II] machine iin o:)n:iires,sii::,v{,
7'.d; ] " Zl<,}'ua/ .Brr:,,\ qle'e'ak.-1-(,,:]rate dJit] co, unter- ther h:,vvered t:,, desired F:III)[['Jt ':)1 rectdJing;, W}:liCh, t. ius, es; F:icl.)leH[%
ch::ck:wJise, edge n, eare.st ,,]perac,,r :c, the rJgh,, until] o,:]r*tact [I- deternqi:Ling t]he ,caJibrati,r.
USBR 1104
Table 1. -Temperaturecorrection factors. divisions for a safety factor. This precaution is necessary
Temperature, Temperature Temperature, Temperature to prevent overloading the proving ring because of possible
oF correction C correction excessive error in load indicator of machine. It is possible
factor factor to anticipate where setting will be by using ring calibration
65.0 1.001260 15.0 1.002160 data and adding or subtracting ring zero. The micrometer
65.5 1.001185 15.5 1.002025 can then be moved ahead to minimize danger of bending
66.0 1.001110 16.0 1.001890 reed. Testing machines are occasionally hard to hold at
66.5 1.001035 16.5 1.001755
67.0 1.000960 17.0 1.001620
a particular setting; therefore, if setting is anticipated, the
67.5 1.000886 17.5 1.001485 time required to obtain reading will be lessened.
68.0 1.000810 18.0 1.001350 12.5.3 Zero the load indicator of the testing machine.
68.5 1.000735 18.5 1.001215 Then, after carefully centering ring on axis of machine,
69.0 --..-LOQ0660 19.0 1.001080
apply desired load slowly and have machine operator adjust
69.5 1.000585 19.5 1.000945
70.0 1.000510 20.0 1.000810 machine during the final part of loading to slowest speed
70.5 1.000435 20.5 1.000675 at which machine will continue to load. This may require
71.0. 1.000360 21.0 1.000540 some skillful manipulation by the operator, depending on
71.5 1.000285 21.5 1.000405 type of machine. When machine indicator is within 10
Z0 1.000210 22.0 1.000270
72.5 1.000135 22.5 1.000135 divisions of load to be read, have operator give a signal,
73.0 1.000060 23.0 1.000000 such as "ready." Set the vibrating reed in motion and turn
73.5 0.999985 23.5 0.999865 dial to the right until a light contact is established. Record
74.0 0.999910 24.0 0.999730 the deflection of proving ring at desired load, and then
74.5 0.999835 24.5 0.999595
give the operator an "OK" signal, at which time the
75.0 0.999760 25.0 0.999460
75.5 0.999685 25.5 0.999325 operator should load the machine to the next desired load.
76.0 0.999610 26.0 0.999190 This procedure shall continue for five consecutive loads
76.5 0.999535 26.5 0.999055 before returning to zero. After removing load, take and
77.0 0.999460 27.0 0.998920
record a no-load reading on proving ring. On large-capacity
77.5 0.999335 27.5 0.998785
78.0 0.999310 28.0 0.998650
rings, those with 200,000 lbf (89 kN) and higher capacities,
78.5 0.999235 28.5 0.998515 wait 30 to 60 seconds after removal of load to equalize
79.0 0.999160 29.0 0.998380 temperature effects.
79.5 0.999085 29.5 0.998245 12.5.4 Do not be concerned that the increasing
80.0 0.999010 30.0 0.998110
80.5 0.998935
testing machine load will lightly jam the reed and contact
81.0 0.998860 button together because proving ring is designed to be
81.5 0.998785 used in this manner. However, never attempt to free reed
82.0 0.998710 while it is jammed, either by pushing it aside or by turning
82.5 0.998635 the dial. Always slack off the machine load first, and then
83.0 0.998560
83.5 0.998485 back the dial off. If this precaution is observed, a jam serious
84.0 0.998410 enough to cause the reed to buckle quite noticeably will
84.5 0.998335 not damage the instrument.
85.0 0.998260 12.5.5 The average temperature for the two no-load
readings taken before and after each run of five incremental
readings is used for the temperature correction computation
12.5 Follow-the-LoadMethod.-The load on the elastic for each load level.
calibration device is followed until load reaches a nominal 12.5.6 The follow-the-load method is utilized for
graduation on load-readout scale of testing machine. Record verification by the CCRL (Cement and Concrete Reference
this load on the elastic calibration device. This method Laboratory) of the NIST, which periodically checks the
is for calibrating a testing machine in compression with Bureau of Reclamation's testing machines. The Bureau
a proving ring having a manually-operated vibrating reed. generally uses five incremental load values with the first
However, regardless of whether a testing machine, load one at about 10 to 20 percent of range capacity, the next
cell, hydraulic press, or other type of load-measuring system three at about every 10 to 20 percent after the first, and
is to be calibrated, the same general method should be the last one at maximum capacity, if the machine will
followed. allow it (note 8).
12.5.1 This method is probably the most accurate
method available, and is recommended for the minimally NOTE 8.-The factory representatives for the Satec machine
experienced operator. However, caution must be exercised use the maximum load capacity. This is not possible to do with
because the hydraulic oil in older testing machines, such all machines because many machines are very unstable at
as the Tinius-Olsen, will heat up with loading and unloading maximum load. Also, using the maximum load requires more
and will refuse to load beyond a certain point. accuracy in reading the proving ring; therefore, this method is
not recommended for the minimally experienced operator.
12.5.2 With head of machine adjusted to be nearly
in contact with boss pad, take a no-load reading on proving 12.5.7 After selecting the suitable test load incre-
ring and turn dial to a reading equal to capacity load ments, obtain zero readings for both machine and elastic
deflection plus the no-load reading. Allow about five extra device and apply loads slowly and smoothly during all
USBR 1104
98 .96
50 52
/ /
3.6
I 1
TEMPERATURE CORRECTION TABLE
I I 94 o
3.2
i FOR ALL PROVING RINGS " //// / 54.
075.4 : Ot. -- 0.00015 ("1"- 73.4)Df // /
2.8 --
DT. = 0t - K
/// /
o
2.4
J 880
///j /.o.
2.0
// //
Q:
1.6
CI
o
- 82o
CJ 1.2
to
0.8
78
0.4
0 74
0 I00 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1,000 UO0
RING DEFLECTION IN DIVISIONS (D.I,)
verification measurements. The technique for applying the and machine's load axis should be coincidental with load
loads is as previously discussed. After preloading proving axis of device setup. This is necessary so that a net moment
ring, a no-load or zero reading is taken and recorded. Ring is not applied to testing machine loading member.
is then stressed and a reading obtained for the preselected Multidevice setups are not recommended unless the use
load values until entire dial has been compassed, after which of a single calibration device is not practical.
load is released and another zero reading taken. The two
zero readings are averagedfor the correction computations. CALCULATION AND REPORT
The appropriate method for each calibration must be
decided through trial and error to fit particular machine 13. Basis of Verification
and existing conditions.
12.6 The calibration procedure must assure that use 13.1 The percent error for loads within loading iange
of the maximum load indicator, recorder, or other accessory of testing machine shall not exceed +1.0 percent (note
load devices does not cause testing machine errors to exceed 9).
acceptabletolerances of section 13.1.
12.7 Record indicated load of testing machine and NOTE 9.-The report on verification of a testing machine will
applied load from elastic calibration device (temperature state within what verified loading range machine may be used,
rather than reporting a blanket acceptance or rejection of machine.
corrected as necessary), in addition to the error and For machines that possess multiple-capacity ranges, the verified
percentage of error calculated from readings. loading range of each range must be stated.
12.8 Under certain conditions, multidevice setups may
be used in compression loading. All devices to be loaded 13.2 When establishing lower limit of a verified loading
in parallel should be the same height (shims may be used), range below 10 percent of capacity of range, repeated
USBR 1104
II I
35"
3.6
I1"
/
TEMPERATURE CORRECTION TABLE
3.2 FOR ALL PROVING RINGS
o, -ot-x
2.8 RING READING Of IS CORRECTED TO Or5 BY SUBTRACTING__
K IF "P IS ABOVE 23 C, AND BY ADDING K IF "1" IS BELOW 2Jq 32
I I I 14
cO
2.4
tr
2.0
1.6
1.2 /
o
0.8
0.4
0 23"
0 I00 200 300 400 500 600 700. 800 900 IJO00 /JO0
RING DEFLECTION IN DIVISIONS (D.f)
applicationsof load are required (see sec. 9.2). The algebraic indicating scale can only be estimated to 2 divisions, verified
difference between highest and lowest percent error shall loading range could not extend downward below load corres-
not exceed 1.0 (note 10). ponding to 200 divisions. On most machines, the smallest load
than can be measuredis somewhere between these two examples.
NOTE 10.-To establish lower limit of a verified loading range
at less than 10-percent capacity of that range, errors for the
series of five readings shall not only not exceed 1 percent; but 13.4 In no case shall verified loading range be stated
also, no two errors shall differ by more than 1.0 percent. For as including loads outside the range of loads applied during
example, if minimum error in this series is -1.0 percent, maximum verification test.
error cannot exceed 0.0 percent; if minimum error is -0.5 percent, 13.5 Testing machines may be more or less accurate
maximum error cannot exceed +0.5 percent; and if minimum than the allowable +1.0 percent error, which is the
error is 0.0 percent, maximum error cannot exceed +1.0 percent, verification basis in this procedure. Errors more than +1.0
etc. percent would not comply with this procedure The
13.3 In no case shall verified loading range be stated specifications may also require or allow a smaller or larger
as including loads below a value that is 100 timesthe error system.
smallest change of load than can readily be estimated on 13.6 Correccions.-The indicated load of a testing
load-indicating apparatus of testing machine (note 11). machine that exceeds the permissible variation shall not
be corrected either by calculation or by use of a calibration
NOTE 11.-In a testing machine that has graduations so diagram to obtain values within required permissible
.spaced that estimations can be made to 0.1 of a division, verified variation.
loading range could not extend downward to a load less than 13.7 Figures 8 and 9 show examples of manual and
that corresponding to 10 divisions. If graduations on load- computerized calculations.
10
USBR 1104
14. Time Interval Between Verifications Statement of how, by whom, and when calibration
of apparatus used in verifying testing machine was made.
14.1 It is recommended that tes'ting machines be
The ASTM E 74, class A value of loading range
verified annually, or more frequently if required. In no
for each calibration device.
case shall time interval between verifications exceed 18
Temperature of calibration device and a statement
months, except for machines used in a long-time test that
that computed loads have been temperature corrected
runs beyond this 18-month period. In such cases, machine
as necessary.
shall be verified after completion of test. Calibration of
Statement identifying load-indicating systems that
machines with minimal use could be extended by some
were verified (for testing machines having more than
period of time.
one type of indicating system).
14.2 Testing machines shall be verified immediately
Testing machine error and percent error for each
after repairs. This includes new or replacement parts or
load-indicating system at each loading point.
mechanical or electrical adjustments that may in any way
Verified loading range of each load-indicating system
affect operation of weighing system or values displayed.
of testing machine.
14.3 Verification is also required immediately after a
Statement that verification has been performed in
testing machine is relocated, and whenever there is a reason
accordance with this test procedure.
to doubt accuracy of indicated load, regardless of time
Names of calibration personnel and witnesses (if
interval since last verification.
required).
15. Accuracy Assurance Between Verifications 17. Maintenance
15.1 Some product-testing procedures may require 17.1 Testing machines require routine maintenance,
daily, weekly, or monthly spot checks to ascertain that a and should be checked every few months and before
testing machine is capable of producing accurateload values calibration for the following:
between machine verifications as specified in section 14. 17.1.1 Wiring.-Ensure that all wiring is in good
15.2 Elastic calibration devices must meet class A condition. Using dry air, blow the dust from electronic
requirements of ASTM E 74 for the load levels at which assembliesevery 6 months, where appropriate.
spot checks are made. 17.1.2 Lines.-Check all lines for leaks. Air in system
15.3 Make spot checks at about 20 and 80 percent of lines causes erratic readings, detected by pulsating or
a range, unless otherwise agreed upon or stipulated by jumping of load hand.
the Government. 17.1.3 Oil Reservoir.-Maintain the oil level 1 to 2
15.4 A testing machine error shall not exceed +1.0 inches (25 to 50 mm) from top of reservoir with ram
percent of spot check applied loads. Should errors be greater down (mandatory). Use extra heavy duty oil with a viscocity
than +1.0 percent at any of the spot check load levels, of 313 to 331 at 100 F (37.8 C). Currently, the Bureau
verify the testing machine immediately (see sec. 14.3). uses Kendall R+O AW68 hydraulic oil. Ensure that all
15.5 Maintain a record of spot check tests. Record shall openings in oil system are covered to keep foreign matter
include machine name, serial number, verification date, out of oil, and clean debris around hydraulic piston after
verification agency, and the minimum class A ASTM E each use. For machines equipped with an oil filter, change
74 value of calibrating device used to make the spot checks. filter every 6 months. Some machines are adaptable to
Also include name of individual making the spot checks. having a filtering system installed. Perform any lubrication
15.6 Testing machine shall be considered verified up required, where applicable. For additional information, call
to date of last successful spot check verification (sec. 15.4), the Bureau's Denver Office.
provided machine is verified in accordance with section 17.1.4 Level Condicion.-If loading cylinder is not
14 on a regular schedule. Otherwise, spot checks are not level, excessive wear may result or ram may stick and
permitted. permanently damage machine.
15.7 When spot checks are made, a clear, concise record 17.1.5 Load Pacer and Limit Switches.-The load
must be maintained. The record must also contain pacer should be adjusted to Bureau specifications. Limit
documentation of regular verification data and schedule. switches for ram travel and to prevent overload of low-
range dial should be adjusted to manufacturer's
16. Report
specifications.
17.1.6 Maximum Load Hand.-The friction disk
16.1 Figures 8 and 9 show typical reporting forms.
should be adjusted so that drag will not be encountered
The report should be a clear and complete record on each
on load hand.
verification of a testing machine, and shall include:
17.1.7 Shims.-Check shims of weighing capsule
Name of calibrating agency. quarterly, if applicable.
Date of verification. 17.1.8 ExerciseMachine.-No machine should sit idle
Testing machine description, serial number, and for too long-exercise occasionally (monthly).
location.
18. Precision and Bias
Method of verification used.
Serial number and manufacturer of all devices used 18.1 The precision and bias for this procedure are not
for verification. known.
11
USBR 1104
.<
<
! m m .....
N
h
'
<
$
Z
.
,.
m
1 <
12
USBR 1104
Machine data:
Location: PHOENIX, AZ
Capacity: 300,000 lbf Manufacturer: TiN[US-OLSEN
Range: 300,0 lbf Serial No.: T-70-269-i
Uerified Range: 0,900 to 390,000 lbf
Cal:brated by: MITCHELL Calib.Dale: 6,"I0/87
OVERALL AVERAGES
13
USBR 1104
APPENDIX
Simulated Dam:
(1) Average proving ring no-load micrometer reading:
14
@ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
USBR 3100-92
SAMPLING OF WATER
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 3100; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: D 3370-82.
15
USBR 3100
16
USBR 31 O0
17
USBR 3100
16.1.3 Closures for the sample containers shall be or sulfur-free rubber tube extension of sample line, into
glass stoppers that have been thoroughly washed, or plastic sampling bottle so that sample line touches the bottom.
or metal caps with suitable liners. Polytetrafluorethylene Allow a volume of water equal to at least 10 times the
(Teflon) or aluminum foil are suitable only as cap liners volume of sample container to flow into and overflow from
for samples to be analyzed for organic constituents. the container before sample is taken.
16.1.4 Wash sample containers with soap or
biodegradable detergent, if required. Clean with a hot NOFE 3.-If sample is to be tested for constituents that may
cleaning solution. Rinse bottles that have contained samples be absorbed on walls of sample container, do not rinse container
with chromate or heavy metals with dilute HNO3 before and do not allow container to overflow during sample collection.
Oil, grease, and polychlorinated biphenyls are typical constituents
a final thorough rinsing with water. Dry by draining.
in this category.
16.2 For most bacteriological samples, provide wide-
mouth sample bottles of at least 10 fluid ounce (300 mL) 17.1.3.1 If a preservative or additive has been
capacity; however, 4.2-fluid ounce (125-mL) bottles are the added to sample container, allow sample to free fall into
most common size for collecting drinking water samples. container but do not allow container to overflow.
These bottles may be of borosilicate glass or other material 17.1.4 If contact with air would cause a change in
resistant to the solvent action of water. Metal or plastic, the concentration or in the characteristics of a constituent
wide-mouth, screw caps may be used on the sample bottles. to be determined, secure sample without contact with air
Bottles, caps, and their liners must be capable of and completely fill container.
withstanding sterilization temperatures, must not produce 17.1.5 For sampling unconfined water at any specific
any compounds by volatilization during sterilizing, and depth, such as in ponds, lagoons, or reservoirs, during which
must not impart any toxic or bacteriostatic compounds contact with air or agitation of water would cause a change
to water sample. in concentration or characteristics of a constituent to be
16.2.1 Dedicate appropriate sample bottles for determined, use a sampling apparatus so constructed that
microbiological use. Wash bottles with a hot detergent solution at depth to be sampled flows through a tube to
water and brush, and rinse well with type III reagent water. bottom of container, and that a volume of sample equal
Bottles for microbiological samples should not be routinely to 4 to 10 times the volume of receiving container passes
cleaned with the dichromate solution. If a dichromate or through the container. Figure 1 shows three types of
acid cleaning is necessary, rinse well and after final rinse, sampling apparatus that will permit collection of sample
check pH value to ensure that toxic acids or chromate at desired depth, or collection of an integrated sample
are not present. containing water from all points in a vertical section.
16.2.2 Add Na2S2Oa in an amount sufficient to 17.1.6 When samples are to be shipped, do not
provide a concentration of about 100 mg/L in sample if completely fill bottles to allow for expansion when bottles
samples to be taken contain residual chlorine. are subjected to a change in temperature. An air space
16.2.3 Use glass-stoppered or screw-capped bottles
and place a strip of aluminum foil between stopper and
its seat. Stopper and cover bottle tops and necks with iiLessenger If Support line
aluminum foil dust covers to protect from contamination.
Loosen screw caps slightly to prevent possible rupture of ine hit Gas vacuum
container during sterilization. Sterilize bottles in a hot- rip i I pressure supply
air oven at a minimum of 338 F (170 C) for at least (.Line
1 hour, or autoclave at 250 F (121 C) for 15 minutes. /A hook
opper I I/Stainless steel
16.3 When organic constituents are to be determined,
v
head I1 # bdy
refer to ASTM D 3694.
18
USBR 3100
of about 10 percent usually is sufficient for this purpose; 17.1.7.3 Because concentrations of constituents
however, this does not protect bottles from cracking or vary at different water levels, or ratings, and are influenced
breaking due to freezing. This precaution precludes by amount of water, take all samples when water is at
shipping samples for analysis of constituents as noted in normal operating level unless there is a specific reason
section 17.1.4. for sampling under other conditions. For comparative
17.1.6.1 An alternative method that provides testing under abnormal conditions, take samples at similar
room for expansion and eliminates contact with air is to water levels or ratings to avoid dilution or concentration
use a flexible-plastic sample bottle. Fill bottle completely, due to changes in amount of water in system.
compress it to exclude about 10 percent of the contents, 17.2 Microbiological Samples:
and replace cap before pressure is released. However, plastic 17.2.1 When taking a sample from a sample line
containers are not suitable for samples for analysis of or tap, allow water to run for at least 5 minutes or long
organic constituents. enough to flush, with 6 to 10 times the line's volume,
17.1.7 When sampling water that is above the the entire part of the system that has been stagnant for
ambient temperature, cool water using a cooling coil prior 2 hours or more.
to sampling. Before taking sample, establish a continuous 17.2.2. Select a sterile sample bottle containing
flow of not less than 500 mL/min, and cooled to less than Na2S203 if water being sampled contains residual chlorine,
98.6 F (37.0 C). If sample is to be collected for special has been chlorinated, or contains any free or combined
constituents, the sampling method for the specific test available oxidizing agent intended to sterilize the water.
should be used. Calculate recommended minimum purging If such sterilizing agents are not present, the thiosulfate
times for different sizes of sampling lines as follows: may be omitted. In cases where thiosulfate interferes with
subsequent examination, such as in the examination for
D 2
t= (3-) (1) sulfate-reducing bacteria, omit using thiosulfate in sample
bottle even if sterilizing agents are present. In this case,
if such sterilizing agents are present, examination must
where: be performed as soon as possible.
c = time in seconds, and
17.2.3 Remove stopper from sample bottle by
D = inside diameter of sampling line in inches
grasping the dust cover of the stopper so as not to
(millimeters).
contaminate stopper by touching it; do not lay it down.
Hold bottle at the bottom to avoid touching the neck. Do
Approximate purging times for sample lines up to
not rinse bottle with sample. Quickly hold bottle under
1 inch (25 ram) in diameter are shown in table 1.
flowing sample water until about three-fourths full to
17.1.7.1 Before taking sample, rinse sample
permit mixing by shaking prior to testing. Replacestopper
container at least three times by filling it to one-fourth
and promptly crimp dust cover in place over neck of bottle.
its capacity with water to be sampled, shaking, and then
Take care that stopper and bottle neck are not touched
emptying.
during this operation and that no dust blows into bottle.
17.1.7.2 Collect water sample by upward displace-
17.3 Sampling Radioactive Water:
ment through a tube extending to bottom of container.
17.3.1 Because of the potential hazards related to
Allow container to overflow at least five times its volume,
working with water containing radioactive nuclides, special
and then close container with a stopper previously rinsed
handling of radioactive samples may be required.
with sample water. If analysis cannot be made immediately,
Information on radiological hazards and recommendations
containers should be tightly stoppered to prevent
or;radiation protection have been published by the National
atmospheric contamination.
Committee on Radiation Protection [3,4] 4 Recommenda-
tions of the Federal Radiation Council on radiation
Table l. - Approximate purging times for sampling lines, l protection guides have been adopted by all Federal agencies
by executive order [5]. Existing standards for protection
Purging time
against radiation are set forth in the Code of Federal
Inside diameter in seconds
Pipe size of pipe per foot Regulations [4]. Special methods and precautionary
inch (mm) inch (mm) (per meter) measures for handling radioactive samples are described
of sampling in the literature [6, 7].
line 17.3.2 When sampling process waters where
radioactivity levers may be high, such as nuclear reactor
1/8 (3.2) 0.269 (6.8) 5 (16.4) cooling waters, follow applicable health-physics regula-
1/4 (6.4) 0.364 (9.2) 10 (32.8) tions. In such cases, the use of suitable protective clothing
3/8 (9.5) 0.493 (12.5) 15 (49.2)
may be required. Personnel-monitoring devices may be
1/2 (12.7) 0.622 (15.8) 25 (82.0)
3/4 (19.0) 0.824 (20.9) 40 (131.2) necessary when external radiation levels present a potential
1 (25.4) 1.049 (26.6) 60 (196.9) hazard. If level of radioactivity in sampling area is
19
USBR 3100
sufficiently high to introduce a radiation hazard, shield- 19. Time Interval Between Collection and
ing for sample lines, coolers, and collection devices may Analysis of Samples
be required to minimize exposure. Exercise precautionary
measures to prevent contamination and spread of 19.1 In general, allow as short a time as possible
radioactivity by spillage of samples or by leakage or between collection of a sample and its analysis. Under some
breakage of sampling lines, valves, or containers. In conditions, analysis in the field is necessary to secure reliable
addition, take precautions to prevent release of gaseous results. The actual time interval that may be allowed
or air-borne radioactive substances to minimize exposure between the collection and analysis of a sample varies with
to personnel. the type of examination to be conducted, character of
17.3.3 If sample containers are to be shipped, shield sample, and the time interval allowable for applying
and pack to comply with regulations for shipping corrective treatment. Specify the time interval between
radioactive materials [8]. collection and analysis of a sample on the examination
17.3.4 Procedures for collecting radioactive samples report.
should, in general, followthose described in section 17.1. 19.2 Make the determination of dissolved gases, such
17.3.5 When water sampled is under pressure and as oxygen, hydrogen sulfide, and carbon dioxide, at the
contains gaseous radioactive substances, the container used source except when such constituents may be fixed and
should be designed to prevent any disproportionate loss determined later as specified in the specific test methods.
of gases during sampling. 19.3 When sampling for radioactivity determinations,
17.3.6 Employ suitable measures to minimize note the exact time of sample collection. If short-lived
adsorptive losses of radioactivity if this has not already activity is of interest, analysis should be made as soon
been accomplished during preparation of sample container. as practical to minimize loss of activity by radioactive decay.
When sampling streams or other natural waters, easily If only long-lived activity is of interest, measurement of
adsorbable materials may already be on surfaces of whatever radioactivity can often be simplified by allowing sufficient
particulate matter is present. In such cases, treatment to time before analysis for the decay of the short-lived
prevent adsorption may result in the undesirable transfer radionuclides.
of radionuclides from the suspended to dissolved phase.
20. Labeling and Transportation of Samples
18. Preservation of Samples
20.1 Provide space for the followinginformation on
an etched area of the sample bottle, a gummed label, or
18.1 Add chemical preservatives to samples that are a cardboard or linen tag securely affixed to container:
to be used for chemical or physical examination only as
specified in specific test methods. Quick freezing has been Sample number.
found to be beneficial in preserving some organic Date and time of sampling.
constituents. Note any preservatives added to sample on Source of sample.
bottle label. Point of sampling (designated in sufficient detail
18.2 Refrigerate or ice samples collected for biological to enable anyone to collect a second sample from
examination immediately after collection. Hold or transport identical spot that first sample was taken).
samples at a temperature of not more than 39.2 o F (4.0 o C). Temperature and rate of flow of fluid in equipment
18.2.1 Do not hold samples for microbiological from which sample was taken.
analyses for more than 6 hours from time of collection Temperature of sample.
to analysis. Consider performing a field examination if Type and quantity of preservative added.
this time limit cannot be met. Results of field tests made on sample.
18.2.2 Analyze drinking water samples on the same Signature of sampler.
day they are delivered to laboratory. A specific exception
is made for samples mailed or sent by public transportation 20.1.1 Figure 2 shows a suggested data form.
to control laboratories. These samples are permitted to 20.2 Fix stoppers closing the sample containers in place
be held up to 30 hours. by wire, tape, or cord to prevent leakage in transit. Sample
18.2.3 If the conditions in sections 18.2.1 and 18.2.2 container shall be of such size that when filled with desired
cannot be met, note the actual conditions on the amount of sample, a space approximately equivalent to
examination report. 10 percent of volumetric capacity of container will be
18.3 Chemical treatment of radioactive samples to available for expansion of the liquid. Exceptions to this
prevent biological or algal growth is not recommended are for those constituents noted in section 17.1.4, in which
and should be avoided unless essential. When necessary, case the method of section 17.1.6.1 may be used.
select reagents used to avoid chemical interaction with 20.3 The sample shipping container shall be a case
radioactive species in sample. having a separate compartment for each sample. Line the
18.4 Chemical treatment to retain radioactive species compartment around each sample with corrugated paper,
in solution may be used but care is needed in treatment felt, or similar material; or hold sample in place with spring
selection, see section 7 of ASTM D 3648. clips, foamed plastic, or similar material. Use insulated
20
USBR 3100
containers for quick-frozen samples, which are usually 24. Point of Sampling
shipped with solid carbon dioxide to maintain sample in
frozen condition. 24.1 See section 15.
20.4 Print addresses of shipper and receiver plainly
on outer container, or attach firmly thereon by cards or 25. Sample Handling
labels. Attach warning and descriptive labels to outer
container, such as "Fragile," "Liquid," "Glass," "Handle 25.1 For information on sample handling, refer to the
With Care," "This Side Up," etc., when applicable. In cold appropriate sections as follows:
weather, attach the label "Keep From Freezing" to outer Section
container, except for those samples which are intentionally
frozen. Volume of Sample 14
Sample Containers 16
Preservation of Samples 18
METHOD B-COMPOSITE SAMPLES Time Interval Between Collection
and Analysis of Samples 19
Labeling and Transportation of
21. Scope Samples 20
21
USBR 3100
delivery system shall flow fast enough to keep heavier 34. Calculations
particles in suspension, and the system volume shall be
large enough to prevent undesirable filter action through 34.1 This procedure requires no specific worksheet for
restrictions. calculations. The Bureau's chemistry laboratory in Denver
30.2 The sampling system should be sized to maintain uses a computer program that calculates the test data,
a Reynolds number of about 4000 to assure turbulent flow. performs an error analysis on the results, and then prints
out a final report. This program can be used by project
31. Point of Sampling offices if the project laboratory has access to a Hewlett-
Packard HP-86.
34.2 Figures 3 and 4 consist of two computer print-
31.1 Selection of sampling points should conform to outs. Figure 3 provides backup information in the form
the applicable paragraphs of section 15. of raw data, and figure 4 provides a record of the percent
of error in the tests performed.
32. Taking the Sample
35. Report
32.1 Because pumps employing suction principles
35.1 This procedure requires no specific reporting
disturb the gas-liquid balance, use a submersible-type pump
form. Figures 5, 6, and 7 consist of three computer print-
for pumping samples from open bodies of water whenever
outs for reference in reporting the results of the various
measurements to be made concern dissolved gases, such
tests. Figure 5 is a printout of sample background data,
as oxygen or carbon dioxide. Pumps, screens, valves, and
figure 6 shows the results of the individual tests performed,
piping must be selected of corrosion-resistant material to
and figure 7 is a printout of the stiff diagram (note 4).
prevent sample from being contaminated by corrosion
products and to prevent undue maintenance. NOTE 4.-The stiff diagram has no specific significance other
32.2 The debris screens used around the pump intake than as a check on at least two of the compounds shown on
shall be of sufficient size to preclude a significant pressure figure 6.
drop developing across screens in the event of partial
clogging. 36. Precision and Bias
32.3 Manufacturers of continual analyzers and
36.1 The precision and bias for this procedure have
samplers will generally specify minimum volume and
not been established.
pressure requirements for proper operation. Sample pump
selection must be based on these minimums and on the 37. References
configuration of the piping.
32.4 The piping system between pump and sample [1] Rosen,Joseph, Reagent Chemicals andStandards, 3rd
container shall be designed such that pump is operating ed., Van Nostrand Co. Inc., New York, NY, 1955.
against lowest practical head.
32.5 Piping system shall be constructed with a [2 ] United States Pharmacopeiaand National Formulary
continual rise in elevation from pump to point of delivery XV,, 20th ed., Mack Publishing Co., 20th and Northampton
without reverse bends where sediment and algae could Sts., Easton, PA, 18042, 1980.
accumulate. To prevent freezing in outdoor installations,
remove check valve from pump so that piping will drain [3] "Basic Radiation Protection Criteria," NRCP Report
in event of power failure. No. 39,Jan. 15, 1971.
33.1 In a continually-operating sampling system, the [5] FederalRegister, p. 4402, May 18, 1960.
time interval between system intake and point of sample
[6] Friedlander, G., J. W. Kennedy, and J. M. Miller,
delivery is a function of flow rate of water and dimensions
Nuclear andRadiochemistry, 2nd ed.,John Wiley and Sons,
of intervening pipe. Usually, system dimensions make this
Inc., New York, NY, 1964.
time interval so short that its effect on accuracy of
determination is negligible. Wherever special precautions [7j Overman, R. T., and H. M. Clark, Radioisotope
should be observed, they will be described in particular
Techniques, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York, NY,
method covering that analysis. 1960.
33.2 The time response of the system describes its
ability to respond to transient conditions in the water [8] Hazardous Material Regulations of the D.O.T., Title
source. Time response is defined as time required for system 49, Parts 170-190, current edition.
to reach 63.2 percent of total change between state of initial
and final equilibrium in response to a step change [9] Price, W. J., Nuclear Radiation Detection, 2nd ed.,
introduced at input to system. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York, NY, 1966.
22
USBR 3100
SAMPLING OF WATER
* Location: Point of sampling (designated in sufficient detail so that a second sample could be collected, if necessary, from
identical point of first sample): #,,o '., d'" ,$' " ('.,' a*'/." #.'** ,. ,, / .r ',= ,'/.'ca"..' * )
**WQ = Water quality (untreated); includes pH, conductivity, suspended solids, dissolved solids at 221 F (105 C), sum
of cations and anions, calcium, magnesium, sodium, potassium, carbonate, bicarbonate, sulfate, and chloride; 1.06 quarts (1 L)
required.
TMf = Trace metals, filtered (dissolved), 0.5 mL of HNOs added; 0.5 quart (500 mL) required.
TM = Trace metals, unfiltered (total metals), 0.5 mL of HNOa added; 0.5 quart (500 mL) required.
23
USBR 3100
Ca AND Mg DATA:
SEQ. # SAMPLE Cl ALIQ l)IC ml AgN03 S04 ALIQ DIL GROSS WT TARE WT
24
USBR 3100
E-9071 -0.07
25
USBR 3100
pH ................................................. 7.60E+00
Conductivity ....................................... 5.42E+02 microsiemens @ 25
Suspended solids ................................... 2.03E+01 mg/L
Dissolved solids-105C .............................. 3.54E+02 mg/L
Sum oF cations+anions .............................. 4.19E+02 mg/L
Co
E-9071
8-14-85
EC = 542/J.S
.J .J TDS =554 mg/L
O0
Z cr
TSS= 20mg/L
o : , i i i i ,
Sum = 419mg/L
I---
SO 4
26
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 3105; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: D 1293-78.
27
USBR 3105
where double vertical lines represent a liquid junction when of the metric system including units, symbols, and
electrodes are immersed in the solution in the diagrammed conversion factors, see ASTM E 380.
position, and the electromotive force E8 obtained when
electrodes are immersed in a reference buffer solution. For 6. Purity of Reagents
use in the operational definition given below, the sign
of the measured potential difference indicated by many 6.1 Reagent grade chemicals shall be used in all tests,
pH meters must be reversed because the electrode except as specifically noted for preparation of reference
configuration used with these meters is: buffer solutions. Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended
that all reagents shall conform to the specifications of the
reference electrode [[ solution ]glass electrode Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American
Chemical Society, where such specifications are available
With assigned pH of reference buffer designated as pHs, [4]. For suggestions on testing of reagents not listed in
and E and E. expressed in volts: [4], see [5,6]. Other grades may be used, provided it is
ascertained that reagent is of sufficiently high purity to
pH = pH + (E-E.)F
2.3026 RT (1) permit its use without lessening accuracy of determination.
6.2 Unless otherwise indicated, references to water
where:
shall be understood to mean reagent water conforming
F = Faraday constant to ASTM D 1193, Type I. The water used for reference
R = gas constant buffer solutions shall be prepared as specified for each
T = absolute temperature, 5/9 (F + 459.67) or C standard buffer solution. Precautions shall be taken to
+ 273.15 prevent contamination of water with traces of material
used for protection against carbon dioxide. The pH of the
Values of the factor F/(2.3026 RT) at different carbon dioxide-free water shall be between 6.5 and 7.5
temperatures are given in table 1. See section Xl.1 of at 77 F (25 C).
appendix X1 for additional comment on the definition
of pH. 7. Precautions
Table 1. - Values of factor in equation (1) at different 7.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous
temperatures.1 materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim
to address all of the safety problems associated with its
Temperature F use. It is the responsibility of the user to consult and
F (C) 2.3026 RT, vlts-1
establish appropriate safety and health practices, and to
32 (0) 18.4512 determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior
41 (5) 18.1195 to use.
50 (10) 17.7996
59 (15) 17.4907 8. Sampling
68 (20) 17.1924
77 (25) 16.9041 8.1 Collect sample in accordance with USBR 3100.
86 (30) 16.6253
95 (35) 16.3555 METHOD A-PRECISE LABORATORY
104 (40) 16.0944
MEASUREMENT OF pH
113 (45) 15.8414
122 (50) 15.5963
131 (55) 15.3587 9. Application
140 (60) 15.1282
149 (65) 14.9045 9.1 Method A covers the precise measurement of pH
158 (70) 14.6873 in water under strictly controlled laboratory conditions.
167 (75) 14.4764
176 (80) 14.2714 10. Interferences
185 (85) 14.0722
194 (90) 13.8784
203 (95) 13.6899 10.1 The glass electrode reliably measures pH in nearly
all aqueous solutions and is not usually subject to solution
Values were calculated using a precise value of interference from color, turbidity, colloidal matter, oxidants,
logarithmic conversion factor (2.302585) and values or reductants.
of the fundamental constants:
F = 96 487.0 C/eq 10.2 The true pH of an aqueous solution or extract
R = 8.31433J/(K.mol) is affectedby temperature. The electromotive force between
T = 5/9 (F + 459.67) or C + 273.15 the glass and reference electrode is a function of
temperature as well as pH. The temperature effect can
5.2 For definitions of other terms used in this be compensated for automatically in many instruments,
procedure, refer to ASTM D 1129. For an explanation " or can be manually compensated for in most other
28
USBR 3105
instruments. The temperature compensation corrects for Measurementsat pH values greater than 10.0 shall be made
the effect of water temperature on the instrument, including with a high-alkalinity type electrode to lessen the possibility
electrodes, but does not correct for temperature effects on of sodium ion errors. Proper care of the electrode is essential
chemical system being monitored. The compensation also when not in use (note 2).
does not adjustthe measured pH to a common temperature;
therefore, the temperature should be reported for each NOTE 2.-New glass electrodes and those that have been stored
pH measurement. Temperature effects are discussed further dry shall be conditioned and maintained as recommended by
in section X1.2 of appendix X1. manufacturer. It is necessary to keep immersible ends of electrodes
10.3 The pH response of most glass electrodes is in water between measurements. For prolonged storage, glass
electrodes may be allowed to become dry, but the junction and
imperfect at both ends of the pH scale. The indicated pH
filling openings of reference electrodes should be capped to
value of highly alkaline solutions, as measured with the decrease evaporation. Ideally, glass electrodes should be stored
glass electrode, will be too low. This interference can be as recommended by manufacturer, and reference electrodes should
minimized by selection of the proper glass electrode for be stored in a saturated potassium chloride solution.
measurements in highly alkaline solutions.
10.4 The indicated pH value of strong aqueous 11.3 Reference Electrode.-A calomel, silver-silver
solutions of salts and strong acids having a pH less than chloride or other reference electrode of constant potential
1, will often be higher than the true pH value. This is shall be used. There are two basic types of reference
termed negative error, and the pH indicated is somewhat electrodes, the flowingand nonflowing liquid junction-type
greater than the true pH. electrodes. The flowing,liquid junction-typeunit shall be
10.5 A few substances sometimes dispersed in water used for Method A determinations; this unit ensures that
appear to poison the glass electrode. A discussion on this a fresh liquid junctionis formed for each measurement.
subject is given in section Xl.4 of appendix Xl. The internal elements of the reference and glass electrodes
should be matched. If a saturated calomel electrode is used,
11. Apparatus some potassium chloride crystals shall be contained in the
saturated potassium chloride solution. If the reference
11.1 Laboratory pH Meter.-Table 2 shows the most electrode is of the flowing junction type, design of the
important characteristics of four typical pH meters electrode shall permit a fresh liquid junctionto be formed
commercially available. Each type of meter, with its between the solution of potassium chloride and the buffer
associated glass and reference electrodes, is permissible. standard or tested water for each measurement, and shall
The choice depends on desired precisionof measurement. allow traces of the solution to be washed fromouter surfaces
11.2 Glass Electrode.-The pH response of the glass of electrodes. To ensure the desired slow outward flow
electrode shall conform to requirements of sections 13.1 of reference electrode solution, solution pressure inside the
through 13.5. If glass electrode is used outside electrode liquid junction should be kept somewhat in excess of that
compartment of meter, the lead wire shall be shielded. outside the junction. In nonpressurized applications, this
Range:
Normal 0-14 0-14 0-14 0-14.000
Expanded - 2 pH units 1.4 pH units -
Temperature compensation:
Manual or automatic Yes Yes Yes Yes
Range:
F 32-212 32-212 32-212 32-212
C 0-100 0-100 0-100 0-100
Smallest graduation:
F 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6
C 2 2 2 2
29
USBR 3105
requirement can be met by maintaining the inside solution solutions with a pH less than 9.5 in bottles of chemically
level higher than the outside water level. If the reference resistant glass. Keep calcium hydroxide solutions in plastic
electrode is of the nonflowing junction type, these outward bottles that are nonporous to air (if obtainable). Keep all
flow and pressurization considerations do not apply. The reference buffer solutions well stoppered and replace them
reference electrode and junction shall perform satisfactorily at a shelf age of 3 months, or sooner if a visible change
as required in the standardizing procedure described in is observed.
sections 13.1 through 13.5. Proper care of the reference 12.1.1 Borax Reference Buffer Solution.-This
electrode is essential when it is not in use. Further discussion solution has a pH8 of 9.18 at 77 F (25 C), and is prepared
on reference electrodes is given in section X1.3 of appendix by dissolving 3.80 grams of sodium tetraborate decahydrate,
X1. Na2B4OT"10H20, in water and diluting to 1 liter.
11.4 Temperature Compensator.-The thermo- 12.1.2 Calcium HydroxideReference Buffer Solu-
compensator is a temperature-sensitive resistance element tion.-Thissolution has a pH, of 12.45 at 77 F (25 C),
immersed in the water sample with the electrodes. The and is prepared with pure calcium hydroxide, Ca(OH)2,
thermocompensator automatically corrects for change of from well-washed calcium carbonate, CaCOs, of low-alkali
slope of glass electrode (with cfiange of temperature), but grade by slowly heating carbonate in a platinum dish at
does not correct for actual changes in the pH of the water 1832 F (1000 C) and calcining for at least 45 minutes
sample with temperature. The automatic thermocompen- at that temperature. After cooling, stir the calcined product
sator is not required if the water temperature is essentially slowly into water, heat resultant suspension to boiling,
constant and the analyst chooses to use the manual cool, and then filter through a funnel having a fritted-
temperature compensation feature of the pH meter. glass disk of medium porosity. Collect the solid from filter,
11.5 Stirrer and Stir Bar.-The stirrer shall be a small dry in an oven at 230 F (110 C), and then crush to
laboratory-type mechanical stirrer having a glass agitator, a uniform and fine granular state. Vigorously shake a
or with a magnetic stirring unit having an inert plastic- considerable excess (about 3 g/L) of the fine granular
coated impeller. The stir bar may come in different sizes. product with water at 77 F (25 C) in a stoppered plastic
12. Reagents bottle that is essentially nonporous to gases. Allow gross
excess of solid to settle, and then filter the solution with
12.1 Reference Buffer Solucion.-The pH values of the suction through a fritted-glassfunnel of medium porosity.
reference buffer solutions measured at several temperatures The filtrate is the reference buffer solution. Contamination
are listed in table 3. Table 4 identifies each buffer salt of the solution with atmospheric carbon dioxide renders
by its NIST (National Institute of Standards and it turbid and indicates need for replacement.
Technology) number and provides a recommended drying 12.1.3 Phosphate Reference Buffer Solution.-This
procedure prior to use. Keep the five reference buffer solution has a pH of 6.86 at 77 o F (25 o C), and is prepared
Solution
Sodium
Temperature Tetroxalate Tartrate Phthalate Phosphate Borax bicarbonate- Calcium
F (oc) sodium hydroxide
carbonate
30
USBR 3103
Table 4. - National Institute of Standards and Technology materials for reference buffer solutions.
N1ST Standard
sample Buffer salO Drying procedure
designation
i The buffer salts listed can be purchased from Office of Standard Reference Materials,National Institute
of Standards and Technology, Washington, DC 20234.
31
USBR 3105
always be kept higher than that of solution being measured. having a glass agitator, or with a magnetic stirring unit
To reduce effects of thermal lag, keep temperature of having an inert plastic-covered impeller. If measurement
electrodes, reference buffer solutions, and wash water as is made outside electrode compartment of pH meter, avoid
close to that of water sample as possible. use of electric motors for operation of stirring equipment
13.3 Wash electrodes and sample cup three times with that generate an electrical signal or heat the water sample
water. Place second reference buffer solution in sample because of possible interference with pH measurement.
cup, and measure pH by reading dial or by adjustingbalance Operate stirrer during period of pH measurement at a
point, depending on type of pH meter. Adjust slope control rate to prevent splashing and to avoid loss or gain of acid
until reading corresponds to the temperature corrected or basic gases by interchange with the atmosphere. When
value of second reference buffer solution. Do not change necessary, stir briskly enough to intermix the phases of
setting of asymmetry knob in either case. Use additional a nonhomogeneous water sample. Stop stirrer during
portions of second reference buffer solution, as before, until period of measurement if streaming potentials are noted.
two successive readings do not differ by more than 0.02 Insert electrodes and determine a preliminary pH value.
pH unit. The assembly shall be judged to be operating Since this value may drift somewhat, it should be considered
satisfactorily if pH reading obtained from second reference an estimated value. Measure successive portions of water
buffer solution agrees with its assignedpHs value within sample until readings on two successive portions differ
0.05 unit for Type I meters or within 0.03 for Type II, by no more than 0.03 pH unit, and show drifts of less
III, or IV meters (table 2). than 0.02 unit in 1 minute. Two or three portions will
13.4 If anticipated pH of test solution is greater than usually be sufficient if water is well buffered. Record pH
10.0, use the high-alkalinity type electrode and observe and temperature of sample.
manufacturer's instructions. Use sodium bicarbonate and 14.2 Measure pH of slightly buffered waters (that are
sodium carbonate reference buffer solution for initial in equilibrium with air) essentially as described in 14.1,
standardization of assembly. If temperature of but measure pH of successive portions, with agitation, until
measurement is below 140 F (60 C), use calcium readings for two successive portions differ by no more
hydroxide reference buffer solution as second standard. than 0.1 pH unit; six or more portions may be necessary
Because the pHs of this second solution changes to accomplish this. Take special precautions if sample is
significantly with temperature, note temperature of not in equilibrium with the carbon dioxide of the
solution to the nearest 1.8 F (1 C) and use this reading atmosphere protecting the sample from exposure to the
to obtain applicable pH by interpolation of data in table air during measurement. Make measurements with
3. Judge assembly to be operating satisfactorily if reading externally mounted electrodes in a wide-mouth flask that
obtained for second reference solution does not differ from has been flushed with carbon dioxide-flee air. Measurement
assigned pH value by more than 0.1. If temperature of of unbuffered or slightly buffered samples is more reliably
measurement is above 140 o F (60 o C) and the pH is greater made in flow-type cells as described in section 23.2. Section
than 10.0, standardize assembly with borax solution alone; X1.5.3 of appendix X1 describes additional precautions
however, prior to doing so, ensure correct functioning of that should be taken if electrical conductivity of sample
high-alkalinity electrode with two more alkaline reference is less than about 13zS/in (5aS/cm).
solutions at some temperature below 140 E
13.5 If only an occasional pH determination is made, 15. Calculation
standardize assembly each time it is used. For a long series
of measurements, supplemental interim checks at regular 15.1 Most pH meters are calibrated in pH units, and
intervals are recommended. Since commercially available the pH of the sample is obtained directly by reading meter
pH assemblies exhibit different degrees of measurement scale. See note 3 regarding the documentation of
stability, conduct these checks at 30-minute intervals unless calculations.
it is ascertained that less frequent checking is satisfactory
to ensure performance requirements of sections 13.2 and NOTE 3.-The Bureau's chemistry laboratory in Denver uses
13.3. If assembly is in continuous use under flowing a computer program that calculates the test data, performs an
conditions, standardize daily using two reference buffer error analysis on the results, and then prints out a final report.
solutions to check proper functioning of electrodes. More The report includes a listing of sample descriptions and assigned
frequent checking may be required to ensure acceptable laboratory numbers, an error analysis, and a tabulated report of
test results including stiff diagrams. This program can be used
performance.
by project offices if project laboratory has access to a Hewlett-
Packard HP-86 computer.
14. Procedure
16. Report
14.1 Standardize assembly with two reference buffer
solutions as described in sections 13.2 and 13.3, and then 16.1 Report temperature of measurement to the
wash electrodes with three changes of water or by using nearest 1.8 F (1 C). Report pH of test solution to nearest
a flowing stream from a wash bottle. Place water sample 0.01 pH unit when pH measurement lies between 1.0 and
in a clean glass beaker provided with a thermometer. Equip 12.0; report to nearest 0.1 unit when measurement is less
beaker with a small laboratory-type mechanical stirrer than 1.0 or greater than 12.0. See note 3, and utilize the
32
USBR 3105
Range:
Normal 0-14 0-14 0-14
Expanded Any 2 pH or Any 2, 4, 5, 7, Any 2, 5, or 10
wider units 10, or 14 pH pH units
units
Signal to recorder To 1000 mV To 50 mA To 5000 mV, 4 to 20
or 10 to 50 mA
Accuracy +0.02 +0.005 to 0.04, +0.02
dependent
upon span
Temperature compensation:
Manual or automatic Yes Yes Yes
Range:
F 32-212 32-212 32-212
C 0-100 0-100 0-100
Stability per 0.005 pH unit 0.005 pH unit 0.02 pH unit
24-hour period
33
USBR 3105
34
USBR 3105
35
USBR 3105
Readin Divisions
Readout Normal Expanded Power Reproducibility VWR
Model Meter Display pH MV pH MV Battery Line pH Cat. No.
VWR Digital
Mini 55 Digital 0.1 X X 0.02 34100-630
VWR Digital
Mini 49 Digital 0.1 X X 0.05 34100-607
Beckman
Zeromatic'* IV 8 pp
Digital 0.03 X 0.07 34101-370
Beckman
Corning
Model 5 51/2"
0.1 10 X 0.05 34103-300
Model 610 5" 0.1 70 0.01 X X 0.05 34103-558
Model 620 5W" 0.1 X 0.05 34103-605
Corning
Model 120 Digital 0.01 1 X 0.01 34103-183
Model 140 Digital 0.01 1 X 0.01 34103-219
Model 145 Digital 0.01 1 X 0.01 34103-220
Model 150 Digital 0.001 0.1 X 0.001 34103-230
Model 155 Digital 0.001 0.1 X 0.001 34103-310
Orion
Model 399 A/F 18 cm 0.1 10 X X
0.02 0.004 34104-153
Model 399 A/L 18 cm 0.1 10 0.02 0.004 34104-200
Orion
Model 201 Digital 0.05 X 0.025 34104-029
Model 211 Digital 0.005 X X 0.005 34104-040
Model 231 Digital 0.01 X 0.005 34104-051
36
USBR 3105
Readin Divisions
Readout Normal Expanded Power Reproducibility VWR
Model Meter Display pH MV pH M'V Battery Line pH Cat. No.
Orion
Model 407 A/F 18 cm 0.1 10 0.02 X X x'-0.004 34104-459
Model 407 A/L 18 cm 0.1 10 0.02 :L-0.004 34104-506
Orion
Model 601A Digital 0.01 1 X :0.01 34104-266
Model 611A Digital 0.01 1 X +0.01 34104-288
1 Data for this table were taken from VWR Scientific 1984-85 catalogue.
37
USBR 3105
pH Electrodes
Type pH Temp. Body L Tip Diameter Lead L Connector Orion Cat. No.
range range cm (inches) cm (inches) m (inches) No.
Research Grade 0-14 0 to 90 C 12 (4.7) 1.2 (0.47) 1 (39) Standard 910100 13-641-763
Glass Body
Ag AgCI
HF-Resistant 0-4 0 to40 C 11 (4.3) 1.2 (0.47) 1 (39) Standard 930100 13-641-784
Polymer Body
For acid
"fluorides
Reference Electrodes
Type pH Temp. Reference Body L Tip Diameter Lead L Connector Coming Cat. No.
range range junction cm (inches) cm (inches) m (inches) No.
Double Junction 0-14 0 to 100 C Sleeve 11 (4.3) 1.2 (0.47) 1 (39) Pin 900200 13-641-900
Epoxy Body
For ISE tests
^g ^gel
Single Junction 0-14 0 to 100 C Sleeve 11 (4.3) 1.2 (0.47) 1 (39) Pin 900100 13-641-898
Epoxy Body
Ag AgCl
Combination Electrodes
Type pH Temp. Reference Body L Tip Diameter Lead L Connectors Orion Cat. No.
range range junction cm (inches) cm (inches) m (inches) No.
Research Grade 0-14 0 to 90 C Ceramic 14 (5-1/2) 1.2 (0.47) 1 (39) Standard/pin 910200 13-641-764
Ag AgCl
Lab Field Grade 0-12 0 to 90 C Ceramic 14 (5-1/2) 1.2 (0.47) 1 (39) Standard/pin 910400 13-641-681
Rugged Bulb
RX Series 0-14 0 to 90 C Glass 12 (4.7) 1.2 (0.47) 1 (39) Standard/pin 915500 13-641-700
Refillable Fiber
Ag AgCI BNC 915600 13-641-701
GX Series 0-12 0 to 80 C Wick 11 (4.3) 1.2 (0.47) 1 (39) Standard/pin 910500 13-641-689A
Gel-filled
Ag AgO BNC 910600 13-641-689B
Mini 910700 14-641-689C
Phone/pin
Redox 0 to 80 C Sleeve 13.9 (5-1/2) 1.2 (0.47) 1 (39) Standard/pin 967800 13-641-905
Platinum
Ag AgCI
1 Data for this table were taken from the 1986 Fisher catalogue.
38
USBR 3105
APPENDIX
39
USBR 3105
be discarded. Even though a normal glass electrode responds infrequently. Follow treatment by thorough rinsing and
well to moderate pH changes, it is not necessarily a perfect conditioning as is recommended for a new electrode. The
pH measuring device and may fail the rigid requirements electrode manufacturer may have additional suggestions
of section 13.2 if, for example, the pH span is made as specific to a particular product.
great as 5 pH units (phthalate to borax). X1.4.6 Techniques for cleaning flow-cell electrodes
X1.4.2 Imperfect pH Response.-The pH response of include the use of ultrasonics, brushes, and high-velocity
the glass electrode may be impaired by a few coating submerged jets.
substances, such as certain oily materials or even some
particulates. When a faulty condition is disclosed by the X1.5 Special MeasurementTechniques
check with two reference buffer solutions, electrode can
frequently be restored to normal by an appropriate cleaning X1.5.1 Measurements on Alkaline Waters.-Although
procedure. the high-alkalinity electrode exhibits a much lower sodium
X1.4.3 Glass Electrode Cleaning Techniques.-Where ion error than an ordinary glass electrode, the high-
emulsions of free oil and water are to be measured for alkalinity electrode can still introduce an appreciableerror
pH, it is absolutely necessary that electrodes be cleaned when sodium ion content and pH or temperature of water
thoroughly after each measurement. This may be done by are unusually high. Corrections may, in some instances,
washing with soap or detergent and water, followed by be applied to the measurement if suitable data are available
several rinses with water. Then, the lower third of the from electrode manufacturer.
electrodes should be immersed in HCI (1 + 9) to remove X1.5.2 Carbon dioxide from the air tends to react with
any film that may have formed on them. Rinse electrodes alkaline water and change its pH. Make all measurements
again by washing in several changes of water before with alkaline waters or buffer solutions as quickly as
returning them to service. Process pH analyzers used for possible, with the water exposed to air no longer than
continuous measurement may be provided with an absolutely necessary.
ultrasonic cleaner to lessen or even eliminate the need X1.5.3 Measurement of Static Solutions of Low
for manual cleaning. Conductivity.-When the sample electrical conductivity is
X1.4.4 Thoroughcleaning with a suitable solvent may lower than about 13/S/in (5/zS/cm), the electrical
be necessary after each measurement if sample contains resistance of water path between glass and reference
sticky soaps or suspended particles. If this fails, a chemical electrodes may become high enough to cause measuring
treatment designed to dissolve the particular deposited difficulties. If placing junction of reference electrode as
coating may prove successful. Afterfinalrinsing of electrode close as possible to pH responsive bulb of glass electrode
in cleaning solvent, immerse lower third of electrode in does not correct difficulties, the electrode pair should be
HC1 (1 q- 9) to remove possible residual film. Wash the protected from electrostatic charges by surrounding
electrode thoroughly again in several changes of water nonconducting cell with a grounded metallic shield. Using
before subjecting it to standardization procedure. a metallic connector at the inlet and outlet, electrically
X1.4.5 If an electrode has failed to respond to cleaning connected externally to the chamber, can also be helpful.
techniques, try a more drastic treatment as a last resort. X1.5.4 Measurement of Flowing Solutions of Low
This treatment, which will limit the life of electrode and Conductivi(y.-When making measurements on flowing
should be used only as an alternative to discarding it, is samples having an electrical conductivity lower than about
immersing it in chromic acid cleaning solution for several 13S/in (5/S/cm), take precautions to avoid difficulties
minutes (longer if necessary). Chromic acid is particularly from streaming potentials. If available, observe special
effective in cleaning foreign substances from surface of precautions recommended by instrument manufacturer.
glass; however, it also has a dehydrating effect on the glass. Preferably, make the flowchamber of a conductive material
Consequently, allow an electrode so treated, after such as stainless steel and ground it. Because streaming
thoroughly rinsing, to stand in water overnight before using potential increases with flow velocity, it is advisable to
it for measurements. Finally, if electrode fails to respond adjust sample flow rate at a value not exceeding that needed
to chromic acid cleaning, it may be subjected to mild etching to keep flow cell properly flushed. This can be done by
in an ammonium bifluoride solution. Immerse electrode conveying sample water to flow cell through a short line
for about 1 minute in a 20-percent solution of ammonium leading from a constant-head overflow chamber. Provide
bifluoride (NH4HF2) and water in a polyethylene cup. The the line to the cell with a suitable flow-controllingmeans.
bifluoride actually removes a portion of the bulb glass and X 1.5.5 MagneticStirring.-Do not use magnetic stirring
should be used only as a last resort, and then only in those instances where it may affect pH measurement.
4O
@ UNITED STATES
INTERIORBuREAU
DEPARTMENT
OF RECLAMATION
OFT HE (.,
TURBIDITY OF WATER
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 3110; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: D 1889-81.
41
USBR 3110
storage is not recommended. All samples should be Table 1. - Graduation of ackson candle turbidimeter.
vigorously shaken before examination. Depth of liquid Turbidity, Depth of liquid Turbidity,
inch (mm) JTU 1 inch (mm) JTU
7. Calibration and Standardization 0.09 (2.3) 1000 0.40 (10.3) 210
.10 (2.6) 900 .42 (10.8) 200
7.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane-
.11 (2.9) 800 .44 (11.4) 190
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests .12 (3.2) 700 .47 (12.0) 180
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are
.14 (3.5) 650 .50 (12.7) 170
covered under that particular procedure or standard directly
.15 (3.8) 600 .53 (13.5) 160
or by reference to another.
.16 (4.1) 550 .56 (14.4) 150
7.2 Specific calibration for equipment for the nephe-
.18 (4.5) 500 .60 (15.4) 140
lometric turbidity method is cited in section 16.
.19 (4.9) 450 .65 (16.6) 130
.21 (5.5) 400 .70 (18.0) 120
JACKSON CANDLE TURBIDITY .22 (5.6) 390 .76 (19.6) 110
.23 (5.8) 380 .84 (21.5) 100
8. Application .23 (5.9) 370 .88 (22.6) 95
.24 (6.1) 360 .93 (23.8) 90
8.1 The Jackson candle turbidity method is suitable for .25 (6.3) 350 .98 (25.1) 85
measurement of light scattering, by turbid waters, but is .25 (6.4) 340 1.03 (26.5) 80
not sufficiently sensitive for measurement of turbidity of .26 (6.6) 330 1.10 (28.1) 75
well water, filtered water, or clarified effluent samples. .27 (6.8) 320 1.16 (29.8) 70
The range of applicability of the method is shown in table 1. .27 (7.0) 310 1.24 (31.8) 65
8.2 The standard instrument for determining turbidity .28 (7.3) 300 1.33 (34.1) 60
has been, for many years, the Jackson candle turbidimeter. .29 (7.5) 290 1.43 (36.7) 55
However, because the lowest turbidity value which can .30 (7.8) 280 1.55 (39.8) 50
be measured on this instrument is 25 units and because .32 (8.1) 270 1.70 (43.5) 45
method is dependent upon operator's ability to visually .33 (8.4) 260 1.88 (48.1) 40
judge point at which candlelight is indiscernible, the candle .34 (8.7) 250 2.11 (54.0) 35
turbidimeter is generally being discarded in favor of .35 (9.1) 240 2.41 (61.8) 30
photoelectric methods [1].2 .37 (9.5) 230 2.84 (72.9) 25
.39 (9.9) 220
NOTE 3.-Equipment available to measure turbidity or
suspended solids in the very low range, less than 3 JTU (Jackson Jackson turbidity units.
turbidity units), are the particle-size counter and the plugging
index monitor. For measuring JTU's greater than 3, use the silt through centerline of candle, top of support being 3 inches
density index monitor by Millipave, a hydrometer, or various (76 mm) below bottom of tube. The glass tube shall be
filter weighing techniques. graduated either in turbidity units or in inches (millime-
ters). The relationship between these units of measure
NOTE 4.-City water supplies frequently measure between 1 is shown in table 1. The glasstube shall have a flat, polished
and 2 JTU, well below the range of either the Jackson or glass bottom. The candle shall be made of beeswax and
nephelometric turbidity methods.
spermaceti, gauged to burn within the limits of 114 to
9. Summary of Method 126 grains (7.4 to 8.3 g) per hour. The support shall have
a spring or other device to keep top of candle pressed
9.1 The Jackson candle method is an empirical measure against top of support.
of turbidity based on measurement of depth of sample,
11. Procedure
in a special graduated vessel, that is just sufficient to
extinguish the image of a burning standard candle observed
vertically through sample. 11.1 Make observations in a darkened room, with glass
tube enclosed in nonreflective material. It is allowable to
10. Apparatus substitute an alternate light source for the standard candle,
but instrument must then be calibrated, using a number
10.1 Jackson Candle Turbidimeter.3-This instrument of samples, with both the standard candle and alternate
consists of a graduated glass tube, a standard candle, a light source.
light shield surrounding glass tube, and a support forcandle 11.2 Make the turbidity test by pouring sample
and tube. The glass tube and candle shall be supported suspension into glass tube until image of candle flame is
in a vertical position so that centerline of tube passes no longer visible when viewed through column of liquid.
A 400-mL beaker and a glass stirring rod may be
2 Numbers in brackets refer to entries in References,section 27. conveniently used for transferring water to graduated tube.
3 This apparatus is available as a complete unit from laboratory supply 11.3 The turbidity of sample is measured in terms of
houses. the amount of sample required in calibrated tube above
42
USBR 3110
candle to cause flame to be visible. The sample of water nephelos standards using No. 325 (45-#m) mesh
is shaken thoroughly, and about 200 mL poured into the diatomaceous earth, 4 suspended in water, settled for 24
400-mL beaker, stirring vigorously with a glass rod to hours, and supernatant suspension pipetted out. This
prevent settling of suspended solids. Then, about 1/2 inch relationship will vary with different materials of
(13 ram) of the water to be tested is placed in glass tube, suspension, size of particles in suspension, and wavelength
candle lighted, and water from beaker poured slowly into of light used for nephelos determination.
tube. The water in the beaker should be stirred frequently
during this process. Pouring should be very slow when 12. Report
flame image becomes only faintly visible, and should be
stopped when image disappears. The removal of 1 percent 12.1 Report turbidity as the JTU's between 25 and
of the suspension (water and suspended solids) should make 1,000.
the image visible again. The glass tube is then removed 12.2 With present instrumentation, the use of the
from the base and turbidity read. The reading should be Jackson candle turbidimeter is practically obsolete;
carefully checked, remembering that turbidity values therefore, no reporting form for this data has been devised.
increase toward bottom of glass. Samples having a turbidity
of more than 1,000 JTU's should be diluted with one or NOTE 6.-The JTU is an arbitrary number and is not in terms
more equal amounts of clear water until turbidity falls below of parts per million or milligrams per liter.
1,000 units. The turbidity of original sample is then
computed from reading made on diluted sample. For
example, if reading on diluted sample is 500 JTU's and NEPHELOMETRIC TURBIDITY
amount of original sample in dilute sample is one part
in six, turbidity of original sample is 3,000 units. 13. Application
NOTE 5.-Take care to keep glass tube clean both inside and 13.1 The nephelometric turbidity method covers the
outside. An occasional rinsing of tube with weak hydrochloric measurement of relative turbidity and is also applicable
acid is advisable. Accumulations of dirt inside and soot and to the measurement of low turbidity.
moisture outside the tube will seriously interfere with reliability
of results. To obtain reasonably consistent results, candle flame 14. Summary of Method
must be maintained (as close as possible) at a standard size and
spacing. This requires frequent trimming and adjusting. Do not 14.1 Nephelometric turbidity instruments measure
keep candle lit for more than a few minutes at a time or flame scattered light at 90 or at 90 and 270 angles to the
size will increase.
incident beam. These instruments cannot be calibrated
11.4 Figure 1 shows the approximate white-light accurately in terms of absolute turbidity, except in the case
relationship between the Jackson candle turbidity and of fluids having uniform size particles that are less than
about one-fifth of the wavelength of incident light, see
figures 2 and 3. Nephelos standards have been prepared
I00
f ) by thoroughly mixing suitable amounts of finely divided
/
90 TiO2 (titanium dioxide) into partially polymerized
polystyrene. Alternatively, a suspension of formazine has
/
80 been used as a turbidity standard, formed by reacting
hydrazine sulfate and hexamethylene tetramine under
/
70 carefully controlled conditions [2]. Calibrated commercial
(/)
I.- standards in sealed tubes are available.
60
oo
S 5o / 15. Apparatus
/
w
"1-
u 4o 15.1 Nephelometeror CalibratedSlit Turbidimeter
z
30 /
16. Calibration
43
USBR 3110
270
0.05 Wavelength 0.2 Wavelength
Particle Size / Par,ticle Size
--'Monochr'omatic O ""
180
90
Note-Typical polar diagram of total scattered light for suspensions of approximately uniform size particles of
various dimensions. The ratio of particle size dimension to incident wavelength results in a particular
shape polar diagram for scattered light
i.O I I [ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I t I I I I
0.9
"'5
ma Scattering Range | \
o0.8 (VerySmoll Particles) ]
z z 0.7 DiffusionProportional I
_o to (Diameter) 3 I
I-- I--
o >. 0.6 t , Reflecting and Refracting Range
< m
,,c / (Lorcje Particles)
1_
o,
0.4
/ Diffusion Proportional to
o 0.2
0.1
NOTE-The nature of the relation between diameter of particles in supension and diffusion of a beam of OA7-pm
blue light byo thin Ioyerof suspension (constant percentogeby moss of porticlemoteriol).
44
USBR 3110
of standard turbidity suspension with turbidity-free water 18.2 No specific forms with typical data are included
as required. Prepare new suspension weekly. because most turbidimeters are of the direct readout type.
17.2 Calibration.-Calibrate instrument in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions, running at least one 19. Report
standard in each range to be used. Turbidities less than
40 units are read directly from instrument scale or from 19.1 Report results in NTU's. No typical reporting
form is included with this procedure because field labora-
appropriate calibration scale. For measurement of
turbidities over 40 units, sample is diluted with turbidity- tories will generally report turbidities along with results
free water until turbidity falls between 30 and 40 units. of other water quality determinations to satisfy local
The turbidity is then calculated as follows: requirements.
NTU -- (A) (B + C )
c (1) ABSOLUTE TURBIDITY
where:
20. Application
NTU = nephelos turbidity units,
A = turbidity units found in diluted sample, 20.1 The absolute turbidity method covers the mea-
B = volume of dilution water used, and surement of both scattered and transmitted light. The
C = sample volume taken in dilution. method using the integrating-sphere apparatus is not
subject to a particle size limitation.
17.2.1 Refer to section 16.2.
21. Summary of Method
17.3 Instruments Using NephelometricStandards.-
First balance instrument system physically and electrically 21.1 An integrating-sphere type of absolute turbidity
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Then, instrument measures all of the scattered light. For most
replace standards by sample in an optically identical tube industrial water problems, particle size is greater than one-
and record reading. The straight-line relationship for fifth the wavelength of light; therefore, backscattering is
Tyndall effect for small amounts of scattered 90 or 90 much less than 90 or forward-scattering,see figures 2
and 270 light produces proportional readings for and 3. The apparatus shown on figure 4 is arranged to
nephelometric turbidity standards up to about 100 nephelos give the summation of most of the scattered light for such
units. Therefore, nephelometric turbidity of sample can suspensions and solutions. From this summation, the
be calculated as turbidity of calibrated standard times ratio approximate absolute turbidity can be calculated.
of readings.
17.4 Instruments Using Transmitted Light From 22. Apparatus
Calibrated Slit As Reference.-Follow manufacturer's
instructions in detail. This type of turbidimeter uses a fixed 22.1 Instruments for measuring absolute turbidity are
ratio of scattered light to transmitted light intensity. A commercially available or can be constructed for particular
calibrated slit adjusts quantity of light for transmission needs. The best instrument for a particular problem will
from single light source until observer matches final depend on the average size of light-scattering particles
intensity of light for different paths. The instrument uses in the suspension, see figures 2 and 3. If particle size
a special cell for the sample. averagesone-twentieth the wavelength of light, an instru-
17.4.1 For all calibrated slit instruments, estimate ment as shown on figure 5 should be used to determine
midpoint of interval of uniform-light intensity for the two absolute turbidity.
fields by rotating dial in one direction only towards higher 22.2 To determine approximate absolute turbidity
values. This eliminates errors caused by lost motion in where particle size is sufficiently large to neglect backs-
mechanism. cattering, a simplified integrating-sphere instrument can
17.5 Turbidity measuring equipment manufactured by be constructed [3].SThis instrument (fig. 4) has eliminated
Monitek and Hach have been found to be excellent many interference problems by mounting test cell at outer
nephelometric type units. surface of sphere and integrating only the forward and
side-scattered light. If test cell is mounted internally in
18. Calculations sphere to integrate all scattered light, many corrections
must be applied because sample cell cannot be made
infinitely small relative to size of sphere. The external
18.1 Calculate nephelometric turbidity, in nephelos sample cell results in more uniform reflected light within
units, as follows: sphere. Because the sensitive surface of the barrier-layer
NTU = DE (2) photocells are illuminated diffusely, difficulties caused by
variations in sensitivity or different parts of their sensitive
where:
surfaces are thus reduced.
NTU = nephelos turbidity units,
D = instrument reading of scattered light, and
5 Beckman makes an absolute turbidity unit that has been found to be
E = nephelos units per unit of instrument reading. excellent.
45
USBR 3110
8
I
13
2 6
3 4
23.1 After instrument has been properly adjusted and 25. Report
calibrated, obtain one galvanometer deflection for total light
flux with the exit-light-reflecting flap closed to integrate 25.1 Report calculated absolute turbidity and corres-
both transmitted and scattered light. Then, obtain a second ponding wavelength and bandwidth of incident light, filter
galvanometer reading with exit flap open to allow trans- number, light source, and solution temperature.
mitted light to leave sphere. The second reading is usually 25.2 Refer to section 19.1.
made with a shunt setting for higher sensitivity.
26. Precision and Bias
24. Calculations
26.1 The precision and bias for this procedure have
24.1 Calculate absolute turbidity with instrument not been established.
shown on figure 4, and express result as a percentage
decrease, as follows: 27. References
TA = (100) (G,2 Sl -- T )
G1 & (3) [1] "Standard Methods for Examination of Water and
where: Wastewater," part 163, 13th ed., American Public Health
Association, American Water Works Association, Water
Pollution Control Federation, Washington, DC, 1971.
TA = absolute turbidity,
G1 = first galvanometer reading, [2] Chevalier, P., "Formazine Standard for Turbidity,"
Ca= = second galvanometer reading, Brasserie, 152, pp. 132-133, 1959.
& = shunt factor for G1 reading,
$2 = shunt factor for Ca= reading, and [3] Barnes, R. B., and C. R. Stock, "Apparatus for
T = previously determined instrument error Transmission Turbidity of Slightly Hazy Materials," Ana-
including determined scattered light from lytical Chemistry, ANCHA, vol. 21, No. 1, pp. 181-184,
sample cell. January 1949.
46
USBR 3110
L c2o, o3r1 \ T PH
,, . . --k-.:I)LJ-., . -I1
F -H
L
---
---,
O,-F-p
t-I---..
I:"
//
/ Ft
0
I I J a | I
6in.
I
\ , , .sc H c
"//////I//J////////////////////.//,////////////////////////////////////
OPTICAL SYSTEM
A-- Rotatable arm attached to disk F3--Locationof filtersused for correctingfor
AN --Analyzer fluorescence
C-- Semioctagonalcell L --Mercurylamp
C,--Shuttercollimatingtube L,--Achramaticlens
Cz--Scaftering beam collimatingtube L z--- Planocylindricallens
D - Graduated disk 0 -- Opal glass depolarizing diffusor (Required for
D,-- Lamp diaphragm. 931A photomultiplier tube but not for
O2--Removable collimatingtube diaphragm IP21 tube )
D3--Cell table diaphragm PH-Covered peephole
D4-Nosepiece diaphragm PT--Photomuffipliertube
Ds-Cafhode diaphragm po--Demountable polarizer
D6--Collimating tube diaphragm S --Photographic shutter
EC-Electrical compartment SC-- Scattering compartment
F,-Monochromatic filter T Light-trap tube
F2 Neutral filters W -- Working standard
Figure 5. - Schematic diagram of instrument used for measuring absolute turbidity, dissymmetry, and depolarization of liquids.
47
. UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 3115-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 3115; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: D 1888-78.
48
USBR 3115
49
USBR 3115
11.2 If both particulate and dissolved matter are to 11.5 Total Matter.-The total matter, also called "total
be determined, proceed in accordance with sections 11.3 solids," is the sum of the particulate and dissolved matter
and 11.4; if only total matter is desired, follow the procedure in the sample.
starting with 11.5. 11.5.1 Prepare evaporating dishes as in section
11.3 Particulate Matter.-This water component, also 11.4.1.
called "suspended solids," is separated by filtrationusing 11.5.2 Transfer a measured portion of the well-
a glass-fiber filter. mixed sample to an evaporating dish of predetermined
11.3.1 Preparation of Glass-Fiber Filter Disc-Place mass, and evaporate to dryness on a steam bath or in
disc on membrane filter apparatus, or insert into bottom a drying oven.
of a suitable Gooch crucible. While vacuum is applied, wash 11.5.2.1 If evaporation is performed in a drying
disc with three successive 20-mL volumes of distilled water. oven, temperature should be lowered to about 208 F to
Remove all traces of water by continuing to apply vacuum prevent boiling and splattering of sample.
after water has passed through. Remove filter from 11.5.3 Dry evaporated sample for at least 1 hour
membrane filter apparatus, or both crucible and filter if at 217 to 221 F, cool in a desiccator, and determine mass.
Gooch crucible is used, and dry in an oven at 217 to 221 F Repeat drying cycle until mass loss is less than 4 percent
(103 to 105 C) for 1 hour. Remove to desiccator and store of previous mass, or 0.5 mg, whichever is less.
until needed. Determine mass immediately before use. 11.5.4 Record mass of residue determined from the
11.3.2 Assemble filtering apparatus and begin difference between finaland initial dish masses as the "mass
suction. Shake sample vigorously, and rapidly transfer 100 of total matter."
mL to membrane filter funnel assembly using a 100-mL 11.6 Volatile Matter.-This is the component lost from
volumetric cylinder. If suspended matter is low, a larger the total matter residue upon ignition of the residue at
volume may be filtered. 1112 F in a muffle furnace.
11.3.3 Carefully remove filterfrom membrane filter 11.6.1 Precautions.-This test is subject to many
funnel assembly. Alternatively, remove crucible and filter errors due to loss of water of crystallization, loss of volatile
from crucible adapter. Dry for at least 1 hour at 217 to organic matter prior to combustion, incomplete oxidation
221 F, cool in a desiccator, and determinemass. Repeat of certain complex organics, and decomposition of mineral
drying cycle until mass loss is less than 4 percent of previous salts during combustion. The results should not be
mass, or 0.5 rag, whichever is less. considered an accurate measure of organic carbon in the
11.3.4 Record mass of particulate matter determined sample; however, the results may be useful in the control
from the difference between final and initial masses of of plant operations. The principal source of error in the
test filteras the "mass of particulate matter." determination is the failure to obtain a representative
11.4 Dissolved Matter.-This water component, also sample.
called "dissolved solids" on filtration,passes through a 11.6.2 Ignite residue obtained for the determination
glass-fiber filterand remains after evaporation and drying of total matter at 1112 F (600 C) in a muffle furnace
at 217 to 221 E for 30 minutes, cool in a desiccator, and determine mass.
11.4.1 Preparation ofEvaporating Dishes.-Heat the 11.6.3 Record the difference between the massesof
clean dish to 1112 F (600 C) for 1 hour in a muffle total matter and ignited matter residues as the "mass of
furnace, cool in a desiccator, and store until needed. volatile matter."
Determine mass immediately before use. 11.7 Fixed Matter.-This is the residue that remains
11.4.2 Transfer a measured aliquot of filteredsample after ignition of the total matter residue.
obtained in 11.3.2 to the dish with predetermined mass, 11.7.1 Record the difference in massesbetween the
and evaporate to dryness on a steam bath or in a drying total and volatile matter, as determined in 11.5 and 11.6,
oven. as the "fixed matter."
11.4.2.1 Select an aliquot of sample sufficient to
contain a residue of at least 25 mg. To obtain a residue 12. Calculations
capable of having its mass determined, successive aliquots
of sample may be added to the same dish. 12.1 Calculate the result of each specific determination
11.4.2.2 If evaporation is performed in a drying as follows:
oven, temperature should be lowered to about 208 F
(98 C) to prevent boiling and splattering of sample. Mx
M -- V (1000) (1)
11.4.3 Dry evaporated sample for at least 1 hour
at 217 to 221 F, cool in a desiccator, and determine mass.
Repeat drying cycle at 217 to 221 F, cooling, desiccating, where:
and determining mass until loss of mass is less than 4
M
percent of previous mass, or 0.5 mg, whichever is less. matter, in milligrams per liter;
11.4.4 Record mass of residue determined from the .Mx= M1 = grams of total matter,
difference between final and initial dish masses as the "mass .- M2
grams of particulate matter,
of dissolved matter." Ms grams of dissolved matter,
50
USBR 3115
= 344 = grams of volatile matter, A computer printout, figure 6 of USBR 3100, is another
= 3 = grams of fixed matter; and way of reporting this data.
V = liters of sample used.
14. Precision and Bias
12.2 When particulate and dissolved matter have been
separately determined, total matter can be calculated by 14.1 No statement can be made concerning the precision
adding the values of 3'/2 and 3. of this procedure because the precision is influenced by
12.3 Since glass-fiberfiltration is used for the removal both the nature and amount of entrained matter and by
of particulate matter, it is mandatory that this be stated the effects of drying and ignition on actual composition.
when reporting either particulate or dissolved matter. 14.2 The bias for this procedure has not been
12.4 Figures 1 and 2 show suggested worksheets for established.
recording data and sample calculations.
15. References
51
USBR 3115
Sample Unfiltered Dish Dish mass, g Total matter Dish mass, g Volatile matter Fixed matter
I.D. aliquot, (V), No. Initial Final M1, M, Ignited 3,/4, M, Ms, M,
L (liters) (I) (F) g mg/L (IGN) g mg/L g mg/L
355 o./oo #" 30.1924 90.1<132 O. O30# 30de ao. /15o 0.0002 2 6. o.Og .o6'
Figure 1. - Sample data and calculation form for total, volatile, and fixed matter.
52
USBR 3115
Spec. or
Solic. No. D C=712 Structure ,,Ecos ,dltwm Tested by 8. #",a057" 7-g -Date
86
PrlectRA N'TZ Ay" Item //J,4 r',r Q,o,,4 / 7->,. Computed . ,'w',eor:r" 7- -Date
g
Location 4oo F-. Of.*" DA,t Axis
Feature Station Offset Checked by Dte
DA,
RAI'ZZY Depth x/,eAC A- to ,2 ,"Z'. "/'/''Z 1 L"R 7- d-8
Ma
M(mg/L) --
-- (1000) M (mg/L) -- (1000)
V V
Figure 2. - Sample data and calculation form for particulate and dissolved matter.
53
USBR 3115
Matter, mg/L
Sample
Identification Particulate 1 Dissolved 1 Volatile Fixed Total
54
(' UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
' BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 3120-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 3120; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: D 516-82.
1. Scope 3. Significance
1.1 This designation covers the procedure for 3.1 Sulfate Attack on Hardened Concrete.-For the
determining the sulfate ion in water and waste water. Four degree of attack on hardenedconcreteby soils and waters
methods are given as follows: containingvarious sulfate concentrations,refer to table 1.
Sections This table also recommends varioustypes of cementitious
Method A (Gravimetric Method) 8-14 materials to minimize the effects of sulfates. For
Method B (Turbidimetric Method) 15-23 determining the effect of alkali sulfates on hardened
Method C (Volumetric Method) 24-34 concrete,see USBR 4908.
Method D (Ion Chromatography) 35-44 3.2 Detrimental Effects ofSulfates in Water forMixing
Concrete:
1.2 Method A is the primary measure of the sulfate 3.2.1 In concrete construction, proposed mixing
ion in all water. Methods B and C are less time consuming water suspected of having detrimental amounts of sulfate
than Method A; however, they are frequently more liable should be analyzed. Hard and very bitter waters are likely
to interference; they are particularly useful in the lower to contain high sulfate concentrations. Water from wells
sulfate ion range, below 20 p/m or mg/L. Method D is and streams in the arid Western States often contains
the current method of determination used by the Bureau, dissolved mineral salts, chlorides, and sulfates, and should
and covers the range from 1 to 300 p/m or mg/L. be regarded with suspicion. The purest available water
2. Applicable Documents should be used for mixing and curing. However, a
concentration of 3,000 p/m (parts per million) or 3000
2.1 USBR Procedures: mg/L of dissolved sulfates has no detrimental effect when
3100 Samplingof Water used for mixing or curing.
4109 Compressive StrengthofHydraulicCement Mortars 3.2.2 Researchershave found that the use of mixing
Using 2-Inch or 50-Millimeter Cube Specimens water containing considerable amounts of soluble sulfate
4191 Time-of-Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat may result in a delayed reduction of compressive strength
Needle of the concrete. In one series of tests, 1.0 percent sulfate,
4227 Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate 10,000 p/m or mg/L, in the mixing water produced no
Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method) significant reduction in the 28-day compressive strength.
4908 Length Change of Hardened Concrete Exposed to However, after 1 year (1 month standard moist curing
AlkaliSulfates followed by 11 months outdoor storage), compressive
2.2 ASTMStandards: strength of concrete made with 10,000 p/m sulfate-bearing
D 516 StandardTest Methods for Sulfate Ion in Water * mix water and Type V cement declined by 10 percent.
D 859 StandardTest Methods for Silica in Water * For a similar concrete made with Type I cement,
D 1129 StandardDefinitionsof Terms Relatingto Water compressive strength at 1 year was 15 percent below the
D 1193 StandardSpecificationfor Reagent Water strength of the control concrete mixed with tap water.
D 1339 Standard Test Methods for SulfiteIon in Water * 3.2.3 If water with a sulfate concentration in excess
E 60 Standard Practice for Photometric Methods for of 3,000 p/m must be considered for use as mixing water,
Chemical Analysisof Metals2 additional tests should be performed. Time-of-set studies,
E 275 Standard Practice for Describingand Measuring in accordance with USBR 4191, should be performed for
Performance of Ultraviolet, Visible, and Near-Infrared general information during construction. Compressive
Spectrophotometers 3 strength studies, in accordance with USBR 4109, should
be performed for 24 hours' through 1 year's age and at
i AnnualBook ofASTMStandards,vol. 11.0l. any intermediate time frame as desired. A reduction in
2 AnnualBook ofASTMStandards,vol. 03.05. strength in excess of 10 percent of control mix should
3 AnnualBookofASTMStandards,vol. 14.01. be considered as a failure. Volume stability (length change)
55
USBR 3120
Table 1. - Attack on concrete by soils and waters containing various sulfate concentrations.
Relative degree of sulfate Percent water-soluble sulfate mg/L sulfate (as SO4)
attack (as SO4) in soil samples in water samples
studies, in accordance with USBR 4227, should be all safety problems associated with its use. It is the
performed for 7 days' through 2 years' age and at any responsibility of the user to consult and establish
intermediate time frame as desired. An expansion in excess appropriate safety and health practices and determine
of 0.04 percent at 6 months' age should be regarded with applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
suspicion. An expansion in excess of 0.1 percent at 1 year's 6.2 Picric acid, as discussed in note 2 following section
age indicates remedial action must be taken. An expansion 12.3, is a hazardous material.
in excess of 0.2 percent at 1 year's age should be expected
to cause rapid, intense, and readily recognizable expansive 7. Sampling
deterioration of the concrete. An expansion in excess of
0.5 percent at any age should be considered as a complete 7.1 Collect sample in accordance with USBR 3100.
failure. METHOD A-GRAVIMETRIC METHOD
3.3 Detrimental Effects ofSulfates in Water forCuring
Fresh Concrete.-Test data on the effect of impurities in 8. Scope
curing water on quality of concrete are minimal. A
concentration of 3,000 mg/L of dissolved sulfates should 8.1 This method is applicable to all types of water
not be harmful; however, curing water should be free from and waste water, and is directly applicable to samples
organic matter or other impurities that might stain surface containing about 20 to 100 p/m (20 to 100 mg/L) of
of concrete. the sulfate ion (SO42). This method can be extended to
higher or lower ranges by adjusting sample size.
4. Terminology
9. Summary of Method
4.1 For definitions of terms used in this procedure,
refer to ASTM D 1129. 9.1 Sulfate ion is precipitated and the mass determined
as barium sulfate after removal of silica and other insoluble
5. Purity of Reagents
matter.
5.1 Reagent grade chemicals shall be used in all tests.
10. Interferences
Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that all reagents
shall conform to specifications of the Committee on
10.1 Sulfites and sulfides may oxidize and precipitate
Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society,
with the sulfate. Turbidity caused by silica or other insoluble
where such specifications are available. 4 Other grades may material would interfere if allowed to be present; however,
be used, provided it is first ascertained that reagent is of removal of such interference is provided for in this method.
sufficiently high purity to permit its use without lessening 10.2 Other substances tend to be occluded or adsorbed
accuracy of determination. on the barium sulfate, but they do not significantly affect
5.2 Unless otherwise indicated, references to water precision and accuracy of method.
shall be understood to mean Type II reagent water
conforming to ASTM D 1193. In addition, reagent water 11. Reagents
used for these methods shall be sulfate free.
11.1 Ammonium Hydroxide (sp. gr. 0.90).-Concen-
6. Precautions trated NH4OH (ammonium hydroxide).
11.2 Barium Chloride Solution (118 g/L).-Dissolve
6.1 This procedure may involve hazardous materials,
118 grams of BaCI2"2H20 (barium chloride) in water and
operations, and equipment, and does not claim to address
dilute to 1 liter.
11.3 Hydrochloric Acid (sp. gr. 1.19) (1 + 9).-Mix
4 Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society Specifications, Am. 1 volume of HCI (hydrochloric acid) with 9 volumes of
Chemical Sot., Washington, DC. For suggestions on testing reagents not
listed by AmericanChemical Society, see references [ 1,2] section 45. water.
56
USBR 3120
11.4 Hydrofluoric Acid (48 to 51 percent).-Concen- 12.6 Add a drop of H2SO4 and a few drops of HF,
trated HF (hydrofluoric acid). and evaporate under a hood to expel silica as SiF4 (silicon
11.5 Methyl Orange Indicator Solution (0.5 g/L).- tetrafluoride). Reignite at about 1472 o F, cool in a desiccator,
Dissolve 0.05 gram of methyl orange in water and dilute and determine mass of crucible containing BaSO4.
to 100 mL.
11.6 Nitric Acid (sp. gr. 1.42).-Concentrated HNO3 13. Calculation
(nitric acid).
11.7 Picric Acid.-Saturated aqueous solution. 13.1 A typical calculation form is shown on figure 1.
11.8 Silver Nitrate Solution (100 g/L).-Dissolve 10 Calculateconcentration of sulfate ion as follows:
grams of AgNOs (silver nitrate) in water and dilute to Sulfate, p/m or mg/L = M(411500)
100 mL. s (1)
11.9 Sulfuric Acid (sp. gr. 1.84).-Concentrated H2SO4
(sulfuric acid). where:
M = grams of BaS04, and
12. Procedure S = milliliters of sample.
12.1 Filter sample, if turbid, using a fine, ashlesspaper 14. Precision and Bias
(note 1). Wash beaker and filter thoroughly with hot water.
14.1 Results of this method are precise to 1.0 percent
NOTE 1.-Silica may be removed before applying this method of amount of sulfate ion present.
by dehydration with HCI or HCIO4 (perchloric acid) in accordance 14.2 The bias for this method is not known.
with respective procedures in ASTM D 859. In this case, ignition
described in section 12.5 need not be done in a platinum crucible. METHOD B-TURBIDIMETRIC METHOD
57
USBR 3120
,-1
D I
0 ,
t 0
t
,,
t
.,j
...L3
o -- -
.<
,.-.1
o
o
.
.< t L
o
t
t
d
z x
58
USBR 3120
nm; preferable wavelength range being 380 to 400 nm. (note 7). Dilute to 50 mL with water if required, and add
The cell for the instrument should have a light path through 10.0 mL of glycerin solution (note 5) and 5.0 mL of NaCI
sample of about 40 mm, and should hold about 50 mL solution.
of sample. Filter photometers and photometric practices
prescribed in this method shall conform to ASTM E 60; NOTE 7.-The solubility of BaSO4 is such that difficulty may
spectrophotometers shall conform to ASTM E 275. be experienced in determination of sulfate concentrations below
about 10 p/m or mg/L. This can be overcome by concentrating
19. Reagents the sample or by adding 5 mL of standard sulfate solution
(1 mL = 0.100 mg of SO42) to sample before diluting to 50
19.1 Barium Chloride.-Crystalsof BaCI2"2H20 (barium mL.This will add 0.5 mg of SO4 to the sample, which must be
chloride) screened on the No. 20 to No. 30 mesh (850 subtracted from final result.
to 600/m).
21.3 Fill a 40-mm sample cell with sample solution;
19.2 Glycerin Solution (1 + 1).-Mix 1 volume of glyc-
wipe with a clean, dry cloth; and place in cell compartment.
erin with 1 volume of water (note 5).
Set colorimeter to zero absorbance (100 percent transmis-
NOTE 5.-A stabilizing solution containing sodium carboxy- sion) for a blank. This compensates for any acid-insoluble
methyl cellulose (10 g/L) may be used instead of glycerin solution. 5 matter that has not been filtered out, for any color present,
or both.
19.3 Sodium Chloride Solution (240 g/L).-Dissolve 21.4 Pour sample solution from cell back into beaker
240 grams of NaC1 (sodium chloride) in water containing and add, while stirring, 0.3 gram of barium chloride (note
20 mL of concentrated HC1 (hydrochloric acid, sp. gr. 1.19), 8). Continue gently stirring solution for 1 minute, let stand
and dilute to 1 liter with water. Filter solution if turbid. for 4 minutes, and stir again for 15 seconds. Fill sample
19.4 Sulfate, Standard Solution (1 mL = 0.100 mg cell as before and immediately take a reading with
-9.
SO 4 ).-Dissolve 0.1479 gram of anhydrous NazSO4 (sodium photometer.
sulfate) in water and dilute to 1 liter in a volumetric flask.
Standardize by the procedure prescribed in section 12. NOTE 8.-Stirring should be at a constant rate in all
determinations. The use of a magnetic stirrer has been found
20. Calibration satisfactory for this purpose.
20.1 Follow procedure in section 21, using appropriate 21.5 If interferences are suspected, dilute sample with
amounts of standard sulfate solution prepared in accordance an equal volume of water and redetermine sulfate
with section 19.4, and prepare a calibration curve showing concentration. If value so determined is one-half that of
sulfate ion content in parts per million (milligrams per undiluted sample, interferences may be assumed to be
liter) plotted against corresponding photometer readings absent.
(note 6). Prepare standards by diluting with water 0.0,
2.0, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0, 30.0, 40.0, and 50.0 mL of standard 22. Calculation
sulfate solution to 50-mL volumes in volumetric flasks.
These solutions will have sulfate ion concentrations of 0.0, 22.1 Convert photometer readings obtained with
4.0, 10.0, 20.0, 30.0, 40.0, 60.0, 80.0, and 100.0 p/m or sample to parts per million (milligrams per liter) of the
mg/L, respectively. sulfate ion using calibration curves described in section
20.
NOTE 6.-A separate calibration curve must be prepared for 22.2 The Bureau has never performed the sulfate ion
each photometer, and a new curve must be prepared if it is
necessary to change cell, lamp, or filter, or if any other alterations determination by the turbidimetric method; therefore, no
to instrument or reagents are made. Check curve with each series typical data are provided; however, a suggested calculation
of tests by running two or more solutions of known sulfate form is shown on figure 1.
concentrations.
23. Precision and Bias
20.2 The Bureau has never performed the sulfate ion
determination by the turbidimetric method; therefore, no 23.1 The precision of this method depends on
typical calibration curves are included. interferences present and the skill of the analyst. When
no interfering substances are present, a careful analyst can
21. Procedure
obtain a precision of 5 percent of the sulfate ion or 2
21.1 Filter sample if turbid, and adjust temperature mg/L, whichever is greater.
to between 59 and 86 F (15 and 30 C). 23.2 The bias for this method is not known.
21.2 Pipet 50 mL or less of clear sample containing
METHOD C-VOLUMETRIC METHOD
between 0.5 and 5 mg of sulfate ion into a 200-mL beaker
5 The following commercial reagents have also been found to be suitable: 24. Scope
Colloresine LV, obtainable from General Aniline and Film Corp., New
York, NY, or from Irwin Dyestuff Corp., Ltd., Montreal, Canada; or 24.1 This method is intended for the rapid volumetric
Hercules CMC-70 Premium Low, obtainable from Hercules Inc.,
Wilmington, DE. determination of a wide range of sulfate ion concentrations
, 59
USBR 3120
in industrial water. The method can be used directly for 27.2.1 Resin is held on a suitable screen or filter
routine or control tests for the sulfate ion in certain plug, and flow is controlled by a length of 2-mm bore
industrial waters and, when extended by use of ion- capillary tubing joined to bottom of column. This tubing
exchange and microtechnique, for the accurate determi- is bent into a U-shape, rises to about 13 mm above resin
nation of the sulfate ion over the range of 5 to 1,000 bed, and then makes a U-bend downward for about 50
p/m (5 to 1000 mg/L). For additional information on this to 70 mm.
method, see reference [3] section 45. 27.2.2 Other designs of exchange columns are
suitable, such as a small glass column using only 25 mm
25. Summary of Method
of washed resin, No. 100- to No. 200-mesh (150- to 75-
#m) size; 65- to 70-mm total length; and 15-ram inside
25.1 Sulfate ion is titrated in an alcoholic solution under diameter widening to a reservoir cup 50 to 55 mm in
controlled acid conditions with a standard barium chloride length and 30- to 35-mm inside diameter. This column
solution using thorin as indicator. Under controlled is useful for very small samples which must be washed
conditions of titration, end point is relatively sharp; through the bed with water. Correction must be made for
indicator changing from yellow to a stable pink color. amount of wash water used.
27.3 The exchange columns shall be regenerated when
26. Interferences about two-thirds exhausted. Regeneration shall be carried
out by passing HCI (1 + 4) through resin column and
26.1 Both cations and anions may cause coprecipitation by thorough washing with water. If resin column shows
errors with barium sulfate precipitate. Potassium, iron, no visual change as exhaustion proceeds, it is advisable
aluminum, phosphate, flouride, and nitrate are the worst to regenerate after one or two samples have passed through
offenders. Most metallic ions also seriously interfere by column.
forming colored complexes with the thorin indicator,
especially in alcohol-water mixtures. 28. Reagents
26.2 Interference by cations is eliminated by ion
exchange. However, chromium and zirconium may form 28.1 AlcohoL-Ethyl alcohol (95 percent) 6, isopropyl
varying quantities of anion complexes with the sulfate ion alcohol, or methyl alcohol.
under certain conditions. 28.2 Ammonium Hydroxide (sp. gr. 0.90) (1 + 99).-
26.3 Fluorides and nitrates cause no serious interfer- Mix 1 volume of NH4OH (ammonium hydroxide) with
ence up to concentrations of 2 and 50 mg/L, respectively. 99 volumes of water.
26.4 Ortho and metaphosphates interfere when 28.3 Barium Chloride, StandardSolution (1 mL = 0.500
present in excess of about 2 mg/L. In industrial water, mg SO]2).-Dissolve 1.221 grams of barium chloridein 1
such as boiler water, orthophosphate is removed by liter of water that has been adjusted to a pH of 3.8 to
precipitation with magnesium carbonate and filtration. 4.0 with dilute HCI. Standardize solution in accordance
26.5 Sulfite interference is eliminated by determining with section 29 against standard sodium sulfate solutions
sulfate equivalent of sulfite and subtraction of this sulfate that have been passed through ion-exchangeresin.
from determined sulfate content. Sulfides also interfere 28.4 HydrochloricAcid (1 + 4).-Mix 1 volume of
but can usually be removed by precipitation as zinc sulfide. concentratedHC1 (sp. gr. 1.19) with4 volumesof water.
26.6 Chlorides obscure the pink end point if present 28.5 HydrochloricAcid (1 + 99).-Mix 1 volume of
in concentrations greater than 1000 mg/L when sulfate HCI (sp. gr. 1.19) with99 volumesof water.
present is low (about 5 rag/L). The noninterfering 28.6 Hydrogen Peroxide (30 percent).-Concentrated
concentration of chloride increases with increasing sulfate H202 (hydrogen peroxide).
content. 28.7 Iodine, Standard Solution (1 mL = 0.480 mg
26.7 Chromium present a's chromates and dichromates SO42).-Dissolve 10 grams of KI (potassium iodine) in 100
is converted by treatment with hydrogen peroxide to the mL of water, add 1.27 grams of iodine crystals, and stir
cation, Cr 3, which is then removed by ion exchange. until solution is complete. Dilute to 1 liter with water
and store in a dark bottle.Standardizeagainst0.01 normal
27. Apparatus sodiumthiosulfate solution.
28.8 Ion-exchangeResin.-A cationicexchange resin,7
27.1 Titration Assembly.-For high accuracy and No. 20- to No. 25-mesh (850- to 710-#m) or No. 100-
determination of low sulfate ion concentrations,a to No. 200-mesh (150- to 75-#m).
microburet reading to 0.01 mL is necessary. Efficient 28.9 MgCO3 (Magnesium Carbonate)
magnetic stirring improves speed and convenience of 28.10 PhenolphthaleinIncb'catorSolution (5.0 g/L).-
titration. Dissolve 0.5 gram of phenolphthaleinin 50 mL of 95
27.2 IonExchange Column.-Asuitablecontinuousflow percentethylalcohol.6 Dilute to 100 mL withwater.
column may be prepared by pouring 30 cm of a washed,
wet resin, No. 20- to No. 25-mesh (850- to 710-m) size, 6 Specially denatured ethyl alcohol conforming to Formula No. 3A or
into a glass column of 9- to 10-mm inside diameter and 30 of U.S. Bureau of Internal Revenue may be substituted for 95 percent
ethyl alcohol.
500+5 mm in length,the top of whichwidensto a reservoir 7 Commercial resins Dowex 50 > 8 and Amberlite IR-120 have been
of 50- to 55-mm insidediameterand 100+5 mm in length. found to be satisfactory for this purpose.
60
USBR 3120
28.11 Potassium Dichromate.-Heat KuCr207 (potas- 50.0 mL of the standard sulfate solution (1 mL = 0.100
sium dichromate)Sin a platinum crucible to a temperature mg SO2) to 50 mL in volumetric flasks. These solutions
just above its fusion point, 745 F (396 C), taking care will have sulfate ion concentrations of 0.0, 4.0, 10.0, 20.0,
to exclude all dust and organic matter. After cooling, crush 30.0, 50.0, 70.0, and 100.0 p/m or rag/L, respectively.
fused salt to a powder in an agate mortar and preserve 29.2 Determine the blank and sulfate equivalent of the
in a glass-stoppered bottle. barium chloride solution (note 9) in accordance with
28.12 PotassiumIodMe.-The potassium iodides should sections 30.3, 30.4, and 30.5.
not yield a blue color when 1 gram is dissolved in freshly
boiled reagent-grade deaerated water treated with 5 drops NOTE 9.-A solution of known sulfate concentration should
(0.25 mL) of 1.0 normal sulfuric acid and 1 mL of freshly be run with each series of tests or new reagents to check stand-
preparedstarch solution. ardization curve. The blank used to determine sulfate content
28.13 NaHCOs (Sodium Bicarbonate) s is preferably that determined from standardization curve
extrapolated to zero.
28.14 Na2COs (Sodium Carbonate) s, anhydrous.
28.15 Sodium Thiosulfate, Standard Solution (0.01 30. Procedure in Presence of Sulfite, Phosphate,
N).-Using a 1000-mL volumetric flask, dissolve 2.482 and Chromium
grams of sodium thiosulfates in about 800 mL of water
that has just been boiled and cooled. Invert flaskat frequent
30.1 In the presence of sulfite and phosphate
intervals until solid is dissolved. Stabilize solution by
interference, as in boiler water, pipet 25.0 mL of filtered
dissolving in it, in the same manner, 1 gram of Na2COs
sample containing 10 to 50 p/m (10 to 50 mg/L) of the
and dilute to 1 liter with the boiled water. Standardize
sulfate ion into a 100-mL beaker. Add 0.5 mL of starch
against K2Cr207 as described in section 28.15.1.
indicator and titrate sulfite with iodine solution (1 mL =
28.15.1 Dissolve 2 grams of KI and 2 grams of
0.480 mg SO 2) (note 10). Record volume of standard iodine
NaHCOs in 300 mL of water in a 500-mL Erlenmeyer
solution required to obtain a blue color.
flask and add concentrated HCI (sp. gr. 1.19) slowly, while
swirling flask, until carbon dioxide gas evolution ceases. NOTE 10.-A separate sample may be used to determine the
Add 10 mL excess of HCI, mix, and then dissolve 0.010 sulfite by methods of ASTM D 1339.
gram of dried K2Cr207 in the solution. Wash down inside
of flask with a small amount of water without agitating 30.2 Add 2 to 3 drops of phenolphthalein indicator
flask, and allow to stand for 10 minutes. Titrate with the solution and adjust the pH to about 10.3 with HCI (1 + 99)
Na2S203 solution, using starch solution as indicator, until or NH4OH (1 + 99). Add 0.3 to 0.5 gram of MgCOs
color just changes from blue to the green color of chromic and boil gently for 5 minutes, using a cover glass to
salt. minimize evaporation loss. Cool to 50 F (10 C) (note
28.15.2 Calculate as follows: 11). Filter through acid-washed, open-texture, rapid filter
grams of K2Cr207 (1000) paper into a 50-mL volumetric flask. Wash precipitate with
N -- equiv, mass of K2Cr207 (49.04) (S) (2) three 5-mL portions of water at 50 E If chromium is
present or suspected, add, with shaking, a few drops of
where: H902. Adjust volume to 50 mL with water.
N = normality of thiosulfate in equivalents per
liter; and NOTE 11.-Phosphate ion is almost completely precipitated
at or below 50 F (10 C), but solubility increases with increasing
S ---- milliliters of Na2S2Oa required.
temperature.
28.16 Starch Indicator.-Make a paste using 1 gram of
Arrowroot starch or soluble iodometric starch with cold 30.3 Pass solution through ion-exchange column and
water. Pour paste into 100 mL of boiling water and boil discard first 25 to 30 mL of effluent (note 12). Pipet 10.0
for several minutes. Store in a glass-stoppered bottle in mL of the next effluent into a small, white porcelain dish
a cool place. Starch solutions prepared in this manner will of 100- to 125-mL capacity.
remain chemically stable for 2 or 3 days.
28.17 Sulfate, Standard Solution (1 mL = 0.100 mg NOTE 12.-When amount of sample is limited, sample may
be passed through the small ion-exchange column described in
SO2).-Refer to section 19.4.
section 27.2 and rinsed through with four or five times its volume
28.18 Sulfuric Acid (sp. gr. 1.84).-ConcentratedH2SO4 of water so that finalelutriate is 50.0 mL. Concentrate this elutriate
(sulfuric acid),s to 10.0 mL, or take a 10.0-mL aliquot.
28.19 Thorin Solution (20 g/L).-Dissolve 0.2 gram of
thorin, which is 2 (2-hydroxy-3, 6-disulfo-l-naphthylazo) 30.4 Add 40 mL of alcohol and 2 drops of thorin
benzene arsonic acid, in 100 mL of water. indicator. Adjust the pH to 3.8 to 4.0 by carefully adding
dropwise NH4OH (1 + 99) until solution.just turns pink
29. Standardization of Barium Chloride Solution (note 13). Then add HCI (1 + 99) dropwise until pink
29.1 Prepare a series of standard sulfate solutions by color disappears.
diluting with water 0.0, 2.0, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0, 25.0, 35.0, and
NOTE 13.-If NH4OH is added too fast, it is possible to overrun
s Reagent used for standardization only. color change from yellow to pink and sample continues to be
61
USBR 3120
yellow. It is then impossible to develop pink color by addition $1 = milliliters of original sample titrated, consid-
of NH4OH. eration being given to any dilution when
passing through ion-exchange column, and
30.5 Prepare a blank using water and reagents $2 = milliliters of original sample titrated for sul-
described in sections 30.1 to 30.4, and record iodine solution fite correction.
used for sulfite correction of blank. Titrate sample with
BaC12 solution (1 mL = 0.500 mg SO2), using untitrated 33.2 The Bureau has never performed the sulfate ion
yellow blank as a color reference, to a stable pink color determination by the volumetric method; therefore, no
which deepens to a reddish pink on overtitration. Then typical data or calculation form are provided.
titrate blank to same color reached in sample. Allow a
time lapse of 3 to 5 seconds between additions of last 34. Precision and Bias 9
few increments of BaC12 solution.
34.1 Titration of the sulfate ion in the range of 5 to
NOTE 14.-The color change may best be seen with constant 100 mg/L, after ion-exchangetreatment, is accurate to 1.5
stirring and a daylight fluorescent light. If such a light is not
mg/L. The precision of this method up to 100 mg/L
available, use of blue tinted glasses, such as American Optical
No. F-9247, is helpful. (excluding laboratory differences) is 0.7 mg/L. Single-
operator precision may be expected to be 0.5 mg/L.
NOTE 15.-For very low sulfate concentrations, a less 34.2 The bias for this method is not known.
concentrated BaCl2 solution (1 mL = 0.200 mg SO2) is advised.
A standard sodium sulfate solution may be added to sample to METHOD D-CHROMATOGRAPHY
raise total sulfate concentration to 10 to 15 p/m or mg/L of METHOD (CONDUCTIVITY
the sulfate ion. This additional sulfate must be subtracted from MEASUREMENT)
final results.
33.1 Calculate the sulfate ion concentration in original 36.1 A water sample is injected into a stream of
sample as follows: carbonate-bicarbonate eluant and passed through a series
of ion exchangers. The anions of interest are separated
Sulfate, p/m (mg/L) = on the basis of their relative affinites for a low capacity,
strongly basic anion exchanger (guard and separator
(V1 - B1) (500) ( 112 - B2) (480)
(3) column). The separated anions are directed onto a strongly
$1 $2
acidic cation exchanger (suppressor column) where they
are converted to their highly conductive acid form, and
where:
the carbonate-bicarbonate eluant is converted to a weakly
V1 = milliliters of BaCI2 solution required for titra- conductive carbonic acid. The separated anions, in their
tion of sample, acid form, are then measured by conductivity and identified
112 = milliliters of iodine solution required for titra- on the basis of retention time as compared to standards.
tion of sample for sulfite correction, Quantitation is by measurement of peak area or peak height.
B1 = milliliters of BaCI2 solution required for titra-
tion of blank,
9 Supporting data giving results of cooperative tests may be obtained
B2 = milliliters of iodine solution required for titra-- on loan fromASTM Headquarters, 1916 RaceSt., Philadelphia, PA, 19103,
tion of blank for sulfite correction, by requesting as RR: D-19-145.
62
USBR 3120
* Dionex Part No. 030827 (normal run), Part No. 030831 (fast run),
41. Procedure
or equivalent. 41.1 System Equilibration.-Turn on ion chromato-
t Dionex Part No. 030825 (normal run), Part No. 030830 (fast run),
graph and adjust eluant flow rate to approximate the
or equivalent.
t0 Dionex Part No. 030828 (regular), Part No. 35350 (fiber), or separation achieved in figures 2 or 3 (2 to 3 mL/min).
equivalent. Adjustdetector to desired setting (usually 10 amho) and
63
USBR 3120
POT4 3 SO72 frequently. In this type of system, the water dip 11 may
shift slightly during suppressor exhaustion and, with a fast-
run column, this may lead to slight interference for F-
or Cl-. To eliminate this interference, analyze standards
CI- that bracket the expected result, eliminate water dip by
diluting sample with eluant, or by adding concentrated
eluant to the sample to give the same HCO/CO 2 con-
centration as in the eluant. If sample adjustmentsare made,
adjust standards and blanks identically.
If linearity is established for a given detector setting,
it is acceptable to calibrate with a single standard. Record
the peak height or area and retention time to permit
calculation of the calibration factor, F.
41.3 Sample Analysis.-If necessary, remove sample
particulates by filtering through a prewashed 0.2-#m-pore-
diameter membrane filter. Using a prewashed syringe of
1 to 10 mL capacity, equipped with a male luer fitting,
inject enough of the sample or standard to flush sample
loop several times. For a 0.1-mL sample loop, inject at
least 1 mL. Switch ion chromotograph from load to inject
mode and record peak heights and retention times on strip
chart recorder. After the last peak (SO2)has appeared and
the conductivity signal has returned to base line, another
sample can be injected.
41.4 Regeneration.-Forsystems without fiber suppres-
sor, regenerate with 1N H2SO4 in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions when the conductivity base line
exceeds 300 #mho when the suppressor column is on line.
L
42. Calculations
C = HFD (4)
Figure 2. - Typical inorganic anion separation using normal-run
columns.
where:
allow system to come to equilibrium (15 to 20 min). A C = milligrams of anion per liter,
stable base line indicates equilibrium conditions. Adjust H = peak height or area,
detector offset to zero-out the eluant conductivky. Then, F = response factor = concentration of standard/
with the fiber suppressor, adjust the regeneration flow height (or area) of standard, and
rate to maintain stability, usually 2.5 to 3 mL/min. D = dilution factor for those samples requiring
41.2 Calibracion.-Inject standards containing a single dilution.
anion, or a mixture, and determine approximate retention
times. Observed times vary with conditions; however, if 42.2 Because this method is direct by reading from
standard eluant and anion separator column are used, the ion chromatograph with corrections made, no typical
retention is always in the order of F-, Cl-, NO2, PO43, calculation form or data is included.
Br-, NOa, and SO2. Inject at least three different 43. Precision and Bias
concentrations for each anion to be measured, and construct
a calibration curve by plotting peak height or area against
concentration on linear graph paper. Recalibrate whenever 43.1 Samples of reagent water, to which were added
the detector setting is changed. With a system requiring the common anions, were analyzed in 15 laboratories;
suppressor regeneration, the NO2 interaction with the results are shown in table 3.
suppressor may lead to erroneous NO2 results; make this
determination only when suppressor is at the same stage ] ] Water dip occurs because water conductivity in sample is less than
of exhaustion as during standardization, or recalibrate eluant conductivity (eluant is diluted by water).
64
USBR 3120
NO
CI-
Conditions:
II 2.8m of M Na HCO3/2.3m of M No2CO3 eluant
2.0mL/min flow
IO-/zL loop
lO/zmho/cm full scale
Concentrations,
p/m or mg/L
F- .3
Cr 4
NO I0
HPO;,2 25
Br- I0
NO; 20
so: 25
I I I
o 4 6 8
Minutes
65
USBR 3120
Table 3. - Precision and bias observed for anions at various concentration levels
in reagent water.
Single-
Amount Amount Overall operator Significant
Anion added, found, precision, precision, bias,
p/m or p/m or p/m or p/m or 95 % level
mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L
44. Report [4] Small, H., T. Stevens, and W. Bauman, "Novel Ion
Exchange Chromatographic Method Using Conductimetric
44.1 Figures 3 through 7 of USBR 3100 show typical
Detection," Analytic Chemistry, 47:1801, 1985.
reporting forms for this procedure.
[2] United States Pharmacopeia andNationalFormulary [6] Jenke, D., "Anion Peak Migration in Ion Chroma-
XV, 20th ed., Mack Publishing Co., 20th and Northampton tography," Analytic Chemistry, 53:1536, 1981.
Sts., Easton, PA, 18042, 1980.
[3] Fritz, James S., and Stanley S. Yamamura, "Rapid [7] Bynum, M. I., S. Tyree, and W. Weiser, "Effect of
Microtitrationof Sulfate," Analytical Chemistry, vol. 27, Major Ions on the Determination of Trace Ions by Ion
No. 9, p. 1461, September 1955. Chromatography," Analytic Chemistry, 53:1935, 1981.
66
UNITED STATES OF RECLAMATION
INTERIORBoREAU
DEPARTMENT OF THE ()
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4029; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 29-78.
67
USBR 4029
i Indicated size of measure may be used to test aggregates of a maximum nominal size equal to
or less than size shown.
a Based on sieves with square openings.
net mass of water in measure to an accuracy of +0.1 percent. 9.1.2 When rodding first layer, do not allow rod to
Measure temperature of water, and determine its density strike bottom of measure forcibly. When rodding second
from table 2. Calculate factor for measure by dividing and third layers, use only enough force to cause tamping
density of water by mass required to fill measure. Refer rod to penetrate previous layer of aggregate.
to USBR 1010 for additional information on calibration. 9.1.3 Determine mass of measure and its contents,
7.2 Scale.-Calibrate scale in accordance with USBR and record net mass of aggregate to nearest 0.1 percent.
1012. Multiply the determined net mass by the factor calculated
7.3 Oven.-Calibrate oven in accordance with USBR as described in section 7.1. The product is density of
1020. aggregate by rodding.
9.1.4 Repeat rodding procedure for two additional
8. Conditioning
tests. If the spread of the three tests exceeds 1 percent
of average net mass, additional tests should be conducted.
8.1 Dry sample of aggregate to an essentially constant The average of the net masses for all tests shall be used
mass, preferably in an oven at 2309 F (110+5 C). to determine the density.
9. Rodding Procedure 10. Jigging Procedure
9.1 The rodding procedure is applicable to aggregates 10.1 The jigging procedure is applicable to aggregates
having a maximum size of 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm) or having a maximum size greater than 1-1/2 inches (37.5
less. mm) but less than or equal to 4 inches (100 mm).
9.1.1 Fill measure one-third full and level surface 10.1.1 Fill measure in three approximately equal
with fingers. Rod layer of aggregatewith 25 strokes of layers as described in section 9.1.1, compacting each layer
tamping rod evenly distributed over surface. Then, fill by placing measure on a firm base, such as a concrete
measure two-thirds full and again level and rod. Finally, floor, raising opposite sides of measure alternately about
fill measure to overflowing and again rod. Level surface 2 inches (51 mm), and allowing measure to drop in such
of aggregatewith fingers or a straightedge in such a way a manner as to hit floor with a sharp, slapping blow. By
that any slight projections of larger pieces of coarse this method, the aggregateparticles will arrangethemselves
aggregate approximately balance larger voids in surface in a densely compacted condition. Drop the measure 50
below top of measure. times in this manner, 25 times on each side. Level surface
68
USBR 4029
69
USBR 4O29
Table 2a.-Absolute density of water in pound mass per cubic foot. Table 2b.-Absolute density of water in kilograms per cubic meter.
F 0 .I .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 C 0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
32 62.4t8 .418 .418 .419 .419 .419 .419 .420 .420 .420 0 999.84 .85 .85 .86 .87 .87 .88 .88 .89 .90
33 .420 .420 .421 .421 .421 .421 .421 .421 .422 A22 1 .90 .91 .91 .91 .92 .92 .93 .93 .93 .94
.34 .422 .422 .422 .422 .423 .423 .423 .423 .423 .423 2 .94 .94 .95 .95 .95 .96 .96 .96 .96 .96
35 .423 .424 .424 .424 .424 .424 .424 .424 .424 .425 3 .97 .97 .97 .97 .97 .97 .97 .97 .97 .97
36 .425 .425 .425 .425 .425 .425 .425 .425 .425 .425
4 .97 .97 .97 .97 .97 .97 .97 .97 .97 .97
37 .425 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 5 .97 .96 .96 .96 .96 .96 .95 .95 .95 .94
38 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426
39 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 6 .94 .94 .94 .93 .93 .92 .92 .92 .91 .91
40 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 .426 7 .90 .90 .89 .89 .88 .88 .87 .87 .86 .86
41 .426 .426 .426 .426 .425 .425 .425 .425 .425 .425 8 .85 .84 .84 .83 .82 .82 .81 .80 .80 .79
42 .425 .425 .425 .425 .425 .425 .424 .424 .424 .424 9 .78 .77 .77 .76 .75 .74 .73 .73 .72 .71
43 .424 .424 .424 .424 .424 .423 .423 .423 .423 .423 10 .70 .69 .68 .67 .66 .65 .65 .64 .63 .62
44 .423 .423 .422 .422 .422 .422 .422 .422 .421 .421
45 .421 .421 .421 .421 .420 .420 .420 .420 .420 .420 11 .61 .60 .59 .57 .56 .55 .54 .53 .52 .51
46 .419 .419 .419 .419 .418 .418 .418 .418 .418 .417 12 .50 .49 .48 .46 .45 .44 .43 .42 .40 .39
13 .38 .36 .35 .34 .33 .31 .30 .29 .27 .26
47 .417 .417 .417 .417 .416 .416 .416 .416 .415 .415
14 .24 .23 .22 .20 .19 .17 .16 .14 .13 .11
48 .415 .415 .414 .414 .414 .414 .413 .413 .413 .412
15 .10 .08 .07 .05 .04 .02 .01 .99* .98* .96*
49 .412 .412 .412 .411 .411 .411 .410 .410 .410 .410
50 .409 .409 .409 .408 .408 .408 .407 .407 .407 .406
16 998.94 .93 .91 .89 .88 .86 .84 .83 .81 .79
51 .406 .406 .405 .405 .405 .404 .404 .404 .403 .403
17 .77 .76 .74 .72 .70 .69 .67 .65 .63 .61
52 .403 .402 .402 .402 .401 .401 .400 .400 .400 .399 18 .60 .58 .56 .54 .52 .50 .48 .46 .44 .42
53 .399 .399 .398 .398 .397 .397 ,397 .396 .396 .395 19 .41 .39 .37 .35 .33 .31 .29 .27 .24 ".22
54 .395 .395 .394 .394 .393 .393 .393 .392 .392 .391 20 .20 .18 .16 .14 .12 .10 .08 .06 .04 .01
55 .391 .390 .390 .390 .389 .389 .388 .388 .387 .387
56 .386 .386 .386 .385 .385 .384 .384 .383 .383 .382 21 997.99 .97 .95 .93 .90 .88 .86 .84 .82 .79
57 .382 .381 .381 .380 .380 .379 .373 .378 .378 .377 22 .77 .75 .72 .70 .68 .66 .63 .61 .59 .56
58 .377 .376 .376 .375 .375 .374 .374 .373 .373 .372 23 .54 .51 .49 .47 .44 .42 .39 .37 .35 .32
59 .372 .371 .371 .370 .370 .369 .369 .368 .368 .367 24 .30 .27 .25 .22 .20 .17 .15 .12 .10 .07
60 .366 .366 .365 .365 .364 .364 .363 .363 .362 .361 25 .04 .02 .99* .97* .94* .91" .89* .86* .84* .81"
61 .361 .360 .360 .359 .359 .358 .357 .357 .356 .356
26 996.78 .76 .73 .70 .68 .65 .62 .59 .57 .54
62 .355 .354 .354 .353 .353 .352 .351 .351 .350 .350
27 .51 .49 .46 .43 .40 .37 .35 .32 .29 .26
63 .349 .348 .348 .347 .347 .346 .345 .345 .344 .343
64 .343 .342 .342 .341 .340 .340 .339 .338 .338 .337 28 .23 .20 .18 .15 .12 .09 .06 .03 .00 .97*
65 .336 .336 .335 .334 .334 .333 .332 .332 .331 .330 29 995.94 .91 .89 .86 .83 .80 .77 .74 .71 .68
66 .330 .329 .328 .328 .327 .326 .326 .325 .324 .324 30 .65 .62 .59 .56 .53 .49 .46 .43 .40 .37
67 .323 .322 .322 .321 .320 .319 .319 .318 .317 .317 * Firstthree significant figures shown in nextline.
68 .316 .315 .314 .314 .313 .312 .312 .311 .310 .309
69 .309 .308 .307 .306 .306 .305 .304 .303 .303 .302
70 .301 .300 .300 .299 .298 .297 .297 .296 .295 .294
71 .293 .293 .292 .291 .290 .290 .289 .288 .287 .286
72 .286 .285 .284 .283 .282 .282 .281 .280 .279 .278
73 .278 .277 .276 .275 .274 .273 .273 .272 .271 .270
74 .269 .269 .268 .267 .266 .265 .264 .263 .263 .262
75 .261 .260 .259 .258 .257 .257 .256 .255 .254 .253
76 .252 .251 .251 .250 .249 .248 .247 .246 .245 .244
77 .243 .243 .242 .241 .240 .239 .238 .237 .236 .235
78 .235 ,.234 .233 .232 .231 .230 .229 .228 .227 .226
79 .225 .224 .223 .223 .222 .221 .220 .219 .218 .217
80 .216 .215 .214 .213 .212 .21A .210 .209 .208 .207
81 .206 .206 .205 .204 .203 .202 .201 .200 .199 .198
82 .197 .196 .195 .194 .193 .192 .191 .190 .189 .188
83 .187 .186 .185 .184 .183 .182 .181 .180 .179 .178
84 .177 .176 .175 .174 .173 .172 .171 .170 .169 .168
85 .167 .166 .165 .164 .162 .161 .160 .159 .158 .157
86 .156 .155 .154 .153 .152 .151 .150 .149 .148 .147
7O
USBR 4029
Measure No. / Volume of Measure (ft3) a. 4qql Mass of Measure (ibm) If, O
MSA: inch(es) Particle Size Range:.4to 2 inches(es)
Proportion: ,.__0 %,,,,6.4/, 1,,. g___o% //',,z "
__1 __%
Resultant Sp. Gr. (Blend): (Sum of Sp. Gr. Times Percentage of Each Size Fraction)
Sp. Gr. (.7____])( ,o %) + Sp. Gr. (2,1to)( go %) + Sp. Gr. ( __ )(%) Sp. Gr. ( __ )(%) = 2__A_- ? ?
Density of Waterg#.274 lbm/ft3 at Water Calibration Temp. 75,4 F
Consolidation Method: Rodding __ Jigging w" Shoveling __
Measure 1 2 3 4
Test No. Calibration
Mass of Measure and Contents, Ibm _4"o. 2. g 7,o 7Y.O 7.9 7,/g
Mass of Measure, Ibm / ?. Z o /9. Zo 1.2o 19,;o /?.o
Mass of Contents, Ibm 3/. o Y ,'t, '9.4G ,o,? .'f.94,
Factor: Density H20/Mass H20, fO 2. oo37
Dr Densi, lbm/ft3 //?.q /If. /,/.7 I,o.I
No. 1 ///. "/
No. 2 //*. I
No. 3 /ZI. 7
No. 4 /o. l
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
Avg. of 3: 3ago.'T/3
Avg of ,4 : -'lego.l"/,- /o. /2o. /#.o.Z
Difference from Avg., Ibm o 3 -I./ '/."
Difference from Avg., %
(AM) - 8
v - 0oo)
AM
where:
V ( z.?' ) ( *z.4 )- /,.Z&oo)= ../ %
(,.7') (6z.4)
V
percent of voids,
A = bulk specific gravity (ovendry basis),
B = density of aggregate,lbm/ft3, and
M = density of HzO, 62.4 Ihm/fO.
71
USBR 4029
Spec. or DC - 7dl2 St ructu re','A? V/rP" ,.E r/a, Tested by '- Gro Date
Solic. No. D, .,0oo r', 2-,4 -83
Project '-,,,A $8A z Item AJ'/ z"'/G,,V Date
Computed by 7:'. G'.,e'ro 2-4 -/?3
Location Dt,,v'y',, 'o#.o.
Fea ture, ,,q,4,,"rd E V AA Station -- Offset Checked by Date
Depth __ to D, //oo rA -4-F3
Resultant Sp. Gr. (Blend): (Sum of Sp. Gr. Times Percentage of Each Size Fraction)
Sp. Gr. (2.77)( *9o %) + Sp. Gr. (2o 1to)(o%) + Sp. Gr. ( __ )(%) + Sp. Gr. ( __
Density of Water t..6"4-kg/m 3 at Water Calibration Temp. 2 C =
Consolidation Method: Rodding __ Jigging Shoveling __
V = .....
(AM)- B (100)
AM
72
UNITED STATES OF RECLAMATION
INTERIORBuREAU
DEPARTMENT OF THE ).
USBR 4031-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4031; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 31-84.
73
USBR 4031
5/16-- B
f .
3/8 ,---
I
I
]
I
I
Fabricate from
I i 6-inch extra
strong wrought
I steel pipe.
I
I
I
t
I
Barll I
i I
I I
)i
I
I
I
II
LLocking lug
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
R
6%2 15/8 3/4 %/ '3/4 Dia.
_: 3i,6 ;r}'l
MEMBER B
-_L_I I Ill -< I 1
I I_l 1_'3/8_1 + 3/4 Dia
3/4R 5
Section A-A
74
USBR 4,11,: I
v
i fnche,.=i I:5,2 mini @ D.C h e .i.
II
ACC: E F:'TAS;LE
@ inches 6 Inches
%,, f L
r0T CCEPSa BLE
spe,,in-cns n,,t mce -Jan [. 1(5 lrJd-J <J " n:nt s , n-r t:arJ
cqtJbcd lecgfl: h aco,rd;n,Le V.lih ecicn .]. ncv.vve.
spe,,imens may ex'eo5 tiqe requiieJ ieYJff k) 1 mere tkarJ
1,']{ mdq Exampl, ,)f m11J tla ]-J,*'c keen acq-tilbic
re shown Jn f:.gure :.
),. Z..,::,,p, Rcl..-Tv,,J JJth_iv[qt sizes .if t:rping
r,JJs are useJ b'.e the l{urm. TLe ]arvr n:d :> 5;8 iricfJ
It ITIYa: I iE'J J *l-ietcl ,teqd ,ibc;.tt i i iI-3.c]cY, ((5 Ill rnrz<: '...m
;q,Jthe sndJer >d J , lr, fJ I(', nqn7: m,Jiamemr ant
b,,c 12 inches ,{M turn/ !.rag The slnd]er n:JI i ,.Jsed
t:1i >m let-sized cyl iqJe, [/, .spe,..JJI S[LIttie' -ese><h w, rk
fh ,<t shall he a >rand, sriigh see<] roJ wth at least
t]Jt tamping er/ca >rended t, a }qemJsFhericaJ tJF d same
di:]necer as r<d. P.mh etq,ds J: r,Jc lc,sy lc :,Jundc,J, d
prefened.
:. ]t,7m']>w.-Tl-e ]rallei >tqll l-nr,,e ;1 rukber .: av, h,de
]]lJ t\'"[]] a 1]-JgSS 'LJf 1 2-- (i SO/ ih:n t5,'?+ 227 ql Fitr< :', T'!'l::.ic:.l )hrxLn;l I:,c;H:, m,:.ll,_ls..
<4 VhhrJ,*cr, -C( c,ree vibrators ,tt c]as>JieJ. {n wc
_egc, ries-- interna] anc excexnal External 'ibra:s air
sukdiviJled n< '+ibrmin8 t/kJes :rJb,rInvlb,t r,
5.4.1 ]gem+, W]bn+,q, s. :
5 4.1. ] The tnlcrral vJbrat-cL, {l:i! :i .llt <I 51 bal]
hnve ri<! <:z fJexik]e ,hLhs, ['ferakJ[' F,,)0qeF.,] by el,_.ctrJv
,17, )[L]ZS.
7 <i
USBR :0,
' " 1
NOWE 4-Co, nnpaa Uive re>dings wiitk, ,dn, e equipment menue, ned
]-:J ue' 5 -JLme
c,,., spe,aial shape.,; ,::,,f ,.'ih,,r*m,r heads: fluted ,:tc:,p),. fin, ned abo.ve and a '<b, raing-i:eed ac:h,,::,,mee indicate tl-,al: m,os
(middle), and square .l:bomm Pen ag.onal and hexag,cma]! sJ'apes, vibradng-eed tachometers give a va]!ue ab,,ut 200 vprn less tl-an
are a[SlZi, a*,l'liilabl]<: actua]l in the: 3.,(:;00 vpm range. The de.gee ,::d: accuracf desired
,::,t u::, c,,:rnF,]y whl'J s.pecification,; wi]] dictate de metho,d used
tachometer (fig. 8) is a more expensive instrument that m, detemJniing an:,p]l]mde arid frequency.
indicates more accurate vahaes o.f frequency,
3.4:.2: t:xte,rna'/ VTbratos.-l.,ow-frequency high 3,4 2.2 Forr. l,Tbrat,o,:s'.-Form vibrators ae' s,e][f-
amplitude vJib.ratJio, n is normally preferred f,o stiffer cooImg and can be eikhe, r the ro,rary or reciprocating: type
mixtures High frequency, low' ampl:itude vibration (fg 11).
genez'aly resahs in, bette: conscdiidaion and beu:er sul[:a(::es 3A.2:2.1. Rotary-type f:orm vibrators F,>:duce
f:or more p]lasdc corJ.sstencie's. The db'iding line between essentially simp]le lh, armorJ]c morion. The impu][s.es have
high and low frequencies ic0f e.x:e.inal vibat]c,n ils arbit[ari]y components both perpendicular to and in the: plane: o.f
taken as; 6,CH)0 vpm (I()0 Hz)and between higl-J and low the form This t,.ip,e, rr.ta'. , be F:,n, eumatica]!ly:,, h, ydrauHca]]y:,
arnpllh:nde 0.005 kl,ch ('().13 ram). or' e]lectrk:a]y driiven.
Table I- Range o.f ,c}-,ara,:eristics. perf,:)rmance. ndl pplk:ar[on c,i int-erna] and external vibrat:,::,s
]'q,,:imina t Peal;:
..................... Freq.uenq.b # Aver_:,]itude, ]'}, Acceleratior ..,4,
\.qb atkms .or lkev,:>luti!,>ns ,. m 'n Cycles.
vpn-J .o,r rpm PIz ind-, mil]inleter 1)esired
],c,,ger,a 'Tbra't(;;,r
Under Load #
Type \,ib.rato
Ou, tside Dim. or
S,J.de Dimens, i,,:m, 10,,OCIO 1,5,7 ,.'0167 0 42 q 74
07'5 ,o 150 in, ]15
{:0
:,C;I(}0'
tCl,
2' I[I I)
DD,
C) ,(}l l C'( ) CI' ?l (2: l Ill ( )
C',L:ar m P I as t i c::: 8;,,0C<1, t,,: J 33 t.,:> () ,0006 t,::* 0,00,it ] 0.015 to, 0.028 1 to :21:
"ri,,pe S, dff: 12,C1.(I,0 20C,I O ()0C1'7 to (.:1 00,]2 0.0'18 to,, '[').037 ;', u* 5
,,='(:,
[!SBR 4031
M Ili L. L tl MI E T E IR S
/iiiii
i i i
(llndiicatiin,
g an, amp, lltitudle
of 0.055; iinches (11.4 ram))
77
USBR 4031
]ili p{ ' I" 7 :. hll (l" ] : l- 121]:l 2 ] :l I:! il:'llhl:lL T:!I:,I: T ,:IZ ! I i b) :, h,) 2 < I:, ill, hC,
1:')peT-:, ,l} (:, ! :S!, b:! L-15 I(i:l:,,]liL' [':y[I,L I:1 ~-I I b) h,3 2 !, I=,h,,:i]o>
G:;,z,,I'ec '. I']c,:e 5). E]]:q,]ess ]m,.,quirc.,J. b)' p[, ,ic,,:{ ..poificati,:n>a,
shrill be' , s;tfi{ak, le :he.>.':!-gaL:lge: meu, I :,><1-1, wt:,eelb;>,va'.
.,: ,l: : fhl: : q,,d c Ilea n n, r,:bs,, )rl-erJ: m i x :i n,g bc,;u rd ,,,f s.:u fii,c{e' n t ill the ficVI
{,:}ncrcte.. ;l:,p.;11 ] Ells sl:,a] I {:,::,n<:,rr [,: ]e',qt,ire,,,er, u; ,:}f USBR 5]Ze Hl;l(gkLl:J (IlljLJ %iZC '!liiLil:l]U[ILF I]Ill:,],,S {,ltlli:J IIlfA:t hesIL
] - 1./2 i,:cl:],es ,: 3.7. {, r,, i i:, ) W hen <.,::,a, :ae {g.g:[ eg.a to. cx,.e:cd :!i.
-1/2 inc:lles: .:Jli:z,z::letc" ,t %qJin,}c: >;Iq:,l:l be a le:,'. m]:mec.
time; h,: n,: }lllliqal] ]1 ,qlilX [ilql]tll:] SiZL> (:,i L( }LLr'C:' L,gr{:'gYtC iil":l
-:' ,
USBR 40,31
.-,C:oocrefe f:lloor
(
7{
1_' S B R ii],31
8.. Conditioning
9. Procedu re:
]listed LmJCr }, A ]i,17:.[:i..ub]u E)'., nuNucm>. ,,t secti,:, 2 art.: 3 [111.213es 176 rnm),, r(:,.d ,:lr viibrare .,:Jncretes "9,;i{]] ShJNI71p
USBR 4031
E
.-.m,
-- ,"r"
-- .
=_-i . i z
.
E.E
.
, .= , =_ =_ =_.=
, .Z'
.0
-g - - <
r ._
>
.N
E2
" E2
E2
E
81
USBR 4031
(a) No. 4 to A in (4.75 to 19.0 ram) Nominal Size Range. of vibrator. Sufficient vibration has been applied as soon
as surface of concrete becomes relatively smooth and
exhibits a shiny, wet appearance, at which time vibrator
is slowly withdrawn. Continue vibration only long enough
to achieve proper consolidation of concrete; overvibration
may cause segregation. Fill molds and vibrate in the required
number of approximately equal layers as shown in table 5.
cc
Place all concrete for each layer in mold before starting
vibration of that layer. Add the final layer so as to avoid
overfilling by more than 1/4 inch (6 ram). Finish the
,,ze
surface either during or after vibration when external
vibration is used, and after vibration when internal
in.
mm
mN No4
4.75
5/8
160
3/4
0
l
250
I-I14
31.5
I-I/2
375
l-3/4
45
TOP
vibration is used. When surface is finishedafter vibration,
add only enough concrete to overfill mold about 1/8 inch
(b) 3A to 1- in (19.0 to 37.5 mm) Nominal Size Range.
(3 ram), work concrete into surface, and then finish.
-----_.,.
9.3.3.1 Internal Vibration.-For cylinders, the ratio
of diameter of cylinder to diameter of vibrating element
shall be 4.0 or higher. In compacting the specimen, vibrator
shall not be allowed to rest on or touch bottom or sides
\
60
)
Si.iflconl
.nd*rilz.
of mold. Carefully withdraw vibrator in such a manner
that no air pockets are left in specimen. After vibration
40 of each layer, tap sides of molds to ensure removal of
uder*,zl
large entrapped air bubbles at surface of mold; use extra
zo care with metal or plastic molds.
Ovwlizl __
9.3.3.1.1 Cylinders.-Use three insertions of
iN. 0FN 3. i-I/4 I-I/2 Z 2"1/2 3-V2 TOP vibrator at different points for each layer. Allow vibrator
mm 190 5, 3?5 50 63 75 90
to penetrate through layer being vibrated, and about 1 inch
(c) 1- to 3 in (37.5 to 75 ram) Nominal Size Range. (25 mm) into layer below.
9.3.3.1.2 Beam.-Insert vibrator at spaced
Figure 12. - Sizing nomenclature for concrete aggretate. intervals not exceeding 6 inches (152 mm) along centerline
of long dimension of specimen. For specimens wider than
6 inches, use alternating insertions along two lines. Allow
shaft of vibrator to penetrate about 1 inch (25 mm) into
of 1 to 3 inches (25 to 76 mm), and vibrate concretes bottom layer.
with slump of less than 1 inch (25 mm). 9.3.3.2 External Vibration.-When external vibra-
tion is used, take care to ensure that mold is rigidly attached
NOTE 6.-Concretes of such low water content that they cannot to or securely held against vibrating element or vibrating
be properly consolidated by methods described herein, or requiring
surface.
other sizes and shapes of specimens to represent the product
9.4 Finishing.-Afterconsolidation by any of the
or structure, are not covered by this procedure. Specimens for
such concretes shall be made in accordancewith the requirements methods, unless finishing has been performed during
of the specific USBR designation concerned. vibration (9.3.3), saw surface with a strike-off bar or edge
of float, and floator trowel as required. Perform all finishing
9.3.2 Rodding.-Place concrete in the mold in the with minimum manipulation necessary to produce a flat,
required number of layers of approximately equal volume. even surface that is level with rim or edge of mold and
For cylinders, rod each layer with rounded end of rod using which has no depressions or projections more than 1/8 inch
the number of strokes required for that specimen size as (3 ram). If a trowel is used, it is generally better to leave
indicated in table 6. Rod bottom layer throughout its depth. surface slightly high after striking-off and floating, with
Distribute the strokes uniformly over cross section of mold the intent of finishingflushwith the trowel later. However,
82
USBR 4031
Table 3. - Minimum number of cylinders per test batch to satisfy varying design criteria for design strength of each mixture.
28-day 7 1 - 0 -
28 3 2*** 3 2***
90 1.* - 1"* -
180 1"* - 1.* -
365 1.* - 1.* -
90-day 7 1 - 0 -
28 1 - 1 -
90 3 2*** 3 2***
180 1.* 1.* -
365 1"* 1"* -
180-day 7 1 - 0 -
28 1 - 1 -
90 1"* - 1.* -
180 3 2*** 3 2***
365 1.* - 1.* -
365-day 7 1 - 0 -
28 1 - 1 -
90 1.* - 1"* -
180 1"* - 1.* -
365 3 2*** 3 2***
* (d by 2d): This refers to mass concrete, which generally uses mold sizes of 8 by 16 inches (203 by 406 mm); 12 by 24 inches
(305 by 610 mm); or 18 by 36 inches (457 by 914 mm).
** Every 15th batch.
*** Every 10,000 yd 3 (7646 m 3)
1 to 12 yd 3 (0.8 to 9.2 m3) per structure One set: Each week or an accumulation of 50 yd
(38.2 m3), whichever comes first.
12 to 50 yd 3 (9.2 to 38.2 mS) per structure One set: Each day or structure, whichever is
completed first.
50 to 100 yd 3 (38.2 to 76.5 m3) per day One set: Each day
100 to 500 yd3 (76.5 to 382 m 3) per day Two sets: Each day
500 to 1000 yd 3 (382 to 765 m 3) per shift or day Two sets: Each shift or day
1000 to 3000 yd 3 (765 to 2294 m3) per shift or day Three sets: Each shift or day
Over 3000 yd3 (2294 m 3) per shift or day Three sets: Each shift, or One set: For every
1000 yd (765 m 3) per day
83
USBR 4031
Cylinders:
12 inches (305 mm) Rodding 3 (equal) 4 inches (102 mm)
Over 12 inches (> 305 mm) Rodding As required 4 inches (102 mm)
12 to 18 inches (305 to 457 ram) Vibration 2 (equal) One-half specimen depth
Over 18 inches (> 457 mm) Vibration 3 (or more) 8 inches (203 mm), as
near as practicable
BealS :
6 to 8 inches (152 to 203 mm) Rodding 2 (equal) One-half specimen depth
Over 8 inches (> 203 mm) Rodding 3 (or more) 4 inches (102 mm)
6 to 8 inches (152 to 203 mm) Vibration 1 Depth of specimen
Over 8 inches (> 203 ram) Vibration 2 (or more) 8 inches (203 mm), as
near as practicable
Table 6. - Number of roddings to be used in molding such as stoves, light bulbs, or thermostatically controlled
cylinder specimens. heating cables. A temperature record of specimen storage
shall be established using maximum-minimum
Diameter of cylinder, Number of
inches (mm) strokes per layer thermometers.
6 (152) 25 NOTE 7.-The temperature within damp sand and under wet
8 (203) 50 burlap or similar materials will always be lower than temperature
10 (254) 75 in surrounding atmosphere if evaporation takes place.
84
USBR 4031
be removed from molds at time of removal of formwork. specimen to specimen. Observe precautions given in section
9.5.5 Standard Curing for Beams=Remove test 9.5.5 to guard against surface drying between time of
specimens made for these requirements from mold between removal and from curing to testing.
20 and 48 hours after molding, and cure the specimens
according to provisions of section 9.5.3, except that storage 10. Shipment to Laboratory
for a minimum of 20 hours immediately prior to testing
shall be done in saturated lime water at 73.4+3 F 10.1 Cylinders shipped from field to laboratory for
(23.0+1.7 C). At end of curing period, between time testing shall be packed in sturdy wooden boxes or other
specimens are removed from curing until testing is suitable containers surrounded by wet sand or wet sawdust,
completed, prevent surface drying of specimens. or other suitable packing material, and protected from
freezing during shipment. Upon receipt by laboratory,
NOTE 9.-Relativelysmall amountsof surface drying of flexural cylinders shall be placed immediately, in required curing
specimens induce tensile stresses in extreme fibers that will at 73.4+3 F (23.0+1.7 C).
markedly reduce indicated flexural strength.
11. Calculations
9.5.6 Special Curing forBeams.-Cure test specimens
made for this requirement in the same manner as curing
11.1 No particular calculations are involved in this test
the concrete in the structure, as near as practical. At the
end of 48+4 hours after molding, move specimens in molds procedure.
to a location preferably near a field laboratory and remove
12. Report
them frommolds. Store specimens representing pavements
or slabs on grade by placing them on ground as molded, 12.1 Figure 13 shows a typical reporting form. The
with top surfaces up. Bank sides and ends of specimens report shall include:
with earth or sand that shall be kept damp, leaving top
surfaces exposed to specified curing treatment. Store Sampling procedure.
specimens representing structure concrete as near as Identity of sample with respect to location of concrete
possible to the point in the structure they represent, and represented, and time of testing.
afford them the same temperature protection and moisture Slump.
environment as the structure. At end of curing period, Density.
leave specimens in place and exposed to elements in same Air content.
manner as structure. Remove all beam specimens from Type of specimens molded.
field storage and store in lime water at 73.4+3 F Method of consolidation.
(23.0-1-1.7 C) for 24+4 hours immediately before time Method of curing.
of testing to ensure uniform moisture condition from Time and method of transporting to laboratory.
85
USBR 4031
7 I
28 /
90 /
180 /
365 . 2
Lifts: No. 2 if'2. Thickness . ft/ inches Rodding: Strokes per Lift
Slump 2 t inch(es) Density: IWet Screened /$3. g lbm/ft [] Total Mix lbm/ft
Air Cont-et.'nt." If Wet Screened 3. o % [] Total Mix %
Curing: Initial: Method2" Tra,'/ee(ta/e# ar/a?) Temp. 'o #o o0 F Time Frame 24 hours
Final: Method F,_ C.,'e Temp. 72, q-o 7 F Time Frame// .46" days
Method of Transportation from Jobsite to Final Curing:
86
USBR 4031
7 t
28 /
90 /
180 /
365 3 2
87
@ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4039-92
PROCEDURE FOR
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
OF CYLINDRICAL CONCRETE SPECIMENS
INTRODUCTION
This test method is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4039; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 39-83b.
I A nnual Book of ASTM Standards, vol. 04.02. 5.1.3 Accuracy.-The accuracy of testing machine
2 Annual Book ofASTMSgandards, vol. 03.01. shall be in accordance with the following provisions:
88
USBR 4039
5.1.3.1 The percentage of error for loads within by more than 0.001 inch in the diameter of any smaller
proposed range of use of testing machine shall not exceed block; new blocks shall be manufactured within one-half
+1.0 percent of indicated load. of this tolerance. When diameter of bearing face of
5.1.3.2 Accuracy of testing machine shall be spherically seated block exceeds diameter of specimen by
verified by applying five test loads in four approximately 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more, concentric circles not more
equal increments in ascending order. The difference than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) deep and not more than 3/64 inch
between any two successive test loads shall not exceed one- (1.2 mm) wide shall be inscribed to facilitate proper
third the difference between the maximum and minimum centering.
loads.
NOTE 4.-It is desirable that bearing faces of blocks used for
5.1.3.3 The test load, as indicated by testing
compression testing of concrete have a Rockwell hardness of
machine and the applied load computed from readings of not less than 55 HRC.
verification device, shall be recorded at each test point.
Calculate the error and percentage of error for each point 5.2.1 Bottom bearing blocks shall conform to the
from these data as follows (note 3): following requirements:
5.2.1.1 The bottom bearing block is specified for
E = A -B (1) the purpose of providing a readily machineable surface
for maintenance of specified surface conditions (note 5).
E. = 100 (AB - B) (2) The top and bottom surfaces shall be parallel to each other.
The block may be fastened to the platen of testing machine.
where: The minimum horizontal dimension of the block shall be
at least 3 percent greater than diameter of specimen to
E= error, be tested. Concentric circles, as described in section 5.2,
Ev = percentage of error, are optional on bottom block.
A = load indicated by machine being verified in 5.2.1.2 Final centering must be made with
pound force (newtons), and reference to upper spherical block. When lower bearing
B = applied load as determined by calibrating device block is used to assist in centering specimen, the center
after load value is corrected to calibrated of the concentric rings (when provided) or the center of
temperature of device, in pound force the block itself must be directly below center of spherical
(newtons). head. Provision shall be made on the platen of machine
NOTE 3.-The above calculation is not required for this to assure such a position.
particular test procedure as it is covered under the calibration 5.2.1.3 The bottom bearing block shall be at least
procedures of USBR 1104, which are generally performed 1 inch (25 mm) thick when new and at least 0.9 inch
annually. (22.5 mm) thick after any resurfacing operations.
NOTE 5.-If testing machine is so designed that platen alone
5.1.3.4 The report on verification of a testing
can be readily maintained in specified surface condition, a bottom
machine shall state within what loading range machine
block is not required.
was found to conform to specification requirements rather
than reporting a blanket acceptance or rejection. In no 5.2.2 The spherically seated bearing block shall
case shall loading range be stated as including loads below conform to the following requirements:
the value which is 100 times the smallest change of load 5.2.2.1 Maximum diameter of bearing face of
that can be estimated on load-indicating mechanism of suspended spherically seated block shall not exceed the
testing machine or loads within that portion of the range values shown in the following tabulation:
below 10 percent of maximum range capacity.
5.1.3.5 In no case shall loading range be stated Diameter of Maximum diameter
as including loads outside the range of loads applied during test specimen of bearin face
verification test. inches (mm) inches (ram)
5.1.3.6 The indicated load of a testing machine
shall not be corrected either by calculation or by use of 2 (51) 4 (102)
a calibration diagram to obtain values within required 3 (76) 5 (127)
permissible variation. 4 (102) 6.5 (165)
5.2 Testing machine shall be equipped,with two steel 6 (152) 10 (254)
bearing blocks with hardened faces (note 4), one of which 8 (203) 11 (279)
is a spherically seated block that will bear on upper surface
of specimen, and the other a solid block on which specimen NOTE 6.-Square bearing faces are permissible, provided
diameter of largest possible inscribed circle does not exceed
shall rest. Bearing faces of blocks shall have a minimum
diameter shown in previous tabulation.
dimension at least 3 percent greater than diameter of
specimen to be tested. Except for the concentric circles 5.2.2.2 The center of the sphere shall coincide with
described below, the bearing faces shall not depart from surface of bearing face within a tolerance of +5 percent
a plane by more than 0.001 inch (0.025 mm) in any 6 inches of radius of sphere. Diameter of sphere shall be at least
(152 mm) of blocks 6 inches in diameter or larger, or 75 percent of diameter of specimen to be tested.
89
USBR 4039
5.2.2.3 Ball and socket must be so designed by below the value which is 100 times the smallest change
manufacturer that steel in contact area does not of load which can be read on scale. Scale shall be provided
permanently deform under repeated use, with loads up with a graduation line equal to zero and so numbered.
to 12,000 lbf/in 2 (82.7 MPa) on test specimen.
The dial pointer shall be of sufficient length to reach
graduation marks; width of end of pointer shall not exceed
NOTE 7.-The preferred contact area is in the form of a ring, clear distance between smallest graduations. Each dial shall
described as the preferred "bearing" area, as shown on figure 1. be equipped with a zero adjustment which is easily
accessiblefrom outside the dial case and with a maximum
5.2.2.4 The curved surfacesof socket and spherical load indicator.
portion shall be kept clean and lubricated with a petroleum-
type oil such as conventional motor oil, not with a pressure- NOTE &-Along the arc described by end of pointer, 1/50
type grease. After contacting specimen and application of inch (0.5 mm) is considered to be as close as can be reasonably
a small initial load, further tilting of spherically seated read. Also, one-half of a scale interval is about as close as can
block is not intended or desirable. reasonably be read when scale spacing on load indicating
mechanism is between 1/25 and 1/16 inch (1.0 and 1.6 mm).
5.2.2.5 If radius of sphere is smaller than radius When spacing is between 1/16 and.l/8 inch (1.6 and 3.2 mm),
of largest specimen to be tested, the portion of bearing one-third of a scale interval can be read with reasonable certainty.
face extending beyond sphere shall have a thickness not When spacing is 1/8 inch or more, one-fourth of a scale interval
less than the difference between radius of sphere and radius can be read with reasonable certainty.
of specimen.The minimum dimension of bearing face shall
be at least as great as diameter of sphere (see fig. 1). 6. Precautions
7. Test Specimens
T must be no less than (R-r) 7.2 All test specimens for a given age shall be broken
within the permissible time tolerances prescribed as
follows:
90
USBR 4039
of test specimen shall be determined to nearest 0.01 inch bearing block. Wipe clean the bearing faces of upper and
(0.25 mm) by averaging two diameters measured at right lower bearing blocks and surfaces of test specimen and
angles to each other at about midheight of specimen. This place test specimen on lower bearing block. Carefully align
average diameter shall be used for calculating cross- axis of specimen with center of thrust of spherically seated
sectional area. block. As spherically seated block is brought to bear on
specimen, rotate its movable portion gently by hand so
NOTE 10.-For methods of capping compression specimens, that uniform seating is obtained.
see USBR 4617. 9.2 Rate of Loading.-Apply load continuously and
-without shock. On screw-type testing machines, the moving
7.4 The number of indivMual cylinders measured for head shall travel at about 0.05 in/rain (1.3 mm/min) when
determination of average diameter may be reduced to 1 machine is idling. On hydraulically operated machines,
for every 10 specimens or 3 specimens per day, whichever apply load at a constant rate within the range of 20 to
is greater, if all cylinders are known to have been made 50 (lbf/in2)/s (0.14 to 0.34 MPa/s). During application
from a single lot of reuseable or single-use molds which of first half of anticipated load, a higher rate of loading
consistently produce specimens with average diameters shall be permitted. Make no adjustment in controls of
within a range of 0.02 inch (0.51 mm). When average testing machine while a specimen is yielding rapidly
diameters do not fall within this range or when cylinders immediately prior to failure.
are not made from a single lot of molds, each cylinder 9.3 Apply load until specimen fails, and record maxi-
tested must be measured and the value used in calculations mum load carried by specimen during test. Note type of
of the unit compressive strength of the specimen. When failure and appearance of concrete as suggested on figure2.
diameters are measured at the reduced frequency, the cross-
sectional area of all cylinders tested on that day shall be 10. FactorsAffecting Test Results
computed from the average of the diameters of the three
or more cylinders representing the group tested that day. 10.1 Effect of Wet Screening and Type of Curing.-
7.5 The length of the test specimen shall be determined Cylinders of concrete used for compressive strength tests
to nearest 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) by averaging two lengths are generally 6 inches (152 ram) in diameter and 12 inches
measured on opposite sides of specimen. The length (305 ram) long. The strength of mass concrete in mass-
measurements shall include the thickness of one or both cured larger cylinders, 18 by 36 inches (457 by 914 ram)
(whichever the case may be) properly bonded caps, but or 12 by 24 inches (305 by 610 ram), can be estimated
shall not include the thickness of compressible pads in using figure 3. If strength of fog-cured 6- by 12-inch
the event they are used in place of caps. The average length cylinders made with 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) maximum
shall be used for calculating the length-to-diameter ratio. aggregate wet screened from full mass mix is known,
The frequency of these measurements shall be the same strength of mass concrete at various ages can be predicted
as referenced in section 7.4. with a reasonable degree of accuracy. Also, if desired
strength of mass concrete is known, figure 3 may be used
8. Verification of Calibration to determine required strength of wet-screened, 6- by 12-
inch cylinders.
8.1 Verification of calibration of testing machines in 10.2 Effect of Cylinder Size.-The test data shown on
accordance with USBR 1104 is required under the following figure 4 are typical of relative strengths to be expected
when same concrete is tested in cylinders varying in size
conditions:
from 2 by 4 inches (51 by 102 mm) to 36 by 72 inches
After an elapsed interval since previous verification (914 by 1829 mm), except that concretes containing 3/8-
of 18 months maximum, but preferably after an interval and 3/4-inch (9.5- and 19.0-mm) maximum aggregate were
of 12 months. not tested in cylinders larger than 18 and 24 inches (457
On original installation or relocation of machine. and 610 ram) in diameter, respectively; and concretes
Immediately after making repairs or adjustments containing 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) maximum aggregate
which may in any way affect operation of mass were not tested in cylinders smaller than 6 inches (152
determining system or values displayed, except for zero mm) in diameter. The values shown on figure4 were based
adjustments that compensate for the mass of tooling on the average of 28- and 90-day tests. Note that a much
and/or specimen. smaller reduction in strength is indicated as diameter of
Whenever there is reason to doubt accuracy of results test specimen is increased beyond 18 inches (457 ram).
without regard to time interval since last verification. 10.3 Effect of Cylinder Height.-A standard test
cylinder has a diameter one-half its height. When available
specimens do not have these relative dimensions, table
9. Procedure 1 or figure 4 may be used to correct indicated strengths
to make them comparable with those obtained from
9.1 P/acing Specimen.-Place plain (lower) bearing standard specimens. Since the curve on figure 4 is quite
block, with its hardened face up, on table or platen of flat for ratios of 1.5 and over, small variations in height
testing machine directly under spherically seated (upper) of specimen do not greatly affect strength.
91
USBR 4039
'%1
/ II
I
\ I /
I / / II
I / / II
J\
II
fII \
k
/ \ / \ /
/
II
/ \ / \ il
I t
3.0
2.0
I- Year mass concrete
"= 1.5
\\\, I
:8= i,,- 1.0 -- - -180-Day mossconcrete
"6 o
, .90- Day mass concrete
0,5 28-Day mass concrete
7 28 90 180
2.0
Concrete (withoutpozzolan)
containinga water-reducing,
set-controllingadmixture
1.5
-- I-Year mass concrete
92
USBR 4039
llO I
Height of cylinder=twodiometersL__]____lL. .
105
I00
\ Max. size of aggregate=one-fourth ,diameter,
I- or less L-i''i-- }" + -1" -1' "1"--
z
hi 95
.r.. Factor for convertingto strength
OC 90 /3 il=-, ofo 36-by "tZ-inch cylinder
-T-iiiiii
f
LLI
O 85
d f
8O
tStrength,in percent, of a 6-by 12-inch cylinde=
75
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
DIAMETER OF CYLINDER IN INCHES
200
F-
IO0 -
8O
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4,0
RATIO OF LENGTH OF CYLINDER TO DIAMETER (L/D)
[1] Hutchinson, G. W., et al., Bulletin 16, Lewis Institute, 11. Calculation
Chicago, IL.
11.1 Calculate compressive strength of specimen by
Table 1.-Strength correction factors for variations in L/D. dividing maximum load carried by specimen during test
by average cross-sectional area determined as described in
L/D Factor, % L/D Factor, % section 7, express result to nearest 10 lbf/in 2 (0.1 MPa).
A typical calculation form is shown on figure 5. Some
2.25 101.4 1.6 96.8
typical examples follow.
2.2 101.1 1.5 96.0
2.1 100.6 1.4 95.2 11.1.1 Assume a 6- by 12-inch (152- by 305-ram)
2.0 100.0 1.3 94.5 concrete cylinder without pozzolan, fog cured, and
1.9 99.2 1.2 93.1 fabricated from minus 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) MSA wet-
1.8 98.4 1.1 90.0 screened concrete indicated a 28-day compressive strength
1.7 97.6 1.0 85.0 of 3,000 lbf/in 2 (20.7 MPa). From figure 3, use the following
ratio:
Note: Cylindrical specimens with an L/Dless than 1.0 may
be broken for information purposes but are not considered Ratio -- compressive strength of mass concrete
as acceptable specimens for strength evaluation. Cylindrical compressive strength of 6- by 12-inch cylinders
specimens with an L/D greater than 2.25 should be sawed
to an L/Dof 2.0. To predict strength of mass concrete at 1 year's age,
pick the point on the abscissa (fig. 3) of the 28-day, 6-
3 Number in brackets refers to entry in Reference, section 14. by 12-inch cylinder and project its intersection with the
93
USBR 4039
curve representing mass concrete at 1 year's age. This compressive strength of 6- by 12-inch cylinder
intersection is approximately at a ratio of 1.14. Therefore,
= 3,000 = 3,106 lbf/in2 (21.4 MPa)
1.14 = compressive strength of mass concrete 0.966
3,000 lbf/in 2 (20.7 MPa)
compressive strength of 36- by 72-inch cylinder
and, compressive strength of mass concrete (1-year age) = (3,000)(0.85) = 2,550 lbf/in2 (17.6 MPa)
= (1.14) 3,000 ibf/in 2
11.1.6 Assume a cylinder has a compressive strength
= 3,420 lbf/in 2 (23.6 MPa)
of 3,000 Ibf/in 2 at any age, but with an LID (length-to-
11.1.2 Assume mass concrete without pozzolan had diameter ratio) of 1.25. The standard L/D is 2.0. From
a required strength of 3,000 lbf/in 2 (20.7 MPa) at 180 table 1, correction factor for an LID of 1.25 is 94.0 percent.
days, what strength would be required of a 28-day, 6- by Therefore,
12-inch concrete cylinder that was fog cured and fabricated
(3,000)(0.9317) = 2,795 lbf/in 2 (19.27 MPa)
from minus 1-1/2-inch MSA wet-sieved concrete? On
figure 3, again select point on abscissa of 28-day, 6- by This is the compressive strength corrected to an L/D
12-inch cylinder and project its intersection with curve of 2.0. As an alternate to or a check of table 1, figure 4
representing mass concrete at 180 days. This intersection can be used. Locate L/D of 1.25 on abscissa (fig. 4) and
is approximately at a ratio of 1.07. Therefore, project its intersection with curve. This intersection is
1.07 = 3,000 lbf/in 2 approximately at the 107.3-percent level. Therefore,
compressive strength of 6- by 12-inch cylinder 1000 D
D 2,795 ibf/in 2 (same value obtained using table 1)
and, compressive strength of 6- by 12-inch cylinder at 28 1.073
days is:
11.2 The curves on figures 3 and 4 are not applicable
3,000 lbf/in 2 for conversion of concrete or shotcrete cores smaller than
1.07 = 2,804 lbf/in 2 (19.3 MPa) 6- by 12-inch (152- by 305-mm) cylinders or varying
diameters of cores or cylinders with length-to-diameter
11.1.3 Assume a 6- by 12-inch cylinder indicated a ratios of 1.0 or 2.0. Regression formulas have been
28-day compressive strength of 3,000 lbf/in 2. To project developed for converting strengths of various size cores
what a 36- by 72-inch (914- by 1829-mm) cylinder would or cubes to equivalent strengths of different size cores or
indicate at 28 days, locate 6-inch diameter on abscissa (fig. 4) cubes in addition to 6- by 12-inch cylinders fabricated and
and project its intersection with curve for factors for cured in the fog room. These derivations are discussed
converting to strength of 36- by 72-inch cylinders. This in USBR 4042.
intersection is approximately at the 82-percent level.
Therefore, 12. Report
(3,000)(0.82) = 2,460 lbf/in 2 (17 MPa)
12.1 Figure 5 shows a typical reporting form. The
11.1.4 Assume a 36- by 72-inch cylinder indicated report shall include:
a 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 lbf/in 2. To project Identification number.
what a 6- by 12-inch cylinder would indicate at 28 days, Diameter and length to nearest 0.01 inch (0.25 mm)
locate 6-inch diameter on abscissa (fig. 4) and project its and 0.1 inch (2.5 mm), respectively.
intersection with the curve for factors for converting to Cross-sectional area in square inches (square
strength of 36- by 72-inch cylinders. This intersection is millimeters).
the same as for the example in 11.1.3 of about 82 percent. Maximum load in pound-force (newtons).
Therefore, Compressive strength calculated to nearest 10 lbf/in 2
(0.1 MPa).
3,000 = 3,659 lbf/in 2 (25.2 MPa) Type of fracture.
0.82
Defects in either specimen or caps.
11.1.5 Assume an 8- by 16-inch (203- by 406-mm) Age of specimen.
cylinder indicated a 28-day compressive strength of 3,000
13. Precision and Bias
lbf/in 2. To project what a 6- by 12-inch or a 36- by 72-
inch cylinder would indicate at 28 days, locate 8-inch
13.1 The precision and bias for this procedure have
diameter on abscissa (fig. 4) and project its intersection
not been determined at this time.
with the curve for strength in percent for 6- by 12-inch
cylinders and the curve for factors for converting to strength 14. Reference
for 36- by 72-inch cylinders. These intersections are
approximately at the 85- and 96.6-percent level, respec- [1] Hutchinson, G. W., et al., Bulletin 16, Lewis Institute,
tively. Applying these percentages to the appropriate curve: Chicago, IL.
94
USBR 4039
Corr. for
Specimen Length (L), Diameter (D), L/D,
No. inches inches Capped Total Comp. Comp. Type
or L/D Area, load, Str., Str., of
1st 2nd Avg. 1st 2nd Avg. Ground Ratio in 2 lbf lbf/in 2 Ibf/in 2 fracture
\ / I
I / / II
I / / II
/ / II
\\.x/I I / II
fl II \\\ /
X\ /
/\
\ /
/ II
/ \ \ II
Cone Cone and Splii" core She" Sheor Columnar
(o) {bl (c) (d) (e)
95
USBR 4039
Corr. for
Specimen Length (L), Diameter (D), L/D,
No. mm mm Capped Total Comp. Comp. Type
or L/D Area, load, Str., Str., of
1st 2nd Avg. 1st 2nd Avg. Ground Ratio m2xl0 "3 kN MPa MPa fracture
84 -2o-.,'.
47..o ff'oA/E
#g 4 a'q
$4-3$.
a"S 4.44
.q.4q
3,4-40-.4"5
w- :J. s' /::..vo 385
Co w-
,ca $ '5
d'owd
\ i I
I / / II
\ / I / / II
\1 I / / II
/ II
/i'<\
/ \ / ), \ /
/\
\ /
/ i
II
II
:
/ \' / \ / \ I i i
Cone Cone and Split Cone and Sheor Shear Columnar
Co) (b) Ic) ld) (e)
SKETCHES OF DIFFERENT TYPES OF FRACTURE
96
@ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
USBR 4040-92
ORGANIC IMPURITIES
IN FINE AGGREGATES FOR CONCRETE
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4040; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This procedure is a modified version of
ASTM designation: C 40-79.
I Annual Book ofASTMStandards, vol. 04.02. 7.1 Sample shall be selected in general accordance with
2 AnnualBook o[ ASTM Standards, vols. 06.01, 06.02, 06.03. USBR 4075.
97
USBR 4040
9. P'rocedure
(Urdrle Co]os ,ltrgar{c Plate No.
.t:;anda rd No.
9,] F:ill a gilas.s b,:tde to @J,e i-l.,"bf]Ulidl ,::mn,,c:e (47,,,,:)u
i30-mL.) level 'a.'idJ, d-e sample (:,f [Me aggregate ,: be'
5 1
tested.
I. :"
9.2 Add a 3-perce'nt Na()H Sl,:;,hMon M water ,Lanti]
]1 [ l ,:s:andaM }
vMme ,:f ii,:le agg:;egare an, d] ]l{qliid , [ndk:ated aftez sMik:[:%
ils 7 f]lciid ,,m,,c:es ,::lb:,.ct 2(1,0 mLi ]4....i
] <; 4
9.3 S,:ql::,.er k:,,,t]e., shake v,igc, r,ous]'.}'., and alk;,w c,, aacal:l.d
for 2:4 b.,:,urs;
9.d Figure 1 sh,:V, lS tl-e lyl:,icall c,quipment used ]in this NIIIE i& SUitab]le ins-rmTlel:lt .c:,3lUls]is-_;. C)l the glass cO]llOr
{i
]CI..1 .S',a'n.d'..ivd' [roced'.efe-It u:i.iqg a ternp,:Ll.ary ZI If: I[l()]ll()r ';-)f Sk]plerElataFZ Equ[d iis dar;.;e thaF]
stardlard so]luti,:,l:l at end ,a,f 24-1o.r sa,ding peri,:ad=, fil{ ef:erence s.an, da>f{ color s.,:,lutiu, n,, th, e fiin, e aggregate ulde
a gLss bottle tu, 2-],/2-iIuidl c,mce Iab, out 75-mE,) level es stT, a]ll be co,s]dlered t,:} p.ossib]y cocatan injiriiouls ,uegaMc
',vM, fresh re:feeql,:e s.tanldardI o:.].lor sc, h.lion=, pre'paed n ,aarnpounds, and fulthe ess SklouId I::,e made: be.fore
Iorger {h:.m 2: b,,:mrs p, revousll'y, as t::,.rescribe, iin, sect[l.n aF,,p>:*ving the fine aggeg;.e f,u.r use in c:oncre:e
52. Them o:wnpae c:,:l,:r all supenaant ]iqLic{ ak:,.,:r,e es.t 1 2 S.lUlions darker than the standard ,C::,l:*]l,l:*r indicate.
s.al::np]e w]i{]-I t:]]LE {af e:fe:eFice Slt;:]lqlll'ld .:l:)]() SOllt]It:ilLH] and presex:le ,:ff ll,ql,:3re thacl 5()'CI, p.ats per mi]lli,::m of tannic
t:eC(:lr.d w}-Jethe,: i:t is; ]light:elL, dab.e, ll:: ()lr ()]f equal ,::,::l,:r {Cl a,c:dl. ] a darke s.,:]]l':ior is ,:E, ta[ned, test sh, old be repe.a:ed
reference Sl{ar]lt]a]l][,l.]. i*l]l7.e ' Cl::ll]<:l]-C(ll]Tjp.kris(j.r] b}l, ll:3]ld:iqlg the ::,,c a represenrailve sarnp.]e ,:f fine aggregate :hat }qlaS been
{ ]al}{ :X blL)l'[[]esi ([)lSe t{x, geltllle an:tit h:aclki!ng {}]rCl.Ughl I]]IelTI. 'r0vaShelC] irll 'ware; ir aCClCiDtlnee! v,,eit-kjl L'SIBR 4117 ta
determiire ,Olvlkle[lelr t]l[S &llaShii']lg re:ln3lOVes cortamiina:]ing
organ, ic c<,,mpla,,urlds. E: solulic, n siilIl remaiins darke tl-an
standard o:,.[,,r, f:rtl-er ,e.sts are req]ired :o ,de.e.rmlire
ratue ,:f: maelriaI and its; effect o.r time-of-setting ae, d
strength i, ff cemert
113 A :]irJe aggregate fai]l]ing this test rna'. be nsed
ill:. v.,hen Ies{ed in aco::>rdance wiih USBR 4gl87:1 rel]ative
mortar srer, grh a ?1 and 28 d,]ys iis; nlot less han 95 [:llercert,
12. Calculations
134 Report
L]' .
@ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
USBR 4042-92
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4042; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 42-84a.
1. Scope. 3. Apparatus
1.1 This designation covers the procedure for 3.1 Core DrilL-This drill is used for obtaining the
obtaining, preparing, and testing cores drilled from concrete cylindrical core specimens. For specimens to be removed
or shotcrete for length and compressive or splitting tensile by drilling downward perpendicular to a horizontal surface,
strength determinations; and beams or cubes sawed from a shot drill may be satisfactory; for specimens taken by
concrete slabs or shotcrete test panels for compressive or drilling in other directions or when test specimen diameter
flexuralstrength determinations. is to be accurately determined for a more precise calculation
of compressive strength, a diamond drill shall be used.
2. Applicable Documents
3.2 Saw.-The saw is used for cutting beam or cube
specimens to size for compressive and flexural strength
2.1 USBR Procedures: tests. Saw shall have a diamond or silicon-carbide cutting
4039 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete edge and shall be capable of cutting specimens which
Specimens conform to the prescribed dimensions, without excessive
4094 Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete heating or shock.
4192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
Laboratory 4. Precautions
4496 Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens 4.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous
4617 Capping Cylindrical Concrete Specimens materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim
2.2 ASTM Standards: to address all safety problems associated with its use. It
C 42 Standard Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish
Cores and Sawed Beams of ConcretO appropriate safety and health practices and determine
C 78 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Concrete (Using Simple Beam With Third-Point Loading)
C 116 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength 5. Sampling
of Concrete Using Portions of Beams Broken in Flexure
C 174 Standard Method for Measuring Length of Drilled
5.1 General:
Concrete Cores 1 5.1.1 Samples of hardened concrete for use in the
2.3 A CI Manual: preparation of strength test specimens shall not be taken
301 Chapter 17, Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete; until concrete has become hard enough to permit sample
and paragraph 17.3.2.1, Core Tests2 removal without disturbing the bond between mortar and
318 Chapter 4, Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete; coarse aggregate. In general, concrete shall be 14 days old
and paragraph 4.8.4.3, Investigation of Low-Strength Test before specimens are removed. Shotcrete may be cored
Results2 or sawed at any age over 24 hours, or as low as 6-hour's
age if it contains a hardening accelerator. When preparing
t AnnualBook ofASTMStandards, vol. 04.02. strength test specimens fromsamples of hardened concrete
2 ACI Manualof Concrete Practice, part 3, "Use of Concrete in Buildings- or shotcrete, samples that show abnormal defects or
Design, Specifications, and Related Topics." Available from American samples that have been damaged in process of removal
Concrete Institute, P O Box 19150, Redford Station, Detroit, Michigan
48219. shall not be used.
99
USBR 4042
5.1.2 Specimens containing embedded reinforce- tested. A shotcrete core having a maximum length of less
ment shall not be used for determining the splitting tensile than 95 percent of its diameter before capping or a length
strength, and specimens for determining flexural strength less than its diameter after capping shall not be tested.
shall not be used if reinforcement is embedded in tensile 9.2 Preparation of Test Specimen.-The ends of core
portion of specimen. specimens to be tested in compression shall be essentially
smooth, perpendicular to longitudinal axis, and of same
NOTE 1.-Cores or cubes, for determining compressive strength, diameter as body of specimen. If necessary, saw or tool
that contain embedded reinforcement can yield either higher or
ends of specimens until the followingrequirements are
lower values than cores or cubes without embedded steel. These
met;
specimens should be avoided if possible or trimmed to eliminate
the reinforcement, provided a length-to-diameter ratio of 1.00 Projections, if any, shall not extend more than 0.2
or more can be attained in cores or a minimum 3-inch (76-mm) inch (5 mm) above end surfaces.
cubed specimen can be obtained from sawing. End surfaces shall not depart from perpendicularity
to longitudinal axis by more than 5 .
5.2 Core Drilling.-A core specimen taken perpendic- Diameters.of ends shall not depart more than 0.1
ular to a horizontal surface shall be located, when possible, inch (2.5 mm) from mean diameter of specimen.
so that its axis is perpendicular to the bed of concrete
as originally placed and not near formed joints or obvious 9.3 Moisture Conditionin&-Submerge the test speci-
edges of a unit of deposit. A specimen taken perpendicular mens in lime-saturated water at 73.43.0 F (23.0+1.7 C)
to a vertical surface, or perpendicular to a surface with for at least 40 hours immediately prior to making
a batter, shall be taken from near the middle of a unit compression test. Test specimens promptly after removal
of deposit, when possible, and not near formed joints or from water storage. During the period between removal
obvious edges of a unit of deposit. from water storage and testing, keep specimens moist by
5.3 Saw Cutcin&-Remove a slab or panel sufficiently covering with a wet blanket of burlap or other suitable
absorbent fabric.
large to secure desired test specimens without the inclusion
of any concrete that has been cracked, spalled, undercut, NOTE 2.-When so directed, cores may be tested in a moisture
or otherwise damaged. condition other than that achievedby the conditioning of section
9.3. Length-to-diametercorrection factors shown in section 9.7
6. Calibration and Standardization
are applicable to both dry and soaked concrete. Direction for
consideration of testing in a moisture condition other than that
6.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- achieved by soaking for at least 40 hours may be found in ACI
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests 301, chapter 17; and ACI 318, chapter 4.
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are
9.4 Capping.-Before making the compression test, cap
covered under that particular procedure or standard directly
or grind ends of specimens in conformance with USBR
or by reference.
4617. The capped surfaces of specimens shall conform to
7. Conditioning the planeness requirements of USBR 4192.
9.5 Measurement.-Prior to testing, determine the
7.1 Conditioning of specimens are described in sections average length by averaging two lengths measured on
9.3, 10.2, 11.2, and 12.2. opposite sides of capped specimen. Determine average
diameter by averaging two measurements taken at right
DRILLED CORES angles to each other about midheight of specimen. Measure
core length and diameters to nearest 0.01 inch whenever
8. Dimensions of Drilled Core Specimens possible, but to at least the nearest 0.1 inch (2.5 mm).
Use these measurements to compute the length-to-
8.1 Diameter and Length.-A core specimen for diameter ratio.
determination of length shall have a minimum diameter NOTE 3.-Most shot-drilled cores will not be smooth enough
of 3 inches (76 mm). Measure the core length in accordance to justifymeasuring diameters closer than the nearest 0.1 inch
with provisions of ASTM C 174. (2.5 mm).
9. Compressive Strength 9.6 Testing.-Test specimens in accordance with
applicable provisions of USBR 4039.
9.1 Test Specimens.-The diameters of core specimens 9.7 Calculations:
for determination of compressive strength should 9.7.1 Calculate compressive strength of each concrete
preferably be at least three times, and must be at least specimen using computed cross-sectional area based on
two times, the maximum nominal size of the coarse average diameter of specimen. If the L/D (length-to-
aggregate used in the concrete. The length of the specimen, diameter ratio) of concrete specimen is appreciably less
when capped, shall be as nearly as practicable twice its than two, make allowance for this by multiplying
diameter. A concrete core having a maximum length of compressive strength by applicable correction factor shown
less than 95 percent of its diameter before capping or in table 1 or by using figure 1 (table 1 is a reciprocal
a length less than its diameter after capping shall not be of figure 1). The ratio of L/D is defined as the overall
100
USBR 4042
Table L-Strengthcorrection factors for variations in LID = 2. Type of fracture, if other than standard.
Moisture condition at time of testing.
LID Factor, LID Factor, Nominal maximum size of aggregate.
percent percent Defects in either specimen or caps.
Age of specimen.
2.25 101.4 1.6 96.8
2.2 101.1 1.5 96.0 10. Splitting Tensile Strength
2.1 100.6 1.4 95.2
2.0 100.0 1.3 94.5
1.9 99.2 1.2 93.1 10.1 TestSpecimens.-The diameters of core specimens
1.8 98.4 1.1 90.0 for determination of splitting tensile strength should
1.7 97.6 1.0 85.0
preferably be at least three times and must be at least
Note: Cylindrical specimens with an LID less than 1.0 may be two times the maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate
broken for information purposes, but are not considered as used in the concrete. The length of the specimen shall
acceptable specimens for strength evaluation. Cylindrical be at least equal to the diameter. The ends of the specimen
specimens with an LID greater than 2.25 should be sawed to shall be essentially smooth and perpendicular to the
an L/Dof 2.0. longitudinal axis. The ends of the specimens shall not be
length of cylinder or core, including cap, divided by average capped.
diameter. 10.2 Moisture Conditioning.-Prior to testing, condi-
9.7.2 Calculate compressive strength of each tion specimens as described in section 9.3.
shotcrete specimen using computed cross-sectional area 10.3 Bearing Surfaces.-The line of contact between
based on average diameter of specimen. If so directed, specimen and each bearing strip shall be straight and free
shotcrete core specimens shall be cut to an L/D of 1.0. of any projections or depressions higher or deeper than
Correction to an L/D of 1.0 from an occasional variation 0.01 inch (0.25 ram). When line of contact is not straight
of that ratio may be applied using table 2. or contains projections or depressions greater than 0.01
Table 2.-Strength correction factors for variations in L/D= 1. inch, grind or cap specimen to produce bearing lines
meeting these requirements (note 4). Do not use specimens
L/D Factor, LID Factor, with projections or depressions greater than 0.1 inch. When
percent percent capping is used, caps shall be as thin as practicable and
119.3 1.3 111.2 shall be formed of high-strength capping compound.
2.25
2.2 118.9 1.2 109.5
118.4 1.1 105.9 NOTE 4.-Figure 2 illustrates a device suitable for applying
2.1
117.6 1.0 100.0 caps to 6-inch (152-mm) diameter specimens to be used in the
2.0
116.7 0.9 96.8 splitting tensile test.
1.9
1.8 115.8 0.8 91.5
85.4 10.4 Testing=Test specimens in accordance with
1.7 114.8 0.7
77.3 applicable provisions of USBR 4496.
1.6 113.9 0.6
112.9 0.5 63.9 10.5 Calculations and Report.-Calculate the splitting
1.5
1.4 112.0 tensile strength, and report the results as required in USBR
4496 (fig. 6). Indicate that the specimen was a core, and
Note: Clyindrical specimens with an L/D less than 0.5 may be show the moisture condition at time of testing.
broken for informational purposes, but are not considered as
acceptable specimens for strength evaluation. Cylindrical
specimens with an LID greater than 1.0 should be sawed to an
LID of 1.0 because of the large correction factor involved. SAWED CUBES
10l
USBR 4042
200
- __ - .........
11.3 Testing.-Apply the load continuously and without
=J I I
shock. Adjust the loading to a constant rate within the ' I
limits of 3515 lbf/in (241+103 kPa) per second. Test
specimens to failure. Record the total load indicated by
testing machine at failure of test specimen. PLAN
102
USBR 4082
103
USBR 4042
Remarks:
104
USBR 4042
Core No.3-SEc.4(/3")Date Placed o-2o - '/ Age/--.5"Dxr.s - Nominal Diameter, inches 2 MSA, inches //
Type of Core: { Concrete [] Interior (Lining) [] Compression and Elasticity
[] Rock [] Exterior [] Direct Tension
105
USBR 4042
106
USBR 4042
Aggregate: MSA __ / inch Source 7"/v M#oo ws A/E ME*Eo/rSp. Gr.: Coarse 2. g 2 Fine 2. G"
Cement: Brand .IDZ'A/. TypezZ/_,el Source PorLAto, Co Sp. Gr. 3./7
Pozzolan: Class #" Supplier/d/Ea'ra-Rw .sa Source PAGEo AZ Sp. Gr. 2.3/
Admixtures:
AEA: Brand A?.L c.'arE A/m Supplier MoilER $aL/E5
ACC: Brand /HEaZU/&D Supplier A4A C-/./$,zl
WRA: Brand P#A 2 XL Supplier/,o rx Z#z/$r/$
Fibers: Type.S'rEE/-Z/mEo(//oo-,aSupplier M/ 7-c /EL /_ -/sECOA/
Mix: Process [] Dry li Wet Fibrous [] Yes [] No Accelerated [] Yes I-I No
Proportions: Coarse Aggregate -9'5"%, Fine Aggregate S'S" %, Cement 5"2; Ibm/yd',
Pozzolon /32 Ibm/yd', Pozzolan Replacement 2 %, W/(C+P) 0.40 , AEA 7 oz/yd6mL-ityd-;-,
WRA -'# oz/cwt-(mL-/qlm, WRA (high range) /3 oz/cwt Fiber Content /O Ibm/yd',
Slump: Before HRWRA inch, After HRWRA -# inch; Air Content 6. o %, Yield 3q3/ lbm/yd
Mix No. / I.D. No. .-7-0.4-2(#)Nozzle Operator D. 5'c/z/z -2 Application Date z-22-7/
Application Times: VP-/ q.'4 a. tm.j VP-2 q.'-3 a. m.j /p-/ /o..// a. a*. 5 /P- /o:Z a. .
Horizontal Application - Degrees Inclined: qo'D,',efc'/-- V"//a,,/za/crA; PA/CA/f: Figure X1.1
Direction of Load Application on Specimen with Respect to Horizontal Plane of Concrete as Placed:.
X-Section Ae Total Load, Compressive
Cube Dimensions Area, Hours Min. Days lbf Strength, Equivalent to
x x inches in lbf/inz . 6- by 12-inch Cyl.
Panel 1, Cube A 3. 0 .3. 05-x 2.qS ./ " 0o 7 oo B'/ &'lO *
B 3.oie..o. oo, .qct 9.o3 g 05 7,06o 74 760 e
C .qqx3.o2x.OO q.o zaO00
D 3.00e3.013.0l q. o3 7 3/ ooo ,4a3 a,330
E 3.023.002.q8 q. og 2# B4, 75O . 8"g 3a 7o
F . aSe . 03 ,e 3. O0 q. 24- 2 3 7' .o85- 3i 60
Panel 2, Cube A 2. q'x 5.05x 5.Oo q. O0 2 /o 6 4-0 $'4"7 #' 0
B 3.00x.qqx 2.qg o.q7 I. qoo /a o2; /, O00
C .qq3.oh,3.ot q.oO 7 2-Oo 3, 76 .3__, "I0
D Z.qgx3.aZx.q7 g,q 7 32,2S'0 , 607 .9,, 5#o
E g.x .04x3.02 .Og 2 41,2'0 4, s5 % 4 z o
F 2.q7x 3.00 ,e 3.03 8. qi 2' 42, 2So 4, 74:, 4b oo
Vertical Application - Degrees Inclined: o /T Y Ov/-/AC
Panel 1, Cube A 6". 8"." 7 5"0 6" .400 qq q30 o*
B 2.@,i'x .a.Olx3.O.- B'. 9 7 7 5"." ,40o q3 qlO
C ,*7xqqxqg F. 'g 7 /, .."o 3, s-/q 3, 4.10
D 3.9Z .q@x 3.04 q. o 7 3 S'oo 3, q..4 $, 8, o
E .Olx .qd .2.q7 o. ql _ _ 2 8" ,,00 4, gZ .6go
F 2.q x 2.7x 3.0 ,#.;78 ZF -2=2Eo ,ta TS'-6" ,Ca E O
Panel 2, Cube A .og x .?gx 3.oK
2.9x 3.03x 2.q7 /. o 6" /o q, goo /, o,'" / o 5o
C 3. off x 3.00 2.q
D 2.qqx3.Olx3.OO
q./. 7 3oo0 2sz 3, 7,o
E 3.O3x2.q?x.3.o"
. oo 7 36 7-o $ s2" 3a g o
@.0 2B 45ooo -.,q7 4#2o
/ F"L...OZ., . St'.
Figure 5a. - Compressive strength of sawed cubes (inch-poundunits). ,./r/ot R #.Xt
107
USBR 4042
Application Times: 1/-/ :4: a. m. ; P-2 q:jz'O a.ta.j /-/P- /O-l l a.tn. ,7 /4P- IO:d2 a,.m.
Horizontal Application - Degrees Inclined: 90 l),'E 7" F/'z, rA PA R l.l. wl.. Figure X 1.1
Direction of Load Application on Specimen with Respect to Horizontal Plane of Concrete as Placed: "1
X-Section Ase Total Load, Compressive
Cube Dimensions Area, Hours Min. Days kN Strength, Equivalent to
x x mm m2 MPa 152- by 305-ram C)'l.
Panel 1, Cube A i?[.ox 77.,<"X 74. q O.O0etl ao 3B. " . 7. 5".."
a.oog3 $" o"
O. oog 7 / Z. .o.q. a" Z 3.5"
D 76". 2 w 7;.5"x 7." / 3 7. 9 2'3.7 3.0o
7. T x T. 2 X 73K. 7
7%x 77.o,x 7g.g /g7. 9 E.I ZZz
Panel 2, Cube A 74. 9 x 7ZJ' 7d. . OO ''o 34.o B'. Eg .. "ZO'
B 7'.Z x 7. 7.. 2 o.#aSTg 40. <l 7. 08" . *'$
Oo o5"" I 7
D 7'. x 7. 7x 76".4" 0.0K'77
E Z..q.?x 77. Zx .7 O.Op6"E, / '." /. 3o.4E
F ?6";4= ;'.z ?.o 9.o.76" /gT.q 32. 7 3 7O
Vertical Application - Degrees Inclined: 0 )/R'C l'/-y OVERI./E'AD
Panel 1, Cube A 7. "x 7. 9 x 7#. @ ,9. 0 "71 ? 50 7. 4
B 7...7x 7.5 77. S O, ##N'Tq 7 K 3 Z4 A.4G 6.2 "
C 7[..4 x 7ff.qx 7.5". 2 d.0072 ? /g/. o
D 7.7xT.5",Tx7Z 0. O0dl 7 I'7. q 27. Z 26.4.0
E 76.x7. x 7.4- O.Oa'7 # /q/. 3 33,,3 33..4o
o.oo7 #" /#'Z q 3 E. . l. ,o
Panel 2, Cube A 7Z 2'x 7.. 7,x 7Zd"
7.7x ?ZO 7.4 0. oo-' 8" io 43.
?Z.#'x 7d.Z X 7. O. OOPl 7 I, 7
O.ObE/ ? I/.
E 77. Ox 7*# x 7'.7 . d'zr/ #" oz.
F 7.*t 7d.Tx 7.. B.*I a/. qO
I k-Z. OZ. =Zg.T mL
Figure 5b. - Compressive strength of sawed cubes (SI-metric). c',.uT"/oV P' A. X/
108
USBR 4042
APPENDIX
X1.1 Shotcrete is frequently applied with a relatively X1.3 Example Calculations Using Table X1.2(a).-
small thickness. To evaluate such shotcrete using drilled Assume a design strength (') of 3,000 lbf/in2 is specified
cores or sawed cubes frequently requires smaller specimen based on the compressive strength of a 6- by 12-inch
sizes than normally used when evaluating concrete. cylinder subjected to standard laboratory curing. Assuming
Regression equations have been developed by the Bureau a coefficient of varation of 15 percent and to ensure the
during research on the relationship between 6- by 12-inch 80 percent of the cylinders exceed f', an average strength
(152- by 305-mm) cylinders, various size cores with length- (f-) of 3,440 lbf/in2 is required. From table X1.2(b), assume
to-diameter ratios of 1.0 and 2.0, and various sizes of cubes. 1 a design strength (fg) of 20 MPa is specified based on
This research included fabricating slabs by pneumatically the compressive strength of a 152- by 305-mm cylinder
applied shotcrete and by normal concrete placement. subjected to standard laboratory curing. Assuming a
Meaningful 6- by 12-inch cylinders could not be made by coefficient of variation of 15 percent and to ensure that
the pneumatically applied shotcrete. Table X1.1 shows a 80 percent of the cylinders exceed f', an average strength
summary of average strength ratios for various specimen (fr) of 22.95 MPa is required. From table XI.1, the ratio
sizes; each ratio was based on 24 data points with each of a 3- by 3-inch core on the Y-axis is 99 percent of a
point being an average of three specimens. Shotcrete 6- by 12-inch cylinder on the X-axis; and a 3- by 3-inch
specimens have more scatter than concrete specimens cube is 98 percent of a 6- by 12-inch cylinder on the X-
because of greater variability in placement; therefore, the axis. Therefore, 0.99 (3,440) = 3,406 (use 3,410) Ibf/in2
data in table X 1.1 were taken only from concrete specimens. or 0.99 (22.95) = 22.72 (use 22.70) MPa strength for a
These data reflect the effect of specimen size and shape 3- by 3-inch core and 0.98 (3,440) = 3,371 (use 3,370)
and also the edge effect from drilling and sawing. These Ibf/in2 or 0.98 (22.95) = 22.49 (use 22.50) MPa strength
relationships would not necessarily hold true for specimens for a 3- by 3-inch cube.
cast in these sizes and shapes. All specimens were subjected X1.4 Tables X1.1 and X1.3 have not been converted
to compressive load applied in the same direction of to metric because metric molds are built to even numbers,
deposition of the concrete. Considerable variation in and the specimen size would be somewhat different from
individual test results were noted, especially in the smaller those shown in the tables. Also, the ratios would be slightly
specimens such as the 2- by 2-inch cores and 2- by 2- different.
inch cubes where the edge effect had significant impact X1.5 A study of the data presented by Rutenbeck in
on the test results. Greater accuracy would be obtained addition to a literature search prompts this author, with
using the regression equations shown in table X1.3 because Rutenbeck's concurrence, to generate a new table based
they reflect changes in ratio at different strength levels. on averages from table X1.1 and projected into specimen
The range of strength of the test specimens in the test -configurations. The specifications should state that a
program was 1,000 to 6,000 lbf/in 2, and tables X1.1 and minimum core diameter of 3 inches and a minimum cube
X1.3 should not be used outside this range. The dimension of 3 inches shall be required because the edge
relationships of strength values of cored and sawed effect from drilling and sawing smaller sized samples is
specimens to the equivalent strength of cast 6- by 12-inch highly significant. Table X1.4 is a simplification of the
cylinders at low strength levels are particularly misleading data shown in table X1.1. In table X1.1, the ratios for
because the regression equations do not go through point similar shaped specimens are nearly the same; e.g., as
zero-zero. The data on 3- by 3-inch concrete cubes appear compared to a 6- by 12-inch cast cylinder, all three drilled
to be flawed with no logical explanation. Data from the core sizes with a L/D of 2.0 have nearly the same ratio
shotcrete specimens (data not included) place the 3- by as all the drilled cores with a L/D of 1.0. The same is
3-inch cubes between the 4- by 4-inch cubes and the 2- true of the three cube sizes with the exception of the 3-
by 2-inch cubes, which seems to be more reasonable. Except by 3-inch cubes, which are about 10 percent different from
for the 3- by 3-inch cubes, there is good agreementbetween the other two cube sizes. It is not known if the 3-inch
the concrete and shotcrete specimens. cube ratios reflect an error in testing procedure or a real
X1.2 If sawed or drilled shotcrete cubes or cores are strength difference due to an unknown physical pheno-
used to monitor construction strength requirements, the menon. This author assumes that a testing error could
required average strength must also be modified in be involved and, for reasons of logic and simplicity, chooses
accordance with table X1.2 for the design requirement of to average these values. Table X1.4 shows the results of
the percentage of strength required to exceed the design averagingthe ratios for specimens assumedto be the same.
strength, and the coefficient of variation obtained on the Because laboratory testing has shown (ACI SP-54,
construction work. Rutenbeck) significantly higher coefficients of variation for
2-inch specimens, this procedure does not recommend the
I Rutenbeck, T, "Shotcrete Strength Testing-Comparing Results of use of 2-inch specimens and the data for this size were
Various Specimens," ACI Publication SP-54, Shorcrete for Ground not used in the preparation of table X1.4. The ratios for
Support, 1977.
the remaining specimens were averaged, assuming that
109
USBR 4042
the results on the 4- by 8-inch and 3- by 6-inch cores 6- by 12-inch cylinder of 3,440 lbf/in 2 indicated on the
to be identical, results on the 4-by 4-inch and 3- by 3- X-axis should yield on the Y-axis:
inch cores to be identical, and results on 4- by 4-inch and
3- by 3-inch cubes to be identical. Data on the cast cylinders
(3,440)(0.86) = 2,958, use 2,960 lbf/in 2 for a core
(fig. 4 of USBR 4039) indicate that specimens with a LID
with a LID of 2.0
of 2.0 show increasing strengths as the specimen size gets (3,440)(1.01) = 3,474, use 3,470 lbf/in 2 for a core
smaller. It appears that, for drilled or sawed specimens, with a LID of 1.0
this effect is offset by surface damage that occurred during (3,440)(1.04) = 3,578, use 3,580 lbf/in 2 for a cube
the cutting process. As the specimen size decreases, the
percentage of damage from cutting increases the offsetting
of the strength increase. Table X1.4 represents specimens Conversely, whatever size or shape of specimen provided
of identical curing conditions, and does not reflect possible for compressive strength determinations, that size and
differences in laboratory curing of the 6- by 12-inch shape could be substituted into the X-axis of table X1.4
cylinders versus the field curing of structures or panels utilizing the average conversion factor to analyze
from which the cubes or cores are taken. Referring to compliance with the specifications for whatever compres-
discussion on r in section X1.3 and using table X1.4, sive strength that was specified for whatever configuration
to hieve an equivalent compressive strength for the of specimen was selected.
Table XI.1. - Summary of average strength ratios, Y/X, of various specimen sizes. SM-74 Series (concrete
slabs).
6x12 4x8 3x8 2x4 4x4 3x3 2x2 4x4 3x3 2x2
.3 ylinder Core Core Core Core Core Core Cube Cube Cube
8x12 1.15 1.17 1.13 0.97 1.01 1.03 0.91 1.02 0.97
Cylindel
4x8 0.87 1.02 0.98 0.84 0.87 0.89 0.78 0.89 0.84
Core
3x6 0.85 0.98 0.97 0.83 0.88 0.87 0.77 0.88 0.82
Core
o
uJ
.I-
O 2x4 0.88 1.02 1.04 0.88 0.89 0.90 0.80 0.91 0.85
Z
-- Core
z
D
uJ
N 4x4 1.03 1.19 1.21 1.17 1.03 1.05 0.93 1.05 0.99
Core
z
I,kl
3X3 0.99 1.15 1.17 1.13 0.97 1.02 0.90 1.02 0.98
0 Core
IJJ
0.
0
2x2 0.97 1.12 1.14 1.11 0.95 0.98 0.89 1.00 0.94
Core
4x4 1.10 1.28 1.29 1.24 1.07 1.09 1.13 1.12 1.06
Cube
3x3 0.98 1.13 1.14 1.09 0.95 0.98 1.00 0.89 0.95
Cube
2x2 1.04 1.19 1.22 1.17 1.01 1.04 1.08 0.94 1.08
Cube
110
USBR 4042
Table Xl.2a. - Average strength that must be maintained to meet design requirements (inch-pound units).
NOTE: For an explanation on how this table was developed, see appendix X1 of USBR 4094.
111
USBR 4042
Table X1.2b. - Average strength that must be maintained to meet design requirements (SI-metric units).
112
USBR 4042
Table X1.3. - Summary of slope and intercept values for linear regression equations. The slope is the
top value shown in each block and the intercept is the bottom value. SM-74 Series (concrete slabs).
8x12 4x8 3x8 2x4 4x4 3x3 2x2 4x4 3x3 2x2
ylinde Core Core Core Core Core Core Cube Cube Cube
8x12 1.410 1.594 1.351 1.190 1.164 1.235 1.046 1.209 1.011
,3 ylindef -927 - 782 -796 "925 "652 -846 - 634 " 740 - 199
4X8 0.676 0.988 0.934 0.835 0.816 0.857 0.712 0.819 0.695
Core 796 104 182 39 234 132 323 263 613
3x8 0.629 0.931 0.912 0.786 0.796 0,849 0.702 0.835 0.675
Core 926 186 201 185 254 103 326 174 634
o3
bJ
j 2x4 0.668 0.964 0.999 0.830 0,830 0.880 0.760 0.906 0.729
Z Core 888 193 129 121 238 99 200 30 526
Z
4x4 0.795 1.165 1.164 1,122 0.970 1.017 0.855 1.009 0.851
IJ.I
N Core 965 73 148 159 264 152 341 177 608
bJ
0.. 2x2 0.710 1.029 1.081 1.024 0.875 0.887 0.794 0,9-05 0.780
U) Core 1099 343 221 298 315 387 400 366 692
4x4 0.872 1.333 1.301 1.244 1.123 1.094 1.174 1.125 0.936
Cube 946 -202 -37 -4 -203 63 -176 -3 531
3x3 0,696 1.075 1.041 0.989 0.909 0.905 0.962 0,824 0.752
Cube 1134 185 332 376 163 297 154 286 799
2x2 0.778 I.II5 1.150 1.134 0.978 0.947 1.043 0.872 0.944
Cube 1073 288 231 150 127 393 80 313 445
Example: The linear regression analysis plot with 2-by q-inch core strength on
the X-axis and 3-by 6-inch core strength on the Y-axis has o slope
of 0.912 and on interceptof 201. Therefore, the linear regression
equation is Y:0.912X+ 201 for strengthsin pound force per square inch.
113
USBR 4O42
I,tJ 3x6
N and 086 1.00 0.85 0.83
4x8
Z Cores
i,i
:E
(.)
3x3
txl and 1.01 1.18 1.00 0.98
(1.
(/)
4x4
Cores
3x3
and 1.04 1.21 1.03 I .00
4 x4
Cubes
Example I: A 6-by 12-inch cylinder on the X-axis is fabricated and cured by a standard
laboratory procedure to an average strength (fcr) of 5,440 Ibf/in2. By
configuration , the required strength on the Y-axis would be:
For L/D=2.0,Y=(0.86)(3,440)=2,960 Ibf/in2
For L/D= 1.0 ,Y= (I .01 )(5,440)= 3,470 Ibf/in2
For o cube , Y=(I.04)(3,440)= 3,580 Ibf/inz
Example 4: A 3-by 3-by 3-inch cube on X-axis with fcr = 3,600 Ibf/in2:
For o cylinder, Y=(0.97) (3,600)= 3,490 Ibf/in 2
For L/D = 2.0, Y=(0.83) (3,600)=2,990 I bf/in2
For L/D = 1.0, Y=(0.98) (3,600)=3,530 Ibf/in 2
114
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR ()
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
SAMPLING AGGREGATES
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4075; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: D 75-82.
115
USBR 4075
5.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous 8.2 Sampling From Conveyor Belt.-Select units to be
materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim sampled from the production by a random method, such
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It as ASTM D 3665. Obtain at least three approximately
is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish equal increments, selected at random, from unit being
appropriate safety and health practices and determine sampled and combine to form a field sample whose mass
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. equals or exceeds the minimum mass recommended in 8.5.
Stop conveyor belt while sample increments are being
obtained. Insert two templates, the shape of which
6. Securing Samples conforms to shape of belt in aggregate stream on belt,
and space them such that material contained between them
6.1 GeneraL-Where practicable, samples to be tested will yield an increment of required mass. Carefully scoop
forquality shall be obtained fromfinishedproduct. Samples all material between templates into a suitable container,
from finishedproduct to be tested for abrasion loss shall and then collect the fines on the belt with a brush and
not be subject to further crushing or manual reduction dustpan and add this material to the container.
in particle size preparation unless size of finishedproduct 8.3 Sampling From Stockpiles or Transportation
is such that it requires further reduction for testing Unirs.-Avoidsampling coarse aggregate or mixed coarse
purposes. and fine aggregate from stockpilesor transportation units
6.1.1 The task of obtaining truly, representative wheneverpossible,particularlywhen samplingis done for
samples of aggregate is complicated because of the purposeof determiningaggregate propertiesthat may be
segregation that takes place when aggregate is handled dependentupongradingof sample. If circumstancesmake
or moved. The sampling procedures in section 8 describe it necessary to obtain samples from a stockpile of coarse
methods which, if carefully adhered to, will generally aggregate or a stockpile of combined coarse and fine
compensate for segregation. aggregate, design a samplingplan for specific case under
6.2 Inspection.-Material shall be inspected to deter- consideration.This approach will allow sampling agency
mine discernible variations. The contractor or manufacturer to use a sampling plan that will give a confidencein the
shall provide suitable equipment needed for proper obtainedresults that is agreed uponby all partiesconcerned
inspection and sampling. to be acceptablefor the particularsituation.The sampling
116
USBR 4075
plan shall define number of samples necessary to represent Table 1. - Size of samples.
lots and sublots of specific sizes. General principles for
sampling from stockpiles are also applicable to sampling Maximum nominal Approximate minimum
from trucks, rail cars, barges,or other transportation units. size of aggregate2 mass of field samples
inches (mm) Ibm ()
For general guidance in sampling from stockpiles, see
appendix X1. Fine Aggregate
8.4 Sampling From Roadway (Bases and Subbases).-
Sample units selected from the productionby a random No. 8 (2.36) 0.8 (0.4)
method, such as ASTM D 3665. Obtain at least three No. 4 (4.75) 0.8 (0.4)
approximatelyequal increments,selected at random from Coarse Aggregate
unit being sampled, and combine to form a field sample 1/4 (6.3) 2 (1.0)
whose mass equals or exceeds the minimum mass 3/8 (9.5) 2 (1.0)
recommended in 8.5. Take all incrementsfromthe roadway 1/2 (12.5) 3 (1.25)
for the full depth of the material, taking care to exclude 3/4 (19.0) 10 (4.50)
any underlyingmaterial. Clearly mark specificareas from 1 (25.0) 22 (10)
which each incrementis to be removed; a metal template 1-1/4 (31.5) 45 (20)
placed over the area is a definite aid in securing I-1/2 (37.5) 80 (40)
2 (50) 175 (80)
approximatelyequal incrementmasses.
2-1/2 (63) 360 (160)
8.5 Number andMasses ofField Samples:
3 (75) 600 (280)
8.5.1 The number of field samples, obtainedby one 3-1/2 (90) 1,020 (460)
of the methods described in 8.1 through 8.4, required 4 (100) 1,400 (640)
dependson the criticalityof, and variationin, the properties 4-1/2 (115) 2,120 (960)
to be measured. Designate each unit from which a field 4-3/4 (120) 2,400 (1 100)
sample is to be obtained prior to sampling. The number 5 (125) 2,720 (1 240)
of field samples from the productionshould be sufficient 5-I/2 (140) 3,820 (1 740)
to give desiredconfidencein test results. 6 (150) 4,700 (2 140)
7 (175) 7,460 (3 380)
NOTE 4.-Guidance for determining number of samples 8 (200) 11,200 (5 200)
required to obtain desired level of confidence in test results may 9 (225) 15,860 (7 200)
be found in ASTM E 105, E 122, and E 141. 10 (250) 21,820 (9 900)
11 (275) 28,800 (13 060)
8.5.2 The field sample masses previously discussed 12 (300) 37,600 (17 200)
are tentative; masses must be predicted on type and number 18 (450) 126,400 (57 400)
of tests to which material is to be subjected and sufficient
i This table is based on data in USBR 5325, which established
material obtained to provide for the proper execution of
minimum size samples for gradation analysis. It is assumedthat,
these tests. Standard acceptance and control tests are under sampling conditions such as test pits or stockpiles, four
covered by Bureau standards and specify the portion of times the minimum gradation size sample would be required.
the field sample required for each specific test. Generally, Under more controlled conditions, such as a belt sample or samples
amounts specified in table 1 will provide adequate material from batcher bins, two times the minimum gradation size sample
would probably assure adequate material for split-down.
for routine grading and quality analysis. Extract test 2 For processed aggregate,the maximum nominal size of particles
portions from field sample according to USBR 4702 or is the largest sieve size listed in the applicablespecifications upon
as required by other applicable test methods. which any material is permitted to be retained.
9. Shipping Samples
10.1 No specific calculations are involved in this 12.1 Because of the nature of this test procedure, a
procedure; however, figure 2 shows a typical calculation precision and bias determintation is not possible.
117
USBR 4O75
SAMPLING AGGREGATES
Name
Ownership
Location
[] Developed [] Undeveloped
Distance From Proposed Construction
Type of Roads
[] Sketch of Quarry Attached
Dimensions of Source
Quantity and Character of Overburden
Signature
118
USBR 4075
Feature ,..,
toosw-Lr DAM IPrjectc'''r, eA,' ,AAIZo,4c'A I SpecificatinsDEs/GN ST"AGE
[WAggregate [] Riprap f-I Other: Sample No. -772,
TEST: 12Petrographic Freeze and Thaw Durability Date Received 9-J'-8.."
[Routine Aggregate Ioncrete Processed by A/, .3W',ac$o,a jL..- ro Io-l-oS
[] Routine Riprap [] Riprap Tested by /,aJSow JO-I 7- 8S
[] Other: Computed by At'. -TCHSoN do-J?-gJ"
Checked by A. ,'S //-4-d'S
Sample Source: ,#"ro CEdc (jlr-Aa/)- ASoa r 12 , s EST oF oos4V'L " At
Lo ra /N T. $ A. . 13 E. GIlA Ao SAt_r lv' MEAo IAAt --JqlMtSrAdrO XF
FoeEr S'g c
GRAVEL or RIPRAP
Grading - USBR 4136 24-Hour Specific Gravity and Absorption - USBR 4127
Nominal Mass Percent Test Sample Mass B-A B
Size Fraction Retained Retained B C B-C A ff---(100) B- C
SSD Mass SSD Mass Displaced Mass of Absorption
Inches in Air, in Water, Mass of Os,endry Mass of iAbsorption, SSD Bulk
or Ibm Water, Sample in Air, Water,
Specific
No. -m-n'r. ..k.g.-" Indiv. Cumol grams grams grams grams grams
percent Gravity
6+ 150+
3 to6 75 to 150
1 to3 37.5 to 75 Io4.i 2.7 7 '73 t7q4 IOTel 84o 33 I. Ig . gg
to 1 19.0 to 37.5 ll.q 6 .-
.7
gs toga 9.5 to 19.0 i/o4 1 "74 183 1187 g?
No. 4 to /8 4.75 to9.5 o$" 6 I00 14 o,et. ggB S' I 2oo
Total Gravel Mass . 7 No. 4 to 1 inches 4.75 to 37 5 mm
FM (Fineness Modulus) Z '4- Average Weighted Average Weighted
Sand Mass S. Specific Gravity 2. g4" , '4 a, g,, '. d3
Total Sample Mass Absorption, % 1..3 I ]o .1 /. J" ]..4.
Percent Sand b"4-
Los Angeles Abrasion - USBR 4131 Grading B C D - USBR 4535 [] Grading 1 2 3
Mass Retained
Mass, grams Revolutions No. 12 ( 1.70 mm), grams Mass Loss, grams Percent Loss
USBR 4131 Test Sample 5000 100 G Jg @ 2. ."o 24
Abrasive Charge N'or OEr 500 3 783 ,' ,2/7 ,?-"q-. 34-
Test Sample 2O0
USBR 4535
Abrasive Charge 1000
SAND
Nominal Grading (As Received) USBR 4136 Grading (Washed) USBR 4136
Sieve Sample No. 1 Sample No. 2 Average Sample No. 1 Sample No. 2 Average
Size Mass Mass
Ret. % Retained Ret., % Retained % Retained Mass
Ret., % Retained Mass
Ret., % Retained % Retained
grams Cum. Indiv. grams Cure. lndiv. Indiv. Cum. grams Cum. Indiv. grams Cum. indiv. Indiv Cum.
* No. 4 g4..2-g.em O o O o o o 0 o o o o o o o O O
No. 8 (2L-3(.m 14 / 7 17 /.1 /7 /7 /7 /7 /31 17 17 II 17 17 17 17
No. 16 ,,,l.g-mw) q/P 30, 2I E$'4 3q 'Z e/.s 3.5 284 3g 21 273 31 27. gS.K 3g."
No. 30 () JOg 4 g 470 dS 2(, 8 dq.K 47" [,3 2S" 44.[ g4 z" " g3."
No. 50 m0-mm dooS g,,o 4 g37 ,Poe 23 e3." gg 4 tPg Z3 gol 8d 8Z
No. 100 71 97 q 70:' 7 I q q7 73/ 77 11 73 /7 11 /1 q7
No. 200 (75/am)
Pan 781 /00 7.. /oo 75"4 1oo g]6 IOO
FM 3. 04 3. og 3. o" .3. ol 3. o -.oZ
Washed Mass ** [ -- ** Organic Imourities - USBR 4040
* Indicates oversize L. As Received Clear 2 3 (Std.) 4 5
** Indicates mass for USBR 4117 COLOR I7 Washed Clear 1 2 3 (Std.) 4 5
Material Passing 24-Hour Specific Gravity and Absorption - USBR 4128 Remarks:
No. 200 (75-pro) Sieve Sample [] As Received Washed
USBR 4117
Specific Gravity Absorption
Test Sample Mass Jar No, / Water Temp. = _ F.t,.C Sample Mass
Dry (B) = I"o 3 SSD Samp'/e Mass (B) = 7/4.- SSD (B) = 730. E
Washed 1C) = IO Jar Calibration Mass (E) =/38- Dr), (A) = 73.
Minus No. 200 (75 .tim) Total Mass (B +E) = O4"Z. Absorption,
(-c) = K. Jar Sample Mass, Water (F) = / 7 ?0 Water (B- A) =7.
Passing No. 200 ") Displacement (B+ E- F) =. '. 4 Absorption,
Specific Gravity (--ff-_F) = e.71 B-A
A (100) = /" O '
119
USBR 4075
Sodium Sulfate Soundness - USBR 4088 Low Density Pieces -. USBR 4123
Bowl No. 22 Start Date 10-1-8" Results Date 10 -II-8,
Solution . Fresh [] Reused Cycles 5 (Std.) [] Other {19.0 (4.75-9.5 ram)
io
3A-I inch
Total Weighted 119.0-37.5
m_.._n )
GRAVEL - RIPRAP
inch
No.4 (4.75 ram) 20 40
s3e.7
lO.
4_;,4_.8
]ol
Total Weighted I00 100 -- --
QUALlTY EXAMINATION - COARSE SIZES
Sieve l Total Splitting Cracking Flaking
Si......e [ Particles Gravel CI./FP
2 inch (63 ram) ] Total Weighted Percent =
I inch t37.5 [ Moisture Content of Aggregate - USBR 4566
% inch (19.0 ram) I No.4- Y8 inch saFnd
14.75-9.5 mm)
Average
.o. S'q$"
Weighted
8. 5q
T;72r (-rr-0.m
T
Specific Gravity
Absorption I. 34 I. 3." EN
FM = 2.74
SAND 30-Minute Specific Gravity and Absorption - USBR 4128 Net Absorption (at time of mix), percent
Material Passing Specific Gravity Absorption % Net Abs. = % Abs. - % RM (Residual Moisture)
No. 200 (75-gm)
Sieve Jar No. __ Water Temp. = Sample Mass Size Fraction Net Abs.
USBR 4117 SSD Sample Mass (B) = SSD (B) = ., 1 Ys-.% inch (9.5-19.0 ram)
Test Sample Mass Jar Calib. Mass (E) = Dry (A) =882. No.4- Ys inch (4.75-9.5
Dry (B) = 8OOoO Total Mass (B+ E) = Weighted Gravel
Washed (C) =7el3, 0 Absorption,
Jar Sample, Water (F) = Sand (FM = 2.74)
Minus No. 200 (75 pm) Water (B- A ) =/8o"
Displacement (B + E- F) = Freeze-Thaw Specimens - Date Cast __
(B- C) = 7, o
Passing No. 200 (75 /am Specific Gravity Absorption Strength, Mass Loss,
lbf/in 2 (MPa) percent Cycles
-- (100) =/.4g %
Remarks:
120
USBR 4075
Date Letter Transmitted Ao'G#$r lqS? Section __ Township 3,4/' ReviewedbyG'" 1. DgPo'Y
Branch File No. C- 1418 Range/3 E Meridian IA ff.q'rsv'f
Submitted by..'S " P/'APCf
QUALITY EVALUATION
IConcrete Aggregate [] Riprap [] Filter Material
State AAlgot'A Region /' C Source No. Latitude 3 N' Longitude /10 14/
Sample No. M- 772' t Date Received -$"-8" MaterialSA'DC'GA'AIc'Z Max. Size Sampled ,3 inches
VisualEstimateofPlus ,3 -inch IJ'CM,S/zE ECCoH?/EO o To 30 IeCSS"
Source Name Overburden N'or Gs w', Volume o o'$/,0/.*/o ' yd,g, rr)
Remarks:
TEST RESULTS
Sieve Analysis - USBR 4117 and 4136 Nominal Sieve Size Fractions '-'1, /g, 3/o,8 _ Fine ;Washed
Fine
Sieve Cumulative Percent Retained No., inches, or mm /'/h /tck* scA A,a.4 Agg. Agg
Size, Gravel, Sand, Sand, Organic Impurities , /
No., inch, or mm As Rec'd. Unwashed Washed USBR 4040
G Low Density Pieces
Specific Gravity - USBR 4123
R
A 3-/n,' 0 Specific Gravity
USBR4127,4128 2.[,g 2.1,7 2.g2 2. gO 2.71
v I/a-,'a,,,4 a?.
Absorption, percent
USBR4127.4128 1, LO 1, g L4 I.I
L 3/AP'/nc'A 74"
Nb. * /oo o o Clay Lumps and Friable
]v'o. 5, I 17
Particles, percent - USBR 4142 A/OT re:'reo
Sodium Sulfate Soundness
S Ae. 1 39 35' [ USBR 4088 [] ASTM C88 q --
A A/o+. o S" Solution: 1' Fresh [] Reused
N IV'o. $'a #8 8g No. of cycles
D ffo. lOO q? q7 Effect of Organic Impurities on Strength of Mortar - USBR 4087
N'o. 20o Grading: [] Standard Average Strength Ratio of Fine Aggregate for Untreated to
Pi 1oo Ioo [] Other Treated Condition
Fineness Modulus "I,-4"4 ,,0 __ Day
Percent Sand ,'4" 7-Day A/'o 7"
Percent Fines 3. 5" Compressive Strength, lbf/in 2 (kPa)
__ Day TffSTED
IPlain Water
28-Day
Washed IOvendried
Potential Alkali Reactivityof Cement-Aggregate Combinations - USBR 4227
Sand [] Wetting Agent
[] Rapid Drying Sand Gravel
Figure 3. - Typical reporting form for quality evaluation of concrete aggregate, riprap, and filter material (sheet 1 of 2).
121
USBR 4075
The gravel, primarilysubrounded in shape withabout29 percent flatand/orelongatedparticles and about2 percent
calcium carbonate and sandgrain coated particles,is composed primarily ofgranite and quartzosesandstone with
lesseramountsofaltered volcanics,gabbro, glassy volcanics,basalt, chert, and limestone.About2 percentphysically
unsoundmaterial and 11 percentpotentiallyalkali-reactivechert and glassy volcanicparticles are present. The
sand, subroundedto angular in shape, is composed of decreasingamounts of the rock types found in the gravel
and increasingamountsofmonomineralic grains of quartz, feldspar, amphibole,pyroxene,mica, chlorite, magnetite,
zircon, calcite, and iron oxides with a few miscellaneousdetritalminerals in the finer sizes. About 2 percent
physicallyunsoundmaterialand 4 percent potentiallyalkali-reactivechert andglassy volcanicparticles are present
in the coarse sand.
Conclusions : Aggregate comparable to sample No. M-7724 is suitable for use in concrete provided the sand is
washed to remove excess silt, propergradings are obtained, andlow-alkali cement is used.
Figure 3. - Typical reporting form for quality evaluation of concrete aggregate, riprap, and filter material Isheet 2 of 2 ).
122
USBR 4075
Branch File No. C-r " As$/t,gO Range Meridian 'tg,ffl,,e,4L7 " R/y' Submitted by.T" PIERC6"
MISCELLANEOUS PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF MINERAL AGGREGATE
4_D . o
IiK'Concrete Aggregate [] Filter Material [] Subbase Course [] Base Course [] Asphaltic Concrete Aggregate [] Other
State AR/ZOMA Region LC Source No. ..-x..-- Latitude AZoT G/VEAl Longitude toT" G/v''N
Sample No. M- 74 Date Received ,4-5"-o Material PsT-Ra SIIG Max. Size Sampled .3 inches-4m*r
Visual Estimate of Plus 3 -inch ,4/'o 7" lE
Source Natne9 vs'"/4/Ashy Overburden A,r /y''v Volume At'or /V'EN' yd (m )
Remarks:
TEST RESULTS
Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse A$sreates - USBR 4136
Materials Finer Than No. 200 (75-#m) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washin$ - USBR 4117
Washed Sample: i.cE (mm3 Thru No. 200 (-7--5-m [ Plain Water [] Wettin,g Asent
[Ovendried Cumulative Percent liRetained [] Passing
Fl Rapid Drying MSA /, 3/4 - /_ No. 4 No. 8 No. 10 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No.100 No.200
inches Pan
Sample Description t ;g s' "-Sa*m _.aZmm Im 600win 500m SO*n
As ,c s/wa'
.S"4 % Sand % Silt Fineness Modulus: Coarse 7. S'4 Fine: Washed 3. 0.4- Unwashed .. I
Remarks: 3" To I -I,VC/.I S g Z" A'o ''Eo AEC,Ca'E #",qwl,, Io o .5".,q,," " .4o's.,#o I"o
" .S'APv)" A 3" AV'ET -,',,*,gE, .S'/E I/'. W'E//- ,,'E,,4'C'H ,,, A,,S-'' o t T,>v''/o/o," 3fS-//cA.
123
USBR 4075
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
XI.1 Scope aggregate, the outer layer, which may have become
segregated, should be removed and sample taken from
X1.1.1 In some situations, it is mandatory to sample material under the outer layer. Sampling tubes of about
aggregatesthat have been stored in stockpiles or loaded 1-1/4 inches (30 mm) minimum diameter by about 6 feet
into rail cars, barges, or trucks. In such cases, the sampling (2 m) minimum length may be inserted into pile at random
method should ensure that segregation does not introduce locations to extract a minimum of five increments of
a serious bias into the results. material to form sample.
X1.2.1 In sampling material from stockpiles, it is very X1.3.1 In sampling coarse aggregates from railroad
difficult to ensure unbiased samples because of the cars or barges, effort should be made to use power
segregation which often occurs when material is stockpiled; equipment capable of exposing the material at various levels
coarser particles usually roll to outside base of pile. For and random locations. Where power equipment is not
coarse or mixed coarse and fine aggregate, every effort available, a common method requires excavation of three
should be made to use power equipment to develop a or more trenches across the unit at points that will, from
separate, small sampling pile composed of materials drawn visual appearance, give a reasonable estimate of charac-
from various levels and locations in main pile. Then, several teristics of load. The trench bottom should be about level,
increments may be combined to compose the field sample. and at least I foot (0.3 m) wide and 1 foot deep. A minimum
If necessary to indicate degree of variability existing within of three increments from approximately equally spaced
main pile, separate samples should be drawn from separate points along each trench should be taken by pushing a
areas of pile. shovel down into the material. Coarse aggregatein trucks
X1.2.2 Where power equipment is not available, should be sampled in essentially the same manner as rail
samples from stockpiles should be made up of at least cars or barges, except for adjusting the number of
three increments taken from top third, midpoint, and increments according to size of truck. For fine aggregate
bottom third of pile volume. A board pushed vertically in transportation units, sampling tubes, as described in
into pile just above sampling point aids in preventing section X1.2.2, may be used to extract an appropriate
further segregation. In sampling stockpiles of fine number of increments to form sample.
X2.2.1 Inspection.-The ledge or quarry face should be X2.2.3 Report.-A typical reporting form is shown on
inspected to determine discernible variations or strata. figure 3. In addition to the general information accom-
Differences in color and structure should be recorded. panying all samples, the following information should be
X2.2.2 Sampling and Size of Sample.-Samples of at recorded for samples taken from ledges or quarry faces:
least 600 lbm (272 kg) should be obtained from each
discernible stratum being investigated. The sample should Approximate quantity available. If quantity is very
not include material weathered to such an extent that it large, this may be recorded as practically unlimited.
is no longer suitable for purpose intended. One or more Quantity and character of overburden.
124
USBR 4075
Boundaries and locationof material represented by upon quantity of material needed, topography of area,
each sample. nature of deposit, character of material, and Potential value
of material in deposit. If visual inspection indicates there
NOTE X2.2.-A test pit log showing thickness and location
is considerable variation in material, individual samples
of different layers is recommended for this purpose, see
should be selected from material in each vcell-defined
figure X2.1.
stratum. If necessary, each sample should be thoroughly
X2.3 Sampling Roadside or Bank-Run Sand and mixed and quartered so that field sample thus obtained
will contain at least 200 Ibm (90 kg) of sand, 200 Ibm
Gravel Deposits
of 3/4-inch (19.0-mm) nominal maximum size aggregate,
and 100 Ibm (45 kg) each of all other nominal aggregate
X2.3.1 Inspection.-Potential sources of bank-run sand
sizes being investigated. Figure X2.2 shows a proposed
and gravel deposits may include previously worked pits
layout of samples as taken from a pit, and figure X2.3
from which there is an exposed face, or potential deposits
shows a typical grading sheet from test pit samples.
discovered through aerial photography interpretation,
X2.3.3 Report.-Figures 3 and 4 show typical reporting
geophysical exploration, or other types of terrain
forms. In addition to the general information accompanying
investigation.
all samples, the following information should be recorded
X2.3.2 Sampling.-Samples should be chosen from each
for samples of bank-run sand and gravel:
different stratum in the deposit discernible to the sampler.
An estimate of the quantity of different materials should
be made. If deposit is worked as an open-face bank or Location of supply.
pit, samples should be taken by channeling the face Estimate of approximate quantity available.
vertically, bottom to top, so as to represent materials Quantity and character of overburden.
proposed for use. Overburden or disturbed material should Length of haul to proposed site of work.
not be included in sample. Test holes should be excavated Character of haul (kind of road, maximum grades,
or drilled at numerous locations in the deposit to determine etc.).
quality of material and extent of deposit beyond exposed Extent and location of material represented by each
face, if any. The number and depth of test holes will depend sample (note X2.2).
3,250
3,24O
3,230
3,220 --
321o
F-
gd 3,200
t*/
h. 3,190
Z t Foot =O.3048 meter
3,1 eo
Z
O
3,170
I--
<t 14%S
> 3,160
UJ
_J
taJ 3,t50
3,14o
3,130
,12o
3,1.10
3,00
125
USBR 4075
SIEVED MATERIAL
I inch=25.4 mm
I foot=0.3048m Test pits in deposits that ore
not stratified to a marked
I SIEVING deEree may be divided into
5- foot (l.5-m) depths for size
TEST PIT[ I AND MASS separotion.
DETERMINATION If deposit strotified, depths should
be used thor generolly correspond
I to the stratifoction of the materiols.
I_
Figure X2.2. - Sand and gravel from a test pit stored in" systematically arranged piles that facilitate sampling
and inspection.
126
USBR 4075
k/atew Pag/e aP o.o feet. amlos ased riot. 'amp/,'a 3 e/ow woige
,5'aacp ]ed Ay atraA'e aeke#
Lem# / o/e was 2&o
sa/e Ado. I wa$ aavtAeol A/o. 2 was
Figure X2.3. - Sample of a systematic and comprehensive form for recording test pit exploration data.
127
..... @ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
" BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4087-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4087; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 87-83.
128
USBR 4087
clearance, the oversized particles shall be removed by and rinsed aggregate with a suitable indicator such as
sieving on the No. 4 (4.75-mm) or No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieves. phenolphthalein or litmus to assure that all sodium
If this procedure is employed, the report shall so state hydroxide has been removed prior to preparation of mortar.
and shall indicate quantity of material so removed. The samples (as tested) shall normally have a standard
grading (2.74 fineness modulus), as shown in table 1. If
NOTE 1.-Caution: The clearance between paddle and mixing fine aggregate samples (as tested) have a nonstandard
bowl, as specified in USBR 4305, is suitable when using standard grading, the difference in the fineness modulus between
mortar made with Ottawa Sand. To permit mixer to operate the two comparative samples shall not exceed 0.10.
freely and to avoid serious damage to paddle and bowl when
coarser aggregatesare used, it may be necessary to set clearance
Table l.- Standard sand grading.
adjustment bracket to provide a greater clearance than specified.
A clearance of about 4 mm is required in USBR 4305; a clearance Sieve size Grading,
of about 5 mm has been found to be satisfactory for this procedure Passing Retained on percent
when used with fine aggregate from which material retained
on No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve has been removed. No. 4 (4.75 ram) No. 8 (2.36 mm) 15
No. 8 (2.36 mm) No. 16 (1.18 mm) 15
7.6 Flow Table, Flow Mold, and Caliper.-Shall conform No. 16 (1.18 mm) No. 30 (600/am) 25
to requirements of ASTM C 230. No. 30 (600/am) No. 50 (300/am) 24
7.7 Tamper, Trowel, and Testing Machine.-Shall meet No. 50 (300/am) No. 100 (150 #m) 16
No. 100 (150/am) No. 200 (75/am) 5
requirements of USBR 4109.
12. Conditioning
8. Reagentsand Materials
8.1 Sodium Hydroxide Solution (3 percent).-Dissolve 2.1 The temperatures of mixing water, moist closet,
3 parts by mass of NaOH (sodium hydroxide) in 97 parts and storage tank shall be maintained at 73.4+3 F
(23+1.7 C).
of water.
8.2 Phenolphthalein or Litmus
13. Procedure
8.3 Cemenc.-Portland cement, Type I or II, complying
with ASTM C 150.
13.1 Preparation of Reference Fine Aggregate.-
9. Precautions Prepare the reference fine aggregate in accordance with
the provisions of section 11.1.
13.2 Preparationof Mortar:
9.1 This procedure may involve hazardous materials,
13.2.1 Mold the batches of mortar that have had
operations, and equipment, and does not claim to address
all safety problems associated with its use. It is the the aggregate treated in sodium hydroxide and the batches
responsibility of the user to consult and establish with untreated aggregate on the same day. Mold six cubes
appropriate safety and health practices and determine from each batch, three cubes for 7-day tests and three cubes
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. for 28-day tests.
13.2.2 Prepare mortar in a mechanical mixer in
accordance with the method described in section 10 of
10. Sampling, Test Specimens, and Test Units
USBR 4305, except that mortar shall be proportioned to
produce a consistency of 100+5, as determined by the flow
10.1 Obtain samples of fine aggregate in accordance test.
with applicable provisions of USBR 4075, and reduce 13.2.3 Use water and cement in quantities that will
samples for test portions in accordance with USBR 4702. yield a water-cement ratio of 0.6 by mass. It has been
10.2 Make and cure specimens as required in section 13. found that 600 grams of cement and 360 mL of water
will usually be adequate for a six-cube batch.
11. Calibration and Standardization 13.2.4 Using fine aggregatethat has been brought
to a saturated-surface-dry condition as described in USBR
11.1 Wash the fine aggregate over a No. 200 (75-m) 4128, prepare a quantity of aggregate estimated to be
sieve to remove excess silt and any removable organic slightly more than needed to produce a batch of desired
impurities. Dry and split the material into two parts, using consistency.
one part for the reference material and the other part
NOTE 2.-If absorption has been determined in accordance with
for the test (treated) sample. Soak and wash the test fine USBR 4128, aggregate may be prepared for test by adding to
aggregatein sodium hydroxide and follow with a thorough a known mass of dry aggregatethe amount of water it will absorb,
rinsing in water. Repeat this treatment a sufficient number mixing thoroughly, and permitting aggregateto stand in a covered
of times to obtain a washed material that, when tested pan for 30 minutes before use.
in accordance with USBR 4040, produces a supernatant
liquid color lighter than standard. Perform washing in such 13.2.5 After placing all mixing water in bowl, add
a manner as to minimize loss of fines. Check the washed cement to water. Start mixer and mix at the slow speed
129
USBR 4087
of 140+5 r/min for 30 seconds. During mixing, add a (note 4). Upon completion of mixing, shake excess mortar
measured quantity of aggregate estimated to provide proper from paddle into bowl.
consistency. 13.4.2 Start molding specimens within 2.5 minutes
after completion of original mixing of mortar batch. Place
NOTE 3.-The quantity of aggregate used may be determined
by subtracting from a known quantity of prepared aggregate, a 1-inch (25-ram) layer of mortar, which is about half
the mass of the portion remaining after mixing. the depth of mold, in all cube compartments. Tamp mortar
in each compartment 32 times in about 10 seconds over
13.2.6 Stop mixer, increase to medium speed of 4 rounds, with each round being at right angles to the
285+10 r/min, and mix for an additional 30 seconds. other and consisting of 8 adjoining strokes over surface
13.2.7 Stop mixer and let mortar stand for 1-1/2 of specimen, as shown on figure 1. The tamping pressure
minutes. During first 15 seconds of this interval, quickly shall be just sufficient to ensure uniform filling of molds.
scrape down into batch any mortar that may have collected The 4 rounds of tamping (32 strokes) shall be completed
on side of bowl; cover bowl with lid for remainder of in one cube before going to the next. When tamping of
standing period. first layer in all cube compartments is completed, fill
13.2.8 Complete procedure by mixing for 1 minute compartments with remaining mortar and then tamp again,
at medium speed of 285+10 r/min. If flow appears to as specified for first layer. During tamping of second layer,
be too high, additional sand may be added after first 30 mortar forced out onto tops of molds after each round
seconds of this mixing period. If this is done, stop mixer of tamping shall be put back into the compartments using
briefly, add sand, and complete mixing. the hands and tamper. This shall be done on completion
13.2.9 In any case requiring a remixing interval, any of each round and before starting next round of tamping.
mortar adhering to side of bowl shall be quickly scraped On completion of tamping, tops of all cubes should protrude
down into batch with scraper prior to remixing. slightly above tops of molds. Mortar that has been forced
13.2.10 Make a determination of flow. out onto tops of molds shall be put back into the
13.3 Flow Test: compartments using the trowel. Smooth off cubes by
13.3.1 Carefully wipe top of flow table clean and drawing flat side of trowel, with leading edge slightly raised,
dry, and place flow mold at center of table. Immediately once across top of each cube at right angles to length of
after completing mixing operation, place about a 1-inch mold. Then, to level mortar and make mortar that protrudes
(25-ram) thick layer of mortar in mold and tamp 20 times above top of mold of more uniform thickness, draw flat
with tamper. The tamping pressure shall be just sufficient side of trowel, with leading edge slightly raised, lightly
to ensure uniform filling of mold. Then, fill mold with along length of mold one time. Cut off mortar to a plane
mortar and tamp as specified for first layer. Cut off mortar surface flush with top of mold by drawing straightedge
to a plane surface flush with top of mold by drawing trowel of trowel, held nearly perpendicular to mold, with a sawing
straightedge (held nearly perpendicular to mold) across motion over length of mold.
top of mold with a sawlike motion. Wipe top of table
clean and dry, being especially careful to remove any water
from around edge of flow mold. Lift mold away from mortar
1 minute after completing mixing operation. Immediately
drop table through a height of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) 10
times in 6 seconds. The flow is the resulting increase in
average diameter of mortar mass, measured on at least
four diameters at approximately equal angles, and expressed
as a percentage of original diameter.
13.3.2 Should flow be too high, return mortar to
mixing vessel, add additional sand, mix for 30 seconds
at medium speed, and make another determination of flow.
If more than two trials are necessary to obtain a flow
of 100+5 percent, consider the mortar as a trial mortar
Rounds I and 3 Rounds 2 ond 4
and prepare test specimens from a new batch.
13.3.3 If mortar is too dry, discard batch.
Figure 1. - Order of tamping in molding of test specimens.
13.3.4 Determine quantity of sand used by subtract-
ing the mass of the portion remaining after mixing from
the mass of the initial sample.
13.3.5 A typical worksheet showing mix proportions NOTE 4.-When a duplicate batch is to be made immediately
is shown on figure 2. for additional specimens, flow test may be omitted and mortar
13.4 Molding Test Specimens: allowed to stand in mixing bowl for 90 seconds; then remixed
13.4.1 Immediately following completion of a flow at medium speed for 15 seconds before molding specimens.
test indicating acceptable consistency, return mortar from
flow table to mixing bowl, scrape bowl, and then remix 13.5 Testing.-Store test specimens and determine
entire batch 15 seconds at medium speed (285+10 r/rain) compressive strength in accordance with USBR 4109.
130
USBR 4087
131
USBR 4087
Specimen
Sample Brand Plant or Sand Cement, Sand,
Water, Flow, No. Specimen
No. Name ID Class No. grams grams mL percent Made Size
/-" r/c./A 8
2TZA g'oo /KdO
$'ra. Cwm. sz,ovt ..*do /oo e / es
Figure 2. - Sample data and calculation form for mix proportions of hydraulic cement mortars.
132
USBR 4087
Age Average
at Total Compressive Compressive
Sample Brand Plant or Specimen Test, Load, Strength, Strength,
No. Name ID. Class No. days lbf lbf/in 2 lbf/in z
3 /3, 9oo 3, 4 7. 4 70
/ 3. oo 3 4so
// /4 oo 3 Cfo
/2
./3
1 300 '?
i 9oo 4 r
I ooo 3, :o o 3. szo
/7
i
I /4, Zoo a, 55o
I
/&
iI
NOI'ES:
rte=/ed." W:aAed,' sog,'.m AyJrox,'de
3 'oo
Ava. ///'r=/'ed : -a:-mC/oo)= 9&.9
dv5. Treed $'0 " "
Figure 3. - Sample data and calculation form for compressive strength of hydraulic cement mortars using 2-inch cube specimens (sheet 1 of 2).
133
USBR 4087
Age Average
at Total Compressive Compressive
Sample Brand Plant or Specimen Test, Load, Strength, Strength,
No. Name ID Class No. days lbf lbf/in2 lbf/in 2
/" rt/z,,q a .z'o 'A ," ,
M-g-qo Dgv'//. ' $ .r/A 21
fr.C6, sz/g r
2 zoooo ooo
23 4 q(.o
24 ,1
/ q 800 4, 9'o
I q'o 4, qso 4, qqo
\
2S/-o oq,o
c
37 20,00 o 7"
38 2o so //5
, v f @,?
NOTES:
7>'e.. "e4: la sA o/ ,',, so/,',, ,. Ar o ,'de
Figure 3. - Sample data and calculation form for compressive strength of hydraulic cement mortars using 2-inch cube specimens (sheet 2 of 2).
134
USBR 4087
Age Average
Compressiv.e
at Total Compressive
Plant or Specimen Test, Load, Strength, Strength,
ID Class No. days kN MPa MPa
/ 7
NOTES:
;rr eo ed: P/a sA e at ,' soo/;a m Axo/wo x/d'e
Jlv. d/wtreaPed 0oo) =/OO.lfiff
Avo.7"re #ed - .
Figure 4. - Sample data and calculation form for compressive strength of hydraulic cement mortars using 50-mm cube specimens (sheet 1 of 2).
135
USBR 4087
Age Average
at Total Compressive Compressive
or Specimen Test, Load, Strength, Strength;
Class No. days kN MPa MPa
Figure 4. - Sample data and calculation form for compressive strength of hydraulic cement mortars using 50-mm cube specimens (sheet 2 of 2).
136
@ U NITEDSTATESDEPARTMENTOFTHE INTERIOR ()
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4088-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4088; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 88-83.
137
USBR 4088
4.2 Containers.-Containers for immersing samples of solution that has been used previously to test the same type
aggregate in the solution should be corrosion resistant. of carbonate rock, provided that solution meets requirements of
Porcelain or metal (stainless steel or nickel) evaporating 5.1.1 for specific gravity.
dishes and bowls are satisfactory. Containers, if perforated,
should permit free access of solution to the sample and 5.1.1 Sodium Sulfate Solution.-Prepare a saturated
allow drainage of solution from sample without loss of solution of sodium sulfate by dissolving a USP (United
aggregate. Baskets made of suitable wire mesh, or sieves States Pharmacopeia), or equal grade of the salt, in water
with suitable openings, are satisfactory. at 77 to 86 F (25 to 30 C). Add sufficient salt (note
4), of either the Na2SO4 (anhydrous) or Na2SO4"10H20
NOTE Z-Perforated or wire mesh containers promote easier (crystalline) form (note 5), to ensure not only saturation
drainage of excess sulfate solution prior to sample drying, and but also the presence of excess crystals when solution is
possibly faster drying of samples for some size fractions of ready for use in tests. Thoroughly stir mixture during the
aggregate due to better circulation of air around aggregate addition of the salt and stir solution at frequentintervals
particles. However, the use of proper decanting techniques with until used. To reduce evaporation and prevent contam-
a porcelain or metal dish, or bowl type containers, provides ination, keep solution covered at all times when access
comparable drying, prevents loss of any material during test, is not needed. Allow solution to cool to 70-+-2 F (211 C),
and minimizes any possible contamination of sodium sulfate
stir again, and allow to stand at designated temperature
solution. Techniques for removing aggregate samples from
solution immersion prior to oven drying depend upon type of for at least 48 hours before use. Prior to each use, break
container used, and are described in section 10.2. up the salt cake (if any) in the container, stir thoroughly,
and determine specific gravity of solution. When used,
4.3 Temperature Regulation.-Suitable means for solution shall have a specific gravity not less than 1.151
regulating the temperature of samples during immersion nor more than 1.174. Discard a discolored solution, or filter
in the sodium sutfate solution shall be provided. it and check for specific gravity.
4.4 Balances.-For fine aggregate, a balance or scale
accurate within0.1 gram over the range requiredfor test. NOTE 4.-For the solution, 215 grams of anhydrous salt, or
For coarse aggregate, a balance or scale accurate within 700 grams of decahydrate, per liter of water are sufficient for
0.1 percent or 1 gram, whichever is greater, over range saturation at 71.6 F (22 C). However, because this salt is not
completely stable and that it is desirable that an excess of crystals
required for test.
be present, the use of not less than 350 grams of anhydrous
4.5 Drying Oven.-The oven shall be capable of being
salt, or 750 grams of decahydrate salt, per liter of water is
heated continuously at 2309 F (110+5 C). The rate
recommended.
of evaporation, at this range of temperature, shall be at
least 25 grams per hour for 4 hours, during which period NOTE 5.-The decahydrate sodium sulfate presents difficulties
the doors of the oven shall be kept closed. This rate shall in compounding the required solution because of its cooling effect
be determined by the loss of water from 1-L Griffin low- on the solution. A grade of sodium sulfate that is designated
form beakers, each beaker initially containing 500 grams by the trade as "dried powder," and which may be considered
of water at a temperature of 703 F (212 C), and as approximately anhydrous, may be the most practical and is
placed at each corner and at the center of each shelf of more economically available than the anhydrous form. Bureau
practice is to use reagentgradesodium sulfate (anhydrous powder)
the oven. The evaporation requirement is to apply to all
meeting the specifications of the ACS (American Chemical
test locations when oven is empty, except for the beakers Society).
of water.
4.6 Specific Gravity Measurement.-Hydrometers 6. Precautions
conformingto requirements of ASTM E 100, or a suitable
combinationof graduated glassware and balance, capable 6.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous
of measuringthe solution specific gravitywithin0.001. materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It
5. Reagents and Materials is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish
appropriate safety and health practices and determine
5.1 Prepare the sodiumsulfate solution for immersion
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
of test samples in accordance with 5.1.1 (note 3). The
volume of the solution shall be at least five times the
7. Samples
solid volume of all samples immersed at any one time.
The solution should be kept in a covered vitreous
7.1 The sample shall be obtained in general accordance
earthenwarecrockor similar containernot affected by the
with USBR 4075, and reduced to test portion size in
solution. It is recommended that one batchof sodium sulfate
accordancewith USBR 4702.
solution be used for not more than 10 cyclesof test.
7.2 Fine Aggregate.-Fine aggregate for the test shall
NOTE 3.-Some aggregates containingcarbonates of calcium be passed through a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve. Sample shall
or magnesiumare attackedchemicallyby the fresh sulfate solution, be of such size that it will yield for testing not less than
resulting in erroneouslyhigh-measuredlosses. If this condition 100 grams of each of the sizes shown in table 2 that are
is encounteredor is suspected, repeat the test using a filtered available in amounts of 5 percent or more.
138
USBR 4088
Table 2. - Fine aggregate,100-gram minimum for 20 minutes using a mechanical sieve shaker. Determine
sample size. and record mass of each size fraction, and place in separate
Passing Sieve Retained on Sieve containers for the test. For sizes larger than 3/4 inch
(19.0 mm), record number of particles in test sample.
No. 30 (600/m) No. 50 (300/m) 8.3 Particles of any fine or coarse aggregatesize fraction
No. 16 (1.18 mm) No. 30 (600 tm) sticking in the meshes of the sieve should not be used
No. 8 (2.36 mm) No. 16 (1.18 mm)
in preparing test samples.
No. 4 (4.75 mm) No. 8 (2.36 mm)
9. Calibration and Standardization
7.3 Coarse Aggregace.-Coarse aggregate for the test
shall consist of material from which the sizes finer than 9.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane-
the No. 4 sieve have been removed. Sample shall be of ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests
such size that it will yield for testing not less than the listed under the ApplicableDocuments of section 2 are
amounts of the indicated sizes shown in table 3 that are covered under that particular procedure or standard directly
available in amounts of 5 percent or more. or by reference to another.
7.4 When an aggregateto be tested contains appre- 9.2 Sieves shall be calibrated to meet requirements of
ciable amounts of both fine and coarse material that have ASTM E 11 in accordance with USBR 1025.
a grading with more than 10 percent coarser than the 9.3 Balances shall be calibrated to meet requirements
No. 4 sieve and more than 10 percent finer than the No. of section 4.4 in accordance with USBR 1012.
4 sieve, test separate samples of the minus No. 4 fraction 9.4 Drying ovens shall be calibrated to meet require-
and plus No. 4 fraction in accordance with the procedures ments of section 4.5 in accordance with USBR 1020.
for fine and coarse aggregate, respectively. Report the 9.5 Hydrometers shall be calibrated to meet require-
results separately for both the fine aggregate fraction and ments of ASTM E 100 in accordance with ASTM E 126.
coarse aggregate fraction.
7.5 If the standard Bureau grading for this test is not 10. Procedure
to be used for calculating weighted percentage losses, the
percentages of the individual coarse and fine aggregate 10.1 Storage ofSamples in Solution.-Immerse samples
fractions in initial grading shall be determined. in prepared solution of sodium sulfate for not less than
16 nor more than 18 hours in such a manner that solution
Table 3. - Coarse aggregatesample size. covers them to a depth of at least i/2 inch (13 mm) (note
6). Cover the containers to reduce evaporation and to
Sieve size Minimum mass,
prevent the accidental addition of extraneous substances.
(square openings) grams
Maintain samples immersed in solution at 70+2 F
3/8 inch to No. 4 (9.5 to 4.75 mm) 100 (21-1-1 C) for the immersion period.
3/4 to 3/8 inch (19.0 to 9.5 mm) 500
1-1/2 to 3/4 inch (37.5 to 19.0 mm) 2000
NOTE 6.-Suitably weighted wire grids placed over sample in
2-1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (63 to 37.5 mm) 5000
containers will permit this coverage to be achieved with very
Larger sizes with a 1-inch (25-mm)
low density aggregates.
spread in sieve size (each fraction) 7000
10.2 Drying Samples After Immersion.-Remove
aggregate samples from the solution after immersion
8. Preparation of Test Sample period. Allow samples in perforated or wire mesh
containers to drain for 15+5 minutes before placing in
8.1 Fine Aggregate.-Make a rough separation of the drying oven. Decantation of excess solution from dish or
fine aggregate by using a nest of the standard sieves bowl containers must be carefully performed. Decantation
specified in table 2 to obtain about 130 grams of each of coarse aggregate samples is accomplished by placing
size fraction to be tested. Recombine and thoroughly wash a cover fabricated of suitable wire mesh over the bowl
these fractions on a No. 100 (150-#m) sieve, dry to a container and draining solution from container. Fine
constant mass at 230+9 F (110+5 C), and final sieve aggregate samples in dish containers are initially decanted
for 20 minutes using a mechanical sieve shaker. Prepare by very lightly tapping or vibrating the dish container by
samples consisting of a minimum of 100 grams from each hand against a table top, carefully decanting excess solution,
of the separated fractions after final sieving, and place avoiding any loss of sample, and then placing samples
in separate containers for the test. in drying oven. After about 15 minutes, fine aggregate
8.2 Coarse Aggregate.-Make a rough separation of the samples are removed from oven and a second decantation
coarse aggregate into the size fractions to be tested. The is performed. This second decantation may be made as
quantities of the different size fractionsobtained should before or, preferably, accomplished by using a table top
be of sufficient size to meet- requirements of table 3. vibrator to bring any solution not removed in first
Thoroughlywash and then dry each size fraction to a decantation to the sample surface, and then carefully
constant mass at 230+9 E Final sieve each size fraction pouring off excess solution. After second decantation, fine
139
USBR 4O88
aggregatesamples are stirred with a small 1/8-inch (3-mm) record each amount. The difference between each of these
diameter rod to expedite subsequent drying by exposing amounts and the initial mass of the fraction of sample
a greater particle surface area. Care must be taken to prevent tested is the "loss" in the test, and is expressed as a
loss of fine aggregateparticles during this stirring. Samples percentage of initial mass.
are then replaced in oven to complete drying. The
temperature of the oven shall have been previously brought 12. Qualitative Examination
to 230+9 F (110+5 C). Dry samples at specified
temperature until a constant mass has been achieved. 12.1 Make a qualitative examination of test samples
Establish the time required to attain this constant mass coarser than 3/4 inch (19.0 mm) as follows(note 8):
as follows: With oven containing maximum sample load 12.1.1 Separate particles of each test sample into
expected, check mass losses of test samples by removing groups according to the action produced by the test (note
and determining their mass, without cooling, at intervals 8).
of 2 to 4 hours; make enough checks to establish required 12.1.2 Record number of particles showing each type
drying time for the least favorable oven location (sec. 4.5) of distress.
and sample condition (note 7). A constant mass will be
considered to have been achieved when mass loss is less NOTE 8.-Many types of action may be expected. In general,
the action may be classified as disintegration, splitting, crumbling,
than 0.1 percent of total sample mass in 4 hours of drying.
cracking, or flaking. While only particles larger than 3/4 inch
After constant mass has been achieved, allow samples to (19.0 ram) are required to be examined qualitatively, it is
cool to room temperature, when they shall again be recommended that examination of smaller sizes also be made
immersed in prepared solution as described in 10.1. to determine whether there is any evidence of excessive splitting.
NOTE 7.-The drying time required to reach constant mass 13. Calculations
may vary considerably for several reasons. Efficiency of drying
will be reduced as cycles accumulate because of salt adhering 13.1 Refer to figure 2 of USBR 4075 for a suggested
to particles and, in some cases, because of increase in surface worksheet with typical calculations.
area due to breakdown. The different size fractions of the
aggregatewill have differing drying rates. The smaller sizes will 14. Report
tend to dry more slowly because of their larger surface area and
restricted interparticle voids; however, this tendency may be 14.1 Refer to figure 3 of USBR 4075 for a suggested
altered by effects of container size and shape. reporting form. The report for this procedure shall include
the following data:
10.3 NumberofCycles.-Repeat the process of alternate 14.1.1 Material from each fraction of sample finer
immersion and drying until required number of cycles is
than sieve on which fraction was retained before test,
obtained. The data base for the standard Bureau soundness
expressed as a percentage of original mass of fraction.
test is established for five cycles. 14.1.2 The weighted average loss, calculated from
percentage of loss for each fraction and based on the
11. Quantitative Examination
standard Bureau fine or coarse aggregatesample data base
grading, is shown on table 4.
11.1 After completion of final cycle and after sample
has cooled, wash the sample free from the sodium sulfate
Table 4. - Weighted average loss.
by circulating water at 109+11 F (43+6 C) through the
samples in their containers. This may be done by placing Fine Aggregate Sample
samples in a tank into which the hot water can be introduced Size Fraction Standard
near the bottom and allowed to overflow. Fine aggregate Grading
samples are washed on a No. 100 (150-/zm) sieve. In the (percenO
washing operation, samples shall not be subjected to impact
or abrasion that may tend to break up particles. To ensure No. 4 to No. 8 (4.75 to 2.36 mm) 20
complete removal of sodium sulfate during washing, a small No. 8 to No. 16 (2.36 to 1.18 mm) 20
quantity of the wash water is obtained and a few drops No. 16 to No. 30 (1.18 mm to 600/m) 30
No. 30 to No. 50 (600 to 300 m) 30
of BaCI2 (barium chloride) solution added. The presence
of sodium sulfate is indicated by a formation of white Coarse Aggregate Sample
precipitate of BaSO4 (barium sulfate).
11.2 After sodium sulfate has been removed, dry each Size Fraction Standard Grading
fraction of sample to a constant mass at 230+9 F (percent)
3/4 inch 1-1/2 inches
(110-t-5 C). Sieve each aggregate fractionfor 15 minutes
(19.0 mm) (37.5 ram)
over same sieve on which it was retained before test. The
max. max.
method of sieving shall be the same as used in preparing
the test samples. No extra manipulation shall be used to 1-1/2 to 3/4 inch (37.5 to 19.0 mm) - 50
3/4 to 3/8 inch (19.0 to 9.5 mm) 60 30
break up particles or cause them to pass the sieves. 40 20
3/8 inch to No. 4 (9.5 to 4.75 mm)
Determine mass of material retained on each sieve, and.
140
USBR 4088
14.1.3 When sufficient material is unavailable for to have same loss as next larger or next smaller size,
testing in any size fraction, that size shall not be tested. whichever is present.
For purposes of calculating weighted test results, this 14.2.5 See figure 1 for an alternate reporting form
untested size shall be considered to have same loss in sulfate that reports the results in accordance with ASTM C 88
treatment as average of next smaller and next larger size based on grading of samples as received rather than the
or, when one of these sizes is absent, shall be considered Bureau standard data base grading which is reported on
to have same loss as next larger or next smaller size, figure 3 of USBR 4075.
whichever is present. 14.3 The report shall also include the following data:
14.2 In some specific cases (or when test results are 14.3.1 For particles coarser than 3/4 inch (19.0 mm):
reported in accordance with ASTM C 88), weighted average (1) number of particles in each fraction before test, and
calculations in accordance with USBR 4136 from the (2) number of particles affected; classified as to number
percentage of loss for each fraction, may be based on grading disintegrating, splitting, crumbling, cracking, or flaking.
of the sample as received or on the average grading of 14.3.2 Whether solution was freshly prepared or
material from that portion of the supply of which sample previously used.
is representative, except that:
14.2.1 For fine aggregates with less than 10 percent 15. Precision and Bias
coarser than the No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve, assume sizes finer
than the No. 50 (300-m) sieve to have 0 percent loss
15.1 For coarse aggregate with weighted average
and sizes coarser than the No. 4 sieve to have same loss
sodium sulfate soundness losses in the range of 6 to 16
as next smaller size for which test data are available.
percent, the precision indexes are:
14.2.2 For coarse aggregate with less than 10 percent
finer than the No. 4 sieve, assume sizes finer than the
No. 4 sieve to have same loss as next larger size for which Coefficient of Difference between
test data are available. variation (1S), two tests (D2S),
14.2.3 For an aggregate containing appreciable percent percent of average
amounts of both fine and coarse material tested as two
separate samples as required in 7.4, compute weighted Multilaboratory:
Sodium sulfate 41 116
average losses separately for the minus No. 4 and plus
No. 4 fractions based on recomputed gradings considering Single-operator:
both the fine and coarse fractions as 100 percent. Report Sodium sulfate 24 68
results separately giving the percentage of the minus No.
4 and plus No. 4 material in the initial grading. Note: These values represent the (1S) and (D2S) limits
as described in ASTM C 670.
14.2.4 For calculating weighted average, consider any
sizes in sections 7.2 or 7.3 that contain less than 5 percent
of sample to have same loss as average of next smaller 15.2 The bias for this procedure has not been
and next larger size or, if one of these sizes is absent, established.
141
USBR 4088
Sieve Ibm
Size (grams)
2 to 2 inches K, 23
(63 to 50 mm) (z'2a')
2 to 1 inches
(50 to 37.5 mm)
2 to 1 inches /o. :4 (/ 7oo/) o.-lCa3 / ) o.=7g
(63 to 37.5 mm)
/o. oqC4.s'.)
1 to 1 inch ,3
(37.5 to 25.0 mm) ClO a.)
1 to3Ainch I. 13
(25.0 to 19.0 mm)
1to3Ainch ..7. o 9(/4o3) o.,.?(/az) 3.o
(37.5 to 19.0 mm)
3Atoinch /.4q
(19.0 to 12.5 mm)
toYs inch
(12.5 to 9.5 mm) C3,3)
toYs inch 23. 0 2.20
(19.0 to 9.5 mm)
Ysinch to No. 4 /,. o I/. I. 34
(9.5 to 4.75 mm)
Totals loo. o !
QUALITATIVE EXAMINATION OF COARSE SIZES
Figure 1. - Sample form for recording test data and for the qualitative examination.
142
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4094-92
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
READY-MIXED CONCRETE
INTRODUCTION
This specification is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. These specifications are issued under the fixed designation USBR 4094; the number
immediately following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. These specifications are a modified
version of ASTM designation: C 94-83.
1. Scope ,L
C 330 Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates
1.1 This designation covers the specifications for ready- for Structural Concrete 1
mixed concrete manufactured and delivered to the C 494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures
Government in a freshly mixed and unhardened state. for ConcretO
Requirements for the quality of concrete shall be either C 567 Standard Test Method for Unit Weight of
as stated herein or as specified in the contract. Where Structural Lightweight ConcretO
requirements of contract differ from these specifications, C 595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic
the contract shall govern. These specifications do not cover Cements 2
placement, consolidation, curing, or protection of concrete C 618 Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or
after delivery. Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture
in Portland Cement Concrete 1
2. Applicable Documents D 512 Standard Test Methods for Chloride Ion in Water 3
D 1428 Standard Test Methods for Sodium and Potassium
2.1 USBR Procedures: in Water and Water-Formed Deposits by Flame
3115 Particulate, Dissolved, or Total Matter in Water Photometry 3
3120 Sulfate Ion in Water 2.3 ACI Standards: 4
4031 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
211.1 Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions
Field for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete
4039 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
211.2 Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions
Specimens for Structural Lightweight Concrete
4109 Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars 214 Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of
Using 2-Inch or 50-Millimeter Cube Specimens Concrete
4138 Density, Yield, Clean Separation, and Air Content 305R Hot Weather Concreting
(Gravimetric) of Concrete 306R Cold Weather Concreting
4143 Slump of Concrete 2.4 National Institute ofStandards and Technolgoy5 :
4172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete Handbook 44 Specifications, Tolerances, and Other
4173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Technical Requirements for Weighing and Measuring
Volumetric Method Devices
4191 Time-of-Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat
Needle 3. Basis of Purchase
4192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
Laboratory 3.1 The basis of purchase shall be by the cubic yard
4211 Selecting Proportions for Concrete Mixtures or cubic meter of freshly mixed and unhardened concrete
4231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Pressure as discharged from mixer.
Method 3.2 The volume of freshly mixed and unhardened
2.2 ASTM Standards: concrete in a given batch shall be determined from total
C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 1 mass of batch divided by actual mass per cubic yard or
C 94 Standard Specification for Ready-MixedConcretO per cubic meter of the concrete. The total mass of batch
C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement 2 shall be calculated either as the sum of the masses of all
C 260 Standard Specification of Air Entraining Admix- materials entering batch (including water), or as net mass
tures for Concr(t(,1
3 Annual Book ofASTMStandards,vol. 11.01.
4 Available from American Concrete Institute, P O Box 19150, Ledford
I Annual BookofASTMStandards,vol. 04.02. Station,Detroit,Michigan48219.
2 Annual BookofASTMSrandards, vols. 04.01, 04.02. 5 FormerlyNationalBureau of Standards
143
USBR 4094
of concrete in batch as delivered. The mass per cubic yard Table 1. - Acceptance criteria for questionable water supplies.
or per cubic meter shall be determined in accordancewith
USBR 4138 from average of at least three measurements, Limits Test designation 1
each on a different sample. Each sample shall be taken Compressive
from midpoint of each of three different truckloads by strength, min-
procedure of USBR 4172. imum percent of
control at 7 days 90% USBR 4109
Time-of-set, devia-
NOTE 1.-It should be understood that volume of hardened tion from From 30 % earlier
concrete may be, or appear to be, less than expected due to waste to 30 % later USBR 4191
control
and spillage, overexcavation, spreading forms, some loss of
entrained air, or settlement of wet mixtures. Comparisons shall be based on fixed proportions and same volume
of test water compared to control mix using city water or distilled water.
4. Materials
5.1.1 Designated size, or sizes, of coarse aggregate.
5.1.2 Slump, or slumps, desired at the point of
4.1 In the absence of designated applicable specifica-
tions covering requirements for quality of materials, the delivery. For acceptance tolerances, see table 3.
5.1.3 Air content of samples taken from transpor-
followingspecifications shall govern:
4.1.1 Cement.-Cement shall conform to ASTM tation unit at point of discharge. For recommended air
C 150 or C 595. The Government shall specify type or contents and tolerances, see note 4 and table 4.
types required; however, if no type is specified, the
requirements of Type II cement as prescribed in ASTM NOTE 4.-In selecting the specified air content, the exposure
C 150 shall apply. conditions to which concrete will be subjected should be
considered. Air contents less than those shown in table 4 may
not give required resistance to freezing and thawing, which is
NOTE 2.-These different cements will produce concretes of primary purpose of air-entrained concrete. Air contents higher
different properties and should not be used interchangeably. than those shown in table 4 may reduce strength without
contributing any furtherimprovement of durability.
4.1.2 Aggregates.-Aggregates shall conform to
ASTM C 33, or to ASTM C 330 if lightweight concrete 5.1.4 Which of the alternatives described in sections
is specified, or as designated in the specifications. 5.2, 5.3, and 5.4 should be used as a basis for determining
4.1.3 Water: the proportions of concrete to produce required quality.
4.1.3.1 Mixing water shall be clear and apparently 5.1.5 When structural lightweight concrete is
clean. If water contains quantities of substances that cause specified, the density as wet mass, air-dry mass, or ovendry
discoloration, make the odor or taste unusual or mass shall also be specified.
objectionable, or cause any suspicion, water shall not be
used unless service records of concrete made with such NOTE 5.-The density of fresh concrete, which is the only
water or other information indicate that water is not density determinable at time of delivery, is always higher than
injurious to quality of concrete. Water of questionable the air-dry or ovendry mass. Definitions of and methods for
quality shall be subject to acceptance criteria in table 1. determining or calculating air-dry and ovendry masses are covered
in ASTM C 567.
4.1.3.2 Wash water from mixer washout opera-
tions may be used for mixing concrete provided tests of
wash water comply with physical tests shown in table 1. 5.2 Alternative No. 1:
The wash water shall be tested weekly for about 4 weeks, 5.2.1 When the Government assumes responsibility
and then monthly provided no single test exceeds applicable for proportioning the concrete mixture, the Contracting
limit (note 3). Optional chemical tests shown in table 2 Officer shall also specify the following:
may be specified when appropriate for the construction. 5.2.1.1 Cement content in bags or in pound mass
per cubic yard (kilograms per cubic meter) of concrete.
5.2.1.2 Maximum allowable water content in
NOTE 3.-When recycled wash water is used, attention should gallons or in pound mass per cubic yard (kilograms per
be given to effects on dosage rate and batching sequence of air- cubic meter) of concrete, including surface moisture on
entraining and other chemical admixtures. A uniform amount
aggregates but excluding water of absorption (note 6) or
should be used in consecutive batches.
maximum allowable water-cement plus pozzolan ratio.
5.2.1.3 The type, name, and dosage of the
4.1.4 Admixtures.-Admixtures shall conform to
ASTM C 260, C 494, or C 618, whichever is applicable. admixtures to be used. The cement content shall not be
reduced when admixtures are used under this alternative
without written approval of the Government (note 7).
5. Ordering Information
NOTE 6.-In selecting requirements for which the Contracting
5.1 In the absence of designated applicable general Officer assumes responsibility, consideration should be given to
specifications, the Government shall specify the following: requirements for workability, placeability, durability, surface
144
USBR 4094
l Wash water, reused as mixing water in concrete, may exceed the listed concentrations of chloride and sulfate
if it can be shown that the concentration calculated in the total mixing water, including mixing water on the
aggregatesand other sources, does not exceed the stated limits.
2 Other test methods that have been demonstrated to yield comparable results may be used.
3 For conditions allowing use of CaCI2 accelerator as an admixture, the chloride limitation may be waived by
the Government.
1 The maximum slumps are for concrete after placement and before consolidation,
and for mixes having air contents given in table 4. For certain applications, the
use of a HRWRA (high-range water reducing admixture) is allowed. If mix is
properly designed to prevent segregation, a HRWRA can be used to produce flowing
concrete with a maximum slump of 9 inches (229 mm); however, each use or
application must be allowed in the specifications or approved by contracting officer.
2 The slump of tunnel inverts placed monolithically witfi sidewalls and arch may
be increased to a maximum of 4 inches (102 ram).
3 On machine-placed canal lining less than 3 inches (76 ram) thick, the slump
may be increased to a maximum of 4 inches (102 mm).
texture, and density, in addition to those for structural design. aggregates;the dry mass of cement, and saturated-surface-
The. Contracting Officer is referred to USBR 4211 and ACI dry masses of fine and coarse aggregates;quantities, type,
Standards 211.1 and 211.2 for selection of proportions that will and name of admixtures; and the water per cubic yard
result in concrete suitable for various types of structures and or per cubic meter of concrete that will be used in the
conditions of exposure. The water-cement ratio of most structural
manufacture of each class of concrete ordered.
lightweight concretes cannot be determined with sufficient
5.3 Alternative No. 2:
accuracy for use as a specification basis.
5.3.1 When the Government requires the manufac-
NOTE 7.-In any given instance, the required dosage of air- turer to assume full responsibility for selection of
entraining, accelerating, and retarding admixtures will vary; proportions for the concrete mixture (note 6), the
therefore, a range of dosages should be specified which will permit Government shall also specify the following:
obtaining desired effect. 5.3.1.1 The required compressive strength as
determined on samples taken from transportation unit at
5.2.2 At the request of the Government, the point of discharge evaluated in accordance with section
manufacturer shall, prior to actual delivery of concrete, 11.4. The Government shall also specify the requirements,
furnish a statement to the Contracting Officer giving the in terms of compressive strength, of standard specimens
sources, specific gravities, and sieve analyses of the cured under standard laboratory conditions for moist curing
145
USBR 4094
Table 4. - Recommendedtotal air content for air-entrainedconcrete. 1 5.4.2 At the request of the Government the
manufacturer shall, prior to actual delivery of concrete,
Nominal maximum size, Air content, furnish a statement to the Contracting Officer giving the
inches (mm) percent dry mass of cement; saturated-surface-dry masses of fine
and coarse aggregates;the quantities, types, and names
3/8 (9.5) 7.0
1/2 (12.5) 6.5 of admixtures; and the water per cubic yard or per cubic
3/4 (19.0) 6.0 meter of concrete that will be used in the manufacture
1 (25.0) 5.5 of each class of concrete ordered. The manufacturer shall
1-1/2 (37.5) 5.0 also furnish satisfactory evidence that materials to be used
2 (50) 4.5
3 (75) 4.0 and proportions selected will produce concrete of quality
4 (100) 4.0 specified. Whatever strengths are attained, the quantity
6 (150) 3.5 of cement used shall not be less than the minimum
specified.
Allowable tolerances are +l.0 percent. An air content less than shown 5.5 The proportions arrived at by Alternative No. 1,
in table may not give required resistance to freezing and thawing, which 2, or 3 for each class of concrete and approved for use
is primary purpose of using air-entrainedconcrete. Air contents in excess
in a project shall be assigned a designation to facilitate
of those shown in table may reduce the strength without contributing
additional protection. However, strength reductions in lean mixtures, identification of each concrete mixture delivered to project.
such as mass concrete containing 3-inch (75-mm) maximum size aggregate This is the designation required in section 12.1 to supply
or larger, are minimized due to reduction in quantity of paste. Because information on concrete proportions when they are not
of significant improvement of workability in lean mixtures, air given separately on each delivery ticket as outlined in 12.2.
entrainment is recom'hended when durability is not a consideration.
A certified copy of all proportions, as established in
as detailed in USBR 4031. Unless otherwise specified, the Alternatives No. 1, 2, and 3, shall be on file at batch plant.
age of specimens at time of testing shall be 28 days.
5.3.1.2 The expected concrete service conditions 6. MeasuringMaterials
and requirements for durability.
5.3.2 At the request of the Government the 6.1 Except as otherwise specifically permitted, cement
manufacturer shall, prior to actual delivery of concrete, and pozzolan shall be measured by mass, which shall be
furnish a statement to the Contracting Officer giving the determined on a scale and hopper that are separate and
dry mass of cement; saturated-surface-dry masses of fine distinct from those used for other materials. If batch plant
and coarse aggregates; quantities, type, and name of is equipped with automatic, interlocking, sequential
admixtures; and the water per cubic yard or per cubic meter batching controls, the cement and pozzolan masses may
of concrete that will be used in the manufacture of each be determined cumulatively with one scale and hopper,
class of concrete ordered. The manufacturer shall also provided this determination is automatically controlled
furnish satisfactory evidence that materials to be used and within specified tolerances and the cement mass is
proportions selected will produce concrete of quality determined first. If batch plant is not equipped as such,
specified. the cement and pozzolan masses shall be determined
5.4 Alternative No. 3: separately with individual scales and hoppers. When
5.4.1 When the Government specifies a minimum quantity of cement exceeds 30 percent of full capacity of
allowable cement content, and requires the manufacturer scale, the quantity of cement and cumulative quantity of
to assume responsibility for selection of proportions for cement plus pozzolan shall be within + 1 percent of required
concrete mixture (note 6), the Contracting Officer shall mass. For smaller batches to a minimum of 1 yd3 (0.8 m3),
also specify the following: the quantity of cement and quantity of cement plus pozzolan
5.4.1.1 The required compressive strength as used shall be not less than required amount nor more than
determined on samples taken from transporation unit at 4 percent in excess. Under special circumstances that have
point of discharge evaluated in accordance with section been approved by the Government, cement may be
11.4. The Government shall also specify the requirements, measured in bags of standard mass (note 9). No fraction
in terms of compressive strength, of standard specimens of a bag of cement shall be used unless mass is determined.
cured under standard laboratory conditions for moist curing
as detailed in USBR 4031. Unless otherwise specified, the NOTE 9.-In the United States, the standard mass of a bag
age of specimens at time of testing shall be 28 days. of portland cement is 94 Ibm (42.6 kg) 3 percent.
5.4.1.2 Minimum cement content in bags or in 6.2 Aggregate shall be measured by mass. Batch masses
pound mass per cubic yard (kilograms per cubic meter) shall be based on SSD (saturated-surface-dry) materials,
of concrete. and shall be the mass of the material plus the moisture
5.4.1.3 The expected concrete service conditions that is contained on the surface of the aggregatethat is
and requirements for durability. wetter than SSD or minus the moisture that is absorbed
by aggregate that is drier than SSD. The quantity of
NOTE 8.-Alternative No. 3 can be distinctive and useful only
if designated minimum cement content is at about the same level aggregateused in any batch of concrete, as indicated by
that would ordinarily be required for the strength and durability the scale, shall be within +2 percent of required mass
desired considering the aggregate size and slump specified. when determined in individual aggregatebatchers capable
146
USBR 4094
of mass determination. In a cumulative aggregatebatcher, 7.3 Indicating devices shall be in full view and near
the cumulative mass after each successive determination enough to operator to be read accurately by operator while
shall be within 1 percent of required cumulative amount charging the hopper. The operator shall have convenient
when scale is used in excess of 30 percent of its capacity. accessto all controls.
For cumulative masses less than 30 percent of scale capacity, 7.4 Scales for batching concrete ingredients may be
the tolerance shall be +0.3 percent of scale capacity or either beam or springless dial scales and shall conform
+3 percent of required cumulative mass, whichever is less. to applicable sections of current edition of the National
6.3 Mixing water shall consist of water added to batch, Institute of Standards and Technology's Handbook 44,
ice added to batch, water occurring as surface moisture "Specifications, Tolerances, and Other Technical Require-
on aggregates, and water introduced in the form of ments for Weighing and Measuring Devices." Methods
admixtures. This added water shall be measured by mass for determining mass (electric, hydraulic, load cells, etc.)
or volume to an accuracy of 1 percent of required total other than by beam or springless dial scales that meet
mixing water. Added ice shall be measured by mass. In all tolerances are also acceptable.
the case of truck mixers, any wash water retained in drum 7.5 Scales in use shall be accurate, when static load
for use in next batch of concrete shall be accurately tested, to +0.4 percent over the working range. Adequate
measured. If this is impractical or impossible, wash water standard test masses shall be availablefor checking accuracy.
shall be dischargedprior to loading next batch. Total water All exposed fulcrums, clevises, and similar working parts
including any wash water shall be measured or the mass of scales shall be kept clean, and periodic static tests shall
determined to an accuracy of +1 percent of specified total be scheduled and performed to verify accuracy of equipment.
amount. Each truck mixer shall be equipped with an Beam scales shall be equipped with a balance indicator
accurate watermeter, located between supply tank and sensitive enough to show movement when a mass equal
mixer, and having a dial or digital indicator and reliable to 0.1 percent of nominal capacity of scale is placed in
revolution counter, located near watermeter, that can be batch hopper.
readily reset to zero for indicating total number of 7.6 The clear interval for dial scales graduations shall
revolutions of drum for each batch. be not less than 0.03 inch (0.76 ram). Each scale graduation
6.4 Powdered admixtures shall be measured by mass, shall indicate increments no greater than 2.5 Ibm (1.13 kg)
and paste or liquid admixtures by mass or volume. The for water and cementitious materials, and no greater than
accuracy of mass determination and volumetric measure- 10 Ibm (4.54 kg) for aggregate for each cubic yard or cubic
ment shall be within 4-3 percent of total amount required. meter normally batched. Each batch mass indicator and
volumetric dispenser shall be in full view of operator.
NOTE 10.-Mechanical-type admixture dispensers capable of Batching controls shall be interlocked so that a new batch
adjustment for variation of dosage and of simple calibration are cannot be started until hoppers have been completely
recommended.
emptied of last batch and scales register zero mass.
7. BatchingPlant 7.7 The device for measurement of added water shall
be capable of delivering to the batch the quantity required
within the accuracy required in section 6.3. The device
7.1 Storage bins with adequateseparate compartments
shall be so arranged that measurements will not be affected
shall be provided for fine aggregateand for each required
by variable pressures in water supply line. Measuring tanks
size of coarse aggregate.
shall be equipped with outside taps and valves to provide
7.1.1 Coarse aggregateshall be deposited in batch
for checking their calibration unless other means are
bins directly over discharge gates. Aggregate larger than
provided for readily and accurately determining amount
3/4-inch (19.0-mm) nominal size shall be deposited in
of water in tank.
batch bins through effective rock ladders unless it can be
proven to Government's satisfaction that aggregatewill
NOTE 11.-The scale accuracy limitations of the National Ready
not otherwise be subject to breakage, degradation, and
Mixed Concrete Association Plant Certification meet the
segregation beyond limits allowable in specifications. requirements of USBR 4094.
7.1.2 Each bin compartment shall be designed and
operated to discharge efficiently and freely, with minimum
8. Mixers and Agitators
segregation, into the hopper for determining mass. Control
shall be provided so that, as quantity desired in hopper
is approached, discharging material may be shut off with 8.1 Mixers may be stationary mixers or truck mixers.
precision. Hoppers shall be constructed to eliminate Agitators may be truck mixers or truck agitators.
accumulations of materials and to discharge fully. 8.1.1 Stationary mixers shall be equipped with a
7.2 Separate storage bins, not containing a common metal plate or plates on which are plainly marked the
wall, shall be provided for cement and pozzolan. The bins mixing speed of drum or paddles and maximum capacity,
shall be dry, weathertight, and properly ventilated. Bins in terms of volume, of mixed concrete. When used for
shall be emptied, cleaned, and inspected annually by the the complete mixing of concrete, stationary mixers shall
manufacturer. Before a concrete placement is started, be equipped with an acceptable timing device that will
sufficient cement and pozzolan shall be in storage at batch not permit batch to be discharged until specified mixing
plant to complete placement. time has elapsed.
147
USBR 4094
148
USBR 4094
will be that necessary to meet requirements for uniformity Table 5. - Additional cementitious materials requirements.
as stated in appendix X2. Tests to confirm such
performance may be made in accordance with sections 9.3.3 Hours of contact between Percentage of additional
and 9.3.3.3. Additional turning of mixer, if any, shall be cementitious materials cementitious materials
at a designatedspeed. and wet aggregate I required
9.5 Truck-Mixed Concrete.-Truck-mixed concrete is
0 to2 0
concrete that is completely mixed in a truck mixer for
2 to3 5
70 to 100 revolutions at mixing speed designated by 3 to 4 10
manufacturer to produce uniformity of concrete as indicated 4 to 5 15
in appendix X2. Concrete uniformity tests may be made 5 to 6 20
in accordance with 9.5.1. If requirements for uniformity Over 6 Batch shall be rejected
(app. X2) are not met with 100 revolutions of mixing
after all ingredients, with the exception of about 5 percent The Government reserves the right to require the addition of
of the water (sec. 9.3), are in drum, the mixer shall not cementitious materials for shorter periods of contact during hot
be used until condition is corrected, except as provided weather, and contractor shall be entitled to no additional
compensation for such an addition.
in 8.5. When satisfactory performance is found with one
truck mixer, the performance of other mixers of same system or elsewhere shall be added after initial introduction
design and condition of blades may be regarded as of mixing water for the batch except when, on arrival
satisfactory. Additionalrevolutions of mixer exceeding the at jobsite, the slump of the concrete is less than specified.
number found to produce required uniformity shall be at Then, such additional water to bring slump within required
a designated speed. limits (tempering water withheld in accordance with 9.3)
9.5.1 Sampling for Uniformity ofConcrete Produced shall be injected into mixer under such pressure and
in Truck Mixers.-The concrete shall be discharged at direction of flow that requirements for uniformity (app.
normal operating rate for mixer being tested, using care X2) are met; provided, that in no case shall design water
not to obstruct or retard the discharge by a partially opened content be exceeded. The drum or blades shall be turned
gate or seal. Samples, each of about 2 ft3 (0.06 m3), shall an additional 30 revolutions or more, at mixing speed,
be taken after discharge of about 15 and 85 percent of until uniformity of concrete is within these limits. Water
load (note 13). These samples shall be obtained within shall not be added to the batch at any later time. Discharge
an elapsed time of not more than 15 minutes. Samples of the concrete shall be completed before the drum has
shall be secured in accordance with USBR 4172; however, revolved 300 revolutions, or within 1-1/2 hours after
they shall be kept separate to represent specific points introduction of mixing water and cernentitious materials.
in batch rather than combined to forma composite sample. These limitations may be waived by the Government if
Between samples, when necessary to maintain slump, the concrete is of such slump, after the 1-1/2-hour time limit
mixer may be turned in the mixing direction at agitating has been reached, that concrete can be placed without the
speed. During sampling, the receptacle shall receive the addition of water to the batch. In hot weather, or under
full discharge of the chute. Sufficient personnel should be conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete,
available to perform the required tests promptly. a time limit less than 1-1/2 hours may be specified by
Segregation during sampling and handling should be held the Government.
to the minimum practicable and each sample should be 9.8 Fresh concrete shall be placed at the temperature
remixed the minimum amount to ensure uniformity before specified in the contract. Temperature will be determined
the specimens are molded for a particular test. by placing a thermometer in the concrete immediately after
9.5.2 When bulk cementitious materials and sampling at placement site. Then, temperature of concrete
aggregates are dry batched and hauled to placement, each at batch plant shall be adjusted to assure that specified
batch shall be protected during transit to prevent spillage concrete temperature is attained at placement.
or wind loss and to limit prehydration of the cementitious 9.8.1 Concrete ingredients shall be heated as
materials. Separate compartments with suitable covers shall necessary; however, they shall not be heated to a
be provided to protect cementitious materials, or they temperature higher than necessary to keep temperature
should be completely enfolded in or covered by aggregates of mixed concrete, as placed, from falling below specified
to prevent wind loss. If cementitious materials are enfolded minimum temperature. Methods of heating concrete
in moist aggregates or otherwise exposed to moisture, and ingredients shall be subject to approval.
delays occur between batching and mixing; the contractor 9.8.2 The contractor shall use effective means, such
shall, at his own expense, add extra cement and pozzolan as precooling of aggregates and mixing water, placing at
to each batch in accordance with table 5. night, incorporating flake or chip ice in mix, or induction
9.6 When a truck mixer or truck agitator is used for of liquid nitrogen, as necessary, to maintain temperature
transporting concrete that has been completely mixed in of concrete, as placed, below specified maximum. Methods
a stationary mixer, any turning during transportation shall of cooling shall be as approved or directed by the
be at speed designated by manufacturer of equipment as Government.
agitating speed.
NOTE 14.-When hot water is used, rapid stiffening may occur
9.7 When a truck mixer or agitator is approved for if water is brought into direct contact with cement. Additional
mixing or delivery of concrete, no water from truck water information on cold-weather concreting is contained in ACI 306R.
149
USBR 4O94
NOTE 15.-Additional information on hot-weather concreting immediately on another portion of same sample. In the
is contained in ACI 305R. event of a second failure, concrete shall be considered to
have failed requirements of these specifications.
10. Use of Nonagitating Equipment 11.3.1 Concrete shall be available within the
permissible range of slump and total air content for 30
10.1 Central-mixed concrete may be transported in minutes from time of arrival at jobsite or 30 minutes after
suitable nonagitating equipment approved by the initial slump adjustment permitted in section 9.7,
Government. The proportions of the concrete shall be whichever is later. The first and last 0.25 yd3 (0.2 m3)
approved by the Government, and the following limitations discharged are exempt from this requirement. If contractor
shall apply: is unprepared for discharge of concrete from vehicle, the
10.1.1 Bodies of nonagitating equipment shall be Government shall not be responsible for the limitation
of minimum slump and air content after the 30-minute
smooth, watertight, metal containers equipped with gates
that permit control of discharge of concrete. Container time limit has elapsed.
covers shall be provided for weather protection, as 11.3.2 Uniformity in concrete consistency frombatch
to batch is required. To maintain concrete at proper
necessary.
10.1.2 Concrete shall be delivered to worksite in a consistency, the amount of water and sand batched for
thoroughly mixed and uniform mass, and discharged with concrete shall be adjusted to compensate for variations
a satisfactory degree of uniformity as prescribed in appen- in moisture content or grading of aggregates as they enter
dix X2. mixer. Also, the amount of air-entraining admixture shall
10.1.3 Slump tests of individual samples taken after be adjusted to obtain specified total air content.
discharge of about 15 and 85 percent of load may be made 11.3.3 Slump Test.-Unless other tolerances are
for a quick check of probable degree of uniformity (note included in project specifications, the allowable slump shall
13). These two test samples shall be obtained within an be as shown in table 3. The Government reserves the right
elapsed time of not more than 15 minutes. If slumps differ to require a lesser slump whenever concrete of such lesser
by more than that specified in table X2.1 (app. X2), the slump can be consolidated readily into place by vibration.
nonagitating equipment shall not be used unless conditions 11.3.3.1 The use of buckets, chutes, hoppers,
are corrected as provided in section 10.1.4. pumps, transit-mix trucks, or other equipment which will
10.1.4 If requirements of appendix X2 are not met not readily handle and place concrete of specified slump
will not be permitted.
when nonagitating equipment is operated for maximum
time of haul and concrete has been mixed for the minimum 11.3.3.2 Addition of water to compensate for
time, the equipment may still be used for shorter hauls, stiffening of concrete after mixing, known as retempering,
longer mixing times, or combinations thereof that will will not be permitted.
11.3.3.3 The maximum allowable slump loss from
result in meeting the requirements of appendix X2.
time concrete has been mixed until placement is 2 inches
(51 mm).
11. Inspection of Materials, Production, Deliv- 11.3.4 Air Content Test.-Unless other tolerances are
ery, and Concrete included in project specifications, the allowable total air
content shall be as shown in table 4.
11.1 Access.-The manufacturer shall afford the 11.4 StrengtA-When strength is used as a basis for
Government all reasonable access, without charge, for acceptance of concrete, standard specimens shall be made
making necessary checks of facilitiesand equipment and in accordance with USBR 4031. The specimens shall be
for securing necessary samples to verify that concrete is cured under standard moisture and temperature conditions
being produced in accordance with these specifications. in accordance with sections 9.5.2 and 9.5.3 of USBR 4031.
Tests and inspections shall be so conducted as not to 11.4.1 Strength tests, as well as slump and air content
interfere unnecessarily with the manufacture and delivery tests, shall generally be made with the frequency shown
of the concrete. in section 4.1.1 of USBR 4031 or note 5 of USBR 4192.
11.2 Sampling Equipment.-The contractor shall 11.4.2 A strength test is defined as "the average
provide mechanical sampling devices for safely procuring strength of all specimens of same age fabricated from a
and handling representative test samples of aggregates and sample taken from a single batch of concrete, or from
other concrete materials during batching. At central-mix opposite ends of mixer when performing concrete
plants, the contractor shall also provide mechanical uniformity tests for acceptability of mixers or agitators."
sampling devices for obtaining representative concrete For the strength test, a minimum of two standard test
samples from a point in the discharge stream as concrete specimens shall be made froma sample obtained as required
is discharged frommixers. In addition, ample and protected in sections 9.3, 9.4, and 9.5. The test shall be the average
working space near the batch plant site shall also be of strengths of two specimens tested at age specified in
providedfor conducting quality control testing. 5.3.1 or 5.4.1 (note 16). If either specimen shows definite
11.3 Slump and Air Content.-Slump and air content evidence, other than low strength, of improper sampling,
tests shall be performed,as necessary, in accordance with molding, handling, curing, or testing, specimen shall be
USBR 4143 and 4173. If measured slump of air content discarded and the strength of remaining specimen shall
falls outside specified limits, a check test shall be made be considered to be the test result.
g50
USBR 4094
NOTE 16.-Additional tests may be made at other agesto obtain of the concrete and the Government shall confer to
information on adequacy of strength development or to check determine whether agreement can be reached as to what
adequacy of curing and protection of the concrete. Specimens adjustment, if any, shall be made.
made to check adequacyof curing and protection should be cured
.in accordancewith section 9.5.4 of USBR 4031. 12. Batch Ticket Information
151
USBR 4094
..d
t'N
-2
o o
/-x
.-
-
.,.0
I
r oomomm
0
0
O0
q
t
0
o .- u
.. ..- .,
0
0
0
[- I
152
USBR 4094
Table 7a. - Average strength that must be maintained to meet design requirements (inch-pound units).
153
USBR 4094
Table 7b. - Average strength that must be maintained to meet design requirements (SI-metric units).
1 See appendix Xl for an explanation on how the f,. values were calculated.
154
USBR 4094
F
,= (" + ts) - r1112
where:
112
Xl 2 + 2 + . . . + Xn2 _ 2
S--
o
V(percent) = x (100), equation 3-3 of ACI 214-77, or
$
= (100)
155
USBR 4094
APPENDIX
Xl. CALCULATION OF AVERAGE STRENGTH VALUES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1.1 The average strengths required (f=), shown strength values; however, we now base the t
on tables 7a and 7b, were computed from equation 4-1 value on 30 compressive strength values).
(AC1 214-77) using values of student's t for 30 samples From table 6, t = 0.854.
fromtable 4.1 (AC1 214-77), and from t values extracted
from the table originally produced by Fisher and Yates, Determine fr:
"Statistical Tables forBiological Agriculture and Medical f/
C
APPENDIX
X2. CONCRETE UNIFORMITY AND MIXER PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
(Mandatory Information)
X2.1 The variation within a batch, as shown in table c = saturated-surface-dry mass in air, in pound
X2.1, shall be determined for each property listed as the mass (kilograms), of aggregateretained on
difference between the highest and lowest value, or from the No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve, resulting from
averages obtained from different portions of same batch. washing all material finer than this sieve
For this determination, the comparison will be between from the fresh concrete;
two samples, representing the first and last portions of b = mass of sample in air, in pound mass (kilo-
batch being tested. Test results conforming to the limits grams), of fresh concrete in density con-
of five of the six tests listed in table X2.1 shall indicate tainer or air-meter pot; and
uniformly mixed concrete within limits of these V = volume of sample, in cubic feet (cubic meters),
specifications. in density container or air-meter pot (this
X2.2 The coarse aggregatecontent, using the washout includes the volume occupied by air).
test, shall be computed as described in sections X2.2.1 and
X2.2.2. If M is computed from a submerged mass:
X2.2.1 Using a density container or an air meter . [ GI+G2
of sufficient capacity: M= + _ 1) (3)
2F/--
V ' or (1)
where:
c (100)
P = (2) Ms = submerged mass of coarse aggregate, No. 4 to
3/4-inch (4.75- to 19.0-mm), fraction from
where: the density container or air-meter pot, in
pound mass (kilograms);
M = mass of coarse aggregate, in pound mass (kilo- G1 = specific gravity of the No. 4 to 3/4-inch coarse
grams) per cubic foot (cubic meter) of aggregate fraction multiplied by its propor-
concrete; tional amount of coarse aggregate in con-
P = mass percent of coarse aggregate in concrete; crete mix, and
156
USBR 4094
1. Density calculated to an air-free basis (total mix) 1.0 lbm/ft3 (16 kg/m 3)
t Not less than three cylinders shall be molded and tested from each of the samples.
2 Tentative approval of mixer may be granted pending results of 7-day compressive strength tests.
G2 = specific gravity of the 3/4- to 1-1/2-inch (37.5 mm) required in density container or air-meter pot samples
(19.0- to 37.5-mm) aggregatefraction mul- to represent original concrete. The density of full mix can be
tiplied by its proportional amount of coarse computed by dividing total mass of density container or air-meter
aggregatein concrete mix. pot sample and mass of plus 1-1/2-inch material required to
represent original samples, by volume of density container or
X2.2.2 Using an air meter or density container air-meter pot sample and volume of plus 1-1/2-inch material
restricted to a maximum size aggregateof 1-1/2 inches computed from its mass and specific gravity.
(37.5 mm) and wet-screening sample to remove coarse
aggregatelarger than 1-1/2 inches, mass of total coarse X2.3 The density of the air-free mortar shall be
aggregateper cubic foot or per cubic meter is: calculated:
b--C
D= V- +(VA
- ) (inch-poundunits)(6)
c+
M = (inch-pound units) (4)
b-C
(SI-metric units) (7)
M
b (SI-metric units) (5) where:
D
density of air-free mortar, in pound mass
where: per cubic foot (kilograms per cubic
S = mass of total sample, in pound mass (kilo- meter);
A
grams), before wet screening; air content of concrete, in percent, measured
in accordance with USBR 4173 or 4231 on
T = mass of portion of sample, in pound mass
(kilograms),passing through the sample being tested;
Gl + Gu + G3 (computed specific gravity of
1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve;
Ga = specific gravity of the plus 1-1/2-inch total coarse aggregate); and
(+37.5-mm) material, and Other terms as previously defined.
Other terms as previously defined.
X2.4 Calculations and Report.-Calculations are
NOTE X2.1.-The term (S - T/T) b in equations (4) and covered under this appendix. Figure X2.1 shows a typical
(5) is the mass of coarse aggregate larger than 1-1/2 inches calculation and reporting form.
157
USBR 4094
Spec. or
Solic. No. D C- 76/2 Structure DA Art Tested b. A4'mo -' 7- Date
-8"
Project _ Item Computed by
F"--C o$ R/vA Location
Feature Station Offset Checked by Date
RAH 7"L E P" )A Depth --. to D. A R TE R 7-]0.-oo
NOEE: The percent material retained on the 1-1/2-inch Sample from front Sample from back Maximum
sieve is based on the minus 1-1/2-inch fraction of mixer of mixer variation
rather than on the total sample for these calculations. Mass, Volume, Mass, Volume, allowed
Ibm fO Ibm ft3
(1) Mass of sample (Test Result) /5S./?'7 15.K. 55
(2) Mass of material retained on a 1-1/2-inch sieve (Test Result) -4S./?3 .gF. #q
(3) Difference in mass, (1) - (2) rio. o //5".4,#
(4) Material retained on 1-1/2-inch sieve, [(2)/(3)](100),
percent 4.1'. d" % 34. 5 %
158
USBR 4094
NOTE: The percent material retained on the 37.5-mm Sample from front Sample from back Maximum
sieve is based on the minus 37.5-mm fraction of mixer of mixer variation
rather than on the total sample for these calculations. Mass, Volume, Mass, Volume, allowed
k8 m3 kg m
(1) Mass of sample (Test Result) 70. 7'I ..,
(2) Mass of material retained on a 37.5-mm sieve (Test Result) /3. q/ I. 7
(3) Difference in mass, (1) - (2) S'o.5
(4) Material retained on 37.5-mm sieve, [(2)/(3)](100), Zo6 %
percent
0-102 mm,'
25 mm
(5) Slump, mm ..1. l mm d..4" mm
102-152 ram,
38 mm
(6) Mass and volume of samples in air meter (Test Result) /7..4"7 0.00706"
(7) Air Content by meter (Test Result), percent 2.#o % 3.o % 1% o
(8) Volume of Air, (7) (6) vol. 0. ooo i 8 o. ooo4 7
(9) Mass and volume of air-free sample, (6) mass and
IZ 5"7 o.ao6g7 IZ#J .Oo6EI
(6) vol.- (8)
(10) Submerged mass of material retained on 4.75-mm sieve
.8o
(Test Result)
(11) SSD mass of material retained on 4.75-mm sieve,
q.72 .So
(10) sp. 8r./(sp. gr. - 1)
(12) Solid volume of material retained on 4.75-mm sieve,
o. oo3 5"22 O. 005 oo
(ll)/(sp. gr. 1000)
(13) Mass representing mortar in sample, (6) mass - (11) Z s"s dr. 7J
(14) "" Volume representing mortar in sample, (9) vol. - (12) o. oo 3
(15) Density of air-free mortar, (13)/(14), kg/m3 =0,34 7 kg/m3 23. 5" kg/m
159
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
(!)
USBR 4109-92
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4109; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 109-80.
160
USBR 4109
chemically attacked by the cement mortar. For new molds, 152-ram) cylinders, is satisfactory, provided that lower bearing
the Rockwell hardness number of the metal shall be not block has a diameter slightly greater than diagonal of face of
less than 55 HRB. The sides of the molds shall be 2-inch cube but not more than 2.9 inches (73.7 mm), and is
sufficiently rigid to prevent spreading or warping. The centered with respect to upper bearing block and held in position
interior faces of the molds shall be plane surfaces with by suitable means.
a permissible variation of 0.001 inch (0.025 mm) for new 4. Materials
molds, and 0.002 inch (0.051 mm) for molds currently
in use. The distance between opposite faces shall be 2-t-0.005 4.1 GradedStandardSand:
inches or 50+0.13 mm for new molds, and 2+0.02 inches 4.1.1 The sand used for making test specimens shall
or 50+0.50 mm for molds currently in use. The height be natural silica sand conforming to the requirementsof
of .the molds, measured separately for each cube ASTM C 778 for graded standard sand (note 2).
compartment, shall be 2 inches or 50 mm with permissible
variations of +0.01 inch (+0.25 mm) and -0.005 inch (- NOTE Z-The graded, standard sand should be handled in such
0.13 mm) for new molds, and +0.01 inch and -0.015 inch a manner as to prevent segregation because variations in grading
cause variations in consistency of mortar. When emptying bins
(-0.38 mm) for molds currently in use. The angle between
or sacks, care should be exercised to prevent formationof sand
adjacent interior faces, and between the interior faces and mounds or craters in sand because coarser particles will roll down
top and bottom planes of the mold, shall be 90+0.5 such formations. Bins should be of sufficient size to permit these
measured at points slightly removed from the intersection precautions. Devices for drawing sand frombins by gravity should
of the faces. not be used.
3.5 Mixes, Bowl, and Paddle.-An electrically-driven,
mechanical mixer with paddle and mixing bowl is required, 5. Temperature and Humidity
as specified in sections 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3 of USBR 4305. 5.1 Temperature.-The air temperature in vicinity of
3.6 Flow Table and Flow Mold.-These items shall mixing slab, dry materials, molds, base plates, and mixing
conform to the requirements of ASTM C 230. bowl shall be maintained between 68 and 81.5 F (20 and
3.7 Tamper.-The tamper shall be made of a nonab- 27.5 C). The temperature of mixing water, moist closet
sorptive, nonabrasive, nonbrittle material such as a rubber or room, and water in storage tank shall be set at 73.4
compound having a Shore A durometer hardness of 80+10, F (23.0 C) and shall not vary from this temperature
or seasoned oak wood rendered nonabsorptive by by more than +3.0 F (+1.7 C).
immersion for 15 minutes in paraffin at about 392 F 5.2 Humidity.-The relative humidity of the laboratory
(200 C). Tamper shall have a cross section of 0.5 by 1 shall not be less than 50 percent. The moist closet or moist
inch (13 by 25 mm), and a convenient length of about room shall be so constructed as to provide storage facilities
5 to 6 inches (120 to 150 mm). The tamping face shall for test specimens at a relative humidity of not less than
be flat and at right angles to length of tamper. 95 percent.
3.8 TroweL-The trowel shall have a steel blade 4 to
6 inches (102 to 152 mm) in length, with straight edges. 6. Precautions
3.9 Testing Machine.-The testing machine shall be of
either the hydraulic or screw type, with sufficient opening 6.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous
between the upper and lower bearing surfaces to permit materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim
use of verifying apparatus. The load applied to test spec- to address all safety precautions associated with its use.
imen shall be indicated within an accuracy of +1.0 percent. It is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish
The upper bearing shall be a spherically seated, hardened appropriate safety and health practices and determine
metal block firmly attached at center of upper head of applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
machine. The center of the sphere shall lie at center of.
surface of block in contact with specimen. The block shall 7. Test Specimens
be closely held in its spherical seat, but shall be free to
tilt in any direction. The diagonal or diameter (note 1) 7.1 Three or more specimens shall be made for each
of bearing surface shall be only slightly greater than the test period specified.
diagonal of the face of the 2-inch or 50-mm cube to facilitate
accurate centering of specimen. A hardened metal bearing 8. Calibration and Standardization
block shall be used beneath specimen to minimize wear
of lower platen of machine. The bearing block surfaces 8.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane-
intended for contact with specimen shall have a Rockwell ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests
hardness number of not less than 60 HRC. These surfaces listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are
shall not depart from plane surfaces by more than 0.0005 covered under that particular procedure or standard directly
inch (0.013 ram) when the blocks are new, and shall be or by reference to another.
maintained within a permissible variation of 0.001 inch 8.2 The calibration of scales to comply with section
(0.025 ram). 3.1 shall be accomplished in accordancewith USBR 1012.
8.3 Glass graduates shall be checked for compliance
NOTE 1.-A bearing surface diameter of 3.125 inches (79.4 with section 3.3 by measuring and determining mass of
mm), which is large enough for testing 3- by 6-inch (76- by water required to measure volume.
16l
USBR 4109
8.4 Specimen molds shall be checked for compliance Table 2. - Material quantities for six and nine test specimens.
with section 3.4 by measuring and by using straightedges.
8.5 The testing machine shall be calibrated to comply Material Number
with section 3.9 in accordancewith USBR 1104. of specimens
Six Nine
9. Preparation of Specimen Molds Cement, grams 500 740
Sand, grams 1375 2035
9.1 Thinly cover interior faces of specimen molds with Water, mE
mineral oil or light cup grease. Thinly cover contact surfaces Portland cement,
W/C = 0.485 242 359
of each half of mold with a heavy mineral oil or light
Air-entrained portland
cup grease, such as petrolatum. After assembling molds, cement, W/C = 0.460 230 340
remove excess oil or grease from interior faces and from Other (flow of 110+5) - -
top and bottom surfaces of each mold. Set molds on plane,
nonabsorptive base plates that have been thinly coated
with mineral oil, petrolatum, or light cup grease. Apply surface by drawing the straightedge of a trowel (held neazly
a mixture of 3 parts paraffin to 5 parts rosin by mass, perpendicular to mold) across top of mold with a sawing
heated to between 230 and 248 F (110 and 120 C), at motion. Wipe table top clean and dry, being especially
the outside contact lines of the molds and base plates so careful to remove any water from around edge of flow
that watertight joints are obtained (note 3). mold. Lift mold away from mortar 1 minute after
completing mixing operation, and immediately drop table
NOTE 3.-The paraffin-rosin mixture for sealing the joint 1/2 inch (12.7 ram) 25 times within 15 seconds. The flow
between mold and base plate may be difficult to remove when is the resulting increase in average base diameter of the
mold is cleaned. Use of straight paraffin is permissible if a mortar mass, measured on at least four diameters at
watertight joint is secured, but due to low strength of paraffin approximately equally spaced intervals, and expressed as
it should be used only when mold is not held to base plate by a percentage of original base diameter. Make trial mixes
paraffin alone. A watertight joint may be obtained with paraffin with varying percentages of water until specified flow is
alone by slightly warming mold and base plate before brushing
obtained. Use fresh mortar for each trial test. A typical
joint. Molds so treated should be allowed to return to specified
worksheet on mix proportions is shown on figure 2.
temperature before use.
11.4 Molding Test Specimens:
10. Conditioning 11.4.1 For portland and air-entraining portland
cements, allow mortar to stand uncovered in mixing bowl
for 90 seconds. During the last 15 seconds of this interval,
10.1 Conditioning procedures are discussed in
quickly scrape down into the batch any mortar that may
section 11.
have collected on side of bowl. Then, remix at medium
speed for 15 seconds. Upon completion of mixing, mixing
11. Procedure
paddle shall be shaken to remove excess mortar frompaddle
into mixing bowl.
11.1 Composition of Mortar: 11.4.2 For other than portland and air-entraining
11.1.1 The proportions of materials for the standard portland cements, or when a flowtest is desired on portland
mortar shall be 1 part cement to 2.75 parts graded standard and air-entraining portland cements (note 4), return mortar
sand by mass. Use a water-cement ratio (W/C) of 0.485 from flow table to mixing bowl immediately following
for all portland cements, and 0.460 for all air-entraining completion of flowtest. Quickly scrape down into the batch
portland cements. The amount of mixing water for other any mortar that may have collected on side of bowl, and
than the portland cements and the air-entraining portland then remix entire batch at medium speed for 15 seconds.
cements shall be such as to produce a flow of 110+5, as Upon completion of mixing, mixing paddle shall be shaken
determined in accordance with 11.3, and shall be expressed to remove excess mortar from paddle into mixing bowl.
as the mass percent of cement. 11.4.3 Start molding specimens within 2.5 minutes
11.1.2 Quantities of materials to be mixed at one after completion of original mixing of mortar batch. Place
time in the batch of mortar for making six and nine test a 1-inch (25-mm) layer of mortar, which is about half
specimens shall be as shown in table 2. the depth of mold, in all cube compartments. Tamp mortar
11.2 Preparation of Mortar.-Mechanically mix mor- in each compartment 32 times in about 10 seconds over
tar in accordance with USBR 4305. 4 rounds, each with each round being at right angles to
11.3 Determination ofFlow.-Carefullywipe top of the the other and consisting of 8 adjoining strokes over surface
flow table clean and dry, and place flow mold at center of specimen, as shown on figure 1. The tamping pressure
of table. Place a layer of mortar, about 1 inch (25 mm) shall be just sufficient to ensure uniform fillingof molds.
thick, into mold and tamp 20 times with tamper. The The 4 rounds of tamping (32 strokes) shall be completed
tamping pressure shall be just sufficient to ensure uniform in one cube before going to the next. When tamping of
fillingof the mold. Then, finish fillingthe mold with a first layer in all cube compartments is completed, fill
second layer of mortar and tamp as specified for firstlayer. compartments with remaining mortar and then tamp again,
Cut off mortar flush with top of mold and to a plane as specified for first layer. During tamping of second layer,
162
USBR 4109
1 0.5
3 1
7 3
28 12
163
USBR 4109
give strengths differing by more than 10 percent from 15. Precision and Bias
the average value of all test specimens made from the
same sample and tested during the same test period (note 15.1 The precision statements given in this section are
7). After discarding specimens or strength values, if less applicablewhen a test result is the average of compressive
than two strength values are left for determining. strength tests on three cubes molded from a single batch
compressive strength at any given period, make a retest. of mortar and tested at same age. The batch mortar must
be of type I, II, or III cement, and cubes must be tested
NOTE 7.-Reliable strength results depend upon careful at 3 or 7 days. The appropriate precision limit is somewhat
observation of all specified requirements and procedures. Erratic larger for 1-day tests, and slightly smaller for tests at ages
results for a given test period indicate that some of the greater than 7 days.
requirements and procedures have not been carefully observed; 15.1.1 The multilaboratory coefficient of variation
for example, not observing all of the procedures described in has been found tO be 7.3 percent (note 8). Therefore, results
sections 11.6.2 and 11.6.3. Improper centering of a specimen of properly conducted tests of single batches by two
in the testing machine can result in an oblique fracture. Lateral different laboratories should not differ by more than 20.6
movement of one of the testing machine heads during loading
percent of their average (note 8).
will result in lower strength results.
15.1.2 The single-laboratory coefficient of variation
has been found to be 3.8 percent (note 8). Therefore, results
13. Calculations of two properly conducted tests of single batches of mortar
made with same materials either on same day or within
13.1 Record total maximum load indicated by testing same week should not differ from each other by more
machine, and calculate compressive strength in pounds than 10.7 percent of their average (note 8).
force per square inch (megapascals). If cross-sectional area
of specimen varies more than 1.5 percent from nominal, NOTE 8.-These numbers represent the (1S) and (D2S) limits
use actual area for calculation. The compressive strength as described in ASTM C 670.
of all acceptabletest specimens (see section 12) made from
same sample and tested during same test period shall be 15.2 The bias for this procedure is not known at this
averaged and recorded to nearest 10 lbf/in 2 or 0.05 MPa. time.
Figures 3 and 4 show typical calculation forms.
16. Reference
14. Report
[1] "Specifications, Tolerances, and Other Technical
Requirements for Weighing and Measuring Devices,"
14.1 A typical reporting form is shown on figure 5 Handbook 44, National Institute of Standards and
of USBR 4183. Technology.
164
USBR 4109
Type Specimen
Sample Brand Plant or Sand Cement, Sand, Water, Flow, No. Specimen
No. Name ID Class No. grams grams mL percent Made Size
77-1
A/X /t,'A" /v'.Z" 6"OO /3Za" 24Z //0
-?7 ..'7"O. 7 7-
78'-1
CCR/_ g',aoo 'Oa /3 7S 24Z / 08
-?g A/2" HI ,4/2" ?-/'/./'
NOTES:
A/2"-- Ado / Ia/e,,," "ed
Figure 2. - Sample data and calculation form for mix proportions of hydraulic cement mortars.
165
USBR 4109
Age Average
Type at Total Compressive Compressive
Sample Brand Plant or Specimen Test, Load, Strength, Strength,
No. Name ID Class No. days lbf lbf/in 2 lbf/in 2
C CA.
-77 ,4/'.2" ,'2" At'.T 77-/ 3 /2 oS'o
77-s 7 / 4 5"oo
NOTES:
.a/I - / I.,/e,.t I,"l'/ ed
Figure 3. - Sample data and calculation form for compressive strength of hydraulic cement mortars using 2-inch cube specimens.
166
USBR 4109
Age Average
Type at Total Compressive Compressive
Sample Brand Plant or Specimen Test, Load, Strength, Strength.
No. Name ID Class No. days kN MPa MPa
CCR/.
- 78 ,,vZ" /v'.z" ,,v.z" 78-/ 3 6'. oo @7. ,?
7#-Z 3 dg. z$" 26.a"
7g-3 3 E.7" 77.[
8'/. Z 27. O.4"
NOTES:
/z Ho / .To/e,., l,',t,'ed
Figure 4. - Sample data and calculation form for compressive strength of hydraulic cement mortars using 50-mm cube specimens.
167
@ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
(D
USBR 4117-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4117; the number immediately
following-the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This procedure is a modified version of
ASTM designation: C 117-84.
168
USBR 4117
169
USBR 4117
tested in a number of increments until entire sample has B = original dry mass of sample in grams, and
been washed. The mass of material on the nested sieves C = dry mass of sample in grams after washing.
should not exceed 0.0085 lbm/in 2 (6.3 kg/m 2) or 4 g/in 2
of sieving surface (note 2). In no case shall the mass be 11.2 A suggested calculation form is shown on figure2
so great as to cause permanent deformation of the sieve of USBR 4075.
cloth. Wet sample thoroughly with a gentle stream of water.
Remove nested sieves from under the spray nozzle and
adjust pressure on nozzle to 10+0.5 lbf/in 2 (68.9+3.4 kPa). 12. Report
Return nested sieve assemblageto its position under nozzle
and, moving sieves in spray with a circular motion in a 12.1 Report percentage of material finer than the No.
horizontal plane at about one motion per second, wash 200 (75-#m) sieve by washing to nearest 0.1 percent, except
sample until wash water is clear. Every portion of the if the result is 10 percent or more, report to nearest whole
sieve should be sprayed during each circular motion of number. A typical reporting form is shown on figure 3
the sieves. During washing, hold sieve assemblageso that of USBR 4075.
bottom of spray nozzle extends 0.5 inch (13 mm) below
top of sieve frame.
13. Precision and Bias
NOTE 5.-The 4 g/in 2 (6.3 kg/m 2) amounts to 0.43 Ibm (194 g)
for 8-inch (203-mm) diameter sieve. 13.1 The multilaboratory standard deviation has been
found to be 0.22 percent for nominal 3/4-inch (19.0-mm)
10.6 Return all material retained on nested sieves to maximum size coarse aggregatewith less than 1.5 percent
washed sample by flushing. Dry the washed aggregateto passing the No. 200 (75-/1m) sieve. Therefore, results of
a constant mass at a temperature of 230+9 F (110+5 C), two properly conducted tests from two different labor-
and determine its mass to nearest 0.1 percent of origirial atories on samples of the same coarse aggregateshould
sample mass. not differ by more than 0.62 percent. The corresponding
single-operator standard deviation has been found to be
11. Calculation
0.10 percent. Therefore, results of two properly conducted
11.1 Calculate amount of material passing the No. 200 tests by the same operator on the same coarse aggregate
(75-/m) sieve by washing as follows: should not differ by more than 0.28 percent. See note 3.
170
@ UNITED STATES OF RECLAMATION
INTERIORBuREAU
DEPARTMENT OF THE (
USBR 4123-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4123; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 123-83.
17l
USBR 4123
liquid containers. The fine aggregatesample basket shall concrete aggregates limit the allowable percentage of
be fabricated from No. 50 (300-/m) wire cloth, and coarse material having a specific gravity less than 1.95+0.02. The
aggregatesample basket from No. 10 (2.00-mm) wire cloth. zinc chloride liquid solution is used to make this
Basket construction should be suitably reinforced to determination. About 690 grams of the zinc chloride salt
maintain the basket shape without any deformation that per liter of water are required to produce a solution of
might be caused by repeated usage. the required specific gravity.
4.5 Skimmers.-Saucer-shaped skimmers, with handles, 5.1.2 A mixture of kerosene with 1,1,2,2-tetra-
fabricated from woven-wire sieve cloth conforming to bromoethane (acetylene tetrabromide), proportioned to
requirements of ASTM E 11 are required for separating produce the desired specific gravity. The tetrabromoethane
floating pieces from the heavy liquid. Fine aggregate has a specific gravity of about 2.95, while kerosene has
skimmers shall be fabricated from No. 50 (300-zm) wire a specific gravity of about 0.80. Approximate proportions
cloth, and coarse aggregate skimmers from No. 10 by volume of the kerosene-tetrabromoethane mixture for
(2.00-mm) wire cloth. The skimmers for fine aggregate the heavy liquid at various specific gravities are shown
should be about 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter, and those on figure 1.
for coarse aggregate about 4 inches (100 ram) in diameter. 5.2 The specific gravity of the heavy liquid shall be
4.6 Sieves.-The sieves shall be No. 30 (600zm) and maintained within +0.01 of specified value at all times
No. 4 (4.75 mm), conforming to ASTM E 11. during test. The liquids in 5.1.2 have differential rates of
evaporation which will cause a progressive change in the
NOTE 1.-Any sieve that may be required to obtain an aggregate specific gravity of mixture. Periodic checking and
sample for testing shall conform to ASTM E 11. adjustment of the specific gravity for this heavy liquid will
be necessary. The zinc chloride solution (5.1.1) is relatively
4.7 Specific Gravity Measurement.-Equipment for
stable; however, occasional specific gravity checks should
determining specific gravity can be hydrometers conform-
be made.
ing to requirements of sections 4 through 10 of ASTM E 100
and with cup-top hydrometer cylinders, or a suitable com- NOTE Z-Caution:The chemicals listed in 5.1.2 are toxic, both
bination of graduated glassware and balance capable of by absorption through the skin and by inhalation. These chemicals
measuring heavy liquid specific gravities within +0.01. Also shall be used only in a down draft-type hood, and care shall
required is a dipper or ladle for transferring, when required, be taken to avoid inhalation or contact with eyes or skin. There
the heavy liquids or the wash and rinse liquids. is no particular hazard from the fumes of the zinc chloride solution
4.8 Hood.-A downdraft-type fume hood, with safety (5.1.1); however, this solution is caustic. Protective clothing such
sash. The minimum face velocity, with sash fully open, as gloves, aprons, and goggles should be worn to prevent contact
should be 100 ft/min (0.51 m/s). of these chemicals with the eyes or skin.
4.9 Oven.-Forced-air ventilated oven suitable for 5.3 RinseLiquids.-Kerosene or denatured alcohol.
drying the aggregate samples to a constant mass at
230+9 F (110+5 C). 6. Effect of Aggregate Moisture Conditions
4.10 Aggregate Drying Trays (optional).-Trays with
legs, fabricated from No. 10 (2.00-mm) woven-wire sieve 6.1 The moisture content condition of aggregate
cloth conforming to ASTM E 11, may be used for rapid samples has a significant effect upon the results of sink-
drying of aggregatesamples retained on a No. 8 (2.36-mm) float separations. This is particularly true for fine aggregate
or larger sieve. Trays should be of reinforced construction and "pea gravel" size coarse aggregate. Deviation from
to maintain their shape. The trays should be about 1 inch the reliably reproducible and stable saturated-surface-dry
(25 mm) deep; dimensions of width and length may vary moisture condition, within the time frame required for
but should be such that test sample can be spread out sink-float separations, will produce inaccurate test results.
on tray to a thickness of one aggregateparticle. Suggested Low density aggregate particles in a dry or less than
width and length dimensions range from about 12 by 18 saturated-surface-dry condition will rapidly absorb heavy
inches (305 by 460 mm) to about 18 by 36 inches (460 liquids, and the relative increase in particle density causes
by 915 mm). One side of tray should have a chute to facilitate many low density "float" particles to react erroneously as
transference of material. Use of a drying tray allows a high density "sink" particles. A film of free moisture around
free flow of air around aggregate particles, and expedites an aggregate particle not displaced by the heavy liquid
testing procedure when a large number of sink-float may occupy a volume sufficient to significantly lessen the
separations are to be made or when USBR 4123 is used specific gravity of the particle and thus, a sink particle
as a quality control measure for aggregate production may react as a pseudo-float particle. When free water is
processing. present on aggregateparticles, the high surface tension
characteristics of the water will tend to cause particles to
5. Chemicals cluster or cling together after immersion in heavy liquid
solution. Some sink particles will thus be captured by float
5.1 Hea W Liquid.-The heavy liquid shall consist of particles rising to surface of heavy liquid and will be
one of the liquids described in 5.1.1 or 5.1.2. removed in float particle separation process. The presence
5.1.1 A solution of zinc chloride in water, with a of free moisture on aggregate particles may also dilute
specific gravity up to about 2.0. Bureau specifications for heavy liquid and lower its specific gravity.
172
USBR 4123
Z.80
2.70 jf
/
2.60
i---'"
2AlO
/
2.40
2.30
/
2.20
9. Calibration and Standardization NOTE 4.-In most Bureau quality evaluation investigations, the
nominal gradation separation points for coarse aggregateare No.
9.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- 4, 3/8 and/or 3/4 inch, 1-1/2 inches, and 3 inches (4.75 mm,
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests 9.5 and/or 19.0 mm, 37.5 mm, and 75 mm), and test samples
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are are separated at these points.
covered under that particular procedure or standard.
9.2 Balances shall conform to the requirements of Table l. - Minimumsize of sample.
section 4.1 by calibration in accordancewith USBR 1012. Nominal maximum Minimummass of
9.3 Sieves shall conform to the requirements of section aggregate(sieves with sample, Ibm (g)
4.6 and ASTM E 11 by calibration in accordance with square openings)
USBR 1025.
9.4 The oven shall conform to the requirements of No. 4 (4.75 mm) 0.44 (200)
section 4.9 by calibration in accordancewith USBR 1020. 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 3.31 (1500)
9.5 Hydrometers shall conform to the requirements 3/4 inch (19.0 mm) 6.61 (3000)
of section 4.7 by standardization in accordance with 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm) 11.02 (5000)
ASTM E 126. 3 inches (75 mm) 22.05 (10 000)
173
USBR 4123
11.2 Sink-Float Particle Separation.-All subsequent aggregate sampies into water, kerosene, or alcohol should be
heavy liquid, sink-float, separation procedures shall be kept separate and not interchanged. These same precautions also
performed in the fume hood. Transfer sample to sample apply to the wire cloth skimmers used for separation of float
basket container and place into heavy liquid beaker material from heavy liquid solutions.
container. The volume of the heavy liquid shall be at least
11.2.2 Usually, the difference between the oven-dry
three times the absolute volume of the aggregate. To bring
mass and the saturated-surface-dry mass of an aggregate
floatparticles to the surface of the heavy liquid, stir sample
sample will not significantly affect the calculated percentage
vigorously or agitate using a vertical, up-and-down, of lightweight pieces. If greater precisionis required, this
reciprocating motion of sample basket for 5 seconds. This
percentage can be determined based on the oven-dried
stirring or basket agitation should be sufficiently vigorous
aggregate sample mass condition for the mass values
to free the low density "float" particles surrounded and
defined in section 12.
entrapped by the high density "sink" particles. Allow about
11.3 Figure 2 shows a flow diagram of the steps
15 seconds for heavy liquid turbulence to subside, and then
described in this section.
remove floating aggregate particles with the skimmer.
Skimming depth should be just sufficient to remove only 12. Calculations
the aggregate particles floating on heavy liquid surface.
Care should be taken while skimming not to create any
12.1 Calculate the percentage of low density pieces
undue currents in the heavy liquid that would disturb the
(pieces floating on surface of heavy liquid) as follows:
settled sink material. Aggregateparticles suspended in the
heavy liquid mid-zone between the float and sink portions For fine aggregate:
of the sample should not be removed with the floatmaterial.
After skimming, allow excess heavy liquid to drain from
M--21 (100) (1)
skimmer back into beaker. Transfer skimmed float material L= M2
to a wire basket container for rinsing to remove residual
heavy liquid from aggregate particle surfaces. Repeat For coarse aggregate:
stirring or basket agitation and skimming sequence until
all low density material has been removed and transferred L = M__! (100) (2)
to rinse basket. Skimming should be completed within 5 3/3
minutes fromtime test sample is immersed in heavy liquid.
11.2.1 After the sink-float separation has been where:
completed, clean float particles by washing in a suitable L = percentage of low density pieces,
solvent to remove residual heavy liquid from the particle M1 = saturated-surface-dry mass of pieces that float,
surfaces. For cleaning material separated in the zinc chloride M2 = saturated-surface-dry mass of portion of fine
solution, thoroughly wash float particles in water. For aggregatetest sample coarser than the No. 30
cleaning material separated in the kerosene- (600-#m) sieve, and
tetrabromoethane mixture, immerse rinse basket contain- Ms = saturated-surface-dry mass of original coarse
ing float material in a beaker of kerosene. Then, agitate aggregatetest sample.
material by using a vertical up-and-down motion of rinse
12.2 A suggested calculation form is shown on figure 3
basket for 3 minutes. Remove basket frombeaker and drain of USBR 4075.
excess kerosene for 1 minute. Remove remaining kerosene
by agitating basket in a beaker containing denatured alcohol
for 2 minutes. Remove basket frombeaker and drain excess 13. Report
alcohol for 1 minute. To prevent excessive contamination
and to maintain their effectiveness as rinse liquids, 13.1 Figure 3 of USBR 4075 also shows a typical
replacement of kerosene and alcohol is recommended after reporting form.
12 to 15 tests. Dry the floatparticles to a saturated-surface-
dry condition. Determine mass of float particles to nearest 14. Precision and Bias
0.0002 Ibm (0.1 g) for fine aggregate, and to nearest
0.0022 lbm (1 g) for coarse aggregate.
14.1 No interlaboratory or intralaboratory studies have
been conducted to determine precision indexes for this
NOTE 5.-Caution :To minimizeevaporation and the resulting
lowering of specific gravity, beakers containing the 1,1,2,2- procedure. The accuracy of this procedure may be estimated
tetrabromoethane heavy liquid solutions should be covered at by running separate specific gravity and absorption
all times when access is not needed. To prevent dilution of heavy determinations on individual pieces of the separate sink
liquid solutions by introduction of liquids of lower specific gravity, or float fractions, or both.
the wire cloth baskets used for immersion of aggregate samples
into the heavy liquids and the baskets used for immersion of 14.2 There is no known bias.
174
USBR 4123
RECORD DETERMINE FLOAT MASS DRY FLOAT TO SSD RINSE IN WASH FLOAT IN IMMERSE IN
MASS ON BALANCE ON DRYING SCREEN ALCOHOL KEROSENE HEAVY LIQUID
FOR 2 MINUTES FOR 3 MINUTES AND SEPARATE
FLOAT
175
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
( ram
USBR 41.27-92
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4127; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This procedure is a modified version of
ASTM designation: C 127-84.
176
USBR 4127
pore spaces within the constituent particles, as compared NOTE 1.-The terminology for specific gravity is based on terms
to the dry condition, when it is deemed that the aggregate defined in ASTM E 12, and that for absorption in ASTM C 125.
has been in contact with water long enough to satisfy most
of the absorption potential. The laboratory standard for 6. Apparatus
absorption is the absorption obtained after submerging
the dry aggregatein water for about 24 hours. Aggregates 6.1 Balance.-A device for determining the mass that
mined from below the water table may have a higher is sensitive, readable, and accurate to 0.05 percent of the
absorption, when used, if not allowed to dry. Conversely, sample mass at any point within the range used, or
some aggregates may contain an amount of absorbed 0.001 Ibm (0.5 gram), whichever is greater. The balance
moisture less than the 24-hour soaked condition. For an shall be equipped with suitable apparatus for suspending
aggregate that has been in contact with water and that the sample container in water from the center of the mass
has free moisture on the particle surfaces, the percentage platform or pan of the balance.
of free moisture (dry mass basis) can be determined by 6.2 Sample Container.-A wire basket of No. 6
deducting the absorption from the total moisture content (3.35 mm) or finer mesh, or a container of approximately
that is determined by USBR 4566. equal breadth and height, with a 1- to 2-gallon (4- to 7-L)
4.4 The general procedures described are suitable for capacity for the 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) nominal maximum
determining the absorption of aggregatesthat have had size aggregate or smaller, and a larger container as needed
conditioning other than the 24-hour soaked condition, such fortesting the larger maximum size aggregate. Each sample
as boiling water or vacuum saturation. The values obtained container shall be constructed so as to prevent the trapping
for absorption and the SSD bulk specific gravity by other of air when container is submerged.
methods will be different than the values obtained by the 6.3 Water Tank.-A watertight tank into which the
prescribed 24-hour soaked condition. sample container may be placed while it is suspended below
4.5 The pores in low-density aggregatesmay or may the balance.
not become essentially filled with water after immersion 6.4 Sieves.-A No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve, or other sizes
for 24 hours; many such aggregatescan remain immersed as needed, see sections 8.2, 8.3, and 8.4, conforming to
in water for several days without satisfying most of the ASTM E 11.
absorption potential. Therefore, this procedure is not 6.5 Oven.-An oven of appropriate size capable of
intended for use with low-density aggregate. maintaining a temperature of 230-t-9 F (110+5 C).
6.6 Miscellaneous Equipment.-Electric fans and
5. Terminology various drying cloths and pans.
177
USBR 4127
178
USBR 4127
11. Calculations NOTE 5.-Some users of this procedure may prefer to express
the results of the tests in terms of density. The density may
11.1 Calculations for specific gravity and absorption be determined by multiplying any of three specific gravity values
in this section use the letters A, B, and C: by the density of water at 73.4 F (23.0 C), which is 62.27
lbm/fO (997.5 kg/m 3 or 0.9975 Mg/m3).Some authorities recom-
mend using the density of water at 39.2 F (4.0 C), which is
where: 62.43 lbm/ft3 (1000 kg/m 3 or 1.000 Mg/m3), as being suffi-
ciently accurate. Whichever value is used, the results should be
A = mass of ovendry test sample in air, expressed to three significant digits. The density terminology
B = mass of SSD (saturated-surface-dry) test sample corresponding to the three types of specific gravity has not been
in air, and standardized.
C ---- mass of SSD test sample in water.
A, B, and C are all in units of pound mass (grams). 11.3 Absorption.-Calculate the percentage of absorp-
tion as follows:
11.1.1 Bulk Specific Gravity (Ovendcy).-Calculate the B-A
ovendry bulk specific gravity as follows: Absorption (percent) = 7 (100) (5)
A
11.4 Average Absorption Value.-When sample is
Ovendry bulk sp. gr. -- B-C (1)
tested in separate size fractions, the average absorption
value is the average of the values computed in section
11.1.2 Bulk Specific Gravity (SSD).-Calculate the 11.3, weighted in proportion to the mass percentages of
SSD bulk specific gravity on the basis of the mass of the the size fractionsin the original test sample:
SSD aggregate as follows:
P1Abl P2Alou I.AI
B Ab- 100 + 10-- + '" 100 (6)
SSD Bulk sp. gr. = B-"'--C (2)
where:
Ab = average absorption,in
11.1.3 Apparent Specific Gravity.-Calculate the
apparent specific gravity as follows: percent,
P1, P2.... P = mass percentages of each size
A fractionpresent in original
Apparent sp. gr. -- A-C (3) sample, and
Abl, A/ .... A/ = absorption percentages for
each size fraction.
11.2 Average Specific Gravity Values.-When sample
is tested in separate size fractions, an average value for 11.5 Figure 1 shows a typical data and calculation form
any of the three different bulk specific gravities can be for this procedure.
computed as the weighted average of the values computed
in 11.1 using equation (4). The derivation of this equation
is given in appendix XI. 12. Report
179
USBR 4127
the results from the AASHTO Materials Reference Table 2. - Precision estimates.
Laboratory Reference Sample Program, with testing
Standard Acceptable
conducted using ASTM C 127 and AASHTO Method T
Deviation Range of
85. The only significant difference between these two (1S) 1 Two Results
methods is that ASTM C 127 requires a saturation period (D2S) t
of 24+4 hours while T 85 requires a minimum of 15 hours.
This difference has been found to have an insignificant Single-Operator Precision:
effect on the precision indices. The data shown in table Ovendry bulk specific gravity 0.009 0.025
2 are based on the analyses of more than 100 paired test SSD bulk specific gravity .007 .020
Apparent specific gravity .007 .020
results from 40 to 100 laboratories.
Absorption2, percent .088 .25
13.2 Bias.-The bias for this procedure has not been
MultilaboratoryPrecision:
determined at this time. Ovendry bulk specific gravity .013 .038
SSD bulk specific gravity .011 .032
Apparent specific gravity .011 .032
Absorption 2, percent .145 .41
180
USBR 4127
Percentage
Size Fraction of size Specific Gravity Absorption,
fraction percent
in original
inches mm sample Bulk (0vendry) Bulk (SSD) Apparent
1 1
G = P1 P2 P.
= # - q 14P
= 2.64-
100--- + I00"----" +" "'" 100G 100(Z.6+) + 100(d..6.4.) + 100(..6Z)
Figure 1. - Typical data and calculation form for average values of specific gravity and absorption for a coarse aggregate tested in separate size
fractions.
18l
USBR 4127
APPENDIXES
M1 -I- M2 1 V1 1 112
G
Vx + I12 and, G1 M1 and Gu 342
1 1 1
G = = G = = Equation (4)
Vl-[-V2 Vl + V2 __P1 (11) + __P2 (_.)
341 + M2 3/1 + 342 341 q- M2 100 100
X2.1 Let: GR =
1 G
Ga = ovendry bulk specific gravity, Ab
Gs = SSD bulk specific gravity, 100
Ga = apparent specific gravity, and
G
Ab = absorption (percent).
100
X2.2 Then:
Ab = [G-Gs] lOO
Ga= ( 1+Ab) Ge
G8 -- 1 _ Ge
1 Ab AbGd
Ge 100 100
182
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4128; the number imme-
diately following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C128-84.
183
USBR 4128
absorption is the absorption obtained after submerging to address all the safety problems associated with its use.
the dry aggregate in water for about 24 hours. Aggregates It is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish
mined from below the water table may have a higher appropriate safcty and health practices and determine
absorption, when used, if not allowed to dry. Conversely, applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
some aggregates, when used, may contain an amount of
absorbed moisture less than the 24-hour soaked condition. 6. Calibration and Standardization
For an aggregate that has been in contact with water and
that has free moisture on the particle surfaces, the 6.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane-
percentage of free moisture (dry mass basis) can be ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests
determined by deducting the absorption from the total listed under the ApplicableDocuments of section 2 are
moisture content determined using USBR 4566. covered under that particular procedureor standard directly
or by reference to another.
4. Apparatus 6.2 The balance or scale shall be calibrated in
accordance with USBR 1012.
4.1 Balance.-A balance or scale having a capacity of 6.3 The mold shall be checked for compliance with
1 kg or more, sensitive to 0.1 g or less, and accurate within section 4.3 by linear measuring devices and calipers meeting
0.1 percent of the test load at any point within the range the requirements of USBR 1000.
of use for this test. Within any 100-g range of test load, 6.4 The tamper shall be checked for compliance with
the difference between readings shall be accurate within section 4.4 by a balance and linear measuring device or
0.1g. outside calipers meeting the requirements of USBR 1012
4.2 Pycnometer.-A flask or other suitable container and 1000, respectively.
into which the fine aggregate test sample can be readily 6.5 Drying ovens shall be calibrated in accordance with
introduced and in which the volume content can be USBR 1020.
reproduced within +0.1 cmL The volume of the container 6.6 The pycnometer or flask shall be calibrated in
filled to mark shall be at least 50 percent greater than accordance with USBR 1030.
the space required to accommodate the test sample. A 6.6.1 Alternative to Determining Volume of
volumetric flask of 500 cm3 capacity, or a fruit jar fitted Pycnometer.-Adjustingthe pycnometer and its contents
with a pycnometer top, is satisfactory fora 500-g test sample to a designated temperature for each determination of fine
of most fine aggregates. The Bureau-modified pycnometer, aggregate specific gravity may require considerable time.
a 1-quart (0.9464-L) fruit jar with opening edge surfaces A convenient pycnometer calibration method determines
ground level and capped with a plate glass disk top, is pycnometer masses, when filled to capacity with water,
satisfactory for a 500- to 800-g sample. at the various room temperatures that will typically prevail
4.3 Mold.-A metal mold in the form of a frustumof under laboratory conditions. Pycnometers should be clean
a cone with dimensions as follows: 40+3 mm inside and dry prior to this calibration. Entrapped air is removed
diameter at the top, 90-1-3 mm inside diameter at the from the water by manual agitation of the pycnometer
bottom, and 75+3 mm in height, with the metal having or, preferably, by application of a vacuum for 15 minutes.
a minimum thickness of 0.8 ram. During vacuum application, the pycnometer may be gently
4.4 Tamper.-A metal tamper with a mass of 340+15 g rolled or tapped occasionally to aid in the removal of air
and having a flat circular tamping face 25+3 mm in bubbles. If the preferred vacuum application is not used,
diameter. manually roll, invert, and agitate pycnometer until all air
4.5 StorageJar.-A water storage jar of about 5 gallon bubbles are eliminated. After final adjustment of the water
(20 L) capacity for maintaining water at room temperature. level to pycnometer calibration capacity, dry olltside of
Room temperature is considered to be in the range of pycnometer and determine mass of the water-filled
68 to 86 F (20 to 30 C) with a preferred range of 68 pycnometer to the ne/rest 0.1 g and water temperature
to 77 F (20 to 25 C). to the nearest 1 F (0.3 C). Repeat this procedure for
4.6 Pump.-A vacuum pump or an aspirator apparatus at least six different temperatures within the range of
capable of producing 20 inches (67.7 kPa) of mercury laboratory conditions. A calibration curve is then plotted
vacuum; and with the necessary pipe, connections, and through the data points obtained, using pycnometer masses
gauges for removing the entrapped air from pycnometers. as the ordinate and temperatures as the abscissa. The mass
of the pycnometer, filled with water at a specific
NOTE 2.-Either the pump or aspirator is preferable, but not temperature, can then be selected from the curve, or from
required, over the manual agitation described in section 6.6.1. a calibration chart prepared for each 1 F temperature
interval (see fig. 1).
4.7 Oven.-An oven of appropriate size capable of
maintaining a temperature of 230+9 F (110+5 C). NOTE 3.-Some procedural differences for the calibration of
volumetric flasks or fruit-jar pycnometers are: (1)Volumetric
5. Precautions Flask.-Fill flask with water until lowest lSoint of concave water
meniscus is even with calibration capacity reference line on flask
5.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous neck. If, after removal of entrapped air, water level is below
materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim flask reference line, adjust water level with a buret or pipet to
184
USBR 4128
\
with aggregatesused in their naturally moist condition,
the requirement for initial drying to a constant mass may
\ be eliminated and, if surfaces of particles have been kept
wet, the 24-hour soaking may also be eliminated.
\
\ NOTE 4.-Values for absorption and specific gravity in the
SSD condition may be significantly higher for aggregatenot oven
;\ dried before soaking than for the same aggregate treated in
accordance with section 8.1.1.
185
USBR 4128
NOTE 5.-While stirring the sand during drying, visual fine aggregate sample, prepared as described in section
inspection and handling of the fine aggregatewill indicate the 8, into the pycnometer. Then, fill with additional water
approach of the required free-flowing SSD condition. If the sand, to about 90 percent of capacity. Entrapped air shall be
when formed into a pile, is cut vertically with a spoon or small removed by subjecting pycnometer contents to vacuum
trowel and the cut portion of the pile remains vertical, surface
treatment and/or manual agitation (rolling, inverting, etc.)
moisture is still present. If the sand, when squeezed in the hand,
of the pycnometer. When entrapped air bubbles have been
retains the molded shape, excess surface moisture is present.
During drying, most sands change from a dark (wet) to light eliminated, bring water level in pycnometer to its calibrated
(dry) color. Adhering wet sand particles will, as drying progresses, capacity, and dry off outside of pycnometer. Determine
tend to become separate and distinct from one another when and record the total mass of the pycnometer, sample
near the SSD condition. specimen, and water to the nearest 0.1 g; and the
temperature of water in the pycnometer to the nearest
1 F (0.3 C).
NOTE 6.-The following criteria have also been used on
materials that do not readily slump: (1) Provisional Cone Test.-
Fill cone mold as described in 8.2.1, except only use 10 drops
of the tamper. Add more fine aggregate and use 10 drops of NOTE 7.-h normally takes about 15 to 20 minutes to eliminate
the tamper again. Then, add aggregate two more times using air bubbles.
3 and 2 drops of the tamper, respectively. Level off the material
even with top of mold, remove loose material from base, and
lift moldvertically. (2) ProvisionalSurface Test.-If airborne fines
are noted when fine aggregate is such that it will not slump 9.1.1 When filling pycnometer to calibrated capacity,
when it is at a moisture condition, add more moisture to the any air bubbles that may be entrapped between the fine
sand and, at onset of surface-dry condition, lightly hand pat about aggregate grains must be eliminated to obtain accurate
100 g of the material on a flat,dry, clean, dark, or dull nonabsorbent specific gravity values. When manual agitation is used to
surface such as a sheet of rubber, a worn oxidized, galvanized, remove entrapped air, stopper or cap the pycnometer to
or steel surface, or a black-painted metal surface. After 1 to 3 prevent any loss of sample. When using fruit-jar
seconds, remove the fine aggregate. If noticeable moisture shows pycnometers, match the alignment marks on the conical
on the test surface for more than 1 to 2 seconds, surface moisture
metal top and jar and, during manual agitation of jar
is considered to be present on the fine aggregate. (3) Colorimetric
procedures described by Kandhal and Lee [1] 7. (4) For reaching contents, cover top hole in jar with a finger. The glass
the SSD condition on a single size material that slumps when disk top of a Bureau-modifiedpycnometer should be held
wet, hard-finish paper towels can be used to surface dry the firmly in place during agitation of the jar. When subjecting
material until the point is reached where the paper towel does pycnometer contents to vacuum treatment by connection
not appear to be picking up moisture from the surfaces of the to an aspirator or vacuum pump, position and hold vacuum
fine aggregate particles. stopper or cap over pycnometer opening until reduction
in air pressure is sufficient to seal stopper or cap in place;
then continue to reduce air pressure until required vacuum
8.2.2 When the sample of sand has reached a surface- is attained. To minimize the "boiling action" that occurs
dry condition, the sample should be split into two parts with some fine aggregatesamples when subjected to the
using a sand splitter. One part will be used for reduced air pressure, the vacuum should be applied at a
determination of absorption and the other for specific slow rate. After application of the vacuum for about 15
gravity. Determine the mass of each part to the nearest minutes, slowly increase air pressure until vacuum seal
0.1 g. If bulk (dry basis) and/or apparent specific gravities is broken, and then add water necessary to fill pycnometer
are to be determined, adjust the two parts into identical to its calibrated capacity. After sufficient water is added
mass values for the absorption and specific gravity samples. to the Bureau-modified fruit-jar pycnometer for a convex
8.3 The preparation of the test specimen, based on meniscus of water to rise above the jar opening, the glass
a 24-hour soaking period, determines standard values for disk top is moved horizontally across the jar opening.
specific gravity and absorption. To meet the particular Firmly hold glass disk in place and manually agitate jar
requirements of concrete mix design studies, specific gravity with a swirling motion to bring entrapped air bubbles to
and absorption values for SSD fine aggregate may be top of jar. Remove the glass disk top and repeat this
determined for other than the 24-hour soaking period, with procedure until air bubbles are no longer visible.
the procedure being identical in all other respects.
9.2 Absorption.-Dry the absorption sample to a
constant mass at 230+9 F (110+5 C), and determine
sample mass to nearest 0.1 g.
9. Procedure 9.2.1 If a single sample is being used for both specific
gravity and absorption, remove fine aggregate sample from
9.1 Specific Gravity=Partially fill pycnometer with pycnometer after determination of specific gravity, dry to
water at room temperature, and immediately place the SSD a constant mass at 230+9 o F, cool in air at room temperature
for lO-0.5 hour, and determine sample mass to nearest
0.1 g. Care must be used to avoid any loss of fine material
7 Number in brackets refers to entry in Reference, section 13. during removal of fine aggregate sample from pycnometer.
186
USBR 4128
A
Bulk sp. gr. -- E+ B- F (1) 12. Precision and Bias
B
SSD Bulk sp. gr. -- E + B - F (2) 13. Reference
10.3 Apparent Specific Gra vity.-Calculatethe apparent [ 1] Kandhal and Lee, Highway Research RecordNo. 307,
specific gravity, as defined in ASTM E 12, as follows: p. 44.
A
Apparent sp. gr. -- E + A - F (3) Table 1.-Precisionestimates.
187
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4131-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4131; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 131-81.
188
USBR 4131
/
Direction of | II
xl x20,.
Steel shetT
Plate cover
,- 20 -.
F q
Suggested motor
:iT" ................""" Cast steel or rolled steel. /
ends not less iin ' "th)ck
II II II
/
not less than I hp. ',,, _ 60pemng. o I
---- I G !
I
I
II I I
Ii I I
I i
I i I
'jl iI
: _, ............... -I--_"
Metric Equivalents
I I I
inches I 4 6 7 20 28 50
millimeters 6.4. 12.8 25.4 89 102 152 190 508 711 1.270
189
USBR 4131
as to maintain the cylindrical contour of cylinder's interior NOTE 4.-Steel ball bearings 1-13/16 inches (46.0 mm) and
surface unless shelf is so located that charge will not fall 1-7/8 inches (47.6 mm) in diameter, with a mass of about 0.88
on cover or come in contact with it during test. A removable and 0.97 Ibm (400 and 440 g) each, respectively, are readily
steel shelf extending the full length of the cylinder and available. Steel spheres 1-27/32 inches (46.8 mm) in diameter
projecting inward 3.5+0.1 inches (89+2 mm) shall be with a mass of about 0.93 Ibm (420 g) may also be obtainable.
The charge may consist of a mixture of these sizes provided
mounted on interior cylindrical surface,of cylinder in such
the mass tolerances of sections 5.4 and 5.4.1 are met.
a manner that a plane centered between the large faces
coincides with an axial plane. The shelf shall be of such
6. Precautions
thickness and so mounted, by bolts or other suitable means,
as to be firm and rigid. Position of shelf shall be such
that distance from shelf to opening, measured along outside 6.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous
circumference of cylinder in direction of rotation, shall be materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim
not less than 50 inches (1270 mm). to address all safety problems associated with its use. It
is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish
NOTE 2.-The use of a shelf of wear-resistant steel, rectangular appropriate safety and health practices and determine
in cross section and mounted independently of cover, is preferred. applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
However, a shelf consisting of a section of rolled angle, properly 6.2 Precautions on shelf distortion in machine are
mounted on inside of cover plate, may be used provided direction outlined in note 2, section 5.1.
of rotation is such that charge will be caught on outside face 6.3 Precautions on backlash or slip in driving
of rolled angle. If shelf becomes distorted from its original shape mechanism of machine are outlined in note 3, section 5.1.1.
to such an extent that requirements of section 6.4 are not met, 6.4 Maintenance of Shelf:
shelf shall either be repaired or replaced before resuming testing. 6.4.1 The shelf of the machine is subject to severe
surface wear and impact. With use, working surface of
5.1.1 The machine shall be so driven and so shelf is peened by the steel spheres and tends to develop
counterbalanced as to maintain a substantially uniform a ridge of metal parallel to and about 1-1/4 inches (32
peripheral speed of from 30 to 33 r/min (note 3). If a mm) from junction of shelf and inner surface of cylinder.
section of rolled angle is used for shelf, direction of rotation If shelf is made from a section of rolled angle, not only
shall be such that charge is caught on outside face of angle. may this ridge develop, but the shelf may be bent
longitudinally or transversely from its proper position.
NOTE 3.-Backlash or slip in driving mechanism will probably 6.4.2 Shelf should be inspected periodically to
give test results that are not duplicated by other Los Angeles determine whether it is bent either lengthwise or from
machines producing constant peripheral speed. its normal radial position with respect to cylinder. If either
condition exists, shelf should be repaired or replaced before
5.1.2 The machine shall be equipped with an further tests are made. The influence that a developed
adjustable revolution counter that will automatically stop metal ridge from peening of working face of shelf has
machine after required number of revolutions. on the test results is not known; however, for uniform
5.1.3 A material discharge catch pan of suitable test conditions, it is recommended that ridge be ground
dimensions is required to preclude any test sample loss. off if its height exceeds 0.1 inch (2 mm).
5.2 Sieves.-Sieves shall conform to ASTM E 11.
5.3 Balance.-A balance or scale accurate to within 0.1 7. Sampling
percent of test load over range required for this test is
required. 7.1 The field sample shall be obtained in accordance
5.4 Charge.-The charge shall consist of steel spheres with USBR 4075, and reduced to test portion size in
averaging about 1-27/32 inches (46.8 mm) in diameter, accordance with USBR 4702.
with each sphere having a mass of between 0.86 and 0.98
Ibm (390 and 445 g). 8. Conditioning of Test Sample
5.4.1 The charge, depending upon grading of test
sample as described in section 8, shall be as follows: 8.1 The test sample shall be washed and oven dried
at 221 to 230 F (105 to 110 C) to a substantially constant
Grading Number of Mass of charge mass (note 5), separated into individual size fractions, and
spheres Ibm (g) recombined to the grading shown in table 1 that most
nearly corresponds to range of aggregate sizes furnished
A 12 11.02+0.055 for work. The mass of the sample prior to test shall be
(500025) recorded to nearest 0.002 Ibm (1 g).
B 11 10.110.055
(458425)
C 8 7.340.044 NOTE 5.-If aggregate is essentially free of adherent coatings
(333020) and dust, requirement for washing before and after test may.
D 6 5.510.033 be waived. Elimination of washing after test will seldom reduce
(250015) the measured loss by more than about 0.2 percent of original
sample mass.
190
USBR 4131
Passing Retained on A B C D
Totals 11.02+0.022 (5000 10) 1 !.020.022 (500010) 11.020.022 (5000 10) 11.020.022 (500010)
191
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4136-92
PROCEDURE FOR
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4136; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 136-84.
1 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, vols. 04.02, 04.03. NOTE 1.-It is recommended that sieves mounted in frames
2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, vols. 04.0l, 04.08. larger than the standard 8-inch (203-mm) diameter frames be
3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, vols. 04.01, 04.02, 04.06, 05.05. used for testing coarse aggregate.
4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, vol. 14.02.
5 Available from American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials, 444 North Capitol Street NW., Suite 225, 5.3 Mechanical Sieve Shaker.-A mechanical sieve
Washington, DC 20001. shaker, if used, shall impact a vertical, or lateral and vertical,
192
USBR 4136
motion to the sieve that will cause the particles thereon Table 1. - Fine aggreagate sample size. t
to bounce and turn so as to present different orientations Minimum amount Minimum mass
to the sieving surface. The sieving action shall be such passing sieve of test sample,
that the criterion for adequacyof sieving described in section Ibm (kg)
10.4 is achieved in a reasonable time period.
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 0.20. (0.10)
NOTE Z-Use of mechanical sieve shaker is recommended when No. 4 (4.75 mm) 0.20 (0.10)
size of sample is 44 Ibm (20 kg) or greater, and may alsobe
1 These samples are split in accordance
used for smaller samples including fine aggregate.Excessive time with USBR 4702, and the sieve analysis
(more than about 10 minutes) to achieve adequate sieving may performed on the resultant two samples.
result in degradation of the sample. The same mechanical sieve
shaker may not be practical for all sizes of samples because the
large sieving area needed for practical sieving of a large nominal Table 2.-Coarse aggregatesample size.
size coarse aggregatecould possibly result in loss of a portion Nominal maximum size Minimum mass
of the sample if used for a small sample of fine or coarse aggregate. (square openings) of test sample,
inches (mm) Ibm (kg)
5.4 Oven.-An oven of appropriate size that is capable
of maintaining a uniform temperature of 230+9F 3/8 (9.5) 0.5 (0.25)
1/2 (12.5) 0.75 (0.30)
(110+5c). 3/4 (19.0) 2.5 (1.1)
1 (25.0) 5.5 (2.5)
6. Precautions 1-1/2 (37.5) 20 (10)
2 (50) 45 (20)
6.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous 2-1/2 (63) 90 (40)
materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim 3 (75) 150 (70)
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It 3-1/2 (90) 255 (115)
is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish 4 (100) 350 (160)
appropriate safety and health practices and determine 4-1/2 (112) 530 (240)
5 (125) 680 (310)
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
6 (150) 1,175 (535)
7. Sampling Note: The masses shown for each size are not
mathematically interchangeable, each mass was
7.1 Sample aggregatein accordancewith USBR 4075. rounded off to a more convenient number.
The mass of field sample shall be mass shown in USBR
4075 or four times the mass required in sections 7.4 and sample may be split in accordance with USBR 4702 into
7.5 (except as modified in 7.6), whichever is greater. several suitably smaller portions, with each smaller portion
7.2 Thoroughly mix sample and reduce it to an amount then sieved and mass of each specified size fraction in
suitable for testing using applicable procedures described that portion determined. After all portions have been
in USBR 4702. The sample for test shall be about the sieved, total mass of each specified size fraction shall be
mass desired when dry and shall be the end result of the determined and required gradation calculations made based
reduction. Reduction to an exact predetermined mass shall upon mass of original large sample. However, the intent
not be permitted. of this procedure shall be satisfied for samples of aggregate
larger than 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) nominal maximum size
NOTE 3.-Where sieve analysis, including determination of
if a smaller mass of sample is used, provided that criterion
material finer than the No. 200 (75-#m) sieve, is the only testing
proposed, size of sample may be reduced in field to avoid shipping for acceptanceor rejection of the material is based on the
excessive quantities of extra material to laboratory. averageof several samples, and that sample size used times
number of samples averaged equals minimum mass of
7.3' Fine Aggregace.-The mass of the fine aggregate, sample shown in section 7.4.
after drying, should approximate the amount shown in 7.7 In the event that amount of material finer than
table 1. This amount is split into duplicate samples for the No. 200 (75-m) sieve is to be determined by
sieve analysis. After splitting, resultant test samples are USBR 4117, proceed as follows:
placed on separate nests of sieves and sieved in accordance 7.7.1 For aggregateswith a nominal maximum size
with sections 10.2 through 10.7. of No. 4 (4.75 mm) or less, use the same test sample
7.4 Coacse Aggregate.-The mass of the test sample for testing by USBR 4117 and this procedure. First, test
of coarse aggregate shall conform to table 2. the sample in accordance with USBR 4117 through the
7.5 Coarse and Fine Aggregate Mixtures.-The mass final drying operation, and then dry sieve sample as
of the test sample of coarse and fine aggregate mixtures stipulated in sections 10.2 through 10.7 of this procedure.
shall be the same as for coarse aggregate (sec. 7.4). 7.7.2 For aggregateswith a nominal maximum size
7.6 The size of sample required for aggregates with greater than No. 4 (4.75 mm), a single test sample may
large nominal maximum size shall be such as to preclude be used as described in 7.7.1, or separate test samples may
testing except with large mechanical sieve shakers. A large be used for USBR 4117 and this procedure.
193
USBR 4136
7.7.3 Where specifications require determination of NOTE 5.-The 0.0085 lbm/in 2 amounts to 0.428 Ibm (194 g)
total amount of material finer than the No. 200 (75-m) for the standard 8-inch (203-mm) diameter sieve. The amount
sieve by washing and dry sieving, use method described of material retained on a sieve may be regulated by using a sieve
in 7.7.1. with larger openings immediately above the given sieve or by
testing sample in a number of increments.
8. Calibration and Standardization
10.4 Continue sieving for a sufficient period and in
8.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- such a manner that, after completion, not more than
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests 1 percent of the residue on any individual sieve will pass
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are that sieve during 1 minute of continuous hand sieving
covered under that particular procedure or standard directly performed as follows: Hold individual sieve, provided with
or by reference. a snug-fitting pan and cover, in a slightly inclined position
8.2 Balances or scales shall conform to requirements in one hand. Strike side of sieve sharply and with an upward
of section 5.1 by calibration in accordance with USBR 1012. motion against heel of other hand at a rate of about 150
8.5 Sieves shall conform to requirements of section times per minute while turning sieve about one sixth of
5.2 and ASTM E 11 by calibration in accordance with a revolution at about every 25 strokes. In determining
USBR 1025. sufficiency of sieving for sizes larger than the No. 4
8.4 The oven shall conform to requirements of section (4.75-mm) sieve, limit material on sieve to a single layer
5.4 by calibration in accordance with USBR 1020. of particles. If size of mounted testing sieves makes the
described sieving motion impractical, use 8-inch (203-mm)
9. Conditioning diameter sieves to verify sufficiency of sieving.
10.5 In the case of coarse and fine aggregate mixtures,
9.1 The conditioning of the material is washing (if portion of sample finer than the No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve
required) and ovendrying. may be distributed among two or more sets of sieves to
prevent overloading of individual sieves.
10. Procedure
10.5.1 Alternatively, the portion finer than the No.
4 sieve may be reduced in size using a mechanical splitter
10.1 Dry sample to a constant mass at 230+9F
(110+5C). according to USBR 4702. If this procedure is followed,
compute mass of each size increment of original sample
NOTE 4.-For control purposes, particularly where rapid results as follows:
are desired, it is generally not necessary to dry the coarse aggregate
for the sieve analysis test. The results are minimumly affected
by the moisture content unless (1) nominal maximum size is
where:
smaller than about No. 4 (4.75 mm), (2) coarse aggregatecontains
appreciable material finer than No. 4, or (3) coarse aggregate
is highly absorptive, as in low density aggregate.Also, samples A1 = mass of size increment on total sample basis,
may be dried at the higher temperatures associated with the MI = mass of fraction finer than No. 4 (4.75-mm)
use of hot plates without affecting results provided steam escapes sieve in total sample,
without generating pressures sufficient to fracture particles, and M2 = mass of reduced portion of material finer than
temperatures are not so great as to cause chemical breakdown No. 4 sieve actually sieved, and
of aggregate. B = mass of size increment in reduced portion
sieved.
10.2 Nest sieves in decreasing size of opening from
top to bottom and place sample on top sieve. Agitate sieves 10.5.2 Figure 2 of USBR 4075 shows a suggested
by hand or mechanical apparatus for a sufficient period worksheet and typical computations.
that has been established by trial or checked by 10.6 Unless a mechanical sieve shaker is used, hand
measurement on actual test sample to meet criterion for sieve particles larger than 3 inches (75 mm) by determining
adequacy of sieving described in section 10.4. smallest sieve opening through which each particle will
10.3 Limit quantity of material on a given sieve so pass. Start test on smallest sieve to be used. Rotate particles,
that all particles have the opportunity to reach sieve if necessary, to determine whether they will pass through
openings several times during sieving operation. For sieves a particular opening; however, do not force particles to
with openings smaller than No. 4 (4.75 mm), the mass pass through.
retained on any sieve at completion of sieving operation 10.7 Determine mass of each size increment on a scale
shall not exceed 0.0085 Ibm/in 2 (6.0 kg/m 2) of sieving or balance conforming to requirements in section 5.1 to
surfaces (note 5). For sieves with openings of No. 4 and nearest 0.1 percent of total original dry sample mass. The
larger, the mass in pound mass per square foot (kilograms total mass of material after sieving should check closely
per square meter) of sieving surface shall not exceed the with original mass of sample placed on sieves. If amounts
product of 2.5 times the sieve opening in inches differ by more than 0.3 percent, based on original dry
(millimeters). In no case shall the mass be so great as sample mass, results should not be used for acceptance
to cause permanent deformation of the sieve cloth. purposes.
194
USBR 4136
10.8 If sample has previously been tested by USBR 3/8 inch (9.5 mm), 3/4 inch (19.0 mm), 1-1/2 inches
4117, add the mass finer than the No. 200 (75-/m) sieve (37.5 mm), and larger, increasing in the ratio of 2 to 1.
determined by USBR 4117 to the mass passing the No. 11.3 Figure 2 of USBR 4075 shows a suggested
200 sieve by dry sieving of same sample in this procedure. worksheet and typical computations.
11.1 Calculate percentages passing, total percentages 13.1 The estimates of precision for this procedure, as
retained, or percentages in various size fractions to nearest shown in table 3, are based on the results from the
0.1 percent on basis of total mass of initial dry sample. AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory Reference
If same test sample was first tested by USBR 4117, include Sample Program with testing conducted by ASTM C 136
mass of material finer than the No. 200 (75-#m) size (by and AASHTO T 27. While there are differences in the
washing) in the sieve analysis calculation; and use the total minimum mass of test sample required for other nominal
dry sample mass (prior to washing) in USBR 4117 as maximum sizes of aggregate,no differences entered into
the basis for calculating all percentages. the testing to affect the determination of these precision
11.2 Calculate the fineness modulus, when required, indexes. The data are based on the analyses of more than
by adding total percentages of material in sample that is 100 paired test results from 40 to 100 laboratories. The
coarser than each of the following sieves (cumulative values in table 3 are given for different ranges of percentage
percentages retained), and dividing this sum by 100: of aggregatepassing one sieve and retained on the next
No. 100 (150tm), No. 50 (300/m), No. 30 (600 tm), finer sieve.
No. 16 (1.18 mm), No. 8 (2.36 mm), No. 4 (4.75 mm), 13.2 There is no known bias.
195
USBR 4136
Fine Aggregates:
Single-operator 0 to 3 0.I4 0.4
precision 3 to 10 0.43 1.2
10 to 20 0.60 1.7
20 to 30 0.64 1.8
30 to 40 0.71 2.0
40 to 50
* These numbers represent, respectively, the (1S %) and (D2S %) limits as described in ASTM C 670.
t These numbers represent, respectively, the (1S) and (D2S) limits as described in ASTM C 670.
The precision estimates are based on coarse aggregateswith a nominal maximum size of 3/4 inch (19.0 mm).
S These values are from precision indices first included in ASTM C 136-77. Other indices were developed in 1982 from more
recent AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory sample data; however, these data did not provide sufficient information to revise
the values.
196
USBR 4136
03NIV13 IN3O3d
S9
OO5
00
OLZ
OZ
OOZ
0
OZl r;
OZl Z
001
OS z
OZ z
uJ
o..
09 o
OS
O
S[
....... "fo-=
O
SZ
OZ
81
e-,
91
Zl
Ol
e
L
9
9Vt t,
P/I Z/I --
;9Z "0
.<
DIIL
I
[/I
) "0 A
5
p/
IlL w
I m--
w
'9o.,
Ir/l I ..J
.J
Z/I l
/, z
z
z
I,II l I
G.
o
9
Z
g
Zl t
r
o
ONISSVd lN333d
197
USBR 4136
03NIi3 IN303d
o 8
i'm e
.o
m
I "--
z e,i
I N
I
z/I I'6/E I
i v
o o o
ONISSVd N333d
198
@ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
USBR 4138-92
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4138; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revisiorL This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 138-81.
1. Scope 3. Apparatus
1.1 This designation covers the procedure for 3.1 BMance.-'The balance or scale shall comply with
determination of mass per cubic foot, per cubic yard, or accuracy shown in table 1. The range of use shall be
per cubic meter of freshly mixed concrete; and presents considered to extend from the mass of empty measure
formulas for calculating yield, materials content, and air to mass of measure plus contents at 160 lbm/fO (2563
content of the concrete. Yield is defined as the volume kg/m 3).
of concrete produced from a mixture of known quantities
of the component materials.
Table l. - Minimum capacity of measures, and accuracy of scales.
2. Applicable Documents
Max. nominal Min. capacity Required accuracy
size of aggregate of measure of scales
2.1 USBR Procedures:
1011 Calibrating Measuresfor Sand Calibration inches (mm) ft3 (m3) +Ibm (+kg)
1012 Calibrating Balances or Scales
4O29 Density and Voids in Aggregate No. 4 (4.75) 0.05 (0.0014) 0.01 0.005
3/8 (9.5) 0.10 (0.0028) 0.02 0.01
4031 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
3/4 (19.0) 0.15 (0.0042) 0.02 0.01
Field 1 (25.0) 0.20 (0.0057) 0.02 0.01
4094 Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete 1-1/2 (37.5) 0.25 (0.0071) 0.02 0.01
4127 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse 2 (50) 0.33 (0.0093) 0.05 0.02
Aggregate 3 (75) 0.50 (0.0142) 0.05 0.02
4128 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate 4 (100) 0.75 (0.0212). 0.10 0.05
4143 Slump of Concrete 4-1/2 (115) 1.00 (0.0283) 0.10 0.05
4172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete 6 (150) 3.00 (0.0850) 0.50 0.23
4188 Density of Hydraulic Cementitious Materials
4192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
Laboratory 3.2 Tamping Rod.-The tamping rod shall be a round,
4211 Selecting Proportions for Concrete Mixtures straight, steel rod that is 5/8 inch (16 mm) in diameter
4231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Pressure and about 24 inches (610 mm) in length with the tamping
Method end rounded to a 5/8-inch-diameter hemispherical tip.
4311 Sampling and TestingFly Ash or Natural Pozzolans 3.3 Internal Vibrator.-Internal vibrators may have
for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement rigid or flexible shafts, preferably powered by electric
Concrete motors. The frequency of vibration shall be 10,000 to 15,000
4905 Consistency and Density of No-Slump Concrete vibrations per minute or greater while in use. The peak
With Vibratory Table amplitude, or one-half the peak-to-peak value, operating
2.2 ASTM Standards: in air shall be 0.0167 to 0.030 inch (0.4 to 0.8 mm). The
C 138 Standard Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and frequency and amplitude shall be determined by the
Air Content (Gravimetric) of ConcretO procedure outlined in USBR 4192. The outside diameter
C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement la or side dimension of the vibrating element shall be at
199
USBR 4138
least 0.75 inch (19 mm) and not greater than 1.50 inches listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are
(38 mm). The length of the shaft shall be at least covered under that particular procedure or standard.
24 inches (610 ram). 5.2 Balancesor scalesshall be calibrated to comply with
3.4 Measure.-The measure shall be a cylindrical section 3.1 in accordance with USBR 1012.
container made of steel or other suitable metal. (note 1). 5.3 The frequency and amplitude of the vibrators shall
Measure shall be watertight and sufficiently rigid to retain be calibrated to comply with section 3.3 in accordance with
its form and calibrated volume under rough usage. Measures procedure outlined in USBR 4192.
that are machined to accurate dimensions on the inside 5.4 Measuresshall be calibrated to comply with section
and provided with handles are preferred. The minimum 3.4 in accordance with USBR 1011.
capacity of measure shall conform to requirements of table 5.5 Calibrate measure and determine factor used to
1. All measures, except for measuring bowls of air meters convert mass in pounds or kilograms contained in measure
which are also used for USBR 4138 tests, shall conform to density in pound mass per cubic foot or kilograms per
to requirements of USBR 4029. When measuring bowls cubic meter. Follow procedure outlined in USBR 4029.
of air meters are used, they shall conform to requirements Measuresshall be recalibratedat least annually or whenever
of USBR 4231. The top rim of the air-meter bowls shall there is reason to question accuracy of calibration.
be smooth and plane within 0.01 inch (0.25 ram) (note 2).
6. Sample
NOTE 1.-The metal should not be readily subject to attack
by cement paste; however, reactive materials such as aluminum
alloys may be used in instances where, as a consequence of an 6.1 Obtain sample of freshly mixed concrete in
initial reaction, a surface film is rapidly formed which protects accordance with USBR 4172.
metal againstfurther corrosion.
7. Procedure
NOTE 2.-The top rim is satisfactorily plane if a 0.01-inch
(0.25-ram) feeler gauge cannot be inserted between rim and a
piece of 1/4-inch (6-mm) or thicker plate glass laid over top 7.1 Rod concrete with a slump greater than 3 inches
of measure. (76 ram), rod or vibrate concrete with a slump of 1 to
3 inches (25 to 76 mm), and vibrate concrete with a slump
3.5 Strike-Off Plate.-A flat, rectangular, metal plate less than 1 inch.
at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick or a glass or acrylic plate
at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick with a length and width NOTE 3.-Nonplastic concrete such as commonly used in
at least 2 inches (50 mm) greater than diameter of measure manufacture of pipe, unit masonry, and roller compacted concrete
with which plate is to be used is required. The edges of is not covered by this procedure. Refer to USBR 4031, 4094,
the plate shall be straight and smooth within a tolerance 4192, or 4905.
of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
7.2 Rodding.-Place concrete in measure in three layers
3.6 Calibration Equipmenr.-A piece of plate glass, of approximately equal volume. Rod each layer with 25
preferably at least 1/4 inch (6 ram) thick and at least
strokes of tamping rod when 0.5-ft3 (0.014-m3) or smaller
1 inch (25 mm) larger than diameter of measure to be
measures are used and 50 strokes when a 1-fO (0.028-
calibrated is required. A supply of water-pump or chassis
m3) measure is used. Rod bottom layer throughout its depth,
grease that can be placed on rim of container to prevent but rod shall not forcibly strike bottom of measure.
leakage is also required.
Distribute strokes uniformly over cross section of measure
3.7 Mallecs.-One mallet, with a rubber or rawhide head, and, for top two layers, penetrate about 1 inch (25 mm)
shall have a mass of about 1.25+0.50 Ibm (0.57+0.23 kg)
into underlying layer. After each layer is rodded, tap sides
for use with measures of 0.5 ft3 (0.014 m3) or smaller.
of measure sharply 10 to 15 times with appropriate mallet
For measures larger than 0.5 ft3, a mallet with a mass (see sec. 3.7) to close any voids left by tamping rod and
of about 2.25+0.50 Ibm (1.02+0.23 kg) is required.
to release any large bubbles of air that may have been
trapped.
4. Precautions 7.3 Internal Vibracion.-Fill and vibrate measure in two
approximately equal layers. Place all concrete for each layer
4.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous in measure before starting vibration of that layer. Insert
materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim vibrator at three different points for each layer. In
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It compacting bottom layer, do not allow vibrator to rest
is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish on or touch bottom or sides of measure. In compacting
appropriate safety and health practices and determine final layer, vibrator shall penetrate into underlying layer
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. about 1 inch (25 mm). Take care that vibrator is withdrawn
in such a manner that no air pockets are left in specimen.
5. Calibration and Standardization The duration of vibration required will depend upon
workability of concrete and effectiveness of vibrator (note
5.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- 4). Continue vibration only long enough to achieve proper
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests consolidation of concrete (note 5). Observe a constant
200
USBR 4138
duration of vibration for the particular kind of concrete, 8.3 Cement Content.-Calculate actual cement content:
vibrator, and measure involved.
N= m N,
NOTE 4.-Usually, sufficient vibration has been applied when y (2)
surface of concrete becomes relatively smooth and exhibits a shiny
wet appearance, at which time vibrator is slowly withdrawn. where:
NOTE 5.-Overvibration may cause segregation and loss of N = actual cement content in pound mass per cubic
appreciable quantities of intentionally entrained air. yard or kilograms per cubic meter,
Nt = mass of cement in batch in pound mass or
7.4 On completion of consolidation, measure must not kilograms, and
contain a substantial excess or deficiency of concrete. An Y = as previously defined.
excess of concrete protruding about 1/8 inch (3 mm) above
top of mold is optimum. A small quantity of concrete may
be added to correct a deficiency. If measure contains a large 8.4 Air Content.-Calculate air content:
excess of concrete at completion of consolidation, remove
a representative portion of the excess concrete with a trowel A _ Ve-VaVr (100)
or scoop immediately following completion of consolidation (3)
and before strike-off (sec. 7.5).
7.5 Strike-Off.-After consolidation, strike-off top where:
surface of concrete and finish smoothly with flat strike-
off plate; take care to leave measure level full. The strike-
A = air content (percentage of voids) in concrete,
off is best accomplished by pressing strike-off plate onto
Ve = volume of concrete that batch was designed to
top surface of measure to cover about two-thirds of surface.
produce in cubic yards or cubic meters, and
Then, withdraw plate with a sawing motion to finish only
Vr = total absolute volume of concrete produced
area originally covered. Againplace plate on top of measure
per batch in cubic yards or cubic meters.
to cover original two-thirds of surface and advance it with
a vertical pressure and sawing motion to cover entire surface
of measure. Several finalstrokes with inclined edge of plate
NOTE 7.-The theoretical mass per cubic foot, per cubic yard,
will produce a smooth finishedsurface.
or per cubic meter is, customarily, a laboratory determination,
7.6 Cleaning and Determining Mass.-After strike-off, the value for which is assumedto remain constant for all batches
clean all excess concrete from exterior of ineasure and made using identical component ingredients and proportions. The
determine net mass of concrete in measure to an accuracy theoretical density is calculated from the equation:
consistent with requirements of section 3.1.
T- M1 (4)
8. Calculations vt
where:
8.1 Density.-Calculate net mass of concrete in pound
mass or kilograms by subtracting mass of measure from T
theoretical density of concrete computed on an air-
gross mass. Calculate density by dividing net mass by unit free basis in pound mass per cubic foot, pound
volume of measure used, in accordance with USBR 4029. mass per cubic yard, or kilograms per cubic
8.2 Yield-Calculate the yield as follows: meter,
Vf
as defined above, and
M MI= total mass of all materials hatched corrected for
y --
D (1) moisture, and oversize and undersize in pound
mass or kilograms.
where:
The absolute volume of each ingredient in cubic feet is equal
to the quotient of the mass of that ingredient divided by the
Y = volume of concrete produced per batch in product of its specific gravity times 62.4, as determined in
cubic yards or cubic meters; accordance with USBR 4127 or 4128. The absolute volume of
M = total mass of all materials hatched in pound each ingredient in cubic yards is equal to the quotient of the
mass or kilograms (note 6), and mass of that ingredient divided by the product of its specific
D = density of concrete in pound mass per cubic gravity times (27)(62.4), or 1684.8. The absolute volume of each
yard or kilograms per cubic meter. ingredient in cubic meters is equal to the mass of that ingredient
in kilograms divided by 1000 times its specific gravity. For the
aggregate components, the bulk specific gravity and mass should
NOTE 6.-A value for Y greater than 1.00 indicates an excess be based on the saturated-surface-dry condition. For cement and
of concrete being produced, whereas a value less than 1.00 indicates pozzolan, the actual specific gravity should be determined by
the batch to be "short" of its designed volume. USBR 4188 (specific gravity) and 4311 (pozzolans), respectively;
20l
USBR 4138
a value of 3.15 may be used for cements manufactured to meet a PCQCS (Project Concrete Quality Control Sytem),
requirements of ASTM C 150; a value for pozzolans must be example not included in this procedure
determined because of the extreme variability in specific gravity.
9. Report
NOTE 8.-The total mass of all materials hatched is the sum
of the masses of the cement, fine aggregate in condition used, 9.1 Figure 3 shows a typical reporting form that
coarse aggregate in condition used, mixing water added to batch, includes a slump measurement in accordance with USBR
and any other solid or liquid materials used. Refer to USBR 4143. A PCQCS form is also available (not included).
42 ll for selectingproportions of concrete mixtures.
10. Precision and Bias
8.5 Figure 1 shows a typical calculation form for this
procedure. The calculations are called "clean separation 10.1 Data are being compiled and developed that will
calculations" because they correct for moisture content and be suitable for use in developing precision statements for
oversize or undersize in the aggregate. Step-by-step this procedure.
instructions for completing figure 1 are shown on figure 10.2 The bias for this procedure has not been
2. A computerized worksheet is also available that is called established.
202
USBR 4138
Volume of Concrete Represented*: lard yd3; Test Cylinder Nos.: _r-32 rHtea _T-330 W.F./Atoy Co.
LAOgO
Type and Source of Portland Cement*:2"o't. AZ'ZA-,,bATZ.aa,a, Class and Source of Pozzolan*: F'zv" AsH ""
: . ,@ --
Percent Cementtttous*/.4" ; Brand and Source of AEA*: Porx ; Dosage per (oz. or mL)*
Type and Brand of Other Admixtures* WeA POA-; ; Dosage per (oz. or mL)*/.5Z//m GEEt/r/r/oz/s
Slump* 2. oo inches; Density (D) =/4t 7. 3 or yd3; Measured Air Content* 4.._o o/.,, Temp.* 5"0 F
Date (Mo., Day, Year) and Shift* /-3o---(So d'cl.cr) ; Inspector ,. 8o,aEae
- } e.
g" N=2 " 0. 020
q4 7 0. /"
Sand qq7 4. . 9 " 7 40 Fraction
Oversize /.g /7 t/ -.
C No. 4 Undersize 1..4 / ) 1 t7 -. g"
oa 8/ to
inch 0o#'2" 0. 6 84 7 K Nominal
Fraction 6. O 13 1 o.6"q o'.. " 0./95 3'* .
r Oversize 8. g 8 t q -
s Undersize ,B.O Uq ) " 2 " 1 'O*
e /inches qgl -." qgg --_6" NominalFraction g'g 0'6. q30 q.,g" ,10
Total
Aggregate 3, 5" Specific gravities: Cement .3.17 Pozzolan .;2 Total Coarse Aggregate Volume
W ( / g5 ) Ibm
= O,K Percent Sand*: (o.zt5) yd3 (100) 2.7.4-%
Water-Cement Ratio*: C + P = ( 38' ) Ibm (o,78'5) yd3 =
* Data to be submitted with monthly progress report (fig. 3). T = 41L lb,n/fO,
203
USBR 4138
Volume of Concrete Represented*: /42 m3; Test Cylinder Nos.: Z-325 TMU r-33 0 I,A.F./4AoI'C=.
Type and Source of Portland Cement*:Zoj,4 t trZA-rgA=,; Class and Source of Pozzolan*: fz y A sa "F LAOu I0
Percent Cementitious* 1" ; Brand and Source of AEA*: PAoT#X ; Dosage per (oz. or mL)*
Type and Brand of Other Admixtures* WRA PD,4-2S .; Dosage per (oz. or mL)* 3. B,',*g/A CEEwr/rlous
Slump* 5"0. F mm; Density (D) = 235"f kg/m3; Measured Air Content* 4.o %; Temp.* /o C
Date (Mo., Day, Year) and Shift*/E-3o-70 (,oo SJctpr) ; Inspector . 8o',a'
Sand 5"q/
C 4.75 mm
O tO
a Iq.Omm 0
r
s Iq. o
e to
JT.. J" mm 5"70
A
g 3Z5
tO
gr 7'mm 413
e
g
a to
t mm
e
Water 0
M=
Totals, M .37
Yield of Batch: Y = ( Z37 o )kg = /,05 m Air Content (Gravimetric Method)*: A 1 - 1o.?zm3
(ZSSr) kg/m m (100) = 3.g %
W ( lID ) kg
(164) m (100) = 27.3-%
Water-Cement Ratio*: C + P ( Zoo ) kg = o. ;$ Percent Sand*: (O. 0o) m
* Data to be submitted with monthly progress report (fig. 3). T: 2.,,f '1 kg/m
2O4
USBR 4138
The portion of the worksheet above the numbered columns is self-explanatory. For the balance of the worksheet, use the following instructions.
Step/.-In column 1, insert each nominal size range for the coarse aggregate.
Step 2.-In column 2, record (1) actual batch quantities, (2) total mass of all ingredients, and (3) total mass of all aggregates (box marked
"Total Aggregate"). The liquid admixture quantities are not included for computations of totals.
Step 3.-In column 3A, record (as a percentage) the amount of free moisture or absorbed moisture from moisture tests performed on
each nominal aggregate size. Use a plus (+) sign for free moisture and a minus (-) sign for absorbed moisture.
Step 4.-In column 3B, record SSD (saturated-surface-dry) mass for each aggregate size as batched:
column 2, and percent of moisture from column 3A. Record the total of these values in the box marked "Totals, M."
Step 5.-Subtract SSD mass in column 3B from batch mass in column 2 and record difference in column 3C. This difference, if plus,
is water being contributd to mix by the aggregate; if minus, it is amount of water that will be absorbed by aggregate to reach the
SSD condition. The algebraic sum of these masses for all of the aggregates in column 3C should be recorded at the bottom of column
3C opposite "Water" in column 1. To verify this value, the total aggregate mass in column 2 minus the total in column 3B should
be equal to the value recorded in column 3C.
Step 6.-From test results of aggregate gradation analyses, record in column 4A the percentages of oversize, undersize, and nominal fraction
for each nominal size aggregate. The total percentage for each size of aggregate should be 100 percent.
Step Z-Multiply percentage in column 4A by mass in column 3B, divide result by 100, and record value in column 4B. The total'of
column 4B should be equal to total of column 3B, except for occasional and insignificant round-off errors.
Step 8.-Transfer to column 4C the undersize and oversize mass values in column 4B as indicated by the small arrows shown on the
dividing line between columns 4B and 4C.
Step 9.-Add combined masses in column 4C to corresponding nominal fraction in column 4B and record the resulting clean, separated,
SSD batch quantities in column 5.
Step 10.-Transfer the quantities for cement, pozzolan, and admixtures from column 2 to column 5. Determine total amount of mixing
water by adding mass of water in column 2 to mass of water in column 3C and record result in column 5. The total of all ingredients
in column 2 should equal the total in column 5.
Step //.-Calculate volume of batch, which is combined batch mass (total of either column 2 or column 5) divided by measured density
of fresh concrete. An equation for this calculation is provided at bottom of worksheet.
Step 12.-Calculate and record in column 6 the mass of each ingredient per cubic yard (meter) of concrete by dividing each corrected
batch quantity (col. 5) by volume of batch in cubic yards (meters). The toal of column 6 can be verified by mutliplying the measured
density in pound mass per cubic foot by 27 or by direct comparison if density is in kilograms per cubic meter.
Step 13.-Calculate solid volume of each mix ingredient (mass in col. 6 divided by density of each ingredient) and record in column
7. At the bottom of column 7, show the total of solid volumes and also the solid volumes for coarse aggregate and total aggregate,
where indicated. Record these total values to the nearest 0.001 cubic yard (or cubic meter).
Step 14.-The volume of air is equal to one minus the total solid volume of the ingredients in column 7, and the gravimetric percentage
of air is equal to volume of air in cubic yards per cubic yard (cubic meters per cubic meter) of concrete times 100. An equation for
this calculation is provided at bottom of worksheet. Record air content to nearest 0.1 percent.
The sand volume and total aggregate volume are obtained from column 7. An equation for this calculation is provided at bottom
of worksheet.
Step 16.-Based on clean separation, calculate percentage of each nominal fraction of coarse aggregate by dividing solid volume of fraction
size by total volume of coarse aggregate and then multiplying by 100. Record results in column 8.
Step 17.-Calculate water-cement ratio from masses of water and cement (plus pozzolan if used) shown in column 5. An equation for
this calculation is provided at bottom of worksheet.
205
USBR 4138
tu
o
C I
%
zI-
- "
':a,, , I
,G
m
...C
%3
,.- ,,; ,a
e.,
Q. e-
o o o
_
+
I
.
mC
ZZZ
,--
O
! ",4
$.
5
'6" N
206
USBR 4138
t
t tq!
.%
= ;,, c . '.
t0
k
tl..-
t
e-i
-i
.
ttl EO e" . ",o
kQ aa: .
el
to
"7_-,
E
o o
oz ,,.
k.3
o
rl
E
t I
I
,s
'-.9 z
tXl
o@
oil i"il .
It
o0
t
t %
207
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
( e, gall
USBR 4140-92
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4140; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure' is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 140-75 (Reapproved 1980).
1. Scope whole 10t of units from which they are selected. If specimens
are selected at worksite, those selected for moisture content
1.1 This designation covers the procedure for sampling tests shall be protected from rain and Other moisture after
and testing concrete masonry units for compressive delivery and until time of test.
strength, absorption, mass, moisture content, and
dimensions. 6. Number of Specimens
2. Applicable Documents
6.1 For the strength, absorption, and moisture content
determinations, 6 units shall be selected from each lot of
2.1 USBR Procedures: 10,000 units or fraction thereof and 12 units from each
1000 Standards for Linear MeasurementDevices lot of more than 10,000 and less than 100,000 units. For
1012 Calibrating Balances or Scales lots of more than 100,000 units, 6 units shall be selected
1104 Load Verification of Testing Machines from each 50,000 units or fraction thereof contained in
2.2 ASTM Standards: the lot. Additional specimens may be taken at the discretion
C 140 Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing of an authorized representative of the Government.
Concrete Masonry Units 1 6.2 The number of specimens prescribed in section 6.1
E 6 Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Methods may be reduced by one-half when only strength tests are
of MechanicalTesting 2 required.
3. Terminology 7. Identification
3.1 For definitions of terms used in this procedure, 7.1 Mark each specimen so that i may be identified
refer to ASTM E 6. at any time. Markings shall cover not more than 5 percent
of superficial area of specimen.
4. Precautions
7.2 Determine mass of units for moisture content tests
immediately after sampling and mark!ng.
4.1 This procedure may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment, and does not claim to address 8. Calibration and Standardization
all safety problems associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user to consult and establish 8.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane-
appropriate safety and health practices and determine
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are
SAMPLING covered under that particular procedure or standard directly
or by reference to another.
5. Selection of Test Specimens
MEASUREMENT OF DIMENSIONS
5.1 For purposes of test, full-size concrete masonry
units shall be selected by an authorized representative of 9. Apparatus
the Government. Specimens shall be representative of the
9.1 Measure overall dimensions with a steel scale
1 Annum Book ofASTMStandards, vol. 04.05. graduated in 1/32-inch (or 1-mm) divisions. Face-shelland
2 AnnuM Book of ASTlt4Standards, vols. 03.01, 08.03 web thicknesses shall be measured with a caliper rule
2O8
USBR 4140
graduated in 1/64-inch (or 0.5-mm) divisions and having 14. Test Specimens
parallel jaws not less than 1/2 inch (13 ram) nor more
than 1 inch (25 mm) in length.
14.1 Three full-size units shall be used.
9.2 Measurement devices shall be calibrated in
accordancewith USBR 1000.
15. Procedure
10. Specimens
10.1 Three full-size units shall be measured for length, 15.1 Saturation.-Immerse test specimens in water at
width, and height. Cored units shall also be measured for room temperature, 60 to 80 F (15.6 to 26.7 C), for 24
minimum thicknesses of face shells and webs. hours. Determine mass of specimens while they are
NOTE 1.-The same specimens may be used in other tests. suspended by a metal wire and completely submerged in
water. Remove specimens from water and allow to drain
11. Measurements for 1 minute by placing them on a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm)
or coarser wire mesh, remove visible surface water with
11.1 Read individual measurements on dimensions of a damp cloth, and immediately determine mass.
each unit to nearest division of scale or caliper and record 15.2 Drying.-Subsequent to saturation, dry all
the average. specimens in a ventilated oven at 212 to 239 F (100 to
11.2 Measure length L on longitudinal centerline of 115 C) for not less than 24 hours and until two successive
each face, width Wacross top and bottom bearing surfaces mass determinations at intervals of 2 hours show a decrease
at midlength, and height H on both faces at midlength. no greater than 0.2 percent of last previously determined
Measure face shell and web thicknesses, FST and WT, at
mass.
thinnest point of each such element 1/2 inch (13 mm)
above or below mortar-bed plane. Where opposite face 16. Calculations
shells differ in thickness by less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm),
average their measurements. Disregard sash grooves,
dummy joints, and similar details in the measurements. 16.1 Absorption.-Calculate the absorption as follows:
11.3 Calculations.-The equivalent web thickness can B-A
be calculated as follows: AB -- (100) (2)
A
TWT
EWT -- (12") (1)
L where:
where:
AB = absorption in percent,
EWT = equivfilent web thickness in inches per linear
A = mass of oven-dry test sample in air in pound
foot (millimeters per linear meter), mass (kilograms), and
TWT = total web shell thickness in inches per linear
B = mass of saturated-surface-dry test sample in
foot (millimeters per linear meter), and air in pound mass (kilograms).
L = length of unit in inches (millimeters).
* For metric units, use 1000. 16.2 Moisture Content.-Calculate the as-sampled
moisture content (note 2) as follows:
11.4 Figure 1 shows a typical form for calculations and
recording measurements. D-A
MC-- (100) (3)
B-A
12. Report
where:
12.1 Figure 2 shows a typical reporting form. The
report shall show average length, width, and height of MC = as-sampledmoisture content in percent,
each specimen; the minimum face-shell and web D = mass of sample as received, in whatever
thicknesses; and the equivalent web thickness as an average moisture condition, in pound mass
for the three specimens. (kilograms), and
A and B = as previously defined.
ABSORPTION, MOISTURE CONTENT, NOTE 2.-By definition, this is not the moisture content of
AND DENSITY the block; it is the moisture content of the block in the as-received
moisture condition as a percentage of the total absorption.
13. Apparatus
16.3 Density.-Calculate the density as follows:
13.1 The balance used shall be sensitive to within 0.5
percent of mass of smallest specimen tested, and shall be A
De -- (62.4*) (4)
calibrated in accordancewith USBR 1012. B-C
2O9
USBR 4140
De = dry density in pound mass per cubic foot 19.1 Three full-size units shall be tested within 72
(kilograms per cubic meter), hours after delivery to laboratory, during which time they
C = mass of suspended sample immersed in shall be stored continuously in normal room air.
water in pound mass (kilograms), 19.2 Units of unusual size, shape, or strength may be
and sawed into segments, some or all of which shall be tested
A and B = as previously defined. individually in same manner as prescribed for full-sizeunits.
The strength of the full-size units shall be considered as
* For metric units, use 1000. that which is calculated from the averagemeasured strength
of the segments.
16.4 Figure 1 shows a typical form for calculations and
recording data. 20. Capping Test Specimens
210
USBR 4140
caps and replace with new ones. Age caps for at least L WH
2 hours before testing specimens.
VE
(7)
1728"
where:
NOTE 5.-Two such high-strength plasters are "Hydrostone"
and "Hydrocal White." Other plasters should not be used unless
As = average net area in percent,
they have been certified by testing to meet the strength
requirement. V = net volume of unit in cubic feet (cubic
meters),
Vg = gross volume of unit in cubic feet
21. Procedure
(cubic meters),
L = length of unit in inches (millimeters),
21.1 Position of Specimens.-Position test specimens W = width of unit in inches (millimeters),
with the centroid of their bearing surfaces aligned vertically H = height of unit in inches (millimeters),
with center of thrust of spherically seated steel bearing and
block of testing machine (note 6). Except for special units A andDe = as previously defined in section 16.
intended for use with their cores in a horizontal direction,
* For metric units, use 1 109.
test all hollow concrete masonry units with their cores
in a vertical direction. Test masonry units that are 100
NOTE 7.-Net area calculations are based on values obtained
percent solid and special hollow units intended for use in the absorption, moisture content, and density portion of this
with their hollow cores in a horizontal direction in the procedure, sections 13 through 17.
same direction that they will be in when in use.
22.4 CompressiveStrengtA-Calculate the compressive
NOTE 6.-For homogeneous materials, centroid of bearing strength of a concrete masonry unit as follows:
surface can be considered to be vertically above center of gravity P
of masonry unit. = A-7 (8)
21.2 Speed of Testing.-Apply load up to one-half of P
&- AAg (9)
expected maximum load at any convenient rate. Then,
adjust controls of machine as required to give a uniform where:
rate of travel of moving head such that remaining load
is applied in not less than 1 nor more than 2 minutes. P = total maximum load in pound
force (kilonewtons),
22. Calculations Sg = compressive strength based on
gross area Ag in pound force per
square inch (megapascals),
22.1 Compressive strength of a concrete masonry unit So = compressive strength based on net
shall be the maximum load in pound force (kilonewtons) area An in pound force per
divided by gross cross-sectional area of unit in square inches square inch (megapascals),
(square millimeters). The gross area of a unit is the total Ag = L W = gross area in square inches (square
area of a section perpendicular to direction of load, including millimeters), and
areas within cells and within reentrant spaces unless these A,, L, and W = as defined in section 22.3.
spaces are to be occupied in the masonry by portions of
adjacent masonry. 22.5 Figure 1 shows a typical form for calculations
22.2 Where a minimum compressive strength on and recording data.
average net area as well as on gross area is specified,
calculate maximum load in pound force (kilonewtons) 23. Report
divided by average net area, and include result in the report.
22.3 NetArea.-Calculate the average percentage of net Report results to nearest 10 lbf/in 2 or 0.05 MPa separ-
area (note 7) of the unit as follows: ately for each unit and as average for three units. Typical
reporting data are shown on figure 2.
V
As -- (100) (5)
24. Precision and Bias
Vg
A
V -- (6) 24.1 The precision and bias for this procedure have
Da not been established.
211
USBR 4140
@-
% !
.. ',4
qJ .
e
IN
t
Z tX
v
t,l &
,,>, <
v
g
"1"
i
Z "=,
J ! 8 % _e
Z
B:
Z
< #I
d
z,-1 -k -z. -k
<
t
.= I; z
.'-
J'3
N t
% ,,%
rl
t,. t,.
:IN t-.
N
M e-
r4
212
USBR 4140
oO
%
t
N. N
t'
Z
o
oO
v
Z
$ "u
",,| Z
3
Z I
oo ?
Z
.<
oo
e-
t,,. t',. r,. ",. t',
/
q- q,,
e.
q q D
d t., t.,
213
USBR 4140
!
Z
-. j
.
I N
x| (".1
.1
1 k5 t
0
0
k) k) e
,-
>,
v
e
(o
%
tj v5
-
0
q
t \
e
-, --,e -
I
'i %,)
-- e-,
-,
t
e" 0
q
--|
k k4
q
:1
,1
?I qJ
"5"
21.4
USBR 4140.
.!
Z
1
o,
-V V
II I-- v
&
b-
o Z
._-
,L
. 1
q e.,
,4
I z .
8Zv
215
2 UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
"" BUREAU OF RECLAMATION ,
USBR 4142-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4142; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 142-78 (Reapproved 1984).
216
USBR 4142
appropriate safety and health practices and determine allow to cool, and determine mass to nearest 0.1 percent
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. of mass of test sample as defined in section 5.3 or 5.4.
7.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- 10.1 Calculate percent of clay lumps and friable
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests particles in fine aggregate, or individual sizes of coarse
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are aggregate as follows:
covered under that particular procedure or standard.
M1 - M2
7.2 Balances or scales shall be calibrated to meet P1 -- M1 (100) (1)
requirements of section 4.1 in accordancewith USBR 1012.
7.3 Sieves shall be calibrated to meet requirements of P2 = PI % original grading X 100 (2)
ASTM E 11 in accordancewith USBR 1025.
7.4 Drying ovens shall be calibrated to meet require- where:
ments of section 4.4 in accordancewith USBR 1020.
P1 = percent of clay lumps and friable particles,
8. Conditioning /141 = mass of test sample (for fine aggregate, this is
mass of portion coarser than No. 16 (1.18-
8.1 The only conditioning required in this test mm) sieve as described in section 5.3),
M2 = mass of particles retained on designated sieve
procedure is soaking the sample for 244 hours in potable
(sec. 9.2), and
water.
/'2 = weighted percentage of clay luumps and friable
9. Procedure particles of the coarse aggregate based on the
original percentage retained on each sieve
9.1 Determine mass of test sampleto accuracyspecified fraction (sec. 10.2).
in 4.1, spreadsample in a thin layer on bottom of container,
NOTE 1.-If a No. 200 (75-#m) sieve is nested beneath sieve
cover with potable water, and allow to soak for 24+4 hours. prescribed for washing sample after testing, the approximate
Roll and squeezeparticles individually between thumb and percentage of friable material, as opposed to clay- or silt-size
forefinger to attempt to break particle into smaller sizes. fines, may be obtained by determining mass of material passing
Do not use the fingernails to break up particles, and do designated washing sieve and retained on No. 200 sieve.
not press particles against a hard surface or each other.
Any particles that can be broken by rolling and squeezing 10.2 For coarse aggregates,the percent of clay lumps
into fines removable by wet sieving shall be classified as and friable particles shall be an average based on percent
clay lumps or friable particles. After all discernible clay of clay lumps and friable particles in each sieve size fraction
lumps and friable particles have been broken, separate the weighted in accordance with grading of original sample
detritus from remainder of sample by wet sieving over before separation or, preferably, the average grading of
the sieve prescribed in table 2. Perform the wet sieving the supply represented by sample. Should aggregatecontain
by passing water over samplethrough sieve, while manually less than 5 percent of any of the sizes specified in section
agitating sieve, until all undersize material has been 9.1, that size shall not be tested but, for purpose of
removed. calculating weighted average,shall be considered to contain
same percent of clay lumps and friable particles as next
Table 2. - Size of sieve for wet sieving aggregatesfor determination larger or next smaller size, whichever is present.
of clay lumps and friable particles in each size fraction.
217
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
(!)
USBR 4143-92
SLUMP OF CONCRETE
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4143; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 143-78.
1. Scope of cone. The mold shall be provided with foot pieces and
handles similar to those shown on figure 1. The mold
1.1 This designation covers the procedure for may be constructed either with or without a seam. Interior
determination of slump of concrete, both in the laboratory of mold shall be relatively smooth and free from projections,
and in the field. such as protruding rivets or weld material. The mold shall
be circular and free from dents. A mold which clamps
NOTE 1.-This procedure is considered applicable to plastic to a nonabsorbent baseplate is acceptable provided the
concrete having coarse aggregateup to 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm)
clamping arrangement is such that it can be fully released
in size. If coarse aggregate is larger than 1-1/2 inches, the
procedure is applicable when applied on the fraction of concrete without movement of mold. Care must be used while
passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve with the larger aggregate being disengaging the clamp because any vibration would increase
removed in accordance with section 4 of USBR 4172. This the slump of the concrete.
procedure is not considered applicable to nonplastic and 3.2 Tamping Rod-The tamping rod shall be a round,
noncohesive concrete. straight, steel rod 5/8 inch (16 mm) in diameter and about
24 inches (610 mm) in length, with tamping end rounded
2. Applicable Documents to a 5/8-inch-diameter hemispherical tip.
218
USBR 4143
/ t \\\
I
I
I
I
I
I \
I a
12
-rll.',.I
/I:!:1 /
k 1
;3
/lio , il !"/ ,
219
USBR 4143
220
USBR 4]L43
[a t;(oddl:i;lg and fJi]Hng cone using,: dlree sepLrace ]iu'ersl c:,f o:::,nc;ete,
(c:) Me;suring tte s, Jl,ump afte: subsidelq, ce 'd' Tapping the (,,ncrete t,:::, ,:}bsierve ihe p]asticiIy,
2 :2 I
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4151-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4151; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 151-84.
222
USBR 4151
,-Symmetrical about ,
all components of molds CR steel
t
-iqr
L__
t
t]] pacer screws
-'Y- YF l
<iT'zl'--Bose plate screw
STAINLESS STEEL
x i round cop,slotted for machine screw long GAUGE STUD
screwdriver
ELEVATION OF END PLATES No-he :"A Dimensions to be specifiedby purchaser.
5.1 Molding Room.-Maintain temperature of molding 6.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous
room, dry materials, and mixing water; and relative materials, operations, and equipment; and does not claim
humidity of molding room within the limits of ASTM to address all safety problems associated with its use. It
C 490. is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish
5.2 Moist Storage Facilides.-Maintain temperature and appropriate safety and health practices and determine
humidity of the moist storage facilities according to the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
requirements of ASTM C 511.
223
USBR 4151
I
I ,,
6.0ram I
I
I
t M :r-=,
lo.omm PLAN OF DOUBLE MOLD
-I0.0 mm
j q :-Izz '- 1-
I l
6.0mm
I I
I A ::V::' X--r::
"10.0mm
PLAN OF SINGLE MOLD
4]r___ mm 285mm
-@17. 5 rnm.
Bose plote screw 6.0m-mm, Gouge stud spocer screw 6.0-mm, Drill &top to toke 6.0e-ram gouge stud
200ram short 6.0mmxlo.ornm 150mm shoft 6.0minx IO.Omm & gouge stud spocer screw 1
' -Round
Round cop ,, , , i )
,l i, cop
-I--T- ,- -F--- -F-
'1_ I_ _1 I.'1/' '_1_] A I I A L]_' A
1o.0 mm
I0"0 mm)-'K6.( 'I0.0 m ,6 0 mm_J / \I0.0 mm
END VIEW SINGLE MOLD END VIEW DOUBLE MOLD GAUGE STUD HOLDER
Note: "A" dimensions to be specified by purchoser.
224
1J'SBR 4151
..........
Ill
sa,fe}, val,c hJ, d become s.uck, and :he: gauge I:mnd,, which at
iirs ;,Igal-l,t.t: a]7:l(:l[Cllk{ 1) k)e a* h]ld passeJi
:]k)ll)l.]t Z:erl:*, thllee' n]xi]]*],'L]-]] ,dhe,c]y ,:it b'y' reference t.c:, anc:,the
gr,,,:J u : ri< ,,n ,: m the s.c lie. a rd svc, pi-:,,ed ,: ,,n w rc, r*g s, ide cl,t pi This 7.2: Sca]les and s.(:andar4 n-],asses sha] be: .calJbraed to
o::,.ndii.,n ,:H *he g,Lage was tma]ly dlete{<:.d ald t[:,e' F,.essure, ,c,,.,mp]y v,'i]l.q, te,quiren-ents ,::If ASTM C 490 in acco>dan,:e
t}:,en :,: ual.;n.,nn l:m,gnit'Lde.. ',,':s, relieuse:d bcf,::e fiiture ca.uld
whl: , |)S,B,L '1 {]]l] l,
22:
USBR 4151
C 490 and C 511 by checking with certified thermometers pressure at 295+10 lbf/in 2 (2034+69 kPa) for 3 hours.
and relative humidity testers. At end of 3-hour period, shut off heat supply and cool
autoclave at such a rate that pressure will be less than
8. Number of Test Specimens 10 lbf/in 2 after 1.5 hours. At end of 1.5-hour period, slowly
release any remaining pressure by partially opening vent
8.1 Make at least one test specimen for each sample valve until atmospheric pressure is attained. Then, open
tested. autoclave and place test specimens in water at a temperature
above 194 F (90 C). Cool water surrounding bars at
9. Conditioning or Preparation of Specimen a uniform rate by adding cold water so that water
Molds temperature will be lowered to 74 F (23.3 C) in 15
minutes. Maintain water temperature surrounding spec-
9.1 Prepare specimen molds in accordance with imens at 74 F for an additional 15 minutes; then, surface-
requirements of ASTM C 490. dry specimens and measure their lengths again.
10. Conditioning or Preparation of Test Spec- NOTE 2.-If it is preferred to make all measurements at 80
imens F (26.7 C), it is recommended that specimens, after removal
from moist enclosure, be placed in water maintained at 80 F
for at least 15 minutes, removed and measured for length, and
10.1 Mixing CementPaste.-Prepare the standard batch
then placed in autoclave. Upon removal from autoclave, cool
consisting of 650 grams of cement and sufficient water specimens and water to 80 F in 15 minutes, keep specimens
to give a paste of normal consistency (USBR 4187). Mix in 80 F water for an additional 15 minutes, and then repeat
this batch in accordance with the procedure described in length measurements.
USBR 4305. Both the time-of-set specimens and an
autoclave bar may be made from same batch. Figure 4 12. Calculation
shows a typical mix record.
10.2 Molding Specirnens.-Immediately following 12.1 Calculate difference in length of test specimen
preparation of the time-of-set specimens or completion before and after autoclaving as the percent of effective
of mixing, mold test specimen into two approximately equal gauge length and record to nearest 0.01 percent. Record
layers. Each layer should then be compacted with thumbs percentage of increase in length as autoclave expansion;
or forefingers by pressing paste into corners, around gauge indicate a decrease in length by a minus sign prefixed to
studs, and along surface of mold until a homogeneous spec- percent value. Figure 5 shows a typical calculation form.
imen is obtained. After compacting top layer, cut off paste
flushwith top of mold with thin-edged trowel, and smooth 13. Report
surface with a few strokes of trowel. During mixing and
molding, protect hands with rubber gloves. 13.1 A suggested reporting form is shown on figure
10.3 Storage of Test Specimens.-After filling mold, 5 of USBR 4183.
place it in moist closet or moist storage room. Store spec-
imens in molds uncovered in moist enclosure for at least 14. Precision and Bias
20 hours; if removed from molds before 24 hours, spec-
imens shall be kept in moist closet or moist storage room 14.1 For a 0.11- to 0.94-percent length expansion, the
until time of test. single, laboratory-operator, multibatch-day precision has
been found to be 7.46 (R1S percent); and the single-
11. Procedure
operator, multilaboratory-batch-day precision has been
found to be 15.31 (RIS percent), as defined in ASTM E
11.1 Remove specimens from the moist atmosphere 177. Therefore, 95 percent of the time, two test results
24+0.5 hours after molding, and immediately measure for (each the average of duplicate determinations of properly
length. Then, place specimens in autoclave at room conducted tests) obtained by same operator on different
temperature in a rack so that all sides of each specimen days should not differ by more than 21 percent of their
will be exposed to the saturated steam. The autoclave shall mean, and test results (each the average of duplicate
contain enough water, at an initial temperature of 68 to determinations of properly conducted tests) obtained by
82 F (20.0 to 27.8 C), to maintain an atmosphere of two laboratories should not differ by more than 47 percent
saturated steam vapor during entire test. Ordinarily, 7 to of their mean.
10 percent of autoclave volume should be occupied by water. 14.2 The bias for this procedure is not known.
11.2 To permit air to escape from autoclave during
early portion of heating period, leave vent valve open until 15. Reference
steam begins to escape. Then, close valve and raise
temperature of autoclave at a rate that will bring gauge 15.1 For additional useful information on details of
pressure of steam to 295 lbf/in2 (2034 kPa) within 45 cement test methods, see "Manual of Cement Testing,"
to 75 minutes from time heat is turned on. Maintain Annual Book of ASTM Standards, vol. 04.01.
226
USBR 4151
Cement Brand Plant Pozzolan Brand Plant Cement Pozzolan Water, Consistency
Sample Name ID Type Sample Name ID Class Mass, Mass, mL Penetration,
No. No. grams grams mm
M- gAS o"v'dg s M- atttaa'. CAAtld-
.20 'O qd" //
7/#o .fro, r/a',
't?AH 2T .',4 74,30 aar
r.,tt,,4.s 8AOo
a'l,,t /g"
Remarks:
227
USBR 4151
Remark:
228
@ UNITED.STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
USBR 4172-92
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4172; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 172-82.
1. Scope 4. Apparatus
1.1 This designation covers the procedures for 4.1 Sieves.-Designated sieves shall conform to ASTM
obtaining representative samples of fresh concrete, as Ell.
delivered to project site, on which tests are to be performed 4.2 Wet Sieving Equipment.-Equipmentfor wet
to determine compliance with quality requirements of the sieving concrete shall be a sieve of designated size and
specifications under which the concrete is furnished (note conveniently arranged and supported so that it can be
1). The procedure includes sampling from stationary, shaken rapidly by either manual or mechanical means.
paving, and truck mixers; and from agitating and Generally, a horizontal back and forthmotion is preferred.
nonagitating equipment used to transport central-mixed The equipment shall be capable of rapidly and effectively
concrete. removing the designated size of aggregate. The screening
equipment shown on figures 1 and 2, although primarily
NOTE 1.-Composite samples are required by this procedure
unless specifically excepted by requirements governing the tests designed for screening concrete aggregate or soils, can be
to be performed, such as tests to determine uniformity of used to remove aggregate larger than 1-1/2 inches (37.5
consistency and mixer efficiency. Methods used to select the mm) from a concrete sample. A simpler apparatus for
specific test batches are not described in this procedure, but it screening fresh concrete is shown on figures 3 and 4.
is recommended that random sampling be used to determine 4.3 Hand Tools.-Shovels, hand scoops, plastering
overall specifications compliance. trowels, and rubber gloves as required.
1.2 This procedure also covers methods to be used for
preparing a sample of concrete for further testing where 5. Precautions
it is desirable or necessary to remove aggregate larger than
a designated size. This removal of larger aggregate particles 5.1 This procedure may involve hazardous materials,
is preferably accomplished by wet sieving. operations, and equipment, and does not claim to address
all safety problems associated with its use. It is the
2. Applicable Documents responsibility of the user to consult and establish
appropriate safety and health practices and determine
2.1 USBR Procedures: applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
4094 Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete
2.2 ASTM Standards:
C 172 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed
6. SamPling
Concrete 1 6.1 The elapsed time between obtaining the first and
E 11 Standard Specification for Wire-Cloth Sieves for
final portions of the composite sample shall be as short
Testing Purposes2 as possible, but in no instance shall it exceed 15 minutes.
E 323 Standard Specification for Perforated-Plate Sieves
6.1.1 Transport the individual samples to the
for Testing Purposes 3 location where the fresh concrete tests are to be performed
or where test specimens are to be molded. Samples shall
3. Terminolgy
be combined and remixed with a shovel the minimum
3.1 Wet Sieving Concrere.-The process of removing amount necessary to ensure uniformity and compliance
aggregate larger than a designated size from fresh concrete with minimum time limits specified in 6.1.2.
by sieving it on a sieve of designated size. 6.1.2 Start tests for slump and/or air content within
5 minutes after obtaining final portion of composite sample.
Complete these tests as expeditiously as possible. Start
I Annual Book of ASTM Standards, vol. 04.02. molding specimens for strength tests within 15 minutes
2 AnnualBook ofASTMStandards, vols. 04.01, 04.02, 04.06, 05.05, 14.02.
3 AnnualBook of ASTMStandards, vols. 05.05, 14.02. after obtaining composite sample. Keep the elapsed time
229
USBR 4172
,x ? /
I \ ",., /// . /
Figure 1. - Sieving hopper and hand sieves for gradation tests of coarse aggregate and soil
materials.
230
USBR 4172
| W _0 I
3 "
/4 Crankshaft
3" Hardwood arm
with ;/4 throw
Sieve frome
......Ci
Roller retoiners, 16 - U.S.
Slondord gouge
golvonized strips
V-bel t
/ !I
Frome of sieving
opporotus
2"0. O.
sheavl I
Pivoted motor
support to
provide
tension inj
belt
Ii
SIDE ELEVATION
4
q,
t/ Shaft
(3
=.
I/6-hp,llO-V 0
1150 -r/rain
o-c motor,
\2 x,Y2 x y4
Steel ongle
I in : 25.4 millimeters
I hp : 745.700 joules/second
ENO ELEVATION
Figure 2. - Power drive for sieving apparatus shown on figure I. This power drive is usually used ,,",.
231
USBR 4172
or by eferet(e to,. anot]qe spaced intervals duing ,discb, a'ge of middlle pcl,tii,,,n of.
k,.:d> De, n,:) ok,.tain samp][es unti]i after ,:1]1 waer has: been
8. Co.nditior, ing
added to, m[:ver, and dlo n,, ,::,btan samples fr,,m-n fiir'st or
las pc,,fi,:)ns c,,f btc]h, di!sehage Sample by repeatediy
8,. No sp.ecifk: cc,.ndJitic, ning is. requhed f,::)r this
passing a recep, tacie through enrie dliscfJ, arge stream ar
procedure oher han that equ[red unde the 'efereced
by cc, mpleely dive.r'iirJg dilsch, arge into. a sanq, F,]e .containe.r
ap.pEcable d.,::cument s.
Re.gulate rate t:,.f discharge c,f batch, h,.y the rate of revo]lution
,<)f &'urn and nov by sJize c,f gate opening. Cc,mposilte
9'. Procedure
samples within mr, e lima specified in s.ecti,:m, ,:5, into. c,.ne
9. i .&e_w, .c,,/:S.mZpie:.-Tlm size ,,:ff the oc, mp.,:)sit:e sample samp]le :c, test: purposes.
for s.t'ex-gtf, te.sts sha][ be a n:Jininmm .c,f I ft e' (0.03 m). el, 2: q <ao-T,.L,'):!g t:ron:,. Open- Tc, p Truc; i2'.x:cr.s',.
S.mlalJer samples pemit*ed for rcl, ut[ne air c:,:}nel-Jt
JElay b,e
A,/ea'eors, A,canag:/r..,n - Equ:,pe'e; or ()r.&e TT;pes of
and S]LImp te'ss, and he samp.le size shal be dictaiedl by (;,en'-Top Co.n'a'.ers.-Take samples by whichever mehod
the maxJimun: aggregate, size. described in 5:'..2.1, 92.2, e,,r 9.23 is. most appliic:ablk, under'
92 Tke methods used in, sampling:; sfJ,dl include the the given o::,nditions.
use .of eveLv pre.cautii,,)n that wil] assi!st iin obtainJing samples
that are. tuJly representati!ve of lne. nature and cor,d:hi.c,n 10. Additional Method for' La'ge,. Maximum-
.,f d-m ,c,,mcrete sampled Sz:;e,,. Aggregat:e Concrete
NC[ !: SaSL-lpli**g sh,:::,,Llcl n.,z:n/al]ly k:,e: perf,:,med as. the ' (). ] \X/hen o: mcrete cc, ntans agg;egate larger than that
o:::,ncre:e is ,delivere.d (,:m, fl-,e .,ehic]le used t., :ran, sp,<:{ the apprc,.prJiate f.r siiz.e of molds or equipm, ent to be se.d,
c,::,ncrete t,::, the :c, rms.; h<:,weve7, specJlfJcati,::,ns ma? re,quilre <.ther wet sieve the sarnp.]e but man-:e, density dle.termiinations for
pc, ms .t: sem-p.lhing, such s ];se cli>chtrge ,:i c.,:)t.,czete p'mmp use m yield o::mputa:atc, ns on the full mix.
232
USBR 4172
NOTE 4.-The effect of wet sieving on the test results should from the aggregatebefore it is discarded. Place only enough
be considered. For example, wet sieving concrete causes the loss concrete on the sieve at any one time so that after sieving,
of a small amount of air due to additional handling. The air the thickness of layer of retained aggregateis not more
content of the wet-sieved fraction of the concrete is greater than than one particle thick. The concrete which passes the
that of the total concrete because the larger size aggregate, which sieve shall fall into a batch pan of suitable size which
has been removed, does not contain air. The apparent strength
has been previously dampened or onto a clean, moist,
of wet-sieved concrete in smaller specimens is usually greater
than that of the total concrete in larger, appropriate-size nonabsorbent surface. Scrape any mortar adhering to sides
specimens. The effect of these differences may need to be of wet-sieving equipment into the batch. After removing
considered, or determined by supplementary testing for quality larger aggregateparticles by wet sieving, remix batch with
control or test result evaluation purposes. a shovel the minimum amount necessary to ensure
uniformity and proceed with testing immediately so that
10.2 When a density determination is needed for total time limits specified in section 6 are complied with.
material, including the plus 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) material,
and a mold or equipment of sufficient size is not available, 11. Calculations and Report
the density can be computed. An example of these
computations and information on concrete uniformity and 11.1 Calculations and reporting requirements required
mixer performance requirements are given in USBR 4094. for the specific test are covered in the procedures or
10.3 Wet Sieving.-After sampling concrete, pass standards listed under the Applicable Documents of
concrete over designated sieve and remove and discard section 2.
aggregate retained. This shall be done before remixing. 12. Precision and Bias
Shake or vibrate sieve by manual or mechanical means
until no undersize material remains on sieve. Mortar 12.1 The precision and bias for this procedure have
adhering to aggregateretained on sieve shall not be wiped not been established.
233
USBR 4172
,
-I l cop Screws zL
- ,7 "-,UNC-
(Drive end
/ "\
,Mitered corners optional
l'Dio, hinge Ix)Its some excepl
2'-0"
, __ - w/spacing washers as noted).
ll --1
'" ill[ lliiiiiiiii
I 17FTlll
7 cL
-- l l.l I ll.l "lllltilltlll I I lllll
111. ]llllll""lllltl II IIIH/ CRANK AND LINK ASSEMBLY
I====',',== III/
" IIII I i I I
'1-=" Plate
_o :- IIII I t I I I I
=, It1=, I, t11.1 -
.c.c.c
, o c, Ill" [llll l i i l i l I i I IIIII "ol l
- -=- --- .... HI lllll I I I I I I I I I l llll
I
l ]
SO,oshback. r"
.
/ PLAN
t
--+A"<JB
o Sieve frame hinged for easy A
- . o access to bottom pon/ VERTICAL ARM DETAIl'S \After drilling, cut and grind
for clearance lweighf
=0 _ = Travel-Throw adjustable, 3-selections-2-,4ll(showfl) rnoinfoins contact
: (I) --o l" \ .
......
> . P o 4-
iLX
or 5ilOSCllloflng ro*e 120*- per minute.
> -- I
?I /-- Safer y Guords
> , o
?
go. eheet
- Sploshbock
234
@ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
USBR 4173-92
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4173; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 173-78.
235
USBR 4173
236
USBR 4173
NOTE 3.-The SSD (saturated-surface-dry) mass of the plus 12. Precision and Bias
No. 4 to 1-1/2-inch (4.75- to 37.5-mm) material may be dried
back to the SSD condition and mass determined, but it requires
less time to record a submerged mass and calculate the SSD 12.1 Data are being compiled and developed that will
mass knowing the specific gravity as follows: be suitable for use in developing precision statements for
this procedure.
Msso = Ms( G---G-- ) (1) 12.2 The bias of this procedure has not been
G-1 established.
237
USBR 4173
Formulas:
At
100 Aa Ve Am
100Aa V,
100 Vt-Aa V 100 V= + Aa ( Ve- V=)
where:
At = air content of full mixture (15), percent;
As = air content of sample tested (6), percent (do not use in decimal form);
V, = absolute volume of mix passing/.___inch (2/7.K'mm) sieve, air free, (8 vol.), ft3 (m3);
vt = absolute volume of total mix (8 vol.) + (14), ft (m0;
v, = absolute volume of mix coarser than/.6" inch (3_7.'mm), (14), ft (m0;
Am = air content of mortar fraction (16), percent; and
Vm = absolute volume of mortar fraction, air free, (12 vol.), ft (m).
* By definition, percent retained should be basedon mass of total sample. Additional steps to those shown for this example
would therefore be required.
238
@ UNITED STATES OF RECLAMATION
INTERIORBuREAU
DEPARTMENTOFTHE ()
USBR 4183-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4183; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 183-83a.
2.1 USBR Procedures: 3.1 A ton as used in this procedure is 2,000 Ibm
4109 Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (907.2 kg).
Using 2-1nch or 50-Millimeter Cube Specimens
4114 Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement 4. Significance and Use
4151 Autoclave Expansion of Portland Cement
4185 Air Content of Hydraulic Cement Mortar 4.1 The sampling methods described in this procedure
4186 Heat of Hydration of Hydraulic Cement are intended for use in the procurement of samples for
4187 Normal Consistency of Hydraulic Cement acceptancetests of hydraulic cement, and are not intended
4188 Density of Hydraulic Cementitious Materials as sampling methods for quality control purposes in
4191 Time-of-Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat manufacturing. The acceptance procedures cover the
Needle amount of testing to be done, and provide guidance for
4204 Fineness of Cementitious Materials by Air reporting on compliance or noncompliance of cements with
Permeability Apparatus specifications requirements.
4227 Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate
Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method) 5. Type and Size of Samples
4233 Testing Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
4266 Time-of-Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Gillmore
5.1 A cement sample secured from a conveyor, bulk
Needles
storage, or from a bulk shipment in one operation shall
4311 Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans
be termed a "grab sample." A sample obtained during a
for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement
10-minute interval using an automatic sampling device that
Concrete
continuously samples a cement stream may also be termed
4430 Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by No. 325 (45-gm)
a "grab sample."
Sieve
5.2 Grab samples taken at prescribed intervals over
4441 Effectiveness of Mineral Admixtures in Preventing
a period of time may be combined to form a "composite
Excessive Expansion of Concrete Due to Alkali-Aggregate
sample" that is representative of the cement produced
Reaction
during that period.
4451 Early Stiffening of Portland Cement (Paste Method)
5.3 Composite samples on which physical and chemical
2.2 ASTM Standards:
tests are to be made are called "test samples."
Cl15 Standard Test Method for Fineness of Portland
5.4 All samples, whether grab or composite, shall have
Cement by the Turbidimeter
a mass of at least 10 Ibm (4.5 kg).
C 157 Standard Test Method for Length Change of
5.5 The Government may designate a representative
Hardened Cement Mortar and ConcretCa
to supervise the sampling, packing, and shipping of
samples.
1 AnnualBook ofASTMSrandards,vol. 04.01.
2 Annual BookofASTMStandards,vol. 04.02.
3 AnnualBookofASTMStandards,vol. 04.03. 5 Engineering and Design, Department of the Army, U.S. Army Corps
4 AnnualBookofASTMSrandards,vols. 04.06, 05.05, 14.02. of Engineers, Washington, DC 20314.
239
USBR 4183
5.6 Samples shall be packed in moistureproof, airtight 8.1.1 From Conveyor Delivering to Bulk Storage.-
containers that are to be numbered consecutively in the Take one grab sample of 10 Ibm (4.5 kg) minimum at
order that samples were taken. Containers shall be crated, about 6-hour intervals.
if necessary, before shipping to testing location. 8.1.2 Transfer Sampling.-Samples of cement in
storage may be taken while the cement is being transferred
NOTE 1.-Containers made of polyvinyl chloride have from one bin to another. One grab sample shall be taken
occasionally been found to affect the air-entraining potential of from the the transfer stream for every 400 tons (363 Mg)
a cement sample. The same problem might be experienced with of cement, or fraction thereof, but no less than two samples
containers made from other plastics. shall be taken.
8.1.3 Other Sampling Methods.-When neither of
6. Testing Time Requirements for Compliance the sampling methods of sections 8.1.1 and 8.1.2 is
Verification Tests applicable, the sample may be taken, when authorized by
the Government, by one of the following methods:
6.1 When compliance verification tests of hydraulic 8.1.3.1 From Bulk Storage atPoints ofDischarge.-
cement are required to be made at a laboratory other than Withdraw cement from discharge openings in a steady
that of the cement manufacturer, the cement sampling stream until sampling is completed. The quantity of cement
schedule, sample transportation time, and sample testing in tons to be withdrawn from one discharge opening may
schedule must be coordinated among the Government, be estimated as 0.2 times 0.00173 d 3, where d 3 is the
manufacturer, and testing laboratory so that test results depth in feet of cement above the discharge opening. If
will be available when decision to accept or reject cement a high circular silo is being sampled, all samples may be
must be made. taken from one opening. If quantity of cementin bin
6.2 The cement manufacturer shall make the cement exceeds 1,200 tons (1089 Mg) when low rectangular bins
available for obtaining test samples at a date prior to the are being sampled, the number of discharge openings used
date that the test results are needed for the acceptance in the sampling shall be such that, for no opening, shall
or rejection of the cement so that at least the applicable number of samples represent more than one-half the.
time intervals shown in the following tabulation can be contents of bin, or more than 2,000 tons (1814 Mg). In
ensured. This will allow the testing laboratory to provide sampling bulk storage at points of discharge while the
test results not later than the indicated number of days cement is flowing through openings, take samples at such
after sampling: intervals so that one sample shall be taken for every 400
tons (363 Mg) of cement in bin or silo.
8.1.3.2 From Bulk Storage or Bulk Shipment
Tests 1 Time interval, Using a Slotted-Tube Sampler or Sampling Pipe.-When
days depth of cement to be sampled does not exceed 7 feet
(2.1 m), samples may be obtained bya slotted-tube sampler
4109, 4114, 4151, 4185, 4191, 4204, 4266,
similar to that shown on figure 1. The sampler shall be
4451, C 115, C 265, and C 563
between 5 and 6 feet (1.5 and 1.8 m) long, about
(1-day results) 8
4109 (3-day results) 10 1-3/8 inches (35 ram) outside diameter, and shall consist
4109 and 4186 (7-day results) 14 of two polished brass telescopic tubes with registering slots
4227 and C 452 (14-day results) 21 which are opened or closed by rotation of the inner tube;
4109 and 4186 (28-day results) 35 the outer tube being provided with a sharp point to facilitate
C 157 (34-day results) 41 penetration. For depths of cement greater than 7 feet, a
42_27 (56-day results) 63 sampling pipe activated by an air jet, which is capable
4227 (91-day results) 98 of removing samples from different depths, may be used
1 Numbers preceded by a C are ASTM Standard Tests; other
where applicable. Take samples obtained with slotted-tube
numbers are USBR Procedures. sampler or sampling pipe from well-distributed points and
various depths of the cement so that samples taken will
be representative of total quantity.
7. Precautions
8.1.3.3 From Packaged Cement Using Tube
Sampler.-Insert sampler (fig. 2) diagonally into valve of
7.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous ma- bag and place thumb over air hole. Then, withdraw the
terials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim to sampler. Take one sample from a bag for every 5 tons
address all safety problems associated with its use. It is
(4.5 Mg), or fraction thereof.
the responsibility of the user to consult and establish 8.1.3.4 From Bulk Shipment by Car or Truck:
appropriate safety and health practices and determine
8.1.3.4.1 Single Shipment.-If only one car or
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. truck is being loaded, a 10-Ibm (4.5-kg) sample shall be
8. Sampling
240
USBR 4183
iAir hole
0
10. Conditioning
b (2) 10.1 Before testing, pass each sample through a No. 20
8'(HO ram) (850-/m) sieve 6 or any other sieve having about 20
20' (520 mml z' ,
openings per inch (or per 25 mm) to mix the sample,
28." (730 ram) /l" #m-
break up lumps, and remove foreign materials. Discard
the foreign materials and hardened lumps that do not break
0
i|
2 i (64 ram) -
+ up during sieving or brushing. Store cement in airtight,
24l
USBR 4183
When quality history is based on any data more than random method. The numbers identifying the subgroup
2 years old. are listed in numerical sequence and paired in the order
When it is deemed necessary to recalculate critical of listing. The range, which is the difference between the
limit because of indicated lack of control (sec. 12.2.3). test results of a pair, for each of these pairs of test results
is then computed. These ranges are totaled and their sum
11.6 Reduced Testing.-After quality history has been divided by total number of ranges used to obtain average
established (sec. 12.2.1), testing may be done at the reduced range (.). The average range shall be computed for each
testing rate (note 4). If results of these tests are within included physical and chemical property limited by the
critical range, additional tests (equal to number of tests specifications requirements.
at normal testing rate) shall be made. 12.2.2 CriticalLimit.-Calculate the critical limit (C)
for each included physical and chemical property limited
NOTE 4.-When quality history indicates that the results for by the specifications requirements. First, the average range
a given requirement will probably be within critical range and is multiplied by the probability factor 2.49, yielding a
that substantial delay in completion of tests would result from
value which, for convenience, is called d. If the requirement
making additional tests (e.g., compressive strength), it may be
has a maximum specification limit, C is obtained by
desirable to make tests at normal rate rather than at reduced
rate. subtracting d from that specification limit. If there is
a minimum limit, obtain C by adding d to that limit.
11.7 Selection of Samples for Testing.-The samples Quality history charts shall be maintained.
to be tested from each lot of samples shall be taken by
some random method. The followingmethod is suggested: NOTE 5.-Improved estimates of ? and, consequently, C will
A group of consecutively numbered markers equal to the result if test results are not rounded. For example, the test result
of 21.78 percent for SiO2 is preferred to the rounded value of
number of samples are placed in a container and mixed.
21.8 percent. For fineness, the calculated value of 3243 is preferred
Then, one marker at a time is drawn from container until
to the rounded value of 3240.
number of markers drawn is equal to number of samples
to be tested at the normal rate. If testing is to be done 12.2.3 Control Chart.-A control chart of the range
at the reduced rate, the markers so drawn are again placed shall be maintained to indicate when critical limit needs
in a container, mixed, and two markers drawn to select to be recomputed. The average range (sec. 12.2.1) is
the samples to be tested. multiplied by the probability factor 3.267 to obtain the
upper control limit for the range between each consecutive
12. Acceptance
pair of test results. The horizontal scale of the chart will
be successive groups of two tests, and the vertical scale
12.1 Definitions: will be the range. When the chart indicates lack of control
12.1.1 Reduced Testing Rate.-A test program that (points beyond upper control limit), the critical limit may
provides for testing only two samples from any given lot need to be recalculated. The occurrence of two consecutive
of samples that have been obtained and prepared for testing points beyond upper control limit for the range or the
at normal rate as described in section 11. The program occurrence of three points beyond upper control limit in
for reduced testing uses probability factors and is designed any series of five consecutive points, shall be considered
such that when results from the two tested samples fulfill cause to recalculate critical limit. When it becomes necessary
requirements of test program, there is a 95-percent to recalculate critical limit, reduced testing shall be
confidence level that less than 5 percent of the untested discontinued until a new quality history has been
samples would be outside the specifications limits. established.
12.1.2 Lot.-Aspecific quantity of cement offered for
inspection and acceptance at any one time. A lot may be NOTE 6.-Examples on tile calculation of ? and d, and quality
one or more storage bins filled consecutively, or the contents history and control charts are shown in table 2 and on figures
of one or more transport units representing cement drawn 3 and 4. Tile specifications limits used in these examples are
from same storage bin. hypothetical.
12.2 The procedure for establishing a quality history
and control charts shall be as follows: 12.3 Acceptance for Normal Testing.-When testing is
12.2.1 Quality History.-The quality history shall being done at normal testing rate, the cement shall be
represent cement from same source as cement to be tested, accepted if it meets specifications requirements; and shall
and shall be based on data not more than 2 years old. be reported as failing to meet specifications requirements
There shall be available test results for not less than 40 if it does not meet each requirement specified.
test samples representing not less than 7 lots of cement. 12.4 Acceptance for Reduced Testing.-When testing
The test samples shall conform to the applicable provisions is being done at reduced testing rate, the cement shall
of section 11. A pair shall be two test samples from the be accepted if the average of the test results is further
same lot, in numerical sequence. Several pairs from the from the specified limit than it is from the critical limit.
same lot may be used when available. The number of paired If average of results for one or more requirements are
samples representing a large lot may be reduced as follows: between critical limit and specification limit, additional
From the consecutively numbered group of tested samples samples shall be tested (equal to number of tests at normal
representing entire lot, a subgroup is selected by some rate) for that requirement. After completion of additional
242
USBR 4183
243
USBR 4183
LOT NUMBER
88 .91 98 106 107 III
IIZ II3 120 I;3 126 1?-9 130 13; 137 146-151
0.6
I I ISPE. LIIT=66%
j--
Z
=_O_ u
v
CRITICAL LIMIT=O. 558 %
w 0.5 v aA
O01 g'O 0 QO I
C.)
a: 0.4 ,,=
a. AL (ALIES
0.3 I
190 A
42,000 - A
w
z
al .I
-180
g w w B m oO mO u
" 38,000
=
D
of A m 170 "
=
--CRITIC,L LIMIT:34.199115T * - 160 (n
,,, 34,000 gl
- 150 z
(.,, o
o:
0
30,000 SPEC.LIMIT=30,OOOIb' 140 --
h --1305
-- 120 "'
o 26,000 Z
z 7-DAY STRENGTH
- 110 o
D 22,000 - I0O -J
-III
0
90 ""
o_ 18.000 80
NOTE: I Ibf=4.448 x I0-3 kN
LOT NUMBER
88 91 98 106 107 III 112 113 120 123 126 129 130 132 137 146 151
p-
0.O8
ALKALIES
! 'I =
z
W
0.06 CONTROL LIMIT= 0.0560/(
no 0.04
w
a_ 0.02
A A
IIII
N Z
m
v - 40
w 8,000 7-DAY STRENGTH u')
c -- 30)
n..
0
6,000 eL?3 CONTROL LIMIT=5.510 Ibf - t---
LI.. -- 20 N
o 4,0DO A Z
z --10 o
0 2,000 _J
(3_
0 0
NOTE: I Ibf= 4.448 x I0-3 kN
244
USBR 4183
tests, if all results meet specified requirements, the cement re.uired for initial tests or, if a within-laboratory precision
shall be accepted. The cement shall be reported as failing statement is given which is based on a specified number
to meet the specifications requirements if any test result of replicates (i.e., duplicate or triplicate determinations),
does not conform to a respective requirement. the number of replicates used as the basis of such a precision
statement. If two or more determinations are required,
13. Noncompliance and Retest the value reported shall be the average of all results that
are within the limits of precision of the procedure at the
13.1 If any test result fails to meet a specifications 95-percent confidence level, as stated in the applicable
requirement, the lot of cement involved shall not be rejected specifications or as generally recognized.
unless noncompliance is confirmed by a retest as described
14. Calculations
in 12.2.
13.2 A retest is considered to be an additional test of
14.1 Suggested worksheets for typical calculations are
a certain property. The retest is made when results of
provided with the test procedures listed in the Applicable
initial test of this property would cause rejection of a cement
Documents of section 2.
for nonconformance with specifications requirements. A
retest may consist of either a single determination or a 15. Report
set of replicate determinations.
13.3 - Retests shall be conducted in accordance with the 15.1 Figure 5 shows a typical reporting form for all
provisions, if given, of the applicable specifications. If no acceptancetests of hydraulic cement.
provisions are given, the following procedure shall be used:
13.3.1 Make retest on a portion of same sample used 16. Precision and Bias
for the initial test. Use reference methods, when provided,
for determination of property requiring retest. In such cases, 16.1 Precision and bias statements are not appropriate
use only the results obtained by these reference methods. for this procedure because numerical reports of success
Retest shall consist of same number of determinations or failure are not required.
245
USBR 4183
I ioo..
so- .-
mm I mm mm Alkaliee
C00
30 /3 2t (Free Lime) //0
/>mL of H20 Insoluble :0.
_.../o Penetration Ratio Residue
Loes on
Compressive Strength Usin? 2-inch or 50-mm Cubes Ignition /.50 .-.--"
USBR 4109 - Standard Teet
USBR 4311 - Control MIx USBR 4311-Cement/Pozzolan Mortar Test Mix Moisture
Content
W/C : ,'Zm L H20.//---U/o F I o w W/(C+P):" ,mL H20,..% Flow "R" Factor
(C-5)/F
Age, Camp. Str., Camp. Str., Comp. Str., Camp. Str., H20 Req'd. PAI of Portland
days Ibf / in 2 MPo Ibf/in 2 MPo Flow/o of Cement, % of Compound Composition
Control Control
.-I CS 2Z
3 3o ?o I. oo .... CA
7 3.5"40 4.,o .... C3S '6"
28 C4AF /o
90 - Co S04 VO
USBR 4311-PAI(Pozzolan Activity Index)With Lime Minor Constituents
__mLof H20,%FIow, 7-Oay Strength=__lbf/inZ(MPa) TiO 2 o./9
USBR 4311 or 4441-Reactivity With Cement Alkalies P205 O. O7
Expansion:Control Mix_% ,Test Mix_%,14-Day Reduction_% ZnO
FromUSBR 4233 or 4311, Limits on Amount of AEA in Concrete Mn203
Sulfide
Cement: []4233 [] ProjectiSource Type__ Sulfur AtO
Aggregate: Coarse ( [] 4233 [7 Project) Source__,Sp.Gr.__, MSA__in.(mm CI- /VZ
Fine(i-14233 [] Project)Source__,Sp.Gr.,F.M.--
AEA Brand Manufacturer
Control Teat ! Control Test Control Test
MIx MIx MIx Mix Mix MIx
Cement, Ibm/yd3(kg/m 3 w/C or w/(C+P) Air Content (Gray.), %
246
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4185-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4185; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 185-80.
2. Applicable Documents 5.1 Flow Table, Flow Mold, and Caliper.-These items
shall conform to the requirements of STM C 230.
2.1 USBR Procedures: Illustrations of these items are shown on figures 1 and
1000 Standards for Linear MeasurementDevices
2.
1012 Calibrating Balances or Scales
5.2 Measure.-A cylindrical measure having an inside
1030 Calibrating Specific Gravity Flasks
diameter of 3q-1/16 inches (76.2+1.6 mm) and a depth
4183 Sampling and Acceptance of Hydraulic Cement
of 3-15/32 inches (88 mm) is required. The depth is
4305 Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement Pastes and
adjusted by standardization with water so that the measure
Mortarsof Plastic Consistency contains 400+1 mL at 73.4+3 F (23.0+1.7 C) (note 1).
2.2 ASTM Standards: For purposes of this test, capacity of the measure in
C 185 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Hydraulic milliliters is the amount of water content of measure, in
Cement Mortar grams, divided by 0.9976; no mass correction made for
C 230 Standard Specification for Flow Table for Use in buoyant effect of air. The measure shall have a uniform
Tests of Hydraulic Cement a wall thickness. The thickness of the wall and bottom shall
C 511 Standard Specification for Moist Cabinets, Moist not be less than 0.115 inch (2.92 mm). The total mass
Rooms, and Water Storage Tanks Used in the Testing of empty measure shall not be more than 900 grams. The
of Hydraulic Cements and Concretes za measure shall be made of a metal that will not be chemically
C 778 Standard Specification for Standard Sand
attacked by the cement mortar.
3. Summary of Procedure
NOTE 1.-The 400-mL measure can be calibrated readily by
3.1 The mortar to be tested is prepared with standard filling with distilled water at 73.45:3 F (23.04-1.7 C) to a point
sand and cement using a water content sufficient to give where meniscus extends appreciably above top of measure, placing
a clean piece of plate glass on top of measure, and allowing
a required flow. This mortar is compacted into a measure
the excess water to be squeezed out. The absence of air bubbles,
of known volume, and then the mass is determined. The
as seen through the glass, ensures that measure is completely
air content is then calculated from the determined mass full. Care shall be taken to wipe excess water from sides of
per unit volume of the mortar, the known specific gravities container before determining mass.
of the constituents, and the mixture proportions.
5.3 Clearance Adjustment Bracket, Mixer, Bowl, and
4. Significance
Paddle.-These items shall conformto section 4 of USBR
4305. An illustrationof these items is shown on figure 3.
4.1 The purpose of this procedure is to determine 5.4 Straightedge..-A steel straightedge not less than
whether the hydraulic cement under test meets the air- 4 inches (102 mm) long and not less than 1/16 inch (1.6
entraining or non-air-entraining requirements of the mm) nor more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) in thickness is
applicablehydraulic cement specification for which the test required.
5.5 Spatula.-A spatula witha metal blade 6 inches (152
1 Annual Book ofASTMStandards,vol. 04.01. mm) in lengthand 0.5 inch (13 mm) in width,withstraight
2 Annual Book ofASTMStandards, vol. 04.02. edges and a woodenhandle, is required.
247
USBR 4185
iiiii!iii%
re.qu:ired. Tl]=t: tJlll]-:i.i*g i::ct' ,:lJ 1,: t:l,/qpt.:'l' >.lla]l be' fh-
ai:tl EI ]'i,g]i][ LI[qg](S [':1 [1' le]l#rJ: I' ]l( iiac I /tl:EIp, e'r 2. typical,
I-a a ad- ubbe: t ; n pe' I iS S;I]'I F'0' I]l l Ii[] ig!:l[I ]'e: i
S,9 Z!(F/:,e'?:i, ?,t:,- A *aF:,p, ir:lg :itick lY:l:de :,,t klard w,:<,,d
a ]t!l hv ii rig / <!!i.]l]l](!{ le, i ii if ':ii]leng
I i e]c]l { I ((i ]:] ] i]l] ) LLkJ Eli h
k Shla]] be tl g
c,t: 6 inches iI $2 rnlX:l ;. ii; reqLlilr<,SI
iil. [Ir.] I Iq'lI:jlIfI II''l tl}li=ii{L;ll SeF",'i]l:: <;]:,,D,:<ll 'lai:ll* jbil],Lt a 15)l-
. a,F:i.zlCi {-3, = x&: i [ hi ?;1; ;;:1 <t1_] a[ il :l'FI S. 11 2 - l:-] [.. i E]EC Va]<J 'O" IY],] S L1 ]7i; Fig
iin'Lh {2!1(]1I-]]2111]: I [llIIIl}! Iial:lllc I ZI:Icl i-itqll]]l (]l:7]{]'-l:I']I]]) [(:lng
Cle ,n:ixkq.g '&ra/ge'll : L/I: req,,iired [l(),deive. ;clicaect VOll,:ll]'le
;][ (!;8 I::lF I52()I ( i:1. TI-ae permis, siblle variati, ml ']If t]e v.,,I:lfl:-se 12i,,/],wli is, eqLi(>ctl
>;h.Jlll /,e 2 mL. The ]Y:Iaii]] grd.L1;C,;..n lines sl-aa]ll encii>:le
6. Cond:iionim or P'reliaratiopJi o{ Tempera:ure
the .g/:k{.ll/te LIIIIJ .;hll[ h,.e rnlylb.ere( The ]least graduaikms
'IJqZI]]I :KtI]<t a" k.;IS.[ c,,ne-s.even:l he cii>:Ln:n:e';ence ,af the and H:mi,dlity
gl"L],Jl;I,.tef :|lllt ii,11gCTiEIt'd liae gr&]a:ii,0,ns shaI] exe.q:d at e.as
,:ae.-fffth dJe S:bdivi.s.iii<:,r,s ]r,qB.: b,<-i:)S-Fli[l[ed (i.1 T']]e: [CIl]pt']iltLJFt i:l,{ II/c 11)(ll21"] ll],J I;'] x]la:e:i,,]l,
t,:r tlc b:,.:,m 10 m L ,,:{ hle gradulae. shall be' /]lailllt;i!Elet bc:t',,,ccc (>t;ll:] I ;l]lit.t ki. Ii 5 o]-. (2(I.(I' ar,v!l
58 E,;':;per-A ::rope': made c,c a nc:,nabs.,.ptive, 27 S :' C )
I] .Ik ) ] kl I) r a S i V (2 .i { ]I t] b ][" ]i [ IF ] L: 137] g{ t e " Ji a ] S L" r.: 1:1 Jl S' a rt ] b bI e r ciI ]-s F: Ill( ]11L] I-- I] '(i.2 The ll]li:>.illlg, w,t,ur ali/l<{I dill_, meaSiLlre:, iii: it: is; k,,eing:
lla,ir Slq,,i,l:e A dLr,:,r:e':e' ha>:less <:,i :0'- 10, <:, , s;e.as<;:,q,e,d Ca]iiL)Ta'LU,Lt, S]}IIII )e iLiI)]l(Jliit:,E]lC t I,a []IC t'e]:lla:ice'IM{ L, re eq!ied
,,,a.c w,:c,d c::q,,dcre,d n,;uak:,s.,:uptive by imime;si.,:n fi::,r 15 f<:,r moist cabinet5 I l" I:" }{ [ll'l-!l';. 'ia']ic]* is. 7 :,.4 : C'F I{-:!:3 O+
I]]ilnLl{eE; Jrl paIali{ii.] sit lEu;}[;l 3{!:}*]: o P (20()aIC):l .l]lld tCla,,'irJ; ] .?10 l=J L]It.'ILI:}Yt!!ILI/C e .. :ith A ST'C ( '= i l.
(:l,
;{ CK';S& S(:L[jiI{)ITI I:) ()51 t]"}.I ] iI]t.J]l {:I3 >l]} 'I 2:1 7'[' :} a -d ] ,6..!!,. The rel,[i',,c huli,Jiy ,ff llc Lll>z,.l,i,ry s.]:m]l n,:,,
<,kl, n'v=erJie:nr ler.lgtll c,i: iil :(:l <q;I [rJclles : 12:7 ,:,, IS2 ]:nl])iS, be ]CS;S; II]lk-]i 1"1)' [-:,(klCC:II[
2 i.S
USBR 4185
7. Standard Sand the spoon, place about a 1-inch (25-mm) layer of mortar
in mold and tamp 20 times with tamper. The tamping
7.1 The sand used for making the standard mortar pressure shall be just sufficient to ensure uniform filling
(sec. 11.1) shall be natural silica sand, conforming to the of mold. Then, finish filling mold with a second layer of
requirements for No. 20 to No. 30 (850- to 600-#m) mortar and tamp as specified for first layer. Cut off mortar
standard sand as described in ASTM C 778. to a plane surface, flush with top of mold, by drawing
straightedge across top of mold with a sawing motion.
8. Precautions Wipe top of flow table clean and dry, being especially careful
to remove any water from around edge of mold. Lift mold
8.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous away from mortar 1 minute after completing mixing
materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim operation. Immediately drop table 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) 10
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It times in 6 seconds. The flow is the resulting increase in
is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish average diameter of mortar mass, as determined with
appropriate safety and health practices and determine the
calipers, measured on at least four diameters at about equally
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. spaced intervals, and expressed as a percentage of original
diameter. Make trial mortars with varying percentages of
9. Sampling water until specified flow is obtained. Make each trial with
9.1 Sample the cement in accordancewith USBR 4183. fresh mortar.
11.4 Mortar Mass.-When the quantity of mixing
10. Calibration and Standardization water has been found that produces a flow of 87.5-!-7.5
percent, immediately determine the mass per 400 mL of
mortar using the mortar remaining in mixing bowl after
10.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane-
flow has been determined; do not use the mortar used
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests in the flowdetermination. Using spoon, place mortar gently
listed under the ApplicableDocuments of section 2 are
into 400-mL measure in 3 equal layers, spading each layer
covered under that particular procedure or standard directly 20 times with spatula in one complete revolution around
or by reference to another. inner surface of measure. One complete up and down
10.2 The flow table, flow mold, and caliper shall be
motion with the spatula held in a vertical position shall
checked to meet the requirements of ASTM C 230 by using
be considered one spading. When spading first layer, do
linear measurement devices conforming to USBR 1000. not strike spatula forcibly against bottom of measure. When
10.3 The measure shall be checked to meet the
spading second and final layers, use only enough force to
requirements of section 5.2 by using linear measurement
cause spatula to penetrate surface of previous layer. After
devices conforming to USBR 1000. Further calibration of
measure has been filled and spaded, tap sides of measure
the measure may be made in accordance with note 1, section lightly with the side of the tapping stick one time at five
5.2. different points at about equal spacing around outside of
10.4 The mixer, bowl, and paddle shall be checked for
measure to preclude entrapment of extraneous air (note
compliance with USBR 4305. The straightedge, spatula,
2). No obvious space shall be left between mortar and
tamper, tapping stick, and spoon shall be checked for inner surface of measure as a result of the spading operation.
compliance with section 5 by using linear measurement
Then, cut off mortar to a plane surface, flush with top
devices conforming to USBR 1000. of measure, by drawing straightedge across top of measure
10.5 The scales shall be checked to meet the
with a sawing motion. Make two passes over entire surface,
requirements of section 5.6 in accordance with USBR 1012.
with second pass being made at right angles to the first.
10.6 Glass graduates shall comply with section 5.7 by
If, in the cutting-off operations, loose sand grains cause
being checked in accordance with USBR 1030.
straightedge to ride above top surface of'measure, these
10.7 Temperature controls of materials and molding grains shall be removed and the operation repeated.
room and the humidity in molding room shall comply with :.Complete entire operation of fillingand cutting off measure
section 6 and ASTM C 511 by using certified thermometers within 1.5 minutes. Wipe off all mortar and water adhering
and relative humidity(esters. to outside of measure. Determine mass of measure and
its contents, subtract mass of container, and record mass
11. Procedure of mortar in grams.
11.1 Batch=The proportions of the standard mortar
shall be 350 grams of cement to 1400 grams of No. 20 NOTE 2.-This operation may be facilitatedby placingmeasure
on a steady, flat-surfaced support of lesser diameter than the
(850-#m) to No. 30 (600-#m) standard sand and sufficient
measure while fillingand wiping.
water to give a flow of 87.5+7.5 percent when determined
in accordance with section 11.3. 12. Calculations
11.2 Mixing of Mortar.-Mix the mortar in accordance
with USBR 4305. 12.1 Calculate air content of mortar from equation (1),
11.3 Flow Determinarion.-Carefully wipe dry the top which is based on the use of the measure specified in section
of the flow table and place flow mold at center. Using 5.2 and on the batch proportions given in section 11.1
249
USBR 4185
13. Report
where:
13.1 A suggested reporting form is shown on figure
Ma = actual mass per unit of volume as determined 5 of USBR 4183.
by USBR 4185 (note 4)
= (M/400 g)/mL (sec. 11.4) 14. Precision and Bias
Mc = theoretical mass per unit of volume calculated
on an air-free basis and using values for
14.1 The single-operator, within-laboratory, standard
quantities of materials and specific gravities
deviation has been found to be 0.56 percent air content
as given in sections 11.1 and 12.1
throughout the range of 8 to 19 percent air. Therefore,
350 + 1400 + (350)(P)(0.01) results of two properly conducted tests by the same operator
on similar batches should not differ by more than 1.6
350 1400
3.15 + 2- + (350)(P)(0.01) percent air.
14.2 The multilaboratory standard deviation has been
found to be 1.0 percent air content throughout the range
5+0.01 P from 8 to 19 percent air. Therefore, results of two different
1.827 + 0.01P laboratories on similar batches should not differ from each
other by more than 2.8 percent air.
V,, M, and P = as previously defined 14.3 There is no known bias for this test procedure.
250
USBR 4185
C S W P Mass of Mass M V
Cement, Sand, Water, Flow, - (100) Mortar of Mass Volume
Sample Brand Plant or Plus Container, of of
No. Name ID Class Container, Mortar, Air,
grams grams mL* percent percent grams grams grams percent
At'/- ./'oe..4ter/t,
7/Og ,,//r o .227. 34"0 14oo 244 g6 dq. 7 170 5 FF 7 a /g qP. 3
NOTES:
*lmL=lcm 3=lgram
251
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
USBR 4186-92
)
HEAT OF HYDRATION OF HYDRAULIC CEMENT
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4186; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 186-82.
1. Scope suitable size. The contents of the vacuum jar shall not
change by more than 0.001 C/min per degree difference
1.1 This designation covers a procedure for the from room temperature when filled with 425 grams of
determination of heat of hydration of a hydraulic cement the acid specified in section 6.2, stoppered, and allowed
by measuring heat of solution of dry cement and heat of to stand unstirred for 30 minutes. The temperature for
solution of a separate portion of the cement that has been this check shall approximate the starting temperatures to
partially hydrated for 7 and 28 days; the difference between be used in making the determination.
these values being the heat of hydration for the respective 3.1.2 Insulated Container.-The insulated container
hydrating period. shall have an insulating layer of cotton or similar material,
which shall be at least 1 inch (25 mm) thick and encase
2. Applicable Documents
sides and bottom of vacuum jar, but shall be so arranged
as to permit easy removal of jar.
2.1 USBR Procedures: 3.1.3 Differential and Reference Thermometers.-
1000 Standards for Linear MeasurementDevices
The adjustable differential thermometer shall be of the
1012 Calibrating Balances or Scales
Beckmann type, graduated to at least 0.01 C, and shall
1020 Calibrating Ovens
have a range of about 6 C. The thermometer shall be
1025 Checking Sieves
so adjusted that upper limit of scale approximates room
4114 Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement
temperature. The portion of thermometer that rests inside
4183 Sampling and Acceptanceof Hydraulic Cement
calorimeter shall be protected with a coating resistant to
2.2 ASTM Standards: hydrofluoric acid (sec. 3.1.1). The differential thermometer
C 186 Standard Test Method for Heat of Hydration of
shall be equipped with a suitable reading lens. The
Hydraulic Cement 1 differential thermometer zero must be determined by
C 670 Standard Practice for Preparing Precision immersion in a liquid and by comparison with reference
Statements for Test Methods for Construction Materials2
thermometer. An accurate reference thermometer, of
E 11 Standard Specifications for Wire-Cloth Sieves for appropriate range and having 0.1 C divisions, shall be
Testing Purposes 3 placed in the proximity of calorimetric apparatus. The
reference thermometer shall be used for room temperature
3. Apparatus
readings and for establishing the differential thermometer
zero.
3.1 Calorimetric Apparatus: 3.1.4 FunneL-The funnel through which sample is
3.1.1 Calorimeter.-The calorimeter (fig. 1) shall introduced into calorimeter shall be glass or plastic, shall
consist of a 1-pint (0.47-L), wide-mouth vacuum jar, with have a stem about 3 inches (76 mm) long, and an inside
cork stopper, held in a suitably insulated container (sec. diameter of not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
3.1.2) to keep vacuum jar in position and protect jar from 3.1.5 StirtingAssembly.-The stirrer shall be a three-
excessive temperature fluctuations.The vacuum jar shall bladed polyethylene propeller having dimensions as shown
be coated inside with a material resistant to hydrofluoric on figure 2, and shall extend as close as possible to bottom
acid, such as a baked phenolic resin, baked vinyl-chloride of calorimeter (note 1). The motor shall be of the constant-
acetate resin, or beeswax. The acid-resistant coating shall speed type, at least 1/20 horsepower (37 W), and shall
be intact and free of cracks at all times; it shall be examined be equipped with a geared speed reducer so that one speed,
frequently and recoated whenever necessary. An alternative in the range of 350 to 700 revolutions per minute, can
method of protecting the vacuum jar is a plastic liner of be maintained constant.
1 AnnualBook ofASTMStandards, vol. 04.01. NOTE 1.-The stirrer shown on figure 2 may be readily made
2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, vols. 04.01, 04.02, 04.03, 04.08. froma commercially available three-bladed polyethylene propeller
3 Annual Book ofASTM Standards, vols. 04.01, 04.02, 04.06, 05.05, 14.02. having a propeller diameter of 1-3/8 inches (34.9 ram), shaft
252
USBR 4186
Beckmonn
Steel Rod
Reading
--Cardboard Spacer
lnsulation Board
SECTION A-A
Figure 1. - Calorimeter.
diameter of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), and a shaft length of 18 inches 3.5 Plastic Vials.-The vials shall be about 3-5/32 by
(457 mm). The stirrer has two functions: (1) to maintain uniform 1 inch (80 by 25 mm), shell type, with tight-fitting stoppers
temperature throughout liquid, and (2) to supply sufficient or caps.
agitation to keep the solid in suspension in acid mixture. Since 3.6 Doing Oven.-Drying oven shall be maintained at
a stirrer capable of keeping the solid in suspension generates 212 to 230 F (100 to 110 C).
considerable heat in the calorimeter, it is important that the
3.7 Mass Determination Bottles.-These bottles shall
stirrer speed, and hence the rate of heat generation, be maintained
be about 1.6 inches (40 mm) in height and 1 inch (25
constant. Therefore, a synchronous motor and geared speed
reducer are almost mandatory. mm) wide, with matching stoppers.
3.8 Stop Watch or Clock Timer.-Required for timing.
3.2 Mixer.-A moderate-speed mechanical mixer, such 3.9 Sieves.-No. 100 (150 #m) and No. 20 (850 #m),
as a milk-shake mixer, capable of intimately mixing the conforming to ASTM E 11.
cement and water to a uniform paste is required. 3.10 Crucibles.-Platinum, 30-mL capacity, with covers,
3.3 Stotage.-Storage space shall be temperature for loss-on-ignition determination.
controlled at 73.4+3 F (23.0+1.7 C). 3.11 Muffle Furnace.-A muffle furnace, or suitable
3.4 Mortar Bowl and Pestle.-A vessel about 8 inches burners capable of maintaining a temperature of 1652 to
(200 mm) in diameter with a bowl-shaped cavity in which 1742 F (900 to 950 C).
partially hydrated samples are ground or pounded with 3.12 Analytical Balance andAnalytical Weights.-These
the pestle. items shall conform to the requirements prescribed in
253
USBR 4186
9 N
5u
linch = 25.4 mm
SECTION A-A
Figure 2. - Stirring assembly.
USBR 4114 for determining mass of calorimetric samples capacity determinations are made with each batch of diluted
and loss-on-ignition samples. HNO3 so prepared.
3.13 Balance.-Balance shall have a capacity of 1 5.4 Wax.-Paraffin wax, or other suitable wax, for
kilogram, and be capable of measuring mass of acid charge sealing vials.
to nearest 0.05 gram. 5.5 Zinc Oxide.-The ZnO (zinc oxide) shall be heated
at 1652 to 1742 F (900 to 950 C) for 1 hour, cooled
4. Significance and Use in a desiccator, ground to pass a No. 100 (150-m) sieve,
and stored. Immediately prior to a heat capacity
4.1 The purpose of this procedure is to determine if determination, 7 grams of the ZnO so prepared shall be
the hydraulic cement under test meets the heat of hydration heated for not more than 5 minutes at 1652 to 1742 F,
requirement of applicable hydraulic cement specification. cooled to room temperature in a desiccator, and the mass
determined accurately for introduction into calorimeter.
5. Reagents
NOTE 2.-The rate of solution of the ZnO varies with the
5.1 Purity of Reagents.-Reagent grade chemicals shall preliminary treatment. The procedure describes results in a
be used in all tests [1] 4 . Unless otherwise indicated, it product which dissolves at about same rate as dry cement.
is intended that all reagents shall conform to the
specifications of the Committee on Analytical Reagents
of the AmericanChemical Society, where such specifications 6. Procedure for Determining Heat Capacity of
are available. For suggestions on the testing of reagents Apparatus
not listed in reference [1], see references [2,3]. Other grades
of chemicals may be used, provided it is first ascertained 6.1 To determine the heat capacity of the system, that
that the reagent is of sufficiently high purity to permit is, the number of calories or joules required to raise
its use without lessening the accuracy of the determination. temperature of calorimeter and contents 1 C, measure
5.2 HydrofluoricAcid.-Concentrated HF (hydrofluoric corrected temperature rise obtained by dissolving 7 grams
acid) with a specific gravity of 1.15. of ignited ZnO in the specified acid mixture (sec. 6.2 to
5.3 NitricAcid.-The 2.00 N (normal) HNOa (nitric 6.6).
acid), for use in the calorimeter, shall be prepared and 6.2 Transfer about 400 grams of the 2.00 N HNOa,
standardized in large quantities. Optionally, the dilute which has been cooled to temperature indicated by lower
HNOa may be made with 127 mL of concentrated HNOa range of differential thermometer, ordinarily about 4 to
(sp. gr. 1.42) per liter of solution, provided that heat 5 C below room temperature, into the vacuum jar, add
8.0 mL of HF (sp. gr. 1.15), determine mass, and add
4 Numbers in brackets refer to entries in References,section 15. sufficient additional 2.00 N HNOa to bring total mass
254
USBR 4186
7. Precautions
Ro = 020 - 0o (1)
7.1 This procedure involves the use of hazardous
R = Ro - (040 - 020) (2) materials, operations, and equipment. Users are responsible
for determining applicability of regulations and for
where: establishing appropriate safety practices.
255
USBR 4186
8.6 The muffle furnaceshall be checked for compliance mass of a similar sample and place it into a platinum
with section 3.11 using thermometers certified by crucible for determination of loss on ignition. Use the
manufacturer. average of the two determinations for the final recorded
8.7 The analytical balance, analytical masses, and the value. Ignite the dry cement at 1652 to 1742 F (900 to
balance shall be calibrated to meet requirements of sections 950 o C) for at least 1-1/2 hours. Immediately place crucible
3.12 and 3.13, and the balance and masses shall also meet containing sample in a desiccator and allow to cool to room
requirements of USBR 4114 in accordance with USBR temperature; then immediately determine mass of crucible.
1012. When determining loss on ignition of hydrated cement,
first dry the sample with known mass in an oven at 212
9. Conditioning and Standardization to 230 F (100 to 110 C) for 1 hour; then place sample
9.1 Preparation ofCement Paste.-Store the cement and in muffle furnace at 1652 to 1742 F overnight, or over
mixing water in a constant-temperature room at 73.4+3 F a suitable burner for not less than 5 hours. Reduce mass.
(23+1.7 C) until materials are at ambient temperature of cement sample that was introduced into calorimeter
before preparation of paste. Mix 150 grams of cement to ignited mass basis for use in final calculations (figs. 3
and 60 mL of distilled water using a spatula, and then and 4) as follows:
vigorously stir mixture with a mechanical stirrer for 5 A
M,. -- (M) (5)
minutes. Place approximately equal representative portions B
of paste in four or more plastic vials, fillingvials to within
about 1/2 inch (13 mm) of top. Immediately after filling
where:
vials, seal them with tight-fitting stoppers or caps. If there
is any doubt regarding tightness of seal, sealed ends of A = mass of ignited sample, in grams;
vials should be dipped in molten paraffin wax. Store the B = mass of sample before ignition, in grams;
vials in an upright position in a water bath at 73.4+3 M = mass of original calorimetric sample, in grams;
F until time of test. and
9.2 Preparationof PartiallyHydratedSample for Heat Mi = as previously defined.
of Solution Test.-At specified age of test, remove a vial
of partially hydrated sample from storage and, during the 11. Calculations
20-minute initial stirring period of calorimeter, break the
plastic away from the sample and rapidly crush entire
11.1 Heat of Solution of Dry Cement.-Calculate
sample with mortar bowl and pestle so that all material
corrected temperature rise as described in sections 6.3 and
will pass through a No. 20 (850-#m) sieve; then quickly
6.4. Also, correct the heat of solution value if final
place sample in a well-stoppered bottle. Take care,
calorimeter temperature of the heat of solution test is
particularly with the 7-day partially hydrated sample, to
different from temperature of calorimetric sample when
expose sample to the air as little as possible, and thus
introduced. Thus, for the dry cement, which has a specific
minimize any carbon dioxide action or loss of moisture
heat of about 0.2 cal/(g'C) [0.8 kJ/(kg'C)], if final
from sample.
calorimeter temperature exceeds temperature of cement
10. Procedure for Determining Heat of sample at time it was introduced, add a correction of
Hydration 0.2 cal/(g'C) difference in those temperatures when
calculating the heat of solution. Calculate the heat of
solution of the dry cement as follows:
10.1 CalorimetricProcedure, Dry Cement.-Determine
RC
the heat of solution of the dry cement sample according 91 (cal/g) -- 0.2 (T-re) (6)
to the procedure described for the heat capacity determi- M,-
nation in section 6, but use a 3-gram sample (determined
to nearest 0.001 gram) of the dry cement instead of the RC
prepared ZnO (note 3). Exercise care in securing a uniform /-/1 (kJ/kg) -- 0.8 (T-td) (7)
and representative sample. Calculate and report the results M,.
on the ignited mass basis (set. 10.3). Make the heat of
where:
solution test on the dry cement just prior to the test on
the corresponding 7-day partially hydrated sample. Hi = heat of solution of dry cement, in calories per
10.2 Calorimetric Procedure, Partially Hydrated gram (kilojoules per kilogram);
Sample.-For the heat of solution of the partially hydrated te = final calorimeter temperature at end of deter-
sample, follow the same procedure as for dry cement mination on dry cement, in C; and other
described in section 10.1, but use a 4.18+0.05-gram terms as previously defined.
calorimetric sample of the partially hydrated cement,
determined to nearest 0.001 gram (note 3). Calculate the 11.2 Heat of Solution of Partially Hydrated Sample.-
results on the ignited mass basis (sec. 10.3). The heat of solution of a partially hydrated sample is
10.3 Loss on Ignition.-Immediately before and after calculated similar to the dry cement calculations of section
calorimetric sample mass has been determined, determine 11.1 with some additional corrections. Because an increase
256
USBR 4186
257
USBR 4186
258
USBR 4186
259
USBR 4186
260
USBR 4186
261
USBR 4186
262
USBR 4186
263
@ o
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4187-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4187; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 187-83.
1. Scope
4.2 Glass Graduates.-Graduates shall be of either 200-
or 250-mL capacity, and shall conform to the requirements
1.1 This designation covers the procedure for of ASTM C 490.
determining the normal consistency of hydraulic cement. 4.3 VicatApparatus.-The Vicat apparatus (fig. 1) shall
consist of a frame bearing a 300-g movable rod. The plunger
2. Applicable Documents
end of the rod shall be 10 mm in diameter for a distance
USBR Procedures: of at least 50 mm; the other end of the rod shall have
2.1
1000 a 50-mm long, I-ram-diameter,removable needle. The rod
Standards for Linear MeasurementDevices
1012 is reversible, can be held in any desired position by a set
Calibrating Balances or Scales
1030 screw, and has an adjustable indicator which moves over
Calibrating Specific Gravity Flasks
4183 a scale (graduated in millimeters) attached to the frame.
Sampling and Acceptance of Hydraulic Cement
The rod shall be made of stainless steel having a hardness
4305 MechanicalMixing of Hydraulic Cement Pastes and
of not less than 35 HRC (note 1), and shall be straight
Mortars of Plastic Consistency
with the plunger end, which is perpendicularto the rod
2.2 ASTM Standards: axis. The cement paste is held in a rigid conical ring resting
C 187 Standard Test Method for Normal Consistency of on a glass plate about 100 mm square. The ring shall be
Hydraulic CemenO made of a noncorroding, nonabsorbent material; shall have
C 490 Standard Specification for Apparatus for Use in a height of 40 ram; and an inside diameter of 70 mm
Measurement of Length Change of Hardened Cement at the base and 60 mm at the top. In addition, the Vicat
Paste, Mortar, and ConcretOa apparatus shall conform to the requirements shown in table
E 177 Standard Recommended Practice for Use of the 1.
Terms Precision and Accuracy as Applied to Measurements
NOTE 1.-The requirement that the rod be made of stainless
of a Property of a Material*,3
steel shall apply only to new Vicat apparatus or replacement
2.3 National Institute of Standards and Technology 4: rods and not to equipment currently in use that meets the other
Handbook 44 Specifications, Tolerances, and Other Tech- requirements of this procedure.
nical Requirements for Weighing and Measuring Devices
5. Precautions
3. Significance and Use
5.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous
3.1 This test procedure is intended to be used to materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim
to address all of the safety problems associated with its
determine amount of water required to prepare hydraulic
cement pastes for testing. use. It is the responsibility of the user to consult and
establish appropriate safety and health practices and
determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior
4. Apparatus to use.
264
USBR 4187
D
needle,
Imm by 50rnrn,
A - Frome conceoled in end
B - Movoble rod of shof1"
C - Plunger end of rod
D - Removoble needle
E- Se'c screw
F- Adjusreble
indica'l'or
Enfire 50ram
G-Rigid conical ring
lengfh groduoted
H - Gloss plo-e
in millimeters
C
A
!
H
Table 1. - Additional Vicat apparatus requirements. water shall not vary from 73.4 F (23 C) by more than
+3 F (5:1.7 C).
Mass of movable rod 300+0.5 grams 7.2 The relative humidity of the laboratory shall be
not less than 50 percent.
Diameter of plunger end of rod 10+0.05 mm
8. Procedure
Diameter of needle 1+0.05 mm
8.1 Preparation of Cement Paste.-Mix 650 grams of
Inside diameter of ring at bottom 70-l-3 mm
cement with a measured quantity of clean water following
70+3 mm the procedure prescribed in section 9 of USBR 4305.
Inside diameter of ring at top
8.2 Molding Test Specimen.-Quickly form the cement
Height of ring 40+3 mm paste (sec. 8.1) into a ball with gloved hands and toss
six times through a free path of about 6 inches (150 mm)
Graduated scale t fromone hand to another so as to produce a nearly spherical
mass that may be easily inserted into the Vicat ring. Press
The graduatedscale when compared with a standard scale accurate ball of paste, resting in palm of one hand, into larger
to within 0.1 mm at all points, shall not show a deviation at any end of conical ring held in other hand, completely filling
point greater than 0.25 mm.
ring with paste. Remove excess paste at larger end by
a single movement with palm of hand. Place ring on its
larger end on the plane, nonabsorptive, glass plate and
6.3 Glass graduates shall be calibrated to meet
requirements of ASTM C 490 in accordance with USBR slice off excess paste at smaller end at top of ring by a
single, oblique stroke of a sharp-edged trowel held at a
1030.
slight angle with top of ring; smooth the top, if necessary,
6.4 Compliance with section 4.3 for the Vicat apparatus
with a few light touches using pointed end of trowel. During
shall be accomplishedby using linear measurement devices
complying with USBR 1000. these operations of cutting and smoothing, take care not
to compress paste.
7. Conditioning or Preparation of Temperature 8.3 ConsistencyDetermination.-Center paste, confined
and Humidity in ring and resting on plate, under the rod and bring plunger
end of rod in contact with surface of paste; tighten set-
7.1 The air temperature in vicinity of mixing slab, dry screw. Then, set movable indicator to upper zero mark
cement, molds, and base plates shall be maintained between of scale, or take an initial reading, and release rod
68 and 81.5 F (20 and 27.5 C). Temperature of mixing immediately. This process must not exceed 30 seconds after
265
USBR 4187
266
USBR 4187
Type
Sample Brand Plant or Cement, Water, Penetration, Water,
No. Name ID grams mL mm percent |
CN/cAo d/l/CA o
A4-3030" Fzv AS// .z-,tz/o/s f ffSo 7. /0 Z4. c/
NOTES:
tPercent of water for normal consistency.
267
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4188-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4188; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C188-84.
1 Annual Book ofASTM Standards, vol. 04.01. 6.1 No special conditioning is required for this test
2 AnnualBook ofASTMStandatds, vol. 04.01, 04.02, 04.03, 04.08. procedure.
268
USBR 4188
50mm o.d.i
( t
LI
b
mm
-Smm(min.}
q
E
6 mLcapacity at 20;
emm (rain.)
17 mLoopocity at 20C2
Capacity of bulb
approx.250mL
65mm (approx.) !
90mm o.(approx.) =
Note- Variations of o few millimeters in such dimensions as total height of flask, diameter
of base, etc., are to be expec#ed and will not be cause for rejection. The dimensionsshown
nDply only to new flasks and not to flasks in use which meet other requirements of this test
procedure.
269
USBR 4188
270
USBR 4188
NOTES:
27l
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4191-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4191: the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 191-82.
4. Precautions
1 AnnualBook ofASTMSrandards, vol. 04.01.
2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, vol. 04.02. 4.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous
3 FormerlyNational Bureau of Standards materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim
272
USBR 4191
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It the ball, resting in palm of one hand, into larger end of
is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish conical ring of Vicat apparatus held in other hand,
appropriate safety and health practices and determine completely filling ring with paste. Remove excess paste
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. from ring by a single movement with the hand. Place ring
4.2 Further precautions for using the apparatus and on its larger end on ffie glass plate and slice off excess
the effects that the water percentage, water temperature, paste at smaller end of ring using a single oblique stroke
air temperature, humidity, and amount of kneading the of a sharpedged trowel held at a slight angle to top of
paste receives will. have on the final results are discussed ring. Smooth top of specimen, if necessary, with one or
in section 7.3. two light touches of pointed end of trowel. During the
operation of cutting and smoothing, take care not to
5. Calibration and Standardization compress the paste: Immediately after molding, place test
specimen in moist closet or moist room and allow it to
5.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- remain there, except when time-of-setting determinations
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests are being made. The specimen shall remain in conical mold
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are and supported by glass plate throughout test period. A
covered under that particular procedure or standard directly time-of-set specimen and an autoclave bar may be made
or by reference to another. from the same batch.
5.2 Scales shall be calibrated to conform with section 7.2 Time-of-Setting Determination.-Allow the time-
3.1 in accordance with USBR 1012. of-setting specimen to remain in moist area for 30 minutes
5.3 Glass graduates shall be calibrated to conform with after molding without being disturbed. Determine the
ASTM C 490 in accordance with USBR 1030. penetration of the l-ram needle at this time and every
5.4 The Vicat apparatus shall be calibrated to conform 15 minutes thereafter (every 10 minutes for type III
with requirements of section 3.3 using scales conforming cements) until a penetration of 25 mm or less is obtained.
with section 5.2 and linear measurement devices in For penetration test, lower the needle of the Vicat apparatus
accordance with USBR 1000. until it rests on surface of cement paste. Then, tighten
the setscrew and set the indicator at upper end of scale
6. Conditioning and Preparation or take an initial reading. Release the rod quickly by
releasing the setscrew and allow the needle to settle for
6.1 Temperature and Humidity: 30 seconds, then take the reading to determine penetration.
6.1.1 The temperature of the air in vicinity of mixing If paste is obviously quite soft on initial readings, the fall
slab, dry cement, molds, and baseplates shall be maintained of the rod may be retarded to avoid bending the needle,
between 68 and 81.5 F (20 and 27.5 C). The temperature but the rod shall be released only by the setscrew when
of mixing water and of the moist closet or moist room actual time-of-setting determinations are made. No
shall not vary from 73.4 F (23 C) by more than -t-3 F penetration test shall be made closer than 1/4 inch
(--+1.7 C). (6.4 mm) from any previous penetration and no test shall
6.1.2 The relative humidity of laboratory shall be be made closer than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from the inside
not less than 50 percent. The moist closet or moist room of the mold. Record results of all penetration tests and,
shall be so constructed as to provide storage facilities for by interpolation, determine the time when a penetration
test specimens at a.relative humidity of not less than 90 of 25 mm is obtained. In accordance with the Cement and
percent. Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL) procedure this
6.2 Preparation":of Cement Paste 4 : value shall be reported to the closest 5-minute time interval.
6.2.1 Mix 650 grams of cement with percentage of This is the initial setting time. The final setting time is
mixing water required for normal consistency following when the needle does not visibly penetrate into the paste.
procedure described in USBR 4305. Distilled water is A typical data form is shown on figure 1.
preferable and shali be used for all referee or cooperative 7.3 Precautions.-The Vicat apparatus shall be free
tests. from vibration during the penetration test. Take care to
6.2.2 The test specimen used for determination of keep the l-ram needle straight, and also clean as the
normal consistency may be used for the additional collection of cement on sides of needle may retard
determination of time-of-setting by Vicat needle following penetration while cement on the point may increase
procedure described in section 7.2. penetration. The time-of-setting is affected not only by
the percentage and temperature of water used and the
7. Procedure amount of kneading paste receives, but also by the
temperature and humidity of the air; therefore, the results
7.1 Molding Test Specimen.-Quickly form cement are only approximate.
paste, prepared as described in section 6.2, into a ball with
gloved hands and toss six times from one hand to the
other, keeping hands about 6 inches (150 ram) apart. Press 8. Calculations
273
USBR 4191
9.1 A suggested reporting form is shown on figure 5 10.1 Statements of precision and bias will be included
of USBR 4183. in a later revision of this procedure, none are available
at this time.
274
USBR 4191
Type Time-of-Set
Sample Brand Plant or . Time, Penetration, Initial, Final,
No. Name ID Class hour:minutes mm hr:min hr:min
-o.-5"O 5.'20
3:45 ,,#O-l-
/0.'00 4O
lO:15 40
/0:30 3
/o:45 3g
I1:Oo 3.5"
11:15"
2.q
I/:70 2I
/." 50 /A L
Time interpolation for initial set: ___4 (/.4" min) = Z.S" min, Z hr S" min +J"min = 2 hr So min
Remarks:
eew4A/ r EF'Lat'c
Smp E" O/or ZDEw r/,-.,Ea)
275
., UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4192-92
PROCEDURE FOR
MAKING AND CURING CONCRETE
TEST SPECIMENS IN LABORATORY
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4192; the number imme-
diately following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified
version of ASTM designation: C 192-81.
276
USBR 4192
6
.
3/8 '--
f
i
I
L_
' I
i
I
I I Fabricate from
I 6-inch extra
I strong wrought
I steel pipe.
I
I
I
I I
i
I
i
i
>1
I " I
II I
-Locking lug
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
/4 Dia
. 3/16 1
3/,
-'1 354 800 MEMBER B
-_L_I I II b4--L_--e' I J
1 i I I_'_I + 3/4 Oia
Section A-A /4 R 5
BASE PLATE
NOTE Dimensions ere shown in inches,
linch = 25.4 millimeters. MEMBER C
277
1_! S B R 4:192:
3.2.: (,.d/,dY,r ZiSU,ds: If necessary, edges ,:::4 sc,.t sha] k,,e. reinfo, r,ced to, mMntam,
3.2.1 ]MoldJs for .c:stir, g specimens vertically sl-ia]l dili]el]sioi]t] s.tabi]ity. Unless speclimens are. t: be .capF:,ed
o:mf:,,:rm to requJlreme.nrs ,ff s, ectic:,n 3.11 and ASTM C d?0, or .gr:,und t<:, prc:,.d'uce plane ends, mc,ds, shall be p,r'oviided
except that: paper c:,r cardboard moids, wH]l no: be Mllo,wed wJ!ch two mlchirzed meta erd pdates at ]least 1 JrJich ([2"5 ]l-llTli:l,
and b<,E<mn ,/ff aH m,,dls sha]ll be f'][ush ,i{]l b,19{lLOfU] Cit d-lie:k, ,and v',;:xkh]g surfaces; ,h, ali comply wi:tk requiirem, en, ts
side.wal'J ,::no inside crimph Figure 1 sh,:ws, a :yp.i:ca]l steel cc:, F,,]arm'ne,ss and surface roughn,ess ,re, i: sectiorx 42: c,f
,cylir]lde.r n-sold:, lrid J:i:gl:ire 2: s;h,l:Yci,s f.:d'l, ricatJ,:ix dletM]s f,,xx "L:SBR 4:,:!;] ?. P:ovJs, h::m shM]l be mnJe hJ, r t:ixing both, end
p,astic arm lilh m,olds, p,Jltes :Jrml?, t.:, mold. The irside surface o4 each end f:,lae
322 H,,:,rgzorJtM molds t,:>r ,ceep-tes, t cy]lnders s, ha]li be' F,,:vilded w:ihh ac eas, t d-,ree ugs :,r sods, b,::>ut
,:ig. i,)S]']a]l C,:,ritrorrEi tel requJ[reme,:s s.ecti,on 7,,.1 ;lrlLi ] linch ]l,L)ng and rim:lily [,istefed ,;, plite [or en-J,edrnene
o recjluiirel:'ents for symnrerry and d, hTlensi,uxlal t,u]lerarce inl Gl, ci.crele. ()rle k,,.<.;e E,ate shaLll k,,e diqHed from de h-is;de
in aco:rdnce with ,A, STM C 470' The Lse Of hc:,riz:orJ:d st: an angle t<::,, F,.ern:i!t lead wJhe froinri strai:n gauge to, exJh
mo, lds is. intended .only f,or creeF:, specie-nerds th ,cortJn t}]e specJn]er through, edge <:,f plate Prcl.vJ:sim:,.rJ shMI] be
axially elmlbedded stiain gaLg;es.. Molds fi::,, c:eep cylinders,. made for accurateJly pcisitiol-J, irl:: s.[::rain gaLxg;e. A]II necessary
o be: fi]]e.d w]]ii]e suppote,Jl irl a l-ll::lrJz...)rltted pClllii[CIr]lll shaJll h,:des, sl]a] be as sn'Ja]ll aS pt,,ssik,,le to ]:Ei[rJirlliJze distubarlce
ha,,e a fiil]ing sI<:ld,, parallel t,l: n:is ,0,f mCl, Idl, which ex{e.rJids t<::,, subs.eqLmnt strain measurement, and i,]luI] be sealed to
falil ength of ml0,1d t,l: seceiive t]hle concrete. "['he: v+'id{h preve.n,: ]tea ka<ge.
,elf the' s.h::)t Shlall] be .l:.)ne-I]a]l ]ne diameter ,::if speci!me.ri. ,7 flel,tT:i, snd P>G'n2 J:)s-Un]ess ottle:Fwi:se specJ-
fJ:edl, d'e, se :l:n,:.LIds sh, al7 be' :e'c::angu]r in sh, aF,,e <rod c,f
,dJin:-Jensi:ors required to pr'.oduce desired specimen size T'he
inside surfaces, o t-i<i,e n:-/c,,Jdls sh, a]l[ be: straiight and true md
fee ,o,f wrE, age, Maximum vdrkN,,:)r from nc, min'al cr,c:,s,s,
6, ,l,ch,l [15:7! r'rm]i secli:o,z s}]]]l no: exceed I/8 linch, (3,2 n:-lm) f,:r mo,Jds wih
ide'pirl] e, breadth ,;J.l: 51 irJ, Cqie.s (].i'2 l]n'l)' Cl'r n'ore.. 0i"
1/'16 Jin,<:h (ii .d ran:J) fo mc, h!ls. uf sn]al]e depth, <:, bze.adth.
Except :c,, f:]exure s;]_,e.cmen,:s;, n:tc,]d:s shal][] n,:lt valy f>:>m
t}-it_: rJ.l:)rl]ira]l length, [Tr' rrlo.re tl]arJ ]../15. {nell. F]lexure m,Ll,]dS
L S,q,n[] rzo, t be s.i].o, rter than 1/](.7 inch, of :'e.qMred length,.
b.Ut may exceed reqLuired length by F1,i;)ye I}]anl ] ./"]i5, Jrlci3
ACCEPTABLE
[:>,4 Lrs/:,,Sn R,;<):y-Tw,;I sizes ,:ff tampil]g ro,ds re
eqluJired, Each ro,d sla]i 15e a zot:ind, 51traight:, steel rod
s,,it]] at ]eJs the taI1-JF:,,i]; e:q,:[ :,,)uc,ded to a hen,-,isp, heic:M
ir:, ,:.ff same dJlarnerer as rod, It prefe,e,d:, 15,,::,h ends may
ei, Inches h,e' r:,unded,
3.4.1 L,,i!rqe's 2R,:o{-Shal]l be: S/.'8 JirJC{qi (]<.,C i n:-nn)]:ni
,:][une.ter and clL)cIi'LI[ 2'i inclies 'i 610 rJillllql ) long.
3.42 .5:m!'aqTer RoO::-Sl,a]ll be 3..,"S, inch (9.5 mnq:a J:n
dJameee'r and about 12: inc]l'les, (305 iFl:ln)],;In<;
i I ,S ),f,:J'J').-A Tlg.]et, 'wiC]l a rubber ,.:, raw]:iJde I:-leaJ,,
wiXh, a mass ,::ff 1,2:S--0 SII, ibm (5,57_+22:7 g:, shall be us, ed
NIOT ,,CCE:PT, BL E
3 ,i:7:i I4rT,r'*c:,,rs, (]:mcrete v]!br'at,:rs, are class, ifi:ed in two
FiUlt_ 2 F'a})l J,:<H [,i ql ,J,:,L[]:> if C<cl bt)l{i)[]?lS : I:I:IL:[;L] [-)d[iJ.!; J:],: IE :; i ),' ] I
,c:ategorJes,- Jin:e'nal arm e::,:ternsl External vi]::,rat,ors are,
.gR .... = . subdJ:vJ:ded into vJibrariing tables; an,:] fc,,rn2 'vibrators
3, 5.1 hrerT,S l,',b,s'.!,t,,r's :
.,.G; 11.1 T'h,e. i:nte.rr;]vil::,r',il,:n ,::fJig. 4) s]]al] }lave
rgid ,,n,r f]exJMe shaft, p,:e,f:e, cabJ[y p<,we,red by an electric
I]:'J C)LCI, r
|Ti,ll[i,.' ]l t-],:lrizcm,ill Rl<:,:h,I f,LIF ,L FCt,E L') q,c,<iimen,; [:i;l!il- '# -- }l ic-[:TI:,i' %iJl'Jl;ll"lClI ]'i:lf ]JLl,I}l,ll:lIr:b' II1!
2:7 S
USBR 4192
3.6.1.2. The outside diameter or side dimension 3.6.2.1. Table Vibrators.-Theeffectiveness of table
of the large vibrating element shall be at least 0.75 inch vibration is largely a function of the acceleration imparted
(19 mm) and not greater than 1.5 inches (38 mm) and to the concrete by the table (fig. 8).
the combined length of shaft and vibrating element shall 3.6.2.1.1. Vibratory impulses are frequently
exceed maximum depth of section being vibrated by at imparted to a table vibrator through electromagnetic
least 3 inches (76 mm). means, or by using an eccentric mass on the shaft of an
3.6.1.3. The 3- by 6-inch (76- by 152-mm) electric motor or on a separate shaft driven by a motor.
cylinders for the freeze-thaw tests shall be vibrated 3.6.2.1.2. A range of frequencies, peak ampli-
internally using a specially designed 3/8-inch (10-mm) tude, and nominal peak acceleration is given in table 1
small vibrating element. while vibrator is consolidating concrete.
3.6.1.4. A range of frequencies, while vibrator is 3.6.2.1.3. A resonant reed tachometer (fig. 7)
operating in concrete, and a calculated peak amplitude and gives accurate values of frequency. A vibrograph (fig. 9)
nominal peak acceleration in air is given in table 1. may be used to check amplitude, and it records a waveform
3.6.1.5. The vibrating reed tachometer (fig. 5) is which providesthe frequency.
a simple device for checking the frequency of the internal
vibrator operating in air or in concrete. Several vibrator
supply firms have prepared scales on stickers which may NOTE 1.-Comparative readings with the equipment men-
readily be attached to the vibrator head (fig. 6). This is tioned above and a vibrating-reed tachometer indicate that most
a visual-effect scale (optical wedge) that provides an vibrating-reed tachometers give a value about 200 vpm less than
approximate measure of maximum amplitude and the actual in the 3,600 vpm range. The degree of accuracy desired
distribution of amplitude along the head. A resonant reed or to comply with specifications will dictate the method used
tachometer (fig. 7) is a .more expensive instrument that in determining amplitude and frequency.
indicates more accurate values of frequency.
3.6.2 External Vibracors.-Low-frequency high 3.6.2.2. Form Vibrators.-Form vibrators are self-
amplitude vibration is normally preferred for stiffer cooling and can be either the rotary or reciprocating type
mixtures. High frequency, low amplitude vibration (fig. 10).
generally results in better consolidation and better surfaces 3.6.2.2.1. Rotary-type form vibrators produce
for more plastic consistencies. The dividing line between essentially simple harmonic motion. The impulses have
high and low frequenciesforexternal vibration is arbitrarily , components both perpendicular to and in the plane of
taken as 6,000 vpm (100 Hz) and between high and low the form. This type may be pneumatically, hydraulically,
amplitude 0.005 inch (0.13 mm). or electrically driven.
Table 1. - Range of characteristics, performance, and application of internal and external vibrators.
Nominal Peak
Frequency, t Average Amplitude, Yp Acceleration, Av
Vibrations or Revolutions/min, Cycles, g*
vpm or rpm Hz inch millimeter Desired
Internal Vibrator
Under Load t
Type Vibrator
Outside Dia. or
Side Dimension 10,000 167 0.0167 0.424 74
0.75 to 1.50 in to to to
(19 to 38 mm) 15,000 250 0.0300 0.762 300
External Vibrators
279
USBR 4119,2
MILLIIMETERS
percent Ill': 'eS I, ICII](t LI[ al]ly Fllll)i]] wiihJ!rl :range I::l{ U :l The
scales shah also mee requiir(,:llen:s, f,:)r sensim.'iir} :l a]l]ld
{ II} ][ era n C e S p r e I S {.: [ ] h It: id k: II)l' t i:l e N al[ il i[ :l r] :] I nl:a ii ]Jl 1[ el ,]l, { S t >u g i<{ a ,d s
re'vcl.]Vb,g pan 10, revcl.]vin;-padld]le m,be ,cap:lb]le ,:,f
and W@C]lll{)]lll3l;y'S L]Ea!L[t-}[;3ll )( *K "#-1( \X? h(l]'e SCa]Ie's ale grch, mtellJ. th,: rough,] y in ix ] Fig ba*:ct e'.; l, ff pve.>cribed s. i zes ; req u i re{.]
in deciima]l :SlC]IlS I[*f {{ }:l' }*]ld I']];1%; insted C]l IIL)'k]l]lt.e.%
s Iump.
OZ Wl]l:ere {l'te: I]"l{:t[it. S]i;;[[:ln "J is[ t;isedl, 11]{:l equJivnlen,
]::llerce]tnge Sle:nlSii[i,e 5][ {}II elqllll{re:llllleI]t'; and {( ll]eE;;]lnl,dee; Sl]a[ N(ITTK !:,.-A pan rMk:*e. iSl u..,ll:a]ly ii,,,l,_: su.ila]Ac {:.l.l.l - rM:,:Mo;
<,;m,ete. wih, less d-l, an ]i-ind- ,: 2<,qUl-U>) slump t[]un ; rervc,.llving-
apply druln iiniixer The ae ,:lf [,)latiit:l,n, degree <,l{ tih. LIt>J tt{2d i:a,4d[)'
t ilk: i ng
C]If ITliXe:I'S kt F I: ]l[)l J l'i!el/lli:S; S;lL]li{ ;I hie I f(;ll" !IEI bl)lr:{t(>r) I i!l'] l]}](k:lL'I
lLl:)lqlLt:e1% ]1 ]]la]l T []f,. ,:JesirL4,lle' [l:} e.dll]ce ];;Itu l: a[ Fl:)l;][{i(il}]: I.]@CI'E Lkf;O
al]g[e II}f tii!k fF()l]l]l 1l[)17iZllln'fall IIaI {ISe :ln[xer X "illl}l]!]ev'l]*il [eS ';
sma!llest .qu.Jnhy I.o bu ,.4Xlrlniined c,n a so;de 5q. lql,;I. Lll,.!, :le geer
tlXq ak,.,;::lUt ll:) percerlt ,ff ,u:::irlUml .<;iF.acity lal sca]C:l h{,wever, 4, "l-le S E Slpeci mlel s;
L.OCUlLIe {.o d:>mlr {Ill :l..c'lu{ ,:d: t,:,.al <[,;ci}.'. ::nd t(,.:le#,:,*i:l and sp]l[t-tiFl; IFe:[]sii]e streng]r Fli]iay be: ,:,f "l'lj-]F]ill:}IJl'; S;iZe:SI:I
pre(a n{ilLm :1plr:llit a[:l].el H( :l'tSr{!'le: i CeF{;!lJI4 ;t eul) deal ; I]l,q ,l'C..:ii].l):l
minim,Unql {lit: 2: inches !5 ] ram) h
J[I
2 H, !
USBR 419'2
I:
t:m-:
NC'q-'E 4. The :tnc,,].d d, iiam, ec.r is dlee'milq, e.d k,? dq, e n,:m-dnal
l;'iiL, re '' ILilsiiF,,;. a ,, ib.rc,g;qql, ;, deerru:ine mn, phhude ]TIa::inJUIT* sJ2:e <:, ag;gregae T'lrJe l-t]lJiliil3utl] dhi;m-iieer rn,,;:,,]Id n-ILLS;[
;ll[id [11 L]LIC'I[J,'L]!' CIF kl vffrurmg ri,rilll l)r tab]le. b(: a[ ]ea;[ tt]Te: runes dq, e n<,iiq, iinall YIIXi:IT]UIIIIq S;iZ-' aggregate
USBR 41192!
Odd-size diamete m,/ldls ooulld meet d,is reclu{ren:len:; hc, wever,, cc,:npress]ive screngd, cest:s, (],th, e::c test ages may be required {,:,,
previ.L-mS :esezrch has it, rim;rely been cc, n&l.cted using 8< 1;!:-.. <:,'d',er b'pes <::,: specinrmns.
] 8,-. and 2,,ES-iinch ,: 20)>. ,.(tS-. i57-, and 'i}1 ii-u, m:<:. diameter cyllimaeis
wiid<l a ],eng;Ih-tl:>,JialT]le[Cr [ttil I (Ill 2.(jI t:CIIIF {ur{her ,.]4r[[iL:,JtJi,;2:lln 5. Precau:ions
.of sizirg n,Ul,aer, claue:, s table 2 and figure ] ]
5, I TMs. procedure may {nvc, h.,e haza>dc, us materials,
A,Zun:,.,.er o/Specmens-The: number ,::)f spec]nnens c,p.eradorm, and equipme.n< arid &oes not claim :c:, ddress
I d ]g.e n [] ]TJ , -! [ ,o { e! s t a t c t;i e s a r e d e p e' i]d e nt o ]L e s t a b [ i s ]l e ,d a];[ safety prc:,b']ems assc<:iated with ks ase:. ] is ]-e
practice and nJtJ.e ot: test p.rq,g;m. Guidance Ls; usaa]ly reSl:,C,.ns;ibiilJity ,o# d3e user co,, corsul and esab, lish
gben in dne test me.dhc,,d ,a.r Sl:,,ecin:ilcation [,;,r whiich approplriate s.at:e:' and hcakh practices arm determ]rm
specJimens are made Usua]lLL, th, zee ,,:)r mo.e sp:.c]mens app]licabi]ity , :>1 c regu.ac:,r'y Ilim, iltatic,,n,s pri<r t.c, use.
are n>:2J,]iecl. <:,,5 e.a.ch rest ;ge and. rest .o,;)ndit{(:,.n utnHes.s 6. CaHb, raion and S;tandar'dizado, n,
c,,t]m:wJise spe',-iifJecl. :m.u: 5:, Speciime'ns inv,:.]v:ing a given
v,riab]le sh,,m[d b,e mude fr, m: three se.parate batches mixed
6.1 The callbrath::,n, and standardizic.,n c,f mJiscel]ane-
{:,,n, dff{erer, days. An equal ou, mber ,a,f spedme,s f-,,:l, e.>ch
c,.,m equJilc:,ment .,:r apparaus used in performir, g dm. tests
vaJriab]le slh<:,cx]d be made c,.n any g:[ven day. When ]! ils.
l iis;e.d under d-,e Ap.p]:]eable 151c,,::aments of se:crii,,:>r* 2 ae.
iimp,:JssJib]u t,t:, make a le:?s one sg:,ecimer, for' each va'iab]e
cc,.ve'ed under' h:: pazuic:llar prc:,cedure c,r s;c,.da', dire'c:dly
:,n a gherl oh<v,, mixing ot: en.Gire series ,,1 r speclimens should
:,. by re.fe.rene.
be COmFJered in as few da'ys, as pc,ssib]e, and one <f he
mJixrures sh<m]kt be repeated edn .dzq as a standard <::,f:
C{ i:, D-I]7:,,a r i S O I-.
NCT]!: 5 TLs ages :req,e.ntly us,>J are 7' and 5:i <.!h:,ys i:.::,
ca.mg:,essive stren, gff te:.ss. SF,,e.cins, ens om, ta:iniing UF:,e Ill ,cement
{c
I I ''
'k
are feque.tl). {e.sred a: l. ",,-', and 2!:8 d<ys F,::,.r lc, nger t-est:
ages.,. -,. m.,md<,s.. ,5 m,onrhs:, nm] 1 y'e:r ire:' requently us.e:d tc:,
:; o I "k
! k
I
,: , , ...- , , - -----,,
in. ,,u hl<l 41 5,'1; 2/ I I'1 12! I !, I O f:
(h,) EI, ],- iri ,g(i E, :;7. q :Jr]m) ]4:,l,in;t] S;ii::e :hng;
' 3,.
CK:.
0
............... ... .....Ii' ,!,i
4(1
%.
IF . .L . . . . . . . .
.... _ . . . . . . . . 2,, 'S
F'iguve 1':) I:,,ury I,::,Fll!l vil!:,rz, u:,>;: pncunn, 15<l,l:9' dnb,'cn (r,*p)
;.: r,d oh',, t i,: ; II} ,.It ',,n , I:, ,,: ,: m7 : F'igur{ I S;,iz:;], n,:,l:llclalutt:rc f,:lr U:'IH'LJ'L!gC L.ggre'5 : .
2 ;q 2:.
USBR 4192
o'-
v
t v
8
"S
- .- <
N
o
" .I
E._ z
? .- o
z
, o._
ox
I
e4
o'-
e
,Q
284
USBR 4192
6.2 The calibration of internal and external vibrators NOTE 7.-When using aggregates with low absorption in a
to ensure compliance with section 3.6 may be accomplished room-dry condition, the amount of water that will be absorbed
using a vibrating- or resonant-reed tachometer. by aggregatesbefore concrete sets may be assumedto be 80 percent
6.3 For a more positive method of verifying compliance of the difference between the 24-hour absorption of aggregates,
of table vibrators with section 3.6, calibration should be determined by USBR 4127 or 4128, and the amount of water
performed in accordancewith USBR 1440. in pores of aggregates in their room-dry state, as determined
by USBR 4566.
7. Conditioning
7.3.2.2 The mass of the individual size fractions
7.1 Temperature.-Bring materials to a uniform of aggregate may be determined separately, recombined
temperature, preferably in the range from 68 to 77 F into a tared container in amounts required for batch, and
(20 to 25 C) before mixing concrete. immersed for 24 hours prior to use. After immersion, excess
7.2 Cement.-Store cement in a dry place in moisture- water is decanted and combined mass of aggregate and
proof containers, preferably made of metal. Cement shall mixing water determined. Allowance shall be made for
be thoroughly mixed to provide a uniform supply amount of water absorbed by aggregate. The moisture
throughout the tests, and shall be passed through a No. 20 content of the aggregatesshall be determined in accordance
with USBR 4566.
(850-m) or finer sieve to remove all lumps, remixed on
a tarp or plastic sheet, and returned to containers. 7.3.2.3 Aggregate may be brought to and main-
7.3 Aggcegates.-To preclude segregation of coarse tained in a saturated condition, with surface moisture
aggregate, separate into individual size fractionsand, for contained in sufficiently small amounts to preclude loss
each batch, recombine into proper proportions to produce by draining, at least 24 hours prior to use. When this
desired grading. method is used, moisture content of aggregate must be
determined to permit calculation of proper quantities of
NOTE 6.'-Only rarely can a coarse aggregatebe batched as damp aggregate.The quantity of surface moisture present
a single size fraction. The number of size fractions will generally must be included as part of required amount of mixing
be between two and five for aggregatesmaller than 2-1/2 inches water. Surface moisture in fine aggregate shall be
(63 mm). When a size fraction to be hatched is present in amounts determined in accordance with USBR 4566, allowing for
in excess of 10 percent, the ratio of opening of larger to smaller amount of water absorbed. This method, with moisture
sieve should not exceed 2.0. More closely sized groups are content slightly exceeding absorption, is particularly useful
sometimes advisable. for fine aggregate. This method is used less frequently
7.3.1 Unless fine aggregate is separated into for coarse aggregate because of the difficulty of accurately
individual size fractions, maintain the aggregatein a damp determining moisture content; however, if it is used, each
condition, or restore to a damp condition, until use to size fraction must be handled separately to ensure that
prevent segregation unless material uniformly graded is proper grading is obtained.
subdivided into batch-size lots using a sample splitter with 7.4 Lightweight Aggregates.-The methods for specific
proper size openings. If unusual gradings are being studied, gravity, absorption, and preparation of aggregates described
the fine aggregate may need to be dried and separated in this procedure pertain to materials with normal absorp-
into individual sizes. In this case, if total quantity of fine tion values. Low-density aggregates, air-cooled slag, and
aggregaterequired is larger than can be efficiently blended certain highly porous or vesicular natural aggregate may
into a single unit, then mass of individual size fractions be so absorptive that these methods would be difficult to use.
should be determined in quantity required for each The moisture content of low-density aggregate at time of
individual batch. When the total quantity of fine aggregate mixing may have important effects on properties of freshly
needed for the complete investigation is such that it can mixed and hardened concretes, such as slump loss, com-
be thoroughly mixed, blended, and maintained in a damp pressive strength, and resistance to freezing and thawing.
condition, then aggregateshould be handled in that manner. 7.5 Admixtures.-Powdered admixtures that are
Determine specific gravity and absorption of aggregates entirely or mostly insoluble, that do not contain hygroscopic
in accordancewith USBR 4127 and 4128. salts, and are to be added in small quantities, should be
7.3.2 Before incorporating into concrete, prepare mixed with a portion of the cement before introduction
aggregate to ensure a definite and uniform condition of into batch in mixer so as to ensure thorough distribution
moisture. Determine mass of aggregate to be used in batch throughout concrete. Essentially insoluble materials that
by one of the following procedures: are used in amounts exceeding 10 percent by mass of
7.3.2.1 Mass of low-absorption aggregates, those cement, such as pozzolans, should be handled and added
with an absorption less than 1.0 percent, may be determined to batch in same manner as cement. Powdered admixtures
in room-dry condition with allowance made for amount that are mostly insoluble but contain hygroscopic salts,
of water that will be absorbed from unset concrete (note 7). may cause bailing of cement and should be mixed with
This method is particularly useful for coarse aggregate sand. Water-soluble and liquid admixtures should be added
which must be batched as individual sizes because of the to mixer in solution in the mixing water. The quantity
possibility of segregation. This method can be used for of such solution used shall be included in calculation of
fine aggregate only when fine aggregate is separated into water content of concrete. Admixtures that are incompat-
individual size fractions. ible in concentrated form, such as solutions of calcium
285
USBR 4192
chloride and certain air-entraining and set-retarding used), and fine aggregate, without addition of water, until
admixtures, should not be intermixed prior to their these materials are thoroughly blended. Add the coarse
introduction into the concrete. The time, sequence, and aggregate and mix entire batch, without addition of water,
method of adding some admixtures to a batch of concrete until coarse aggregate is uniformly distributed throughout
can have important effects on concrete properties, such batch. Then, add the water and admixture solution (if used),
as time-of-set and air content. The method selected must and mix until concrete is homogeneous in appearance and
remain unchanged from batch to batch and should simulate has desired consistency. If prolonged mixing is necessary
good field practice. because of the addition of water in increments while
adjusting the consistency, discard batch and make a new
NOTE 8.-The mixing apparatusand associatedequipment shall batch in which mixing is not interrupted to make trial
be thoroughly cleaned to ensure that chemical additions or consistency tests.
admixtures used in dissimilar batches of concrete do not affect 8.1.4 Mixed Concrete.-Select portions of batch of
subsequent batches. mixed concrete to be used in tests for molding specimens
so as to be representative of actual proportions and
8. Procedure
condition of concrete. When concrete is not being remixed
or sampled, cover to prevent evaporation.
8.1 Mixing Concrete:
8.2 Wet Sieving.-If nominal maximum size of aggre-
8.1.1 General-Mix concrete in a suitable mixer, or gate is in excess of 1-1/2-inches (37.5-mm), wet screen
by hand, in batches of such size as to have about 10 percent the mix across the 1-1/2-inch screen in accordance with
excess after molding test specimens. Hand-mixing methods USBR 4172 to accommodate molds or measures as required.
are not applicable to air-entrained concrete or concrete 8.3 Slump, Air Content, and Yield:
with no measurable slump. Mixing methods are given in
8.3.1 Slump.-Measure the slump of each batch of
sections 8.1.2 and 8.1.3; however, other methods may be
concrete immediately after mixing in accordance with
used when it is desired to simulate special conditions or USBR 4143.
practices, or when method specified is impracticable. It
is important not to vary the mixing sequence and method
NOTE 10. The slump test is unsuitable for concrete that
from batch to batch unless the effect of such variation is so dry that it slumps less than 1/4 inch (6 mm). The no-
is under study. slump concrete may be tested in accordance with USBR 4905.
8.1.2 Machine Mixing.-Prior to starting rotation of Other testing methods are described in ACI 211.3.
mixer, add the coarse aggregate, some of the mixing water,
and the solution of admixture, when required, in accordance
with section 7.5. When feasible, disperse admixture in 8.3.2 Air Content.-Determine the air content, when
mixing water before placing in mixer. Start mixer and required, in accordance with either USBR 4173 or 4231;
then add fine aggregate, cement, and water with mixer however, USBR 4231 should not be used with concretes
running. If it is impractical for a particular mixer or for made with low-density aggregates, air-cooled blast-furnace
.a particular test to add these materials while mixer is slag, or aggregates of high porosity. After determining
running, they may be added to a stopped mixer after air content, discard concrete used for the determination.
permitting mixer to rotate a few revolutions following 8.3.3 Yield-Determine the yield of each batch of
introduction of coarse aggregate and some of the water. concrete, if required, in accordance with USBR 4138.
After all ingredients are in mixer, mix for 3 minutes, stop Concrete used for slump and density testing, provided
mixing for 3 minutes, and mix again for 2 minutes. Cover density test is not done on same sample used for air content
open end or top of mixer to prevent evaporation during determination, may be returned to mixing pan and remixed
stop period. Take precautions to compensate for mortar into batch.
retained by mixer so that discharged batch, as used, will 8.4 Making Specimens:
be correctly proportioned (note 9). To eliminate segrega- 8.4.1 Place of Molding.-Mold specimens as near as
tion, deposit machine-mixed concrete in the clean, damp, practicable to location where they will be stored for initial
mixing pan and remix by shovel or trowel until concrete 24 hours. If this is not possible, move specimens to place
appears to be uniform. of storage immediately after being struck off. Place molds
on a rigid surface that is free from vibration and other
NOTE 9.-It is difficult to recover all of the mortar from a disturbances. Avoid jarring, striking, tilting, or scarring
mixer. To compensate for this difficulty, the following method surface of specimens when moving to storage.
may be used to ensure correct final proportions in the batch: 8.4.2 Placing.-Place concrete in molds using a scoop,
prior to mixing the test batch, the mixer can be "buttered" by blunted trowel, or shovel. Select each measure of concrete
mixing a batch proportioned to simulate the test batch. The mor- from mixing pan to ensure that it is representative of
tar adhering to mixer after discharge will compensate for loss batch. It may be necessary to remix concrete in mixing
of mortar from actual test batch. pan with a shovel or trowel to prevent segregation during
molding of specimens. Move scoop or trowel around top
8.1.3 Hand Mixing.-Mix the batch in a watertight, edge of mold as concrete is discharged to ensure a
clean, damp, metal pan or bowl with a bricklayer's blunted symmetrical distribution of the concrete and to minimize
trowel. Mix the cement, powdered insoluble admixture (if segregation of coarse aggregate within mold. Use a tamping
286
USBR 4192
rod to further distribute concrete prior to start of 8.5.2 Rodding.-Place concrete in mold, in the
consolidation. Place concrete in molds by layers, as specified required number of layers of approximately equal volume.
in table 3. When placing final layer, operator shall attempt Rod each layer with rounded end of rod using the number
to add an amount of concrete that will exactly fill mold of strokes and size of rod specified in table 4. Rod bottom
after compaction. Do not add nonrepresentative samples layer throughout its depth. Distribute strokes uniformly
of concrete to an underfilled mold. over cross section of mold and, for each upper layer, allow
8.5 Consolidation: rod to penetrate about 1/2 inch (13 mm) into underlayer
8.5.1 Methods of Consolidation.-Preparationof when depth of layer is less than 4 inches (102 mm), and
satisfactory specimens requires different methods of about 1 inch (25 mm) when depth is 4 inches or more.
consolidation.These methods are internal and external If voids are left by tamping rod, tap sides of mold lightly
vibration, and rodding. Base selection of method on the with mallet to close voids. Extreme care must be used
slump, unless a specified method is stated in the when tapping sides of metal or plastic molds.
specifications. Rod concretes with a slump greater than 8.5.3 Vibration.-Maintain a standard duration of
3 inches (76 mm), rod or vibrate concreteswith a slump vibration for the particular kind of concrete, vibrator and
of 1 to 3 inches (25 to 76 mm), and vibrate concretes specimen mold involved. The duration required will depend
with a slump of less than 1 inch (25 mm), see note 10 on workability of concrete and effectiveness of vibrator.
and sections 3.6.1.2, 3.6.1.3, 8.5.3.1, and 8.5.3.2. For internal vibration, three insertions of 3 or 4 seconds
Cylinders:
Up to 12 inches (305 mm) Rodding 3 (equal) 4 inches (102 mm)
Over 12 inches Rodding As required 4 inches (102 mm)
Up to 18 inches (457 ram) Vibration 2 (equal) 9 inches (229 mm)
Over 18 inches Vibration 3 (or more) 8 inches (203 mm), as
near as practicable
Prisms andhorizontal
creep cylinders:
Up to 8 inches (203 mm) Rodding 2 (equal) 4 inches (102 mm)
Over 8 inches Rodding 3 (or more) 4 inches (102 mm)
Up to 8 inches Vibration 1 8 inches (203 mm)
Over 8 inches Vibration 2 (or more) 8 inches (203 mm), as
near as practicable
Table 4. - Diameter of rod and number of roddings to be used in molding test specimens.
Cylinders
Beams andPrisms
Top surface area of specimen Diameter of rod Number of roddings per layer
6 inches (152 mm) 5/8 inch (16 mm) 50 total (25 along both sides of axis)
287
USBR 4192
each are usually sufficient. Sufficient vibration has been 8.6.1 Cylinders.-After consolidation, finish top
applied when surface of concrete has become relatively surfaces by striking off with tamping rod or strike-off bar,
smooth and exhibits a shiny, wet appearance. Continue where consistency of concrete permits, or with a wood
vibration only long enough to achieve proper consolidation float or trowel.
of concrete; overvibration may cause segregation. Fill molds 8.6.2 Horizontally Case Creep Cylinders.-After
and vibrate with the required number of approximately consolidation, strike off specimen with a trowel or float,
equal layers. Place all concrete for each layer in mold before then trowel the minimum amount required to form the
starting vibration of that layer. Add the final layer so as concrete in the opening concentrically with rest of
to avoid overfilling mold by more than 1/4 inch (6 mm). specimen. Use a screed curved to radius of specimen to
Finish the surface either during vibration, when external more precisely shape and finish concrete in the opening.
vibration is used; or after vibration when either internal 8.7 Curing:
or external vibration is used. When finishing surface after 8.7.1" Covering After Finishing.-To prevent evapo-
vibration, addonly enough concrete with a trowel to overfill ration of water fromunhardened concrete, cover specimens
mold by about 1/8 inch (3 mm), work into surface, and immediately after finishing with a nonabsorptive,
then strike off. nonreactive plate or a sheet of tough, durable, impervious
8.5.3.1 Internal Vibration.-For cylinders, the ratio plastic. Wet burlap may also be used for covering, but
of diameter of cylinder to diameter of vibrating element care must be used to keep burlap wet until specimens are
shall be 4.0 or higher. In compacting specimen, vibrator removed from molds. Placing a sheet of plastic over the
shall not be allowed to rest on or touch bottom or sides burlap will help keep burlap wet.
of mold or strike embedded items such as strain meters. 8.7.2 Removal From Molds.-Remove specimens
Carefully withdraw vibrator in such a manner that no air from molds not less than 20 nor more than 48 hours after
pockets are left in specimen. After vibration of each layer, casting.
tap sides of mold to ensure removal of large entrapped 8.7.3 Curing Environment.-Unless otherwise
air bubbles at surface of mold, using extreme care with specified, all specimens shall be moist cured at 73.4+3 F
metal or plastic molds. (23.0+1.7 C) from time of molding until time of test
8.5.3.1.1 Cylinders.-Use three insertions of (note 11). Storage during initial 48 hours of curing shall
vibrator at different points for each layer. Allow vibrator be in a vibration-flee environment. As applied to treatment
to penetrate through layer being vibrated into layer below of demolded specimens, moist curing means that test
by about 1 inch (25 mm). specimens shall have free water maintained on entire
8.5.3.1.2 Beams, Prisms, and Horizontal Creep surface area at all times. This condition may be met by
Cylinders.-Insert vibrator at intervals not exceeding 6 immersion in saturated-lime water (note 12), or by storage
inches (152 ram) along centerline of long dimension of in a moist room or cabinet meeting requirements of ASTM
specimen, or along both sides, but not in contact with C 511. Specimens shall not be exposed to dripping or
strain gauge in creep cylinders. For specimens wider than running water.
6 inches, use alternating insertions along two lines. Allow
shaft of vibrator to penetrate into bottom layer about I inch NOTE 11.-The temperature within damp sand and under wet
(25 ram). burlap, or similar materials, will always be lower than temperature
8.5.3.2 External Vibration.-When external vibra- in surrounding atmosphere if evaporation takes place.
tion is used, ensure that mold is rigidly attached to or
securely held against vibrating element or vibrating surface. NOTE 12.-Saturated-lime(calcium hydroxide) water is defined
No-slump concrete should be consolidated in accordance as that point where no furtherlime powder will go into solution.
with USBR 4906. At 73.4+3 F (23.0:t:1.7 C), 0.160 gram of lime powder per
8.6 Finishing.-After consolidation by any of the 100 mililiters of water is required to bring mixture to a saturated-
lime water state. This is about 1.33 pounds of lime for every
methods, unless finishing was done during vibration (8.5.3), 100 gallons of water. A small cloth bag filled with high-calcium
strike off surface of concrete and float or trowel in hydrated lime and placed in each tank should keep the lime water
accordance with method used. Perform all finishing with in a saturated condition. Lime water can irritate the skin and
minimum manipulation necessary to produce a flat, even can cause rashes on the hands and arms and, consequently, person-
surface that is level with rim or edge of mold and which nel will need to wear gloves. Deep containers for the lime water
has no depressions or projections greater than 1/8 inch should be avoided, or a satisfactory mechanical means should
(3 ram). If no finish is specified, finish surface with a be provided to remove the specimens.
wood or magnesium float. If a trowel is used, it is usually
better to leave surface slightly high after striking off and 8.7.4 Flexural Strength Test Specimens.-Cure the
floating, with the intent of returning later to trowel flush. flexuralstrength test specimens in accordance with sections
However, take care doing this because there is a tendency 8.7.1 and 8.7.2, except that while in storage for a minimum
to overtrowel and bring too much mortar to the surface, of 20 hours immediately prior to testing, specimens shall
which creates a weakened plane. Perform all finishing with be immersed in a saturated-lime solution at 73.4+3 F
minimum manipulation necessary to produce a flat, even (23.0+1.7 C). At end of curing period, between time
surface that is level with rim or edge of mold and which specimen is removed fromcuring until testing is completed,
has no depressions or projections greater than 1/8 inch. drying of surfaces shall be prevented.
288
USBR 4192
NOTE 13. Relatively small amounts of surface drying of 11.2 The single-operator standard deviations for
flexural strength specimens will induce tensile stresses in the slump, density, air content, and 7-day compressive strength
extreme fibers that will markedly reduce the indicated flexural of trial batches have been found to be 0.7 inch (17.8 mm),
strength. 0.9 lbm/ft 3 (14.4 kg/m3), 0.3 percent, and 203 lbf/in 2
9. Calculations (1.4 MPa), respectively. Therefore, the results of properly
conducted tests on two trial batches made in same laboratory
9.1 No particular calculations are involved for this test should not differ by more than 2.0 inches (50.8 mm),
procedure. 2.5 lbm/ft3 (40.0 kg/m3), 0.8 percent, and 574 lbf/in 2,
(4.0 MPa), respectively. This precision statement is
10. Report
considered applicable to laboratory trial batches propor-
tioned to contain the prescribed quantities of materials
10.1 The report shall include:
and having a constant water-cement ratio. The values
should be used with caution for air-entrained concrete,
Specific intent of mix study in laboratory. concrete with slump less than 2 inches (51 mm) or more
Source of materials involved. than 6 inches (152 mm), or concrete made with other
Physical properties of materials. than normal mass aggregate or aggregatelarger than 1
Slump. inch (25.0 mm) nominal maximum size.
Air content. 11.3 The multilaboratory standard deviations for
Type of specimens molded.
slump, density, air content, and 7-day compressive strength
Method of consolidation. of trial batches have been found to be 1.0 inch (25.4 mm),
Method of curing. 1.4 lbm/fO (22.4 kg/m3), 0.4 percent, and 347 lbf/in2
Any special remarks concerning mix. (2.4 MPa), respectively. Therefore, the results of properly
conducted tests on single trial batches made in two different
10.2 Becausemany variables may be a requirement for
laboratories should not differ by more than 2.8 inches
a specific mix design, no attempt was made to devise a
(71.1 mm), 4.0 lbm/ft3 (64.1 kg/m3), 1.1 percent, and
typical reporting form. Each mix design submittal will
981 lbf/in2 (6.8 MPa), respectively. This precision
probably be handled by a cover letter that will include
statement is considered applicable to laboratory trial
whatever data are considered to be significant.
batches proportioned to contain the prescribed quantities
11. Precision and Bias of materials and having a prescribed water-cement ratio.
The values should be used with caution for air-entrained
11.1 Data to establish precision statements for the concrete, concrete with slump less than 2 inches (51 mm)
various types of testing required in this procedure were or more than 6 inches (152 mm), or concrete made with
obtained in the Concrete Reference Sample Program of other than normal mass aggregate or aggregate larger than
the Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory. Analysis 1 inch (25.0 mm) nominal maximum size.
of the data for the single-operator and multilaboratory 11.4 Bias.-The bias has not been established for this
precision is shown in table 5. test procedure.
Table 5. - Values for precision statements relating to making trial batches by USBR 4192 and testing by appropriate methods.
Multilaboratory precision* Single-laboratory precision2
USBR 4192 ASTM 1S D2S 1S D2S
Slump, inches (mm) C 143 1.0 (25.4) 2.8 (71.1) 0.7 (17.8) 2.0 (50.8)
Density, lbm/ft3 (kg/m 3) C 138 1.4 (22.4) 4.O (64.1) O.9 (14.4) 2.5 (40.0)
Air content 2, percent by volume C 173 0.4 1.1 0.3 0.8
Compressive strength (7-day),
lbf/in 2 (MPa) C 39 347 (2.4) 981 (6.8) 203 (1.4) 574 (4.0)
289
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
r .
USBR 4204-92
PROCEDURE FOR
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4204; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 204-84.
290
USBR 4204
16 mm
-
"" "
voiv or C,o=I/111"
III
I ' Clearance be- "111 '
sl"
Glass tube,
9mm O.D.,, i- at ] tween plunger end
/ El cell not more than 0.1 mm
l.sm__
,Io I (I ,
- I
- 30to40,l-mm holes oE
I.I")
E LPerfora
0E disk /
- Filter poper
o o
o '19138 Standard toper +'
mole coupling to fit
top of manometer
NOTE 2.-Filter paper disks that are too small may leave part 3.7 Manometer Liquid.-Manometer shall be filled to
of sample adhering to inner wall of cell above top disk. When midpoint with a nonvolatile, nonhygroscopic liquid of low
too large in diameter, disks have a tendency to buckle and cause viscosity and density, such as dibutyl phthalate (dibutyl
erratic results. 1,2-benzene-dicarboxylate)or a light.grade mineral oil.
3.8 Timer.-The timer shall have a positive starting
3.6 Manometer.-The U-tube manometer shall be and stopping mechanism and shall be capable of being
constructed according to the design indicated on figure 1, read to nearest 0.5 second or less. Timer shall be accurate
using nominal 9-ram-outside-diameter, standard-wall, glass to 0.5 second or less for time intervals up to 60 seconds,
tubing. The top of one arm of the manometer shall form and accurate to 1 percent or less for time intervals of 60
an airtight connection with permeability cell. This arm to 300 seconds.
shall have a line etched around tube 125 to 145 mm below
top side outlet, and additional lines at distances of 15+1
ram, 70+1 ram, and 110+1 mm above that line (see fig. 1). 4. Reagentsand Materials
A side outlet shall be provided 250 to 305 mm above bottom
of manometer for use in evacuation of manometer arm 4.1 Manometer Liquid.-Phthalate (dibutyl 1,2-
connected to permeability cell. A positive airtight valve benzene-dicarboxylate) or light grade of mineral oil.
or clamp shall be provided on side outlet not more than 4.2 National Institute of Standards and Technolgy
50 mm from manometer arm. Manometer shall be mounted Standard ReferenceMaterial, No. 114.
firmly and in such a manner that arms are vertical. 4.3 Mercury.-ACS reagent grade or better.
29l
USBR 4204
292
USBR 4204
0.001 gram as determined in accordancewith 6.4 and place 8.2 Size of Test Sample.-The mass of sample (note
in cell. Tap side of cell lightly to level bed of cement. 9) used for test shall be same as that used in calibration
Place a filter paper disk on top of cement and compress test on standard sample, except that when determining
cement with plunger until plunger collar is in contact with finenessof Type III cements or other types of fine-ground
top of cell. Slowly withdraw plunger a short distance, rotate cements whose bulk for this mass is so great that ordinary
about 90 degrees, repress, and then slowly withdraw. Use thumb pressure will not cause plunger collar to contact
of fresh disks is required for each determination. top of cell, sample mass shall be that required to produce
6.6 Permeability Test:. a test bed having a porosity of 0.530+0.005.
6.6.1 Attach permeability cell to manometer tube,
ensure an airtight connection is obtained, and take care NOTE 9.-When this procedure is used for materials other
not to jar or disturb preparedbed of cement. than portland cement, or if one of the required porosities given
in 8.2 cannot be attained for a portland cement sample, the mass
of sample shall be adjusted so that a firm, hard bed is produced
NOTE 6.-If a rubber stopper is used for connection, it should by compacting process. In no case; however, should more than
be moistened with water. If a standard-taper joint is used, a thumb pressure be used to secure proper bed, nor should such
little stopcock grease should be applied. The efficiency of the thumb pressure be used that plunger "rebounds" from cell top
connection can be determined by attaching cell to manometer, when pressure is removed.
stoppering it, partially evacuating one arm of manometer, and
then closing valve. Any continuous drop in pressure indicates 8.3 Preparation of Bed of Cement.-Prepare test bed
a leak in system. of cement in accordance with section 6.5.
8.4 Permeabili(y Tests.-Make permeability tests in
6.6.2 Slowly evacuate air in one arm of manometer accordance with method described in 6.6, except that only
U-tube until liquid reaches top mark; then close valve one time-of-flow determination is required on each bed.
tightly. Start timer when bottom of meniscus of manometer
liquid reaches second (next to top) mark, and stop timer 9. Calculation
when bottom of meniscus of liquid reaches third (next
to bottom) mark. Note the time interval measured, in 9.1 Calculate specific surface values in accordancewith
seconds, and record. Note the temperature of test in degrees the following equations:
Fahrenheit (Celsius), and record.
6.6.3 During calibration of instrument, make at least
three determinations of the time of flow on each of three
separately prepared beds of standard sample (note 7).
(3)
Calibration shall be made by same operator making fineness
determination.
7. Conditioning
Sr = (8)
7.1 Conditioning or preparation of sample and bed of
cement for calibration is given in sections 6.3 and 6.5. where:
Sr = specific surface of test sample in square cen-
8. Procedure timeters per gram,
Ss = specific surface of standard sample used in cal-
8.1 Temperature of Cement.-The cement sample shall ibration of apparatusin square centimeters
be at room temperature when tested. per gram,
293
USBR 4204
TT = measured time interval, in seconds, of Table 2. - Values for porosity of cement bed.
manometer drop for test sample (note 10),
T. = measured time interval, in seconds, of
manometer drop for standard sample used Porosity of bed or
in calibration of apparatus (note 10), ET or s
294
USBR 4204
Tr Tr Tr Tr Tr Tr
or OF or or or or or or or or or oi"
T T, T, T, T T,
33.5 5.79 58.5 7.65 83.5 9.14 116 10.77 166 12.88 216 14.70
34 5.83 59 7.68 84 9.17 117 10.82 167 12.92 217 14.73
34.5 5.87 59.5 7.71 84.5 9.19 118 10.86 168 12.96 218 14.76
35 5.92 60 7.75 85 9.22 119 10.91 169 13.00 219 14.80
35.5 5.96 60.5 7.78 85.5 9.25 120 10.95 170 13.04 220 14.83
36 6.00 61 7.81 86 9.27 121 11.00 171 13.08 222 14.90
36.5 6.04 61.5 7.84 86.5 9.30 122 11.05 172 13.11 224 14.97
37 6.08 62 7.87 87 9.33 123 11.09 173 13.15 226 15.03
37.5 6.12 62.5 7.91 87.5 9.35 124 11.14 174 13.19 228 15.10
38 6.16 63 7.94 88 9-38 125 11.18 175 13.23 230 15.17
38.5 6.20 63.5 7.97 88.5 9.41 126 11.22 176 13.27 232 15.23
39' 6.24 64 8.00 89 9.43 127 11.27 177 13.30 234 15.30
39.5 6.28 64.5 8.03 89.5 9.46 128 11.31 178 13.34 236 15.36
40 6.32 65 8.06 90 9.49 129 11.36 179 13.38 238 15.43
40.5 6.36 65.5 8.09 90.5 9.51 130 11.40 180 13.42 240 15.49
41 6.40 66 8.12 91 9.54 131 11.45 181 13.45 242 15.56
41.5 6.44 66.5 8.15 91.5 9.57 132 11.49 182 13.49 244 15.62
42 6.48 67 8.19 92 9.59 133 11.53 183 13.53 246 15.68
42.5 6.52 67.5 8.22 92.5 9.62 134 11.58 184 13.56 248 15.75
43 6.56 68 8.25 93 9.64 135 11.62 185 13.60 250 15.81
43.5 6.60 68.5 8.28 93.5 9.67 136 11.66 186 13.64 252 15.87
44 6.63 69 8.31 94 9.70 137 11.70 187 13.67 254 15.94
44.5 6.67 69.5 8.34 94.5 9.72 138 11.75 188 13.71 256 16.00
45 6.7l 70 8.37 95 9.75 139 II.79 189 13.75 258 16.06
45.5 6.75 70.5 8.40 95.5 9.77 140 11.83 190 13.78 260 16.12
46 6.78 71 8.43 96 9.80 141 11.87 19l 13.82 262 16.19
46.5 6.82 71.5 8.46 96.5 9.82 142 11.92 192 13.86 264 16.25
47 6.86 72 8.49 97 9.85 143 11.96 193 13.89 266 16.31
47.5 6.89 72.5 8.51 97.5 9.87 144 12.00 194 13.93 268 16.37
48 6.93 73 8.54 98 9.90 145 12.04 195 13.96 270 16.43
48.5 6.96 73.5 8.57 98.5 9.92 146 12.08 196 14.00 272 16.49
49 7.00 74 8.60 99 9.95 147 12.12 197 14.04 274 16.55
49.5 7.04 74.5 8.63 99.5 9.97 148 12.17 198 14.07 276 16.61
50 7.07 75 8.66 100 10.00 149 12.21 199 14.11 278 16.67
50.5 7.11 75.5 8.69 100.5 10.02 150 12.25 200 14.14 280 16.73
295
USBR 4204
9.5.2 The typical example for fly ash specific surface arm. For additional information, see "Manual of Cement
determination (fig. 3) uses the formulas in use in 1981. Testing."5
No specific surface determinations on fly ash by this method
have been made by the Bureau since April 1984; therefore, 10.3 A suggested reporting form is shown on figure 5
of USBR 4183.
no typical determinations of a /yr value are included in
a typical worksheet with calculations.
11. Precision and Bias
296
USBR 4204
Room
Mass Temperature 0= Vc
Standard Type of at Density Volume
Apparatus Cement Sample Brand Plant Mercury. Time of Test of of
No. No. No. Name ID ..Glass- grams Initial Final Mercury. Cement.
M,, Mb "F 'C F C g/cm cm
Trial
No. 1 /DEAL r-
/ //41vl /l-73gf C/r/E//r 'v .Z t/,. 0/./7 23.o 23.0
co
Avg. /. 88"3
Trial
No. 1
Trial
No. 2
Avg.
Trial
No. 1
Trial
No. 2
Avg.
Trial
No. 1
Trial
No. 2
Avg.
i
Remarks:
297
USBR 42O4
Ma Pe V to it o
So T
Standard Mass Density Volume Room Temp. at Porosity Specific Time
Apparatus Cement Trial of of of Time of Testing Ratio Surface', Interval,
No. No. No. Sample,: Cement, Cement, Standard Sample
grams g/cm cm
OF I C
Bed No. 1 2. 66 23
22
9 7
Bed No. 2 /t4 23 IOo. R
23 .,
24 lOO.
Bed No. 3 25 99.9
23 99.9
23
Average
Bed No. 1
Bed No. 2
Bed No. 3
Average
Bed No. 1
Bed No. 2
Bed No. 3
Average
tSpecific Surfaceof StandardCement No.//'Q,M = 3?$0 cm/g
Remarks:
298
USBR 4204
1.0
0.9
Avg. b
>-
t- 0.8 \
O
0
a.
(23
ILl
0.7
rn
I-.-
0.6 \ \ ,Y
u
0.5
\ \ "-,,,
0.4
o i 2 3 3.5
Figure 4. - Illustration on method for determination of/yr value for use in fineness calculations of materials other than portland cement.
299
USBR 4204
Mr pr Vc tr r 1
Mass Density Volume Room Porosit Time Specific
Standard Type of of of Temp. at Ratio Interval, Surface,
Apparatus Cement Sample Brand Plant .or Test Test Cement, Time of
No. No. No. Name ID Sample, Sample, Testing
Test
Sample
grams g/cm 2 cm F C seconds cm2/g
/V/- /O6"lg. qr4'A ,p
/ ll41l 73g" C/4/7r co 2. q6 3.15 Zg'3 23 0.5o0 /02 3q7o
P/Ea$ C
/ I/4 g97q #zr..'A z/. 2. 75"o
co /oa 2. G 7 L g3 23 0.,03F/ lg 7 4.4oo
300
@ UNITED STATES OF RECLAMATION
INTERIORBuREAU
DEPARTMENT OF THE ).
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4211; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ACI standard: 211.1.
30l
USBR 4211
3O2
USBR 4211
by use of special ingredients such as low-alkali cement, Bulk specific gravities and absorptions of aggre-
pozzolans, or selected aggregateto prevent harmful gates.
expansion due to alkali-aggregatereaction which occurs Bulk specific gravity of each cementitious material.
in some areas when concrete is exposed to a moist envi- Mixing water requirements of concrete developed
ronment. Also, sulfate resisting cement or pozzolans may from experience with available aggregates.
be used for concrete exposed to sulfate-bearing soils Relationships between strength and the W/(C + P)
and/or sulfate waters, or aggregatefree of excessive soft (water-cement plus pozzolan ratio) for the available
particles where resistance to surface abrasion is required. combinations of cementitious materials and aggre-
Use of a low water-cement ratio will prolong the life of gate.
concrete by reducing the penetration of aggressiveliq-
uids. Resistanceto severe weathering, particularly freez- NOTE l.-Estimatesfrom tables 1 and 2, respectively, may
ing and thawing, and to salts used for ice removal is be used when the last two items of information are not availa-
greatly improved by incorporation of a proper distribu- ble.
tion of entrained air. Entrained air should be used in all 4. Apparatus
exposed concrete in climates where freeze-thaw cycles
occur. References [20,21] provide detailed information 4.1 The apparatus required for proportioning
on concrete durability. concrete mixes are covered under the individual test pro-
3.2.5 Generation ofHeat.-A major concern in cedures listed under the Applicable Documents of sec-
proportioningmass concreteis the size and shape of the tion 2.
completedstructureor portionthereof. Concrete place-
ments large enoughto requirecontrolmeasuresforgen- 5. Precautions
eration of heat and resultantvolume change withinthe
mass will also require considerationof temperature 5.1 This procedure may involve hazardous materials,
controlmeasures, as explainedin the mass concretesec- operations, and equipment, and does not claim to address
tions of this procedure.Generally, hydrationof cement all safety problems associated with its use. It is the
willgenerate a concretetemperaturerise of 10 to 15 o F responsibility of the user to consult and establish appro-
per 100 lbm/yd3 (9 to 14 C per 100 kg/m 3) of port- priate safety and health practices and determine applica-
land cement. If temperaturerise of concretemass is not bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
held to a minimumand the heat allowed to dissipateat
a reasonable rate, or if concrete is subjected to rapid 6. Sampling, Test Specimens, and Test Units
cooling,crackingis likelyto occur. Temperaturecontrol
6.1 Procedures for sampling, and a description and
measures can includea relativelylow initialplacingtem-
suggested quantities of test specimens and test units are
perature, reduced quantitiesof cementitiousmaterials,
given under the individual test procedures listed under
and circulationof chilled water. Also, the insulationof
the Applicable Documents of section 2.
concrete surfaces may be required to adjust for these
various concreteconditionsand exposures.It should be 7. Calibration and Standardization
emphasized that mass concrete is not necessarilymade
of large aggregateconcrete,and the concernaboutgen- 7.1 The calibration and standardization of miscel-
eration of an excessiveamountof heat in concreteis not laneous equipment or apparatus used in performing the
confinedto massive dam or large foundationstructures. tests listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2
Many large structuralelements may be massive enough are covered under that particular procedure or standard
that heat generation should be considered,particularly directly or by reference.
when minimumcross-sectionaldimensionsofa solidcon-
crete member approach or exceed 2 to 3 feet (0.6 to 8. Conditioning
0.9 m) or when cement contentsabove 600 lbm/yd3
8.1 Conditioning of materials for all tests required
(356 kg/m3) are being considered.
prior to proportioning of concrete mixes are covered
3.3 BackgroundData.-To the extentpossible,selec- under the individual test procedures listed under the
tion ofconcreteproportionsshouldbe based on test data Applicable Documents of section 2.
or experience with materials to be used. Where such
backgroundinformationis limitedor not available, esti- 9. Procedure
mates providedin thisdesignationmay be used (note 1 ).
The followinginformationfor availablematerialswillbe 9.1 The procedure for selection of mix proportions
useful: discussed in this section is applicableto all normal density
concrete. Although the same basic data and procedures
are used in proportioning mass concrete, additional
Sieve analyses of fine and coarse aggregates.
information required for mass concrete design is given
Optimu.m combination of coarse aggregatesto in the mass concrete portion of this designation.
obtain maximum density. 9.2 Estimating the required batch masses for the con-
Dry-rodded or dry-jigged density of coarse aggre- crete involves a sequence of logical, straightforward
gate. steps which, in effect, fit the characteristics of the availa-
3O3
USBR 4211
Table 1. - Approximate air and water contents per volume of concrete; and proportions of fine and coarse aggregate.l
Sand, Percent of dry-
percent rodded or dry- Air-entrained
Max. size of Recommended of total jigged density of concrete, average
coarse aregate total air content, aggregate coarse aggregate water content
inches (am) + 1 percent by solid per unit volume lbm/yd 3 (kg/m 3)
volume of concrete
Percentage of
Water Percentage dry-rodded or
Changes in materials or proportions content, of ctry-jigged
percent sand coarse aggre-
gate
i For 70 F (21 C), concrete containing natural sand with a fineness modulus of 2.75, average coarse aggregate,and a slump
of 3 to 4 inches (76 to 102 am) at the mixer.
2 If aggregatesare proportioned by the percentage of sand method, use first and second columns; if by he dry-rodded or dry-jigged
density method, use first and third columns.
SWRA = water reducing admixture (Type A or D, ASTM C 494).
4HRWRA = high-range water reducing admixture (Type F or G admixtures, ASTM C 494).
hie materials for a mixture suitable for the work. The strength overdesign, admixtures, type of cement, and
question of suitability is frequently not decided by the .type of aggregatesources.
individual selecting the proportions because the job spec-
ifications may dictate some or all of the following: 9.3 Regardlessof whether the concrete characteris-
tics are prescribed by the specification or are left to the
Maximum W/(C+P). individual selecting the proportions, establishment of
Minimum cementitious materials content. batch masses per cubic yard or cubic meter of concrete
Air content. can best be accomplished using the following sequence:
Slump. 9.3.1 Step 1, Choice oSlump.'If a slump is not
Maximum size of aggregate. specified, a value appropriate for the work can be
Strength. selected from table 3. The slump ranges shown apply
Other requirements relating to such factors as when vibration is used to consolidate concrete containing
304
USBR 4211
z For information on mix design parameters for concrete containing chemical admix-
tures, see reference [29].
1 The maximum slumps are for concrete after placement and before consolidation, and for
mixes having air contents given in table 1. For certain applications, the use of a HRWRA
(high-range water reducing admixture) is glowed. If mix is properly designed to prevent
segregation, a HRWRA can be used to produce flowing concrete with a maximum slump
of 9 inches (229 mm); however, each use or application must be allowed in the specifications
or approved by contracting officer.
2 The slump of tunnel inverts placed monolithically with sidewalls and arch may be increased
to a maximum of 4 inches (102 mm).
3 On machine-placed canal lining less than 3 inches (76 mm) thick, the slump may be
increased to a maximum of 4 inches ( 102 mm).
entrained air. Mixes of the stiffest consistency that can obtained with smaller, reduced maximum sizes of clean
be placed efficiently should be used. aggregate.Concrete strength is usually limited by the
9.3.2 Step 2, Choice of Maximum Size of Ag- bond developed between aggregateand paste. Smaller
gregate.-Large maximum sizes of well graded aggre- size aggregatehas more surface area and can be expected
gates have less voids than smaller sizes; therefore, to produce a higher strength at a given water-cement plus
concretes with the larger sized aggregates require less pozzolan ratio.
mortar per unit volume of concrete. Generally, the maxi- 9.3.3 Step 3, Estimate ofMixing Water and Air
mum size of aggregate should be the largest that is eco- Content.-The quantity of water per unit volume of con-
nomically available and consistent with dimensionsof the crete required to produce a given slump is dependent on
structure. The maximum size aggregate should never the maximum size, particle shape, and grading of the
exceed one-fifth the minimum dimensionbetween sides aggregates; on the amount and class of pozzolan; amount
of forms; one-third the depth of slabs; or two-thirds the and type of chemical admixtures; and on the amount of
minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing entrained air. The water quantity is not appreciably
bars, bundles of bars, or pretensioning strands. These affected by the quantity of cement in the amounts nor-
limitations are sometimes waived if workability and mally used. Table 1 provides estimates of required mix-
methods of consolidation are such that the concrete can ing water for air-entrained concretes made with various
be placed without honeycombs or voids. When high maximum sizes of aggregate. Depending on aggregate
strength concrete is desired, best results are usually texture and shape, mixing water requirements may be
305
USBR 4211
somewhat above or below these tabulated values; how- replacement of cement, about 15 to 25 percent by mass,
ever, these values are sufficiently accurate for initial esti- the water-cement ratios shown in table 2 should be
mate. Such differences in water quantity are not reduced by about 0.05 to account for the slower
necessarily reflected in strength because other compen- strength-gaining properties of many pozzolans and, con-
sating factors may be involved. For example, a rounded sequently, the reduced 28-day strength normally
and an angular coarse aggregate, both well graded and expected for concrete containing pozzolan.
of good quality, can be expected to produce concrete of 9.3.4.2 For severe conditions of exposure, the
about the same compressive strength for the same cemen- water-cement plus pozzolan ratio should be kept low to
titious materials factor regardlessof differences in water- provide sufficient durability even when the strength
cement plus pozzolan ratio resulting from different requirements could be met by a higher ratio. Table 5
mixing water requirements. Particle shape per se is not gives limiting values.
an indicator that an aggregate will be either above or 9.3.5 Step 5, Calculation of CementitiousMate-
below average in its strength-producing capacity. rimsContent.-Theamount of cementitious materials per
9.3.3.1 Table 1 shows the recommended air unit volume of concrete is fixed by the determinations
contents for each aggregate size. The use of these recom- made in sections 9.3.3 and 9.3.4. The required cementi-
mended amounts of air entrainment in concrete with a tious materials are equal to the estimated mixing water
specified strength above 5,000 lbf/in 2 (34.5 MPa) may content determined in section 9.3.3 divided by the
not be possible because each additional percent of air water-cement plus pozzolan ratio determinedin section
lowers the maximum strength obtainable with a given 9.3.4. However, if the specifications include a separate
combination of materials by about 5 percent. Therefore, minimum limit on the cementitious materials content in
exposure to water, deicing salts, and freezing tempera- addition to the requirements for strength and durability,
tures should be carefully evaluated. If the concrete is not the mixture must be based on whichever criterion
expected to be continually wet and will not be exposed requires the greater amount of cementitious materials.
to deicing salts, lower air content values may be appropri- 9.3.6 Step 6, Estimate of Aagregate Con-
ate even though the concrete is exposed to freezing and tent.-Estimatesfor the fine aggregate content by the
thawing temperatures. However, for an exposure con- sand percentage method or for the coarse aggregate
dition where the concrete may be saturated prior to content by the dry-rodded or dry-jigged density method
cycles of freezing and thawing, the use of air entrainment are presented in this section. Concrete of comparable
should not be sacrificed for strength. workability can be expected with aggregates of compara-
9.3.3.2 When trial batches are used to establish ble size and grading provided the volume of mortar
strength relationships or verify the strength-producing remains constant. The solid volume of cement, pozzolan,
capability of a mixture, the least favorable strength pro- water, air, and sand may be interchanged to maintain a
ducing combination of mixing water and air content constant mortar content and constant coarse aggregate
should be used. Air content should be the maximum per- content. The percentage of sand in a concrete mix has
mitted or likely to occur for the job conditions, and the been used extensively as a means of identifying the pro-
slump should be the highest permissible by the specifica- portions of sand and coarse aggregate for Bureau mixes.
tions after considering slump loss from batch plant to Recommended percentages of sand for each maximum
placement. This will avoid developing an over-optimistic size of coarse aggregate are listed in table 1, along with
estimate of strength on the assumption that average suggested sand adjustments to maintain a constant mortar
rather than extreme conditions will prevail in the field. content, to allow for effects of varying sand fineness
9.3.4 Step 4, Selection of Water-Cement Plus modulus, and to allow for improved workability
Pozzolan Ratio.-Therequired water-cement plus pozzo- obtained from fly ash. In section 9.3.6.1, it is demon-
lan ratio is determined by strength requirements in addi- strated that aggregates can be proportioned by comput-
tion to other factors such as durability and finishing ing the total solid volume of sand and coarse aggregate
properties. Because different aggregates and cementi- in the concrete mix and multiplying this total volume by
tious materials generally produce different strengths at the recommended percentage of sand or, as described in
the same ratio, it is desirable to have or developthe rela- 9.3.6.2, by estimating quantity of coarse aggregate and
tionship between the strength and this ratio for the paste initially, and then determining amount of sand.
materials actually to be used. In the absence of such data, Either method is satisfactory, and will result in about the
approximate values for concrete containing Type II same proportions for most conditions. However, basing
portland cement can be taken from table 2. With satisfac- amount of coarse aggregate on a fixed percentage of the
tory materials, the tabulated ratios should produce the dry-rodded or dry-jigged density may be easier because
strengths shown based on 28-day tests of 6- by 12-inch it automatically makes allowances for differences in most
( 152- by 305-mm) specimens that have been fabricated, materials. For example, angular aggregates have a higher
cured, and tested under prescribed laboratory condi- void content, and therefore require more mortar than
tions. Keep in mind that the average strength selected rounded aggregates. The higher void content results in
must exceed the specified strength by a sufficient margin a lower dry-rodded or dry-jigged density and therefore
to keep the number of low tests within the specified lim- decreases the amount of coarse aggregate obtained from
its, see table 4. the fixed percentage, which automatically produces a
9.3.4.1 When pozzolan is used as a partial greater amount of mortar.
306
USBR 4211
Table 4a. - Average strength that must be maintained to meet design requirements (inch-pound units).
NOTE: For an explanation on how this table was developed, see appendix X 1 of USi3R 4094.
3O7
USBR 4211
Table 4b. - Average strength that must be maintained to meet design requirements (SI-metric units).
308
USBR 4211
Table 5. - Maximum water-cement plus pozzolan ratios for exposure condition (durability) shown.
W/(C+P) by mass
Severe
climate, wide
range of Mild
Class Type or location of concrete or structure, temperature, climate,
and degree of exposure long periods rainy or
of freezing, arid, rare
or frequent snow or
H Concrete for interior of dams The W/(C+P) ratio for this con-
crete will be governed by strength,
thermal properties, and volume
change requirements established
for each structure.
309
USBR 4211
determine optimum proportion of each by density com- (27.6 MPa). Average Bureau control, which is con-
parisons of various proportions of the combined nominal sidered as having a coefficient of variation no more than
size fractions. Then, select percentage of dry-rodded or 15 percent, requires an average 28-day strength of
dry-jigged density of coarse aggregateper unit volume 4,980 lbf/in 2 (34.3 MPa), see table 4. When designing
of concrete from table 1. Calculate mass of coarse aggre- a mix with new materials or for a new batch plant or
gate per cubic yard or per cubic meter of concrete by contractor, a coefficient of variation of 20 percent should
multiplying this percentage by the optimum dry-rodded be assumedsimilar to the recommendations in ACI 214.
or dry-jigged density of the coarse aggregate.The vol- 9.3.7.2 Example2.-This example, which uses
ume of coarse aggregateis obtained by dividing this mass the dry-rodded or dry-jigged density method, is shown
by the bulk density. To obtain the volume of sand, add in table 7 using SI metric units. This example is a 75-mm
volume of coarse aggregateto volume of paste and sub- (3-inch) nominal MSA concrete mix for a pumping plant
tract from unity. The mass of the sand is obtained by foundation having a minimum thickness of 610 mm
multiplying volume of sand by bulk density of sand. (24 inches) and a minimum rebar spacing of 102 mm
9.3.7 Computations of Proportions and Batch (4 inches). The concrete will be exposed to mild climatic
Masses for Trial Mixes.-Computations for determining conditions. The design is based on 80 percent of the
the proportions for concrete mixes are initially based on 152-by 305-mm (6- by 12-inch) standard test cylinders
the SSD (saturated-surface-dry) aggregates, and later having 28-day compressive strengths greater than
adjusted for actual moisture conditions. The following 30.0 MPa (4,350 lbf/in2). Assuming average Bureau
materials and values shall be used for the computations: control (coefficient of variation of 15 percent), requires
an average28-day strength of 34.4 MPa (4,990 lbf/in2),
Water with a specific gravity of 1.00 and density see table 4. The contractor is required by the specifica-
of 1,685 lbm/yd3 ( 1000 kg/m3). tions to use a water reducing admixture. In addition, the
Type II portland cement with a specific gravity of contractor has elected to use a suitable fly ash to replace,
3.15. by mass, 20 percent of the cement.
Fly ash with a specific gravity of 2.50. 9.3.8 Batch Masses.-The trial-mix computations
Sand with a specific gravity of 2.63, fineness modu- in sections 9.3.7.1 and 9.3.7.2 provided batch quantities
lus of 2.75, and moisture content of 5.0 percent wet for one cubic yard and one cubic meter of concrete. It
of SSD. is seldom possible to mix concrete in exactly one unit
Coarse aggregatewith a specific gravity of 2.68. batches; therefore, these quantities must be converted to
The No. 4 to 3/4-inch (4.75- to 19.0-mm) size frac- the size batch to be used. Figure 1 illustrates a convenient
tion has a moisture content of 1.0 percent wet of SSD, form for recording computations when converting
and the 3/4- to 1-1/2-inch (19.0- to 37.5-mm) size design masses to batch masses. This conversion can be
fraction has a moisture content of 0.5 percent wet of accomplishedby multiplying unit quantity of each ingre-
SSD. The optimum combination of No. 4 to 1-1/2- dient by volume of batch. For example, assume that a
inch (4.75- to 37.5-mm) aggregateis 45 percent 3/4- 0.10-cubic yard mixer is available for the laboratory trial
inch nominal MSA (maximum size aggregate)and 55 mixes, and use the trial mix design of example 1, section
percent 1-1/2-inch nominal MSA. 9.3.71. The batch proportions would be:
The dry-rodded or dry-jigged density of the
Water: (0.10) (245) = 24.5 Ibm
combined No. 4 to 3-inch (4.75 o to 75-mm) aggregate
is 2,990 lbm/yd 3 (1774 kg/m3). Cement: (0.10) (557) = 55.7 Ibm
Sand: (0.10) (1,055) = 105.5 Ibm
A neutralized, vinsol resin, air-entraining admix-
No. 4 to 3/4-inch
ture. The manufacturer recommends 2 fluid ounces
per 100 pounds ( 130 mL/100 kg) of the cementitious aggregate: (0.10) (939) = 93.9 Ibm
3/4- to 1-1/2-inch
materials.
aggregate: (0.10) (1,147) = 114.7 lbm
NOTE 2.-The conversion factor for fluid ounces to millili- Aggregates were assumed to be in SSD condition for
ters is 29.57. initial computations. Under field conditions, the aggre-
gates would generally be moist (due to sprinkling stock
9.3.7.1 Example 1.-This example, which uses piles and the use of spray bars on rescreens) and quanti-
the percentage of sand method, is shown in table 6 using ties to be batched must be adjusted accordingly. Assume
inch-pound units. This example is a 1-1/2-inch nominal tests show sand contains 5.0 percent free moisture, No. 4
MSA concrete mix for a reinforced retaining wall having to 3/4-inch aggregatecontains 1.0 percent free mois-
a minimum thickness of 12 inches (305 mm) and a mini- ture, and 3/4- to 1-1/2-inch aggregatecontains 0.5
mum rebar spacing of 2.5 inches (64 ram). The concrete percent free moisture. Since the quantity of SSD sand
will be exposed to severe climatic conditions (many required is 105.5 Ibm, the amount of moist sand that
cycles of freezing and thawing) but will not often be must be determined is 110.8 Ibm (105.5)(1.05). Simi-
saturated, which puts it into class B, see table 5. The larly, the mass of moist coarse aggregatethat must be
structural design is based on 90 percent of the standard determined is 94.8 Ibm (93.9)(1.01) and 115.3 Ibm
6- by 12-inch (152- by 305-mm) test cylinders having (114.7)( 1.005), respectively. Coarse aggregateis some-
28-day compressive strengths greater than 4,000 lbf/in 2 times drier than SSD. Assuming the 3/4- to 1-1/2-inch
310
USBR 4211
Water:
Estimated value from table 1 for a 245
3- to 4-inch slump at mixer = 245 245 0.145
1,685
Cement:
W/C for durability, class B, from table 5=0.50
Air:
From table 1 = 5% = 0.050 0.050
Sand:
From table 1 = 34% of volume of aggregate
= [1.000-(0.145+0.105+0.050)](0.34)
= (0.700)(0.34) = 0.238 1,055 (0.238)(2.63)(1,685) 0.238
Coarse Aggregate:
Volume of all ingredients except coarse aggre-
gate = 0.145 + 0.105 + 0.050 + 0.238
= 0.538
aggregatecontains -0.5 percent free moisture (aggre- NOTE 3.-Theoretically, the aggregatemasses should be
gate will absorb 0.5 percent moisture to reach SSD reduced to a dry basis by dividing batching mass by 1 plus the
condition), the amount of dry aggregatethat must be percentage of moisture (as a decimal), determining quantity of
determined is 114.1 Ibm (114.7)(0.995). Free water in water required to satisfy absorption, and then bringing material
the aggregatemust be considered as part of the mixing back to a SSD basis (mix design criteria). The method devel-
water and theoretically removed from the quantity of oped in this procedure for use in designing mixes based on SSD
water to be batched. Conversely, in the case of dry aggre- criteria eliminates several steps in determining the amount of
added water; the magnitude of the error is so small that it will
gate, water must be added to allow for absorption. In this
not affect the adequacy of the mix design. When designinglow
example, the free water (mixing water) in the sand is
density concrete with low density aggregate and a high per-
5.3 Ibm, 110.8-105.5; the No. 4 to 3/4-inch aggregate centage of absorption, this error could be more significant.
contains 0.9 Ibm, 94.8-93.9; and the 3/4- to 1-1/2-inch
aggregatecontains 0.6 Ibm, 1153-114.7. If the 3/4- to
1-1/2-inch aggregatewere dry as mentioned previously, 9.3.9 Adjustments to TrialMix.-When working with
0.6 Ibm ( 114.7-114.1 ) of water would have to be added materials that the personnel involved have little or no
to the batch water to allow for absorption. experience with, several trial mixes will usually be necessary
311
USBR 4211
Table 7. - Example 2, computation of trial mix using dry-rodded or dry-jigged density method.
Water:
Estimated value from table 1 = 120-13= I07
(-5% when WRA is used, and -3% for 107
every 10% of fly ash used) 107 0.107
1000
Cementitious Materials:
W/(C+P) for durability, class C, from table
5=0.58
Cementitious materials
water 107
-- 243
W/(C+P) 0.44
49
Pozzolan =20% =(243)(0.20)=49 49 0.020
(2.50)(1000)
Air:
From table 1 = 4.0% = 0.040 0.040
Coarse Aggregate:
From table 1 =81+4=85 (+2% for every
10% of portland cement replaced by fly ash)
Then, 85% of dry-rodded or dry-jigged density
of coarse aggregateper unit mass of concrete 1482
=(0.85)( 1744)= 1482 1482 0.553
(2.68)(1000)
Sand:
Volume of all ingredients except sand
=0.107 +0.062+0.020+0.040+0.553 =0.782
Sand = 1.000-0.782=0.218 573 (0.218)(2.63)(1000) 0.218
to establish the correct quantities, especially the water 9.3.9.1 Adjustmentof Water.-After perform-
requirement and air-entraining admixture dosage. After ing tests on the fresh concrete and calculating actual com-
the actual water requirement is established for the job position of batch based on the yield, the mix should now
materials, the mix must be redesigned by repeating the be redesigned. Assume first trial batch had only a 2-inch
computations previously discussed beginning with the slump and 4.0 percent air. Table 1 indicates that to
amount of cement. Figure 1 illustrates a convenient form increase the slump by the desired 1.5 inches, an increase
for recording trial mix data. The data presented on figure in water content of 4.5 percent is necessary, 1.5 times
la conform to the trial batches of example 1 (sec. 9.3.7.1) 3 percent. Similarly, when increasing air content 1.0 per-
with appropriate adjustmentsmade to the mix after testing cent, an adjustment in water content must be made.
the slump, entrained air content, and yield. Because entrained air improves workability and conse-
312
USBR 4211
quently increases slump, this adjustment will be a requirements for strength and durability. In some cases,
decrease in water content of 3.0 percent, 1.0 times 3 per- two mixtures may be required--an interior mass con-
cent. These two adjustments occur simultaneously and crete, and an exterior concrete for resistance to the vari-
result in a net increase of 1.5 percent to the actual quan- ous conditions of exposure. Accordingly, the concrete
tity of batch water used, (1.015)(248)=252 Ibm. technologists and designers should consider the effects
9.3.9.2 Adjustment of Air-Entraining Ad- of temperature on the properties of concrete during the
mixture.-Thepercentage of entrained air in the mix can design stage._ For example, a 6-inch (152-mm) wall will
be measured directly with an air meter or obtained by dissipate generated heat quite readily, but as thickness
computing the difference between the calculated (theo- and size of placement increase, a point is reached where
retical) volume of air and the measured volume. It is the rate of heat generated far exceeds the rate of heat
advantageous to record both air contents because any dissipated. This phenomenon produces a temperature
marked difference indicates an error and may lead to rise within the concrete and may cause sufficient temper-
discovery of mistakes in mix design, trial mix computa- ature differential between the interior and exterior of the
tions, or test methods. A difference in the indicated air mass or between the peak and ultimate stable tempera-
contents of as much as 0.3 percent is considered normal. tures to induce tensile stresses. The temperature
The amount of air-entraining admixture required to pro- differential between the interior and exterior of the con-
duce the desired 5.0 percent can be easily calculated by crete, generated by decreases in ambient air temperature
assuming a straight-line adjustment of the dosage. Since conditions, may cause cracking at exposed surfaces. Also,
333 mL produced 4.0 percent air and 5.0 percent is as concrete reaches its peak temperature and subsequent
desired, then (5.0/4.0)(333) or 416 mL should be used cooling takes place, tensile stresses are induced by the
in trial batch number 2. cooling if the change in volume is restrained by the foun-
9.3.9.3 Adjustment of Aggregate Pro- dation or connections to other parts of the structure. The
portions.-It is usually necessary to adjust the aggregate tensile stress developed by these conditions can be
proportions. This adjustment will be a judgmentbased expressed by the equation:
on intended use of concrete mix and method of place-
ment. If concrete mix appears too harsh or does not con- S= REeT (1)
solidate or finish well, the sand and fines should be
increased. If mix appears too fat or is sticky, the mortar where:
should be decreased.
9.3.9.4 Adjustment of Water-Cementitious S= tensile stress,
Materials Ratio.-Onceconcrete strengths are known by .R = restraint factor,
testing cylinders cast from the mix, it will be necessary E= modulus of elasticity,
to adjust the water-cement plus pozzolan ratio to achieve e = thermal coefficient of expansion, and
the proper strength level consistent with the coefficient T = temperature difference between interior and
of variation. The average strengths obtained from the exterior of concrete, or temperature differ-
test cylinders may need to be increased by redesigning ence between concrete at maximum tem-
the mix with a lower ratio. Conversely, if strengths are perature and at ambient air temperature.
above the average strength required (r), the ratio may
need to be higher to improve economy of mix. The field Detailed discussions on mass concrete can be found
mix need not be adjusted for minor fluctuations in the in references [22,23,24,25,28].
ratio. A difference of 5:0.02 is considered normal, and 10.1.I The thermal cracking of bridge piers,
usually results from maintaining a constant slump. How- foundations, floor slabs, beams, columns, and other
ever, this variation should be considered when selecting massive structures (powerplants and dams) may reduce
the ratio so that, with the usual variation, the specified the service life of a structure by promoting early deterio-
maximum is not exceeded. ration or excessive maintenance. Furthermore, it should
be recognized that the selection of proper mixture pro-
MASS CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING portions is only one means of controlling temperature
rise, and that other aspects of the concrete work should
10. Scope be studied and incorporated into the design and con-
struction requirements. For additional information on
10.1 Introduction.-Mass concrete is defined as "any heat problems and solutions, consult references [23, 28].
volume of concrete with dimensions large enough to 10.2 Mass Concrete Properties.-During the design
require that measures be taken to allow for generation stage of the proposed project, desired specified com-
of heat of hydration from the cement and pozzolan and pressive strengths with adequate safety factors for various
attendant volume change to minimize cracking" [26]. portions of the structure are normally first established.
The purpose of the mass concrete proportioning proce- The designer will then expand on the other desired
dure is to combine the available cementitious materials, properties required of the concrete. The proportioning
water, fine and coarse aggregates, and admixtures such of ingredients to ensure that a mass concrete mixture will
that the resulting mixture will not exceed some estab- have the desired properties requires an evaluation of the
lished allowable temperature rise and shall also meet materials to be used. If adequate data are not available
3I 3
USBR 4211
from recent construction projects using the proposed requiring calcination to induce satisfactory properties
materials, representative samples of all materials pro- such as some clays and shales. Fly ash, the finely divided
posed for use must be tested to determine their proper- residue that results from the combustion of ground or
ties and conformance with applicable specifications. powdered coal and transported from combustion cham-
ber by exhaust gases, is also a pozzolan. Fly ashes meeting
the ASTM definition for a class C pozzolan in addition
11. Properties of Materials Related to Heat to having pozzolanic properties also have some cementi-
Generation tious properties. The use of pozzolans in concrete
provides a partial replacement of the cement with a mate-
11.1 Cementitious Materials.-The cementitious rial that generates considerably less heat at early ages.
materials for mass concrete work may consist of portland The early-age heat contribution of a class N or F pozzolan
cement or blended hydraulic cements as specified in may conservatively be estimated to range between 15
ASTM C 150 and C 595, respectively, or a combination and 50 percent of that of an equivalent mass of cement.
of portland cement and pozzolan. Pozzolans are specified
in ASTM C 618.
NOTE 4.-Pozzolanic properties are defined as "the ability
11.1.1 Portland Cement .-The hydration of port- to combine with the free lime released in the hydration of
land cement is exothermic; that is, heat is generated dur- cement and to then act as a cementing agent."
ing the reaction of cement and water. The quantity of
heat produced is a function of the chemical composition 11.1.3.1 The effects of a pozzolan on the
of the cement and the initial temperature, as shown on properties of freshly mixed concrete vary with the type
figure 2. Type II cement is most commonly used in mass and fineness; chemical, mineralogical, and physical cha-
concrete because it is a moderate heat cement and gener- racteristics of the pozzolan; fineness and composition of
ally has favorable properties for most types of con- the cement; ratio of cement to pozzolan; and mass of the
struction. When used with a pozzolanic material, which cement plus pozzolan used per unit volume of concrete.
will be discussedlater, the heat generated by the For example, it has been reported that some pozzolans
combination of type II cement and pozzolan is compara- may reduce water requirements by as much as 7 percent
ble to that of type IV cement. In addition, type II cement and may reduce the amount of air-entraining admixture
is more readily available than type IV. Optional heat of required by as much as 20 percent. Because certain other
hydration requirements may be specified for type II pozzolans may require as much as 15 percent additional
cement by limiting the chemical compounds or actual water and over 60 percent more air-entraining admix-
heat of hydration at 7 days. A low initial concrete placing ture, it is important to evaluate the pozzolan intended for
temperature, commonly used in mass concrete work, will use prior to the start of the proportioning.
generally decrease the rate of cement hydration and 11.1.3.2 The proportion of cement to pozzolan
initial heat generated. Correspondingly, strength devel- depends upon the strength desired at a given age, heat
opment in the first few days may also be reduced. The considerations; chemical and physical characteristics of
fineness of the cement also affects the rate of heat of both cement and pozzolan, and the cost of the respective
hydration; however, it has little effect on the final heat materials.
generated. Fine-ground cements will produce heat more 11.1.4 Aggregates.-The largest aggregates rec-
rapidly duringthe early ages than coarse-ground cement, ommended for use under various placing conditions
all other cement properties being equal. should be used. A nominal maximum size aggregate up
11.1.2 Blended Hydraulic Cements.-Type 1P to 6 inches ( 150 mm) should be considered if large size
blended hydraulic cements conforming to requirements aggregate is available, is economical, and placing condi-
ofASTM C 595 may be used effectively in mass concrete. tions permit. Because larger aggregate provides less sur-
These cements are composed of a blend of portland face area to be coated by the cement paste, a reduction
cement and pozzolan. The suffix (MH) or (LH) may be in the quantity of cement and water can be realized for
used with the designated type of blended cement to spec- the same water-cement plus pozzolan ratio.
ify moderate heat or low heat requirements where appli- 11.1.4.1 Coarse Aggregate Combination.-
cable. After determining the nominal maximum size, the indi-
11.1.3 Pozzolans.-Major economic and tempera- vidual aggregate size groups available should be com-
ture rise benefits have been derived from the use of bined to produce a gradation approaching maximum
pozzolans. Pozzolan is defined as "a siliceous or siliceous density and minimum voids. This results in the maximum
and aluminous material which in itself possesses little or amount of mortar available for placeability, workability,
no cementitious value, but will, in finely divided form and finishability. The dry-rodded or dry-jigged density
and in the presence of moisture, chemically react with method is the recommended procedure. If this proce-
calcium hydroxide at ordinary temperatures to form dure is not followed, table 8 may be helpful for combin-
compounds that possess cementitious properties" ing the individual aggregate size fractions to approximate
[26], (note 4). Natural pozzolans include some diato- the ideal curve. This table is based on the work by Fuller
maceous earths, opaline cherts and shales, tufts, and vol- and Thompson [27] on the packing characteristics of
canic ashes or pumicites, any of which may or may not particulate materials. The ideal combined gradings for
be processed by calcination, and other various materials 3- and 6-inch (75- and 150-mm) crushed and rounded
314
USBR 4211
Table 8. - Idealized combined coarse aggregate grading for 3- and 6-inch (75- and 150-mm)
nominal maximum size aggregate.
aggregatesare shown in table 8. An acceptablegrading increase due to the reduction in mixing water requirements
for an aggregatethat is partially crushed or partially with air entrainment. Air contents should be in accordance
rounded may be interpolated from this table. Using the with those recommended in table 1.
individual gradation of each size group, 3 to 6 inches (75 11.1.5.2 Water-Reducing Admixture.-Water-
to 150 mm), 1-1/2 to 3 inches (37.5 to 75 mm), 3/4 to reducing admixtures meeting the requirements of ASTM
1-1/2 inches (19.0 to 37.5 mm), and No. 4 to 3/4 inch C 494 have been found effective in mass concrete mixtures.
(4.75 to 19.0 mm), a trial and error method of selecting The water reduction permits a corresponding reduction
the percentage of each size group will be necessary to in the cementitious materials content while maintaining
produce a combined grading of the total coarse aggre- a constant water-cement plus pozzolan ratio. The amount
gate approximating the idealized gradation. Selection of of water reduction will vary with different concrete
this percentage can usually be done such that the materials and different types of admixtures; however, 5
combined grading is generally within 2 or 3 percent of to 8 percent is normal. In addition, certain types of water-
the ideal grading. reducing admixtures tend to improve the mobility of
11.1.4.2 Coarse Aggregate Content.-The pro- concrete and its response to vibration, particularly in large
portion of fine aggregate for mass concrete depends on aggregatemixtures.
the final combined grading of coarse aggregate, particle
shape, fineness modulus of fine aggregate, and quantity 12. Strength
of cementitious material. The coarse aggregate amount
can be found using the sand percentage method or the 12.1 The procedure for proportioning mass concrete
dry-rodded or dry-jigged density of coarse aggregate is used primarily for controlling the generation of heat
method described in section 9.3.6. and temperature rise and still meet the requirements for
11.1.5 Admixtures.-When proportioning mass strength and durability. The strength properties are pri-
concrete, the use of admixtures should always be marily governed by the water-cementitious materials
considered. The two most commonly used admixtures in ratio. This is the ratio, by mass, of the amount of water
mass concrete are the air-entraining and water-reducing (exclusive of that absorbed by aggregates)to the amount
admixtures. of cement and pozzolan in the concrete. Unless previous
11.1.5.1 Air Enrrainmenr.-Air entrainment water-cement plus pozzolan ratios and compressive
meeting the requirements of ASTM C 260 in mass concrete strength data are available, the approximate 28-day com-
is necessary if for no other reason than to increase the pressive strength for concrete tested using 6- by 12-inch
workability of lean concrete mixtures. The use of air (152- by 305-mm) cylinders for various water-cement
entrainment in mass concrete, as in other concrete, permits ratios can be estimated from table 2. If compressive
a marked improvement in durability, improvement in strength designs are given for the full mass mixture con-
plasticity and workability, and reduction in segregation and taining aggregatelarger than 1-1/2-inches (37.5 mm),
bleeding. The effect of air entrainment on the strength approximate relationships between the strength of the
of mass concrete is minimized due to the reduction in full mass mixture at ages up to 1 year and wet-screened
the quantity of paste in concrete which contains 3- and 6- by 12-inch cylinders can be obtained using figure 3.
6-inch (75- and 150-mm) nominal maximum size 12.2 Design strengths of mass concrete are often
aggregate.However, such effects should be considered in based on ages other than 28 days to take advantage of
the design of mass concrete having 3/4- or 1-1/2-inch the slower strength-producing and lower heat-producing
(19.0- or 37.5-mm) nominal maximum size aggregate.In properties desirable in mass concrete. Figure 4 shows
the lean mixtures, strengths are not reduced as much when rates of strength development for concrete made with
air entrainment is used and, in some cases, strengths may various types of portland cement. Tests were not per-
315
USBR 4211
formed on concrete containing pozzolan or blended Consideration of the Voids in Mortar and Concrete,"
cement; however, experience has shown that concrete Proceeding ASTM, vol. 21, p. 940, 1921.
containing type II cement and 15 to 25 percent fly ash
replacement develops strength beyond 28 days at a rate [7] Weymouth, C. A. G., "A Study of Fine Aggregate
similar to the curve plotted for concrete containing type in Freshly Mixed Mortars and Concretes," Proceedings,
IV cement. ASTM, vol. 38, part 2, pp. 354-372, 1938.
[8] Dunagan, W. M., "The Application of Some of the
13. Durability
Newer Concepts to the Design of Concrete Mixes,"ACI
13.1 The recommended maximum permissible Journal, Proceeding vol. 36, No. 6, pp. 649-684, June
water-cement plus pozzolan ratio for concrete subject to 1940.
various conditions of exposure are shown in table 5. [9] Goldbeck, A. T., andJ. E. Gray, "A Method Of Pro-
Sometimes, the ratio required to obtain adequate portioning Concrete for Strength, Workability, and
strength or durability governs the proportions rather Durability," Bulletin No. 11, National Crushed Stone
than heat generation. When this situation occurs, alterna- Association, 9th Printing, 1971.
tive measures to control heat are necessary. For example
in gravity dam construction, an exterior-facing mix con- [10] Swayze, M. A., and E. Gruenwald, "Concrete Mix
taining additional cementitious materials may be used to Design-Modification of Fineness Modulus Method,"
provide the required durability. Other measures may ACI Journal, Proceedings, vol. 43, No. 7, pp. 829-844,
include a reduction in the initial concrete temperature March 1947.
at placement, a limitation on size of placements, or heat
dissipative measures such as embedment of cooling pipes [11] Walker, Stanton, and Fred F. Bartel, "Concrete
and circulation of cool water within the pipes. Mix Design-A Modification of the Fineness Modulus
Method," ACIJournal, Proceedings, vol. 43, part 2, pp.
14. Calculations 844-1-17, December 1947.
14.1 Refer to section 9 and figure 1. [12] Henrie, James O., "Properties of Nuclear Shiel-
ding Concrete," ACI Journal, Proceedings, vol. 56,
15. Report No. 1, pp. 37-46, July 1959.
[ 13] Mather, Katharine, "High Strength, HighDensity
15.1 Figure 1, along with a cover letter, shall serve
as a reporting form for this procedure. Concrete," ACI Journal, Proceedings, vol. 62, No. 8,
pp. 951-960, August 1965.
16. Precision and Bias
[14] Clendenning, T. G., B. Kellam, and C. MacInnis,
16.1 The precision and bias statements for this pro- "Hydrogen Evolution from Ferrophosphorous Aggre-
cedure have not been established at this time. gate in Portland Cement Concrete," ACI Journal,
Proceedings, vol. 65, No. 12, pp. 1021-1028, Decem-
17. References ber 1968.
[ 1] "Admixtures for Concrete," ACI Journal, Proceed- [15] Popovics, Sandor, "Estimating Proportions for
Structural Concrete Mixtures," ACI Journal, Pro-
ings, vol. 60, No. 11, pp. 1525-1534, November 1963.
ceeding vol. 65, No. 2, pp. 143-150, February 1968.
[2] Fuller, William B., and Sanford E. Thompson, "The
[16] "Tentative Specification for Aggregates for
Laws of Proportioning Concrete," Transactions, ASCE,
Radiation-ShieldingConcrete," ASTM C 637, American
vol. 59, pp. 67-143, December 1907.
Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA.
[3] Abrams, Duff A., "Design of Concrete Mixtures,"
Bulletin No. 1, Structural Materials Research Labora- [ 17] Davis, H. S., "Aggregates for Radiation Shielding
tory, Lewis Institute, Chicago, Illinois, 1918. Concrete," MaterialsResearch and Standards, vol. 7,
No. 11, pp. 494-501, November 1967.
[4] Edwards, L. N., "Proportioning the Materials of
Mortars and Concretes by Surface Areas of Aggregates," [18] Concrete for Nuclear Reactors, SP-34, American
Proceeding ASTM, vol. 18, part 2, p. 235, 1918. Concrete Institute,Detroit, MI, 1972.
Young, R. B., "Some Theoretical Studies on Pro- [ 19] Gaynor, Richard D., High-Strength Air-Entrained
ioning Concrete by the Method of Surface Area of Concrete,Joint ResearchLaboratory PublicationNo. 17,
Aggregate," Proceeding ASTM, vol. 19, part 2, p.444, National Ready Mixed Concrete Associationand
919. National Sand and Gravel Association,1968.
[6] Talbot, A. N., "A Proposed Method of Estimating [20] "Guide to Durable Concrete", ACI Committee
the Density and Strength of Concrete and of Proportion- 201 Report, ACI Manual of Concrete Practice, part 1,
ing the Materials by Experimental and Analytical 1984.
316
USBR 4211
[21] Dunstan, Edwin R.,Jr.,"A Spec Odyssey-Sulfate [26] Cement and Concrete Terminolo/, 2nd edition,
Resistant Concrete for the 1980's," ACI Publication SP-19(78), ACI Committee 116, American Concrete
SP-77-3, Verbeck Memorial Symposium on Sulfate Institute,Detroit, MI, 1978.
Resistance, Las Vegas, NV, March 2-7, 1980.
[27] Powers, Treval C., The PropertiesofFresh Con-
[22] Townsend, Charles L., "Control of Temperature crete, John Wiley and Sons, New York, NY, 1968.
Cracking in Mass Concrete," Causes, Mechanism, and
Control of Cracka'ng in Concrete, SP-20, American Con- [28] "Cooling and Insulating Systems for Mass Con-
crete Institute, pp. 119-139, Detroit, MI, 1968. crete," ACI 207.4R-80, Concrete International:
Design and Construction, vol. 2, No. 5, pp. 45-64, May
[23] "Effect of Restraint, Volume Change, and Rein- 1980.
forcement on Cracking of Massive Concrete," ACI
Committee 207, ACI Journal, Proceedings, vol 70, [29] Ore, ElwoodL., Mix Design Parametersfor Con-
No. 7, pp. 445-470,July 1973; and ACIManual oCon- crete ContainingChemicalAdmixture Bureau ofRecla-
crete Practice, part 1. mation Report No. REC-ERC-81-6, Denver, CO,
December 1981.
[24] Townsend,C. L., ControlofCrackinginMass Con-
crete Structures,EngineeringMonographNo. 34, [30] Hutchinson, G. W., et al., Bulletin 16, LewisInsti-
Bureau of Reclamation, Denver, CO, 1965. tute, Chicago IL.
[25] "Control ofCracking in Concrete Structures,"ACI
Committee 224, ACI Journal, Proceedings,vol. 69,
No. 12, pp. 717-753, December 1972.
317
USBR 4211
4
.E
._
.x
E
._
318
USBR 4211
i
i
8
:I
0
i
;I
!
!
E
!
o
or--
z
0.
r-.=E
oO
i11
. o..
Z E
0
I
I
n
U.
I-
C
2
ix
319
USBR 4211
...-k
o-4
v
..o
&
8
E
8
D..
E
I
&
320
USBR 4211
I-_ $
--uJ r'
p-
.l
I
z
o
;,.C,
I-
C
>
32l
USBR 4211
I0O
90 50
80 Ty pe I.
la_
o I
70 J
Q;
Oe)
O.}
L.
60
f
/ f v
.+--
O
t..
50 --/ f f.-
(la
Q.
E E
4O
20 ,.,
a-
3O -I-
IIi/
f 0
..Ca ..0
0
,cI 2O <
I0
I0
0
,/
I 2 3 4 7 28
Time in d0ys
Fineness 28-Day
Cement ASTM C 115 Hea'r of Hydroi.ion
Type m2/g Calories Joules
per gram per gram
I 179 87 364
1T 189 76 318
TIT 203 105 439
1V 191 60 251
Figure 2. - Temperature rise of mass concrete containing 376 lbm/yd3 (223 kg/m 3) of cement.
322
USBR 4211
3.0
Concrete (with pozzolon)
containingo water-reducing
set-controllingadmixture
2.5
.e-
1.5 , 180 - Day moss concrete
o=o
e-
O I
O
E
- Day mass concrete
O
0.5 28- Day moss concrete
w-
28 90 180
w- e-
Lt AGE IN DAYS OF 6-BY 12-INCH CYLINDERS
Or) O0
EE
e
containinga water-reducing
O set-controllingadmixture
I! -I-Year mass concrete
o !
F \',--'180- Ooy moss concrete
nr"
1.0 _
Figure 3. - Ratios of mass concrete compressive strengths in seal-cured cylinders to compressive strengths
of 6- by 12-inch, fog-cured cylinders fabricated from minus l-l/2-inch, MSA, wet-screened concrete.
323
USBR 4211
7,000
NOTE: Bosed on 6- by 12-inch "o'- "rv'
"1"
__ cylindersthot were stondord
o
Z
6,000 cured ot 73.4=F in o
"r_
I.-tU fog room.
One
z < 5,000
t.U:
n,, o I
I.- (,
.t NOTE: eoL:on6- b! 12-inch
I-,- 4,000 lTr_
I,UW
n / cylinders thor were
Type Z cement--., fog cured ot 70 F
co tu 3,000
0q(D
b.I n-" for oges shown.
n- o I
n b_
E ca 2,000
/
/ Cylinders were mode
from comporoble
Or
OZ / concretes contoining
I-I/2-in. MSA ond 564
0 1,000 f pound moss of cement
-'r
per cubic yord.
0 I I I
2 3 4 5 6 7 7 14 28 90 180 I 2 5
AGE IN DAYS _ AGE IN DAYS =!= AGE IN YEARS
Figure 4. - Rates of strength development for concrete made with various types of cement.
324
USBR 4211
APPENDIX
Xl.1 The equations shown in this appendix can be NOTE: Values for specific gravity and density
used to troubleshoot, evaluate, predict, or estimate con- used in the above equations were obtained from
crete strengths. They can also be used to determine section 9.3.7.
which material in the concrete mix has caused a strength 3,130
problem, to compare performance of various selections K =( 0.088 6)2 = 39,850
of materials with costs to determine most economical
0.088 + 0.166 + 0.0
material, and to predict concrete strengths based on
actual materials in mix once their effects on strength are This is approximately the average K-value for this
known. However, because of the numerous variables example. The 28-day value for this K may vary from
involved in a concrete mixture, strengths calculated by 30,000 to 45,000. A conservative value for Kcould be
any method must always be considered subject to revi- assumed to be about 35,000.
sion on the basis of experience with field or trial batches. Xl.4 The K-value can be used to compare aggre-
X1.2 The basic equation for concrete strength is the
gates.If the same cement, water, and air content are used
one proposed by Feret in 1896, and is:
and aggregate is changed, a change in the K-value indi-
cates the change in aggregate. In theory, the actual
(1) cement, water, and air content per cubic yard do not have
ec=x cv+ +av to be the same for the two different aggregate mixes;
therefore, concretes with widely different quantities of
where: cement and air can be used to compare aggregates.
Xl.5 Equation (1) can also be modified to include
c compressive strength in pound force per square the effects of admixtures. Admixtures include pozzolanjc
inch, type materials such as fly ash, silica fume, and blast fur-
cv= volume of cement in cubic yards, nace slag; and chemical admixtures such as water-
wv= volume of water in cubic yards, reducing and/or set-controlling admixtures.
Av volume of air in cubic yards, and Xl.5.1 Secondarycementitious materials
(pozzolanic type materials) can be described by the fol-
K= a constant.
lowing modification of equation (1):
The constant K in equation (1) includes all factors
that affect strength except for the effects of water, I'( l_f)n. Cv )2
(3)
cement, and air, which are already included in the equa- vc = K 1+ -Ac + ve +
tion. Many of the factors that affect or modify Kwill be
discussed in this appendix; however, it is impossible to
account for all of the factors that affect the strength of f-
c. (4)
concrete. c,+r.
X1.3 The value of K can be calculated from strength
data. Equation (1) can also be shown as: where:
325
USBR 4211
(7)
where:
For estimation purposes, an average value for Em Ef = efficiency value of secondary material at percent-
could be used, or calculated from strength data as fol- age used in concrete mix, and all other terms
lows: Assume a concrete mix with a strength of 3,130 are as previously defined.
lbf/in 2, 400 Ibm of cement, 85 Ibm of class F fly ash
(n= 1.0), and 270 Ibm of water. Using the following The use of equation (7) provides the following
modification of equation (5), E#, can be calculated: results: For the first mix with 0.175 decimal percent of
fly ash,
+(+v +v v)2
For the second mix with 0.836 decimal percent fly
+Wv+A ash,
Em = (6)
f E0.836 = Er= Em(1-f)n= 0.31
85 These two values can now be used to calculate Em
f-- = 0.175
400 + 85 and n. The value for Em is a constant, and is the same
in both of the above equations. Setting Em from both
400 equations equal to each other yields:
Cv = = 0.075 yd s
(3.15)(1,685)
E0.175 E0.836
270 = Em --
Wv = 1,685 -- 0.160 yd 3 (l-f) n (l-f) n
326
USBR 4211
Solving for n,
Ka = 3 ( 3,720
--'.088 1
t-1 = 0.12
9,850 0.088+0.157 +0.06JJ
log \0.31] log 3.58
= - 0.80
log 5.03 A conservative value for K_ would be 0.10. The
[1-0.175
water reduction for a chemical admixture for dosages up
to two or three times the normal dosage, 3 to 6 ounces
per 100 Ibm, can be assumed to be a straight line. That
For n = 0.80 then,
is, if water reduction at the normal or recommended
dosage is 5 percent, then a double dosage would produce
Eo.175 1.11
Ell] - 1.29 10 percent water reduction. This can be assumed to be
(1_0.175)0.80 0.857 true for estimation purposes up to two or three times the
normal dosage. When a chemical admixture is used with
Therefore for this example, the actual values are Em fly ash, the total water reduction may be about 75 percent
= 1.29 and n = 0.80 rather than the assumed value of of that calculated for the total of the two admixtures
n = 1.0, which produced an E,, of 1.35. (chemical and fly ash).
X1.5.3 The equation may also be modified to X1.5.4 When both a chemical admixture and fly
include chemical admixtures: ash (n value assumed to be 1.0) are used in the mix,
equation (8) can be modified as follows:
2
(8)
Fc =(I+Ka--)(I+Enf)(K)(cv+ Wv+Av) (10)
where:
X 1.5.5 Equation ( 1 O) is very useful for estimating
Ks = factor for chemical admixture, quantities, such as determining what cement content is
D = dosage of admixture in ounces per 100 Ibm, and required to obtain a required compressive strength.
N = dosage of admixture to calculate.Ka in ounces per Equation (10) can be shown as:
100 Ibm (assumed to be normal dosage).
All other terms as previously defined.
(3.15)(1,685) (1,"- + Av) (A) (11)
The relationship 1 + KD/Nprovides an estimate
for the chemical admixture effect for up to two or three Cw= 1-A
times the normal dosage, possibly even higher. This rela-
tionship assumesa straight-line relationship that will not
hold true for very high dosages, such as five times the
normal dosage. The factor Ka can be calculated from the
strength data. Assume a concrete mix, with no sec-
ondary material such as fly ash, that has a strength of
3720 lbf/in 2, 470 Ibm of cement, and 265 Ibm of water
per cubic yard with 6.0 percent total air. Then, Ka can where:
be calculated by the following modification of equation
(8): Ww = mass of water, and
A = a value as defined by equation (12).
All other terms as previously defined.
Ka =
+W +A
D
-1 (9)
Then,
Fw--
Cf
l-f (13)
1+0.1)[1+(1.35)(0.18)](39,850) = 0.292
A v = (0.06)(1) = 0.06 yd3
327
USBR 4211
315,(1685,(,126o+
685 o (o 292,
For example, the 7-day K-value would be:
= 469 lbm/yd
For many type I and III cements, the early ages will
(469)(0.18) produce higher percentages than shown in the previous
Fw-- 1-0.18 -- 103 lbm/yd 3 relationship, and type V cement may produce lower
percentages at early ages, see figure 4.
X1.6.2 The size, shape, and type of cure of test
X1.6 There are many other factors that affect specimen also affects strength, and the K-value will vary
strength such as age of testing, cylinder size, length-to- with each of these variables. For example, consider fig-
diameter ratio, changes in maximum size aggregate,and ures 3 and X 1.1. On both of theses figures, a comparison
many other less significant effects. to a 6- by 12-inch cylinder is made. Figure 3 compares
X 1.6.1 The age of testing is very significant. The the standard cure 28-day cylinder to mass concrete speci-
K-value of 39,850 in previous examples varies with age. mens. Figure X1.1 compares effect of cylinder diameter
For example, at 1-day age the K-value would be much and effect of cylinder length-to-diameter ratio. How
smaller, and at 90-day age, much larger. An estimate of would the K-value change if length-to-diameter ratio was
the age effect often follows the 20-, 40-, 60-, 80-, and 1.0 rather than 2.0 for the standard cylinder? From fig-
100-percent rule of thumb. That is, the I-day strength ure X1.1, the value shown is about 118 percent; there-
is 20 percent of the 28-day strength, the 3-day strength fore, the K-value would be (1.18) (39,850)=47,025.
is 40 percent, 7-day is 60, 14-day is 80, and 28-day X1.7 Summary.-The equations shown in this
strength is 100 percent. At 7 days, the K-value would appendix provide a tool for concrete technologists to
be about 60 percent of the 28-day value, or (0.60) fully evaluate each concrete strength situation. Each
(39,850)=23,910. This estimate can be approximated material in the mix can be evaluated in addition to testing
for type II cement by the following relationship: age, specimen shape, type of cure, and many other fac-
tors. As mentioned in the introduction, any equation is
Kag e = (K2s)[0.684 log (P+ 1)]
subject to revision based on experience with trial bat-
where: ches; however, the examples show how to adjust the
equations to fit a specific application. The equations can
Kage = K-value for age desired, also be modified to describe field or trial batches for the
K2s = 28-day K-value, and investigator. When an equation conforms to field data,
P = age in days. it is a useful tool for making a multitude of evaluations.
328
USBR 4211
I10
105 \ Height of cylinder=twodiameters__J___lL_. .
Max. size of aggregate=one-fourth diameter,
\
1 "r-
I00
l-
z \ less
w 95
Factor for convertingto strength
c.) 9O
n
w
n. 85
8O
(Strength, in percent, of a 6-by 12-inch cylinder
75
8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
DIAMETER OF CYLINDER IN INCHES
200
" oJ 180
0,, Average from tests by Hutchinson
-1- 0
I- ,- [307 ; age of specimenswas
(.9 28 days.
z _J 160 ,
hi
D: Z
u) -1- 140
la. I-
o
I-
,=, ,20
w-i
a. #00
80
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
1 in =25.4mm
RATIO OF LENGTH OF CYLINDER TO DIAMETER (L/D)
329
:- UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
" BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4215-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4215; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 215-85.
330
USBR 4215
33l
USBR 4215
the quarter points). Vibrations are maximum at ends, about three- 9.3 Determination of Torsional Frequency:
fifthsof maximum at center, and zero at nodal points; therefore, 9.3.1 Place specimen on support in such a manner
movement of pickup along length of specimen will inform that it may vibrate without significant restriction in a free-
operator whether vibrations observed on indicator are from spec- free torsional mode. Position specimen so that driving force
imen vibrating in its fundamentaltransverse mode. induces a torsional effect near one end of specimen (fig.
2). Place pickup unit against a surface of the concrete so
9.2 Determination of LongitudinalFrequency:
that it will be actuated in direction of vibration.
9.2.1 Place specimen on support in such a manner
9.3.2 The test specimen shall be forced to vibrate
that it may vibrate without significant restriction in a free-
at varying frequencies and, while doing this, observe
free longitudinal mode. Position specimen such that driving
indication of amplified output of pickup. Record frequency
force is normal to and in center of one end surface (fig. 1).
of test specimen that results in a maximum indication
Place pickup unit against a surface of the concrete so that
it will be actuated in direction of vibration. having a well-defined peak on indicator, and note which
observation of nodal points indicates fundamentaltorsional
9.2.2 The test specimen shall be forced to vibrate
vibration as the fundamentaltorsional frequency(note 3).
at varying frequencies and, while doing this, observe
indication of amplified output of pickup. Record frequency NOTE 3.-For fundamental torsional mode, there is one node
of test specimen that results in a maximum indication at center of length of specimen. Vibrations are maximum at ends.
having a well-defined peak on indicator, and note which
observation of nodal points indicates fundamental 10. Calculations
longitudinal vibration as the fundamental longitudinal 10.1 Calculate the dynamic Young's modulus of-
frequency(note 2). elasticity fromfundamentaltransverse frequency,mass, and
dimensions of test specimen as follows:
NOTE 2.-For fundamentallongitudinal mode, there is one node
at center of length of specimen. Vibrations are maximum at ends. ET - CMn 2 (i)
Driving Circuit
Oscillator Amplifier
XX
To driving
unit
X X YY XX
1
"
I
Oscilloscope
-Y X"
A YY B C I
YY
I
Meter
,
]
I --,, ,er ] tl
Pickup Circuit
A- Driver and pickup positions for transverse resononce
B- Driver ond pickup positions for torsionol resononce
C - Driver ond pickup positions for longitudinal resonance
Figure 2. - Schematic diagram of a typical apparatus showing driver and pickup posiuons for three types of vibration.
332
USBR 4215
333
USBR 4215
10.4 Calculate Poisson's ratio, the ratio of lateral to Table 2.-Test results for a single operator in a single laboratory.
longitudinal strain for an isotropic substance, #, as follows:
Acceptable
E Coefficient range of
= - 1 (4) of variation, two results,
percent percent of
average
where: Within-batch single specimen 1.0 2.8
Within-batch, average of three
/ = Poisson's ratio, specimens2 0.6 1.7
E = Young's modulus of elasticity in pound force Between-batch, average of
three specimens per batch 1.0 2.8
per square inch (gigapascals), and
G = as previously defined in equation (3). These values represent, respectively, the 1S and D2S percentage
limits as described in ASTM C 670.
10.4.1 When values of E and G in equation (4) are 2 Calculated as described in ASTM C 670.
dynamic values, Poisson's ratio should be designated as
12.2.1 The different specimen sizes, with the first
the dynamic Poisson's ratio (note 4).
dimension being the direction of vibration, represented
10.4.2 A typical calculation form is shown on figure
by the data include the following:
5, utilizing data from figure 4. 3 by 4 by 16 inches (76 by 102 by 406 mm)
4 by 3 by 16 inches (102 by 76 by 406 mm)
NOTE 4.-Values of Poisson's ratio for concrete normally vary 3-1/2 by 4-1/2 by 16 inches (89 by 114 by 406 mm)
between about 0.10 for dry specimens and 0.25 for saturated
3 by 3 by 11-1/4 inches (76 by 76 by 286 mm)
specimens.
4 by 3-1/2 by 16 inches (102 by 89 by 406 mm)
3 by 3 by 16-1/4 inches (76 by 76 by 413 mm)
11. Report
12.3 The multilaboratory coefficient of variation for
averages of three specimens from a single batch of concrete
11.1 A typical reporting form is shown on figure 6.
has been found to be 3.9 percent for fundamental transverse
frequencies over the range from 1400 to 3300 Hz (note 5).
12. Precision and Bias
Therefore, two averages of three specimens from the same
batch tested in different laboratories should not differ by
12.1 The following precision statements are for
more than 11.0 percent of their common average (note 6).
fundamental transverse frequency only, determined on
concrete prisms as originally cast. The statements do not
necessarily apply to concrete prisms after they have been NOTE 6.-These numbers represent, respectively, the 1S and
subjected to freezing-and-thawing tests. Data appropriate D2S limits as described in ASTM C 670, where 1S is the estimate
for determining the precision of fundamental torsional and of the standard deviation characteristic of the total statistical
population and D2S is the difference between two individual
longitudinal frequencies are not currently available.
test results that would be equaled or exceeded in the long run
12.2 Single-Operator Precision.-Criteriafor judging
in only 1 case in 20 in the normal and correct operation of
the acceptability of measurements on fundamental the method.
transverse frequency obtained by a single operator in a
single laboratory on concrete specimens made from the 12.4 The bias for this procedure has not been
same materials and subjected to the same conditions are established.
given in table 2. These limits apply over the range of
fundamentaltransverse frequencyfrom 1400 to 3300 Hz. 13. Reference
NOTE 5.-The coefficients of variation for fundamental [1] Pickett, Gerald, "Equations for Computing Elastic
transverse frequency have been found to be relatively constant Constants from Flexural and Torsional Resonant Frequen-
over the range of frequencies given for a range of specimen cies of Vibration of Prisms and Cylinders," Proceedings,
sizes and age or condition of the concrete, within limits. ASTEA, ASTM, vol. 45, p. 846, 1945.
334
USBR 4215
Specimen Configuration:
i--I Circular Cylinder I-I Square Cross Section Prism RectangularCross Section Prism
Specimen Moisture Condition:
I-] Air Dried [] Oven Dried [] Saturated (100% Humidity Room) [] Saturated (50% Humidity Room) I-1 Other
L d a b T C
L3T
Specimen Length, Diameter, Prism Prism Correction (o. 0o24 )
ba 3 ,
No. inches inches Depth, Width, Factor
(m) inches inches (a/3.494 )
.6m-)-
Avg. 0.2q70
Specimen No. 1 Specimen No. 2 Average ET
Date Age, M /9 M /9
M /9 Modulus
days Mass, Frequency, Mass, Frequency, Mass, Frequency, CMn 2 x 106,
Ibm hertz Ibm hertz Ibm -hertz lbf/in2
-0g-y"
1o-/3-$ 3 40.$# 3-3q ,CLog 3"5o 4o. 9g 5"44 3.do
10-17
7 4Loo Sg# 4LIq goo 4L/o Sq4 4.31
335
USBR 4215
Specimen Configuration:
[] Circular Cylinder [] Square Cross Section Prism [] Rectangular Cross Section Prism
Specimen Moisture Condition:
[] Air Dried [] Oven Dried [] Saturated (100% Humidity Room) [] Saturated (50% Humidity Room) [] Other
L d a b D
L
Specimen Length, Diameter, Prism Prism (o.o/31@)
No. inches inches Depth, Width, (dz),
inches s2/in 2
_(a.)- inches
(m) (m)
/ O. 02b 27
(,e. 4 z#)
2 N 0o0248oq
Sooo)
Avg.. 0. O2,47g
Specimen No. 1 Specimen No. 2 Average EL
Date Age, M /-/ M r/ M n Modulus
days Mass, Frequency, Mass, Frequency, Mass, Frequency, DM(n ,)2 106,
Ibm hertz Ibm hertz Ibm hertz lbf/in2
-.6vet"
8-34"4 N 2. 13g d4/o 2. Io gglO 2. /43 d510 2.24
Figure4. - Typical data and calculation form for sonic vibrations of cylindrical or prismatic specimens (Longitudinal Frequency).
336
USBR 4215
!Specimen Configuration:
I Circular Cylinder [] Square Cross Section Prism [] Rectangular Cross Section Prism
Specimen Moisture Condition:
R] Air Dried I'-I Oven Dried [] Saturated (100% Humidity Room) [] Saturated (50% Humidity Room) [] Other
:L d a b R B
Specimen Length, Diameter, Prism Prism Shape 4 LR
No. ihches inches Depth, Width, Factor gA
(.m-)- inches inches s2/in2
(m) (m) we.oaf-m
/
'4/e
2 8. 5"000 2./ZS" J. 0o00 O. 02410
Avg. 0.04711
Specimen No. 1 Specimen No. 2 Average G
Date Age, M /'/"
M r/"" M n in Modulus
days Mass, Frequency, Mass, Frequency, Mass, Frequency, M(n ,,)2 x 10
Ibm ' hertz Ibm hertz Ibm hertz lbf/in2
I I ! I
Figure 5. - Typical data and calculation form for sonic vibrations of cylindrical or prismatic specimens (Torsional Frequency).
337
USBR 4215
Specimen Size
Specimen Specimen Length, Width, Depth, Diameter Moisture ET 106 EL 106 G x 106
Ident. Config- inches inches inches inches Condition lbf/in 2 lbf/in2 lbf/in 2
uration .(.m-). (m) (m) .(.m.).. (GPa)
A 1.q
N
2./25" D,/o 2. 24 I. og 0.o7
338
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENTOF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4227-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4227; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 227-81.
1. Scope C 227 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali
Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-
1.1 This designation covers the procedure for
Bar Method)l
determination of susceptibility of cement-aggregate
C 230 Standard Specification for Flow Table for Use in
combinations to expansive reactions involving hydroxyl
Tests of Hydraulic Cement 1
ions associated with the sodium and potassium alkalies
C 289 Standard Test Method for Potential Reactivity of
by measurement of the increase or decrease in length of
Aggregates (Chemical Method)
mortar bars during storage under prescribed conditions
C 490 Standard Specification for Apparatus for Use in
of test.
Measurement of Length Change of Hardened Cement
1.2 Alkalies participating in expansive reactions usually
Paste, Mortar, and Concrete L3
are derived from the cement; under some circumstances
C 511 Standard Specification for Moist Cabinets, Moist
they may be derived from other constituents of the concrete
Rooms, and Water Storage Tanks Used in the Testing
or from external sources. Two types of alkali reactivity
of Hydraulic Cements and Concretes ,3
of aggregatesare recognized: (1) an alkali-silica reaction
C 586 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali
involving certain siliceous rocks, minerals, and natural or
Reactivity of Carbonate Rocks for Concrete Aggregates
artificial glasses, and (2) an alkali-carbonate reaction
(Rock Cylinder Method)l
involving dolomite in certain calcitic dolomites and
E 11 Standard Specification for Wire-Cloth Sieves for
dolomitic limestones. This procedure is not recommended
Testing Purposes[,3, 4
as a means to detect the latter reaction because expansions
produced in the mortar-bar test by the alkali-carbonate
reaction (see ASTM C 586) are generally much less than 3. Summary of Procedure
those produced by the alkali-silicareaction for combinations
3.1 Mortar bars containing cement-aggregate combi-
having equally harmful effects in service.
nations are stored over water at 100 F (37.8 C), and
2. Applicable Documents expansion of the bars is measured at specified time
intervals.
2.1 USBR Procedures:
4075 Sampling Aggregates 4. Significance and Use
4109 Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
Using 2-Inch or 50-Millimeter Cube Specimens 4.1 Data correlating results of tests performed using
4183 Sampling and Acceptance of Hydraulic Cement this procedure with the performance of cement-aggregate
4192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in combinations in concrete in service, results of petrographic
Laboratory
examination of aggregates,and results of tests for potential
4305 MechanicalMixing of Hydraulic Cement Pastes and reactivity of aggregatesby chemical methods have been
Mortars of Plastic Consistency
published in ASTM C 289; and should be consulted in
4311 Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans
connection with using test results from this procedure as
for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement
the basis for conclusions and recommendations concerning
Concrete
use of cement-aggregate combinations in concrete.
2.2 ASTM Standards:
4.2 The results of tests by this procedure furnish
C 125 Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to
information on the likelihood that a cement-aggregate
Concrete and Concrete Aggregates m
I AnnuMBookofASTMStandards,voL 04.02. 3 AnnualBook ofASTMStandards,vol. 04.01.
2 AnnualBookofASTMStandards,rot..04.03. 4 Annual BookofASTM Srandards, vols. 04.06, 05.05, 14.02.
339
USBR 42:2!7
expanS[l)i-i h] el).ces.s I(]lf II).] pelrCelnlt H-] 1 ileaZ" Sbll:3tlhJl be Fi2lllJ I T:}]q<LII ,.I]}I;CJIk][IllLU {)l] ] ] ]{ ]It { a[ ]Llt S]'DCC[II!]eHI]I HI L.I:I[-IIL. JII.,J()IFI
used ,:linty with .ceme.ns E:l.W irJ :]kaIies or whh :he L{d {:if m<li:{ 51111]i{
FllL[S{:e l, felEIE(,I{IS sulltidesa {pyy[{e, ITTl]]7,L:,fli[{'O, I:L)" pyrhllLl{-i{Te I ) tt]ac e>;cept as; fo][c, ws::
,'l.xidixe and h>:drae WMql the re.]e.ase of su, lfate, and mateiials II').l 1 ?li:;l*lkJ'*. ']l:]]lki5 1117a?I be H:DFlS, tEl.Cted with one,
st|ch []lq; (a|:i} (free lime)I()lS" 'lgICjl (fIele magnesiia) {n dm
emerJt <:lr agg;regae hat pr.,::lgessi've]y h>.dx,{e lnd 2:, 3, n d 4.
C a F kllll L } a eI ,
(i.12 Sc'ves'.-Square h,d,::l w,:werl-wiire, clot]h s.ieves
COIl f,:3rll:l] ng (]l S lIT ] E ] 1 .
r2 ( (ll [']:1 ]]]le I1 c] e (fl [ 1-] L]{ s [] ]) ' ] e r]l i.: [] {[ L " ]}II ] [7il ]{ l ]7 I[71 {l ILi {JI['j bel
dle.veclped :{:l C:l:.mfMn {]llt e:vF::.ar>i,: u-, is a,<:vucm]l]y due ,,,l a]kll:i These ]tewis shall Cl[)ln]2ClIJ]-I tlC] I requiirements of IL.TS.BR '4[l(]1{ !l ,
l'ea] ,C:m Jixl' ]i 1.I S.l:)lJIr.oS ,It SUl,h sLip[>lementary [[ltfl(]lE]YlIJliiXEI except ]la ,c]ea;m.e between ]c,,we:r end of paddle and
inc]lud:e: (] ]l pe{l:<ll.gTap]l..i[,L exs:tT, in]til:llil (Ill agre'gae to:, bCltt.om :l* kl.Ov'l S.mll]l k:,e {L21:)CI Ii)] :inch {3 ] _--+-13. ! l mm:l.
]IoIeFITtJn{L' tiff kLli,;)Vl[] reac:i:ve ,L,i)rlSl{[lLlenl[S :]Je ])lgscl[ll-:: (]'.]. ]i ZH]l]pe.e .l'nt_J I TfC;ll,'el]l}--Tl]lie taJlFipler am:JI tFCal',iel
reac:vivity. ud i3 ) te:.ss ,tlf aggregate f,,:u: poe.,:ltia] reac:i v ity aCl exact predle{erFdnd leng:h l:, mty be fiixed where exJct
b'/cl-.lemical metllods .: ASTM C 2:89) ]engt}] dleterlnirJlar, n iis m>de ur:d! lungtlu umge bl
415 xa:Jl]lerJ it t:laS klleel-I C{llnl,L]t]ldeld f['l:LHl resulhs. t t iis BI{Fl calcullated, figures 2:l see . I n{'l l '
FlDOCelldtIFe tl3d rcin-]l suppleln:ientary :inlf:'E:llr*]latiill:)aTl that a 6 ] .7 (Mr2,,'nere -,( i,:/vered o:/ntaJ!ners for s.toiing {e.s
given cemen>aggregae CCl, nJbmlatim sl:,c,,u]ld be: C<lln, Sidered SFle:C:-qe::lS sl-Ja:ll be. L.Cli]S{Tt1.Lzed ILIf ]YllXleYi[]ll tt:lat is resist:arl,{
Uli>J[e: lCCl[]diYi!oFIs
potenriall?' dlelete.rJiousl'.y' ren,:h.,e,, ,Jdlit[<::,qlnl s:ud]es may be' L{jlI L()rFEIl',iiQIil IIIiF US le, '{{'lFl-]e]ll i:l[)-]ltgi]]eys aye:
:, i,ll)
USBR 4227
-, f
Bose
plate screws
i
4 I t-- -
J
PLAN OF DOUBLE MOLD Gougestud
t pacer screws
plate screw
; f'-
II lil 3 II
,L,. - Cleon-out hole I ,? =" t .Drill and ream i
0rillandap IF I"-Bose plate screw ,," "T ''-17- '/" totake endplate
Id I 114
totake X '- ,2"- -- hi dowel
bose pineal-f
screws. Dowel pins"dia, press
....... .
.,.=T,..,.. ..^...
IUII ur IYIULU
ILr'v/4
IITI-TeQ In ena plaTe---____ ....
"'- _ t -- .
,NI L-/Tapped l_ 20 UNC threads
Figure 2a. - Single and double molds (inch-pound units). From ASTM C 490.
in use, it is important to maintain a tight seal between storing specimens, loss of moisture is prevented by tight-
cover and container wall or top. The inner sides of fitting covers and/or sealing. Provisions shall be made for
containers shall be lined with an absorbent material, such supporting the mortar bars in a vertical position, with
as blotting paper, to act as a wick and to ensure that lower end of bars about 1 inch (25 mm) above surface
atmosphere in container is quickly saturated with water of water in container. The mass of the mortar bar specimens
vapor when container is sealed after specimens are placed shall not be supported on the metal gauge stud. Spacers
therein. The liner shall extend into the water in bottom shall be provided to ensure that specimens do not touch
of container and extend above tops of specimens. sides of container or each other. Provisions shall be made
Containers shall be so constructed that, when used for to prevent water splashing and condensate dripping onto
341
USBR 4227
. I
110.0 turn
6.0mm I ;S
I
t A :q-::'
lO.Omm
PLAN OF SINGLE MOLD
L ,':IA IO'Omm 285mm
,7.5 m m---' 0.0 mm
/'"
_GAUGE LENGTH 2.5 +- 2.50mm 4 It[--IO.Omm
I0.0 mm---3].. E'-' 5-2, |. ,-q, 5.0 m m
SECTION
32gmrn
OF MOLD
..... J
t]rill & reom 5.0mm to ioke
Eo-mm bose plate screw end plote dowel
Bose plote screw 6.0-mm, Gouge stud spocer screw 6.0-mm, Drill & top to take 6.0-ram gauge stud
200mm shofl 6.0mmxl0.0rnm-,. 15.0ram shoft 6.0ram xl0.Omm, & gouge stud spacer screw%
/
Round cop I
I ! ' .) ' ' I I I
,;i _Rond
"i vo ,,; i cop
_I.... I i- _ _
- _,.,._.___._IKI I i ; i-,q-
I0.0 mmAL
lO.Omm')-'6.0mm) /lO.Omr6.0m'rn_j y ,O.omm
ENDVIEW SINGLE MOLD END VIEW DOUBLE MOLD GAUGE STUD HOLDER
Nofe : "A" dimensions fo be specified by purchaser.
Figure 2b. - Single and double molds (Sl-metric). From ASTM C 490.
specimens. The provisions to prevent water splashing on currently in use by the Bureau are constructed of Plexiglass,
specimens should not include baffle plates and supports as shown on figure 5.
to hold the specimens vertical that would substantially
reduce opportunity for vapor transfer from water in bottom
NOTE 1.-One laboratory eliminated splash baffle and made
of container to atmosphere around specimens (note 1). the support for the bottoms of the bars out of galvanized, welded,
If required to prevent growth of mold on liner, a suitable square mesh, wire cloth made out of O.O80-inch (2.0-mm)diameter
fungicide may be added to water in container. Containers galvanized wire.
342
USBR 4227
, ;r-z-
.j
' '" ";
,, .%. '
,
.
..,
'4
I' , , i
i i
- " ..... "" "1
,', ...... :. ....... ... ....... -
i
o
uT_F--- ,
lin = 5.4 mm
- .
i:4.
.: ,' .,
t_. : : 7=-;-- .. ,' ,'
!1 B 1--', ,
L
B
: -<a
$r" .........
| I
,, .1 --,, /; ,- , .
.... -'----1----I-
. .,. ' -:-J-
,,,..,,
ii
L_ i"
SEGTION B'B
343
USBR 4227
Figure qi 'View ,i,ia three gang m,:,]d (wihh ins re.) ready f'or F, tcy,uluL:iorl ,,i: m,,re;Ir-bar sr:cc.]n<ler<les
Fi.u;ure ; T),[ik ;11 Plexig].s.,i ,.<l.Fit;i:Jners used film el:ie i,:li;-se:iJc!.cl .,.l,:;,age <l.i ,Fl,:lrtJi
bl:F >pec :h l]e[G.
in section ?'2 with ;t miniirni:in-i ,:J,: crushinlg. Materia][s in a nanrler simiila t.,: zha: rise,21 for dae fMer sizes.
p.ro,p,:sed far us.e as coarse agg:eg;te in c,:mcre.re s!hal[ be 7.1.2 ([oLrse ;gg;regae cruished t<: sand size may give
p,r{:,cesse,. by crushirg o pr(::,dtlce: :4; rJealy . p::,racticn], increased expansion because ,:ff the ir-icreas.edl surface
,i gr3de, d p<l,dmct f>i>m whJc:h iJ sa.r]ple C1 be: ,::buined. c.xp.osed uF:,.or C]'tl,.;[]irl Therefore, Jif: c,::arse aggregate
The sample shl]l have the g;radirJ, g s prescriibed m, 7.2, cested by d-J, is pr,oc:edure pr,:WM,L:es ar excessive arn,tmnt c,[
and be reF,esencath..,e of t:he corriposiJkl, n ,,:l,f .c,:3ase expansi):>n, the m;:erial shall] ric, t be classed as objectioral::,]ly
aggregate as proposed fox use reac:h.e ',.viizln Jlk:,li: Lzn]ess :css of ,c.,.ncre.:e spe,=imens
7.].1 When n giveci qu, arriedl nri<le.riial is pr,:q-:,,:.J.sed c<l, ri:]irIvl S,LlCh fiindings,
f:ll, r use:, ]k?,.;_:)i:li as c,o<;r.i;e 4Fid f:Jl-e aggregate,, it w]l]l l:.e tested 7,2 I)rc[:,3r,,q,:,: ,,/A,Tre>;ace,,-F'Me agge:gae shall] be
.c)rtl)., by s.e]lec:k:,n (,,i: u:l iFF:,>c),prikte sample ClylLfS, i]ed C(:i the esed in l grad irg 1, lvie:e u,i requ iren:-Jerts ,mr specifk:aions
fhTe aggregaee sizes, un]ess {here is res.,:t t.,: expect that f<,, the: F,,;je,c:,, e>,,17, hat alq'y mareiill eaMe, d on :he
USBR 4227
No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve shall be removed. Fine aggregates aggregate combination. Circumstances may dictate that
being tested for reasons other than to determine compliance more specimens than noted here be made.
with individual specifications, and all coarse aggregatesto 9.3 Preparation of Molds.-Prepare molds in accordance
which this procedure is applied shall be graded in with requirements Of ASTM C 490.
accordancewith requirements shown in table 1. Aggregates 9.4 Proportioning ofMortar.-Proportion dry materials
for which sufficient quantities of sizes specified in table for test mortar using 1 part cement to 2.25 parts of graded
1 do not exist shall be crushed until required material has aggregate by mass. The quantities of dry materials to be
been produced. In the case of aggregates containing mixed at one time in batch of mortar for making two
insufficient amounts of one or more of the larger sizes specimens shall be 300 grams of cement and 675 grams
listed in table 1, and if no larger material is available for of aggregate. The aggregate shall be made up by
crushing, the first size in which sufficient material is recombining portions retained on various sieves (sec. 7.2)
available shall contain the cumulative percentage of as shown in table 1, or of a graded aggregate meeting
material down to that size, as determined from table 1. requirements of the specifications for the project. Use an
When this method is necessary, it should be so noted in amount of mixing water to produce a flow of 105 to 120
the test report. After the aggregate has been separated percent as determined in accordance with USBR 4109,
into the various sieve sizes, each size shall be washed with except that flow table shall be dropped 1/2-inch (12.7-
a water spray over the sieve to remove adhering dust and ram) 10 times in about 6 seconds instead of 25 times within
fine particles from the aggregate.The portions retained 15 seconds (sec. 11.3, USBR 4109). The amount of mixing
on the various sieves shall then be dried and, unless used water used shall be expressed as a mass percent of the
immediately, each portion shall be stored individually in cement.
a clean container provided with a tight-fitting cover. 9.5 Mixing of Morcar.-Mix the mortar in accordance
with requirements of USBR 4305.
Table 1. - Grading requirements. 9.6 Molding of Test Specimens.-Immediately follow-
ing completion of flow test, return mortar from flow table
Sieve size Mass,
to mixing bowl. Mix entire batch for 15 seconds. Start
Passing Retained on percent
molding specimens within 2.25 minutes after completion
No. 4 (4.75 mm) No. 8 (2.36 mm) 10 of original mixing of mortar batch. Fill molds with two
No. 8 (2.36 mm) No. 16 (1.18 mm) 25 approximately equal layers, compacting each layer with
No. 16 (1.18 mm) No. 30 (600/zm) 25 tamper. Work mortar into corners, around gauge studs,
No. 30 (600/zm) No. 50 (300 zm) 25 and along surfaces of mold with the tamper until a
No. 50 (300 #m) No. 100 (150 #m) 15 homogenous specimen is obtained. Aftertop layer has been
compacted, cut off mortar flush with top of mold and
7.3 Cement.-Cement used to determine the reactivity smooth surface with a few strokes of trowel.
of aggregateswith the cement alkalies shall be high-alkali 9.6.1 When a duplicate batch of mortar is to be made
cement with an alkali content of 1 percent or more immediately for additional specimens, flow test may be
expressed as sodium equivalent. Parallel tests using a omitted and mortar allowed to stand in mixing bowl for
cement with an alkali content of 0.60 percent are also 90 seconds and then remixed for 15 seconds before molding
usually conducted to determine the effectiveness of specimens.
specifying low-alkali cement to control deleterious 9.7 Sequence of Making Batches of Mortar.-When
expansion. more than one cement-aggregate combination is to be
tested as part of a single investigation, make total number
of batches of mortar (two per cement-aggregate combi-
8. Precautions
nation) in random order, except that in no case shall the
two batches representing a single cement-aggregate
8.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous combination be made consecutively. When the making of
materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim all specimens for a single investigation requires that batches
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It be made on 2 working days, each cement-aggregate
is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish combination shall be represented by one batch made each
appropriate safety and health practices and determine day. The order in which the combinations are represented
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. by batches shall be different on the 2 days. When more
than 2 days are required, one cement-aggregate combination
9. Sampling, Test Specimens, and Test Units shall be represented by a batch made on each day.
345
USBR 4227
10.3 Molds shall conform to requirements of ASTM 2-years" age or until required data are obtained. These
C 490 and section 6.1.1 of this designation. measurement ages may be varied to whatever circumstances
10.4 Sieves shall comply with section 6.1.2 of this are dictated. Record the measurement data on a form
designation and to ASTM E 11. similar to the form shown on figure 6.
10.5 The mixer, paddle, mixing bowl, and scraper shall 12.2 After each length measurement, specimens may
comply with section 6.1.3 of this designation and to USBR be examined in same manner described in section 13 to
4305. provide supplemental information on their condition.
10.6 The flow table and flow mold shall comply with 12.3 All specimens placed in a given container after
requirements of ASTM C 230. initial length measurement shall have been made on same
10.7 The tamper and trowel shall comply with day, and shall be placed in the container at same time
requirements of USBR 4109. so that all specimens in a given container shall be due
10.8 Containers shall comply with requirements of for measurement at same time. Each time length
section 6.1.7. measurements are made, clean container and change water.
10.9 The length comparator shall meet requirements 12.4 Always place specimens in comparator with same
of ASTM C 490. end uppermost; after measurement, replace specimens in
10.9.1 The specimens may be adjusted to a standard container in inverted position as compared with previous
overall length (out-to-out of gauge points) by means of period.
the adjustableinsert screws.
10.10 Sand shall be standardized as outlined in
13. Examination at End of Test
section 7.
346
USBR 4227
347
USBR 4227
%11
..-.k
"6
.9
348
USBR 4227
0
o
]
I
[]
349
USBR 4227
8
t
350
USBR 4227
,,9o
mo
n_
d
8
:1
351
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4231-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4231; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 231-82.
352
USBR 4231
O "-- M c r' k
i
i
:i
rNloile: Aa---h I -h 2 when bc, w'l tom,aims cc, ncfe'le os, s, hcP,i'n',;:
when, bci, w]l c:C, rl{OJlrliS CIT"II),' CIIg,lFe'lOle 0111(:]1 ,Cl'er, hi I -112:=''11
'l (:31, l .11 r e 'gl 0 1 e: c c, i, r e :: 1 J,o ii f Ol c *r El, r' ) , . el, - (}a i = A, s, { It r' tj = Cll i r c o n e i'1
o,f c:oricre{e: il'e,i,1 ' solmplle).
FigLr'e ]. - [l[lustra{ion ,0.f pressure mechc,,d I'o. a.ii cc, ntent c,f a Type A meter.
tems
Draim valve
F:igure 3.. - Phoog:raph c,f a LVF,,ic;J Type A meter ,:oc>mnm,n]y call]ed P,::al:ex PAM-C25 ,:*i P',a.M-{:50, c,.r Peciisiion
C:' '- 1125 ,,:x,r CT'- ][ 50.
3.5 The dlesigns ,:ff v,rious types of air' [T]e[e:.rs are: such
fl-ut; they differ in ,:>penfing e'chnJiques and; :he;era, re,
a] ]iems d, escribedl in fflk,wiing sections 3.6 thrc,,ugb :!,.]q
may nc>t k:, equired. The h:ems required s.hall be: those
*air Chamber n e ccs s a ry fo ase. w i h F:"a r t[c u I a d e s :i.g n u s e d c,, s, 5 s f a ct:,o r ii] y
d e t e r 1 n d rJ, e t h,e. ai c,: rJ t: e r-j, m i n a ccc, d a rice w i b t ]h, is p roce d u re.
!i,.t:!i, G:,2' Np,rLrs,-A coil spning c,, ,,>tber device f.or
I(:,kling cJ]iibratJi,,:)a!u vessel :inverted [n !::,]ace w:[thJn ffJe
type A me'er
3.;' 5pno,' Z:be.-A brass s.p, ray tube c,f appropriate
cliameter, wMkh, n-my be an megra] part ,:d cove assem, bJly
car r;tay be separate item. Spray robe s_h, al]l be so cons.ruced
d-,at when v'ler iis added c,, conta{ner, water [s sprayed
Fiigure 4. - Sc]h, emafik: diagram of a typ, k::a]l Type B me.c:r. E<:,. wails ,of o::,ve.r m such a manne as. ,: fc:,w &,wn fl-,e
si.des, ca>sing a 13:[ni]lTlur;1 ,of disturbance t,., concrem
bowl corres.pond, ing to:, the: app>2xin:me pe>cern ,::ff air M !!,.8 2?',:nv'e]-A svandardl brick mas.c,n"s t>owd
c,oncrete I,,: be teseJ; ,0,r:, if smal]le.r, it sbal] be pc, ssibe :!, {;;' Z,!np,% od.-As described i]n USBR 41dq.
,: ch,ck ca librfi:,n < air meer indicaw,,: a,v appr,:,,:>dn-Jarc :i, I:l:) M.:d;@n:.-A maJl]e wkh a rubber or rawhide head,
F,,er<u]lt , :>f air :in, c,:n,,rete t,:) k:,c t.c>it.d by rcpeic,d fillI:in.< tE, a lnas; :,: mass c:,f about ] 2.;_+0..,0 ]Ibm (567_+:2";!:7 g). f:,lr
.,d ,,,,ssel tae"lZlf, lql de',iEI ,:{ aih [:l]e,iz,r lc,,qijijc.; p,Jc:in, g use wid-J measures <::, ,().<.i fi" ,:1(I.014 rn),::r sma]]ler, Jn,:l
.ca]l[bra]ii<:,r: vessel wiJ]iin me;sufing b<:,wl ,, beck a ma]lIet with a mass of about-:: 25:r.),.5Ci, Ibm :1 Ci,20_+227 g)
,cal:ib,::;[:i,:)n, wlJe vessc'il sha:ll [::, cylin!hka] iin sh]F:,u and l-Ja$',.u f,u.r meas,ures lage.: .han 05 ft"
a[q Ji*nlSiidle ide'ptlq 1/2: iI-]lC:l-,i :] ]}l ]I:lr.]7])[(-'SS [hl;l[-I t[']{l" ()}" b(:lV, I 3 ]1 ,c,'rr,:e-O//trre'.-A flgJ., meta]J p,]ate
A S;liSfill,UV:l, ry vesse]l ,l:{ th,is type m:,'; b,< n]ac/:-in(d fn:,m at lc:as 1./4 inch (6 turn) thick: a.r a glass .,:.r acr}iliic plate
N,,::, [I 6 gauge J:rass t-ubJing, ,{ 4 eli;ill-:icier t<:, [-:,>:r,,ide v.,::,llume at legist: I/2 inch !13 mnq,) :hick with a ]e.ng:h and width
,des[rcdl, .o "k, ich ; br:,,s d:isk s s,:,tderc,_ at hast 2 irJctq, es (<,,{)nJn:.)greate.r han diiame'ter of measure
E()' If ,k }, :r l 3 :LrJ 'ltC{ '@']lie'l. d:es:ign ,:ff a,ir mc:ec: requlires t}cct *,,: be used wkh plae is reqju@ed. The edges of the p,]!ate
wiiff, Jwal (:,i watel7 I>:.)ll*q, ,cuaer-f[:lloJI [:'': )"]i [ [[--l(]l 'C '1:)'k'4 r si-Jl be straight and smo,,M-], wi&M a t,:flerance c,,f :1,."]:6
:ssurlnbl]i c, cJeck c$]ibnk:,.n, he vc'ssd may be u:- Jitcc'gs:aJ inch ,: 1.6 mn-).
p,a ,,d the cn.,e usscmblly ,,r my be a, se.p4rne vessel 3]2 F,nn'& A funne.Jl wkb, spout d-aat wilI If:it it:m:*
Ji s DITC'<' JC' L2SII:>' dlescribcd! : Refer m:,:_> flig. ')'. ) sF, Lv : eh,,e
::,5,4
USBR 42::, 1
Fiigure 'i. - F"lh.ul.,:gra]l h c, a V)F, ii.;d "Kypc B ,neter .IoJ, n:m>nl'.! called a 'WhirL:.. 7 ec]h,,Ete. ,::,r Prec:isi.cm, CT-3126 A:ir Meter)..
4. Precautlons
PUM P ASSEMBLY
356
USBR 4231
and measuring bowl. However, the calibration test S = volume of concrete sample (same as volume
described in appendixsections X1.8 and X2.8, as applicable of measuring bowl, Vs), in cubic feet or
to type of meter being checked, must be made as frequently cubic meters;
as necessary to ensure that proper gauge pressure is being B = volume of concrete produced per batch (note
used for type A meter or that correct air contents are 1), in cubic feet, cubic yards, or cubic
being indicated on pressure gauge air-content scale for meters;
type B meter. A change in elevation of more than 600 feet F = total mass of fine aggregate in the moisture
(183 m), from location at which type A meter was last condition used in batch, in pound mass
calibrated, will require recalibration. (Refer to figs. 8, 9, (kilograms);
and 10.) Cs = mass of coarse aggregate in concrete sample,
in pound mass (kilograms); and
6. Conditioning Cb = total mass of coarse aggregate in the moisture
condition used in batch, in pound mass
6.1 Fine and Coarse Aggregate.-Conditioning of the (kilograms).
fine and coarse aggregate moisture content for the
aggregate correction factoris covered in section 7.2. NOTE 1.-The volume of concrete produced per batch can be
6.2 Concrete TestSample.-Preparation of concrete test determined in accordance with applicable provisions of USBR
sample to exclude aggregate larger than 1-1/2 or 3 inches 4138.
(37.5 or 75 ram) is covered in section 8.1.
7.4 Placement of Aggregate in Measuring BowL-Mix
7. Determination of Aggregate Correction Factor representative samples of fine aggregate F and coarse
aggregate C and place in measuring bowl filledone-third
7.1 Aggregate Correction Factor.-The determination full with water. Place mixed aggregate, a small amount
of the aggregate correction factor has not been a standard at a time, into bowl. If necessary, add additional water
practice for the Bureau of Reclamation. For sound, dense so as to inundate all of the aggregate. Add each scoopful
aggregates-the factoris assumed to be zero. However, some of aggregate in a manner that will entrap as little air as
authorities believe this factor should not be ignored even possible, and promptly remove accumulations of foam.
with good aggregate because the correction factormay fall After each addition of aggregate, stir mixture to eliminate
in the range of 0.2 to 0.4 percent. With porous or entrapped air, tap sides of bowl, and lightly rod upper
lightweight aggregates, the correction factor may be 1 inch (25 mm) of mixture about 10 times.
0.8 percent or higher, in which case the procedure of 7.5 Aggregate Correction Factor Determination:
USBR 4173 may be more appropriate. 7.5.1 Initial Procedure for Types A and B Meters.-
7.1.1 It is recommended that the aggregate correc- When all aggregate has been placed in measuring bowl,
tion factor be determined for each aggregate source used. remove excess foam and keep aggregate inundated for a
In the event of a controversy or borderline point of period approximately equal to time between introduction
rejection, the. aggregate correction factor must be of water into bowl and time of performing the test for
determined and included in determination of air content. air content before proceeding with determination of factor
7.2 Procedure.-Determine the aggregate correction as directed in 7.5.2 or 7.5.3.
factoron a combined sample of fine and coarse aggregate 7.5.2 Type A Meter.-Complete the test as described
as directed in sections 7.3, 7.4, and 7.5. The factor is in sections 9.2.1 and 9.2.2. The aggregate correction factor,
determined independently by applying calibrated pressure G1, is equal to hi - h2, see figure 1 (note 2).
to a sample of inundated fine and coarse aggregate in about
the same moisture condition, amount, and proportions NOTE Z-The aggregate correction factor will vary with
occurring in concrete sample under test. Figure 11 shows different aggregates. Factor can be determined only by test because
a typical calculation form for determining the correction it is not apparently directly related to absorption of the particles.
The test can be easily performed, and the factor will usually
factor.
remain reasonably constant for given aggregates. However, an
7.3 Aggregate Sample Size.-Calculate the mass of fine occasional check test is recommended.
and coarse aggregate present in the sample for fresh
concrete, for which the air content is to be determined: 7.5.3 Type B Meter.-Perform the test as described
S in section 9.3.1. From the assembledand filled apparatus,
F = / (Fb) (1) remove a volume of water that is approximately equal
to volume of air that would be contained in a typical concrete
S sample of a size equal to volume of bowl. Remove this
G = (G) (2)
water in the manner described in section X2.8 of appendix
where: X2. Then, complete the test in accordance with section
9.3.2. The aggregatecorrection factor, Gu, is equal to reading
Fs = mass of fine aggregate in concrete sample, in on air-content scale minus the volume of water removed
pound mass (kilograms); from bowl, expressed as a percent of volume of bowl.
357
USBR 4231
8. Preparation of Concrete Test Sample smooth and has a glazed appearance. Never continue
vibration long enough to cause escape of froth from sample.
8.1 Obtain the sample of freshly mixed concrete in 9.1.3.2 External Vibration.-The external vibra-
accordance with applicable procedures of USBR 4172. If tors shall be operated in accordance with section 3.4 of
concrete contains coarse aggregateparticles that would be USBR 4031 or section 3.6 of USBR 4192.
retained on a 1-1/2- or 3-inch (37.5- or 75-mm) sieve, 9.1.4 Strike Off.-After consolidation of concrete,
wet sieve a sufficient amount of representative sample over strike off top surface by sliding strike-off plate across top
one of these sieves, as described in USBR 4172, to yield flange or rim of measuring bowl with a sawing motion
somewhat more than enough material to fill measuring until bowl is just level full. On completion of consolidation,
bowl with size selected for use. Perform the wet-sieving bowl must not contain a great excess or deficiency of
operation with the minimum practicable disturbance of concrete. Removal of about 1/8 inch (3 ram) of concrete
the mortar. Make no attempt to wipe adhering mortar during strike off is optimum. A small quantity of
from coarse aggregateparticles retained on sieve. representative concrete may be added to correct a deficiency.
If bowl contains a great excess of concrete, remove a
representative portion with a trowel or scoop before strike
9. Procedure for Determining Air Content of
off.
Concrete
9.1.5 Application of Test Method.-Any portion of
test method not specifically designated as pertaining to
9.1 Placement and Consolidation of Sample: the type A or type B meter shall apply to both types.
9.1.1 Place a representative sample of concrete, 9.2 Procedure for Type A Meter:
prepared as described in section 8, in measuring bowl in 9.2.1 Preparation for Test.-Thoroughly clean
equal layers. Consolidate each layer by rodding (9.1.2) or flanges or rims of bowl and cover assembly so that when
by vibration (9.1.3). Strike off the final consolidated layer cover is clamped in place, a pressure-tight seal will be
(9.1.4). Rod concretes with a slump greater than 3 inches obtained. Assemble the apparatus and add water over the
(76 mm), rod or vibrate concretes with a slump of 1 to concrete using the spray tube until water rises to about
3 inches (25 to 76 ram), and consolidate concretes with the halfway mark in the standpipe. Incline apparatus
a slump of less than 1 inch (25 mm) by vibration. Determine assembly about 30 from vertical and, using bottom of
the slump in accordance with USBR 4143 bowl as a pivot, inscribe several complete circles with upper
9.1.2 Rodding.-Placeconcrete in measuring bowl in end of column, simultaneously tapping cover lightly to
three layers of approximately equal volume (3-inch MSA remove any entrapped air bubbles above concrete sample.
shall be placed only by vibration). Consolidate each layer Return assembly to a vertical position and fillwater column
using 25 strokes of tamping rod evenly distributed over slightly above zero mark, while lightly tapping sides of
the cross section. After each layer is rodded, tap sides of bowl. Bring water level to zero mark of graduated tube
bowl sharply 10 to 15 times with the mallet to close any before closing vent at top of water column, see figure l(a).
voids left by tamping rod and to release any large air bubbles
that may have been trapped. Rod bottom layer throughout NOTE 3.-The internal surface of cover assembly should be
its depth; however, rod shall not forciblystrike bottom 'kept clean and free from oil or grease; surface should also be
of bowl. When rodding second and final layers, use only wet to prevent adherence of air bubbles that might be difficult
to dislodge after assembly of apparatus.
enough force to cause rod to penetrate surface of previous
layer about 1 inch (25 ram). Add final layer of concrete 9.2.2 Test Procedure.-Applyslightly more than the
in a manner to avoid excessive overfilling (9.1.4). desired test pressure, about 0.2 lbf/in2 (1.38 kPa) more,
9.1.3 Vibration: to the concrete using the small hand pump. To relieve
9.1.3.1 Internal Vibration.-Place concrete in local restraints, tap sides of bowl sharply and, when pressure
measuring bowl in two layers of approximately equal gauge indicates exact test pressure, Po, as determined in
volume. Place all concrete for each layer before starting accordance with appendix section X 1.8, read the water level
vibration of that layer. Consolidate each layer wih three ha, and record this level to the nearest division or half-
insertions (six insertions for 3-inch MSA) of vibrator evenly division on the graduated precision-bore tube or gauge glass
distributed over the cross section. Add final layer in a of standpipe, see figure l(b). For extremely harsh mixes,
manner to avoid excessive overfilling (9.1.4). When it may be necessary to tap bowl vigorously until further
consolidating bottom layer, do not allow vibrator to rest tapping produces no change in indicated air content.
on or touch bottom or sides of bowl. Take care when Gradually release air pressure through vent at top of water
withdrawing vibrator to ensure that no air pockets are column and tap sides of bowl lightly for about 1 minute.
left in concrete. Observe a standard duration of vibration Record water level, h2 to nearest division or half-division,
for the particular kind of concrete, vibrator, and measuring see figure 1(c). Then, calculate the apparent air content:
bowl involved. This duration will depend upon workability
of concrete and effectiveness of vibrator. Continue vibration A = hi-h2 (3)
only long enough to achieve proper consolidation of
where:
concrete. Overvibration may cause segregation and loss of
intentionally entrained air. Usually, sufficient vibration has Aa = apparent air content of test sample, in per-
been applied when surface of concrete becomes relatively cent;
358
USBR 4231
hi = water level reading at pressure Po, and G2 = aggregate correction factor for a Type B
hz = water level reading at zero pressure after meter, in percent; and
release of pressure 19o. As = as previously defined.
10.2 Air Content ofFullMixture.-When sample tested
9.2.3 Check Test.-Repeat the steps described in represents that portion of mixture that is obtained by wet
section 9.2.2, except do not add water to reestablish water sieving to remove aggregate particles larger than a 1-1/2-
level at zero mark. The two consecutive determinations or 3-inch (37.5- or 75-ram) sieve, air content of full mixture
of apparent air content should check within 0.2 percent, may be calculated:
and shall be averaged to give the value of As to be used
in calculating the air content, As in accordance with 100 As V
At = (5)
section 10. 100 Vt - AsVo
9.2.4 If air content exceeds range of meter when where:
operating at normal test pressure Po, reduce pressure to At = air content of full mixture, in percent;
an alternative test pressure and repeat steps of 9.2.2 and V = absolute volume of ingredients of mixture
9.2.3, where Po is the normal test or operating gauge passing a 1-1/2- or 3-inch (37.5- or 75-mm)
pressure in pound force per square inch (kilopascals). sieve, airfree, and as determined from cor-
9.2.5 Figure 11 shows a typical calculation form. rected batch masses, in cubic feet, cubic
9.3 Procedure for Type B Meter: yards, or cubic meters;
9.3.1 Preparation for Test.-Thoroughlyclean Vt = absolute volume of all ingredients of mixture,
flanges or rims of measuring bowl and cover assembly airfree, in cubic feet, cubic yards, or cubic
so that when cover is clamped in place, a pressure-tight meters;
seal will be obtained.Then, assemble the apparatus.Close Vo = absolute volume of aggregatein mixture
air valve between air chamber and bowl, and open both coarser than 1-1/2- or 3-inch (37.5- or 75-
petcocks on holes through cover. Using a rubber syringe, mm) sieve, and as determined from cor-
injectwater through one petcockuntilwater emerges from rected batch masses, in cubic feet, cubic
oppositepetcock.Jar the metergently untilall air is expelled yards, or cubic meters; and
from petcock. As = as previously defined.
9.3.2 Test Procedure.-Closeair-bleedervalve on air
chamber and pump air into chamber until gauge hand is 10.3 Air Content. of Mortar Fraction.-When it is
on initialpressureline. Allowa few seconds forcompressed desired to know air content of mortar fractionof mixture,
air to cool to normal temperature. Stabilize gauge hand calculate as follows:
at initialpressure line by pumpingor bleeding off air as 100 As Vs
necessary, tapping gauge lightly. Close both petcocks on Am = (6)
100 Vm + As( Vs - Vm)
holes through cover. Open air valve between air chamber
and bowl. Tap sides of bowl sharply to relieve local where:
restraints. Lightly tap pressure gauge to stabilize gauge Am = air content of mortar fraction, in percent;
hand and read percentageof air on dial of pressuregauge. Vm = absolute volume of ingredients in mortar frac-
Failure to close main air valve before releasing pressure tion of mixture, airfree, in cubic feet, cubic
from either the container or air chamber will result in yards, or cubic meters; and
water being drawn into air chamber, thus introducingan Other terms as previously defined.
error in subsequent measurements. If water enters air
chamber,watermustbe bled fromchamberthrough bleeder NOTE 4.-The values in equations (5) and (6) are most
conveniently obtained from data on concrete mixture tabulated
valve followed by several strokes of pump to blow out
as shown for a batch of any size on figure 11.
all traces of water. Release pressure by opening both
petcocksbefore removing cover (fig. 5). 11. Report
11.1 The air content of the mortar may be reported
10. Calculations on many different forms. Of prime concern to the Bureau
of Reclamation are the following three main forms:
10.1 Air Content of Sample Tested.-Calculate air 11.1.1 Mix Design.-The form included in USBR
content of concrete in measuring bowl as follows: 4211 (fig. 1).
11.1.2 Mix Data.-The form included in USBR 4138
As = As - Gl or G2 (4) (fig. 3).
11.1.3 Concrete Compressive Strength.-The form
where: included in USBR 4039 (fig. 5).
12. Precision and Bias
As = true air content of sample tested, in percent;
G1 = aggregate correction factor for a Type A 12.1 The precision and bias for this procedure have
meter, in percent; not been established.
359
USBR 4231
N
I,, 1,, %
. .-
-
d
8z u k' d o o e d o o . d o o d o d
8 5 2 Z Z Z
< - . -- o
mm
36O
USBR 4231
Notes: Ral and RB are constants, and are the effective volumes of the calibration vessels expressed as a percentage of the volume
of the air-meter bowls.
Figure 9. - Sample worksheet for calibration of calibration vessel and air-meter bowl.
361
USBR 4231
Date
Solic.Spec" OrNo. A/A Structure/i/A Tested bytf,"/"8's 3-3-g7
Remarks: The expansion factor D, which is the difference between the initial and zero water level marks, does not enter into the above
calculations but should be checked.
Factory establishment of Pi is usually at 15 lbf/in2 (103.4 kPa).
Remarks: Calibration reading Ka is assumed to be 0.98 Rm, and expansion factorDo is assumed to be zero.
Figure 10. - Sample worksheet for calibration of Type'A or B apparatus (sheet 1 of 2).
362
USBR 4231
pressure Pu.
Do expansion factor at pressure Pu, in percent.
K2= (0.98) (RA2) = calculated calibration reading at pressure Pu, in percent.
P.= pressure to establish K2, in pound force per square inch (kilopascals).
hs = water-level reading at pressure Pu.
h = water-level reading after release of pressure Pu.
Dl = determined expansion factor at h0 - zero reading.
I = RA2 + D] = calibration reading at pressure Pt, in percent.
Pl -= pressure to establish K3, in pound force per square inch (kilopascals).
P:= initial pressure line on gauge, a pure number.
Ao air content at zero pressure after release of pressure Pr, in percent.
P.= adjusted initial pressure line on gauge, a pure number.
192= Ao = expansion factor, in percent.
1171 -- mass of water removed from air-meter bowl to check air content graduations, in pound mass (kilograms).
117 2 total mass of water removed from air-meter bowl to check air content graduations, in pound mass (kilograms).
RB1 = effective volume of water removed with calibration vessel, in percent.
RB2 total effective volume of water removed with calibration vessel, in percent.
air meter readings in calibration of gauge graduations, in percent.
Figure 10. - Sample worksheet for calibration of Type A or B apparatus (sheet 2 of 2).
363
USBR 4231
Mass for Batching Mass for Proportionin Volume of Ingredients. of Concrete Test
Aggregates in Aggregates in Meter : Aa Sample for Air Content Determination
Nominal Concrete Mix Bowl to Determine G Design V V V V Vt
Size Fb Cb Fa C Air Volume Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute
Fraction Mass of Mass of Fb (S) Ct, (S) Ingredients Content, of Air Volume Volume Volume Volume
Fine Coarse % in Unit of Cement of Mortar of Coarse of All
Aggregate, Aggregate, Mass of Mass of atch, in Unit in Unit Aggregate Materials
Ibm Ibm
B+27 B+27 FinelbmAgg., Agg.,Carselbm f)Yd3 d3Batch'
0 d3Batch'
( in
d3Sample' "'./--inple'
Air
Cement
Water
Fine
Aggregate
No. 4 to
I inches
Plus
inches, Vo =
Totals
Figure 1 la. - Sample worksheet for aggregate correction factorand air content of concrete (inch-pound units, sheet 1 of 2).
364
USBR 4231
AIR CONTENT
Mm D Aj GI or Am At Am
Mass of Tare Mass Mm - BT Air-Meter Aggregate Aa- GI or(/g 100 A V IOOA V
Concrete Air-Meter of Air-Meter S Reading of Correction True Air'-- l O0 V,- A, Vo 100 v= + Am ( v. - v=
Sample Bowl and Bowl, Density of Test Sample, Factor, Content of Air Content of Air Content
No. Test Sample, Test Sample, Test Sample, Full Mixture, of Mortar,
Ibm Ibm lbm/fO % % % % %
44.gZ ze4 14#.o 4.4 o.a 3.5 8:.4
Figure 1 la. -- Sample worksheet for aggregatecorrection factor and air content of concrete (inch-pound units, sheet 2 of 2).
365
USBR 4231
Spec.
Solic. or
No. D 6"- ' 820 Structure/oo',Ea/_o D,4 Tested by 8U,Et Date
/2-/6'-7o
Air
Cement
Water
Fine
Agsreate
4.75 to
__ mm
Plus
am, Vo =
Totals
Figure 1 lb. - Sample worksheet for aggregatecorrection factor and air content of concrete (SI-metric units, sheet 1 of 2).
366
USBR 4231
AIR CONTENT
M, D, A, GI or:) Am At Am
Figure 1 lb. -- Sample worksheet for aggregatecorrection factor and air content of concrete SI-metric units, sheet 2 of 2).
APPENDIX
X1. CALIBRATION OF TYPE A APPARATUS
(Mandatory Information)
X1.1 The symbols used in this appendix are of the expressed as a percentage of volume of measuring bowl.
generic type; more explicit use of the symbols, complete Calculate R as follows:
with subscripts, is shown on the worksheets, figures 8
through 11. _/o.98 w
R -- ](100) (1)
X1.2 Calibration tests shall be performed in accordance
with the following methods as applicable to the meter
type being used. where:
X1.3 Calibration of Calibration VesseL-Determine
accurately the mass of water, w, required to fill calibration R = effective volume of calibration vessel
vessel, using a scale accurate to 0.1 percent of mass of expressed as a percentage of volume of
vessel filledwith water. measuring bowl,
X1.4 Calibration ofMeasuring Bowl.-Determine mass u, = mass of water required to fill calibration
of water, W, required to fill measuring bowl, using a scale vessel, in pound mass (kilograms); and
accurate to 0.1 percent of mass of bowl filled with water. W = mass of water required to fill measuring bowl,
Slide a glass plate carefully over flangeof bowl in a manner in pound mass (kilograms)..
to ensure that bowl is completely filled with water. A thin
film of cup grease smeared on flange of bowl will make NOTE Xl.1.-The factor 0.98 in equation (1) is used to correct
for the reduction in volume of air in calibration vessel when
a watertight jointbetween glass plate and top of bowl.
air is compressed by a depth of water equal to depth of measuring
X1.5 Effective Volume of Calibration VesseL-The bowl. This factor is about 0.98 for an 8-inch (203-ram) deep
constant R represents effective volume of calibration vessel measuring bowl at sea level. This value decreasesto about 0.975
367
USBR 4231
at 5,000 feet (1524 m) above sea level, and to 0.970 at 13,000 feet X1.8 Calibration Test to Determine Operating
(3962.4 m) above sea level. The value of this constant will decrease Pressure on Pressure Gauge for Meters Similar to Meter
by about 0.01 for each 4-inch (102-mm) increase in bowl depth. Shown on Figure 2.-If rim of calibrationvessel contains
no recesses or projections,install three or more spacers
X1.5.1 Figures8 and 9 show typical calculation forms
equallyspaced aroundcircumferenceof vessel. Invertvessel
for determining volume of calibration vessel and air-meter and place at center of dry bottomof rfieasuring bowl. The
bowl. spacers willprovidean openingfor the flow of water into
X1.6 Determination of Allowance for Expansion
vessel when pressureis applied. Secure the invertedvessel
Factor.-Determinethe expansion factor D (note X1.2) against displacementand carefullylower cover assembly.
by fillingapparatus with water only and applying an air For meters similar to the meter shown on figure 3, the
pressure approximately equal to operating pressure P, as calibrationvessel is maintained in the upright position.
determined by calibration test described in section X1.8. Fill the meter bowl with water. After cover is clamped
Ensure that all entrapped air has been removed and that in place, carefullyadjust apparatus assembly to a vertical
water level is exactly on zero mark (note X1.3). The amount positionand add water at existinga!r temperature, using
the water column lowers will be the equivalent expansion the tube and funnel, until water rises above zero mark
factor, D, for that particular apparatus and pressure on standpipe. Close the vent, and pump air into apparatus
(note X1.4). to approximateoperating pressure. Incline the assembly
about 30 from vertical and, using bottom of bowl as a
NOTE X1.2.-Although the bowl, cover, and clamping
pivot, inscribeseveral complete circles with upper end of
mechanism of the apparatus must necessarily be sturdily
constructed so that it will be pressuretight, the application of standpipe. During this operation,tap the cover and sides
internal pressure will result in a small increase in volume. This of bowl lightlyto remove any entrapped air adhering to
expansion will not affect the test results because, as described inner surfacesof apparatus.Return apparatusto a vertical
in sections 7 and 9, the amount of expansion is the same for position,gradually release pressure(to avoid loss of air
the test for air in concrete as for the test for the aggregate from calibrationvessel), and open vent. Bring water level
correction factor on combined fine and coarse aggregates, and exactlyto zero mark by bleedingwater through the petcock
is thereby automatically cancelled. However, this expansion does in top of conicalcover. After closingvent, apply pressure
enter into calibration test to determine air pressure to be used until water level has dropped an"amount equivalent to
in testing fresh concrete. about 0.1 to 0.2 percent of air more than the value of
the calibrationreading, K, as determinedin x 1.7. To relieve
NOTE X1.3.-The water columns on some type A meters are local restraints, lightlytap sides of bowl and, when water
marked with an initial water level and a zero mark, the difference
level is exactly at value of calibration reading, K, read
between these two marks being the allowance for the expansion
factor. This allowance should be checked in the same manner the pressureP, as indicatedby gauge, and record to nearest
as for meters not having these marks. For meters with such 0.1 lbf/in2 (0.7 kPa). Graduallyrelease pressureand open
marks, the expansion factor should be omitted when computing vent to determinewhetherwater level returns to zero mark
the calibration readings in section X1.8. when sides of bowl are tapped lightly, failure to do so
indicatesloss of air from calibrationvesse! or loss of water
NOTE X1.4.-For this procedure, it is sufficiently accurate to due to a leak in assembly. If watei level fails to return
use an approximate value for P, as determined by making a to within 0.05 percent air of zero. mark and no leakage
preliminary calibration test as described in section X1.8 except other than a few drops of water occul:s,some air probably
that an approximate value for the calibration reading, K, should was lost from calibration vessel. In this case, repeat
be used. For this test, K= 0.98 R. The expansion factor D, calibrationprocedure from the start. If leakage is more
as yet unknown, is assumed to be zero. than a few dropsof water, tighten the leakingjointbefore
repeating calibrationprocedure. Check indicatedpressure
X1.7 Calibration Reading.-The calibration reading, K,
is the final meter reading to be obtained when meter is reading promptlyby bringingwater level exactly to zero
operated at correct calibration pressure. This reading is mark, closing vent, and applying,the pressure, P, just
determined: determined.Tap gauge lightlywith a. finger. When gauge
indicates the exact pressure, P, the water column should
K = R + D (2) read the value of the calibrationre'ading, K, that was used
in the initialpressureapplicationwithinabout0.05 percent
where: of air.
K = calibration reading, in percent; Caution: The apparatus assembly must not be moved
D = expansion factor (sec. X1.6 and note X1.5), in from the verticalpositionuntilpressurehas been applied,
percent; and whichwill force water about one-thirdof the way up into
R = as previously defined. calibrationvessel. Any loss of air from vessel will nullify
the calibration.
NOTE X1.5.-If water column indicator is graduated to include
an initial water level and a zero mark, with the difference between X1.9 Figure 10 shows a typical worksheet for
the two marks being equivalent to expansion factor, the term determining expansion factor D, calibration reading K,
D shall be omitted from equation (2). and operating pressure P
368
USBR 4231
APPENDIX
X2.1 The symbols used in this appendix are of The test shall be repeated to check the adjusted initial
the generic type; more explicit use of the symbols, pressure line.
complete with subscripts, is shown on the worksheets,
figure 8 through 11. NOTE X2.1.-This determination may be accomplished in
conjunction with calibration test described in section X2.8.
X2.2 Calibration tests shall be performed in
accordance with the following methods as applicable X2.7 Calibration Reading.-The calibration reading, K,
to the meter type being used. is the final meter reading to be obtained when meter is
X2.3 Calibration of Calibration VesseL-Determine operated at correct calibration pressure For the type B
accurately the mass of water, w, required to fillcalibration meter, the calibration reading is the same as the effective
vessel, using a scale accurate to 0.1 percent of mass of volume of the calibration vessel:
vessel filledwith water
X2.4 Calibration OfMeasuring BowL-Determine mass
of water, W, required to fill measuring bowl, using a scale K = R (2)
accurate to 0.1 percent: of mass of bowl filled with water.
Slide a glass.plate carefully over flange of bowl in a manner where:
to ensure that bowl is mmpletely filled with water. A thin
K = calibration reading, in percent; and
film of cup grease sneared on flange of bowl will make
R = as previously defined.
a watertight joint between glass plate and top of bowl.
X2.5 Effective Volume of Calibration VesseL-The
X2.8 Calibration Test to Check Air Content Gradua-
constant R representsZeffective volume of calibration vessel
tionson Pressure Gauge.-Fill measuring bowl with water
expressed as a percentage of volume of measuring bowl.
as described in X2.4. Screw the short piece of tubing or
The depth of measuring bowl and atmospheric pressure
pipe furnishedwith apparatus into threaded petcock hole
do not affect the effective volume of vessel for type B
on underside of cover assembly, and assemble apparatus.
meters. Calculate R as follows:
Close air valve between air chamber and measuring bowl,
and open the two petcocks on holes through cover assembly.
Add water through the petcock on cover assembly having
the extension below until all air is expelled from second
where: petcock. Pump air into air chamber until pressure reaches
indicated initial pressure line. Allow a few seconds for
R = effective volume of calibration vessel compressed air to cool to normal temperature. Stabilize
expressed as a percentage of volume of gauge hand at initial pressure line by pumping or bleeding
measuring bowl, off air as necessary while lightly tapping gauge. Close
w = mass of water required to fill calibration ves- petcock not provided with tube or pipe extension on
sel, in pbund mass (kilograms); and underside of cover Remove water from assembly to
W = mass of wafer required to fill measuring bowl, calibration vessel controlling the flow, depending on
in pound mass (kilograms). particular meter design, by opening petcock provided with
tube or pipe extension and cracking air valve between air
X2.5.1 Figures8 and 9 show typical calculation forms chamber and measuring bowl or by opening air valve and
for determining volume of calibration vessel and air-meter using petcock to control flow. Perform calibration at an
bowl. air content which is within normal range of use. If
X2.6 Determination of Allowance for Expansion calibration vessel has a capacity within normal range of
Factor.-The allowanc for the expansion factor, D, is use (set. X2.3), remove exactly that amount of water With
included in the difference between the initial pressure some meters, the calibration vessel is quite small, which
indicated on pressure gauge and zero-percent mark on air- makes it necessary to remove its capacity several times
content scale on gauge. This allowance shall be checked to obtain an air content within normal range of use. In
by filling apparatus with water and pumping air into air this instance, carefully collect water in an auxiliary container
chamber until gauge hfind is stabilized at indicated initial and determine amount removed by determining mass to
pressure line, and then releasing air to measuring bowl nearest 0.1 percent. Calculate the correct volume, R, using
(note X2.1). During this operation, ensure that all equation (1). Release air from apparatus at petcock not
entrapped air has been removed. If initial pressure line used for filling calibration vessel and, if apparatus uses
is correctly positioned, gauge should read zero percent. an auxiliary tube for filling vessel, open petcock to which
The initial pressure line shall be adjusted if two or more tube is connected to drain tube back into measuring bowl
determinations show the same variation from zero percent. (note X2.2). At this point, measuring bowl contains the
369
USBR 4231
370
.J) UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
" BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
BLEEDING OF CONCRETE
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4232; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 232-71 (Reapproved 1977).
METHOD A - SAMPLE CONSOLIDATED 4.1 This method may involve hazardous materials,
BY TAMPING operations, and equipment, and does not claim to address
all safety problems associated with its use. It is the
3. Apparatus responsibility of the user to consult and establish
appropriate safety and health practices and determine
3.1 Container.-A cylindrical container of about 0.5 ft3
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
(0.014 m 3) capacity, with an inside diameter of 101/4
inches (2546.4 ram) and an inside height of 111/4 inches 5. Test Specimen
(2796.4 mm). Container shall be made of a metal having
a thickness of No. 10 to No. 12 U.S. gauge (3.6 to 2.8
5.1 For concrete made in laboratory, prepare concrete
as described in USBR 4192. For concrete made in field,
I AnnualBook ofASTMStandards, vol. 04.02. sample concrete as described in USBR 4172.
371
USBR 4232
4 Lucjs to slip
f / into container _ " 15 "I
!
.,,El
I' '11'
'l i =
L Z,I I
, p I1"
BLEEDING CONTAINER
L,I
;
5.2 The apparatus described in this method may be surface at 10-minute intervals during first 40 minutes and
used with samples of concrete containing any size aggregate at 30-minute intervals thereafter until cessation of bleeding.
graded up to and including a nominal maximum size of To facilitate collection of bleeding water, tilt specimen
1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm). Concrete containing aggregate carefully by placing a block about 2 inches (50 ram) thick
larger than 1-1/2 inches shall be wet sieved over a under one side of container 2 minutes prior to each time
1-1/2-inch sieve and test performed on portion of sample water is withdrawn. After water is removed, return
that passes this sieve. container to a level position without jarring. After each
5.3 Fill container with concrete in accordance with withdrawal, transfer water to a 100-cm 3 graduate. Record
section 7 of USBR 4138, except that container shall be accumulated quantity of water after each transfer. When
filled to a height of 10+1/8 inches (254-t-3.2 mm). Level only the total volume of bleeding is to be determined,
top surface of concrete to a reasonably smooth surface by the periodic removal procedure may be omitted and entire
a minimum amount of troweling. amount may be removed in a single operation. To determine
mass of bleeding water and to exclude material present
6. Calibration and Standardization other than the water, carefully decant contents of cylinder
into a metal beaker. Determine and record mass of beaker
6.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- plus contents. Dry beaker plus contents to a constant mass
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests and record final mass. The difference between the two
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are mass determinations is the mass of the bleeding water.
covered under that particular procedure or standard. The mass of the sludge may also be obtained, if desired,
by subtracting mass of beaker.
7. Procedure
8. Calculations
7.1 During test, maintain ambient temperature
between 65 and 75 F (18.3 and 23.9 C). Immediately 8.1 Calculate volume of bleeding water per unit area
after troweling surface of specimen, record time and of surface as follows:
determine mass of container plus contents. Place specimen V1
V -- (1)
and container on a level platform or floor that is free A
from noticeable vibration, and cover container to prevent where:
evaporation of bleed water. Keep cover in place throughout
test, except when drawing off water. Remove with a pipet V = volume of bleeding water per unit area of surface
or similar instrument the water that has accumulated on in cubic feet (cubic centimeters),
372
USBR 4232
V1 = volume of bleeding water measured during to shaft of motor by a setscrew. The eccentric shall be
selected time interval in cubic feet (cubic fabricated from cold-rolled stock in accordance with details
centimeters), and and dimensions shown on figure 2. The hole through the
A = surface area of concrete in square feet (square eccentric shall be 34/64 inch (13.5 mm) or an appropriate
centimeters). size to accommodate motor shaft. The platform shall be
supported on rubber supports resting on a concrete slab.
8.1.1 The comparative rate of bleeding can be The concrete slab should be separated from the floor by
determined as test progresses by comparing volume of a layer of cork (fig. 2).
bleeding water for each equal time interval. 11.2 Timer.-A timing device to regulate periods of
8.2 Calculate the accumulated bleeding water, vibration of platform and specimen shall be provided in
expressed as a percentage of free (above saturated-surface- accordance with section 12.
dry) mixing water contained within test specimen, as 11.3 The remainder of the apparatus is identical with
follows:
that given in sections 3.1 through 3.8.
C= (m)
(S) (2) 12. Vibrating Cycle
Bleeding (percent) = D(100) (3) 12.1 The vibrating cycle shall be power on for 3
seconds, power off for 30 seconds. However, due to coasting
of motor after power is turned off, period of perceptible
where: vibration is about 7 seconds.
C = mass of water in test specimen in pound mass 13. Test Specimen
(grams),
M = total mass of batch in pound mass (kilograms),
13.1 Sample shall be prepared as described in section
m = free mass of water in batch in pound mass
5.1.
(kilograms),
13.2 Sample shall be placed in container to a depth
S = mass of sample in pound mass (grams), and
equal to about one-half the average diameter of container.
D = mass of bleeding water in pound mass (grams)
Size of the test sample can best be regulated by mass;
or total volume withdrawn from test speci-
a sample with a mass of 45+1 Ibm (20.4+0.5 kg) usually
men in cubic feet (cubic centimeters) multi-
meets the requirements for the apparatus.
plied by 62.4 lbm/ft 3 (1 g/cm3).
14. Procedure
8.3 Figure 3 shows a typical calculation form.
373
USBR 4232
ii
24 II
14
"]
lip,.. - __ m
i
|1 IF
,. 13 7"...
I" _5"
DETAILS OF UNBALANCED
TOP VIEW
MASS (110 GRAMS
i II ii
12 I 13
17.1 The single operator-day-multibatch standard NOTE 2.-Values of precision shown in section 17.1 are the
deviation has been found to be 0.71 percent for a bleeding 1S and D2S limits as described in ASTM C 670.
range from 0 to 10 percent, 1.06 percent from 10 to 20
percent, and 1.77 percent for more than 20 percent.
Therefore, results of two properly conducted tests by same 17.2 The bias for method B has not been established.
374
USBR 4232
BLEEDING OF CONCRETE
CONCRETE MATERIALS
TypeandSourceofPortlandCement: TyP2 ZAj A,I2"o,v'A Po,,r-'A,,V',oj R/." L/r'oa AZ
Class and Source of Pozzolan: " . .s ktf'..s'',,,,- AsN C'-".At/c..s'D.,4' .4 Z
AEA: P,o 7"E) Other Admixtures: P,o TEX P,O,,e - 5"
MIX PROPORTIONS
Water, Cement Pozzolan, Sand, Coarse Aggregate AEA, WRA, Density,
Ibm Ibm Ibm Ibm No. 4 to 3/4 inch, 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches, 1-1/2 to 3 inches, ounces ounces lbm/yd 3
Ibm Ibm Ibm
234 434 /o q l /q8 ,P o r," c? 23 ,3, 7 72
M (Mass of Batch): Ibm, m (Mass of Water in Batch): 2.4 Ibm, S (Mass of Sample): 79. / Ibm
Container: Diameter //. O inches, Height //. O inches, A (Area of Exposed Concrete) (wD2/4) o. 66" ft2
Mass of Beaker: O. 22. 7 Ibm, Ambient Temperature: 70 F
Mass of sludge, Ibm 0.011 to.@20 0.027 0oO3l . to35 0. 03" O. 03ff
D, Mass of bleed water, Ibm 0. 035" O. 0,4- o. o/5" to. tooq O. 0 05 0. 003 0. 0 q I
375
USBR 4232
BLEEDING OF CONCRETE
CONCRETE MATERIALS
Type and Source of Portland Cement: TYPE 27" ',4. A,/aro,/A Po,7"z.A.v. s[../7"o, .,4.Z
Class and Source of Pozzolan: "-',4a'_w , /4,",e",T'" .rH, AAr'=A=a 4.Z
AEA: ,o 7"x' Other Admixtures: Peo"3 ,ObA-_a"
MIX PROPORTIONS
Water, Cement Pozzolan, Sand, Coarse Aggregate AEA, WRA, Density,
kg kg kg kg 4.75 to 19.0 mm, 19.0 to 37.5 mm, 37.5 to 75 mm, mL mL kg/m 3
kg kg kg
long /q7 4q K.4 36 7 4.4d? 2d; 73 17/I
M (Mass of Batch): / 7// kg, m (Mass of Water in Batch): /O6 kg, S (Mass of Sample): 3 oO grams
Container: Diameter o 7 r ram, Height 7 q ram, A (Area of ExposedConcrete) (7rD2/4) d/3. I cm 2
Mass of Beaker: /o.8 grams, Ambient Temperature: 2. l C
376
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4233-92
PROCEDURE FOR
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4233; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 233-82.
377
USBR 4233
Sieve size Percentageretained under test is for use in specific work (sec. 3.4), in which
(individual) case the air content used in selecting proportions shall
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 0 to 5 be the median of the range to be permitted in the work.
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 5 to 15 If lightweight aggregatesare to be used in specific work,
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 10 to 25* the density of concrete used in selecting proportions shall
No. 30 (600 #m) 10 to 30 be the median of the range permitted in the work.
No. 50 (300 #m) 15 to 35 4.1.4 Water and sand content shall be adjusted to
No. 100 (150 #m) 12 to 20 obtain a slump of 2-1/2+1/2 inches (63.5+12.7 mm).
Pan 3 Workability of concrete mixture shall be suitable for
consolidation by hand rodding, and mixture shall have
* If individual percentage retained on No. 16 sieve minimum water content possible. These conditions shall
is 20 percent or less, maximum limit for percentage be achieved by final adjustments in the proportion of fine
retained on No. 8 sieve may be increased to 20 percent.
aggregateto total aggregate,or both, while maintaining
3.2.3 Coarse Aggregate Grading.-The maximum yield and slump in required ranges.
size aggregate shall be 1-1/2 inches (37.5 ram). The coarse 4.2 Conditions.-Concrete mixtures shall be prepared
aggregate shall be separated into two size fractions,No. with both the air-entraining admixture under test and with
4 to 3/4 inch (4.75 to 19.0 mm) and 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches. the reference admixture. Admixtures shall be added in
These two fractions shall be combined in equal masses. amounts necessary to produce air content selected in
For the No. 4 to 3/4-inch fraction,a minimum of 50 percent accordance with 4.1.3 within a tolerance of -t-0.5 percent
should be retained on the 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) sieve. For of concrete volume.
the 3/4- to 1-1/2-inch fraction,a minimum of 25 percent
should be retained on the 1-1/4-inch (31.5-mm) sieve. 5. Precautions
3.3 Reference Admixture.-For this procedure, unless
otherwise requested by purchaser, the reference admixture 5.1 No particular hazards exist in performing the tests
used in the concrete mixture specified in section 4 shall required under this procedure to justify special safety
be "neutralized Vinsol resin. ''6 precautions.
3.4 Specific Use Test Materials.-When it is desired to 5.2 Specific precautions in selection of materials,
test an air-entraining admixture for use in specific work, preparation of mix, preparation of specimens, and methods
cement and aggregatesshould be representative of those of curing and testing are covered throughout this test
proposed for use in the work, and concrete mixtures should procedure.
be designed to have the cement content specified for use
in the work (note 1). If maximum size of coarse aggregate 6. Calibration and Standardization
is greater than 1-1/2 inches, the freshly mixed concrete
shall be screened over a 1-1/2-inch sieve prior to fabricating 6.1 Calibration of testing equipment is covered under
test specimens in accordance with wet sieving procedure the individual test procedures referenced in section 2.
described in USBR 4172.
6.2 Standardization of materials is covered in sections
3.5 Preparation and Determination of Mass.-All 3 and 4. Standardization of solutions for check tests for
materials shall be prepared and all mass determinations uniformity are covered in section 12.
shall be made as prescribed in sections 3, 4, and 7 of USBR
4192. 7. Mixing
4. Concrete Mixtures
7.1 Machine mix concrete as prescribed in USBR 4192.
4.1 Proportions.-Using USBR 4211, all concrete shall
be proportioned to conform to requirements of sections 8. Tests and Properties of Freshly Mixed
4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, and 4.1.4. Concrete
4.1.1 Cement content shall be 517+4.7 lbm/yd3
(307+2.8 kg/m3), except when tests are being made for 8.1 The minimum number of tests shall be as shown
specific uses (sec. 3.4). in table 1. Test samples of freshly mixed concrete from
4.1.2 Initial trial mixture shall contain the percent- at least three separate batches for each condition of concrete
age of sand shown in USBR 4211 for the maximum size shall be prepared in accordance with the followingUSBR
of aggregate and for the fineness modulus of sand being designations:
used.
4.1.3 Air content used in computation of proportions Slump.-See USBR 4143.
for all concrete shall be 5.0 percent except where admixture Air Content.-See USBR 4231. When lightweight
aggregates are used under the provisions of section 3.4,
use USBR 4173.
6 Vinsol resin is manufactured by Hercules Inc., Wilmington, Delaware. Bleeding.-See USBR 4232.
Neutralization may be accomplished by treating 100 parts Vinsol resin
with 9 to 15 parts of sodium hydroxide by mass. In an aqueous solution, Time-of-Setting.-See USBR 4403, except that
the ratio of water to resinate shall not exceed 12:1 by mass. temperature of each ingredient of concrete mixtures,
378
USBR 4233
just prior to mixing, and temperature at which time- 10.2 Types of Specimens.-Prepare specimens made
of-setting specimens are stored during test period shall from concrete with the air-entrainingadmixture under test
be 73.4-1-3 F (23.0+1.7 C). and with the reference admixture in accordance with
sections 10.2.1, 10.2.2, and 10.2.3.
9. Preparation of Test Specimens 10.2.1 Compressive Strength.-Make and cure test
specimens in accordance with USBR 4192.
9.1 Specimens for the test of hardened concrete, 10.2.2 Resistance to Freezing and Thawing.-Test
representing each test and age of test and each condition specimens shall consist of cylinders made and cured in
of concrete being compared, shall be made from at least accordance with the applicable requirement of USBR 4192.
three separate batches. The minimum number of specimens The cylinders shall be 3 by 6 inches (76 by 152 mm),
shall be as shown in table 1. On a given day, at least with the +3/4-inch (+19.0-mm) material removed by wet
one specimen shall be made for each test and age of test screening. Make one set of specimens from the concrete
from each condition of concrete except that at least two mixture containing the air-entraining admixture under test
specimens for the freezing and thawing test shall be made and from the reference concrete mixture; the air content
from each condition of concrete. The preparation of all of each mixture being as specified in section 4.2.
specimens shall be completed in 3 days of mixing. 10.2.3 Length Change=Make and cure test speci-
9.2 Manifestly Faulty Specimens-Each group of mens in accordance with ASTM C 157. The moist-curing
specimens representing a given test or a given age of test, period, including time in molds, shall be 14 days.
including tests of freshlymixed concrete, shall be examined
visually before or during test, or both, whichever is 11. Tests on Hardened Concrete
appropriate. Discard any specimen found to be manifestly
faultyby such examination. Visually examine all specimens
representing a given test at a given age after testing, and 11.1 Test specimens of hardened concrete in accordance
should any specimen be found to be manifestly faulty, with sections 11.1.1, 11.1.2, and 11.1.3.
disregard test results. Should more than one specimen 11.1.1 Compressive Strength.-SeeUSBR 4039. Test
representing a given test at a given age be foundmanifestly specimens at 3, 7, and 28 days; 6 months; and 1 year (note
faulty, either before or after testing, entire test shall be 2). Calculate compressive strength of concrete containing
disregarded and repeated. The test result reported shall admixture under test as a percentage of compressive
be the average of the individual test results of specimens strength of reference concrete by dividing average
tested or, in the event that one specimen or one result compressive strength of specimens made from concrete
has been discarded, it shall be the average of the test results containing admixture under test at a given age of test by
of remaining specimens. average compressive strength of specimens made from
reference concrete at same age of test, and multiply quotient
10. Test Specimens of Hardened Concrete by 100.
10.1 Number of Specimens.-Make six or more test NOTE 2.-When tests are conducted with materials represen-
specimens for the freezing and thawing test, and three tative of those proposed for use in specific work in accordance
or more test specimens for each of the other types of with section 3.4, and if results of tests are required in a period
test and age of test as specified in table 1 for each condition of time that will not permit curing of specimens to the ages
of concrete to be compared. of 6 months and 1 year, the tests at those ages may be waived.
379
USBR 4233
11.1.2 Resistance to Freezing and Thavcing.-See in accordance with USBR 4185. The air-entraining
USBR 4666. The six specimens for freeze-thaw testing admixtures shall be combined with mixing water prior
shall be cured before being placed under test. Three to start of mixing procedure. The determinations for both
cylinders shall be cured 28 days at 100-percent relative reference test sample and acceptance sample should be
humidity at 73.4+3 F (23+1.7 C). The other three made on same day. Any changes in air-entraining capacity
cylinders shall be cured 14 days at 100-percent relative of acceptance sample as successive check tests are made
humidity at 73.4+3F, and followedby 76 additional days should be noted.
of curing at 50-percent relative humidity at 73.4+3 E
11.1.3 LengthChange.-SeeASTM C157. The drying 13. Conditioning
period shall be 14 days.
13.1 Conditioning of materials is covered under
NOTE 3.-Applicable only when specifically required by
purchaser for use in structures where length change may be of sections 3, 4, and 7 through 12.
critical importance.
14. Procedure
12. Check Tests for Uniformity
14.1 The procedure of testing is covered under sections
12.1 The check tests listed in ASTM C 260 covering 3, 4, and 7 through 12.
"Optional Uniformity Requirements"shall be determined
as described in sections 12.1.1, 12.1.2, and 12.1.3. 15. Calculations
12.1.1 pH.-The pH of liquid, air-entraining
admixtures shall be determined in accordancewith ASTM
15.1 Calculations involved in the referenced procedures
E 70. Nonliquid admixtures should be prepared in solution
of section 2 are covered in each respective procedure.
concentration when required for use as a preliminary to
determining pH (note 4). The temperature of check test
sample shall be within +2 F (+1 C) of that for the 16. Report
acceptance sample and preferably in the range from 70
to 80 F (21 to 27 C). The sample taken should be sufficient 16.1 Figure 1 shows a typical reporting form, the report
to fill container so as to minimize carbonation. shall include:
NOTE 4.-Unless there is a reason to do otherwise, dissolve Results of tests specified in this procedure as
material in water in proportions specified for job use as shown compared with requirements of ASTM C 260.
on package or in other manufacturer's instructions. Brand name, manufacturer's name and lot number,
character of material, and quantity represented by
12.1.2 Specific Gravity.-The specific gravity of sample of admixture under test.
liquid, air-entraining admixtures shall be determined in Brand name, manufacturer's name, and other data
accordance with ASTM D 1429, sections 6 to 10, or by on reference admixture.
a hydrometer meeting the requirements of ASTM E 100, Brand name, manufacturer's name, type, and test
series 111H-120H. Nonliquid admixtures should be data on the portland cement portion of the cements
prepared in solution concentration when required for use used.
as a preliminary to determining specific gravity (note 4). Description of and test data on the fine and coarse
The temperature of check test sample shall be within +2 o F aggregates used.
(+1 C) of that for the acceptance sample and preferably Detailed data on concrete mixtures used, including
in the range from 70 to 80 F (21 to 27 C); the same amounts and proportions of admixtures used, actual
test method shall be used for the determination. The cement factors, water-cement ratios, ratios of fine to
reagent water should meet the requirements of ASTM total aggregate, consistency, and air content.
D 1193. In the event that, in accordance with provisions of
12.1.3 Air Content of Mortar.-Using the same note 2 or 3, some of the tests have been waived, the
amounts of successive lots of air-entraining admixtures with circumstances under which such action was taken shall
the same cement, determine the air contents of mortars be stated.
380
USBR 4233
E
o0
._
.,
e
._
e,.
r2
..-.
._
v
._ct.
38l
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4266-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4266; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation C 266-77.
3.1 Scales.-For scales currently in use, the permissible 5. Calibration and Standardization
variation at a load of 1000 grams shall be +1 gram;
permissible variation on new scales shall be one-half this
5.1 Calibration and standardization of miscellaneous
value.
equipment or apparatusused in performing the tests listed
under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are covered
I Annual Book ofASTMSrandards, vol. 04.01. under that particular procedure or standard directly.
2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, vol. 04.02. 5.2 Scales shall be calibrated to conform to section 3.1
3 Formerly National Bureau of Standards. in accordancewith USBR 1012.
382
USBR 4266
5.3 Glass graduates shall be accepted upon certification of-setting are being made. A time-of-set specimen and an
by manufacturer to conform to ASTM C 490, autoclave bar may be made from same batch.
5.4 The Gillmore needles shall be calibrated to conform 7.2 Time-of-Setting Determination.-When determin-
to requirements of section 3.3 by using scales conforming ing time-of-setting, hold needles in a vertical position and
to section 5.2 and linear measurement devices in accordance apply lightly to surface of pat. Consider cement to have
with USBR 1000. acquired its initial set when pat will bear, without
appreciable indentation, the initial Gillmore needle.
6. Conditioning Consider cement to hive acquired its final set when pat
will bear, without appreciable indentation, the final
6.1 Temperature andHumidity: Gillmore needle.
6.1.1 The temperature of air in vicinity of mixing 7.3 Precautions.-The time-of-setting is affected not
slab, dry cement, and Gillmore needles shall be maintained only by percentage and temperature of water used and
between 68 and 81.5 F (20 and 27.5 C). The temperature amount of kneading paste received, but also by temperature
of mixing water and of moist closet or moist room shall and humidity of air. Therefore, thedetermination of time-
not vary from 73.4 F (23 C) by more than 3 F (1.7 C). of-setting is only approximate.
6.1.2 The relative humidity of laboratory shall be
not less than 50 percent. The moist closet or moist room. 8. Calculations
shall be so constructed as to provide storage facilities for
test specimens at a relative humidity of not less than 90 8.1 A typical calculation form is shown on figure2.
percent.
6.2 Preparation of Cement Paste.-Mix 650 grams of 9. Report
cement with percentage of mixing water required for
normal consistency (USBR 4187) followingthe procedure.
9.1 A suggested reporting form is shown on figure 5
described in USBR 4305. Distilled water is preferable and
of USBR 4183.
shall be used for all referee or cooperative tests.
7.1 Molding Test Specimen.-From cement paste 10.1 No precision data are available at this time,
prepared as described in section 6.2, make a pat about statements on precision and bias will be included in a later
3 inches (76 mm) in diameter and 1/2-inch (13 mm) in revision of this procedure.
thickness at center, with a flat top and tapering to a thin
edge (fig. 1). Place pat on a flat, clean, glass plate about 11. References
4 inches (102 mm) square. In molding the pat, flatten
cement paste initially on glass plate and then form pat 11.1 For additional information on details of cement
by drawing trowel from outer edge toward center; then test methods, reference may be made to the "Manual of
flatten top. Place pat in moist closet or moist room and Cement Testing," which appears in the Annual Book of
allow to remain there except when determinations of time- ASTMStandards, vol. 04.01.
383
USBR 4266
Time Time-of-Setting
hour:minutes hour:minutes
Sample Brand Plant or Cement, Water, Penetration, Initial Final
No. Name ID Class grams mL mm Start Set Set Initial Final
d'd'Z -
7ol /V'.Z" h'J" d.q'o /5"g /I q.'2o //:5 2:0o 2:35 #." 4o
CCA'L -
80 HA" N'.Z" NI d'o /dd /o .'35 /d.'/o Z:4a Z:35 5:oS
NOTES:
,'VZ -- A/or .Z'o-wr,,F'/Eo
384
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4295-92
PROCEDURE FOR
PETROGRAPHIC EXAMINATION
OF AGGREGATE FOR CONCRETE
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4295; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 295-79.
385
USBR 4295
386
USBR 4295
5.1.1 Apparatus and Supplies for Preparation of Laboratoriesmay find it reasonable to buy a thin-section
Specimens: machine or use a commercial thin-section maker. Remotely
located laboratories have more need to be able to make
(E) Rock-CuttingSaw=Preferably with a 14-inch their own thin sections.
(350-mm) or larger diamond blade, and automatic feed. 5.3 It is necessary that facilities be available to the
(E) Horizontal Grinding WheeL-Preferably 16 petrographer to check index of refraction of immersion
inches (400 mm) in diameter. media. If accurate identification of materials is to be
Polishing WheeL-Preferably 8 to 12 inches (200 to attempted; e.g., the differentiation of quartz and chalcedony
300 ram) in diameter. or differentiation of basic from intermediate volcanic glass,
(E) Abrasives.-Silicon carbide grit No. 100 (122 #m), the indexes of refraction of the media need to be known
No. 220 (63 #m), No. 320 (31 #m), No. 600 (16 #m), with accuracy. Media will not be stable for very long periods
and No. 800 (12 #m); alumina M-305 (5 #m). and are subject to considerable variation due to temperature
Geologist's Pick or Hammer. change. In laboratories not provided with good temperature
(E) MicroscopeSlides.-Clear, noncorrosive,1- by control, it is often necessary to recalibrate immersion media
1.75-inch (25- by 45-ram) size. several times during the course of a single day when accurate
(E) Canada Balsam.-Neutral,in xylene, or suitable identifications are required. The equipment needed for
low-viscosityepoxies,or Lakeside 70. checking immersion media consists of an Abbe refractome-
(E) Xylene. ter, which should be equipped with compensating prisms
(E) Mounting Medium.-Suitable for mounting rock to read indexes for sodium light from white light, or it
slices for thin sections. should be used with a sodium arc lamp.
(E) LaboratoryOven. 5.4 A laboratory that undertakes any considerable
(E) Plate-Glass Squares.-About 12 inches (300 mm) amount of petrographic work should be provided with
square for thin-section grinding. facilities to make photomicrographic records of such
(E) Sample SplitterwithPans. features that cannot adequately be described in words.
(E) Micro CoverGlasses.-Noncorrosive, square, 1/2 Photomicrographs can be taken using standard microscope
to 3/4 inch (12 to 18 ram) or 1 inch (25 mm). lamps for illumination; however, it is recommended that
PlatmerMortar. whenever possible a zirconium arc lamp be provided for
this purpose. For illustrations of typical apparatus, ref-
5.1.2 Apparatus and Supplies for Examination of erence may be made to the paper by Mather and Mather [1].
Specimens: Manufacturers of microscopes equipped with cameras and
photomacrographic equipment may also be consulted.
(E) Polarizing Microscope.-With mechanical stage;
low-, medium-, and high-power objectives, and 6. Precautions
objective-centering devices; eye-pieces of various
powers; full- and quarter-wave compensators; quartz 6.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous
wedge. materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim
(E) Microscope Lamps.-Preferablywith a sodium to address all safety problems associated with its use. It
arc lamp. is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish
(E) Stereoscopic Microscope.-With objectives and appropriate safety and health practices and determine
oculars to give final magnifications from about 6 to applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
about 60.
(E) Magnet=Preferably Alnico,or an electromagnet. 7. Sampling
(E) NeedleholderandPoints.
Dropping Botde.-Capacity of 2 ounces (60 mL). 7.1 Samples for petrographic examination should be
Petri CultureDishes. taken by or under the direct supervision of a geologist
Forceps.-Smooth,straightpointed. familiar with the requirements for random sampling of
(E) LensPaper. aggregates for concrete and, in general, following
(E) Immersion Media.- n = 1.410 to 1.785, in requirements of USBR 4075. The exact location from which
increments of 0.005. sample was taken, geology of site, and other pertinent
Counter. data should be submitted with sample. The amount of
Photomicrographic Camera and Accessories. material actually studied in the examination will be
Sieves=Shall meet requirements of ASTM E 11. determined by the nature of the examination to be made
Balances or Scales=Shall meet requirements of and the nature of the material to be examined, as discussed
USBR 4114. in sections 7.1.1 through 7.1.4.
7.1.1 Undeveloped quarries should be sampled by
5.2 The items listed under section 5.1.1 are, in most means of cores drilled through the entire depth expected
cases, those used to make thin sections. Semiautomatic thin- to be productive of sound material. Drilling such cores
section machines are now available, and there are several should be in a direction that is essentially normal to
thin-section makers who advertise in Geotimes, the dominant structural feature of rock. Massive material may
American Mineralogist, and other geological journals. be sampled by "NX," 2-1/8-inch (54-ram) diameter cores.
387
USBR 4295
Thinly bedded or complex material should be represented using smaller sizes. Some important and easily confused
by cores not less than 4 inches (102 ram) in diameter. types may be recognizable using the stereoscopic
There should be an adequate number of cores to cover ' microscope if they are first recognized and separated in
limits of deposit proposed for work under consideration. larger sizes, but may require examination using the
The entire footage of recovered core should be included petrographic microscope if they are first encountered in
in sample, and accurate data given as to elevations, depths, smaller sizes.
and core losses. 8.2 The number of particles of each sieve fraction to
7.1.2 Operating quarries and operating sand and be examined will be fixed by required precision of
gravel deposits, where stockpiles of material produced are determination of the less abundant constituents. Assuming
available, should be represented by not less than 100 pounds that field and laboratory sampling procedures are accurate
(45 kg) or 300 pieces, whichever is larger, of each size and reliable, the number of particles examined, identified,
of material to be examined. Samples from stockpiles should and counted in each sieve fraction will depend on required
be composed of representative portions of larger samples accuracy of the estimate of constituents present in small
collected with due consideration given to segregation in quantities. The numbers given in this procedure are
the piles. minimal; they are based on experience and statistical
7.1.3 Exposed faces of nonproducing quarries, where considerations [2,3]. It is believed that at least 300 particles
stockpiles of processed material are not available, should of each sieve fraction should be identified and counted
be represented by not less than 4 pounds (2 kg) from to obtain reliable results. Precise determinations of small
each distinctive stratum or bed, with no piece weighing quantities of an important constituent will require more
less than 1 pound (0.5 kg), or by a drilled core as described than 300 particles. If sample of a sieve fraction contains
in 7.1.1. many more particles than need to be identified, sample
7.1.4 Undeveloped sand and gravel deposits should shall be reduced in accordancewith one of the procedures
be sampled by test pits excavated to anticipated depth of of USBR 4702.
future economic production. Samples should consist of not
less than the quantities of material indicated in table 1, 9. Calibration and Standardization
selected so as to be representative of deposits.
9.1 Calibration and standardization of miscellaneous
equipment or apparatusused in performing the tests listed
NATURAL GRAVEL AND SAND under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are covered
under that particular procedure or standard directly or by
8. Selection of Samples for Examination reference to another.
9.2 Oven shall be calibrated in accordancewith USBR
1020.
8.1 Samples of gravel and natural sand for petrographic
9.3 The balances or scales shall meet requirements of
examination should be dry sieved in accordancewith USBR
USBR 4114, and shall be calibrated in accordance with
4136 to provide samples of each sieve size. For sands, USBR 1012.
an additional portion should then be tested according to
USBR 4117, with wash water being saved and removed 10. Conditioning
by drying to provide a sample of material passing the No.
200 (75-/zm) sieve. Results of sieve analysis of each sample 10.1 Conditioning required is covered under section 11.
made according to USBR 4136 should be provided to
petrographer for use in calculating results of petrographic 11. Procedure
examination. Each sieve fraction should be examined
separately, starting with largest size. Rocks are more easily 11.1 Examination of Natural Gravel:
recognized in larger pieces; the breakdown of a hetero- 11.1.1 Coatings.-The pebbles shall be examined to
geneous type rock present in the larger sizes may have establish whether exterior coatings are present. If present,
provided particles of several apparently different types it should be determined whether coatings consist of
Table 1. - Minimum sizes for samples from undeveloped sand and gravel deposits.
Sieve size Minimum for sample
Ibm kg No. pieces
> 6 inches (>150 mm)
3 to 6 inches (75 to 150 ram) - - 300*
1-1/2 to 3 inches (37.5 to 75 ram) 400 180 -
3/4 to 1-1/2 inches (19.0 to 37.5 ram) 200 90 -
No. 4 to 3/4 inch (4.75 to 19.0 mm) 100 45 -
Finer than No. 4 (4.75 mm)** 50 23 -
* Not less than one piece from each apparent type of rock.
** Fine aggregate.
388
USBR 4295
389
USBR 4295
Quart;ite Hard; dense; white, yellow, or red; fine-grained; Satisfac- 34.5 29.5
and structureless; slightly absorptive, weathered, tory
sandstone and fractured; includes quartzose, feldspathic-
quartzose, and calcareous sandstones.
Limestone Hard; dense; light gray, yellow, or brown; fine- Satisfac- 29.0 24.5
grained; structureless; slightly absorptive, tory
weathered, and fractured; includes silty,
fossiliferous, and argillaceouslimestones.
Gneiss Hard; dense; green, pink, red, or gray; fine Satisfac- 10.5 14.0
grained; schistose to gneissic; slightly tory
absorptive, weathered, and fractured;
includes granite and diorite gneisses as
well as minor schist and miscellaneous
metamorphic rocks.
Chert I Hard; dense; brown, yellow, or gray; crypto- Satisfac- 7.0 11.5
crystalline to chalcedonic; structureless; tory
slightly weathered and fractured;includes
minor cherty limestone.
Granite Hard; dense; pink, white, and/or yellow; fine Satisfac- 4.0 6.0
to medium grained; structureless; slightly tory
absorptive, weathered, and fractured; includes
minor feldspar grains and monzonite.
Basalt Hard; dense; dark gray; aphanitic; structureless; Satisfao 0.5 1.0
slightly absorptive, weathered, fractured, and tory
vesicular.
390
USBR 4295
Coatings: About 1 percent of particles are less than 5 percent covered with a thin, well-bonded, calcium
carbonate coating.
The No. 4 (4.75-mm) material is lithologically, chemically, and physically similar to the 3/8- to 3/4-
inch (9.5- to 19.0-mm) size fraction.
have been taken and the grain is still unidentified. Grains mm) size fraction unless excessive, in which case they are
that cannot be identified using the stereoscopic microscope, counted in all fractions.
or that are suspected of consisting of or containing 11.2.1.2 After examination is completed, rock and
substances known to react deleteriously in concrete, should mineral types and percentages by particle count are reported
be set aside to be examined with the petrographic in tabular form along with the particle shape and
microscope. If the question of reaction with alkalies (sodium percentages of physically unsound, alkali-reactive, coated,
and potassium) of portland cement paste is important in and flat and/or elongated particles, see figure 3.
the examination of a sample, certain additions to the 11.2.2 Sizes Finer Than No. 30 (600-#m).-The sieve
procedure are indicated. If coarser sand sizes contain fine- fractionsfinerthan the No. 30 (600-/m) sieve should each
grained, possibly glassy, igneous rocks, several typical be reduced in a sample splitter or by quartering to about
particles of each variety of such rocks should be selected 4 or 5 grams. This amount will usually be less than a
for a more thorough examination. The petrographer should level teaspoonful. In some gradations, fractions retained
determine the presence or absence of glass by crushing on the No. 100 (150-tLm) and No. 200 (75-/m) sieves
typical grains and examining them in immersion media may be present in such small amounts that reduction is
using the petrographic microscope. In difficult or especially unnecessary. If not, these splits should be further reduced
important cases, it may be necessary to break suspected on a miniature sample splitter or by coning and quartering
grains and to make immersion mounts of part of the grain with a spatula on a clean sheet of paper. A representative
and a thin section of another part. Where sand contains portion of each reduced split should be mounted in
chert and the potential reactivity of the chert is an immersion oil on a clean glass slide and covered with a
important consideration, a number of chert particles from clean cover glass. No entirely satisfactory method of
fractions retained on the No. 30 (600-tzm) sieve should reducing a split to about 300 grains is known. The reduced
be set aside for determination of index of refraction. split can be sampled by spreading it in a thin layer on
11.2.1.1 The shape of the particles and the glass or clean paper, dragging end of a dissecting needle
percentage by particle count of unsound and alkali-reactive moistened in immersion oil through sample, and
particles in each size fraction shall be determined. The transferring grains that adhere to needle to a drop of
percentages by particle count of coated and flat and/or immersion oil on a clean slide. If this is done carefully,
elongated particles are determined only in the No. 8 (2.36- a fairly representative sample will be obtained. If dissecting
391
USBR 4295
Spec. or
Solic. No. 4'O- C'20 5 StructureT,,I,'A/,E1 / IA,'I,,/'G Tested bye. .-q',/,'A Zo," '-/-Dateo2
PrJ ec""A," TR,,4/, J'TAI Item G'o,4ec. AGe. ,,'-746"8 Computed by Date
LocationgLA4/.A,,o =/_,e,,r., s/,*.," G. SA,A'/zoae aI-/-ae,7
Feature Station Offset Checked by Date
,T/A *' w'A-rA',q 7N'A,'&-/_
Depth to C. 8EcIroo g-o-g2 I
Granite 7 4 3.O
Basalt 1 2 0.5
Remarks:
Fine sands are subrounded to generally angular in shape and consist of decreasing amounts of rock
types found in coarse sand and increasing amounts of monomineralic grains of quartz, feldspar, cal-
cite, mica, amphibole, zircon, epidote, iron oxide, magnetite, clay, and a few miscellaneous detrital
minerals. Fine sands also contain about 1 percent physically unsound material and 5 percent poten-
tially alkali-reactive chert particles.
The silt-size material removed by washing, about6 percent by mass, consists of same material found
in fine sand sizes with additional clay.
Qualitative chemical tests indicate presence of trace amounts of water-soluble chloride and sulfate
ions.
392
USBR 4295
393
USBR 4295
15.1 The examination of manufactured sand is similar 17.1 The report of the petrographic examination
to that fornatural sand, with particular emphasis on amount should summarize essential data needed to identify sample
and extent of fracturingand amount and nature of rock as to source and proposed use, and should include a
dust developed by milling operations. If a sample of rock description of essential data on composition and properties
from which sand was produced is available, examination of material as revealed by examination. Report should also
of the rock will provide useful information. record test procedures employed and describe nature and
features of each important constituent of sample,
accompanied by such tables and photographs as may be
CALCULATIONS AND REPORT required. Findings and conclusions should be expressed in
terms likely to be intelligible to those who must make
decisions as to suitability of material for use as concrete
16. Calculations
aggregate.
17.2 When sample has been found to possess
16.1 Calculate composition of each sieve fraction of properties or constituents that are known to have specific
a heterogeneous sample and weighted average composition unfavorable effects in concrete, those findingsshould be
of whole sample as described in the subsequent sections. described qualitatively and, to extent practicable,
16.1.1 Express composition of each sieve fraction quantitatively. The unfavorable effects that may be expected
by summing total number of particles of that fraction to ensue in the concrete should be mentioned. When
counted, and then calculating each constituent in each appropriate, it should be stated that a given sample was
condition as a percentage of total amount (as number of not found to contain any undesirable features. When such
particles in percent, in each sieve fraction).It is convenient is the case it may also be appropriate,especially if report
to calculate and record percentages to tenths at this stage. of petrographic examination is not accompanied by reports
An example of these calculations is given in the top portion of results of physical and chemical tests for which numerical
of figure4. limits may be applicable, to add that material appears
16.1.2 Obtain mass percent of sieve fractionin whole acceptable for use provided applicable acceptance tests are
sample (individual percentages retained on consecutive made and results are within appropriate limits. However,
sieves) from grading of sample as determined by USBR the report should not contain conclusions other than those
4136. based upon the findings of the examination unless
16.1.3 By multiplying percentage of constituent in additional data to support such conclusions are included
sieve fraction(sec. 16.1.1) by percentage of sieve fraction in or with the petrographic report and petrographer has
in whole sample (sec. 16.1.2), calculate percentage in whole been authorized to analyze other relevant nonpetrographic
sample of that constituent in that size (weighted percentage data.
of constituents in sieve fraction, fig. 4). It is convenient 17.3 The petrographic report should include
to calculate and record these percentages to tenths. recommendations regarding any additional petrographic,
16.1.4 By adding weighted percentages of each chemical, physical, or geological investigations that may
constituent in each sieve fraction, obtain weighted be required to evaluate adverse properties that are indicated
percentage of each constituent in whole sample (see by the petrographic examination. Supplementary petro-
weighted composition of sample on fig. 4). graphic investigations might include qualitative or
16.1.5 Construct a table to show composition of each quantitative analysis of aggregate or of selected portions
sieve fractionand weighted composition of whole sample; thereof by X-ray diffraction, differential thermal methods,
record values to nearest whole number. Reportconstituents or other procedures that are directed to identification and
amounting to 0.5 percent or less of a sieve fraction or description of constituents of aggregate.
of whole sample as traces. Figure 5 is an example 17.4 The report should include a conclusion on the
constructed fromdata obtained on figure4. As a convention, physical and chemical quality of both gravel and sand, which
total in each sieve fractionand total in whole sample shall may differ from one another; percentage of flat and/or
each be 100 percent without the traces. Difficulties in elongated particles; type and percentage of coatings;
abiding by this convention can usually be avoided by presence or absence of soluble ions; and any appropriate
grouping minor constituents of minimum engineering recommendations.
importance. It is preferable to tabulate constituents known 17.5 Report should have a summary of both gravel
to react deleteriously in concrete so that their distribution and sand including particle shape, percentage of coated
will be apparent from inspection of table, even though particles .(if appropriate), rock and mineral types, and
amount in whole sample or in any fractionis very small. percentages of physically unsound and alkali-reactive
For other methods of presenting results of petrographic portions.
analysis, see tables 1 through 4 in reference [5]. 17.6 The report should contain data summarizing the
16.2 Present policy is not to calculate weighted petrographic examination of coarse aggregate (see fig. 1),
averages, but to use only particle count percentages as quality of coarse aggregate (see fig. 2), and petrographic
determined in section 16.1.1. examination of coarse sand (see fig. 3).
394
USBR 4295
Individual
percentge Composition of fractions retained on sieves
retained 3/4 inch (19.0 mm) 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) 3/8 inch (9.5 ram) No. 4 (4.75 mm)
on sieve 17.4 32.-" 29.5 20.5
Number Number Number Number
Constituents of Percent of Percent of Percent of Percent
particles particles particles particles
Note: This tabulation indicates a convenient method of setting up a worksheet for recording results and calculations. Results developed here are
entered in the form indicated on figure 5, which should be included in petrographic report. The letters A, B, and C refer to various constituents found,
subscript numbers 1, 2, and 3 refer to various conditions in which each constituent has been found, such as relative degree of weathering.
* The requirement that each fraction include at least 300 particles has been met; selection of 500 particles per fraction for the sample is to illustrate
calculation; it is not intended to suggest that a predetermined number of particles per fraction should be selected.
395
USBR 4295
A 62 70 70 50 33 20 12 65
B 37 29 25 43 13 11 8 32
C 1 1 5 7 2 1 Tr 3
17.7 A narrative summation of the petrographic [2] Simpson, G. G., and A. Rowe, Quantitative Zoology,
analysis along with the above referenced figuresis included pp. 182-185, McGraw-Hill Co., Inc., New York, NY, 1939.
on the reporting form illustrated by figure3 in USBR 4075.
[3] Dryden, A. L., Jr, "Accuracy in Percentage Repre-
18. Precision and Bias sentation of Heavy Mineral Frequencies," Proceedings, U.S.
National Academy Sciences, No. 5, vol. 17, pp. 233-238,
18.1 Precision and bias statements are not appropriate May 1931.
for this type of procedure. [4] Loughlin, G. E, "Usefulness of Petrology in the
Selection of Limestone," Rock Products, vol. 31, No. 6,
19. References
pp. 50-59, Mar. 17, 1928.
[1] Mather, Katharine and Bryant, "Method of Petro- [5] Mielenz, R. C., "Petrographic Examination of
graphic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete," Concrete Aggregates," cp. 33, Significance of Tests and
Proceedings, American Society for Testing Materials, Properties of Concrete and Concrete-Making Materials,
ASTEA, vol. 50, pp. 1288-1312, 1950. STP 169B, p. 197.
396
@ UNITED STATES OF RECLAMATION
INTERIORBuREAU
DEPARTMENT OF THE ()
USBR 4305692
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4305; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 305-82.
3.1 This procedure is intended for use in the mechanical 4.2 Paddle.-The paddle shall be readily removable,
mixing of pastes and mortars for the testing of hydraulic made of stainless steel, and shall conform to basic design
cements. shown on figure 2. Dimensions of paddle shall be such
that, when in mixing position, paddle outline conforms
4. Apparatus to the contour of bowl used with mixer; and clearance
between corresponding points on edge of paddle and side
4.1 Mixer.-The mixer shall be an electrically driven of bowl in the position of closest approach shall be about
mechanical mixer of the epicyclic type, which imparts both 4 mm but not less than 0.8 mm.
a planetary and revolving motion to mixer paddle. Mixer 4.3 Mixing BowL-The removable mixing bowl shall
shall have a minimum of two speeds controlled by definite have a nominal capacity of 1-1/4 gal (4.73 L), be of general
mechanical means; rheostat speed adjustment is not shape and comply with limiting dimensions shown on
acceptable. The first (slow) speed shall revolve paddle at
figure 3, and made of stainless steel. Bowl shall be so
a rate of 1404-5 r/min, with a planetary motion of about equipped that it will be positively held in mixing apparatus
62 r/min. The second (medium) speed shall revolve paddle
in a fixed position during mixing procedure. A cover lid
at 285+10 r/min, with a planetary motion of about made of a nonabsorbing material that is not chemically
125 r/min. The electric motor shall be at least 1/6 hp
attacked by cement shall be provided for the bowl.
(124 W or 124 J/s) (note 1). The mixer shall be equipped
4.4 Scraper.-The scraper shall consist of a semirigid
with a clearance adjustment bracket (fig. 1) which shall
rubber blade attached to a handle about 6 inches (150 mm)
be used to maintain a clearance between lower end of paddle
long. The blade shall be about 3 inches (75 mm)long,
and bottom of bowl of not greater than 2.5 mm and not
2 inches (50 ram) wide, and tapered to a thin edge about
less than 0.8 mm when bowl is in mixing position (note 1/16 inch (2 mm) thick.
2). The 0.8-mm clearance value is based on the approximate
NOTE 3.-A kitchen tool known as a plate and bowl scraper
I AnnualBook ofASTMStandards,vol. 04.01. conforms to these requirements.
2 For additionaluseful information on details of cement test methods,
reference may be made to the "Manual of Cement Testing," which appears 4.5 SupplementaApparatus.-The balances, standard
in the AnnualBook ofASTMSrandards, vol. 04.01. unit masses, glass graduates, and any other supplementary
397
USBR 4305
E 103 mm 1 mm
I 6.5
E i 1
E ,= 778 mm :,/12.7 rnm mm
T %
f'\ 127 01 , mm
-"
"
, " .-_ram raa!us .
w->'l
I I . I _J
Y L
E
F_U:
l--l----"Silver solder,
./,A-6
B-mm momeTer -L)F -- --90-e+-t -
two bushings
l l-mmdiameter
mm
103 mm
apparatus used in measuring and preparing the mortar 7. Calibration and Standardization
materials prior to mixing shall conform to the respective
requirements for such apparatus as specified in the 7.1 The calibration and standardization of miscella-
procedure for the particular test for which mortar is being neous equipment or apparatusused in performing the tests
prepared. listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are
covered under that particular standard directly or by
5. Precautions
reference.
5.1 This procedure may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment, and does not claim to address 8. Conditioning
all safety problems associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user to consult and establish 8.1 The temperature of mixing room shall be
appropriate safety and health practices and determine maintained between 68 and 81.5 F (20 and 27.5 C),
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. and temperature of dry materials, paddle, and bowl shall
6. Materials, Proportioning, and Consistency be within this same range at time of test. Temperature
of mixing water shall not vary from 73.4 F (23 C) by
6.1 The materials and their proportions and quantities more than 3 F (1.7 C).
shall conform to the requirements of the particular 8.2 The relative humidity of the mixing room shall
procedure for which the paste or mortar is being prepared. he not less than 50 percent.
398
USBR 4305
2-- \5 mm
I
mm
3- mm 202 mm
-I
rodiUSl j
E
E
28-mm j ?
Figure 2. - Paddle.
Figure 3- Mixing bowl.
l
399
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4311-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4311; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 311-85.
400
USBR 4311
shall be capable of reproducing results within 0.0002 gram the glass would be objectionable. Such containers shall be
with an accuracy of +0.0002 gram. Direct-reading balances made of high-density polyethylene having a wall thickness
shall have a sensitivity not exceeding 0.0001 gram (note 1). of at least 0.04 inch (1 mm).
Conventional two-pan balances shall have a maximum 3.4 Desiccators.-Desiccators shall be provided with a
sensibility reciprocal of 0.0003 gram. Any rapid weighing good desiccant such as magnesium perchlorate, activated
device that may be provided, such as a chain, damped alumina, or sulfuric acid. Anhydrous calcium sulfate may
motion, or heavy riders, shall not increase the basic also be used provided it has been treated with a color-
inaccuracy by more than 0.0001 gram at any reading and change indicator to show when it has lost its effectiveness.
with any load within rated capacity of balance. Calcium chloride is not a satisfactory desiccant for this
type of analysis.
NOTE 1.-The sensitivity of a direct-reading balance is the mass
3.5 Filter Paper=Filter paper shall conform to the
required to change reading one graduation. The sensibility
reciprocal for a conventional balance is defined as the change requirements of ASTM E'832, type II, quantitative. When
in mass required on either pan to change the position of coarse-textured paper is required, class E paper shall be
equilibrium one division on the pointer scale at capacity or at used; when medium-textured paper is required, class F shall
any lesser load. be used; and when retentive paper is required, class G
shall be used.
3.2 Standard Masses.-Standard masses used for
3.6 Ccucibles.-Platinum crucibles for ordinary chemical
analysis shall conform to type I or II, grade S or O, and
analysis should preferably be made of pure unalloyed
class 1, 2, or 3 as described in ASTM E 617. They shall
platinum and be of 15- to 30-mL capacity. Where alloyed
be checked at least annually, or when questioned, and
platinum is used for greater stiffness or to obviate sticking
adjusted at least to within the allowable tolerances for class
of crucible and lid, alloyed platinum should not decrease
3 standard masses (note 2). For this purpose, each
in mass by more than 0.2 milligram when heated at 2192 F
laboratory shall maintain, or have available for use, a (1200 C) for 1 hour.
reference set of standard masses from 50 grams to 10
3.7 Muffle Furnace.-The muffle furnace shall be
milligrams, which shall conform at least to class 3
capable of operation at temperatures required and shall
requirements and be calibrated at intervals not exceeding
have an indicating pyrometer accurate within +77 F
5 years by NIST (National Institute of Standards and
(+25.0 C), as corrected, if necessary, by calibration. More
Technology). 6 After initial calibration, recalibration by
than one furnace may be used provided each is used within
NIST may be waived provided it can be shown by
its proper operating temperature range.
documented data obtained within time interval specified
that a mass comparison between summations of smaller
4. Purity of Reagents
standard masses and a single larger standard mass
nominally equal to that summation establishes that
allowable tolerances have not been exceeded. All new sets 4.1 Purity of Reagents.-Reagent grade chemicals or
of standard masses shall begin at 1-gram size, be made equivalent, as specified in ASTM E 200, shall be used in
of stainless steel or other corrosion-resisting alloy not all tests.
requiring protective coating, and shall meet density 4.2 Purity of Water.-Unless otherwise indicated,
requirements for grade S or O. references to water in sections 11 through 16 shall be
understood to mean distilled water or water of equal purity.
NOTE 2.-Scientific supply houses do not presently list standard 4.3 Concentrations of Reagents.-Concentrations of
masses as meeting ASTM E 617; however, they do meet NIST reagents used in these procedures shall conform to section
or OIML (International Organization of Legal Meterology) 4 of USBR 4114.
standards. This situation is in a state of flux because of the trend
toward internationalization; hopefully, this problem will soon 5. Precautions
be resolved. The NIST classes S and S-1 and OIML class F-
1 masses meet the requirements of this procedure.
5.1 These test procedures may involve hazardous
3.3 Glassware and Laboratory Containers.-Standard materials, operations, and equipment, and do not claim
volumetric flasks, burets, and pipets should be of precision to address all safety problems associated with their use.
grade or better. Standard-taper, interchangeable, ground- It is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish
glass joints are recommended for all volumetric glassware appropriate safety and health practices and determine
and distilling apparatus, when available. Wherever applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
applicable, use of special types of glassware, such as colored
glass, for the protection of solutions against light is 6. Sampling, Test Specimens, and Test Units
recommended. Alkali-resistantglass and high-silica glass,
which have exceptional resistance to thermal shock, are 6.1 Size andNumber ofSamples:
recommended. Polyethylene containers are recommended" 6.1.1 Samples for purpose of tests shall have a mass
for all aqueous solutions of alkalies and for standard of at least 4 Ibm (1.8 kg) each when they are to be
solutions where presence of dissolved silica or alkali from composited. Individual test samples, on which all specified
tests are to be made, shall have a mass of at least 8 Ibm
6 Formerly National Bureau of Standards. (3.6 kg).
40l
USBR 4311
6.1.2 Test samples shall be either individual or 6.4.2 All other physical tests and chemical
composite samples, as may be specified, and one individual determinations shall be made on composite samples
test sample shall represent not more than 400 tons representing every 2000 tons (1815 Mg). The composite
(363 Mg). sample for this purpose is prepared by combining equal
6.1.3 The sampling Shall be done by or under the parts of five consecutive samples, each representing 400
direction of a responsible representative of purchaser. tons (363 Mg).
6.2 Sampling.-The mineral admixture may be sampled
by any one of the methods described in sections 6.2.1, 6.2.2, 7. Calibration and Standardization
6.2.3, or 6.2.4.
6.2.1 From Conveyor Delivering to Bulk Storage.- 7.1 The calibration and standardization of miscel-
Take one sample of 4 Ibm (1.8 kg) or more from at least laneous equipment or apparatus used in performing the
every 400 tons (363 Mg) passing over conveyor. This may tests listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2
be done by taking entire test sample in a single operation, are covered under that particular procedure or standard
known as the "grab method," or by combining several directly or by reference to another.
portions taken at regular intervals, the "composite 7.2 The calibration and standardization of other
method." When obtaining a composite sample, combine miscellaneousequipment or apparatus used in performing
approximately equal masses of mineral admixture taken these tests, such as ovens, are to be calibrated in accordance
at regular intervals. Automatic samplers may be used in with USBR 1020.
obtaining samples. 7.3 Muffle furnaces to comply with sections 3.7 and
6.2.2 From Bulk Storage at Points of Discharge.- 10 must be checked with certified thermometers.
Draw sufficient mineral admixture from discharge 7.4 Balances used to determine the mass in all tests
openings to obtain samples representative of admixture. must be calibrated in accordancewith USBR 1012.
This is determined by appearance at openings of indicators
placed on surface of admixture directly above openings 8. Conditioning
before drawing out the admixture. Take one 4-1bm (1.8-kg)
sample for at least every 400 tons (363 Mg) by either 8.1 Conditioning of materials for the individual tests
the grab or composite method described in 6.2.1. is covered under the procedure for each test.
6.2.3 From Bulk Storage Using Sampling Tubes.-
When methods of 6.2.1 and 6.2.2 cannot be applied and CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
when depth of mineral admixture to be sampled does not
exceed 10 feet (3 m), obtain samples using sampling tubes
inserted vertically to full depth of admixture. Obtain these 9. Moisture Content
samples from points well distributed over area of storage.
9.1 Summary of Procedure.-This procedure is based
6.2.4 For samples taken fromcars and trucks, where
on drying a sample as received to a constant mass in an
mineral admixture is being shipped from one source,
oven at 221 F (105 C). The loss in mass is calculated
combine samples from multiple cars or trucks to form
as moisture.
a test sample representing not more than 400 tons
9.2 Procedure.-Dry sample, with mass determined as
(363 Mg). When bulk shipments are sampled, take
received, to a constant mass in an oven at 221 to 230 F
representative samples from well-distributed points. (105 to 110 C).
6.3 Preparation of Sample.-Prepare composite
9.3 Calculation.-A typical calculation form is shown
samples for tests, as required in section 6.4 by arranging
on figure 1. Calculate percentage of moisture to nearest
all test samples in groups, with each group representing
0.01, as follows:
number of tons required by test forwhich composite sample
is intended. From each test sample in a group, take equal D-A
Moisture content (percent) -- D (100) (1)
proportions sufficient in amount to form a composite
sample large enough to permit making the required
physical or chemical determinations. Mix composite sample where:
thus prepared thoroughly before using. D = mass of sample at time of sampling, in grams;
6.4 Number of Tests: and
6.4.1 Each sample representing 400 tons (363 Mg),
A = mass of oven-dried sample in air, in grams.
or the sample representing the quantity sampled but less
than 400 tons, shall be tested for: NOTE 3.-Be aware that this moisture content is based on
the as-sampled condition, not on the oven-dry basis.
Fineness, No. 325 (45-#m) sieve analysis
Moisture content 10. Loss on Ignition
Density
Loss on ignition 10.1 Summary of Procedure.-In this procedure, a
Soundness previously dried sample is ignited in a muffle furnace at
Lime-pozzolan test, 7-day 1382 F (750 C) to a constant mass. The loss in mass
402
USBR 4311
between 221 and 1382 F (105 and 750 C) is calculated has been added. With a glass rod, turn crucible on its side
as ignition loss. and, if necessary, add sufficient water to just cover crucible.
10.2 Procedure.-Determine the LOI (loss on ignition) Digest until disintegration is complete, then lift crucible
in accordance with section 16 of USBR 4114, except that and cover from beaker, thoroughly rinsing each with hot
material remaining from determination of moisture content water directly into beaker. If any gritty particles are present,
shall be ignited to a constant mass in an uncovered fusion is incomplete and must be repeated using a new
porcelain, not platinum, crucible at 1382+90 F sample and a larger amount of Na2CO3.
(750+50 C). 11.2.4 Decant liquid through a rapid filter paper into
10.3 Calculation.-A typical calculation form is shown a 600-mL Pyrex beaker. Wash down sides of 250-mL beaker
on figure 2. Calculate percentage of loss on ignition to with hot diluted HCI (1:99) and break up larger particles
nearest 0.01, as follows: of siliceous material with flattenedend of a glass rod. Decant
as before, permitting only finely divided material to pass
A-G on to filter paper. Repeat above steps until all siliceous
LOI (percent) -- A (100) (2)
material has been quantitatively transferred to filter paper.
where: Wash filter paper and residue several times with small
portions of the hot HC1 and finally with hot water until
G = mass after ignition loss, and free of chlorides; retain the residue.
A = as defined in equation (1). 11.2.5 Evaporate filtrate to dryness on a steam bath
and bake residue in oven for 1 hour at 221 to 230 F
11. Silicon Dioxide (105 to 110 C). Cool and wet the dried residue thoroughly
with 10 mL of concentrated HCI, add 90 mL of hot water,
11.1 Summary of Procedure.-This procedure is based heat to incipient boiling, and digest with intermittent
on the sodium carbonate fusion followed by double stirring until all soluble salts are in solution. Filter
evaporation to dryness of the HCI (hydrochloric acid) immediately through a medium texture paper and wash
solution of fusion product to convert SiO2 (silicon dioxide) residue thoroughly with the hot HCI (1:99), then with
to insoluble form. The solution is filtered, insoluble siliceous hot water until free of chlorides. Retain filtrate and
residue ignited, and-mass determined. The SiO2 is we.shings for determination of ammonium hydroxide
volatilized by HF (hydrofluoric acid) and loss of mass is group, section 12.1.
reported as pure SiO2. 11.2.6 Transfer filter papers and residues from both
11.2 Procedure: filtrations to a platinum crucible with known mass. Dry
11.2.1 Determine mass of a sample of ignited and ignite, slowly at first, until carbon of paper is completely
material equivalent to 0.5 gram of moisture-free sample consumed without flaming, and finally at 2012 to 2192 F
before ignition as follows: (1100 to 1200 C) for at least 1 hour. Cool in a desiccator
and determine mass. Treat SiO2 thus obtained, which will
Mass of ignited sample (grams) = contain small amounts of impurities, in the crucible with
0.5 to 1.0 mL of water, 2 drops of H2SO4 (1:1), about
0.5 (100 - percent LOI)
100 10 mL of HF, and evaporate cautiously to dryness. Finally,
heat the small residue at 1922 to 2012 F (1050 to 1100 C)
11.2.2 Thoroughly mix sample with 4 to 6 grams for 5 minutes, cool in desiccator, and determine mass. The
of Na2CO3 (sodium carbonate) by grinding in an agate difference between this mass and mass previously obtained
mortar. Place a thin layer of Na2CO3 on bottom of a represents the amount of SiO2. Add 0.5 gram of Na2S207
platinum crucible of 20- to 30-mL capacity, add sample (sodium pyrosulfate) or K9.$9.O7 (potassium pyrosulfate)
Na2CO3 mixture, and cover mixture with a thin layer of to crucible and heat below red heat until small residue
NauCO3. Place covered crucible over a moderately low flame of impurities is dissolved in melt. Cool, dissolve fused mass
and increase flame gradually to a maximum, about 2012 F in water, and add it to filtrate and washings retained for
(1100 C). Maintain this temperature until mass is determination of ammonium hydroxide group (sec. 12.1).
quiescent (about 45 minutes). Remove burner, lay aside 11.2.7 Blank Determination.-Following same
cover of crucible, grasp crucible with tongs, and slowly procedure and using same amounts of reagents, make a
rotate crucible so that molten contents spread over sides blank determination and correct results obtained in analysis
and solidify as a thin shell on the interior. Set crucible accordingly.
and cover aside, and cool. 11.3 Calculation.-A typical caiculation form is shown
11.2.3 Place crucible upright in 250-mL beaker, add on figure 3. Calculate percentage of SiO2 to nearest 0.01
30 to 40 mL of concentrated HCI, and cover beaker by multiplying mass in grams of SiO2 by 100 divided by
immediately with a watchglass. After chemical action has mass of sample used (0.5 g).
subsided slightly, add 5 to 10 mL of water. When action 12. Aluminum Oxide and Iron Oxide
has againsubsided, place beaker on a steam bath and repeat
additions of 5 to 10 mL of water at 3- to 5-minute intervals 12.1 Ammonium HydroxideGroup:
as long as each addition causes noticeable further solution 12.1.1 Summary of Procedure.-The ammonium
of fused cake, or until a total volume of 75 mL of water hydroxidegroup, designated by R203 and consistingof
403
USBR 4311
aluminum, iron, titanium, and phosphorus; are precipitated and paper in a covered platinum crucible of known mass,
from filtrate, after SiO2 removal, using ammonium char paper without flaming, burn carbon at as low a
hydroxide. With care, negligible manganese will be temperature as possible, and finally heat with crucible
precipitated. The precipitate is ignited and mass determined tightly covered in an electric furnace or over a blast lamp
as oxides. at 2012 to 2192 F (1100 to 1200 C). Cool in a desiccator
12.1.2 Procedure: and determine mass as CaO. Repeat the ignition to constant
12.1.2.1 Treat filtrateretained fromsilicon dioxide mass.
determination (sec. 11) for determination of ammonium
hydroxide group, principally AI2Os (aluminum oxide) and NOTE 4.-This neutralization must be made slowly, otherwise
Fe2Os (iron oxide), in accordance with sections 7 and 8 precipitated calcium oxalate may have a tendency to run through
of USBR 4114. Retain the combined filtrate for filter paper. When a number of these determinations are being
determinations of CaO (calcium oxide) and MgO made simultaneously, the following technique will assist in
(magnesium oxide) if either or both of these are required ensuring slow neutralization: Add 2 or 3 drops of NH4OH to
and the referee methods of USBR 4114 are used. first beaker while stirring, then 2 or 3 drops to the second, and
12.1.2.2 Calculate combined percentage of SiOu, so on, returning to first beaker to add 2 or 3 more drops, etc.,
A1203, and FeuO3 by adding percentageof SiOu determined until indicator color has changed in each beaker.
in section 11 to percentage of ammonium hydroxide group
calculated in accordance with section 8 of USBR 4114. 13.2.2 BlankDetermination.-Make a blank determi-
Report result to nearest 0.01. A typical calculation form nation followingsame procedure and using same amounts
is shown on figure4. of reagents, and correct results obtained in analysis
accordingly.
13. Calcium Oxide 13.3 Calculation.-Calculate percentage of CaO to
nearest 0.01 by multiplying mass in grams of CaO by 100
13.1 Summary ofProcedure.-This procedure covers the divided by mass of sample used (0.5 g). A typical calculation
gravimetric determination of CaO after removal of SiO2 form is shown on figure 5.
and ammonium hydroxide groups, and the double
precipitation of calcium as the oxalate. The precipitate is 14. MagnesiumOxide
converted to CaO by ignition, and then mass is determined.
13.2 Procedure:
13.2.1 Acidify combined filtrates obtained in the 14.1 Summary of Procedure.-In this procedure,
precipitation of aluminum plus ferric hydroxides (sec. 12) magnesium is precipitated as magnesium ammonium
with HCI and evaporate them to a volume of about 100 mL. phosphate from filtrate after removal of calcium. The
Add 40 mL of saturated bromine water to the hot solution precipitate is ignited and mass determined as Mg2P207
and immediately add NH4OH (ammonium hydroxide) until (magnesium pyrophosphate). The MgO equivalent is then
solution is distinctly alkaline. Boil solution 5 minutes or calculated.
more, making certain that solu;ion is at all times distinctly 14.2 Reagents:
alkaline. Allow precipitate to settle, filter using medium 14.2.1 Ammonium Nitrate Wash Solution.-Dissolve
texture paper, and wash with hot water. Discard precipitate. 100 grams of NH4NO3 (ammonium nitrate) in water, add
Acidify filtratewith HC1 and boil until bromine is expelled. 200 mL of NH4OH, and dilute to 1 liter.
Add 5 mL of HCI, dilute to 200 mL, add a few drops 14.3 Procedure:
of methyl-red indicator, and 30 mL of warm ammonium 14.3.1 Acidify filtrates retainedin determination of
oxalate solution (50 g/L). Heat solution to 158 to 176 F CaO (sec. 13) with HCI and concentrate to about 250 mL.
(70 to 80 C), and add NHaOH (1:1) dropwise while Add to this solution about 10 mL of (NH4)2HPO4
stirring until color changes from red to yellow (note 4). (ammonium phosphate) (250 g/L), and cool solution by
Allow solution to stand without furtherheating for 1 hour placing in a beaker of ice water. After cooling, add NH4OH
(not longer) with occasional stirring during first 30 drop by drop, while stirring constantly, until crystalline
minutes. Filter, using retentive paper, and wash moderately magnesium ammonium phosphate begins to form,and then
with cold, 0.1 percent ammonium oxalate solution. Retain in moderate excess (5 to 10 percent of volume of solution);
filtrate and washings. Transfer precipitate and filter paper continue stirring for several minutes. Set solution aside
to beaker in which precipitation was effected. Dissolve for at least 8 hours in a cool atmosphere, and then filter.
oxalate in 50 mL of hot HCI (1:4) and macerate the filter Wash twice with an ammonium nitrate wash solution.
paper. Dilute to 200 mL with water, add 20 mL of 14.3.2 Transfer precipitate and filterpaper to same
ammonium oxalate solution, heat solution to nearly boiling, beaker in which first precipitation was effected. Dissolve
and precipitate calcium oxalate again by neutralizing acid precipitate with hot HCI (1:4), and stir to thoroughly
solution with ammonium hydroxide as previously described. macerate filter paper. If necessary, add more of the hot
Allowsolution to stand for 1 or 2 hours (longer standing HCI to dissolve precipitate. Dilute solution to about 100
will now do no harm), filter,and wash as before. Combine mL, add 1 mL of (NH4)2HPO4, and then add NH4OH
filtrate with that already obtained, acidify with HC1, and drop by drop, while stirring constantly, until precipitate
retain for determination of MgO (sec. 14). Dry precipitate is again formed as described and NH4OH is in moderate
404
USBR 4311
excess. Cool, allow to stand for about 2 hours, filter, and of reagents, and correct results obtained in analysis
wash with four 10-mL portions of the NH403 wash accordingly.
solution. Place in a platinum or porcelain crucible of known 15.3 Calcu/ation.-A typical calculation form is shown
mass, slowly char paper, and carefully burn off resulting on figure 7. Calculate percentage of SOs to nearest 0.01,
carbon. Ignite precipitate at 2012 to 2192 *F (1100 to as follows:
1200 C) to constant mass, taking care to avoid melting
pyrophosphate (note 5). SOs (percent) = 34.3 3/2 (4)
NOTE 5.-If crucible is glazed, temperature should not exceed where:
2057 OF (1125 C) because glaze may partially fuse at about
2192 OF (1200 C). Mu = grams of BaSO4, and
34.3 = molecular mass ratio of SOs to BaSO4 (0.343)
14.3.3 Blank Determination.-Make a blank determi- multiplied by 100.
nation following same procedure and using same amounts
of reagents, and correct results obtained in analysis 16. Available Alkalies
accordingly.
14.4 Calculation.-Atypical calculation form is shown 16.1 Summary of Procedute.-Measured amounts of
on figure 6. Calculate percentage of MgO to nearest 0.01, sample, Ca(OH)u (calcium hydroxide), and water are
as follows: combined, sealed, and allowed to react at 100.4 F (38 C)
for 28 days. Mixture is then unsealed, ground, slurried,
MgO (percent) = 72.4 M1 (3)
filtered, and washed. The neutralized filtrate is analyzed
for sodium and potassium, which are then calculated and
where: reported as equivalent Na20 (sodium oxide).
16.2 Procedure:
M1 = grams of Mg2P207, and
16.2.1 Thoroughly mix by grinding together, in a
72.4 = molecular ratio of 2MgO to MgP207
mortar or mechanical blender, the sample and Ca(OH)2
(0.362) divided by mass of sample used
in a proportion of 2-1/2 parts sample to 1 part Ca(OH)u
(0.5 g), and multiplied by 100.
by mass. Add 7 grams of this mixture to 10 mL of water
in a small plastic vial of about 25-mL capacity, stirring
15. Sulfur Trioxide until mixture is uniform. Seal vial and store at 100.4+3.6 F
(38+2 C).
15.1 Summary of Procedure.-In this procedure, sulfate 16.2.2 Open vial at age of 28 days and transfer
is precipitated from an acid solution of sample with BaCI2 contents to a 250-mL casserole. Break up and grind the
(barium chloride). The precipitate is ignited and mass cake with a pestle, adding a small amount of water if
determined as BaSO4 (barium sulfate), and the SOs (sulfur necessary, so that a uniform slurry containing no lumps
trioxide) equivalent calculated. is obtained (note 6). Add sufficient water to make total
15.2 Procedure: volume 200 mL, and let stand 1 hour at room temperature
15.2.1 To 1 gram of sample, add 25 mL of distilled with frequent stirring. Then, filter through a medium-
water, heat mixture to about 160 F (71 C) and, while textured filter paper into a 500-mL volumetric flask. Wash
stirring vigorously, add 5 mL of HCI. Continue stirring thoroughly 8 to 10 times with hot water.
for 15 minutes. Dilute solution to 50 mL and digest for
15 minutes without stirring at a temperature just below NOTE 6.-At times, it may be necessary to break vial and peel
boiling. Filter and wash residue thoroughly with hot water off plastic from solid cake. In such cases, care should be exercised
using a rapid-filtering, acid-washed filter paper folded to avoid loss of material and to remove all solid material from
inside a fine-textured, acid-washed filter paper. Slightly fragments of vial. If cake is too hard to break up and grind
acidify combined filtrate with HCI, dilute solution to in casserole, a mortar should be used.
250 mL, and heat to boiling. From a pipet, add slowly,
dropwise, 10 mL of hot BaCI2 (100 g/L) and continue 16.2.3 Neutralize filtrate with dilute HCI (1:3) using
boiling until precipitate is well formed. Digest solution 1 to 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution as indicator. Add
for 12 to 24 hours at a temperature just below boiling. exactly 5 mL of the dilute HCI in excess. Cool solution
Take care to keep volume of solution between 225 and to room temperature and fill flask to mark with distilled
260 mL; add water for this purpose if necessary. Filter water. Determine amount of Na20 (sodium oxide) and
precipitate using a fine-texturedfilter paper, wash, place KO (potassium oxide) in solution by using flame
paper and contents in a platinum or porcelain crucible photometric or atomic absorption procedure described in
of known mass, and slowly char and consume paper without section 17 of USBR 4114, except that standard solutions
inflaming. Then, ignite at 1562+90 F (850+50 C), cool shall be made to contain 8 mL of CaCI2 (calcium chloride)
in a desiccator, and determine mass of BaSO4. stock solution per liter of standard solution, (note 7). This
15.2.2 Blank Determination.-Make a blank determi- solution, as prepared, shall be used in place of the solution
nation following same procedure and using same amounts of cement.
405
USBR 4311
NOTE 7.-The standard solutions made with 8 mL of CaCI2 20.2 Procedure.-Cure and measure test specimens in
stock solution contain the equivalent of 504 p/m (parts per accordance with ASTM C 157, except that moist-curing
million) of CaO (calcium oxide). Tests have shown that this period (including time in molds) shall be 7 days, and
amount closely approximates amount of calcium dissolved in test measurement of length at the age of 24+1/2 hours shall
solution. be omitted. Immediately after measurement at end of 7-
day period, store specimens in accordance with ASTM
16.3 Calculation.-Atypical calculation form is shown
C 157. After 28 days of air storage, measure length of
on figure 8. Calculate results as mass percent of original
specimens in accordance with of ASTM C 157.
sample material, and report as the equivalent percentage
20.3 Calculations:
of Na20:
20.3.1 Calculate increase of drying shrinkage of
Equivalent Na20 (percent) = Na20 (percent) mortar bars as follows:
+ (0.658) (K20 percent) Si (percent) = St - & (5)
17. Report where:
17.1 Figure 13 shows a typical reporting form for the Si = increase Of drying shrinkage,
chemical analysis. St = average drying shrinkage of test specimens
calculated, and
PHYSICAL TESTS So = average drying shrinkage of control speci-
mens, calculated as follows:
18. Density Li- L
S (percent) -- Li (100) (6)
18.1 Procedure.-Determine the density of sample in
accordance with procedure described in USBR 4188, except
where:
use about 50 grams of fly ash or natural pozzolan instead
of about 64 grams of cement as recommended in section S ---- drying shrinkage,
.7.3 of USBR 4188. Li ---- length of test of control specimen at time of
initial reading, and
18.2 Calculations.-A typical calculation form is shown
Lr = length of test of control specimen at follow-up
on figure2 of USBR 4188.
or final reading.
19. Fineness 20.3.2 Report results to nearest 0.001 percent. If
average drying shrinkage of control specimens is larger
19.1 Procedure.-Determine amountof sample retained than average drying shrinkage of test specimens, prefix
when wet-sieved on a No. 325 (45-/m) sieve in accordance a minus sign to the value reported for the increase of
with USBR 4430, except use a representative sample of drying shrinkage of mortar bars. Typical calculation forms
fly ash or natural pozzolan instead of hydraulic cement are shown on figures 9 and 10.
in the determination.
21. Soundness
19.2 Calculations.-Typical calibration and calculation
forms are illustrated by figures2 and 3 of USBR 4430. 21.1 Procedure.-Conduct the soundness test in
accordance with USBR 4151, except that specimens shall
20. Increase of Drying Shrinkage of Mortar Bars be molded from a paste composed of 25 parts by mass
of fly ash or natural pozzolan and 100 parts by mass of
20.1 Test Specimens.-Prepare test specimens in a portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150.
accordancewith procedures of ASTM C 157, except mold 21.2 Calculations.-Typical calculation forms are shown
three mortar bars from both control mix and the test mix on figures 4 and 5 of USBR 4151.
using table 1.
22. Limits on Amount of Air-Entraining Admix-
Table 1. - Mix proportions for increase of drying shrinkage of mortar ture in Concrete
bars.
Control mix Test mix 22.1 Procedure.-Proceed in accordance with USBR
4233, except that a revolving; open-tub type mixer with
Portland cement, grams 500 500 revolving mixing paddles may be used. The following
Fly ash or natural pozzolan, grams None 125 subsections describe the concrete mixtures.
Graded Ottawa sand, grams 1375 1250 22A.1 The control mix is prepared as described in
Water Sufficient to produce section 4.1 of USBR 4233, with the air-entraining
a flow of 100 to admixture added in an amount necessary to produce
115 percent
5.0+0.5 percent of air in the concrete.
406
USBR 4311
100(1
22.1.2 The test mix shall have same proportions as
control mix (set. 22.1.1) except that it shall contain a
quantity of the fly ash or natural pozzolan under test
equivalent to 25 percent by mass of the cement instead where:
of an equal mass of standard sand, and a sufficient amount
of air-entraining admixture to produce 5.0+0.5 percent of Ma = actual mass per unit volume of mortar as
air in the concrete. Adjust total water content of test mix determined by USBR 4185 in grams per
to provide same consistency required for control mix. milliliter,
Determine air content as specified in USBR 4233. M = mass of specified 400 mL of mortar (see sec-
22.1.3 If amount of air-entraining admixture, tion 11.4 of USBR 4185) in grams,
expressed as percent by mass of cement, found to be Mc = theoretical mass per unit volume, calculated
necessary in test mix of 22.1.2 is more than 2.0 times on an air-free basis and using values for
the amount of air-entraining admixture needed in control specific gravity and quantities of materials
mix of 22.1.1, make tests in accordance with USBR 4233 in mix, in grams per milliliter,
to determine whether air-entraining admixture, when used P = percentage of mixing water plus Vinsol resin
in larger quantity required, meets requirements of ASTM solution based on mass of cement,
C 260. For this purpose, test mix specified in 22.1.2, with SP = specific gravity of fly ash or natural pozzolan
5.0-t-0.5 percent of air in concrete, shall be compared with used in mix, and
a similar control mix containing no air-entraining V= volume of air content of mortar in percent.
admixture, except that for the freezing and thawing test,
mixture specified in 22.1.2 shall be compared with mixture 23.2.1 A typical calculation form is shown on figure
of 22.1.1. 5 of USBR 4185.
22.2 Calculations.-A typical calculation form is shown
on figure 1 of USBR 4233. 24. Pozzolanic Activity Index With Portland
Cement
23. Air Entrainment of Mortar
4O7
USBR 4311
NOTE 8.-Use any metal container having a capacity of three arid by mass, plus an amount of oven-dry mineral
cubes if it can be sealed airtight by soldering. Containers of light- admixture equal to twice the mass of the lime multiplied
tinned sheet metal with inside dimensions of 2-1/32 by 2-1/32 by a factorobtained by dividing specific gravity of mineral
by 6-1/4 inches (52 by 52 by 160 mm) have been found to be admixture by specific gravity of lime. The amount of mixing
satisfactory. Widemouth Mason jars of 1-quart (1=liter) capacity
water, measured in milliliters, shall be such as to produce
have also been found to be satisfactory provided care is taken
a flow to 110+5 percent in accordance with procedure
to prevent breakage.
described in section 11.3 of USBR 4109. A sufficient
24.3 Compressive Strength Test.-Determine compres- quantity of mortar shall be made to mold at least three
sive strength of all specimens at an age of 28 days. 2-inch (51-mm) cube specimens. The mineral admixture
24.4 Calculation.-A typical calculation form is shown and lime shall be put together and shaken vigorously in
on figure 11. Calculate pozzolanic activity index with a covered container for 2 minutes. Mortar shall be mixed
portland cement as follows: in accordance with section 10 of USBR 4305, except that
it shall, be understood that when references are made to
Pozzolanic activity index with portland cement is: cement, those references are to the fly ash- or natural
X pozzolan-limemixture for this case.
(100) (8) 26.1.4 Molding Specimens.-Molds shall be in
accordance with section 3.4 of USBR 4109. The molding
where: of test specimens shall be in accordance with section 11.4.3
of USBR 4109; molding at least three specimens for each
X = average compressive strength of test mix test mold. Immediately after specimens are molded, seal
cubes, lbf/in 2 (MPa), and the molds by waxing a base plate to top of mold to prevent
Y = average compressive strength'pf control mix escape of moisture.
cubes, lbf/in 2 (MPa). 26.1.5 Storage of Specimens.-Store specimens in
molds initially at 73.4+3 F (23.0+1.7 C) for 24+2 hours,
25. Water Requirement and then at 131+3 F (55.0+1.7 C) for 6 days. Cool spec-
imens to 73.4+3 F 4+0.25 hours before testing.
25.1 Calculation.-A typical calculation form is shown 26.1.6 Testing.-At 0.5 to 1 hour before testing, strip
on figure 11. Calculate water requirement for the values specimens carefully, and keep them damp after stripping.
of Wc and Wt in section 24.1 as follows: These specimens are not capped for compression testing
as molds are built to the rigid requirements of USBR 4109.
Wr = Wt (100) (9) Determine compressive strength of specimens using a
Wc
loading rate from 100 to 500 lbf/in 2 (690 to 3450 kPa)
where: per minute. Report average compressive strength of spec-
imens as the pozzolanic strength. Specimens that differ
Wr = water requirement (percentage of control), by more than 15 percent from average value of all test
We = water required for flowof 100 to 115 percent specimensmade from same sample shall not be considered
in test mix, in milliliters, and in determining compressive strength. If compressive
Wc = water required for flow of 100 to 115 percent strength of more than one specimen differs from average
in control mix, in milliliters. by more than 15 percent, repeat the test for pozzolanic
strength. Figure 12 shows a typical recording form for
26. Pozzolanic Activity Index With Lime
compressive strength.
26.1 Procedure: 27. Reactivity With Cement Alkalies
26.1.1 Pozzolanic Activity Test.-To determine the
activity of fly ash or natural pozzolan constituent with 27.1 Procedure:
hydrated lime, make specimens of standard mortar and 27.1.1 Reduction of Mortar Expansion.-Determine
test in compression as described in the subsequent sections. reduction of mortar expansion in accordance with USBR
26.1.2 Standard Materials.-The hydrated lime shall 4441.
be chemical reagent grade calcium hydroxide (note 9) of 27.1.2 Mortar Expansion.-Determine mortar
such fineness that residue on a No. 325 (45-#m) sieve expansion in accordance with requirements of USBR 4441.
is not greater than 5 percent by mass as determined in
accordance with USBR 4430. The sand shall be natural 28. Report
silica sand from Ottawa, Illinois, conforming to require-
ments of section 4, USBR 4109. 28.1 Figure 13 shows a typical reporting form for the
physical tests.
NOTE 9.-The calcium hydroxide should be protected from
exposure to carbon dioxide. Material remaining in an opened 29. Precision and Bias
container after a test should not be used for subsequent tests.
29.1 The precision limits for this procedure have not
26.1.3 ProportioningandMixing.-The mortar shall been established at this time.
contain 1 part hydrated lime and 9 parts graded standard 29.2 There is no known bias for this procedure.
408
USBR 4311
Tare D Tare A D- A D- A
plus Wet plus Dried Mass D
Sample Brand Plant Type Crucible Tare, Wet Sample, Dried Sample, Loss, x 100
No. Name ID or No. Sample, Sample, Moisture
Content,
grams grams grams grams grams grams percent
NOTES:
409
USBR 4311
NOTES:
410
USBR 4311
NOTES:
0.5 (100 - percent LO1)
Mass in col. (1) =
100
HF = hydrofluoric acid
4L1
USBR 4311
NOTES:
t0.5000-gram sample
412
USBR 4311
NOTES:
*0.5000-gram sample
413
USBR 4311
ml 72.4 Mz
Tare Blank Net = MgO,
Type Porcelain Tare, plus Deter- MguP2OT,
Sample Brand Plant or Crucible MguP2Ov, mination,
No.I Name ID ( No.
grams grams grams percent
NOTES:
10.5000-gram sample
414
USBR 4311
Mz 34.3 M2
Tare Gross Blank Net = SO3,
Type Procelain Tare,
plus BaSO4, Deter- BaSO4,
Sample Brand Plant or Crucible BaSO4, mination,
No. l Name ID No.
grams grams grams grams grams percent
NOTES:
t 1.0000-gram sample
415
USBR 4311
NOTES:
L5000-mg sample
416
USBR 4311
.c
E
"8
._
"
r-.
E
e
.o
._q
",7-,
t:h
I
v
v ._
ct
._.q
417
USBR 4311
"%
2
C
[..
2
u gN 0
E
.<
ell
M
8 ," D
:u
r:z
D
e
< E
I
,-1
.g e
418
USBR 4311
MIX PROPORTIONS
Cement- Ottawa W, or Wt W
Pozzolan Brand Plant Type Specific Cement Pozzolan Sand Water Flow, Water
Sample Name ID or Gravity Mass, Mass, Mass, Mass, Required,
No. Class grams grams grams mL percent percent
DRY/" L type"
A/I- 7 / 2o 2"EA/. $'Z/OE, " .,A 3./5 Soo o /375" 242 /o7
t" tad4
NorI'ES:
Figure 11. - Water requirement and pozzolanic activity index with portland cement.
419
USBR 4311
MIX PROPORTIONS
Curing Ottawa
Pozzolan Brand Plant Class Pozzolan Lime Pozzolan Lime Sand Water Flow
Sample Name ID Temp. Time Specific Specific Mass, Mass, Mass, Mass,
No. Gravity Gravity
F C hours grams grams grams mL %
n
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 2- BY 4-INCH (51- BY 102-mm) CYLINDERS AND 2-INCH (50-mm) CUBES
Cylinder Cube Curing Total Compressive Average
Specimen Size Size Series Temperature Age, Load Strength Compressive
No. days Strength
inches mm inches mm F C lbf N lbf/in 2 MPa lbf/in 2 MPa
7 ,44-
5o 74 3o 54 7 /d 7oo d. il
9 So do S'4 7 / . d. a'#
NOFES:
420
USBR 4311
Aggregate: Coarse ([] 4233 [] Project) Source-c ,Sp.Gr..4'l, MSA3.S'.k(mm)i CI- -----
Fine(l4233 [] Project) SourceG_-., Sp.Gr '-gT, EM oTr"
AEA Brand t'/,.F/- RZI'$'At' ManufacturerJPI,. ZAS.
Control Test Control Test Conf.rol Tilt
MIx MIx Mh Mix Mix Mix
421
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4341-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4341; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 341-84.
422
USBR 434:1
N('E :i.-T'hree strain gau:ges .of the f:u]cuntl p.lhse type are between inner31nost ends of gauge studs Contact ter:qirJ, a]s
i]lk..rate.d a.lrl fiigL*re 2 [rl, thi'; procedure and f[g;uzc i in USBR
of.ou.n3pa rator shall be plane, p,a.]ished, heat-eated surtraces
49,1) 1. These gauges are ess.enria]]y all,:*y sed haines 1-: a=e
as descriibe.d in AS,TM C 490.
held [ic) ylermi ala short lCl[*glitud[Dall] (ra'ldd us:ing; a lint plate 5,Fl, r;ing:
arrlngem,,:,nl 'TIhe ins, mu-ner,t is p,Cli,ii{i[L)FJe:,d by a SeE Cif p,:xirledl 6. :1 4.2: (Ta'eZ,e S'tL& ,:*q' E)carce ,gf ]pecHT?ens.-\X?he'n
[-:,lr, s hle]d in ]*<l!les. i3s tlq, e fladq, e3d gauge StL*ds in :l-le specimen .c.,:m3g, aat,:.}r is to be tsed ,:, me'as.Lre between gauge svuds
A dM is nq,,:,,un.tedl belween th, e n,,m.,able fame.s for ]c.ngd>change .,an sides of sF, ecim.ens:, c:,a.ntact ,ern:-Uia:,ls sha]]l be oonica],
Fen d i rigs. h,e.abre.ated surfaces as shc,,wn ,:m figure 2:. In, hils; case:,,
the gauge length, sha]tl be the &istance between reference
6.1.4 h>,erts., k'seT,* &'e"ws, and GaL,g'e Fo/n'gs ,o,; F:,.,:ms, which are' Lc<:aed in exposed ends. of gauge s;ds
S;Li'o's.-Tlnes: heI?.s sl-dlt be AIS.I bpe 3 16 sa[Mess seel {see. ,5.15.
t'[,,1 "i (;:ii'U>ye' Sr,,:-Ga,ge s.tLids shall h,e AIS.I type
or <:,:he corrc, sion-resL,;rant me:.ral (',.f siimi],ar hardness.
Gauge studs of iinvar or s.imiilar metali should be used when 31{!11 stain]less steel or .,::ther c,,:,rn:,sSc,-resistan: metal of
specimens ae es:ed at suJbStantia]b.,, different temperatures. s.i,r, il.ar t3ardness.
Figure 3 in tlis g,,>,ce'due and l]gure 2 in, USBR dqCl,:8 ,15.1.5..1 S'gc, ds'/br E'ds of S'pece)'nens-Gauge studs
_sh,rw a] assc:,t:l:lte.nt ,3,f these items. that are u,. h:,e k:,,ted in ends c,,f specimens stnall ]-a','e
a rc,,,unded, surface :o p>:)vide point oontact whh terrniinals
comp.arat,t;.r is t,:. be used t{:,. measure between gauge studs of The types of studs descrih, ed in ASTM C 49(1
in ends c,,f Sl-:,ecimerllS, the gauge length for o:maputing ae suitable for ins.erdon into drilled h,:les. S.pher[cal studs
percentage length change Shlal]l be .u,::,nsJ:dered :o be distance. having a diameter of 1/'4 o:) 3v."S [nc:h (6 to 1() ram):, ,or
12 3
0
USBR 4341
studs that are sections of spheres of similar diameter, are 8.3.2 Drilled Holes.-For gauge studs that are to be
suitable for cementing to ends of specimens. cemented into drilled holes, the holes should be drilled
6.1.5.2 Studs forSides ofSpecimens.-The exposed only slightly larger than the studs (note 3). For studs that
ends of gauge studs that are to be located on sides of are to be dry-set, holes should be drilled 0.005 inch (0.13
specimens shall have a plane surface, and shall have a ram) smaller than diameter of studs. For small specimens,
diameter or diagonal of 3/8 to 1/2 inch (10 to 13 ram). ensure that specimens are not damaged by drilling
For dry setting, the stud length shall be 1/2 to 5/8 inch operation.
(13 to 16 mm). Shorter lengths, including plane disks,
may be satisfactory for studs that are to be cemented. NOTE 3.-Carbide-tipped masonry drills have been found most
6.2 DialCuges.-Dial gauges shall be graduated to read suitable for this purpose.
either to nearest 0.0001 inch (0.0025 mm) or to nearest
0.001 percent of gauge length. 8.3.2.1 For Gauge Studs in Ends of Specimen.-
Drill holes in ends of a specimen so that their longitudinal
7. Precautions axes coincide with longitudinal axis of specimen. Hole
depths should be such that gauge studs will project from
7.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous 1/8 to 3/16 inch (3 to 5 mm) beyond ends of specimen.
materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim 8.3.2.2 For Gauge Studs on Sides of Specimen.-
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It Drill two holes in each of the two opposite sides of specimen
is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish to compensate for warping and to provide a better average
appropriate safety and health practices and determine for length change. Position both pairs of holes in a plane
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. containing longitudinal axis of specimen and space the
holes to conform to length of comparator. The center of
8. Sampling, Test Specimens, and Test Units
each hole should be at least 1 inch (25 ram) from end
8.1 Samples shall be obtained in accordance with of specimen. Hole depths should preferably be such that
applicable provisions of USBR 4042. top surfaces of gauge studs can be set about 0.1 inch (3
ram) below surface of specimen.
8.2 Test specimens shall be either cores or rectangular
8.3.3 Cementing Methods:
prisms that have been drilled or sawed from existing
8.3.3.1 Studs Set in Holes.-Positiongauge studs
concrete or mortar structures; and that are free from
in their previously drilled holes and at prescribed depths
reinforcing steel, visible cracks, or other structural defects:
Specimens may be of any size; however, if they are to with their exposed ends parallel to surface of specimen
be compared, they should not differ in their cross-sectional for studs having plane end surfaces. The cementing material
dimensions by more than 10 percent or in their length should be stable and effective in either a wet or dry
by more than 20 percent (note 2). It is desirable that gauge environment and at temperatures up to 250 F (121 C).
length be at least six times the maximum nominal size The following cementing materials have been found
satisfactory:
of the coarse aggregatebut not less than 3 inches (76 ram),
and that minimum cross-sectional dimension be at least 8.3.3.1.1 Epoxy Resin.-Epoxy resins for this
three times the maximum nominal size of the coarse purpose should cure at room temperatures. Holes should
aggregatebut not less than 2 inches (51 ram). When gauge be free of loose particles and visually dry to ensure good
bond.
studs are to be located on sides of specimen, the overall
specimen length shall exceed gauge length by at least 2 8.3.3.1.2 Lead.-Lead is satisfactory for speci-
inches. mens subjected to air storage but is not recommended for
long periods of water storage (sec. 10.2.1).
NOTE 2.-Sizes of specimens for which comparators are 8.3.3.1.3 Portland Cement Paste.-Use a thick
normally available are: paste of portland cement plus 2 percent calcium chloride
by mass of cement. Moisten each hole with about 5 mL
1- by 1- by 10-inch (25- by 25- by 254-mm) bars of water, and cement studs in place after water has been
3- by 3- by 15-inch (76- by 76- by 381-mm) bars absorbed. Moist-cure the paste for about 24 hours.
4- by 4- by 30-inch (102- by 102- by 762-mm) bars 8.3.3.1.4 Other Cementing Media.-Sulfur, rose
8- by 8- by 48-inch (203- by 203- by 1219-mm) bars metal, and plaster of paris have also proven satisfactory.
3- by 6-inch (76- by 152-mm) cores or cylinders
8.3.3.2 Studs Cemented to Surface.-An epoxy
6- by 12-inch (152- by 305-ram) cores or cylinders
10- by 20-inch (254- by 508-ram) cores or cylinders resin that sets at room temperature and does not soften
12- by 24-inch (305- by 610-mm) cylinders at a temperature of 250 F (121 C) is the most satisfactory
18- by 36-inch (457- by 914-mm) cylinders material for cementing studs to surface of specimen. To
24- by 48-inch (610- by 1219-mm) cylinders ensure good bond, it is essential that surface be clean. Acid
30- by 60-inch (762- by 1524-mm) cylinders etching, followed by flushing with water and drying, is
36- by 72-inch (914- by 1829-mm) cylinders a satisfactory preparation of surface for bonding. The
exposed end surface of each stud having a plane end surface
8.3 Setting Gauge Studs: should be parallel to surface of specimen.
8.3.1 Gauge studs may be dry-set, cemented into 8.3.4 DIT-Setting Method.-Drive gauge studs into
drilled holes, or cemented directly to surface of specimen. their previously drilled holes to their prescribed depths
424
USBR 4341
being careful not to deform exposed ends of studs during For specimens with side-mounted gauge studs, determine
driving operation. gauge length by direct measurement between reference
8.3.5 Reference Points on Gauge Studs.-Establish a points with a suitable scale. For specimens with end-
reference point on each gauge stud that is located on side mounted studs, determine gauge length by first measuring
of specimen by drilling a hole, about 0.04 inch (1 mm) distance between ends of studs with suitable calipers, and
in diameter, with a No. 56 American Standard twist drill then subtracting the lengths of the two studs.
into end of stud to a depth sufficient to provide clearance 11.2 Subsequent Readings:
between bottom of hole and point of comparator, see 11.2.1 Vertical Comparator.-When using the
figure 2. A template will aid in spacing holes at proper vertical comparator, specimen should be brought to
gauge length, which should be as close to mean gauge comparator with the dial feeler point retracted. The lower
length of comparator as practicable. Remove burred edges gauge point of specimen should be brought to rest squarely
from reference point holes. on lower instrument pin; specimen is then held in position
while dial feeler point is released to contact upper gauge
9. Calibration and Standardization point. Before a reading is taken, specimen shall be rotated
to ensure correct seating.
9.1 Each measuring device shall be checked against a 11.2.2 Horizontal Comparator.-Operation of the
reference bar at regular intervals as described in ASTM horizontal comparator is similar to that of the vertical
C 490. comparator, with specimen being carefully placed on
instrument supports and gauge points placed against
10. Conditioning neutral instrument pin before gauge feeler pin is released
to contact gauge point in other end of specimen.
10.1 For Measurement.-Prior to initial measurement 11.2.3 Fulcrum Strain Gauge.-The strain gauge
for length, condition specimens by immersion in lime- should be clasped firmly with one end of gauge in either
hand. The fourth and index fingers of other hand should
saturated water. Maintain temperature of this water at
73.4+3.0 F (23.01.7 C), except that during last hour then be brought in contact with specimen and instrument
of immersion prior to making measurements, maintain pins brought to specimen carefully by closing the fingers
temperature at 73.41.0 F (23.00.6 C). When until instrument pins are in contact with gauge points.
The instrument pins should be perpendicularto specimen
measuring, remove specimens from water one at a time,
wipe with a damp cloth, and immediately measure for to ensure correct readings and to prevent breakage of feeler
length. Make length measurements at 7-day intervals, and pins.
continue conditioning until change in length over a 7-day 12. Calculations
period is less than 0.001 percent. Use the length
measurement that determines that this criterion has been
12.1 Figure 6 in USBR 4901 shows a standard data
met as the basis for calculating length change occurring
form used in the length-change computations for 8- by
during the air- or water-storage period.
8- by 48-inch (203- by 203- by 1219-mm) bars and for
10.2 Subsequent Storage=After measurement at end
18-inch (457-mm) diameter by 36-inch (914-mm) length
of conditioning period, store specimens as described in
cores or cylinders. Figure 5 in USBR 4901 is a sample
either 10.2.1 or 10.2.2, unless another condition of storage
is specified. data form devised to illustrate the computations involved
for a 4- by 4- by 30-inch (102- by 102- by 762-mm) bar;
10.2.1 Water Storage.-Immerse specimens in lime-
this form is explained as follows:
saturated water at 73.4+3.0 F (23.01.7 C). For at least
30 minutes prior to measuring the specimens, maintain Column
the temperature at 73.41.0 F (23.00.6 C). Make length
measurements on each specimen after 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, Date of measurement
and 64 weeks, unless otherwise specified. Age in days from time of casting or start of
10.2.2 Air Storage.-Store specimens in circulating test
air maintained at 73.42.0 F (23.01.1 C) and at a rela- Time in days for conditioning and storing
tive humidity of 504 percent, unless some other condition Room temperature, T, at time of
of storage is specified. Unless otherwise specified, measure measurement
specimens for length at weekly intervals and continue them AT, which is 73.4 F - T (23.0 C - T)
in air storage until their change in length over a 7-day Standard bar base reading
period is less than 0.001 percent. Preferably, make the Standard bar reading corrected to 73.4 F
measurements in a room maintained at the same (23.0 C)
temperature and humidity levels prescribed for storage. 8 Actual dial reading of specimen No. 1
9 Actual dial reading of specimen No. 2
11. Procedure 10 Average dial reading of specimens 1 and 2
11 Thermal correction to reading, which is
11.1 Determination of Gauge Length=Determine equal to thermal coefficient times A T times
gauge length of each specimen to an accuracy of 1 percent. GL (gauge length)
425
USBR 4341
12 Dial reading corrected for deviation from or by giving details of any conditioning not conforming
73.4 F (23.0 C) to section 10. In either case, report total length of
13 AL, total drying shrinkage to date conditioning period.
14 ALe, unit length change, or AiT/C,L, in inch Description of storage conditioning, either by
per inch per F [(mm/mm)/C]x 10.6 indicating that type of storage outlined in section 10
15 ALe in percent = ALt (100) was followed, or by giving details of storage methods
16 Percentage of length change between not conforming to section 10.
readings Total length of storage period, exclusive of
conditioning period, prior to each length measurement.
13. Report Length-change data, reported as percent increase or
decrease in linear dimension to nearest 0.001 percent,
13.1 The length change of hardened concrete is best based on initial measurement made at end of condi-
reported by letter containing all the known data. The report tioning period.
shall include: Any condition or characteristic of the concrete that
may be of interest to the testing.
Sources of specimen in terms of structure and
particular location in structure from where specimen Any other pertinent information
was obtained.
Dimensions of test specimen. 14. Precision and Bias
Maximum size and mineral character of aggregate
in concrete. 14.1 Precision is dependent upon the particular test
Description of conditioning, either by indication that conditions; no general statement can be made.
type of conditioning outlined in section 10 was followed, 14.2 There is no known bias.
426
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4359-92
PROCEDURE FOR
INTRODUCTION
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. This procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4359; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 359-83.
427
USBR 4359
12. Procedure
428
USBR 4359
Allow mortar to stand undisturbed for remainder of a 45- of mixing. Do not move filled container until these
second interval from time of stopping mixer. measurements are completed. Make all penetrations along
12.2.5 Read temperature, remove thermometer, longitudinal centerline of container. Obtain the 5- and 8-
start mixer, and mix for 15 seconds at medium speed. minute penetrations at points about 1-1/2 inches (40 mm)
If mortar temperature is not in the range of 73.4+3 F from each end of container, and obtain l 1-minute
(23+1.7 C), discard the batch and adjust temperature of penetration at a point about midway between points where
water or sand, or both, to give required temperature. initial and 5-minute penetrations were made.
12.3 Filling Container: 12.4.3 After completing the 11-minute penetration
12.3.1 Immediately after completion of mixing, measurement, immediately return mortar in container to
remove bowl from mixer and, with a spoon, uniformly bowl, start mixer, raise bowl into mixing position, and
distribute a portion of mortar into container until the remix at medium speed for 1 minute. Fill a clean container
container is heaping full. When removing mortar from as outlined in section 12.3 and determine penetration 45
bowl, quickly and gently place each spoonful of mortar seconds after completion of mixing.
into container; do not remove mortar pushed up on side 12.4.4 Figure 2 shows a typical calculation form.
of bowl by the paddle. After container has been filled,
reassemble mixer, cover bowl with a lid, and retain 13. Report
remaining mortar for a remix test to be performed later.
To compact mortar in container, lift container about 3 13.1 A suggested reporting form is shown on figure
inches (80 mm) off table with both hands and rap container 5 of USBR 4183. The report shall show the depths of
twice against table surface. the penetrations as follows:
12.3.2 With leading edge of trowel slightly raised,
strike off mortar with one stroke of trowel along length
Initial penetration mm
of container. Then, remove excess mortar by using a sawing 5-minute penetration mm
motion with straightedge of trowel along length of 8-minute penetration mm
container in a direction opposite to that used in striking 11-minute penetration mm
off the mortar. Smooth surface of mortar with a single Remix penetration mm
stroke of trowel.
12.4 Penetration Tests: 14. Precision and Bias
12.4.1 After filling container, immediately place the
10-ram plunger of Vicar apparatus in contact with surface
14.1 Interlaboratory test data for determination of
of mortar at midpoint of container on longitudinal
statements of precision and bias in accordance with ASTM
centerline, and set movable indicator at zero. Release
C 670 are being evaluated and will be included in a later
plunger 3 minutes after the starting time of wet mixing
revision of this test procedure.
and record, as the initial penetration, the depth in
millimeters that plunger has settled below surface 10
seconds after being released. Generally, plunger will settle 15. Reference
to bottom of container and initial penetration will
accordingly be recorded as +50 mm. 15.1 For additional useful information on details of
12.4.2 Immediately withdraw and clean plunger. cement test methods, see "Manual of Cement Testing,"
After moving Vicat apparatus to desired location, determine which appears in the Annual Book of ASTM Standards,
penetrations at intervals of 5, 8, and 11 minutes after start vol. 04.01.
429
USBR 4359
Penetration
Sample Brand Plant or Admixture Water, Temp., Initial, 5-min, 8-min, 11-rain, Remix,
No. Name ID Class mL C mm mm mm mm mm
"8,," CAgA F/'P.$ o,' /" ZA
StA/D, Aro ,wE /8'0 24 So 50 4q 4# 50
NOTES:
430
@ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4403; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 403-80.
431
USBR 4403
at an exact measurement distance of 1 inch (25.4 mm) Upon completion of specimen preparation, mortar surface
above the bearing face. The length of the 1/40-in2 (16- shall be at least 1/2 inch (13 ram) below top edge of
mm 2) needle shall not be more than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) container to provide space for collection and removal of
to minimize bending. bleeding water and to avoid contact between mortar surface
4.3 TampingRod.-A round, straight, steel rod 5/8 inch and protective covering specified in section 9.
(16 mm) in diameter and about 24 inches (610 mm) in
length, with tamping end rounded to a 5/8-inch-diameter 9. Conditioning
hemispherical tip.
9.1 Store and maintain specimens at desired temper-
4.4 Pipet.-Pipet or suitable instrument for drawing off
ature of test. To preventexcessive evaporation of moisture,
free water from surface of test specimens.
keep the specimens covered with a suitable material such
as damp burlap or a tight-fitting, water-impermeable cover
5. Precautions for duration of the test, except when bleeding water is
being removed or penetration tests are being made.
5.1 This procedure may involve hazardous materials, Specimens shall be shielded from the sun.
operations, and equipment, and does not claim to address
all safety problems associated with its use. It is the 10. Procedure
responsibility of the user to consult and establish
10.1 Remove bleeding water from surface of mortar
appropriate safety and health practices and determine
specimens by using a pipet or suitable instrument just prior
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
to making a penetration test. To facilitate collection of
bleeding water, tilt specimen carefully to an angle of about
!6. Number of Specimens 12 from horizontal by placing a block under one side
2 minutes prior to removal of bleeding water.
6.1 At least three separate batches shall be made for 10.2 Insert a needle of appropriate size, depending
each test condition. One rate-of-hardening test shall be upon state of hardening of mortar, into penetration
made on each batch. An equal number of batches for each resistance apparatus and bring bearing surface of needle
condition shall be made on any given day. When it is into contact with mortar surface. Gradually and uniformly
impossible to make at least one test for each variable on apply a vertical force downward on apparatus until needle
.a given day, mixing of entire series of batches shall be penetrates mortar to a depth of 1 inch (25.4 ram) exact
completed in as few days as possible, and one of the measurement as indicated by scribe mark. The time required
mixtures shall be repeated each day as a standard of to penetrate to this 1-inch depth shall be about 10 seconds.
comparison. Record the force required and time of application, measured
as elapsed time after initial contact of cement and water.
7. Calibration and Standardization In subsequent penetration tests, take care to avoid areas
where mortar has been disturbed by previous rests. The
clear distance between needle impressions shall be at least
7.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane-
two diameters of needle being used, but not less than
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests
1/2 inch (13 mm). The clear distance between any needle
listed under the ApplicableDocuments of section 2 are
impression and side of container shall not be less than
covered under that particular procedure or standard. 1 inch (25 mm).
10.3 Make penetration tests at hourly intervals for
8. Preparation of Mortar Specimens normal mixtures and normal temperatures, with the initial
test being made after an elapsed time of 3 to 4 hours.
8.1 From concrete mixture under test, select a For accelerated mixtures or high temperatures, it may be
representative sample of concrete of sufficient volume to advisable to make initial test after an elapsed time of 1
provide enough mortar to fill test container, or containers, or 2 hours and subsequent tests at 1/2-hour intervals. For
to a depth of at least 5-1/2 inches (140 ram). low-temperature conditions or retarded concrete mixtures,
8.2 Remove essentially all mortar from sample of initial penetrationtest may be deferred for an elapsed time
concrete by sieving it through a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve of 4 to 6 hours, and perhaps longer. Subsequent tests may
onto a nonabsorptive surface. be made at 1-hour intervals unless rate of increase in
8.3 Thoroughly remix mortar by hand methods on the penetration resistance indicates that shorter intervals are
nonabsorptive surface, place mortar in container, and desirable.
compact by rodding. Rod specimen by holding tamping 10.4 No less than six penetrationresistance determi-
rod so as to penetrate mortar with round end. Rod mortar nations shall be made in each rate-of-hardening test, and
once for each 1 in 2 (645 mm 2) of top surface area of the time intervals between penetration resis'tance
specimen and distribute strokes uniformly over cross determinations shall be such as to give a satisfactory rate-
section of specimen. After completion of rodding, tap sides of-hardening curve, as indicated by equally spaced points.
of container lightly with tamping rod to close voids left Continue tests until one penetration resistance of at least
by tamping rod and to further level surface of specimen. 4,000 lbf/in2 (27.6 MPa) is reached.
432
USBR 4403
11. Calculations per square inch (megapascals) as the ordinate and elapsed:
time in hours and minutes as the abscissa, where 500 lbf/in2
11.1 Calculate penetration resistance, in pound force (3.4 MPa) and 1 hour are represented by not less than
per square inch (megapascals), as the force required to 1/2 inch (13 mm) on the graph paper. Figure 2 shows
cause a 1-inch (25.4-mm) depth of penetration of needle a typical plotting of curves.
divided by area of bearing face of needle.
11.2 Time-of-Setting=Times of initial and final setting
13. Precision and Bias
as defined in sections 3.1 and 3.2 shall be calculated by
averaging the elapsed times determined from the curves
plotted in accordance with section 12.1.2, at which 13.1 The single-operator coefficient of variation for
penetration resistances of 500 and 4,000 lbf/in (3.4 and time of initial set has been found to be 7.1 percent.
27.6 MPa) are reached. Time-of-setting shall be reported Therefore, the range of results obtained on three separate
in hours and minutes to nearest minute. batches by same operator with same apparatus, using
similar materials, on three different days, should not exceed
12. Report 23 percent of their average.
13.2 The multilaboratory coefficient of variation for
12.1 Figure 1 shows a typical data sheet and reporting time of init!al_s_et, wh_e9 results are based on average of
form. The report shall include: three tests, has been found to be-5.2 percent. Therefore,
12.1.1 Data on Concrete Mixture: results of two different laboratories on similar materials
should not differ by more than 15 percent of their average.
Type and proportions of cement, fine aggregate,and 13.3 The single-operator coefficient of variation for
coarse aggregate (including maximum size); and ratio time of final set has been found to be 4.7 percent. Therefore,
of net water content to cement content. the range of results obtained on three separate batches
Name, nature, and percentage of active ingredients by same operator with same apparatus, using similar
(by mass of cement) of any addition or admixture used. materials, on three different days, should not exceed 16
Air content of fresh concrete and method of percent of their average.
determination (USBR 4138, 4173, or 4231). 13.4 The multilaboratory coefficient of variation for
Consistency of concrete as determined by the slump time of final set, when results are based on average of
test or other test for consistency (USBR 4143). three tests, has been found to be 4.5 percent. Therefore,
Temperature of mortar after sieving. results of two different laboratories on similar materials
Record of ambient temperature during test period. should not differ by more than 13 percent of their average.
Date of test
NOTE 1.-The values for precision shown in sections 13.1
12.1.2 Curves.-For each variable and condition of through 13.4 are the 1S and 2S limits as described in ASTM
concrete as specifiecl in section 6, results from each of C 670.
three or more rate-of-hardening tests shall be plotted
separately showing penetration resistance in pound force 13.5 This procedure has no known bias.
433
USBR 4403
Batch No. 1 2 3
Time of cement-water contact I/." oO a.m. 1." oop. m. 2: Oop. .
Mortar temp. after seiving ..o"7 F F F
Room temp. 70 F oF oF
Air Content:
P =pressure meter *4. % P, 3. q%G 4.3 %P,3.0 %G "-2% P, 4.3% G, minus//inch
G = gravimetric % P, 3. - % G % P, 3. O % G % P, 3. O % G, minus 4 inch
Slump t inch 2 t/t inch 2 inch
Average Time-of-Set (from fig. 2): Initial 4" hours 3 min.; Final 7 hours // min.
Figure la. - Typical data sheet and reporting form (inch-pound units).
434
USBR 4403
Batch No. 1 2 3
Time of cement-water contact /1:00 a. m. m. 2: OOp.tn.
Mortar temp. after seiving /3. 1 C /4.4 C 13. q C
Room temp. 2/. / o C 2/. / C 2L l C
Air Content:
P = pressure meter ,,.E % P, 3.q% G 4.3 % P, 3.0% G . % P, 4.3 % G, minus3Z-mm
G = gravimetric % P, 3. 2 % G % P,-3. 0 % G % P, 3.0% G, minus/:o mm
Slump 57 mm #'7 mm d'O mm
Average Time-of-Set (from fig. 2): Initial -4 hours3 min.; Final 7 hours // min.
435
USBR 4403
5,0O0 Xl
(34.47) I
I
I":1
FINAL SET
4,000 Ibf/in 2 (27.58 MPo)
41500 0 7HRS. 08 MIN.
(31.03) X 7HRS. 17 MIN.
!
l
[] 7HRS. 09 MIN.
AV. 7HRS. II MIN.
u)
.J 4,ooo
<
u
(27.58)
or)
o.
w
... 3,500 I
-r (24.13)
U (
z
t=.l
n-
ooo
o(2o.68)
iv
INITIAL SET
J 2,5oo
w 500 Ibf/in= (3.45 MPa)
a- (17.24} 0 4 HRS. 25 MIN.
0 X 4HRS. 42 MIN.
u. [3 4HRS. 38 MIN.
AV. 4HRS. 35 MIN.
Q
z
0
=L 000
W" 113.79) /I
3 rl
Z t
<[
I--
/)
(/)
,,, 5o0
(E (10.34)
Z
0
IE:
000
z (6.89)
S
Q.
500
(3.45)
r/
o0 2 3 4 5 6 7
ELAPSED TIME IN HOURS
436
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4426-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4426; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 426-70 (Reapproved 1982).
437
USBR 4426
gauges, the p.]lug:s sl-m]l]i be 3/8 ,:, 1../2 mc:h /'9'.S o. ]2.7'
}:itlK' 2. - ,4, <,L][I;l[:,k. :lpl:,arattlS ]!,,:H" ]l]Ca;l:lrellller:lt ,:a
ram) in diiameter and 1/2]/'8 incl's (12:.7_+32 n:sm) it* [eg;'ih dsan,e; F>:,N:[ ASTb.I: '5. q!ut, v,::,[! (:l,i; (I,2 1'!}84
ffNc:].:rsess. F"lugs used wid- the measuring iio, sKument
desc:Nbed in. ASTM C 49'0 shall ,c::,,;osis ,:>f the ]./4-inclT
NCTf'E S 12:,irect heaNng ,:t *es: specimens wiit]-i o:mlb.ust-ion
(6.4-n'm'U diameter s.taic4e.ss seeI gauge studs sIow, n in F,,,,duc[s. ,:,f gas. or c,k, er carb,::,.naceoos :u, els is. o,:: saisfa<:ory
C 490. due :c, l-:,esence ,:,,i: caba,, dic,.:Nde aN, d water= aud hei p,,s.sik:,.][e
elFe.ct <, the drying ch, ar;>areristiic s .of p,:,Hlan,4 c:emem products.
Nf ]TF_I .'-',X/heN, spheNca]ly shaped lciugs are used, due ca, ntac
po.iin c,f die dia]l M,dicator sM,.uld be -ecessed concave. Tlae acl:]us 4.4.3 A me:ns ,,l,f dryiing spec:im, ens to,, a con,diii.,:r
, : :,f he c,r/cve sh.,:u]ld be greser d:,dn d-m ra.diius .of the plug o4 eqoiilibrium with a rehl:,,e Jmmidity ,14 ]7_+2 percent
,:i n<:,te 6, ) Cakium ch ],u, Nde i CaC].: :, :, i[: ased {,c, r t h ;i s p rpc, s.e.
i3 ] As an a]lternative F:,Rcedur'e, gauge p]u, gs osed shalll be: in fake fo.rm.
with strain gauges m%v be:. auacl-md to, surf:a<::e ,:::f speeime.n N(E-'E 6 The air immediiael? above a saRlrate.d s,:>lu:kn c,.c
with ep,:,x>, ,:r po]iyester resin. The method of pF,,k:atJion calciium cl-,brilde (CaCI,S, a 122 ':'F (St) 'C:, is; ab,::,,ut 17 pe.rce,:.
,0,f d-J,e p]lugs t.o surface of lh, e speciimens i[s dlescribed in SuitJ, ble .,J]ist,es or tays s.hal]l be p>oviided cl, give. an, exF:,,,:sed
8.1.] These plugs sh, al]i be 3/"8 ,:: ]/'2 inch (9.5 t:,o 12:.7 sa, Jt:i,m, area .o.f no< less tmn, 29 iin2./R ' ,::57()0 era, e/m, ') o.f o'.e:n
ram) in dlimme.ter arid 3I/'S_+[./8 irch (9.5'-+!;I.2: n:Jm) in 'v',:Aumc D, ilshes o.n trays, sha]] con:ain sui:ficient solid cak:{,nna
:i c: ]-;: nes s. chM.Nde s,::, N,at the .rp;t,ls; wi N be expc, sed a,bove d-l,e sub'ace
d.4 DG'.h; (.]'ve.-A reas,,:.)nabl?' airtigh,:, insNa:ed of h,e s,;hl, tion th,:,ugh,out the res. The. c:a].Nu,:l ch.lk*r/dle s,;kalui:,n
cabinet p<:,v:idmg a n-ir, imum st,ocage capac:ky ot three s h 1 be v h ,: r . u g h ] i s. [ r r e',4 ev c ry 2:4 h c, u r s ,. ; n ,: :, e ,: :,.i: t e r', i f: r., e c: e s s. a :y ,.
tilL} prevent: [:'i:l'IlllilClln t[.>f h:lmp:i all-ld [l'l,:: CI'LJS[i-J{; OlYe[ Ol{ the:
wh,::de I:,,*c,,ck test sF,,ecinq, ec,,s and caF,.ab]e of l:naintam, ing
sc, k:(Am, see reference gi]ver i]r-
a cc,,nsa n temperature c,,f: 12"::-+:2 o F ,(.!i 0-f- 1.1 ' C). A suitable
oven oo, nstrui,Nii,,Ln is sl-,,owll ,o,n fgnre 3. The ,:,.ve'q, should :t.4.4 Moderate c:ir:'l,ti::,q, of ai wik}-Hi, oven, over
als;,: p.r,::,,vide the features ,descNbed M 4.4.11 :hre:mgh 444. and ,ra, ur,d all test spe'cirne'n,s and duing agent.
4 i l A minirnmYx c,t l-inch (2S-ram) c:eaan,c:e on 4i (k:,,c;,/.i: C'i!'er,f, er.-An aiirtigt enck:,.sure c:,i:
al sides c, each :es.t spe..chnen s'uft:kienv capac:k}; for ca,,::lik, g a nq, h2imum ,f d,re.e w}7,c,de
q].2 A c:ors:am:, u:niiform te.mperaure ,:f 12:2_+2 F' bl,:ck test spednens.
(50_+:1. (i) through,:4H cabine:. aaioed by means c,,:: an .,:!i ],'z;,,,2e:Ji,o TJ, ok A sukaNie c:,:mtainer f.o c,o,m,-
electrical he'a: so,u'ce .:note S:l, and sukable tin, erma] p]letel'y ]imrnersirg three wh,,::]le Nook est spe.c:irneos iin
wa*e:r maintained H 73.'{_+2: o F ,:i 23.-- ] ]l o C)
USBR 4426
I!
I i V
II _ 7 Inner cover
II "#r
1'. /S,t'an
,,_
Ii
;,Thermostat'
' i DET _I//. Shaft extension
lul I " I.D. Sleeve coupling
II I
, f, !! .=qLo H.P Shaded-Pole,end
TOP
.qf
36
Heat baffle
!
f
IIOV Fan
IL
_-_ Fanguard Jf
IlEal Thermostat J
CJ:
I WIRING
II I
o o --11-4 DIAGRAM
--I--I IOOW/,
I -fThermostat I'-
J
I ii I -- b-
'
I..---- J ..... o_. ----Provide:
30/12 x 36/12 x 42/12 x 25 = 660inz
of TroyArea for CoCIz
FRONT SIDE salt solution.
Figure 3. - Drying oven suitable for determining drying shrinkage of concrete block. From ASTM C 426, vol. 04.05, 1984.
4.7 Balance or Scale.-The balance shall be sensitive 6.2 Reference Bar.-The standard reference bar should
to within 0.1 percent of the mass of smallest specimen be protected against air currents as specified in note 3.
tested. 6.3 Gauge Plugs.-The gauge plugs shall be made of
metal that is resistant to corrosion, and shall meet the
5. Reagentsand Materials
specifications outlined under section 4.3 and note 4. If any
5.1 Reagants and materials are covered under section cementing agent for attaching plugs to specimens (sec.
4.4.3 and note 6. 4.3.1) is substituted for portland cement, tests should be
performed as instructed in note 9.
6. Precautions 6.4 Drying Oven.-Direct heating of test specimens
with the combustion products of gas or other carbonaceous
6.1 These test procedures may involve hazardous fuels may have an effect on the drying characteristics of
materials, operations, and equipment, and do not claim portland cement products, as outlined in note 5.
to address all safety problems associated with their use. 6.5 Specimens:
It is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish 6.5.1 The initial reading of specimen length at
appropriate safety and health practices and determine saturation must be taken with the gauge line at about water
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. level in compliance with section 11.2.
439
USBR 4426
6.5.2 If some masonry units exude moisture faster I s'l'. Cu'l'-. _. 2nd Cui"
in the initial drying period than theocalcium chloride
solution can absorb, the units may be allowed to drain
for 48 hours in room air, as outlined in section 11.4 and
note 11.
7. Test Specimens
7.1 The test specimens selected shall be whole units, _-,, --!i i_z-'"
!
free of visible cracks or other structural defects, which shall
be representative of the lot from which they are selected
(102 mrn)--- "Specimen No.I
(note 7). Portions of face shells (see 7.1.1) may be used
for testing in lieu of whole units providing they are dry
cut lengthwise from both faces of hollow units at least Figure 4. - View of sawed block showing a suggested sequence of
cuts and location of two half-face shell specimens. From ASTM
12 inches (305 ram) in length. Units previously subjected
C 426, vol. 04.05, 1984.
to tests involving temperatures exceeding 150 F (65.6 o C)
shall not be used in drying shrinkage tests.
holes for strain gauge points with a NO. 56 to No. 60
NOTE 7.-In tests of short units such as concrete brick by this twist drill, see section 2.5.
method, use of a 10-inch (254-mm) Whittemore strain gauge
NOTE 8.-A 5/16-inch (7.9-mm) diameter, carbide-tipped
is feasible when two units are butted together and joined using
masonry drill has been found satisfactory for gauge plugs 3/8 inch
an epoxy resin cement to form an extremely thin joint between
the units. The abutting ends of the units should be ground to (9.5 mm) in diameter.
ensure intimate contact and a thin joint; these precautions are
NOTE 9.-A number of cementing agents have been reported
necessary to ensure the thinnest joints practicable and thereby
avoid abnormal shrinkage indications. Some laboratories have satisfactory for setting gauge plugs. Materials such as dental
obtained satisfactory results using a 10-inch Whittemore strain cement and some of the polyester and epoxy resins reduce the
gauge on specimens joined with unfilled epoxy cements. preparation time of shrinkage test specimens. Tests to determine
the effect of water immersion and subsequent drying on the
7.1.1 The number of specimens selected should material's adhesion should be made prior to substitution of any
consist of three whole units or six, half-face shells. The cementing agent for portland cement.
half-face shells should be at least 4 inches (102 ram) wide
8.1.1 When gauge plugs used with strain gauges are
and should be same length as shell. The shells should be
attached to surface of concrete with epoxy or polyester
removed fromdiagonally opposite ends of the two opposite resin, drill receiving holes for strain gauge points prior
face shells as shown on figure4. Half-face shell specimens to attachment of gauge plugs. Attach plugs with epoxy
must be dry cut from hollow units not less than 12 inches or polyester resin (note 9) using strain gauge punch bar
(305 mm) in length.
or other convenient template to set gauge holes proper
distance apart. The surface of metal gauge plugs which
8. Preparation of Apparatus
will be in contact with resin should be roughened with
emery cloth.
8.1 Inserts for Strain Gauge Measurements on Whole 8.2 Inserts for Comparator Measurements.-Mount on
Units andHalf-FaceShellSpecimens.-Place a pair of gauge opposite ends of test specimen's spherically shaped gauge
plugs at or near, and parallel to, the centerline in each plugs, for use with the type of comparator described in
of two opposite faces of the whole unit specimen. Place ASTM C 490. Drill a shallow recess (note 10) at desired
a gauge line on both interior and exterior sides of each location using a drill size slightly smaller than plug
half-face shell specimen. Drill the gauge plug holes with diameter. Fill recess with cementing material and firmly
a drill that is slightly smaller than plug diameter to provide press plug into position, taking care that cement extends
a snug fit (note 8). The depth of the holes shall be such slightly above the level of center of sphere. After cementing
that the exposed surface of inserted gauge plug is about material is sufficiently hard, clean excess material from
0.1 inch (2.5 mm) below surface of specimen. The exposed portion of gauge plug.
cementing agent shall be portland cement paste or an
approved alternate cementing agent (note 9). Prior to NOTE 10.-Satisfactoryresults without a drilled recess have
setting plug, plug holes shall be moistened when hydraulic been reported with the use of quick-setting cementing materials
cement is used, but shall be dry and dust free when plugs (note 9).
are set in epoxy or polyester resins or other nonhydraulic
cementing materials. After cementing material has been 9. Calibration and Standardization
placed in hole, insert gauge plug and prick punch plug
to proper gauge length with gauge bar provided. Wipe 9.1 Shrinkage Measurement Devices:
off excess cementing material and allow remainder to cure. 9.1.1 The Whittemore extensometer (fig. 1) shall
Aftercementing material is sufficiently hard, drill receiving comply with USBR 1000, and be calibrated to a standard
440
USBR 4426
reference bar (note 3) or gauge block furnished by the 3/8-inch (9.5-mm), or larger, mesh and removing visible
manufacturer. The dial gauge shall be calibrated in surface water by blotting with a damp cloth.
accordance with USBR 1007. 11.4 Store test specimens for drying in the oven as
9.1.2 Dial micrometers (4.1.2) shall also be calibrated described in 4.4. In exceptional circumstances, it is
in accordance with USBR 1000. permissible to surface dry specimens in room air before
9.1.3 Comparator (4.2) shall meet the specifications stoing in oven (note 11). To ensure uniformity of drying,
as outlined in sections 5.4.1 and 5.4.2 of ASTM C 490, individual specimens should be rotated to different
and the measuring device and dial gaugeshall be calibrated positions in drying oven each time readings are taken.
against a reference bar as outlined under section 5.4.3 of
C 490. NOTE l l.-Reports have indicated that moisture is exuded
faster by some masonry units during the early part of the drying
9.2 Gauge Plugs.-The gauge plugs shall comply with
period than can be absorbed by the calcium chloride solution,
the requirements of section 4.3.
causing condensation to form on interior surfaces of oven. Where
9.3 Drying Oven.-The drying oven shall conform to this situation is encountered, it shall be permissible to allow units
the requirements of sections 4.4 through 4.4.4 and shall to lose excess water for periods up to 48 hours in room air
be calibrated in accordancewith USBR 1020. before transfer to drying oven, provided effect of such deviation
9.4 Balance or Scale.-The balance or scale shall permitted under 11.4 has been determined to be negligible.
conform to requirements of section 4.7, and shall be
calibrated in accordancewith USBR 1012. 11.5 After 5 days of drying, including any period of
preliminary drying in room air up to 48 hours, remove
9.5 Thermometer.-The thermometer for checking the
water in the immersion tank shall be accepted on shrinkage specimens from drying oven and cool to
73.4+2 F (23+1.1 C), see note 12. Following cooling,
manufacturer's certification.
obtain specimen length reading, mass determination, and
10. Conditioning length reading of standard reference bar.
44l
USBR 4426
00"0 I "'i1
temperature T (note 14),
Gx = gauge length of specimen or reference bar at
temperature Tx, and
Q = thermal coefficient of expansion of material
(note 15).
0.05
where:
14. Precision and Bias
A L1 = change in linear dimension of specimen due to
variations in reference bar readings not 14.1 The precision and bias for this test procedure have
caused by temperature changes, not been established.
442
USBR 4426
.
oJ
"." c7'
.
e.g .
.-
".._ g
*" ..
._
a .....
i
. ' ....
r-- d
' ' .
! Z
-
.. '
"
I
.. =
aa. .- -
,it
.,%
._
- . . 0 0 e
n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .
443
USBR 4426
".. o" o o
d g . o
oo
._ _
%
, ,,g !
i= .
e'*
," Z
Z
%
. o
O O : O O O O 0 0 0 0 0 0
444
USBR 4426
Block Produced By: VAzd-'Y ATe" octc Co.j DE,,'vR a '0 Date Produced: /-2-d7
Aggregate: Type A/oM.,t O/ar , MSA a/',,.4 i:'.cheg(m..-'2)., Source C,''A C/eEve--DE/vvEzaco
Cement: Type 2" , Brand .2"o,'Az. , Supplier PoArtAwoj co
Pozzolan: Class A/A , Source /I/,4 , Supplier N',,q , Cementitious ,,'.,et %
Other Additives: 4/4
Method of Curing and Drying Prior to Test: Sr',4 Nt (tat I/o//,.s;} --A/ CJez" (A'ESr)
Nominal Size: d'- 8J" a'- 8Y/d- inches (-ram-), Grade: /V , Type: .Z"//o..,c ow'- Z.aa 8E/te/A,'
2 dO 34.40
4W 3'./el
4g 7--0 36. 3 0. Oeg
120 3. .q l 0. 0 8"
/68 6.31 O. o0
21g 36.@" '.5 d. o.oBo
3 gO 3d. ;o
,4@ ..g. 44
48 72 .*6. '7 O. 027
12o
/66"
21g 6.56 0. 031
264 36.56 '. I 7. 4 O. 031
445
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4430-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4430; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 430-83.
446
USBR 4430
8. Calculation
Figure I. - Spray nozzle: 17 holes of 0.02-inch (0.51-mm) diameter. 8.1 Calculate fineness of cement to nearest 0.01 percent
Using outside threads rather than inside threads (as shown) is
permissible. as follows:
447
USBR 4430
do do // /o oO0
NOTES:
t
difference o. o.?"
XCorrectionfactor = o. o,qL4
measured residue = (100) = ."d. 8 %
448
USBR 4430
C CA/.-
84 // N2" ;v'2" NZ I.ooo Oe O241 2Z' 3.oo 96.9;Z
NOTES:
449
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4441-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. This procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4441; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 441-81.
450
USBR 4441
on a specific job. A maximum expansion of 0.'020 percent is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish
at 14 days is usually specified when a job mixture is used appropriate safety and health practices and determine
in accordance with section 9.2.3. applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
4.3 Although the reduction in expansive reaction is
evaluated at 14 days, readings are usually continued for 9. Sampling, Test Specimens, and Test Units
at least 1 year. Some pozzolans have been found effective
in reducing early-age expansions, but excessive expansions 9.1 Obtain samples of mineral admixturein accordance
have occurred at later ages. Petrographic analysis and other with applicable provisions of USBR 4311.
tests on pozzolanic materials should be used as additional 9.2 Proportioning and Consistency of Mortar:
safeguards against undesirable expansions. 9.2.1 Control Mixture.-The quantities of dry
materials for control mixture shall be 400 grams of high-
5. Terminology alkali cement (note 1) and 900 grams of Pyrex glass
aggregate, made by recombining portions retained on
5.1 Terms used in this procedure are as defined in various sieves in the grading prescribed in section 7.1.
ASTM C 125 and C 490.
NOTE 1.-If a high-alkali cement containing about 1.0 percent
6. Apparatus total alkalies as Na20 is not available, any cement meeting
requirements of ASTM C 150 may be used provided average
6.1 The apparatus shall be as described in USBR 4227. expansion of mortar bars made from control mixture is 0.10
percent or more at 14 days.
7. Materials
9.2.2 Test Mixture.-The quantities of dry materials
7.1 Pyrex Glass.-Crushed Pyrex glass No. 7740 for test mixture shall be 300 grams of high-alkali cement,
(quenched, lump cullet or solid glass rod) crushed and a mass of admixture having an absolute volume equal to
graded according to table 1 shall be used. After Pyrex glass absolute volume of 100 grams of portland cement (100
has been separated into various sieve sizes, each size shall times specific gravity of admixture divided by 3.15) and
be washed with a water spray over the sieve to remove 900 grams of Pyrex glass aggregate, made by recombining
adhering dust and fine particles from aggregate. The portions retained on various sieves in the grading
portions retained on various sieves shall then be dried prescribed in 7.1.
and, unless used immediately, each such portion shall be
stored individually in a clean container provided with a NOTE 2.-A smaller quantity of admixture and a proportionately
larger quantity of cement may be used if there is evidence that
tight-fitting cover. it is unusually effective in reducing expansion due to alkali-
Table 1. - Grading requirements. aggregate reaction, and that use of a smaller quantity is likely
to produce a large reduction of expansion of test mixture as
Sieve Size Mass, compared to that of control mixture.
Passing Retained on percent
9.2.3 Job Mixture.-The quantities of dry materials
No. 4 (4.75 mm) No. 8 (2.36 mm) 10 used for job mixture shall be in accordance with
No. 8 (2.36 mm) No. 16 (1.18 mm) 25 requirements of sections 9.2.1 and 9.2.2 except that cement
No. 16 (1.18 mm) No. 30 (600/am) 25 to be used on job shall be used instead of high-alkali cement.
No. 30 (600 #m) No. 50 (300/am) 25 Also, the quantity of admixture, by absolute volume, used
No. 50 (300/am) No. 100 (150/am) 15 to replace cement shall be equivalent to that proposed
for use on job.
7.2 Cement.-A high-alkali cement, conforming to 9.2.4 Flow.-The amount of mixing water, measured
ASTM C 150 and containing about 1.0 percent total alkalies in milliliters, shall be such as to produce a flow between
as Na20 (sodium oxide) [percent Na20 plus 0.658 percent 100 and 115 percent as determined in accordance with
K20 (potassium oxide)] shall be used in preparation of USBR 4109.
mortar bars for the percent reduction in expansion test. 9.3 Preparation of Test Specimens:
The cement to be used on job shall be used in combination 9.3.1 Dimensions andNumber of Test Specimens.-
with admixture in the proportions to be used on job, and Make three 1- by 1- by 11-1/4-inch (25- by 25- by 286-
in preparation of mortar bars for job mix evaluation. mm) test specimens having an effective gauge length of
7.3 Mineral Admixtures.-Admixtures conforming to 10 inches (254 ram) from each batch of each mortar
ASTM C 618 shall be used in preparation of mortar bars mixture. One set of three specimens shall represent each
for the present reduction in expansion test. test or job mixture. On same day that test specimens are
made, make one set of three specimens representing control
8. Precautions mixture and store in same container with corresponding
test specimens. Make all specimens stored in a given
8.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous container on same day, and do not open container again
materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim or remove it from storage until 13 days have elapsed. If
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It more specimens from test or job mixtures, or both, are
451
USBR 4441
madeon a given day than can be stored in a singlecontainer E = average expansion of mortar bars from
with specimens from control mixture made on that day, control mixture.
make additional control mixture specimens for each
additional storage container used. 13.2 For test mixtures proportioned in accordancewith
9.3.2 Preparation of Molds.-Prepare molds as 9.2.3, report average expansion of mortar bars as the
specified in USBR 4227 or ASTM C 490. expansion of the combination proposed for use in the work.
9.3.3 Mixing of Mortar.-Mix mortar as specified in Indicate contraction (negative expansion) by prefixing a
USBR 4227 or 4305, except add admixture with cement minus sign to percentage expansion reported.
to water. 13.3 A typical calculation form is shown on figure 1.
9.3.4 Molding Test Specimens.-Mold specimens as
specified in USBR 4227. 14. Reports
10. Calibration and Standardization
14.1 Figure 1 may also be used as a typical reporting
10.1 Calibration and standardization shall be as form. The report shall include:
outlined in section 10 of USBR 4227.
Type of portland cement used and its total alkali
11. Conditioning content as Na20 in percent. If test is applied to a cement-
admixture combination to be used in specific work, the
11.1 The temperature of the dry materials, water, type, brand, and manufacturing location of the cement
molding room, and moist cabinet; and humidity of shall be reported.
laboratory and moist cabinet shall conform to requirements Type and proportion of admixture used. If test is
of section 11 of USBR 4227. applied to a cement-admixture combination to be used
11.2 Store test specimens in accordance with require- in specific work, the type, brand, source, proportion,
ments of section 11 of USBR 4227. and nature of admixture shall be reported.
If control mixture and test mixture are prepared
12. Procedure
as specified in sections 9.2.1 and 9.2.2, the average
expansion of mortar bars prepared from control mixture
12.1 Test specimens in accordance with requirements
and average expansion of mortar bars from test mixture
and at times stipulated in USBR 4227.
shall be reported, in percent. Also, reduction in mortar
12.2 Readingsand observations should be recorded on
expansion resulting from use of admixture shall be
their appropriate data form; a typical form is shown on
reported, in percent.
figure 1.
Average expansion of mortar bars prepared as
13. Calculation specified in section 9.2.3 from job mixtures, in percent.
13.1 For tests of mixtures proportioned in accordance 15. Precision and Bias
with sections 9.2.1 and 9.2.2, calculate reduction of mortar
expansion resulting from use of an admixture as follows, 15.1 Within laboratory variability shall be considered
and report result to nearest 0.1 percent. satisfactory if percentage expansion of each specimen made
Ec- Et from same cement-aggregate combination is within 0.003
Re -- Ec (100) (1) of the average, except that, if average expansion exceeds
0.020 percent, repeatability shall be considered satisfactory
where: if percentage expansion of each specimen molded from
Re = percent of reduction of mortar expansion, same cement-aggregate combination is within 15 percent
Et = average expansion of mortar bars from test of average.
mixture, and 15.2 This procedure has no known bias.
452
USBR 4441
MIX DATA
Cement 1 Sample No. 74 'g Type .2r BrandP,4PC'P/ tcTd#fsV'D Sourcetatta C/2"Y.w CA
2
Admixture 1 Sample No. 7/73 TypeW A[S Class AfA Brand AIoX - Source ,$'Aa'rA/V/IAI
2
Aggregate 1 Sample No. y,'X MSA inch (mm) Supplier "*'- Source
2
Control Mix No./Og Test Mix No. Job Mix No. __
Pyrex Glass Pyrex Glass w/Admix. Proj. Agg. w/ % Cement Rep. by Mass*
Total W/C W/C Reactive Nonreactive
Alkali Mass Agg. or Flow Mass Agg. or Flow Mass Agg. W/C Flow Mass Agg. W/C Flow
Spec. Abs. as W/C+P W/C+P or or
Gray. Sodium Ibm Ibm Ibm W/C+P Ibm W/C+P
9b Oxide % % % % grams A 9b grams % 9b
Re -- F_,-Et (100)=
F
o..,a2-a.
, , (/oo9 -- fe..7X
O.-q2 7
Figure 1. - Sample form on mix design and test data on measuring expansion of mortar bars.
453
J
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
G)
USBR 4451-92
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4451; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 451-83.
454
USBR 4451
and plasticity regained by further mixing without addition 10.5 The Vicat apparatus shall be calibrated to conform
of water. False set, grab set, premature stiffening, hesitation to requirements of USBR 4187 by using scales conforming
set, early stiffening, and rubber set are other terms referring to ASTM C 490 and linear measurement devices in
to this same phenomenon; however, false set is preferred accordancewith USBR 1000.
term. 10.6 The mixer, bowl, paddle, and scraper shall be
5.3 Quick or Flash Set.-The rapid development of checked to conform with USBR 4305 by using a revolution
rigidity in a mixed portland cement paste, mortar, or counter and linear measurement devices meeting the
concrete, usually with the evolution of considerable heat, standards of USBR 1000.
which rigidity cannot be dispelled nor can the plasticity
be regained by further mixing without addition of water. 11. Conditioning
Quick set is preferred term.
11.1 Temperature andHumidity.
6. Apparatus 11.1.1 The temperature of the room shall be
maintained between 68 and 81.5 F (20 and 27.5 C) and
6.1 Scales and Standard Masses.-Shall conform to temperature of dry materials, paddle, bowl, conical ring,
requirements of ASTM C 490.
and baseplate shall be within the same range at time of
6.2 Glass Graduates.-Shall conform to requirements test. Temperature of mixing water shall not vary from
of ASTM C 490. 73.4 F (23 C) by more than +3 F (+1.7 C).
6.3 Vicar Apparatus.-Shall conform to requirements 11.1.2 Relative humidity of laboratory shall not be
of USBR 4187.
less than 50 percent.
6.4 TroweL-Trowel shall have a steel blade 4 to 6
inches (100 to 150 ram) in length, with straight edges. 12. Procedure
6.5 Mixer, Bowl, Paddle, and Scraper.-Shall conform
to requirements of USBR 4305. 12.1 Preparation of Cement Paste.-Mix 500 grams of
cement with sufficient water to produce a paste with an
7. Reagentsand Materials initial penetration of 32+4 mm using the following
7.1 Mixing Water.-Potable water is satisfactory for procedure:
12.1.1 Place dry paddle add dry bowl in mixing
routine tests. For all referee and cooperative tests, reagent
water conforming to requirements of ASTM D 1193 for position in mixer.
Type III or Type IV grades of reagent water shall be used. 12.1.2 Introduce materials for a batch into bowl and
mix as follows:
8. Precautions (1) Place all mixing water in bowl.
(2) Add cement to water and allow 30 seconds for
8.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous absorption of water.
materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim (3) Start mixer and mix at slow speed (140+5 r/min)
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It for 30 seconds.
is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish (4) Stop mixer for 15 seconds and scrape down into
appropriate safety and health practices and determine batch any paste that may have collected on sides of bowl.
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. (5) Start mixer and mix at medium speed (285+10
r/min) for 2.5 minutes.
9. Sampling 12.2 Molding Test Specimens.-Quickly form cement
paste into a ball with gloved hands. Press ball, resting
9.1 Sample cement in accordancewith USBR 4183. in palm of one hand, into larger end of conical ring of
Vicat apparatus (fig. 1, USBR 4187) held in other hand,
10. Calibration and Standardization completely filling ring with paste. Remove excess paste
at larger end of ring by a single movement of palm of
10.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- hand. Place ring on its larger end on the glass plate and
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests slice off excess paste at smaller end (top) of ring by a
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are single oblique stroke of a sharp-edged trowel held at a
covered under that particular procedure or standard directly. slight angle to top of ring. Smooth top of specimen, if
10.2 Scales shall be calibrated to meet requirements necessary, with one or two light touches of pointed end
of ASTM C 490 in accordancewith USBR 1012. of trowel. During the operation of cutting and smoothing,
10.3 Standard masses shall be calibrated to conform take care not to compress the paste.
to ASTM C 490 by comparing to standard masses issued 12.3 Determination of Initial Penetration.-Place the
by NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology), paste, that is confined in ring and resting on glass plate,
formerly NBS (National Bureau of Standards). under the rod of apparatus about one third of the diameter
10.4 Glass graduates shall be accepted on certification from the edge. Move the plunger end of rod into contact
by manufacturer to conform to requirements of section with surface of paste and tighten setscrew. Then, set
4.2 of USBR 4187 and ASTM C 490. movable indicator to upper zero mark of scale and release
455
" USBR 4451
456
USBR 4451
Penetration Remix
Sample Brand Plant Water, Initial, Final, Penetration,
No. Name ID or Admixture mL
Class mm mm Percent mm
NOTES:
457
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4457-92
PROCEDURE FOR
MICROSCOPICAL DETERMINATION
OF AIR-VOID CONTENT AND PARAMETERS
OF AIR-VOID SYSTEM IN HARDENED CONCRETE
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4457; the number immediately
ifollowing the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 457-82a.
1.1 This designation covers the procedure for 2.1 USBR Procedures:
microscopical determinations of air-void content, and the 4042 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
specific surface, spacing factor, and air-paste ratio of the Beams or Cubes of Concrete and Shotcrete
air-void system in hardened concrete. Two methods (note 2.2 ASTM Standards:
1) are described: (1) Linear Traverse (Rosiwal) Method C 457 Standard Practice for Microscopical Determination
[ 1] 1, which is currently in use by the Bureau of Reclamation; of Air-Void Content and Parameters of the Air-Void System
and (2) Modified Point-Count Method [2,3,4,5]. in Hardened Concrete2
1.2 This procedure is based upon measurement of the
air-void system in hardened concrete by prescribed 3. Definitions
microscopical methods on sawed and ground sections
intersecting portions of the interior of the samples, or 3.1 Air Void.-An air void is a small space enclosed
specimens of concrete from the field or laboratory (note by cement paste in concrete and occupied by air. This term
2). does not refer to capillary or other openings of
submicroscopical dimensions or to voids within particles
NOTE 1.-This procedure does not include a description of of aggregate.An air void is almost invariably larger than
the areal traverse method [6]; or [7], in which air voids are 2 /am in diameter. The term "air voids" includes both
relegated to a series of size ranges where number of voids per "entrapped" and "entrained" air voids.
unit volume of concrete can be calculated.
3.2 Linear Traverse (Rosiwal) Method.-This method
is the determinationof volumetriccompositionof a solid
NOTE 2.-The spacing factor is a useful index related to by integrating distance traversed across areas of each
maximum distance of any point in cement paste from periphery
componentalong a line, or along regularly spaced lines,
of an air void. The calculation of this spacing factor is based
in one or more planes intersectinga sample of the solid.
on an assumption that all air voids in sample are equal-sized
spheres arranged in a simple cubic lattice throughout cement Finely ground sections of concrete are examined micros-
paste. The geometrical principles were developed primarily by copicallyalong a series of regularly spaced lines, and the
T. C. Powers [8]. followingdata are obtained: (1) total number of sections
of air voids intersected,(2) total distancetraversed across
1.3 This procedure does not attempt to describe, in sections of voids, (3) total distance traversed across
detail, the alternative procedures by which surfaces for remainder of concrete, and (4) total distance traversed
examination may be prepared or the techniques of across paste, if desired.
microscopical observation and measurement, because it is 3.3 Point-CountMethod.-This method involves the
assumed that work will be performed by or under the determinationof volumetric compositionof a solid by
supervision of a microscopist or personnel adequately observationof frequency that areas of each component
instructed in these methods. The intent of this procedure coincide with a regular system of points in one or more
is to outline the principles of the two methods and to planes intersectinga sample of solid.
establish standards for performance of the techniques in 3.4 ModifiedPoint-CountMethod.-Thisis the point-
evaluating an air-void system in hardened concrete. countmethodsupplementedby determinationof frequency
1 Numbers in brackets refer to entries in References, section 19. 2 AnnualBookofASTM Standards, vol. 04.02.
458
USBR 4457
that areas of each component of a solid are intersected Table 1. - Minimum area Of finished surface for microscopical
by regularly spaced lines in one or more planes intersecting measurement.
a sample of solid. Finely ground sections of the concrete Total minimum area to be traversed
are examined microscopically along a series of regularly Nominal or observed for determination of specific
spaced lines, and the following data are obtained: (1) total maximum size of surface or spacing factor based on
number of sections of air voids intersected, (2) frequency aggregatein concrete direct measurement of:
that regularly spaced points on line of traverse are Total air-void Paste-air
superimposed on sections of air voids, and (3) total number content 1 ratio
of points superimposed on paste, if desired. in 2 (mm 2) in 2 (mm0
3.5 Air-Void Content.-The air-void content is the 6 inches (150 mm) 250 (161 290) 100 (64 516)
proportional volume of air voids in concrete expressed 3 inches (75 mm) 65 (41 935) 30 (19 355)
as the volume percent of the hardened concrete. 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm) 24 (15 484) 15 (9 677)
3.6 Paste Content.-The paste content is the propor- 1 inch (25.0 mm) 12 (7 742) 12 (7 742)
tional volume of cement paste in concrete expressed as 3/4 inch (19.0 mm) 11 (7 097) 11 (7 097)
the volume percent of the hardened concrete. This volume 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) 10 (6 452) 10 (6 452)
is calculated as either the simple summation of proportional 3/8 inch (9.5 ram) 9 (5 806) 9 (5 806)
volumes of cement and water included in concrete mixture, No. 4 (4.75 mm) 7 (4 516) 7 (4 516)
or as determined by microscopical analysis of the hardened
concrete by traversing the prepared sections, [9,10]. 1 The indicated area values refer to reasonably homogeneous, well-
compacted concrete. The microscopical measurement should be made on
3.7 Specific Sucface.-The specific surface is the surface a proportionately larger area of sections if concrete is markedly hetero-
area of air voids in hardened concrete, expressed as the geneous in distribution of aggregateor has large air voids. If more than
area per cubic unit length of the air-void volume. one finished surface is taken from a single portion of the concrete, the
3.8 Chordlntercept.-The chord intercept is the average finished surfaces shall be separated by a distance greater than one-half
of nominal or observed maximum size of aggregate.
length of the chord across cross sections of air voids
intercepted by a line of microscopical traverse.
3.9 Number of Air Voids Per Unit Length of Trav- 5. Apparatus and Materials
erse.-This is the number of air voids intercepted by a line
of microscopical traverse expressed as number of air voids 5.1 The apparatus and materials necessary for
per inch or per millimeter of traverse. fabrication of finely-lapped surfaces for this procedure are
3.10 Spacing Factor.-The spacing factor is a useful as follows:
index related to maximumdistance of any point in cement 5.1.1 DiamondSaw.-Slabbing saw with an automatic
paste from periphery of an air void (note 2). feed, and blade large enough to make at least a 7-inch
3.11 Air-Paste Ratio.-The air-paste ratio is the ratio (178-mm) cut in one pass. A cutting lubricant for the saw
of volume of air to volume of paste in the hardened concrete. is also necessary.
5.1.2 Horizontal Lap Wbeel.-A steel, cast iron, or
4. Sampling and Conditioning other metal lap wheel, preferably at least 16 inches (406
mm) in diameter and large enough to grind at least a
4.1 Samples of hardened concrete for determination 4- by 6-inch (102- by 152-mm) area.
of air-void content and for determination of specific surface 5.1.3 Free Abrasive Machine.-This machine uses
and spacing factor of air-void system may be obtained from abrasive grit in the lubricant, with sample holders rotating
specimens cast in the field or laboratory; or by coring, on a rotating table. This type of machine greatly increases
sawing, or otherwise removing concrete from structures. speed of preparation of finelyground surfaces.
The method used for securing the small portion or portions 5.1.4 Polishing Wheel.-A polishing wheel at least
of concrete for microscopical measurement and the location 8 inches (203 mm) in diameter, preferably with a two-
from which they are obtained will depend on objectives speed or vibratory polisher.
of program. Care should be taken in selecting and securing 5.1.5 Hotplate or Oven.-Shall be thermostatically
the portions for measurements so as to provide reliable controlled to permit drying and impregnating specimens
data of type desired. Generally, samples of hardened with resin or wax for preparing thin sections, ground
concrete from structures or large test specimens should surfaces, and polished sections.
be secured in accordance with USBR 4042. Each sample 5.1.6 Abrasives.-Silicon-carbide grits: No. 100
should be sufficient to provide at least the minimum area (150 /m), No. 220 (63 /zm), No. 320 (31 #m), No. 600
of finishedsurface for microscopical measurement as shown (16 #m), and No. 800 (12 /m); with optical finishing
in table 1. powders such as M-303, M-204, and M-309; and polishing
4.2 To determine compliance of hardened concrete with powders as needed.
requirements of specifications on air-void content or on 5.2 Apparatus and materials other than those described
specific surface and spacing factor of air-void system, a have been used satisfactorily.
sample of the concrete should be obtained from at least 6. Precautions
three locations in body of concrete and microscopical
measurements should be made on at least one section 6.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous
prepared from each of at least three of such samples. materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim
459
USBR 4457
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It of surface indicates incomplete removal of wax. Exceptionally
is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish fragile concrete may require two or more applications of wax
appropriate safety and health practices and determine and cycles of grinding before a satisfactory surface is obtained.
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
6.2 Precautionary measures are given in note 3, section 7.3 Parameters of the air-void system in the near-
7.2 concerning fumes from xylene (if used). surface portion of the concrete should be determined by
grinding portions of finished or formed surfaces in
accordance with procedures described in section 7.2.
7. Preparation of Sections Individual sections should be as large as can be ground
and traversed satisfactorily with available equipment. The
7.1 Unless objectives of program dictate a special required area may be traversed on one or more prepared
method, sections for microscopical measurement should sections, and the traverse length spread uniformly over
be sawed approximately at right angles to a formed or maximum of available prepared section. Because parame-
finished surface included in sample of hardened concrete, ters of air-void system may vary greatly with distance from
preferably across layers in which fresh concrete was finished or formed surface, the distance separating the
deposited. Individual sections should be as large as can section to be traversed from the finished or formed surface
be ground and traversed satisfactorily with available should be measured as accurately as possible, at least to
equipment. The required area may be traversed on one nearest 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). The following method may
or more prepared sections of concrete. Best results are be used to establish the variation of parameters of air-
obtained if selected traverse length is spread uniformly void system with depth from a finished or formed surface:
over maximum of available prepared surface of concrete (1) prepare a specimen that includes a portion of finished
to compensate to the fullest practicable degree for or formed surface to be investigated and of convenient
heterogeneity of the concrete. thickness, such as about 1 inch (25 mm), by sawing
7.2 After sawing of a slab of hardened concrete, the perpendicular and parallel to finished or formed surface;
surface should be ground with successively finer abrasives, (2) grind surface using the No. 100 or 220 (150- or 63-
such as a No. 100 (150-/am) silicon-carbide abrasive to /am) abrasive grit Until last portion of surface is just
remove saw marks; and then successively with the No. removed, then complete grinding operation as described
220, 320, 600, and 800 (63-, 31-, 16-, and 12-#m) abrasives in section 7.2-this initially produced surface shall be
until surface is suitable for microscopical observation (note reference plane to which depth measurements are referred;
3). All surfaces of slab should be washed and scrubbed (3) grind back surface of specimen to produce a plane
thoroughly with a brush after sawing; and after each section as described in section 7.2; (4) measure thickness
grinding operation by brushing or using a fine, high-velocity of specimen, using a micrometer caliper, to nearest 0.05
spray of solvent or water to remove grit and loose particles inch (1.3 mm) for at least four points uniformly spaced
of concrete. The surface may be considered satisfactory around periphery of specimen, averaging results and
for the microscopical traverse when surface, as viewed in recording this average to nearest 0.05 inch; (5) determine
strong light incident as a low angle appears essentially parameters of system at both surfaces of specimen as
plane. Exceptions would include air voids or voids within described in section 10 or 14; and (6) again grind section
particles of aggregate,where edges of sections of air voids near exposed surface to any desired depth, repeat traversing
are sharp and not rounded or crumbled; areas where sand of prepared section, and measure thickness as before so
grains are plucked from surface or areas where surface that parameters can be correlated with distance of traversed
is irregular as a result of incomplete grinding, gouging, surface from finishedor formed suface. Repeatthe grinding
or scratching of cement paste and constitute less than about and traversing operations as required.
5 percent of total area; and where any air-void sections 7.4 If the parameters of air-void system near the
as small as 10/am in diameter are distinquishable or would finishedor formed surface are being determined to establish
be distinquishable if present. possible effects of surface treatments, finishing practices,
admixtures, or other variables, the relationship of such
NOTE 3.-If difficulty is encountered in preparing a satisfactory parameters and the distance from finished or formed
surface, the following method is helpful: (1) heat partially surface should be established for both the test concrete
prepared slab of concrete to 302 F (150 C) in an oven; (2) and reference concrete. For specimens having rough
remove specimen from oven and immediately brush melted surfaces, it may be desirable to establish two reference
carnauba wax heated to 302 F onto surface, repeating application planes on the surface, at the highest and lowest projections
as wax is absorbed by concrete so that when temperature of on surface. This would permit determining the air-void
concrete falls below melting point of wax, a perceptible film characteristics between the two reference planes and
of wax remains on surface; and (3) after specimen has cooled comparison of results with the depth below each plane.
to about room temperature, repeat grinding operation as outlined
Specimen should be capped with high-strength gypsum
in section 7.2. After completion of grinding, remove wax residue
from air voids by heating concrete to 302 F and immersing plaster or plaster of paris by placing a conical pile of capping
specimen in xylene in a metal can. Perform this operation under material on a capping plate and pressing concrete surface
a hood, avoid breathing the xylene fumes, and place lid on can into material until highest point on surface contacts the
after specimen has been immersed. Gentle agitation of can will plate. After capping material has hardened, measure
facilitate dissolution of wax. Repeat this operation if examination thickness to back surface prepared in step (3) of section
460
USBR 4457
7.3 using the micrometer caliper, step (4) of section 7.3. NOTE 4.-If linear traverse device is motor-driven, a speed
Grind the top (capped) surface to desired depth for sufficiently low to permit satisfactory inspection of surface of
microscopical observation. For observations between the specimen should be available.
two reference planes, the distance traversed over capping
material should be subtracted from results. A thickness NOTE 5.-It is convenient to have lateral movement of specimen
accomplished by using a calibrated cross-feed screw to which
measurement should be taken when surface has been
upper lead screw and stage assembly are attached.
ground to lowest point in original surface to establish that
reference plane. NOTE 6.-A satisfactory linear traverse device can be
7.5 The cement paste content of the near-surface zone constructed by suitable modification of a machinist's lathe. The
differs from that of the concrete as a whole; therefore, stage and upper lead screw assembly can be constructed on the
for calculation of spacing factor, the proportional volume carriage, which normally has a calibrated cross-feed arrangement.
of cement paste in prepared sections shall be determined A manually operated clutch must be installed to permit control
by microscopical traversing (see [9, 10] for applicable of movement of carriage by operator without disengagingcarriage
methods) or calculated from air-paste ratio in near-surface from lead screw. Vibration is minimized when motor is mounted
zone determined by methods of this procedure. separately from lathe chassis. A rotation counter should be affixed
to main lead screw.
8. Calibration and Standardization
9.1.2 Stereoscopic Microscope and Support.-This
8.1 The calibration and standardization of microscope shall have objectives and oculars to give final
miscellaneous equipment or apparatus used in performing magnifications from about 30 to at least 125, and be
the tests listed under the Applicable Documents of section so arranged as to permit continuous observations of surface
2 are covered under that particular procedure or standard. of a concrete specimen mounted on stage of linear traverse
device. One ocular should include cross-hairs or some other
LINEAR TRAVERSE (ROSIWAL) reticle device to serve as an index point.
METHOD 9.1.3 Microscope Lamp.-This lamp should be a
spotlight-type, arranged to provide illumination sufficient
9. Apparatus for Measurement of Specimens for close scrutiny of surface of a concrete specimen at a
magnification of about 125.
9.1 The equipment listed in sections 9.1.1 through 9.1.5 9.1.4 SpiritLevel.-A 4- to 6-inch (102- to 152-mm)
is a recommended minimum selection permitting long level.
application of the linear traverse method to determine the 9.1.5 Modeling Clay.-Required to support and level
air-void content and the specific surface and spacing factor section or other leveling-support device.
of the air-void system in hardened concrete. However,
equipment other than that listed has been used 10. Procedure
satisfactorily.
9.1.1 Linear Traverse Device.-This device, either 10.1 Place prepared slab of concrete on stage of linear
hand- or motor-driven (note 4), consists of a stage or traverse device with prepared surface upward and such
platform mounted on a carriage, and shall be so constructed that a formed or finished surface, if present, is parallel
that a specimen of concrete placed on the stage can be to main lead screw of device. Using the spirit level, carefully
moved smoothly and uniformly: (1) at least 4.0 inches level prepared surface by placing pedestals of modeling
(102 mm) by turning a main lead screw to which carriage clay under slab so that surface may be traversed with a
is connected, (2) at least 3.0 inches (76 mm) in a direction minimum of focusing of microscope (note 7). Adjust
at right angles to main lead screw (note 5), and (3) at microscope lamp so that beam is focused in field of view
least 2.5 inches (64 mm) parallel to main lead screw using of microscope at a magnification of at least 50, and is
an upper lead screw, and to which stage is attached and incident upon surface at a low angle so that air voids are
supported by carriage (note 6). The pitch of the upper clearly delineated by a shadow.
lead screw should not exceed 0.0105 inch (0.267 mm) per 10.2 By means appropriate to device being used,
revolution. The pitch of both lead screws should be superimpose selected index point in reticle of one eyepiece
determined to nearest 0.0001 inch (0.003 mm) per of microscope, near one corner of specimen, ensuring that
revolution. Rotation counters should be attached to main drives for carriage and stage are engaged and adjusted to
lead screw and upper lead screw, and each counter should remove all play from gear system. The preselected index
be supplemented by an indicator such that number of point should be used throughout the entire traverse, and
revolutions can be read to nearest 0.01. A manually operated should be essentially dimensionless; that is, without
tally counter should also be provided. If calculations are perceptible area or length. If intersection of crosshairs is
to be based on air-paste ratio, either a third lead screw used, index point should be selected as the intersection
(installed on upper stage) equipped with a revolution of one pair of edges of the crosshairs. Initiate each segment
counter must be included, in which case main lead screw of traverse at edge of satisfactory plane surface of slab
need not be equipped with a counter, or it must be possible rather than at edge of slab itself. Length of segments of
to disengage counter from main lead screw. A photograph traverse may vary. Extreme care must be used to determine
of a satisfactory linear traverse device is shown on figure 1. whether a section of an air void is intersected by apparent
461
USBR 4457
]:1!111:' I ii:t ,il I];HI I >I, ,!4 ' It. tll,il m:l_e[ h( F([]]li[ I]H I i1; i ii IIi i>, ,I,L'I..:I hll i,:i]2
m<:.ve.n'Jert of rJde>: poin; w]-etT, ]J]e ,mr tr'averse is ne.ar'[y aggregate pastil.ties. All ai>v,,Ad s.ecJi,,:ms huersected by line
tangenii]! tn, v,:Jid section. Results c:,n be ..tffected ,:,f taverse ;re cultured ,:,,r, ta]l'. ,;:,unte. Read and recc,>J
s.ign, ific:nrly b,y c,:sis.te.nt erre:,,r in this esF:,ect 1 periphery se.:cings ,::f al :hee c<:,.unters.
c, ra air vc, id iis crumh,ed c,.r' r'ounded tle. pc, skic,.n c,.f
true. perii::h, ery in F:,lane. of s.u'fa,::e mus be: estimated by NC'E 7- three-p,m adiusak:,te stage h:s been, f:,:,.un.d t,:
be [T],l),q[ C'll[:l''O[211i: :t
e::t'ap.olatii,on ,:3.f srface co.ntc,r ,,:>f ar v<id Clare n:-Just
F,e: used to:, distinguish depressii.,:,s prc, ducU by F:,]uckiirJg
,c:,c sand gI'ains from air vc,.]dls If a .c:h]pped or ,:{herwis.e
the: teh .,:.):, a gear ,m maiin lead screw .or driv:ing;-mLt,:>r :siT*air,
br,::ken por'[e:m o1[: goand sure:ace iL,; taver,:e&, aiir v.oids
gre:ady acilita:cee {he c,:am, tiing process
revea]led in, de.pr'essic,,ns should be' o:t,nte:d and measared
as d-ough d-my were pro,;jected into the plane ,::, the surface. ] 0.3 By me'aq,s aF, pr,:q-riate to device being used:, s.hit:
Read an, d recc<d set:ings c,f coanters, aftiixe.d o. rna{n ead concrete s]lab:, at rig:h: m,.g]les t,, die:.ci,cm ,:,f ave:s.e,. a
screw and upper llead screw. Se the manua]ly .,:pe'ra:e.d app, rop.riate ,J:is:aq,,ce Space segmeus ot" zsve.se In. ac:h, ile'e
talIy ,:oun, te at zero.. Usiin, g nam, lead sce.w,, cause at ]least he. n,[niimu n:,= t, :::l traverse leE, gth .,:)',er the spe.c if led
rr, c, v e:: e* o f er r e c a r r ] a g e a s s ere, b ]l'y v, h i [ e sad m u, 1 c a e o t: s ] y rq,niim,m are. ,:,4 preF,:red s.r:ace, see s:ecilor ] ].
scruri:nizing srface CI, f: q]cJ], aS, C(]lffj,cre[e []l]Ra\,'es beneath S.upe.:impc,.se iinde:,: F,.,l, ii:, a: e,d <: new [ne. of avese,
mk:r,:s.c:,pe. W'he.n index pc:,int is e::acdy sLq::,erimp.,:)sed and F, erfl:rrn [:inear :avese as; bef.,:)re Repeat thi:s pcc:,cess
pc, n F,,eriphey ,:f a sec::i.on of an air v,,:>Jid ie, .,:rface. ,<,f fc,:' all segments <:,.i: t<,,tal traverse. f n-,::,e than c, ne s.]lab
s.]ab, s.c::,F,, movement {:,f carrilag:e,, ac:cuate ca]il,j cc,rter ::arce has been prepared [:,l)-i] Sla]np]e Irlf Cll)crete,:, 'elpeat
and!:, usi!:qg upper ]earl SlCIe'w, ]Tl()ve cil|-]Cl"e[e ulnder prc:,.cedl:e d]es,:ribe:.d :in, ]i(:l I ,:_:m each sclq slab to, ,::,::mp]l'.},
n-ic:r,,,;c,upe knt[]l incle p.,::)iin: iis ag:ai:n exac:ly st:perimp.,:)sed wid-x this p>:cedure :,r v,,]{h such ,:th, er relqireme:ltS as
ui:>,,n perilF,.he U o: same ar-void sectk:,,n S.,:.p r,/:,cacik,n ,J nq,%7 be' r, ecessa:i.'
upper lead s,c:e.v,, and resume m,:veme.nt of e'nie carriage
usiing D7aip, i lead s..c:ew as;. be.i:c,,e ,'n,,,:>te 8,) P'>:ceed in ths 11,, Length o,f Linear Traverse
n:aa-mer and traverse alll portic:,ns o.: surface, e.xce'p. sectii,,ans
,,:f ah voids.,, tsiln, g main lead s;cew:,, ancl raversiing a]lll clnc,.ds
]] 1 The ram, iream ]lengd-, oi: th, e trave:'se shah be. as
acr<,s.s s.ectior, s. c,: aiir v.,:ids ,:.n l[[ne :,t: traverse siing upper
spe.cified i, table 2
ead screw:. ntil index point is s;periin-p,:,se.d on, end ,0,
F,eF,.ared surface. Termiinate ea,dn s.egm, en, of ave.'se at
edge nf plane,, prepared sarface raCh, er han a edge c.,f 12!:. Calcuam.ns
sIab f cal:c:]atii,,ns ae to be: t.ased .,:)n air-F,.ase rati!,,>, either
tave.se, all seclic, n,s c,,f cerne, paste wkh hird lead screw 12:] Calc:l;e air-v,:id content,, specific s;r.ace,, ;nd
,,:) d i s e, n g gi:e ,c,c, n e r f r c, m nq : i n i e a d s:,c e v, w h Ji ] e v r a v e r s i q g spacing fact,:r ,:,f ai>v,:fid s.?s:em crc, m zesu]:s .:, lilne:.ar
i 2
USBR 4457
Table 2. - Minimum length of traverse for the linear 12.1.2 Air- VoM Content.-Whenair-pasteratio is not
traverse method. determined, calculate air-void content as follows:
Minimumlength of T= P,,Ru + PRro, (3)
traverse for
Nominal or observed determination of N
maximum size of air-void content, * n = ", and
aggregate in concrete specific surface,
or spacin$ factor A = 100nC (4)
inches (ram)
traverse measurements using the following equation as a Pro Rro = total length of traverses minus total length of
basis: traverses across voids (note 9).
Pu Ru 12.1.3 Spacing Factor.-When paste content of
c - (1)
N concrete is known, calculate the spacing factor [8]:
where:
463
USBR 4457
464
USBR 57
0.020
a=lOOinches-I
0.011
(/')
LI.I
1- 0.01(
rJ
Z
0.014
Z
.j 0.012
=lO00inches-I
Q:
0 0.010
I--
U
0.008
Z 0.006
U
Q. 0.004
or)
0.002
0.
2 4 5 6 7 8 9 I0 15 20 25 30
PASTE-AIR RATIO BY VOLUME
C I inch= 25.4mm
LI.I
n," 14
:3
l ...........
' 12
I.U -28 Pircent Palte
:E
I- I0
Z
uJ
0 8
n,-
U.I
O. f -16 Percent Paste
6
Z
m
I.-
Z 4
I.=J
I--
Z 2
0
U
n- 0 I I
-- 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 15 20 25 30
PASTE-AIR RATIO
465
USBR 4457
>/! i <;t/- . . . . /
0.020
, -s I! i / @"/i" "
51 i j_ : _;/ t _,P'/I I ^@/
0.018 .... c)t'--- - -" "-+ .......... T'\k --- - 1" t ..... AO f---f ......... \V.....
Zo.ol
Z - ... i i i .
.-10.012
..
lie
L.)
.9
Z
0.00(
00
- ii ! .
, ,3
, I,i 5I,
4: 6
,/,/,hi,,,,
7 8 9 10
I,,,,I,,,,
15 20 25
,,,,50 ,.,I--
<%O
-A....
-V.l"t'
PASTE-AIR
I '
RATIO BY VOLUME . .o.,,
I--
Z ; (" .A-'(),I?. /F volume of concrete i.. g Z
i/d/I/ 21/ I/"'J.'/.t'>/l IA= I IA II i I/1 I I I111111 -inch
IIIIIIlllJEl2 < IJ.i
I--
Figure 3. - Probable yoidystcm in air-entrained concrete conforming wkh ACI 613-54. From [11].
! : /
14. Procedure i of focusing of microscope (note 7). Adjust microscope lamp
so that beam is focused in field of view of microscope
14.1 Place prepared slab of concrete on stage of point- at a magnification of at least 50, and is incident upon
count device with prepared surface Upward and such that surface at a low angle so that air voids are clearly delineated
a formed or finished surface, if present, is parallel to main by a shadow.
lead screw of device. Using the spirit level, carefully level 14.2 By means appropriate to device being used,
prepared surface by placing pedestals of modeling clay superimpose selected index point in reticle of one eyepiece
under slab so that surface may be traversed with a minimum of microscope, near one corner of specimen, ensuring that
466
USBR 4457
drives for carriage are engaged and adjusted to remove appropriate distance. Space segments of traverse to achieve
all play from gear system. The stopping device shall be at least the minimum total traverse length over the specified
:at a stop or click position at beginning of traverse. The minimum area of prepared surface, see section 15. Proceed
preselected index point should be used throughout the along new line of traverse as before for all segments of
entire traverse, and should be essentially dimensionless; total traverse and for all sections prepared from a sample
that is, without perceptible area or length. If intersection of concrete so as to comply with requirements of this
of crosshairs is used, index point should be selected as procedure or with such other requirements as may be
the intersection of one pair of edges of the crosshairs. necessary.
Initiate each segment of traverse at edge of satisfactory
plane surface of slab rather than at edge of slab itself. 15. Length of Traverse and Number of Points
Length of segments of traverse may vary. Read and record
settings on all appropriate counters. Using main lead screw, 15.1 When total air content is desired, the minimum
.cause movement of stage assembly and specimen while length of traverse and the minimum number of points
simultaneously scrutinizing surface of slab. Each time an shall be as shown in table 3.
air-void section passes beneath index point in reticle of 15.2 When calculations are to be based on air-paste
one eyepiece, tally a count on appropriate counter. Extreme ratio, the minimum length of traverse shall be as shown
care must be used to determine whether a section of an in table 3; however, the minimum number of points shall
air void is intersected by apparent movement of index comply with the following approximate equation:
point when line of traverse is nearly tangential to void
section. Results can be affected significantly by consistent 1
error in this respect. If periphery of an air void is crumbled Sv -- V2 (12)
or rounded, the position of true periphery in plane of surface
must be estimated by extrapolation of surface contour of where:
air void. Care must be used to distinguish depressions
produced by plucking of sand grains from air voids. If Sv = total number of stops where index point is
a chipped or otherwise broken portion of ground surface superimposed on a section of an air void,
is traversed, air voids revealed in depression should be and
counted and measured as though they were projected into V = desired coefficient of variation of air-void con-
the plane of the surface. When a stop or click position tent expressed as a fractional value.
is reached, mark a tally on appropriate counter. If index
point is superimposed on a section of an air void at the The required minimum total number of points depends
stop position, mark a tally on appropriate counter. If the on air-paste ratio. Points measured should be uniformly
air-paste ratio is to be computed, a fourth counter is distributed over concrete surface.
required. Mark a tally on counter if index point is
superimposed on a section of cement paste. Proceed in 16. Calculations
this manner to the last stop position on line of traverse.
Mark a tally for each air void intercepted by line of traverse, 16.1 When calculations are to be based on total air
a tally for each stop position, a tally for each stop position content, proceed as follows:
where index point is superimposed on a section of an air 16.1.1 Air-Void Content.-Calculate the air-void
void and, when appropriate, a tally for each stop position content from results of point-count analysis as follows:
where index point is superimposed on a section of cement
paste. At the end of line of traverse, read and record the 100 S,,
tally shown by each counter. Terminate each segment of A -- St (13)
traverse at edge of plane, prepared surface rather than
at edge of slab. If traverse is being made to determine where:
only the air-void content, the number of air voids
intersected by line of traverse need not be determined. A = air-void content of hardened concrete, in
If lines of traverse are shorter than 1 inch (25 mm), do percent;
not tally a count for an air void that corresponds with St = total number of stops during traverse; and
point of observation at beginning of each line of traverse. Sv = as defined in equation (12).
NOTE 13.-Some operators have found it preferable from the 16.1.2 SpecificSurface.-Calculate the specific surface
standpoint of enhanced precision, reduced error of tallying, and [8] as follows:
reduced operator fatigue to accomplish the operations by Initially, determine total length of traverse and number
traversing each traverse line twice, once to record what is found of air-void sections per inch or per millimeter:
at each stop and once to record number of voids intercepted
by line of traverse. T= Ls (St - Ta) (14)
467
USBR 4457
Table 3. - Minimum length of traverse and minimum number of points for the modified point-count methodk
Minimum length of Minimumnumber of
Nominal or observed traverse for determination points for determination
maximum size of of air-void content, of air-void content,
aggregate in concrete specific surface, or specific surface, or
spacing factor spacing factor
inches (mm)
1 The limits of uncertainty of results obtained for air-void content depend upon number of points and air-
void content of concrete. The recommended minimum number of points shown should produce limits of
uncertainty such that, up to 3 percent air-void content, the standard deviation of not greater than 0.5 percent
which, at 3 percent air-void content, corresponds to a coefficient of variation of 17 percent. For number
of points greater than 1000 and air-void contents greater than 3 percent, the coefficient of variation is
correspondingly reduced. The data obtained can be analyzed by statistical methods to determine limits of
uncertainty to be applied.
[ )1/3]
A
C = (15) 3 p
100 n L= - 1.4 7+1 -1 (18)
O
P (17) N
L -- 400 n np- Tp
468
USBR 4457
()
18. Precision and Bias of Air-Content Results
Table 4. - Single operator standard deviation (1S) for indicated air content using the modified point-
count method.
Values shown are the theoretical maximum standard deviations when number of points counted is the
minimum shown in table 3. The difference between the results of two properly conducted tests (D2S) should
not exceed 2.83 times the standard deviations shown. The precision for the linear traverse method has not
been determined.
469
USBR 4457
19. References [7] Lord, G. W., and T. E Willis, "Calculation of Air Bubble
Size Distribution from Results of Rosiwal Traverse of
[1] Brown, L. S., and C. U. Pierson, "Linear Traverse
Aerated Concrete," ASTMBulletin, ASTBA, No. 177, pp.
Technique for Measurement of Air in Hardened Concrete,"
56-61, October 1951.
ACIProceedings, PACIA, vol. 47, pp. 117-123, 1950.
[2] Chayes, E, "A Simple Point-Counter for Thin Section
[8] Powers, T. C., Equations from "The Air Requirement
Analysis," American Mineralogist, AMMIA, vol. 34, p.
of Frost-Resistant Concrete," Highway Research Board
1011, 1949.
Proceedings, vol. 29, pp. 184-202, and discussion by T.
[3] Chayes, E, and H. W. Fairbain, "A Test of the Precision E Willis, pp. 203-211, 1949.
of Thin Section Analysis by Point Counter," American
Mineralogist, AMMIA, vol. 36, pp. 704-712, 1951. [9] Mielenz, R. C., "Petrography Applied to Portland-
[4] Chayes, E, Petrographic Modal Analysis, An Cement Concrete," Reviewsin Engineering Geology, Geol.
Elementary StatisticalAppraisal, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., Soc. Am., vol. 1, pp. 1-38, 1962.
New York, NY, 1956.
[10] Mielenz, R. C., "Diagnosing Concrete Failures,"
[5] Mielenz, R. C., V. E. Wolkodoff, J. E. Backstrom, and Stanton Walker Lecture Series on the Material Sciences,
R. H. Burrows, "Origin, Evolution, and Effects of the Air- Lecture No. 2, University of Maryland, College Park, MD,
Void System in Concrete, Part 4-The Air-Void System
p. 47, 1964.
in Job Concrete," ACI Proceedings, PACIA, vol. 55, pp.
507-517, 1958. [11] "Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions
[6] Verbeck," G. J., "The Camera Lucida Method for for Concrete," ACI 613-54, ACI Committee 613 (Presently
Measuring Air Voids in Hardened Concrete," ACI ACI Committee 211), ACIJournal Proceedings, vol. 51,
Proceedings, PACIA, vol. 43, pp. 1025-1040, 1947. pp. 49-64, September 1954.
470
USBR 4457
12 .7 2o0.05 [?48 g3 27
13 37q #qK51 'gd33.7q 28
14 4aq 323.20 84a 8.,t .," 29
ee tA,'6 appara/us,/he vo,'d oua/e," on& reaa/s 0 #o.r /A,'s es i,4e oaater
was rese/ /o zero a[/er reoa/,' A/o. lz re l/o,d"Elaol"co/amn aadreao/,'3# 17 tra
gl are uma/a#'e #o 3,'w'e 7LoVL/ lnJ# of raverse aceoSS zold_.
471
USBR 4457
NOTES:
* These quantities obtained from mix design.
472
USBR 4457
Whenp/A>4.342, Z = Z
[ ( ,/3 ] 3[ L 1]
1.4 +I)- I 1.4 I)' = O. g/3 mm
NOTES:
* These quantities obtained from mix design.
473
USBR 4457
A C ol n p p/A L
Specimen Air Content, Average Specific No. of Voids Paste Paste-Air Spacing
No. percent Chord Surface, Intercepted, Content, Ratio Factor,
Intercept, inch- per inch percent inch
inch
#t/IEF-I 4.01 $.00l ffO .S" 2g.d / 7./3 0. 008'4
NOTES:
474
USBR 4457
475
.. )'"
O ,, UNITED STATES OF RECLAMATION
INTERIORBuREAU
DEPARTMENT OF THE (
USBR 4469-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, Code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4469; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 469-83.
476
USBR 4469
c:o nform tc,, req u.iements ,of USBR 1! ] 04, and spheric:{1 head
a rad I::, e a r i n g ]31 oc k s :i h a ] ] ,c:,,2)n f o r m : :) s, e c [o n 5 o f U S, B :, 4 0 3 9,
(:ll.lpl}lS;i{'e pClli l] {[ 5; S() {-IJa" i't" iS free ,:, ro{:{1{:e. Ar onle pll[]li[Jr
Clln r:l,t{1t/ing yoke, [7i['d'0Pa)l ' be:we.e.n, tv,,o SLTppCllI"IE F)lJ]nlS:l
a ]h:mg p h.<, rod shaI k:,e used to m:,int:ain a o::::,n, suJ Cl distance.
bet'wt2eD I({:X<e:S; S;I) I that at t]-,e '[)ppll)lS[[ Flll[)iJ.'--]{ I:)''. {_:]irC]JT] "
,@FlOSite point.: Midlway be.wee.n d-rose p,:,invs a sh:,r p.ix%t specirne,s,, is ,, p.event impact ]bo{1di,g. Ac:c:ord, irg]%% :ffef'
rod:, adj, ac:ent :.:, long pi,,ot >,:,d:. sh, Elll be us.edl w:,, maina{c, .sF,e<:ime,s have bee's1, Fll'lGlpt:I'ly pl:,S:i:Jilone,d ]:':l.laEen:. I{); ]<:I'Xle:Z
a constant all{stance betw'eer b,o:tOTr and rn{ddle yoke.s:. T'he {]7]e I cr{xss t-]le{1d ';]-]ll[)L]l.'l kll< []-l{:lVed tl:le e]ectrk ]:']7]{:J{'l:)" t(:l
k:ll}l:
'.[hi d ' ] e :}' C I k e s ]-J a I kle h i ll ged a t p; v II) t Fll'l: )ii n "[ {" 'l:) 'te ' 7"hi 5: t ]" ilL) t { f {{ZX'II 'wib[l about 0'.5 inch (i3 n:wn)of speciimen. Then, the
of d-e :we:, >'.oke segment:s, iil d-m l-m.:[zo, n:{1 Fdarm.. At hydau]lic F:,umlp :is. 'ulrned on and the F:,.owe ram, bro.ugh:
a.F:lpOsite point o.n ci>.:utmfeence, :t-e:. two segmem:s, shl]l {rr,:) oonrac:: ev.!' .5:]::;'v<{i!' whh rlae s.F:,ecin-ens. (3,hez
be o,:mnectedl d:l>:).agh a diial .gauge ,:).i-.o:he serTs[ng device preca:lZ[l::ms V,l,:mld be Io av,:Lx[d eccentrk: ]!l,)adings; s;e ,:ml:.
cap.ablie {xt: n'm:SLF{tqlg r{1nsverse defornm{bon o nearest {1 safe procedure in h{1>dllirLg of al]l specimens:, large c,.r
51[}.,]inch (].2:?'f.im:, so that this defonrlatio, is v'a.,{ce (ci, r sn-m]L, and a>,Ll, id backing up. :,,: "l-:,'[ck uF:,"' {1ny readings:
more if eccentric:it'y c:,f gauge exceeds dq, at c,,f hinge} :he. J'lat nqliiht l,ave been ]:F.l[ssed. f, .i)n the c,::rnary, s;gnJifJ:cam
transvers.e defon'mdc:,Ti c,.: sp.ech-nleCl dm:rle{er. edingsmust be pid,:ed up: l{e'l shou]ld be: reilie.vecl c,
7.4 ]ns.rruments f.or o::mnpre:ss.ion esmin, g ,d: cy]lh-des Ol:)nslildeab]e pllL]ljir][ I[aS Jlong ts m{1xiin-]u:n-, peak ]Cll{1d has
]arg:er d3{1n 6 by ]2 inches. ,: ].}'!: by ![l()!l []j]:'77l) ae i:)f SaIT]e n,:t exceeded :i , iekt p:,.int il belx:,,w dlesiied re.adling, d-ran sh:wl,,
bask:: desiign as CC,ln-@ressc, n-,eter, except tha the x.::,l sets. ''l:lrt': b]C]ti: LIp l(L]l d-e desired ]lD3ld.
8. plrecaLl[lt OFI s. () 1[ lC'lre S h ly D:-I i: X elJ Co rile Fe e Sh] 1] [-:lle <[i L ]1 71 p ]e ,d it71
acc,:,.r,d.,m:e wid-s d-se F:,>o',,isiions ,,d USBR 41: 72:
8l 1 This es plrClCe',dlce F 3l' {--]VCll]'Ie }'{ag{1rdiL)]L.q 92 l-][arclene.c] ,,:,,mcreCe shall be' sa,npled i:n a,,:,:,:rdan, ce
maeriils, (,,perati{,,ns: {1n, c] equipn:-senr, r, dl does n, ot ,t.:iaiiT, whh {-}:l:e p]70",'iSi()l]lS (I.f LSBR 47;t42.
?l 7
USBR 4469
93 Test .ec;'26,.i,e,3.5: ,L.:ornpressometer (:liFje-sixlh (1: t]-Je teighlt ii,l:),tvie -]Je }ase'
!:i'31 Mo/i:'eJ Qvf/nd?,,'Lm ,C,pec;,r73e,gs.-Test cy]inder's of the specimen. Ce:,ze.r the ul-:,.per ?'oke c,d :ig.hten fi!zm]),
shall be: molded iin a<o:3.rdance wiith the requirern:ec.,s fc,,r' against :13e cylinder the two pmirited screws ti:lat h,::i, Id the
o0,n<lpessio.n es specimens off USBR 419'2:, o.r L)SBR 4(1,31, rm, g i,-i place. Re:n-,i,c,ve the ,.,o...>derl: b]lock:s,, and :ig;hten the
a_dl shall be capped in acoo"dance v,{t:h, requiiremen-s ,::,,f fl-ree, screws M t}qlt. center ring with the specm:-Jen c:emeed
USBR 46d7. i!n the f:lme TigMerl he 'w( screws in the center riirlg
!)3.2 Dri77ed C,:are. '4}e'.c:/me.ns'.-Cc, res sha][l comF:,13 against he fl-,e ,c::},I:i,,J.e:, and ]l,,:x:,ser t-I<le s.p.cer bars
whh he:' requiireme.n, ts fl>r dlrill][i:ng and ma.isare co.nditi,:m- cormectMg the three y,::kes. ],siai]Jl dials be'twee'n pper
ing apphi,c::ab]e to:, c:.,:mpres.sive strength spec:imens of USB, R and ]owe;: yokes and[ ,:)r cente' y:,ke.. Filgure 2 shows a
40d2, except thar only dliam,,,nd-dried cc,'es h, civiing a (!i-lai}e 12-i!nc:h (11 $2- b}., 305-]l[],nGi) CLXtTlic:re[e cyhnder wJith
length-to-diam, eter ratio greace.r than 1.S(1, sha.]l be used. a i-iil()lJKil[ed arldl re.cTidt, [:,l:)r-
Requirements rel:th.,e to storage and to:, arnbies, t c:ordJ!ions use.
im, medately p.'ic,' t,o, test shall be the: sam, e as i:,:r mc,.]dd
cyllMdrilcal sF,,ecime,s. (12.1 :L N[*I'E !k-After d, ials have been it:lS;t[]Je,,J c,n
eX[CFh,h;:,IWIC[(.2, [[ iS ](]l[ rmces._s it),' Ilhac they h,e ren-i,,;,vecJ until [}:1{-'
9.3.3 The ends of te:s spe.dmens st-,al be made
da)."s tesl schedlu]e has h,.ee:rt cc,.mt:lct,>J..
F:,erl::,.en.dicu]ar t.o the ax:]s, within-C1,.5:', and plane wi:hin
().(}0,2 inch (0.05 n:qm). ]if s.pecin3en as ,:as does n,,,t mee b,iI[i}''E d:. IC]I] larger spec[meris, {(:,.rtg;J]tt:i,,:]]n}l tic [,::,lirlati<2:,s-t r,:,,J,i
F,,laneness zequiIements, paneness, shall be accomphished andl iluCeml mg mJy h:,e held iin pllace by {h:tiings mstal]edi M
b,y capping iin accc,.>J.ance wih, USBR ,4617, by IaF, p.:iq,g, irls.ets. F, II:ced [r:, m,,4!l prior t,: csas.iiiug=. <:, r :installled b.y drilling
or by g;irJ.diin, g. Aggregate F:,.,:pc,,uts which ,,ccur at ends i-O:, eq>L-:c. Jiwi,cn L[]ld cel:lei-JtJing [F.isc'rt ,:,r I::b in pllauie {te." e,eipt
o { s F:'e ci m e n s m a }. be r e p a i r ed p, ,,:,rid ed c m , 1 a r e a .o f p o g": u: s of sF:ieCm-len. Or., these ]arger sF:,ecin'J, ens, t]-i:e:lu d:i;N,, ;7},, ].e tised
.des n,o exceed ]:t-) percent o.: sl::,.ecimer, are, and 'eF,irs t,::,, n-i:ea>tar(. [l:,.ng[tuldinJl defo2Kl*4t:i,o/2i, and: SiX Ol,ia,],,; ,,::, n-lelSUr,,
]at:e r 1] Ch.:f< ,,r :rnaeic,
are made before ,capping (n gri nd ing is coiqp.]eled (note 2: :,.
P%neness wil]l be. ,:,msidered within uderance whet, a
] ,1[).,! '5(;.'kie.n nqieaslLiremie'Nts lre t,::l be lG, ade LISiNIg b,oi/ded
'0.0',0,2hirlch feeder g;at.lge wi]]! not pass bewe.en specm:-en
s<in gaulges, sm,:<,,th fl-xe area t<:,. receive the gauges b.y
srface and a siuaighedge ]-eil.d against st,rL3,:e.
v,i:re b.ru.,;hing o,r sam-ling ]:Lem,:}, e ]oose ,dtlSt [:r,::)m sueface
N(YFE 2-];Le.pairs may be made by epo::<yMg d4sh::,dged
a.ggreg;ace back in F,.ila,ce o, by fH!liing x.,,:,i.d wM:, caF:,p.iing; m:xte:.riill
and :]fl<i,v,'it,g adiequae time ,;)F i1 i,;)!harden,
se.t d:,e capped cyimide= (]1.,-] a fiat S.UlZ::a,,.e a,l,i p:lace la:<::l
vv',mdeql b]od<:s ,:rll ,:a, ppo.site sides c,,f l-e spedmen. Lower
the c,:unpressonmmr-e:*:ens.,:.nneer iirm:3 p,:}sitii,,:n .,m c(:ap oJ FigLirC: 2 ,1' (% L,)' 12 inikl: i: 1,2 h3 ::11[) i:]][1:1: I IIII]ILT([I Qi'lJl]]cr
the J..>l,liCks; t]:-l:i,.i. {:,F:,eraG,:m ;:JiH?i:l, tYlal:Jlca]l[. eJevates the %J.,i1:l:l { ,:, Yl:,'E-bc, i ,I"InLEL I ,x!cnl,:,::lqc:'.c7 m,:,t:)tecJ 41:ul r(',,:])' {Ol-t5,
i 7 S,
USBR 4469
by air jet or light brushing. Dry surface of concrete to 13.3 Compression loads are applied at the rate of 2,000.
receive gauge. Apply a leveling and precoat of epoxy lbf/in 2 (13.9 MPa) per minute unless otherwise specified.
adhesive to concrete. After sealing coat has hardened, Briefly, the procedure for routine compression testing by
abrade surface with silicon-carbide paper. Bond gauge to hydraulic machine is as follows: First, rotate dial knob to
specimens using a high-strength epoxy adhesive. proper dial range and turn on air supply; then adjust rate-
of-loading device to proper range for dial to be used. When
11. Calibration and Standardization the rite-of-loading device is adjusted, the load-pacing disk
moves at a uniform clockwise rate. The load-indicating
11.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- hand is controlled manually to follow one of the dots on
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests the rate-of-loading disk. The compression specimen should
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are then be placed directly on lower platen of machine or on
covered under that particular procedure or standard directly an elevated block which rests on lower platen. The
or by reference to another. specimen should be centered under spherical bearing head
11.2 Procedures for calibrating strain measuring and the cross head moved down to between 0.5 and 1 inch
devices are given in ASTM E 83. (13 and 25 mm) of the top of specimen. For the Bureau's
11.3 A frame constant must be determined for each 5-million-pound force (22 241-kN) testing machine, the
compressometer-extensometer frame. This constant is adjustableplaten on the bottom of the sensitive cross head
determined from gauge length, eccentricity of gauge, and is adjusted by electric motors which rotate a disk cam.
the hinge from the axis of specimen (sec. 14). The hydraulic pump is started, release valve (left hand)
is closed, and the control valve (right hand) is opened.
12. Conditioning Thus, the compression loading is initiated.
13.4 Load Specimen Twice.-If a companion specimen
12.1 Specimens shall be subject to the specific curing has been tested for strength and strength exceeds
conditions, and tested at the age for which elasticity 3,000 lbf/in2 (20.7 MPa), extend the firstloading, on which
information is desired. Specimens shall be tested within no readings are taken, to 1,000 lbf/in2 (6.9 MPa). If strength
1 hour after removal from curing or storage room when is unknown, load until either a stress of 1,000 lbf/in2 or
using unbonded strain measuring devices. Specimens strain given in table 1, whichever comes first, is attained.
removed from a moist room for testing shall be kept moist Use this value for upper load on second loading when
by a wet cloth covering during interval between removal readings are taken. On both loadings, apply load
and test. continuously and without shock at a constant rate within
12.2 Adhesives do not adhere well to wet surfaces. the range of 35+5 lbf/in2 (241+34.5 kPa) per second. On
When using bonded strain measuring devices, area of first loading, observe performance of gauges and correct
surface to which gauges must be bonded needs to be surface any unusual behavior prior to second loading. On second
dried with a minimum of drying occurring to test specimens loading, record (without interruption of loading) the
as a whole. On removal of specimen from moist room, longitudinal strain at the point (1) when compressive stress
wrap specimen in plastic. Cut windows in the plastic where is zero, (2) 100 lbf/in 2 (689 kPa), and (3) maximum load
strain gauges are to be applied. Seal plastic around the as previously determined. If Poisson's ratio is to be
windows to the specimen when sealant adhesive is applied determined, record transverse strain at the same points.
to specimen as described in 10.2. If significant drying occurs, Record results on test record form, figure 4. If specimen
waterproof gauges and return specimen to moist room is to be tested to destruction, remove the load and
before testing. compressometer-extensometer prior to reloading for
12.3 Maintain ambient temperature and humidity as strength test. When measuring with expandable bonded
constant as possible throughout test. Record any unusual strain measuring devices, continue the second loading to
fluctuation in temperature or humidity in the report failure without interruption of loading.
(sec. 15).
Table 1. - Maximum strain values.
13. Procedure
Max. strain at age indicated,
13.1 If companion specimens are available, determine Density at time of test, x 10-6
compressive strength in accordancewith USBR 4039 prior lbm/ft 3 kg/m 3 7 Days or Less than
to test for modulus of elasticity. more 7 days
13.2 Place the specimen, with strain-measuring -->205 3284 300 200
equipment attached, on lower platen or bearing block of 165-204 2643-3268 375 250
testing machine. Carefully align axis of specimen with 135-164 2162-2627 450 300
center of thrust of spherically seated upper bearing block. 115-134 1842-2146 525 350
Note reading on strain indicators. As bearing block is 105-114 1682-1826 600 400
brought slowly to bear upon specimen, rotate movable 95-104 1522-1666 675 450
portion of block gently by hand so that uniform seating 85-94 1362-1506 750 500
is obtained. 75-84 1201-1346 825 550
479
USBR 4469
14. Calculations SRz,A = measured lateral strain, inch per inch (mil-
limeter per millimeter),
14.1 When bonded gauges are used as measuring da = specimen diameter in inches (millimeters),
devices, the longitudinal and lateral deformations for and
calculating the modulus of elasticity and Poisson's ratio # = Poisson's ratio.
are obtained directly. When a compressometer-
extensometer frame is used, the deformations need to be FRz,a ( SRLA )
adjustedfor the frame constants. If hinge of frame is same _ Dz,A _ .da
distance from center of specimen as dial gauge, the DLO (FCLo) (SRLo)
measured readings are amplified by a factor of 2 over the
actual deformation and the measured readings should be (FRz, a) (SRLA )
(FCLo) (SRLo) (da)
(7)
multiplied by a factor of 0.5. If distances are not the same,
correction can be calculated as follows:
Example (using inch-pound units):
_ er (1). If frame measurements are:
FRLo or FR er + eg
where: 4.656
FRLo -- -- 0.5008
4.656 + 4.641
FCLo =
longitudinal frame constant, and
GL = gauge length in inches (millimeters) Using equation (2):
S 0.5008
E = (FCzo) (SRLo) (3) FCLo = = 0.0626
8.00
DLA
(0.4191)(0.000485) = 0.154
# -- Dz,o (6) # -- (0.0626) (0.003525) (6.00)
480
USBR 4469
without changing the test procedure. A printout of the 14.2.3 The gauge factor of the strain gauges is
data is shown on figure 5, and a plot of the data is shown entered by the operator before the test and the strain is
on figure 6. The present program is in inch-pound units; calculated each time bridge output and excitation voltage
figures are not presented using metric terminology. is read for both the axial and lateral strain gauges. The
14.2.1 After strain gauges have been installed on load voltage output from testing machine is read at same
concrete cylinder, they must be connected to a readout time bridge outputs are read. By using area of cylinder
device. The readout device currently in use is a system entered by operator at beginning of test, the stress on
consisting of a multiplexer and analog-to-digitalconverter the cylinder is also computed.
that is interfaced to a digital computer. The two axial strain 14.2.4 After test has been completed, the computer
gauges and two precision resistors are connected in a full- program gives the operator the options of plotting and/
bridge configuration for sensitive detection of strain in or printing the test data. Plotting of the data is done on
the strain gauges. The two strain gauges are positioned a digital plotter which gives a plot of stress versus strain
in opposite legs of the bridge so that their outputs are with both axial and lateral strains plotted on same set
averaged. The bridge is excited using a 5-volt, d-c power of axes. Printout of the data gives stress, axial strain, lateral
supply, and output of bridge is connected to multiplexer. strain, modulus of elasticity, and Poisson's ratio. Calculation
The lateral pair of strain gauges is connected in a similar of modulus of elasticity is performed by dividing stress
bridge and its output is connected to another channel of at each point by strain at that point. This calculation is
the multiplexer as are the electrical load output of the equivalent to calculating a chord modulus from zero.
testing machine and the bridge excitation voltage. The Calculation of the modulus for other chords can be done
digital computer is programmed to read voltages using manually using data provided on printout. Poisson's ratio
the multiplexer and analog-to-digitalconverter at the rate is calculated by dividing lateral strain at each point by
of about two times per second and then to calculate the axial strain at that point.
strains and stresses which it then plots on its CRT display 14.2.5 Because the automatic recording is on a timed
and saves for hardcopy plotting and printer after the test. interval rather than on a load interval, it is not possible
14.2.2 The computer program for calculating strain to determine a chord modulus between 100 and 1,000
is based on the strain gauge equations for an unbalanced lbf/in 2 (0.00069 and 0.00690 GPa) exactly.
bridge. This calculation requires that the output of the
bridge and excitation voltage be read initially with specimen 15. Report
in an unstrained state and then again as specimen is being
strained. Using this information and the gauge factor of 15.1 Figure4 shows a typical report, and it shall include:
the strain gauges, the strain can be computed using the Specimen identification number
following equations: Dimensions of specimen in inches (millimeters)
Curing and environmental histories of specimen
-2 Vr Age of specimen
Strain -- GF(1 + Vr) (8) Strength of concrete (if determined)
Density of concrete (if determined)
Stress-strain curves (if plotted)
Vr = Vo Vo (unstrained)
V,. (strained) - (9) Chord modulus of elasticity
Poisson's ratio (if determined)
where:
16. Precision and Bias
Vo = bridge output voltage,
Vi = bridge excitation voltage, and 16.1 The precision and bias for this procedure have
GF = gauge factor of strain gauges. not been established.
481
USBR 4469
Figure 3.-Determination of longitudinal and lateral frame ratios and longitudinal frame constant.
482
USBR 4469
/.I ,I 3. / ,3o. 0
A/2"
/.q 2.1 5.5"
/. &./ 2. o 2." 7.
q '2" o0
12 13 14 Elastic Properties 18 19
Average. SRL Average 15 16 17 Density Ultimate
SRo (8 - 7) SRz S E M/ V Strength
Lateral Strain Stress Modulus of Poisson's
in/in in/in Lmn) (9 - 7 or 4) Elasticity Ratio lbm/ft lbf/in
x 10 -4 m/in x 10- oa&-y
x 10-4 lbf/in ..lh-)- lbf/in
x 106
3. o
2q. 7S 3. 20 700 .76 O./Zo /4 4 /o
3.,,et
4.0
,4. o " o o .o o.14 /48.7 4 qeo
4.q
483
USBR 4469
484
USBR 4469
4,000
3,.$00
J
i
I
(D
I
z
-- 3,000 I
w
I
- Lateral --Axial
0 Strain
I Strain
/
W
2,500
I
W I USBR
+ ASTM
0
I
0 2,000 I
I
/
Q
Z
I
0
0.. I
Z l, 500 I
+
(/) I
IJJ I
#
u 1,000
500
0 ,
0 200
I
400
I
600
I
800
=
1,000
I
1,200
=
1,400
I
1,600
I
1,800
I
2,000
485
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4496-92
PROCEDURE FOR
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4496; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 496-71 (Reapproved 1979).
486
USBR 4496
under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are covered lower bearing strip and cylinder, (2) a supplementary bearing
under that particular procedure or standard directly or by bar conforming to requirements of section 3.2 as to critical
reference to another. dimensions and planeness, and (3) two uprights for positioning
6.2 The testing machine shall meet requirements of test cylinder, bearing strips, and supplementary bearing bar.
section 7.5 by being calibrated in accordance with USBR
7.2 Measurements:
1104.
7.2.1 Determine diameter of test specimen to nearest
6.3 The supplementary bearing bar or plate shall be
0.01 inch (0.25 mm) by averaging three diameters measured
checked for compliance with section 3.2 by using linear near ends and middle of specimen and lying in plane
measurement devices complying with standards of USBR
containing diametral lines marked on the two ends.
1000.
Determine length of specimen to nearest 0.1 inch (2.5
7. Procedure mm) by averaging at least two length measurements taken
in plane containing diametral lines.
7.1 Marking.-Draw diametral lines on each end of 7.3 Positioning Using Marked Diametral Lines.-
specimen using a suitable device that will ensure that lines Center one of the balsa wood strips along center of lower
are in same axial plane, see figures 1 and 2 (note 1). As bearing block. Place specimen on balsa wood strip and
an alternative, use aligning jig as shown on figure 3 (note align such that diametral lines marked on ends of specimen
2). are vertical and centered over strip. Place a second balsa
NOTE 1.-Figures 1 and 2 show a suitable device for drawing wood strip lengthwise on cylinder, centered on diametral
diametral lines on each end of specimen in same axial plane. lines. Position assembly to ensure following two conditions:
The device consists of three parts: (1) a 4-inch (102-mm) steel (1) The projection of the plane of the two diametral
channel, flanges of which have been machined flat, (2) a section lines marked on ends of specimen intersects center of upper
of a tee bar, B, that is grooved to fit smoothly over flanges bearing plate.
of channel and includes a rectangular notch for positioning vertical
member of tee bar assembly, and (3) a vertical bar, C, containing (2) Supplementary bearing bar or plate, when used,
a longitudinal aperture (cleft), A, for guiding a pencil. The tee and the center of specimen are directly beneath center
bar assembly is not fastened to channel, it is positioned at either of thrust of spherical bearing block (fig. 5).
end of channel without disturbing position of specimen when 7.4 Positioning Using Aligning Jig.-Position bearing
marking diametral lines. strips, test cylinder, and supplementary bearing bar using
NOTE Z-Figure 4 is a detailed drawing of the aligning jig aligning jig as shown on figure 3, and center jig so that
shown on figure 3 that achieves same purpose as marking supplementary bearing bar and center of specimen are
diametral lines. The device consists of: (1) a base for holding directly beneath center of thrust of spherical bearing block.
Ii
Concrete Specimen_
I" B
_ii .....
A= Longitudinal aperture
16"rain.
SIDE
1"
----I
END
Figure 1. - General views of a suitable apparatus for marking end diameters used for alignment of
specimen in testing machine.
487
USBR 4496
TOP'
E NI D
Figure 2 ])ctai]ls o4: i :,UliNe apparziFus for /q rg ng er,d ,Jimeters us;ed f,l:lZ aJZg, l ,g s, jpechlrJe[:l
7.3.I AF, F.}y h::,ad o:m, tin, uously and wid-,,o{ shock at
a cc,.ns.tan 'ate wikl-An he. range o.f 100 to 2:00 ][bf/'in :
,:I!;8!il' to::, 1379 kPa) per minute splitting :e.nsi[e sre.ss und
faJiiue ,,,ccurs ,:inote 3:1. Record maxJin'Jum appIied load
i!n,ticated by resting machJine a faiiluze, and note Lvpe of
faUu'e and aF, peara,ce o.f c,:mcrere.
Ncrr'E 3 Tk, e: relat.orJshi[p k,,c'rwee:n spiittJing ensil, e sresas dnd
applJie.d k,ad: Jis sh,.,:w, Jem secti,on, 8. The required loading ange
h:l splJCdng t:e.nsiJle stress <,:,zre.sp.,:l],ds; ,::, an, applied total load
h:l l-*e arJ, ge ,::4[ 11,31:],0 t<3,-.!2:.(,'00 ]bf (5'0 i, I:.1:) J'13.].5 kN:, F:,e
mmLte c,: ,:5- by ]2:-mch, (1 32- by 31[)5-n:q,n:l) cylinders.
8;. C::aIc:ulatio, ns
i ;!il};
USBR 449,,({
ii
2
9. Report
i89
USBR 4496
:= t"
o4
tI
aJt)
e-
"p . i
tL
I"-
, %, '%. %. %.
8
.-.
oo,
i " :
I I I I
2 " '
490
@ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
USBR 4497-92
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4497; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 497-85b.
491
USBR 4497
6. Conditioning
492
USBR 4497
L
I, fRigid steel member I-beam
7.3.8 The equipment shall be so designed that load
will be distributed about center of overall length of
ofhe Ype\
specimen (figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4). At option of manufacturer,
center of load may be applied at any point on the overall
k: I' =I I //'/ II of pipe length of specimen. The load may be applied either at
a single point or at multiple points dependent on length
K'-', u,
L
7A /[/ =oo. \\\ of specimen being tested and rigidity of test frame. Multiple
I: L=Lgying 17 I = o .... =Jl ,
[ _ _ _ !en_g_t_h_ _ U _L_ inch(12.7 mml radius points of load applications to top bearing will permit use
of lighter beams without appreciabledeflection.
7.4 Calibration.-The loading device shall be one that
provides an accuracy of +2 percent at specified test loads.
at least 6 by 6 inches/ of span but not less than
A calibration curve may be used. Machines used for
(152 by 15Z mm) ---.--- I .inch(Z5 mm).
performing the three-edge bearing tests shall be verified
No% :This figure illustrateso method of in accordancewith USBR 1104.
applyingthe load "to the pipe
7.5 Procedure:
7.5.1 Place specimen on two bottom bearing strips
Figure 2. - Three-edge bearing test for arch pipe. in such a manner that the pipe or tile rests firmly and
with the most uniform possible bearing on each strip.
7.5.2 Mark the two ends of specimen at a point
I (Rigid steel member I-beam
I_ "L 'j or other type. midway between bearing strips and then establish
2 I )
i r-l --
ai {Upper bring
diametrically opposite points on each end.
7.5.3 Place top bearing beam so that it is aligned
with the marks established in 7.5.2. After placing specimen
Ii d II I#/
fff qnnn wo, lof in machine on bottom strips, align the top bearings
\\ pipe
symmetrically in testing machine. Apply load at rate
I- !: !_eY;_h_ _ _ J ,nch(lZ.7mm) radius indicated in 7.3.1 until either the formulation of a 0.01-
inch (0.25-mm) crack width or the ultimate strength load,
---?d. BeQring strips, space of no more as may be specified, is reached. If both the 0.01-inch crack
- than I inch per foot (83minim) and the ultimate load are required, the specified rate of
\Rigid bose lower bearing,at
leosf.mm_j (Zmmlfsspn but not less than I inch loading need not be maintained after the load of the 0.01-
6 by 6 inches(152 by 152 mm)_-) (25ram).
inch crack has been determined.
Note:This figure illustrateso method of 7.5.4 The 0.01-inch crack load is the maximum load
opplyincj the load % the pipe.
applied to the pipe before a crack having a width of 0.01
inch (0.25 ram) occurs throughout a continuous length
Figure 3. - Three-edge bearing test for horizontal elliptical pipe.
of 1 foot (305 mm) or more, measured parallel to
longitudinal axis of pipe barrel. Consider the crack to be
I (Rigid steel member l-beam 0.01 inch in width when point of measuring gauge will,
z L, I kor oiher pe without forcing, penetrate 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) at close
intervals throughout the specified distance of 1 foot.
Measure width of crack using a gauge made from a leaf
0.01 inch thick (as in a set of standard machinist gauges),
ground to a point of 1/16 inch in width with corners
rounded, and with a taper of 1/4 in/in (0.25 mm/mm),
li z inch(IZ7mm) rdius
as shown on figure 5. The ultimate load is reached when
the pipe will support no more load.
= ....'' , -'- _r. j--Beoring strips, space at no NOTE 1.-As used in this procedure, the 0.01-inch (0.25-ram)
I-----o . more than linch per foot crack is a test criterion for pipe tested in the three-edge bearing
d bose ower
Rig / " ((83minim)of spon but test and is not intended as an indication of overstressed or failed
beoring, ot least .... J not less thon I inch(25mm). pipe under installed conditions.
6 by 6 inches(152 by 152ram)
Note:This figure illusfrotes o mei'hod of pplying the lood io the pipe. 7.6 Calculations:
7.6.1 Strength test results shall be calculated in terms
Figure 4. - Three-edge bearing test for vertical elliptical pipe. of pounds force per linear foot (kilonewtons per linear
meter) to produce a 0.01-inch (0.25-mm) crack, or pounds
may be cast on surface of upper and lower bearings. The force per linear foot at ultimate load, or both, as required
width of the fillet cap, top or bottom, shall be not more by specifications. The laying length used in calculating the
than 1 in/ft (83 mm/m) of specimen diameter, but in strength values shall be that as indicated by an Lon figures 1,
no case less than 1 inch. 2, 3, and 4, except that for tongue-and-groove pipe, the
493
USBR 4497
I
inch per inch(0.25 mmlmm)\ Pu Load appled across Too f Pu Load apphed i'hrough wood
=
of #rarneond cover or rser [block Iocai'ed n centero'f
slab
. . ness
494
on average diameter of specimen. If ratio of length to diameter cores as taken from the two ends and the center
diameter is less than 2, make allowance for this ratio by area of each tile, pipe, or section.
multiplying the compressive strength by the applicable 10.4 Procedurefor Boiling Absorption Test.
correction factor given in table 1; determine values not 10.4.1 Drying Specimens.-Dry specimens in a
given in the table by interpolation. ventilated, mechanical convection oven at 221 to 239 F
9.6.2 A typical calculation form for the core strength (105 to 115 C).
test is shown on figure 5 of USBR 4039. 10.4.1.1 Method A.-Dry specimens until two
9.7 Precision andBias: successive determinations of mass at intervals of not less
9.7.1 This procedure for testing concrete pipe for than 6 hours show an increment of loss not greater than
strength is considered satisfactory for acceptance testing 0.10 percent of last oven-dry mass of specimen. Dry spec-
of commercial shipments because it has been used imens with a wall thickness of 1.5 inches (38 mm) or
extensively for such testing. In cases of disagreement arising less for a minimum of 24 hours, dry specimens with a
from differences in values reported by the Bureau and the wall thickness of 1.5 to 3 inches (38 to 76 ram) f6r a
supplier when using this procedure for acceptance testing, minimum of 48 hours, and dry specimens with a wall
the statistical bias, if any, should be determined with each thickness exceeding 3 inches for a minimum of 72 hours.
comparison being based on testing specimens randomly Use the last 6 hours of the minimum ding time to
drawn from one pipe of the type being evaluated. determine if sample has obtained proper dried mass.
10.4.1.2 Method B.-Dry all specimens for a
Table 1.-Strength correction factors for variations in L/D. minimum of 24 hours.
10.4.2 Determining Mass of Dried Specimens.-
LID Factor, LID Factor, Determine mass of oven-dried specimens immediately
percent percent upon removal from oven, where drying temperature was
2.25 221 to 239 F (105 to 115 C).
101.4 1.6 96.8
2.2 101.1 1.5 96.O 10.4.3 Immersion andBoiling:
2.1 100.6 1.4 95.2 10.4.3.1 Method A Specimen.-Within 24 hours,
2.0 100.0 1.3 94.5 carefully place dried specimen, that mass has been
1.9 99.2 1.1 93.1 determined for, in a suitable receptacle that contains clean
1.8 98.4 1.2 9O.O water at 50 to 75 F (10 to 24 C). Use distilled water,
1.7 97.6 1.0 85.0 rain water, or tap water that is known to have no effect
on test results. Heat water to boiling point in not less
Note: Cylindrical specimens with an L/D less than 1.0
may be broken for informational purposes but are not than 1 hour nor more than 2 hours. Do not apply live
considered as acceptable specimens for strength evaluation. steam to water to shorten preboil period until after 1 hour
Cylindrical specimens with an L/Dgreaterthan 2.25 should of heating by gas or electricity has been completed. Continue
be sawed to an L/D of 2.0. boiling for 5 hours. At end of 5-hour boiling period, turn
off heat and allow specimen to cool in the water to room
temperature by the natural loss of heat for not less than
10. Absorption Test 14 hours nor more than 24 hours.
10.4.3.2 Method B Specimen.-Within 24 hours,
10.1 Summary ofMethod.-This method covers testing carefully place dried specimen, that mass has been
of a specimen that is a sample or core from wall of pipe. determined for, in a suitable receptacle that contains clean
Test specimen is firstsubjected to drying, then to immersion water at 50 to 75 F (10 to 24 C). Use distilled water,
to determine specimen's absorption of water when tested rain water, or tap water that is known to have no effect
by the described procedures. Two alternative procedures on test results. Heat water to boiling point in not less
for conducting the test are presented. Method A is the than 1 hour nor more than 2 hours. Do not apply live
standard test and referee, and requires 3 to 6 days to steam to water to shorten preboil period until after 1 hour
complete. Method B is intended as an accelerated test that of heating by gas or electricity has been completed. Continue
requires about 1-1/2 days to complete. boiling for 3 hours. At end of 3-hour boiling period, turn
10.2 Significance and Use.-The method is a quality off heat and cool specimen for 3 hours by running cold
control test performed to establish the fact that the finished, tap water into boiler, or by placing specimen in a separate
shippable pipe meets the absorption limits stated in the container of water. Temperature of the cooling water shall
specifications. not exceed 65 F (18 C).
10.3 Test Specimens: 10.4.4 Redetermining Mass of Wet Specimens.-
10.3.1 Method A Specimens=Method A absorption Remove water-cooled specimens from water, place on an
test specimens shall be in accordance with the requirements open drain rack, and allow to drain for 1 minute. Remove
of the applicable pipe specification and shall be used for remaining superficial water by quickly blotting specimen
the absorption procedure that requires 5 hours for boiling, with a dry, absorbent cloth or paper. Determine mass of
and a natural water cooling period of 14 to 24 hours. specimen immediately followingblotting.
10.3.2 Method B Specimens.-Method B absorption 10.4.5 Scale Sensitivi(y.-Determine mass of speci-
test specimens shall consist of three 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) mens less than 2.2 Ibm (1 kg) to an accuracy of 0.10 percent
495
USBR 4497
496
USBR 4497
leakage because the test result merely states whether there 13.3 Precision and Bias:
is conformance to the criteria for success specified. 13.3.1 No justifiable statements can be made on the
precision and bias for this test because the test result merely
13. Manhole Step Test states whether there is conformance to the criteria for
the success specified.
13.1 Summary of Method.-This method covers the
testing of an installed manhole step. The step shall be
14. Report
installed so that distance from wall of riser or cone,
measured from point of embedment to outside face of rung,
is 5.5 inches (140 mm). The step shall be initially subjected 14.1 This designation includes several test procedures;
to a horizontal pull-out load and then a vertical load. The therefore, no single reporting form would be appropraite.
loads shall be applied over a width of 3.5 inches (89 mm) Figure 9 shows a typical reporting form for the more
and centered on rung. Load shall be applied at a uniform common pipe tests. Results of a test such as permeability
rate until required test load is reached. would be more appropriately described in a memorandum
13.2 This test is not used by the Bureau; therefore, type report.
no typical calculations are included.
497
USBR 4497
e'.
0.
_
e"
e
g.,
e-
M e,
_q
E
e-.
O
g
O
I
r-:
o/a
498
USBR 5,497
| !
N
.i .g3
t
Xl
ro e
, e',,
e-'
U
2
.
8
< o
b.
o
o
.,
",b
',d
6 ,2o
1 e
I
0
r-
F.
.<
k
%,
"4
"= NN,
II II II
oo H
t
N ":
,-,'-6
r.l) o t' . u
499
USBR 4497
g-7;.-oes-A-
ox- 7 'p,,or 22 3.'o ,oo /Io 4.1 . t? to ZEAJeS o -
,,#,,,
Remarks:
Figure 9. - Sample reporting form for various tests on concrete pipe, sections, or tile.
5OO
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4500-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4500; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 500-83.
501
USBR 4500
or weep in service; and that pipe will accommodatestresses 7.3.1. Consider the flexural test to have failed when
simultaneously induced by internal pressure, earth loads, a break occurs in pipe as a result of flexural load being
and surge pressures. applied to pipe during test prior to reaching minimum
6.2 Terminology: flexural load, or while holding at this minimum load.
6.2.1 Hydrostatic Strength.-The ability of the pipe
and coupling sleeve to withstand forces resulting from 8. Crushing Test
internal pressure.
6.3 Procedure.-Placepipe and coupling sleeve, or pipe 8.1 Significance.-The crushing test establishes the fact
and coupling sleeve with factory-assembled joint, in a that pipe has sufficient strength to withstand crushing loads
hydrostatic pressure testing machine with gaskets that seal stated in the specifications. The strength level required
the ends but exert no end pressure. Expel all air and apply by the specifications ensures minimum strengths that will
internal water pressure at a minimum uniform rate of satisfactorily withstand magnitude of loads normally
100 lbf/in2 (689.5 kPa) per second to specified pressure, encountered in service with a reasonable margin of safety.
and maintain that pressure level for a minimum of 5 8.2 Terminology:
seconds. 8.2.1 Crushing Strength.-The ability of pipe to
6.3.1 Coupling sleeves may be tested with a rubber withstand external loads that tend to collapse pipe.
bladder inside sleeves. 8.2.2 Consider the crushing test (fig. 2) to have failed
6.3.2 Consider hydrostatic pressure test to have failed when a break occurs in pipe as a result of crushing load
when pipe or coupling sleeve fails to sustain test pressure being applied to pipe during test prior to reaching
for the 5-second period. minimum crushing load designated in specifications.
8.3 Procedure for V-Shaped, Three Edge Bearing
7. FlexuralTest Method.-The assembly for this method is shown on figure
7.1 Significance.-The flexural test establishes the fact 3.
that the pipe has sufficient strength to withstand the
flexural bending loads stated in the specifications. These Load Load
test loads provide adequate strengths to resist transverse
bending loads normally encountered in field service when
good bedding methods are employed by the installer.
7.2 Terminology:
7.2.1 Flexural Strength.-The ability of a standard
pipe section to withstand external loads bearing on the
pipe transversely to its longitudinal axis that induce
bending.
7.3 Procedure.-Support pipe in a flexural testing A
machine over a clear span of 9 feet (2.74 m). Unless Side / \ Front
/ \
otherwise specified, it shall be optional, with pipe lengths
in excess of 12.5 feet (3.81 m), to test at 75 percent of
specified loads on supports 12 feet (3.66 m) apart. Apply /pn
load at a minimum uniform rate of 250 lbf/s (1112 N/s) ch (12.7mm)rodius
Clear S
until load reaches proof load specified; maintain proof load
for a minimum of 5 seconds. Distribute load equally and Detail
apply at third points of clear span, as shown on figure
1. Figure 2. - Assembly for crushing strength test.
9 feet(2.7m)
0ptionol: 12 feet (3.6m) 6inches
W
l-inch(25-mm) rodius
er loading block--
Asbestos-Cement pipe - Rubber/
Lower V-Block
502
USBR 4500
8.3.1 The lower press-block consists of a V-shaped NOTE 1.-Specially denatured alcohol conforming with Formula
support having an included angle of 150 ; support is made No. 30, 3a, or 2b of the U.S. Bureau of Internal Revenue Service
of metal or hardwood. Insert strips of rubber of suitable (Alcohol and Tobacco Tax Division), or alcohol consisting of
width and length between press-block and test specimen. 95 percent specially denatured alcohol conforming to, Formula
These rubber strips shall be 0.625+0.125 inch (15.9+3.2 No. 3a plus 5 percent isopropanol may be substituted.
mm) thick, and have a hardness between 45 and 65 Shore
A durometer. 10.3.2 Phenolphthalein Indicator Solution.-Dissolve
1.0 gram of phenolphthalein in 100 mL of absolute ethanol
8.3.2 The flat upper press-block, made of same
(note 1).
material as lower press-block, shall have a minimum width
.of 6 inches (152 mm). Insert a strip of rubber that is 10.3.3 Glycerol-Ethanol Solvent (1+2).-Mix 1
the same size as rubber strips in lower press-block (sec. volume of glycerol with 2 volumes of anhydrous or absolute
ethanol (note 1). To each liter of this solution, add 2.0
8.3.1) between press-block and test specimen.
mL of phenolphthalein indicator solution. Adjust the
8.3.3 Apply load at a uniform rate so that failure
will occur in not less than 15 seconds and in not more solvent to slightly basic with either dilute sodium hydroxide
than 30 seconds. (NaOH) in absolute ethanol (note 1) or standard
ammonium acetate solution, depending on original pH.
10.3.4 Strontium Nitrate, Sr(NO3)2.
9. Straightness Test 10.4 Procedure:
10.4.1 Prepare representative samples of pipe and
9.1 Significance.-The straightness test covers measure- coupling sleeves, and immediately sieve them through a
ment of the maximum deviation from straightness of a No. 20 (850-#m) sieve. Place material passing sieve
standard length of asbestos-cement pipe. immediately into a bottle and cover with bottle's ground-
9.2 Procedure.-Measure maximum ordinate from glass top.
exterior surface of pipe by placing a straightedge, that 10.4.2 Place bottle, with top removed, in a drying
exceeds pipe length, against exterior surface; or by placing oven at 220 F (104.4 C) for 2 hours; then cool in a
pipe on a plane surface, upon which the pipe can be rolled, desiccator to room temperature.
and measuring maximum distance from exterior pipe 10.4.3 Obtain a mass of 1+0.010 gram of dried
surface to the plane surface. sample to nearest 0.001 gram, and place this mass in a
dry 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask. Using a Teflon-fluorocarbon
encapsulated stirring bar, add 60 mL of the glycerol-ethanol
10. Uncombined Calcium Hydroxide Test
solvent and 2.0 grams of Sr(NOa)2. Attach flask to a
watercooled condenser with a standard-taper 24/40 glass
10.1 Significance.-This test covers measurement of joint and place on a hotplate with a magnetic stirrer.
amount of uncombined calcium hydroxide in asbestos- 10.4.4 Boil solution gently for 30 minutes, while
cement pipe to establish the fact that pipe has required stirring gently. Then, remove flask and filter mixture
chemical resistance. Criteria for resistance to environmental through a Buchner funnel under vacuum. Bring filtrate
aggressiveness is given in section 11. to a boil and titrate with ammonium acetate solution until
10.2 Terminology: mixture is colorless. Compare with a similar mixture
10.2.1 Uncombined Calcium Hydroxide.-The chem- containing no phenolphthalein indicator.
ical resistance of the pipe as related to the uncombined 10.5 Calculations.-Calculate the percentage of uncom-
calcium hydroxide content. bined Ca(OH)2 in the sample as follows:
10.3 Reagents:
10.3.1 Ammonium Acetate, StandardSolution (1 mL dD
= 0.0066 gram of Ca(OH)2).-Dissolve 16.0 grams of dry Ca(OH)2 (percent) -- E (100) (2)
crystalline ammonium acetate in 1 liter of absolute or
anhydrous ethanol (note 1). Standardize the solution where:
against calcium oxide (CaO) in accordance with sections
10.4.3 and 10.4.4. Calculate the calcium hydroxide C = Ca(OH)2 equivalent of ammonium acetate solu-
equivalent as follows: tion, in grams per milliliter;
D = milliliters of ammonium acetate required for
Ca(OH)2 equivalent, in grams per milliliter, titration of solution; and
E = grams of sample used.
1.32A
B (1) 10.5.1 Figure 4 shows a typical calculation form.
503
USBR 4500
soil environments. The guidelines are based on exposure Table 3. - Minimum pH in nonsulfate acidic soils.
within the temperature range of 40 to 80 F (4.4 to 26.7
C). For pipe exposures to temperatures beyond these Water conditions MinimumpH of acidic
limits, consult manufacturer. within soil soils when using asbestos-
11.2 Significance and Use.-Guidelines for internal and environment cement pipe
external corrosion of asbestos-cement pipe are included Type I Type II
in this procedure solely for the purpose of helping users
evaluate the economic service life of asbestos-cement pipe Essentially quiescent 5.0 4.0
Mildly fluctuating 5.5 5.0
under various soil and water conditions. If either water
Rapidly moving or
or soil corrosion guidelines are not adhered to, some grossly cyclic 6.3 5.5
decrease in economic service life can be expected; when
guidelines are followed, experience has shown that an
indefinite life can be expected for the pipe. cement pipe in acidic soils. The pipe may or may not
11.3 Summary of Method.-Factors that cause aggres- perform satisfactorily in acidicsoil environments that have
sive environments, internal and external waters, external pH values below those listed in the table. To determine
soil conditions, and soluble sulfate contents of waters and suitability of pipe in soils that have lower pH values,
soils should be considered separately even though they may evaluate each situation individually, taking into considera-
exist in combination. tion all aspects of soil environment that affect its
11.4 Corrosion Guidelines for Water Transported corrosiveness to asbestos-cementpipe.
Through Asbestos-Cement Pipe: 11.6 Corrosion Guidelines forSoluble Sulfate in Water
11.4.1 The aggressiveness of water is classified as andSoils:
shown in table 1. The aggressive index is defined as: 11.6.1 Table 4 classifies the relative degree of sulfate
attack on concrete products by various concentrations of
AI = pH + log (FH) (3) soluble sulfates in soils and ground water.
where:
Table 4. - Attack on concrete by soils and waters containing various
AI = aggressiveindex, sulfate concentrations.
pH = index of acidityor alkalinityof the water in
standard pH units, Relative degree SO4 in water, SO4 in soil,
of sulfate attack mg/L percent
total alkalinity in milligrams per liter as CaCO3,
and Very Severe* 1500 to 10 000 0.20 to 2.00
calcium hardness in milligrams per liter as Negligible 0 to 150 0 to 0.10
CaCO3. Positive I 150 to 1500 0.10 to 0.20
Severe* 1500 to 10 000 0.20 to 2.00
Table 1. - Aggressivenessof water. Very Severe* _> 10 000 _> 2.00
Water Value of AI 1 Use Type II asbestos-cementpipe.
Highly aggressive < 10.0
Moderately aggressive 10.0 to 11.9 12. Calculations
Nonaggressive -->12.0
12.1 The pH determinations shall be entered on the
11.4.2 Table 2 shows the type of asbestos-cement forms shown in USBR 3100.
pipe to be used with aggressive waters. 12.2 The SO4 determinations shall be entered on a
form that is shown on figure 1 of USBR 5450.
Table 2. - Type of pipe for aggressive waters. 12.3 The Ca(OH)2 equivalent and the percentage of
Ca(OH)2 shall be determined in accordance with sections
Water Recommendedpipe
10.3.1 and 10.5, as demonstrated on figure 4.
Highly aggressive See Note
Moderately aggressive Type II 13. Report
Nonaggressive Types I and II
Note: The serviceability of asbestos-cement pipe for such applications 13.1 Figure 5 shows a typical reporting form.
should be established by the Government in conjunction with
manufacturer.
14. Precision and Bias
11.5 Coosion Guidelines for Acidic Soils External to
Asbestos-Cement Pipe.-Table 3 shows guidelines, based 14.1 The precision and bias for this procedure are not
upon minimum pH factors alone, for the use of asbestos- known at this time.
504
USBR 4500
C D E
Type Method Silica- Ca(OH)2 Standard Mass Uncombined
Specimen of of Cement Equivalent Solution of Ca(OH)2,
No. Specimen Curing Ratio of Standard Required Sample,
Solution, for Titration,
g/mL mL grams percent
M'3dgA dC SNEEr z Ho/s
$ rEA O. 4 a O06G 8.. o0 /. 00 5..4
12 A/o's
M-3Pd@8 o/o s ''A/ O. 4 o/o /. 51 /. o06" 0. q
M-3od'C do 22 t/o/,.s
-rA O. [ o/ O. 1 I. 004 0. d
5"rWA,4 o. e; /o /. 21 g O0/ 0.
1-3E71 do ,W'oa 0 do /q.3q /. 000 /2. #
5O5
USBR 4500
Three-Edge V-Block
Hydrostatic Bursting Flexural Bearing Crushing
Specimen Pressure Pressure, Strength, Crushing Strength, Straightness Uncombined
No. Test lbf/in 2 lbf/in 2 Strength, lbf/ft Test Ca(OH)z,
(kPa) lbf/ft percent
_/I.'.T I\
PA S.Y&"0 - 'o
LEA/<A6'. AT 3Go
2 25"/,b,c/fOz
2 90
24-A-So
A c-3o-3 ", 800
24--D-5o P,q.SEO --,,'o
,4 C-5O-I EA.F-AdAT
37S/A,F//tz 55O
24-0-50
AC-50-2 I/ S-GO
24-D-o
Ac-5o-3 q, 70
506
UNITED STATES OF RECLAMATION
INTERIORBuREAU
DEPARTMENT OF THE )
USBR 4512-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4512; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 512-82 (Reapproved 1983).
507
USBR 4512:
<:re s.h,:,,,ukt be' :a.:e to, p>:.>\':dle a s.p]m:ica]l El:d <:l.: bah [Cl::gii:t:ldiql II ;IX:i'i..l:{ cy]!inde' 1{ e'xterna]l de'<.ices, are used,
jiclint and Clrld p]!a{es rigid e]ClLgq Z,]I essl]e EINif'IL):'IIF]I ]:<:lladilllgl 51ll[']Sl S;ha]l] klle ]:rleaSi:lre{{I (]21 V*{:llt le:S;S; tklalll t"lll(] I gauge [iine:s
SlIpIL]t.{-/{I t]ljll:-):]lql]}l I -I=Fll:]l:Nl:ll(] peripl]iePy I C;llf SpOCillle[:l Tl['le:
.l:f cylinders. Figul:e 2 s.h,,:,v.s an a,ccep:ab]e spring-]lcl, a.d.ed
r,n:e Mealns sh,LIl be:' I-)l-t[llV]!ldeld fl[llT :-east,Niig ]l[lt.] g;]kltaes lilt:a), be insYrll]ll:.eni-ed s,; lha: avel-agc strtilNI ,:,Ill A]I
l:]-]]il[air]l{]Fg I{:laC] I:l:L] nearest 2 perce:n: ,:>f [l(]l{.a ap]p]ied ]lk)li]ld. ga ge lines ,:,rl, k:,e :e. d, directIy The e:fective gauge length
TI-ais ]lT]l]:y klle I agCCll]l-II[::ll/:'lll::,d by a ]:)C1711tllkkI-Jel-J[ly :inlSt:ilcd 5:h]]l hie I L:{" ]:e{5l" ltilTee :tiT:lOS {-]-e ]:I1LIXiI']I]ITI SiZe {.}f agg:e:ga:e
II/:,ll]rau]licpre.ss]ure gug:e:, {llZ a tyldTaLlllii( ]iack mdl a ibl)l;]lll{ :'Jl :he CiOnC:['li:'[t_: Tl'e: Sl{:aiF>:tllle:lS;LiY]ing :l,,,]ce .ha]l bel
CJIplNll!e ,){ iTle:l..;Lli,]ir'Jlg S:T]]:ns ]elas: lyeai I vvii{h,:aUl{:
,el]l ilnse.:e.d in free,in< vd:er I,:.>;l,:J is aF,,p[ied ,,)r adiHs:ed.
fllL]l7 [[[
51 Precautions
6. Test Specimens;
I i b!;LIJ'e I {-Illllli:;e:,:lF]E] ]ll, lllL! fl:] c[eeFi [}kJ[]n[]s. ]b4<l],_l S]{]l',']:l :l lIl[[lll][
s.h,l] k,,e. (!i.]../[6 inC}qles i: 152. i._+1 (i nTFn):, and :he leri, gd-s
<, I: }::i
USBR 4512
shall be at least 11-1/2 inches (292 mm). When ends of copper, to prevent loss of moisture by evaporation, and
specimen are in contact with steel bearing plates, specimen shall remain sealed throughout storage and testing period.
length shall be at least equal to gauge length of strain- 7.1.3 Variable Curing Temperature Regimen.-
measuring apparatus plus diameter of specimen. When it is desired to introduce effect of temperature on
6.2 Fabricating Specimens.-The maximum size of elastic and inelastic properties of a concrete, such as the
aggregate shall not exceed 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm). adiabatic temperature conditions existing in massive
Vertically cast cylinders shall be fabricated in accordance concrete or temperature conditions to which concrete is
with provisions of section 8 of USBR 4192. The ends of subjected during accelerated curing, temperatures within
each cylinder shall meet the planeness requirements of specimen storage facilityshall be controlled to correspond
section 1.2 and note 1 of USBR 4617. Horizontally cast to desired temperature history. The user shall be
specimens shall be consolidated by the method appropriate responsible for establishing the time-temperature history
to the consistency of the concrete as indicated in section and the permissible range of deviation.
8.5.1 of USBR 4192. Care must be taken to ensure that 7.1.4 Other Curing Conditions.-Other test ages and
rod or vibrator does not strike the strain meter. When ambient storage conditions may be substituted when
vibration is used, concrete shall be placed in one layer information is required for specific applications. The
and vibrating element shall not exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 storage conditions shall be carefully detailed in the report.
ram) in diameter. When rodding is used, concrete shall 7.2 Embedded Gauges.-Figure 1 shows a mold for
be placed in two approximately equal layers with each layer horizontally casting a specimen to contain an elastic wire
being rodded 25 times evenly along each side of strain strain gauge for measuring strain. The strain meter is
meter. Afterconsolidation, concrete shall be struck off with secured rigidly in center of mold with two threaded rods
trowel or float, then trowelled the minimum amount to attached to an angle iron at top of mold. When this or
form the concrete in the opening concentrically with rest a similar system is used, the support rods shall be removed
of specimen. A template curved in the radius of the after mold is filled and concrete has taken initial set so
specimen may be used as a strikeoff to shape and finish that gauge is free to respond to movements of the concrete.
concrete more precisely in the opening. Unthread the rods. from the gauge and remove from
specimen. This will leave two long voids in the concrete
NOTE Z-Requirements for planeness may be met by capping, which are considered negligible in volume.
lapping, or, at time of casting, fitting ends with bearing plates
normal to axis of cylinder. 8. Calibration and Standardization
509
USBR 4512
information is desired for other ages of loading, include extrapolation to zero time by method of least squares may
such in the report. be used to determine this quantity.
9.2 Loading Details.-Immediately prior to loading For example, to calculate the total strain at 133 and
creep specimens, determine compressive strength of 126 days for 100 lbf/in 2 at 7 days loading age and for
strength specimens in accordance with USBR 4039. When 400 Ibf/in 2 at 14 days loading age, the constant initial
unsealed creep specimens are placed in loading frame, cover elastic strain, 1/E, is 0.29 and 0.23 x 10.6 inch per inch
ends of control cylinders to prevent loss of moisture per pound force per square inch, respectively. The creep
(note 3). Load specimens at an intensity of not more than rate, F (K), is determined by running a linear regression
40 percent of the compressive strength at age of loading. equation plotting the natural logarithm (base e =
Make strain readings immediately before and after loading, 2.7182818) of (t + 1) on the x-axis againstthe normalized
2 to 6 hours after loading, daily for 1 week, weekly for creep in inch per inch per pound force per square inch
1 month, and monthly until end of 1 year. With higher for each age of reading on the y-axis. The correlation
concentrations of cement replacements by pozzolans and coefficient, intercept point where line crosses the y-axis,
the slower strength gains, the early strain readings must and the slope of the line are then determined:
be interpreted with caution. Before making each strain
reading, measure the load. If load varies more than 2 percent 100 Ibf/in 2 at 7 days loading age:
from correct value, load must be adjusted (note 4). Make Correlation coefficient = 0.8239902
strain readings on control specimens on same schedule Intercept = 0.330921
as loaded specimens. Slope = 0.0338368
e = 0.29 + 0.0338 In (133 + 1)
NOTE 3.-When placing creep specimens in frame, take care = 0.29 + 0.0338 (4.8978)
in aligning specimens to avoid eccentric loading.
= 0.46 lbf/in 2
NOTE 4.-Where springs are used to maintain load, adjustment For comparison, figure 7 indicates e = 0.49 lbf/in 2
can be accomplished by applying correct load and tightening nuts
on threaded reaction rods. 400 lbf/in 2 at 14 days loading age:
Correlation coefficient = 0.9740423
10. Calculations Intercept = 0.2428489
Slope = 0.0312123
10.1 Calculate total load-induced strain per pound force = 0.23 + 0.0312 In (126 + 1)
per square inch (or per kilopascal) as the difference between = 0.23 + 0.0312 (4.8442)
the average strain values of the loaded and control = 0.38 lbf/in 2
specimens divided by the averagestress. To determine creep For comparison, figure 7 indicates e = 0.38 lbf/in 2
strain per pound force per square inch (or per kilopascal)
for any age, subtract from the total load-induced strain, It should be noted that a correlation coefficient close
at that age, the strain immediately after loading. If desired, to unity (1) indicates a highly positive relationship.
plot total strain on semilog coordinate paper, on which 10.2 Figures 6 through 10 show typical calculation
logarithmic axis represents time, to determine constants forms and plotted curves.
1/E and F(K ) used in the following equation:
11. Report
1
e = -if- +F(K) In (t+ 1) (1)
11.1 A reporting form for this procedure is best
where: represented by a cover letter in conjunction with figures
6 through 10. The report shall include:
e = total strain in pound force per square inch
(kilopascals), Cementitious content, water-cementitious ratio,
E = instantaneous elastic modulus in pound force maximum aggregate size, slump, and air content.
per square inch (kilopascals), Type and source of cement, aggregate, admixture,
F (K) = creep rate (calculated as slope of a straight and mixing water (if other than fresh water is used).
line representing creep curve on semilog Position of cylinder when cast.
plot), Storage conditions before and after loading.
In = natural logarithmic function, and Age of specimen at time of loading.
r = time after loading in days Compressive strength of specimen.
Type of strain measuring device.
The constant 1/E is the initial elastic strain, and is Magnitude of any preload.
determined from the strain readings taken immediately Intensity of applied load.
before and after loading the specimen. If loading was not Initial elastic strain.
accomplishedexpeditiously, some creep may have occurred Creep strain at designated age up to 1 year.
before the after-loadingstrain was observed, in which event Creep rate F (K), if determined.
510
[!SBR -51_'.'
11 ,{,, P'ecautions.
511
USBR 4512
kilt I ][at::lpecl and .ieLife<!l mihe salrl]le cl;i 7 L/:; {Ihe CCI.II'IIT(/I{ v, I3I(TICi1:IGC'I*5,
]In c,v ,case slh,:,Mcl mlq, e sp,eciim.uis bc :,{]h:,,we<l ,, >:taq i,, d'l,e [l:)0-
g:,e,:e'n humJidity ro,:,m l<,-age, r Elt,;ln 2:8 1;:'
IL {;i{)'i >; {LJ'(
gaulges 'a&:en specimen is being fabrli.ca{edl F,:r a] lg-b,y aJis() aE 7 Jla'i;sl OFII Sl,{),]:Fle [('CIEI i]-]ass CCI,[IIClJ(I( Li()H/C]'C'te' ,,t(],e,
35-inch <45.7- b'y 9114-rain) specimen,, three gauges are:. c*,o,- Dave suf:J]cie.nt strerJgt]la i:<;,-lapping k:,ef.,:re being pJlace.d
usua]lly iml;erted ve'wiicLf;ly When specimens are cas.r at a under k>ad, arid end pllates, rnuis be fitted t,:+ s.peci!n-i, erl, Jluri!ng
field site, p.at,i,cullar .cu-e sh.C:,Llild be t;l,e:llTI t()cas;t therJ:]. <,,n: casting. Secure t,:+g:,, p.]ate t/, sp, e.cime.,ql ky tr,+weliing ,+>p
l:Jlat Iinilsiqied specm-mn is,
SLmSac:e c:,t: co, no:fete' iin+ca, a co, he s]ap< ,:,0'ntcr {:,t: ,.ne h, eing
a SILtrfa](:e S:IIL} [ ]*] [ t (:1[:1 {:lit
r:,erperJdicuLtr r<,, axis ,:,4 e;F, ecimen A stiffener iirJ, g ,l:i:g. ab,i;lt.iirt i islob (25 i?]]:ri ) hig/-Jer t]han 12,asi.e ,:>f c<m,e After
4) is placed a[,;Rllq,;] tClip ,IL)] 'IGII[3, IIILt d,Lring C;IS;tii]g t(I rnainigtin
c,ancrete }qlS; finished bleed irl, g;:, the ,: I" e.m/I p[a,e is ''iDrated
cylh:,dez in :,: oir,c:,ll,r slhape se c ui e'['.i, d o w ], ,;,n c o t x[,. { :, t s j:,e c i I: ]:1 c' n : l:<!l ;,, i, [,:t c:' r e d t ,: c< .p:, f"e' r
?, 12
US, BR 4512
18;. Pr'ocedure
dh e,c/imalia::e <e:lL
19". C:a]lculatiions
I::iL;nre <, I ,::,i!i,, Irame for r. rc*.:p tests;
,::< (5 iJxr:, !S_! mlrl; dia,rleCe cylinders, 15"1 Catox, I:vi,:rs sl:,tll l-::.e rI-e same as ,.r med:,<,,d A
,:see 1()).
192 F'Jig;tres (i; [hr(:iLl;[il 10 sb,,w t}'p.icall ,caicuilarcJi.ir)r,
]i a,_ k e . ()' nl s pe. JJn e'n s h,a , re la ppe d, p 1 a ce a s bee ,,f cop pe r
foms and p.l,:.ttedi curves
,l>f sarte tlni,ckness as liine'r c:,l t,a,p sur:iace e:,t spechren,
19,3 ]*'I recexr year'>;, E;,ueaL ,Lreep s, ttl,dies 5,sve
Crimp c,:q:,,F:,er exte'n,,JJing ,,::,'vet tk, e ed,ge down ar,:xmd tlJe
diso::,,FJt:in Le'.:J t:lSirJg the 1:2;ls .m sEraic, n :leter iF, [[-Je c!.,]lirder s;
"ig:leCilFlelKll ;]n';tSiIL)]:idelr {]l])Cl:}lp7)er l:iner fCll;FI'.I a Sela].
t(::I aAg:iFI]3l'
.oe
e-.
o.0
o
C
0o
e
514
USBR 4512
Spec. or
Noat,o/- jr$$uEo To DATr Structure Tested by - AA.4.P'Y Date
Solic. . DA I C. Pu$1A /o-f-88 ll-Zl-Sq
Item 'f--gEP ,)"ruo,''s-,f/Asswa' Computed by Date
Project,.,g,A Z. 7" ,,v4" D,AA/'Y /0-.'-8'O rd. ,,/-/.
LocationgeeHVd, ,*','/'d Z,aa
Feature TMEooo." ,ooarEv'/.r Station Offset Checked by Date
-"DAM AdootP/CAr/OAt$ Depth to P,'''/,4 ,,o=3-fc/
SPECIMEN DATA
Control Specimen, Cylinder No. //q Not Loaded CF"'Sa s,ecl/'.5 If& )
Creep Specimen, Cylinder No./'O-/$ Loaded (f',', ,,e''/$ B..)
El Unloaded Date
Date Cast /O-,.'=Sg Cylinder Nos. Cast //q -/2 7 Dimensions: ,/d'- d,y 3 if- (mm)
MSA (Maximum Agg-'regate)
Size = _ "',/' (mm) Scalped to ''A inches (mm)
Temp. of Mix = .qSS ,,C) Thermal Coefficient of Expansion (a) = ,,9o-" x 10.6 inch/inch _
Conditionin and Curinl: / ',' /,"'* m,m/J . ,.r o,'.o lOO ,a,,.,'o/,'a,u**/73."
Column (1): Time of day and/or date that specimens are started on creep test. For control specimens, this is the time for reading at start; for
creep specimens, the time immediately before and after loading.
Cxflumn (2): Specimen age and loading or unloading time in minutes, hours, or days.
Column (3): Temperature, T, in F or C taken in the 50-percent humidity room at the time creep readings are taken.
Column (4): Temperature difference, AT, in F or C, where AT= 73.4 F or 23.0 C - T.
Column (5): Standard bar base reading, which is the calibration for the standard bar with a standard gauge reading in inches or millimeters x 10-q.
Column (6): Standard bar correction for the temperature difference from 73.4 F or 23.0 C, see appendix table X1.2 in USBR 4901. If coefficient
of thermal expansion of invar steel from which standard or reference bar is fabricated is equal to 0.96 x 10-e (inch/inch)/F or 1.72 x 10-6
(mm/mm)/C and the dial gauges are accurate to 10-, the gauge lengths are as shown in table X1.2. If this criteria is not valid, a new table
must be generated. With a 10-inch (254-mm) gauge length, AT must be greater than :t:5.2 F (2.89 C).
Column (7): This column contains the dial gauge readings between the bands of gauge lines that are spaced uniformly around the perifery of the
specimen. Readingsare in inch per inch x 10-4 or millimeter per millimeter 10-.
Column (8): This column shows the average or summation of the dial gauge readings shown in column (7); readings are in inches or millimeters
10-.
Column (9): Thermal correction to the dial gauge reading for the concrete specimen based on the thermal coefficient of expansion of the concrete
for the gauge length, summation of gauge lengths, and AT. When a control specimen is used along with a test specimen and readings are taken
at same time and temperature, this correction is not required.
Column (10): This column shows the dial gauge reading corrected for the thermal correction to 73.4 F or 23.0 C. Readings are shown in inches
or millimeters x 10-. When a control specimen is used along with a test specimen and readings are taken at same time and temperature, this
correction is not required.
i Column (11): Shows the creep from first creep speciman as ALt in inches or millimeters x 10-.
Column (12): Shows the creep from second (or companion) specimen as A/. in inches or millimeters x 10-.
Column (13): Average creep, ALa, of creep specimens shown in columns (11) and (12).
Column (14): Length change of control specimen at age test specimen was loaded at specified design loading. Length change, AL, shown in
inches or millimeters x 10-.
Cxdumn (15): Creep or recovery of specimen corrected for thermal correction (if applicable) and/or control correction. Correction shown for
creep (ALa) or recovery (A/.) in inches or millimeters x 10-.
Column (16): Creep ALe, which is ALa divided by gaugelength GL times 100, for converting to unit deformation. Shown in inches or
millimeters x 10-Z
Column (17): Normalized or unit creep ALe, which is column (16) divided by the load in inch per inch per pound force per square inch x 10 or
millimeter per millimeter per kilopascal x 10. Creep value shown in inches or millimeters x 10-Z
Column (18): Recovery ALa, which is AL divided by gauge length G times 100, for converting to unit recovery. Units same as shown in
column (16).
Column (19): Normalized or unit recovery ALR, which is column (18) divided by load. Units same as shown in column (17).
515
USBR 4512
Spec. or
No 'O'4ff' .arO'gO 7'm DA 7"E Structure Tested by . JO"5-O8 Date
Solic. . DA#I4 D. ALPA/f Vf PA,O'SJA J/-2d-
Project Ite mC,''P *,'U#'d'$ Computed by Date
,..A / T ,j w'E, Location D'*V'w J'A8 ,O, sq,q/h'Y /o-S-f'c, ca //-Z/=A/
Station ."'.-" Offset Checked by Date
O, il,a AoaIf tCA r/ oo'$ Depth to c. P/cu-/, Io -3-J" ?
CREEP OF CONCRETE IN COMPRESSION
(2) (6)
Specimen Standard
Age and Bar Gauge Line Dial Readings
Loading Correction
or to
Unloading
Time,
h "'d 23.0 C
min,
(14) (15)
Creep Creep AL, Recovery ALu
Control Cylinder Number // or
Recovery
Corrected
for
Temp.
and/or
Control
&Ls or &L4
Inches 10 -4 Inches or millimeters 10 -e
Figure 8. - Sample form for recording creep data and applying corrections for temperature and control (sheet 1 of 6).
516
USBR 4512
(14)
Creep ALe Recovery &Ls
Control CylinderNumber //q or
Recovery
Corrected
for
Temp.
and/or
Control
ALs or AL,
Inchesx 10-4 Inches or millimeters 10-6
Figure 8. - Sample form for recording creep data and applying corrections for temperature and control (sheet 2 of 6).
517
USBR 4512
1 I 2 I 3 I I 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 I 9 Base v
Age Time Inches .n.'!!'merr, x I0-4
to-12-3 7d Oa I 7a.zi o.z I /5,
/0-12 7 = 7 it. 2, i
0. I , !
lO-lat 7 = L2 I Pooz I I
to -a
so -2a"
a,
lo
tJ ,." Ii -Ooa
77 oO -,o4
I
10-2o 15 p 7, t. I -o.o
fo-24
11-4.
II-/ZP
'"
3 '"t3 7';:;I -o.q
-0.,
i..-q
/4o 33 7' ;.o ] -o.
4g- /2 IJP? 8"2 7. :.o -0.6
I
300 "3 t za..* i +t.t
10-;2
11-2.1
3.,,.
41P.
r.,.s" r v.. , "/"
to5 I 2" 8" l. ; i' 'r"
,,Je*'l
m,am I -It ] "21
I
I
/2s.2 I -tI /q
I
I
I I +'.,
l i
I i i
I
/.- - 791 ' 4-,?. | I
a:..7# i -3a" , . /t I I I
I
I
I
I l I
I I
I
I I
eo,.e,-j m@+
I
I
Figure 8. -- Sample form for recording creep data and applying corrections for temperature and control (sheet 3 of 6).
518
USBR 4512
(14) (15)
Creep Creep AL Recovery ALR
Control Cylinder Number //' or
Recovery
Corrected
for
Temp.
and/or
Control
AL3 or AL4
Figure 8. - Sample form for recording creep data and applying corrections for temperature and control (sheet 4 of 6).
519
USBR 4512
Spec. or
Solic. Not OA/" .SSU',I 7 .?'" StructureA, H Tested by . /0-,4"-80 Date
Z).ARAtEYC. PA#./A /l-l-$q
Project ,A/.. 7" ,1 I/'R Item C,RE'P ,TU/.,@ Computed by Date
Location &eAi/Y'*,R /-.AS O.AAPcEY o-6"-&8 rVd l-tl- &?
Fe a tu re 7"/4'OA O, RE ,/ooSfP'/... T Station -",---" Offset Checked by Date
OANt ,a"/OO/,'/CAT/ON$ Depth to oC. PALS/,4 /o-3-.P,/
CREEP OF CONCRETE N COMPRESSION 100/A;F///II'/4 ./..'.I'
(1) (2) I (4) (: ') I (6) (9)
Time" Specimen .... AT S d. Standard
of Br ] Bar Thermal
Age and ' emp. I 73.4-T Corr-
Day Loading 23.0- T B-" se I Correction ection
and/or or
Rea ]ing] to
Date Unloading I
Time,
A '
1
ge I Time C
O-lq-#*i /,d o/ ; .P I ./.0.6 -7 I i.aa'7
.
/o-/9 /4 : : e [ o.a
IO-O
:o-z4
/s, , ; q.z I -o, I
zo I ; l.o -o.,
1/-7 34 I/q I "/.o J +2o4.
11-17 4,4 I:' I o.4. I +3.0
12-9
I-S'-SP9
la's I;',o I -s.
2-22
4-/ t89 I/7 174.o -o.g I I
I I
I
i
r3 'tl o
L_42t i
131 ='
I -- Io0
-- 13
;d. -=e. I
I
I -1$.6
/=.wl l I -/37
-/,q4
I
I
tT34.l I -/3(,
I ' '13;
J3 $"1 1 "/
"/5",
/3".342
I
I
v't
r/e.A, "#,
o .a oc,'.,,e,,s I,*.. ,"*,
I I I
I
I I
I I
I
I
I
*See table X1.2 of USBR 4901 if applicable.
Figure 8. - Sample form for recording creep data and applying corrections for temperature and control (sheet 5 of 6).
520
USBR 4512
ro za,,re" stcteDA M
Project ..,A/..r ,t EA item "AE'P .5"7"a./Ot'S Computed by Date
Location Dgc',d'l#'' ' ..A8 D.AA/EY so-$-OO TSItItS II-z s-ecl
Feature TNoDoE /..osg WE*" T Station Offset Checked by Date
OAht tVloOtF/CAT/ OH.
Depth to C. ptS/A /0-3-8q
CREEP OF CONCRETE IN COMPRESSION
(14) (15)
Creep Creep ALe Recovery ALe
Control Cylinder Number /I 1 or
Recovery
Corrected
for
Temp.
and/or
Control
AL3 or AL4
Inches z: m:!!!mc:crc x 10"4
Figure 8. - Sample form for recordi,lg creep data and applying corrections for temperature and control (sheet 6 of 6).
521
USBR 4512
-mI 300
o
m MASS CONCRETE STUDIES
N
UNIT CREEP VERSUS AGE
0 200
K
z 15o
o.
lOG
z
EL 5C
hl
o
I l
I I I I I I I i I I i a I I I I t I J n 1 I I I I I
z
IO IOO IOOO
o
,.ooo MASS CONCRETE STUDIES
EL x
o 0.900 NORMALIZED CREEP VERSUS AGE
IZ EL
IJJ J 7"t eo/o r e /oo.se ve / t" Dam/Ylod,',e,'ca,'o,'ts
EL 0.800
0.700
,.,,. E
0,600 --
L F'-"Y.'"""',,
0
o x
z
l
-r"
Z 0
-- Z
EL
W a,n B
UJ m
,..,g
a,n 0.200
N (2
_j n,n
EL 0. IO0 i
a,n I I
0.000 I l f i i lal n u i i fllll i i l n I II I
I0 I00 IOOO
522
USBR 4512
1.000
-
ooot-
t- fT-2oy,,oo/br/,.,," m
Z 0.400 -- ,e,
. o.3oo ;--
o l-dy, 4oo ,'f..L, z
O !
Q u O. 800 --
I,tJ
N t D
_1 W
, Q- 0.100 m
n.- W m
0 (.
ne 0.000 I I I II
I000
! 300
0
MASS CONCRETE STUDIES
N
E UNIT CREEP VERSUS AGE
E
25O 7"eoa'ore toose,l Da,,, Mod,'/C,'c,'ons
E
E
!
9 200
K
'1-
(,3
Z
150
o
IL
1-
I00
0. 50
I--
C I I I I I I I l I i I f I I I ) I i I I I
Z I I I i i
I0 I00
IOOO
523
@ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4535-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4535; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
'of ASTM designation: C 535-81.
2.1 USBR Procedures: 4.1 The Los Angeles test has been widely used as an
1000 Standards for Linear Measurement Devices indicator of the relative quality or competence of various
1012 Calibrating Balances or Scales sources of aggregatehaving similar mineral compositions;
1025 Checking Sieves however, the results do not automatically permit valid
4075 Sampling Aggregates comparisons to be made between sources distinctly different
4131 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size, Coarse in origin, composition, or structure. Specification limits
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in Los Angeles Machine based on this test should be assigned with extreme care
4136 Sieve Analysi s of Fine and Coarse Aggregates in consideration of available aggregate types and their
4702 Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to Testing performance history concerning specific uses.
Size
2.2 ASTM Standards:
C 535 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degra-
5, Apparatus
dation of Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and
Impact in the Los Angeles Machine1 5.1 Los Angeles MacMne.-The Los Angeles machine
E 11 Standard Specification for Wire-Cloth Sieves for shall conform to the requirements of section 5.1 and figure
1 of USBR 4131.
Testing Purposes 1
5.1.1 The machine shall be so driven and so
counterbalanced as to maintain a substantially uniform
3. Summary of Procedure peripheral speed of from 30 to 33 r/min (note 2). If a
section of rolled angle is used for shelf, direction of rotation
3.1 The Los Angeles test is a measure of degradation shall be such that charge is caught on outside face of angle.
of mineral aggregatesof standard gradings resulting from
a combination of actions including abrasion or attrition, NOTE Z-Backlash or slip in driving mechanism will probably
impact, and grinding in a rotating steel drum containing give test results that are not duplicated by other Los Angeles
a specified number of steel spheres; the number of which machines producing constant peripheral speed.
524
USBR 4535
5.1.3 A material discharge catch pan of suitable condition exists, shelf should be repaired or replaced before
dimensions is required to preclude any test sample loss. further tests are made. The influence that a developed
5.2 Sieves.-Sieves shall conform to ASTM E 11. metal ridge from peening of working face of shelf has
5.3 Balance.-A balance or scale accurate to within 0.1 on test results is not known; however, for uniform test
percent of test load over range required for this test is conditions, it is recommended that ridge be ground off
required. if its height exceeds 0.1 inch (2 mm).
5.4 Charge.-The charge shall consist of 12 steel spheres
averaging about 1-27/32 inches (46.8 mm) in diameter, 7. Sampling
with each sphere having a mass of between 0.86 and
0.98 Ibm (390 and 445 g), and having a total mass of
7.1 The field sample shall be obtained in accordance
11.02+0.055 Ibm (5000+25 g).
with USBR 4075, and reduced to test portion size in
accordance with USBR 4702.
NOTE 3.-Steel ball bearings 1-13/16 inches (46.0 l,m) and
1-7/8 inches (47.6 mm) in diameter, with a mass of about 0.88
and 0.97 Ibm (400 and 440 g) each, respectively, are readily 8. Conditioningof Test Sample
available. Steel spheres 1-27/32 inches (46.8 ram) in diameter
with a mass of about 0.93 Ibm (420 g) may also be obtainable. 8.1 The test sample shall be washed and oven dried
The charge may consist of a mixture of these sizes provided at 221 to 230 F (105 to 110 C) to a substantially constant
the mass tolerances of section 5.4 are met. mass (note 4), separated into individual size fractions, and
recombined to the grading shown in table 1 that most
6. Precautions nearly corresponds to range of aggregatesizes furnished
for work. The mass of the sample prior to test shall be
6.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous recorded to nearest 0.002 lbm (1 g).
materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It NOTE 4.-If aggregate is essentially free of adherent coatings
is the reponsibility of the user to consult and establish and dust, requirement for washing before and after test may.
be waived. Elimination of washing after test will seldom reduce
appropriate safety and health practices and determine the measured loss by more than about 0.2 percent of original
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. sample mass.
6.2 A precaution on backlash or slip in the driving
mechanism of the machine is outlined in note 2, section 5. 9. Calibration and Standardization
6.3 Maintenance of Shelf:
6.3.1 The shelf of the machine is subject to severe 9.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane-
surface wear and impact. With use, working surface of ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests
shelf is peened by the steel spheres and tends to develop listed under the ApplicableDocuments of' section 2 are
a ridge of metal parallel to and about 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) covered under that particular procedure or standard.
from junction of shelf and inner surface of cylinder. If 9.2 The Los Angeles machine shall be checked
shelf is made from section of rolled angle, not only may periodically for wear and to assure compliance with section
this ridge develop, but the shelf may be bent longitudinally 5.1 of USBR 4131.
or transversely from its proper position. 9.3 Sieves shall be calibrated to meet requirements of
6.3.2 Shelf should be inspected periodically to ASTM E 11 in accordance with USBR 1025.
determine whether it is bent either lengthwise or from 9.4 The balance or scale shall be calibrated to meet
its normal radial position with respect to cylinder. If either requirements of section 5.3 in accordance with USBR 1012.
525
USBR 4535
9.5 The charge dimensions shall be checked to meet 221 to 230 F (105 to 110 C) to a substantially constant
requirements of section 5.4 by using the linear measurement mass, and determine mass to nearest 0.01 lbm (5 g) (note 5).
devices in accordance with USBR 1000. The mass of the
NOTE 5.-Valuable information concerning uniformity of
charge shall meet requirements of section 5.4 by using
sample under test may be obtained by determining loss after
scales calibrated in accordancewith USBR 1012. 200 revolutions. Ratio of loss after 200 revolutions to loss after
9.6 Calibration of revolution counter shall be accomp- 1000 revolutions should not exceed 0.20 for material of uniform
lished by visual observation and by manually counting hardness. It is standard Bureau practice to determine percent
revolutions. loss after both 200 and 1000 revolutions.
9.7 Speed of revolution counter shall be checked with
an appropriate tachometer. This will provide the "average" 11. Calculation
rotational speed of cylinder but not the uniformity of the 11.1 Express the loss (difference between original and
"peripheral" speed. final mass of test sample) as a percentage of original mass
of test sample. Report this value as the percent loss.
11.2 Figure 2 of USBR 4075 shows a suggested
10. Procedure
calculation worksheet.
10.1 Place graded test sample and charge in Los NOTE 6.-The percent loss determined by this procedure has
Angeles machine and rotate for 200 revolutions. Discharge no known consistent relationship to percent loss for same material
material from machine and make a preliminary separation when tested by USBR 4131.
of sample on a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve. Sieve the finer
12. Report
portion on a No. 12 (1.70-mm) sieve in a manner
conforming to USBR 4136. The total mass of material 12.1 Figure 3 of USBR 4075 shows a suggested
that would be retained on the No. 12 sieve is determined reporting form with typical data.
to nearest 0.01 lbm (5 g). Care should be taken to avoid
loss of any part of sample. The entire sample, including 13. Precision and Bias
the dust of abrasion and fracture, is then returned to testing
machine and rotated for 800 revolutions. Discharge sample 13.1 The precision and bias for this procedure have
from machine and repeat previous sieving procedure. Wash not been determined; however, they are expected to be
material coarser than No. 12 sieve (note 4), oven dry at comparable to those of USBR 4131.
526
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4566-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
'Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4566; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 566-84.
527
USBR 4566
NOTE 3.-When a hot plate is used, drying can be expedited 9.2 Dry sample thoroughly in sample container to a
by adding sufficient anhydrous denatured alcohol to cover moist constant mass using the selected source of heat, exercising
sample. Stir and allow suspended material to settle. Decant as care to avoid loss of any particles. Rapid heating may cause
much of the alcohol as possible without losing any of sample. some particles to explode, resulting in partial loss of sample.
Ignite the remaining alcohol and allow it to burn off during If a source of heat other than the controlled-temperature
drying over the hot plate. Care should be exercised to control oven is used, stir sample during drying to accelerate the
the ignition operation to prevent injury or damage from the
operation and to avoid localized overheating. The sample
burning alcohol. "
is thoroughly dry when further heating causes, or would
cause, less than 0.1 percent additional loss in mass.
7. Sample
NOTE 4.-A quick method of determining if sample specimen
7.1 Secure a sample of aggregate representative of has given off its absorbed moisture is by placing a piece of cigarette
moisture content in supply being tested and, in the case paper on specimen. If moisture is still being released, steam will
cause paper to curl. If all moisture has been driven off, paper
of normal-density aggregate,determine a mass of not less
will remain flat.
than amount listed in table 1.
9.3 Determine mass of dried sample to nearest 0.1
percent after it has cooled sufficiently not to damage the
Table l.-Sample size for normal-density aggregate.
balance.
Maximumnominal size] Minimummass of
(sieves with square openings) sample,2 Ibm (kg) 10. Calculation
1/4 inch (sand) (6.3 ram) 1.1 (0.5) 10.1 Calculate total moisture content as follows:
3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 3.3 (1.5)
1/2 inch (12.5 ram) 4.4 (2) M-D
P -- D (100) (1)
3/4 inch (19.0 ram) 6.6 (3)
1 inch (25.0 mm) 8.8 (4)
1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm) 13.2 (6) where:
2 inches (50 ram) 17.6 (8) p
moisture content of sample in percent,
2-1/2 inches (63 mm) 22.0 (10)
M= mass of original sample in pound mass
3 inches (75 mm) 28.7 (13)
(grams), and
3-1/2 inches (90 ram) 35.3 (16)
mass of dried sample in pound mass (grams).
D
528
USBR 4597-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4597; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 597-71 (Reapproved 1979).
I Annual BookofASTM Standards, vol. 04.02. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, vol. 04.08.
529
USBR 4597
I 1
ONE UNIT. 5). A deflection amplifier shall be provided to which a
connecting cable from receiver may be connected. The
frequency response of this amplifier shall be similar to
that given in section 6.1.2. The overall amplifier gain shall
be sufficient to allow full deflection of weakest signals which
are received (note 6). The cathode-ray tube may be of the
53O
USBR 4597
pulse generator circuit. The calibration is connected to vertical correction is equal to the travel time between transmitting
amplifier for use. and receiving transducers with zero thickness of concrete
between the two. Measure the travel time directly by
7. Precautions
pressing the two transducers together with the same
7.1 Safety Precautions.-Caution:This procedure pressure used in the actual measurement, and measure the
time on the cathode-ray tube.
includes the use of high-voltage equipment. It is the
responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety
NOTE 9.-For transducers with a distended rubber diaphragm
practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory and oil-filled housing, a ring of sheet cork attached to rim of
limitations prior to use. each transducer will enable transducers to be employed in a more
7.2 Technical Precautions: uniform manner. The transducer should be pressed against the
7.2.1 Where pulse velocity measurements will surface with which it is in contact until ring rests against that
encounter materials with higher pulse velocities than the surface throughout its circumference. The cork ring, usually about
concrete, necessary precautions must be taken to ',1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, should not materially decrease contact
incorporate any effect on readings. area of diaphragm on concrete. If necessary, additional oil may
7.2.2 Caution must be used with regard to the average be injected into housing to force diaphragm to distend beyond
ring.
aggregate size of the concrete. The travel distance of the
pulse through the concrete shall be at least 10 times the 10.2 Determination of Travel Time in Concrete.-Press
average aggregate size, and the wave length shall be at faces of transducers against faces of concrete after
least 3 times the average aggregate size. Wave length is establishing contact through a coupling medium. Wetting
the wave velocity in the concrete divided by natural response
concrete with water, oil, or other viscous materials may
frequencyof transducers.
be used to exclude entrapped air from between concrete
8. Calibration surfaces of transducer and surface of concrete. Measure
length of shortest direct path between centers of
8.1 Determination of Calibration Correction.-Where transducer's faces and the time of travel on the cathode-
time intervals are measured with a dial, check accuracy ray tube by aligning strobe marker pulse opposite received
of dial measurement against a calibration circuit. Any wave front and reading calibrated dial, or by counting
difference between dial reading and calibration circuit number of cycles of timing wave between transmitted and
indication is the calibration correction, which must be received pulses.
included in determination of travel time, section 10.2. Check 10.2.1 In field applications where effective beam
the calibration over a range including both the zero width of transducers is wide, they need not be pointing
correction reading (sec. 10.1) and the received pulse reading. at each other. Transmission times can be measured across
corners of structures or along one face, although in the
9. Conditioning latter case the maximum range is reduced. For laboratory
specimens, this may not be the case and reference should
9.1 Moisture content of the concrete can affect the be made to ASTM D 2845.
measured pulse velocity. Therefore, in certain circumstan- 10.2.2 For greatest accuracy in time measurement,
ces, it may be advantageous to the testing program to increase amplifier gain until wave front of received signal
evaluate effect of water on pulse velocity. However, such is as nearly vertical as possible to provide best delineation
evaluations are usually limited to laboratory investigations. of received signal. The error due to rounding off the received
9.2 Pulse velocities may be determined on the velocity wave is then minimized. The use of the sweep expansion
test specimen for concrete in the oven-dry state (0 percent circuit will result in an increase in the accuracy of
saturation), in a saturated condition (100 percent measurement under most conditions of measurement.
saturation), or in any intermediate state. If pulse velocities 10.2.3 Where pulse velocity measurements on large
are to be determined with the concrete in the same moisture structures are required, long interconnecting low capacity,
condition as received or as exists underground, care must shielded, coaxial type cables are to be used.
be exercised during the preparation procedure so that
moisture content does not change. In this case, it is 11. Calculations
suggested that both the sample and test specimen be stored
m moisture-proof bags or coated with wax, and that dry 11.1 Calculatethe pulse velocity as follows:
surface-preparation procedures be employed. If results are
desired for specimens in oven-dried condition, oven V S1
-- $1
temperature shall not exceed 150 F (66 C). The specimen Dc T Dc (Sp - De) (1)
shall remain submerged in water up to the time of testing
when results are desired for the saturated state. where:
531
USBR 4597
K = a constant, and
D.2 A typical calculation form is shown on figure 2. V, E, and p = as defined in equation (2).
As defined in ASTM C 597, the pulse velocity is related to 13.1 The precision and bias for this procedure are not
the physical properties of a solid by: currently known.
532
->,
E
J
- --lV E
E G
s - , , . , ,
.=. ,-......
_-
. dtS
0-
".'. 01 t"U
s
---.,o . .
- .% ID o
o
x
8
-
. I
0
._
ct.
"' x
o.- ' % ,.
2
[]
I-1.__.
<
.
-.-.
._ .
8Z
.
533
USBR 4597
,.. ,,
i ,,.
{,
%-
e
e
"E
&
b b b
4
kl ka
o
k
k :$ \
% #
k .tt
t
qa
'kl-- k.9
x,
k
k
-
N- ",O
,.
534
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4617-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4617; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 617-84.
535
USBR 4617
5. Cappiing Materialls
m,::dded s lli i :/-121 ell _; ]l]a?' ]:)(' (; I ppi ,it 21 t i i Ill ]l] -,qi ;]l : c[ :1 n I ) Id i]g
.c: iicu/tr hale w I::, i<h f, wl s recess The tw., sec ti,::,ns are c us|,: ,,m, :i ly
'lZl c:F.pmg rI],Jl:{.l"il]
,12)5 ":;li]:' ,: 0il]iii)[711] ,;) strength
tastenU >:geflwr with nq, achi:n.e >crews ] iis a],so :dvarmge..mJs
='equiremm:ats, Jit shah g]l'llt I:'C' used. ucl s{:l!c'FIig[tl-i teStS; (:l,
::. hr,.,e uF, pc:r '.,u:rLc <:,.f ]ow;,:.z pilate cause hardened A R.,:)ckv,.dl
h/rdlnes>. ,:ff '*8; HI RC iis sugges|:e:d as de.i:ined in ASTM E lg.
,c:.onsecuriive deter]:nislatii,:,:ns CC,]i,:>';It] J'[]' SF:,.e,.itic,fi,s.ns
4.2.2 A/.,m'meog Dev/ce.s-Su.iable algnmen r eql ireme:ls
devices sch as guide, bars or bu41's-eye levelis sha]l be: Ul:sed 5.2.1 [iJ!li-S'r.re?/'l.Q'4e,0';, (*')'31!]l.%d,r*] Pk,',wc,r Urmdu]e>
in ,olnjuncion wid:-i capping pllates ,, ensure d-at r,c,, single ated=. gieat I;ligh-scrc'ng{h. g'.!,tiiS'L]|]l] pilaster illl;1.}, be I[lSe:,:i
cap will depa'r t:>,:rn perpend.icuHarity ::,. the axis ::, a 2-inch l]]lI]]] I C:Llt2)eS S]-C t'IHI]I'::I ().dc.'<'d,:p an srength
(1{[)l
cylirw]ica] sp.eci:nl, en by :m.,:re han 0.25 , approxhn, aely as ;;peicifi('d under siect[<,ll 12.. v,l,en ..;bjc:.,:vc.4 t,: snme
e.quJvslen{ t:, t 1(i il-lCt] liE] ]2 JiEI(:}1,CS ':i . (5i inn] ii"l 3(1:15 I]TAll) e|-svJrc, n]:rlenI t,:H: s:n]e lie, ltil? ,al thnc as c;:i, ppc,J b];,cit, jll]e:ns.
A ypic:l alii.gnmen device is sh,avce, c,.n t:igare 2. The same The' cti)e's S}]lE1]l be "wiLl] p.r,cedre
*qi: ]l;cl i [*
guide bars are: used. In a.ddid,:m, [c,c:atiOnl ,:14: ecch bar whh capping !/gl i,, l e.r [;/]
res.F, ec: <:, i{s F.LHe mus be su.ch tha n,o. cap wiill be c:,if-
c:e:q,ezed <:,n a ves sF,.echn,e:l by raare thlar ]/]6 inch .:].6 'IQI"I ! i. I,ILII} %I:I.<!II;E]] i i]4:,ll']i:ll rll:,,> :e>i ,,i:,,:1/I11< ,.:11!:! <killed
]TJ ]1" ). pldSEl2'r i:If ]HlliS I:1 lllixr.urcs ,d ]:]u.rcr ;ti'l(] l?.:;ii-tlucl.:] C.'l]ail] :|re.
reel>ins suttnr ]l]]l,i)lq]-s si]]il .lle equip,pel] with aU[ll:l]ll]ll{iC - N(]I'F. 2,.-1< pcrcer't ,,il: IIItiXil'l!j I&'Ll{(I. k')IkSOk!l (Ill] I I:MSt (l'i dry
reFl13eraltll-e c(irll{tD:}IS,:l, arid sit]gt]l be mat:I.e i(l i]:3eta]l |)it liFle:(
plaster:, sh:,ud, I be li[IkIL':l:l 2:) i1[11,:1 :)() l;.<: ,*I IllJt!lil]]lllFli?
w:ith t m,g, teria] rl-14r ]is f,c,.ne'actiive 'la.'ilth m,o, ltecl St:l]H:ur. pe'Ec r,u ges :,.If' i : i,: in N .0<,,: i :, i,, I v ii..l: ,t, .,is n:, i x i, N. u>; u,, I I :i F:" inlic
de:veh::.pr]:lcrl t .: :.i l ce1_t ab[c '5 tu ; i!.t I ;, 1 t(:l i .:.r Y: h., l r;
NCTE 2-C!uuon.: Me:ldr*g pots equipped wid-i, I::,E'IJFIIerLI
hcaing wi:l] eusure H,ga[I]sc ac:c:i.dents dr, ring eheatir]g <4: cc},.:led $22 ,5]')1/1 g" 3h:,rg..i'L P'l:,:prie;;ry ,: ,1: ]: :. l::, ., :, r t: , :,l 7!.,
sulltr 117][xtureSl lilac| surface Wl:eu, usi:n
preps red!
:l l 'II e a ( t] S { e: '4 " ': :l'lr e
Sl.I ]It-l] [-] LllT[a rS I]I 2l'.i /],,e I.Hq,:-] [( ;] ] ]': l"d<' ei !1 [( :' /121 iCe i]
]ile:ling; equipped..
'}<]IS;I bLli]i:JUp,
]*()l S ' :l LI I=:} E=Ie'SI54tlIiF- I I:IIII{ClF
Lqlti] ttlle[r ,:,:l, tTIptress:i:vc stre.ll;tl is. 1 :leas :; [li?;h! ;],'; L]-]e
tnardleaed surts.ce cus: ,:l.n St:lk",s.e:queal.{ rehieadiIxg l]ay be svoi.,J, ed
by LlSe I::, I I:lllelzl] l(i,,:!l WhiC]] C(lig]{;],c[5, b(ll[,kll]:] ijl [[,l:)t g!Ddl I:l,,lajccI5 c,mpressive strength ,:( ll-lU ,:.,:ulcre.te be.Jig es.ed
}1 2 .2. 1 ]L)'e'geI"m/,.' 1171:lll'7 iI: ill {[ ;: Jl:? 'f el-s: / ' ' h;.(.l' . '[]fJ':!-
ab{liVe Surf;l.: II}t (uid sulfur mix aS it: C*C, lS The riodl s.h<,.LiRd
be r.)E SLliidCll] size ,,x ,cardu'c{ C[]ll;)l]g;] I*],{:a{ t:(} the Et:Ip { II } IIII,E:I P[eF,,.HTe te,.;t SF:,ecimer,>q IX!IS;(: F:,llate
IlSiiI,g OIIt3,E' ]-I,I],1i,::t ;I/C]
4 ziix, g a>;>und rod {irst.. and thus, preve** ,Jcxre]h:l'plnenI ,::i[ pr(.SSllE@ I:::j:g,, 1:;' Ci:l.Eif:,:rllr, inlg :C,LCIIJiI'cI:IIC']IltS l::,{: []SI]I,.]1 I()'!): ] Iql Id
tl 'I
A ]ge :lnet;d bdle .cn] k:,e: substh:ued tl:}r rl:}d, a men] c,ver :.I;e: .: :l,:c ,:,:, c<:,:llh arrni]nl.g il:l F:.h<ipi!e to
des jg,1] ,,,]l]l,i )'gd [-] (J,]; ]{J g:LllTO j. l:!i,r i i 1!:, 'k i Y i, i:i>; I"LI I"1>, ( :it 1 ]::IfI:C117LE't]S
qi(]-IE =.-Sil, l/f uil
t:,: a terr|pc,:l{U:r{-,::}(:iS ,,:I, :' I:;' !2(i rx,, !,l;i c(:i li:glrl:y
]-II:l{inig; F:III.{N S]]ll)[]lli I k :IIc: use( m-],c[er an mdl/UHst
h.,<xSI Hel/ug ,:,vet a, .,@ea kUl,e is dlangerc,s becau, sc laSll ('()IL] 5;LIr]:4CtJi l:[]ilt W i]] /)c i I: !: O:H ][hLI V[EtI StlI[I[UI IliH'i]l"
F,.,:>intt: .o su]lur is; ab.llt q@0 F (227 '1'.i:), lnd11171ixure 1i'1 ignite wiflnl miin, erd oiil, and as,,C:l;rl, lqc i:,:;llr nlhingp:, Bring
due to..,)ve:r]l:leatiing S;houd mixture st;tt t:l. k,.m, ,:over c, shrill[IF
(]IIL] i!lame The p,:< S;]*,.iLlld be recharged res.h mnteria]l ;t:ter 'lllit
tempera till re ,; f i:nol ten- s Ul ] [u :r n;],{ ,,ta t i :n p,:H w i!tii [,l range
c, 2:<:!;ii <,, 2::10 ;F {129 ,: !i I; o(:)siir d],=l,,,uglll:i,;nd
{lan:-e ]'las beiellTl e x:tilruguJe;hecl
42:.* C;L,crere 3 ' I)r (;:'L/F'IIL]'C'I" --If ends o ]raDtellOt device, qlUliCl<]y :ii]] t<}] <,t tlc El]-c L-oIr/I-,;/lt]]II,(:lIl>i L:l]tii]
,:ik]iinders arc n:,. pllarar ,. a d<gre'e ha: tisick:sess ,;3,f .a]> I]] (I ] r C r "X I: Ill 1 I e |" i; i ! ]7 Q: k[ ,E }:1 U ,N I: ,, :1 t "1 i: : I] 5 li I i, I g ]1 , :, :1 e I'I],: , ',u u t t i ,Li e
will rs,::,m ex<eed S/'](i; Jnl(h (7'!)4 al]i]:l}, {or alJy g:,,il]igi,:)I-l, time i,:r :llzxilnu:l , s],rii:lt,;,tu: ,:!,Le t,[:, ,c,,::,l,iin,,, and
cyliinders iYiiHst t)e g/,::und ,::r sawe,d. rc]!i:ll u,,EIh h,,::,e
soliidiifi:i,:,n c,, :,,(cu,:all,;,,u: IS :r,,ii:,,,,,
USBR 4617
NOTES
Upper surface of capping plate shall
" @ not depart from plane by more then
0.002" inch in eny 6-inch dimension.
Channel shall be so positioned that
cylinder will be in center of forming
plate opening.
Chamfer 10
1'
8 w! t! Sect. AA
ij6"x12 Cylinder
-
90o+0 I
i ./'1 I
"
I
I
I 120 Bol ts
j ,
90O+o/xt I
NIl
" yl
with molten material (note 7). After solidification is may occur no matter how much care is exercised, and it therefore
complete, remove cubes from mold without breaking off is advisable to inspect interior of tested sulfur moi:tar cubes for
knob formed by the fillinghole in cover plate. Remove homogeneity whenever strength values obtained are significantly
oil, sharp edges, and fins from cubes and check planeness lower than anticipated.
of bearing surfaces in manner described in note 5 of USBR
5.3 Hardened Specimens (Air-Dried).-Hardened
4109. After storage at room temperature, test cubes in specimens which must be tested in an air-dry condition,
compression at intervals of 30 minutes to 2 hours following or must be soaked for 20 to 28 hours before testing, may
procedure described in section 11.6.3 of USBR 4109, and
b capped with sulfur mortar conforming to requirements
calculate compressive Strengthin pound force per square
of section 5.2.2.
inch (megapascals).
6. Precautions
NOTE 6.-If desired, a plane phenol formaldehyde (bakelite)
plate of 1/8-inch (3-mm) thickness, provided with three 6.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous
appropriately spaced filling holes, may be inserted between cover materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim
plate and mold to slow rate of cooling of test specimens. to address all safety problems associated with its use. It
is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish
NOTE 7.-The second filling helps prevent formation of a large appropriate safety and health practices and determine
void or shrinkage pipe in body of cube. However, such defects applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use,
537
USBR 4617
I!
ooo ,o
0 0 0
Dia.
0
Plan View
I inch = 25.4mm -inch diamei-er holes,
I [
Front View =-"
COVER PLATE
Figure 3. - Cover plate for 2-inch or 50-millimeter cube mold used when fabricating cubes of capping
materials. From ASTM C 617, volume 04.02, 1984.
6.2 Safety clothing shall be worn when capping with 7.3.2 High-Strength Gypsum Plaster.-Compliance
sulfur mortar materials: safety glasses and full face shield, with strength requirements shall be performed in
leather gloves with gauntlets, plastic or rubber apron, and accordance with section 5.2.1 upon receipt of each new
safety shoes. lot of capping material, and at intervals not exceeding 3
6.3 Specific precautions with sulfur melting pots are months as outlined under section 5.2.
given in notes 2 and 3 of section 4.2.3 and note 10 of 7.3.3 Sulfur Mortar.-Compliance with strength
section 9.2.3. requirements shall be performed in accordance with
sections 5.2.2 and 5.2.2.1 upon receipt of each new lot
7. Calibration or Standardization of capping material, and at intervals not exceeding 3 months
as outlined under section 5.2.
7.1 Capping Devices: 7.4 Capped Specimens.-For each day's capping
7.1.1 Dimensions of plates and surface planarity operation, planeness of caps on at least three specimens
shall be checked periodically for compliance with section representing start, middle, and end of run shall be checked
4.2.1. using a straightedge and feeler gauge, making a minimum
7.1.2 The alignment devices shall be checked of three measurements on different diameters to ensure
periodically for perpendicularity both to axis of a cylindrical surfaces of caps do not depart from being plane by more
specimen and to surface of capping plate for compliance than 0.002 inch (0.05 mm).
with section 4.2.2.
7.2 Miscellaneous Equipment: 8. Conditioning
7.2.1 Straightedge.-Check periodically with a known
flat surface (lower platen of a testing machine suggested). 8.1 Fresh Molded Specimens:
7.2.2 Feeler Gauge.-Accept certificate of inspection 8.1.1 Before Capping.-Do not apply neat paste to
by manufacturer. exposed end until concrete has ceased settling in molds,
7.2.3 Thermometer.-Accept certificate of inspection generally from 2 to 4 hours after molding.
by manufacturer. Check against at least one other 8.1.2 After Capping.-Cover capping plate and mold
thermometer. with damp burlap and a polyethylene sheet to prevent
7.3 Capping Materials: drying for a time as suggested in section 9.1.
7.3.1 Portland Cement.-Conformance with ASTM 8.1.3 Before Testing.-Store in moist condition for
C 150 shall be assured by a review of mill test for each 6 days with Type I neat cement or for 2 days with Type
shipment received. III neat cement as outlined under note 8 of section 9.1.
538
USBR 4617
8.2 HardenedConcrete Specimens (Moist-Cured): 8.5 Capping Device.-The capping plate or device
8.2.1 High-Strength Gypsum Plaster: should be oiled and warmed before use, as discussed under
8.2.1.1 Before Capping.-No furtherconditioning section 9.2.3.
required.
8.2.1.2 After Capping.-Moist-cured specimens 9. Procedures
shall be maintained in a moist condition between
completion of capping and time of testing by returning 9.1 Freshly MoldedCylinders.-Use only neat portland
them to moist storage or wrapping with a double layer cement pastes (note 8) to cap freshly molded cylinders.
of wet burlap. Specimens with gypsum plaster caps shall Make caps as thin as practicable. Do not apply paste to
not be immersed in water and shall not be stored in a exposed end until concrete has ceased settling in molds,
moist room for more than 4 hours. If stored in a moist generallyfrom 2 to 4 hoursafter molding.Duringmolding
room, gypsum plaster caps shall be protected against water of cylinder, strikeoffupperend even withor slightlybelow
dripping on their surfaces. the plane of the mold's rim. Mix neat paste to a stiff
8.2.2 SulfurMortar: consistency2 to 4 hours before using to allow paste to
8.2.2.1 Before Capping.-Theends of moist-cured go through period of initial shrinkage. The strength of
specimensshall be dryenoughat time of cappingto comply the paste will depend on the consistency,water-cement
with directionsas outlinedunder section 9.2.3. The ends ratio, curing, and brand and type of cement. For Type I
of the specimen shall not be oiled prior to application and Type II cementpastes,optimumconsistencyis generally
of cap. Heat sulfur mortaras outlinedunder section9.2.3. producedat a water-cementratio of 0.32 to 0.36 by mass.
8.2.2.2 After Capping.-Moist-cured specimens For Type III cement, the water-cement ratio should
shall-be maintained in a moist condition between generally be between 0.35 and 0.39 by mass. The paste
completionof capping and time of testing by returning will stiffen during the 2- to 4-hour waiting period and
them to moist storage or wrapping with a double layer the use of retempering water is not recommended.
of wet burlap. However, if retempering water is used, the amountshould
8.3 HardenedConcreteSpecimens (Air-Dried): not increase the water-cement ratio by more than 0.05
8.3.1 No conditioningrequired if specimens are to by mass. Remove free water and laitance from tOp of
be tested in an air-drycondition. specimen immediatelybeforecapping.Form cap by placing
8.3.2 If specimens are to be tested in a moist a conical mound of paste on specimen and then gently
condition,they must be soaked from 20 to 28 hoursbefore pressinga freshlyoiledcappingplate on the conicalmound
testing, as cited in section5.3. until plate contacts rim of mold. A very slight twisting
8.4 CappingMaterial: motion may be required to remove excess paste and
8.4.1 Neat Cement Paste.-Mix neat cement paste minimize air voids in the paste. The capping plate must
to a stiff consistency2 or 4 hours before paste is to be not rock during this operation. Carefully cover capping
used, as outlinedunder section9.1. plate and mold with a double layer of damp burlap and
8.4.2 High-StrengthGypsumPlaster: a polyethylenesheet tO preventdrying.Removal of capping
8.4.2.1 Mix high-strength gypsum plaster for plate after hardeningmay be accomplishedby tapping edge
capping using same percentage of mixing water used in with a rawhide hammer in a directionparallel to plane
qualificationtest describedin section 5.2.1. of cap.
8.4.2.2 The gypsum plaster cubes shall be
subjected to same environmentfor same length of time NOFE 8.-Type I neat cement caps generally require at least
as gypsum plaster capped specimens, as outlined under 6 days to develop acceptable strength,and Type III caps at least
section 5.2.1. 2 days. Dry concrete specimens will absorb water from freshly
8.4.3 Sulfur Mortar: mixed neat cement paste and produce unsatisfactorycaps. Neat
cementpaste caps willshrinkand crack on dryingand; therefore,
8.4.3.1 Fresh sulfur mortar must be dry when
shouldbe used only for specimens which are to be moist cured
placed in pot as dampnessmay cause foaming,as discussed continuouslyuntiltime of testing.
under section9.2.3.
8.4.3.2 Keep water away from molten sulfur 9.2 HardenedConcreteSpecimens:
mortarbecause of the tendency to foam, as discussedunder 9.2.1 GeneraL-Cap, saw, or grindends of hardened
section9.2.3. cylinders that are not plane within0.002 inch (0.05 mm)
8.4.3.3 Heat to about 265 F (129 C), as outlined to meet that tolerance. Caps should be about 1/8 inch
under section 5.2.2.1. (3 mm) thick, and in no instance shall any part of a cap
8.4.3.4 Proprietaryor laboratoryprepared sulfur be more than 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) thick. If either or both
mortars must be allowed to harden, as outlined under ends of a specimen have coatings or deposits of oily or
section 5.2.2. waxy materials that would interfere with bond of cap,
8.4.3.5 After initial filling of cube mold with remove such coatings or deposits. If necessary, ends of
molten sulfur (5.2.2.1) to determine adequacy of sulfur a specimen may be slightly roughened with a steel file
mortar caps (5.2.2), allow sufficient time for maximum or wire brush to produce proper adhesionof cap. If desired,
shrinkage(about 15 rain) before final filling.Store at room capping plates may be coated with a thin layer of mineral
temperature for 30 minutes to 2 hours before starting oil or grease to prevent capping material from adhering
compressiontesting. to surface of plate. Before testing cylinder, cap should be
539
USBR 4617
tested for air pockets by tapping it lightly with handle materials such as paraffin or oil. The gas is colorless and has
of a putty knife or other suitable instrument. A cap that the notoriously bad odor of rotten eggs; however, this odor should
sounds hollow at any point should be removed and replaced. not be relied upon as a warning sign because the sensitivity to
Solid caps are easily obtained when capping surface is dry the odor disappears rapidly on exposure. High concentrations
and clean, mixture is at right temperature, and cylinder of this gas are lethal, and less concentrated dosages may produce
is placed immediately in melted mixture on capping plate. nausea, stomach distress, dizziness, headache, or irritation of the
eyes. For these and other reasons, it is desirable that melting
9.2.2 Capping With High-Strength Gypsum Plas-
pot be located under a hood or near an exhaust fan and that
ter.-Mix high-strength plaster for capping by using same the capping area be well ventilated.
percentage of mixing water used for qualification test
described in 5.2.1.
10. Calculations
9.2.3 Capping With Sulfur Mortar.-Prepare the
sulfur mortar by heating to about 265 F (129 C), as
periodically determined by an all-metal thermometer 10.1 Sample calculations for determining the planeness
inserted near center of mass. Empty pot and recharge with of ends of hardened cylinders and the planeness of capped
fresh material at frequent enough intervals to ensure oldest compression specimens are shown on figure 4.
material in pot has not been used more than five times 10.2 Calculations for compressive strength of gypsum'
(note 9). Fresh sulfur mortar must be dry when placed plaster cubes to determine competency for capping material
in pot as dampness may cause foaming. Keep water away are discussed in ASTM C 472.
from molten sulfur mortar for same reason. The capping 10.3 Calculations for compressive strength of sulfur
plate or device should be warmed slightly before use to mortar cubes to determine competency for capping material
slow rate of hardening and permit production of thin caps. are shown on figures 2 and 3 of USBR 4109.
Oil capping plate lightly and stir molten sulfur mortar
immediately prior to pouring each cap. The ends of moist- 11. Report
cured specimens shall be dry enough at time of capping
to preclude formation of steam or foam pockets larger
than 1/4 inch (6 ram) in diameter under or in cap. To 11.1 No report is necessary covering this test
ensure that the cap shall be bonded to surface of specimen, procedure.
end of specimen shall not be oiled prior to application 11.2 If a compressive strength exceeds anticipated
of cap. strength or the strength of the capping material, this fact
should be noted on the compressive strength report on
NOTE 9.-Reuse of material must be restricted to minimize the specimens.
loss of strength and pourability occasioned by contamination of
mortar with oil and miscellaneous debris, and loss of sulfur 12. Precision and Bias
through volatilization.
NOTE 10.-Hyirogen sulfide gas may be produced during 12.1 Due to the nature of this procedure, statements
capping when sulfur mortar is contaminated with organic on precision and bias are not appropriate.
540
USBR4617
Specimen No.
Specimen Identification /4- 7 ?OO-/ NI- 7700-5" ,- 7 700- 7
Inch Millimeter Inch Millimeter Inch Millimeter
TOP
BOTTOM
Remarks:
d- ,y /2 -,',o c,4 =, /,'ad'ers
Specimen Identification
TOP
MeasurementNo. 1
MeasurementNo. 2
MeasurementNo. 3
BOTTOM
Measurement No. 1
Measurement No. 2
Measurement No. 3
Remarks:
54l
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4642-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4642; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 642-82.
542
USBR 4642
a towel, and determine mass. Designate the final surface X = 62.4 for inch-pound units, or 1000 for SI-metric
dry determination after immersion as mass B. units;
8.3 Saturated Mass After Boiling.-Place specimen, pl = dry bulkdensity;
processedin accordance with 8.2, in a suitable receptacle, p2 = bulk density after immersion;
cover with tapwater, and boil for 5 hours. Allowspecimen pa = bulk density after immersion and boiling;
to cool by natural loss of heat for not less than 14 hours p4 = apparent density; and
to a finaltemperature of 68 to 77 F (20 to 25 C). Remove Vx = volume of permeable pore space (voids) in
surface moisture with a towel and determine mass. percent.
Designatethe soaked, boiled, surface-driedmass as mass E.
8.4 Immersed Mass.-Suspend the specimen, after Units for 01, 02, Oa, and 04 are pound mass per cubic
foot (kilograms per cubic meter).
immersionand boiling, by a wire and determine mass in
9.2 Example:
water. Designateas mass E
9.2.1 Assume a sample having the following char-
9. Calculations acteristics:
(1) True mass of solid part of specimen equal to
9.1 By using the massesdetermined in section 8, make 2.20 Ibm (1000 g);
the following calculations: (2) Total volume of specimen including solids,
permeable voids, and impermeable voids equal to 36.6 in 3
B-A (600 cm3);
AB1 -- A (100) (1) (3) Absolute density of solid part of specimen equal
to 124.9 lbm/ft 3 (2000 kg/m 3) or a specific gravity of 2.0;
E-A and
AB2 -- A (100) (2) (4) Void space in specimen contains initially only air
(no water).
A 9.2.2 Then, it follows that there are 30.5 in3
Pl -- E- F (X) (3) (500 cm 3) of solids and 6.1 in 3 (100 cm 3) of voids making
up specimen, and "true" void content is
B
p2 -- E-F (X) (4) 6.1
36.6 (100) = 16.67 percent.
E
Ps -- E-F (X) (5) 9.2.3 Assume that on immersion, 90 mL of water
is absorbed, and after immersion and boiling, 95 mL of
water is absorbed.
A
p4 -- (X) (6) 9.2.4 Based on assumptions in 9.2.1 and 9.2.3, data
A-F that would be developed from procedures of section 8 would
be:
p4 - pl (1) Oven-dry sample mass A equals 2.20 Ibm (1000 g).
V, -- (100), or (7)
p4 (2) Saturated-surface-dry mass of sample in air after
immersion, mass B equals 2.40 Ibm (1090 g).
E-A
(3) Saturated-surface-dry mass of sample in air after
-- E- F (100) immersion and boiling, mass E equals 2.41 Ibm (1095 g).
where: (4) Mass of sample in water after immersion and
boiling, mass Fequals 1.09 Ibm (495 g) (note 1).
ABt = absorption after immersion (percent),
AB2 = absorption after immersion and boiling NOTE 1.-Because the loss of mass in water is equal to the
(percent), mass of displaced water and volume of specimen is 36.6 in
A= mass of oven-dried sample in air, in pound mass (600 cm3), mass F of specimen in water after immersion and
boiling is:
(grams);
B= mass of saturated-surface-dry sample in air after 36.6in3 \
F = 2.41 Ibm - -- (62.41bm/ft0
immersion, in pound mass (grams); 1728 in3/fO]
C= mass of sample in water after immersion, in
= 2.41 - 1.32 = 1.09 Ibm (495 g)
pound mass (grams) not part of equations;
D= mass of sample at time of sampling, in pound 9.2.5 Using the data given in 9.2.4, the calculations
mass (grams) not part of equations; of section 9.1 may be performed (note 2):
E= mass of saturated-surface-dry sample in air after
immersion and boiling, in pound mass B -A 2.40 - 2.20
(grams); ABx -- (100) -- (100)
A 2.20
F = mass of sample in water after immersion and
boiling, in pound mass (grams); = 9.1 percent
543
USBR 4642
E-A 2.41 - 2.20 a percentage of voids of 15.93 rather than 16.67. Depending
AB2 -- A (100) -- 2.20 (100) on pore size distribution, pore entry radii of concrete, and on
purposes for which test results are desired, this procedure may
be adequate or may be insufficiently rigorous. If it is desired
= 9.5 percent
to fill more of the pores than will be filled by immersion and
A 2.20 boiling, various techniques involving the use of vacuum treatment
,ol m E-F (62.4) -- 2.41 - 1.09 (62.4) = 104.0 or increased pressures may be used. If a rigorous measure of
total pore space is desired, it can only be obtained by determining
absolute density by first reducing sample to discrete particles,
B 2.40
each of which is sufficiently small so that no impermeable pore
Io2 -- E-F (62.4) -- 2.41 - 1.09 (62.4) = 113.5
space can exist within any of the particles, minus No. 200
(-75-m) sieve. If absolute density was determined by vacuum
E 2.41 treatment or increased pressures in accordance with ASTM D
pa -- E-F (62.4) -- 2.41 - 1.09 (62.4) = 113.9 854 using the minus No. 200 material, and designated as ps,
and V2 is volume of total pore space (voids), then:
A 2.20
p4 -- A-F(62"4) -- 2.20-1.09 (62.4) = 123.7
V2 = (i00) -- 124.9- 104.0 (100)
0 124.9
V1 = (100) -- 123.7-104.0 (100)
p4 123.7
---- 16.73 percent
= 15.93 percent
9.2.6 Figure 1 shows a typical calculation form.
NOTE 2.-This procedure does not involve a determination
of absolute density. Therefore, such pore space as may be present
10. Report
in specimen that is not emptied during specified drying or is
not filled with water during specified immersion and boiling,
or both, is considered "impermeable" and is not differentiated 10.1 Report absorption and voids in percent, and
from solid portion of specimen for the calculations, especially density in pound mass per cubic foot or kilograms per
those for percent voids. In the example presented, it was asssumed cubic meter. No typical reporting form has been devised
that absolUte density of solid portion of specimen was for this procedure.
124.9 lbm/ft 3 (2000 kg/m3), total void space was 16.67 percent,
and impermeable void space was 0.30 in 3 (5 cm3). The operations,
if performed according to section 8, and calculations, if performed
11. Precision and Bias
according to section 9, have the effect of assuming that there
are 5.80 in (95 cm0 of pore space and 30.82 in (505 cm)
of solids. This would indicate that solid material has an apparent 11.1 Currently, there are insufficient data available to
density of 123.6 lbm/fO (1980 kg/m) rather than the absolute justify providing precision and bias statements for this
density of 124.9 lbm/ft (2000 kg/m3), and that specimen has procedure.
544
USBR 4642
1
v q.
"t"
1 - -I"
.o
-I-
o 8
i g
d II
z
545
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4666-92
PROCEDURE FOR
RESISTANCE OF CONCRETE
TO RAPID FREEZING AND THAWING
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4666; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 666-84.
2. Applicable Documents 3.1 Concrete cylinders and cores are placed in water
in an apparatus that changes temperature at center of
2.1 USBR Procedures: specimen from 10 to 70 F (-12.2 to 21.1 C) at the rate
4029 Density and Voids in Aggregate of 50 times per week. Deterioration of concrete is evaluated
4042 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed by periodically measuring changes in mass and by visual
Beams or Cubes of Concrete and Shotcrete inspection.
4075 Sampling Aggregates
4127 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse 4. Significance and Use
Aggregate
4128 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate 4.1 As noted in section 1, this procedure is intended
4138 Density, Yield, Clean Separation, and Air Content for the determination of the effects of variations in the
(Gravimetric) of Concrete properties and conditioning of concrete on the resistance
4143 Slump of Concrete to freezing and thawing cycles specified. Specific
4172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete applications include specified use in ASTM C 494, USBR
4183 Sampling and Acceptance of Hydraulic Cement 4233, and the ranking of coarse aggregatesas to their effect
4192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in on concrete freeze-thaw durability, especially where
Laboratory soundness of aggregateis questionable.
4233 Testing Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 4.2 It is assumed that this procedure will have no
4311 Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans significantly damaging effects on frost-resistant concrete,
for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement which may be defined as: (1) any concrete not critically
Concrete saturated with water; that is, not sufficiently saturated to
4457 Microscopical Determination of Air-Void Content be damaged by freezing, and (2) concrete made with frost-
and Parameters of Air-Void System in Hardened Concrete resistant aggregatesand having an adequateair-void system
2.1 ASTM Standards: that has achieved the appropriate maturity necessary to
C 125 Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Concrete prevent critical saturation by water under common
and Concrete Aggregates t,2 conditions.
C 150 Standard Specifications for Portland Cement 1,3 4.3 If, as a result of performance tests described in
this procedure, the concrete is found to be relatively
z Annual Book ofASTMStandards, vol. 04.02. unaffected, it can be assumedthat concrete was either not
2 Annual Book ofASTM Standards, vol. 04.03. critically saturated or was made with "sound" aggregates,
3 Annual Book ofASTM Standards,vol. 04.01. a proper air-void system, and allowed to mature properly.
546
USBR 4666
4.4 This procedure is most commonl); used to evaluate Brine in the warm fluid tank is warmed to 70 F (21.1 C)
aggregates.All aggregatesnot previously used should be by electric resistance heaters. The refrigerated brine is
tested to determine their suitability as a constituent of pumped through one specimen cabinet and returned to
the concrete. While physical properties, petrographic reservoir by gravity through an overflow weir in cabinet.
examination, and sodium or magnesium sulfate tests Simultaneously, warm brine is circulated in a similar
indicate the soundness of aggregates,freezing and thawing manner through the other cabinet. At 1.5-hour intervals,
tests indicate the performance of the aggregatewhen used pumps are stopped, brine is drained from specimen
in concrete. Wherever possible, laboratory results of cabinets, fluid paths are interchanged, and pumps are
acceleratedfreezing and thawing should be correlated with restarted. The thawed specimens are then frozen while
actual field data to establish standards of quality for the frozen specimens are thawed. Fully automaticoperation
acceptancetesting. is effected by a clock-driven cam which actuates
microswitches that, in turn, operate centrifugal pump and
5. Terminology air-cylinder-operated plug-type valves through a system
of relays and solenoid air valves. An electrically operated
5.1 Terms used in this procedure are as defined in cycle counter is used to shut down the apparatus after
ASTM C 125. a given number of cycles. Overflow protection in specimen
6. Interferences cabinets is obtained by electrodes maintined above the
normal brine level. Brine temperatures are thermostatically
6.1 Small differences in air and moisture contents at controlled, and a continuous record of brine and specimen
time of test dan have a major effect on results. Mixture temperatures is obtained. Corrosion in system is reduced
proportions and curing conditions must be carefully by periodic additions of sodium chromate and caustic soda
controlled. to the brine. A cathodic protection has also been devised
to help minimize this inherent corrosion. With this equip-
7. Apparatus ment in 24-hour operation, it is possible to obtain 50 cycles
of accelerated freezing and thawing weekly, with ample
7.1 Freezingand Thawing Apparatus: time for examining specimens whenever necessary. An
7.1.1 The freezing and thawing apparatus shall electrically operated monorail hoist is provided to facilitate
consist of a suitable chamber or chambers where specimens handling of specimens.
may be subjected to the specified freezing and thawing 7.2 Temperature-Measuring Equipment.-This equip-
cycle, along with the necessary refrigerating and heating ment consistsof thermometers, resistance thermometers,
equipment and controls to produce continuously and or thermocouples capable of measuring temperature at
automatically reproducible cycles within specified variouspointswithinthe specimenchamberand at centers
temperature requirements. In the event that equipment of controlspecimensto within+2 F (+1.1 C).
does not operate automatically, provision shall be made 7.3 Scales.-The scales shall have a capacity about 50
for either continuous manual operation on a 24-hour basis percent greater than mass of specimens and accurate to
or for storage of all specimens in a frozen condition when at least 0.01 lbm (4.5 g) withinthe range of +10 percent
equipment is not in operation. of specimen mass.
7.1.2 The apparatus shall be so arranged that, except 7.4 Tempering Tank.-The tempering tank shall have
for necessary supports, each specimen is completely suitableprovisionsfor maintainingtest specimensin water
surrounded by about 1/16 inch (2 ram) of water in a rubber untiltheir mass is determined.
container at all times while specimen is being subjected
to freezing and thawing cycles. 8. Freezing and Thawing Cycle
7.1.3 Temperature of heat-exchanging medium shall
be uniform within 6 F (3.3 C) throughout specimen 8.1 The nominal freezing and thawing cycle for this
cabinet when measured at any given time at any point procedure shall consist of alternately lowering temperature
on surface of any specimen container, except during of specimens from 70 to 10 F (21.1 to -12.2 C), and
transition between freezing and thawing and vice versa. raising temperature from 10 to 70 F (-12.2 to 21.1 C)
7.1.4 The automatic freezing and thawing apparatus in not less than 1.5 hours nor more than 3 hours. A
used in the Bureau's Denver Office laboratory is illustrated minimum of 25 percent of the time shall be used for
on figure 1. This apparatus consists of two specimen thawing. At end of cooling period, temperature at centers
cabinets, cold fluid tank, warm fluid tank, means for of specimens shall be 103 F (-12.2+1.7 C); and at end
refrigerating and heating fluid, and the necessary coils, of heating period, temperature shall be 70+3 F
pumps, valves, and automatic electrical controls to circulate (21.1+1.7 C). The time required for the temperature at
the calcium chloride brine through the system periodically. the center of any single specimen to be reduced from 67
The insulated specimen cabinets (fig. 2) each have a to 13 F (19.4 to -10.6 C) shall be no less than one-
maximum capacity of 3,000 Ibm (1360 kg) of concrete, half the cooling period. The time required for the
which is about 800 specimens of 3- by 6-inch (76- by temperature at the center of any single specimen to be
152-ram) size. The brine in the cold fluid tank is cooled raised from 13 to 67 F (-10.6 to 19.4 C) shall be no
to 10 F (-12.2 C) by an ammonia refrigeration unit. less than one-half the heating period.
547
USBR CI,.()O
: "(
CONTRC =aEL
C*.le tiEl
8.2 The empe.raue cy&le was esabliishe8 tempe> )),'r requireiFnents, f(,r a]] spechqrer]s I iis recc,,m]:ne.rMed that such
::re. me:asurenFent ,::4 spe.chnens th,t }-sad [e:mF:,erau,e ;s.peCilneir, s k]l{ ' [PiEeldl at different [[iTles, and t[]JlI[ LLpprtllpIiatC
n-lmeaSU:'ir*g devices; embedJed ac th, eJ!r ceDzers. T'hi!s. >dj u>m-:ens k:,e ma de e,c, equ ipmenL
<,, i,q
L1 S. B R 4 6611,(:;
Fitlre 2. I.iil:rtCe!,! ;piti/_iin]ell., []td' ]h:[:lllilL J:':l Siulhjeci,'ll :i. L i,liLle!.% I:ll feezing ad Ihawiing H-:,e:ing re[rl,:l'eJ dor e:'i Ua ]ir}
i,,)
USBR 4666
sampled and tested in accordance with USBR 4311 and a 30-minute soaking period in tap water to determine the
shall comply with ASTM C 618 if pozzolan is specifically 30-minute specific gravity and absorption in accordance
requested. The standard freeze-thaw test does not use with USBR 4127 and 4128. This determination allows for
pozzolans. the correction of water requirement and adjusting sand
11.2 Air-Entraining Admixtures.-These admixtures mass. The separated sizes are then recombined by
shall comply with ASTM C 260; however, for the standard determining the mass to 0.01 Ibm (4.5 g) to satisfy the
freeze-thawtest, the admixture shall be a neutralized vinsol conditions of a standard grading as shown in table 1.
resin.
11.3 Aggregates.-Shall be sampled in accordance with Table 1.-Standard grading for freeze-thaw test using 55 percent coarse
USBR 4075, and tested for specific gravity and absorption aggregateand 45 percent fine aggregate.
in accordance with USBR 4127 and 4128. Percent Retained
11.4 Concrete.-Freshly mixed concrete shall be Nominal Sieve Size Fractions Individual Cumulative
sampled in accordance with USBR 4172, and hardened 3/8- to 3/4-inch 9.5 to 19.0 mm 60 60
concrete in accordance with USBR 4042. No. 4 to 3/8-inch 4.75 to 9.5 mm 40 100
11.5 Density and gravimetric air of freshconcrete shall No. 8 2.36 mm 15 15
be determined in accordance with USBR 4138. No. 16 1.18 mm 15 30
11.6 Consistency or slump of fresh concrete shall be No. 30 600 tm 25 55
determined in accordance with USBR 4143. No. 50 300 #m 24 79
11.7 Test Specimens.-Cylinder test specimens shall No. 100 150 m 16 95
normally be 3- by 6-inch (76- by 152-mm) cylinders made Pan 5 100
in accordance with applicable requirements of USBR 4192. FM 2.74
Test specimens may also be cores cut from hardened
concrete. If so, specimens should not be allowed to dry 13.2 The Bureau's practice on aggregate acceptance
to a moisture condition below that of the structure from tests is that, to establish a data base, all aggregatesshould
which cores were obtained. This may be accomplished by be tested under similar conditions:
wrapping cores in plastic or by other suitable means. (1) a standard grading,
11.8 If air-voidcontent of hardened concrete is desired, (2) a laboratory standard Type II cement, and
it shall be determined in accordance with USBR 4457. (3) a 5-percent solution of neutralized vinsol resin
providing a mix with:
12. Calibration and Standardization (a) a W/C (water-cement) ratio of 0.51,
(b) a slump of 3+1 inches (76+25 mm),
12.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- (c) an air content of 6+1 percent for a 3/4-inch
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests (19.0-mm) MSA mix, and
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are (d) a sand content of 45 percent by mass.
covered under that particular procedure or standard directly Based on many years of experience, the Bureau has found
or by reference. that one of the most important physical properties of an
12.2 Assurances that the temperature rises and lowers aggregate,which influences the air content and consistency
in accordance with section 8 will have to be verified by of the concrete mix, is its particle shape, especially of the
chart study and periodic checking with certified sand. Because of the different particle shapes of aggregates
thermometers. from different sources, the water requirement for a concrete
12.3 Assurances that the internal specimen temper- with 3/4-inch (19.0-mm) MSA, 6 percent entrained air,
atures are being achieved can be accomplished by the and a 3-inch (76-mm) slump would vary from about 240
reinstatement of temperature measuring devices as noted to 330 lbm/yd 3 (142 to 196 kg/m3). Variations in the water
in section 8.2. requirement were also noted due to different concrete
mixing temperatures. Because of these two factors, wide
13. Conditioning variations in concrete mixes have occurred, and production
of concrete with uniform slump and air content was difficult
13.1 The samples of aggregate,as received from the to achieve.
field, are the ovendried and scalped samples of the plus The particle shape of sand is reflected in the percentage
3/4-inch (19.0-mm) material, if necessary, and split at the of voids determined from USBR 4029. An empirical
3/8-inch and No. 4 (9.5 and 4.75-mm) material. The sand relationship between the percentage of voids in sand and
fraction is then washed to determine if the minus No. the water and air-entraining admixture requirements for
200 (75-/zm) material is less than 3 percent, which is the the aggregateacceptance mixes is shown on figure 3. To
normal specifications limit for this material in Bureau compensate for the effect of particle shape of the coarse
concrete sand. Determine the percentage of voids in the aggregate,each sample is examined and an allowance made
sand in accordance with USBR 4029, and use the average for the proper selection of one of the five curves shown
of three determinations. The nominal sieve fractions of on figure 3. This selection is based on the percentage of
minus No. 4, No. 4 to 3/8 inch, and 3/8 to 3/4 inch natural to crushed coarse aggregatein the sample. On figure
(-4.75, 4.75 to 9.5, and 9.5 to 19.0 mm) are subjected to 3, curve N4 should be used for the natural well-rounded
55O
USBR 4666
Z 35 --
\
0 36-- \
THE CURVES REPRESENT DIFFERENT
37 --
TYPES OF COARSE AGGREGATE:
0 CURVE PERCENTAGE 41R
38 -- NO. NATURAL CRUSHED C ON TEN T
uJ
C4 0 I00
b- 39-- NIC 3 25 75
Z
w NzC 2 50 50
u
40-- N3C I 75 25
b.I
N4 - I00 0
41 --
I Ibm/yd3= 0.59 kg/m3
42--
43 I , I I I I I , 1 I I , I , I I I ,
235 245 255 265 275 285 295 305 315 325
Figure 3. - Empirical curves showing relationships between percentage of voids in sand and the water and air-entraining admixture
requirements of concrete.
(river-worn) coarse aggregate, and curve C4 for the 100- Bureau has found that the sonic modulus of elasticitj,
percent crushed coarse aggregate. The intermediate curves method has not proven to be as satisfactory as the mass-
(N3C1, N2C2, and N1Cs) should be used for combinations change method.
of these two types of aggregate in 3 to 1, 2 to 2, or 1 to 3 14.2 Immediately after specified curing period,
proportions of natural to crushed coarse aggregate, determine mass of specimens to nearest 0.01 Ibm (4.5 g).
respectively. To minimize the effect of temperature on 14.3 Start the freezing and thawing tests by placing
the materials and the mixing temperature, all of the specimens in the thawing water at beginning of thawing
material (including the aggregate) should be stored at a phase of cycle. Remove specimens from apparatus, in
constant temperature for 24 hours prior to mixing, and thawed condition, at intervals not exceeding 50 freezing
mixed at this same controlled temperature and thawing cycles, determine mass, and then return
13.3 Unless otherwise specified, specimens shall be specimens to apparatus (note 3). Protect specimens against
cured at 73.4+3 F (23.0+1.7 o C) and at 100 percent relative loss of moisture while out of apparatus, and turn specimens
humidity prior to testing. end-for-end when returning them to apparatus. Rinse out
13.4 If a specified curing procedure concludes with specimen container and add clean water. Return specimens
drying, specimens shall be immersed in saturated lime water either to random positions in cabinet or to some
for 72 hours before proceeding with freezing and thawing predetermined rotation scheme that will ensure that each
tests (note 2). specimen that continues under test for any length of time
is subjected to conditions in all parts of freezing apparatus.
NOTE Z-Unless some other age is specified, specimens should Continue testing until each specimen has been subjected
be removed from curing and the freezing and thawing tests started
to 1,000 cycles or until mass loss of specimen reaches 25
when specimens are 28 days' old.
percent, whichever occurs first, unless other limits have
14. Procedure been specified. Whenever a specimen is removed because
of failure, replace it for remainder of test with a dummy
14.1 Break three companion cores or cylinders at 28 specimen. Each time a specimen is tested, record its visual
days' a_ge at the start of the freeze-thaw test. The modulus appearance and make special comment on any apparent
of elasticity may be determined if desired; however, the defects.
551
USBR 4666
NOTE 3.-Current Bureau policy is to remove specimens after 16.1.1 Properties of Concrete Mixture:
100 cycles when good durability is expected. When it is anticipated
that specimens may deteriorate rapidly, they should be tested Type and proportions of cement, fine aggregate, and
at intervals not exceeding 10 cycles when initially subjected to coarse aggregate including maximum size and grading
freezing and thawing. (or designated grading indexes), and ratio of net water
content to cement.
14.4 When sequence of freezing and thawing cycles Type and proportion of any addition or admixture
must be interrupted, store specimens in a frozen condition. used.
14.5 If, due to equipment breakdown or other reasons, Air content of fresh concrete.
it becomes necessary to interrupt the cycles for a prolonged Average compressive strength.
period, store specimens in a frozen condition in such a Average modulus of elasticity.
way as to prevent loss of moisture. Maintain specimens Density of fresh concrete.
in containers and surround them with ice, if possible. If Consistency of fresh concrete.
it is not possible to store specimens in their containers, Air content of hardened concrete.
wrap and seal them in as wet a condition as possible in . Average compressive strength.
a moisturepr0of material to prevent dehydration, and store Average modulus of elasticity.
in a refrigerator or cold room maintained at 10+3 F Report if test specimens are cut from hardened
(-12.21. 7 C). Specimens should not remain in a thawed concrete and, if so, state the size, shape, orientation
condition for more than two cycles; however, a longer of specimens in structure, and any other pertinent
period may be permissible if situation occurs only once information available.
or twice during a complete test.
16.1.2 Mixing, Molding, and Curing Procedures:
552
USBR 4666
ABSOLUTE VOLUME IN CUBIC FOOT, CUBIC YARD, OR CUBIC METER EQUIVALENT AGGREGATE MASS
Total Total SSD Fine Coarse
Air Water Cement Pozzolan Total, Alregate, Aregate, A.regate, A,,gregate,
((m3) fQs (m0 kl_.(kg) lb(l(l(l(l(l(l(l(l(t (kg) 2.(kg)
1.62 -.2/ 2.6/ HA 8, 44t /8. s6 3o7. /.lr3 1691
FM = fineness modulus, CA = coarse aggregate,FA = fine aggregate,AEA = air-entraining admixture,SSD = saturated-surface-dry, and
W/(C + P) = ratio of water to cement plus pozzolan.
The batch ratio is the total ovendry aggregate of 45 Ibm (20.4 kg) plus the water of absorption, divided by the total mass of the SSD aggregate
from the "Absolute Volume" calculations.
The theoretical density is the total mass divided by the total calculated volume of the air-free constituents, both values obtained from the
"Quantities per Cubic Yard or Cubic Meter" calculations.
The batches per volume is the actual density times 27, divided by the total mass, both values obtained from the "Actual Mixing Data" calculations.
The gravimetric air content is the volume of the design batch minus the volume of the air-free batch, divided by the volume of the design batch,
then multiply by 100 to get air content in percent.
553
USBR 4666
-z 7Z 22- S
Z"h
:I-' ,a? Zq-
30
3-J 9' Is- 2
No. of cycles Z 7zz g7
to 25% Loss
Avg. cycles i
"7'
A minus (-) sign indicates an increase in the mass.
AEA = air-entraining admixture, WRA = water-reducing admixture, SSD = saturated-surface-dry, FM = Fineness modulus, and En -- dynamic
modulus of elasticity.
554
USBR 4666
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. MAJOR ITEMS OF VARIATION BETWEEN ASTM C 666-84 AND USBR 4666-90
555
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4671-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4671; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 671-77.
556
USBR 4671
7.2 Constant-Temperature Water Bath.-A refrigerated apparatus,appearsto give the best results with respect to stability,
bath capable of containing the specimens completely sensitivity, and reliability. Multichannel recording of outputs has
immersed, and equipped with control facilitiescapable of been found to be practical and efficient (fig. 1).
maintaining temperature of specimens at 35+2 F
(1.7+1.0 C) before and between test cycles. 7.4 Room or Cabinet.-Required for storing specimens
7.3 Strain-Measuring and Recor&'ng Facilities.-These at desired temperature and relative humidity, with
facilities(note 2) and a supply of strain frames to support provision for constant circulation of air in immediate
specimens in the cooling bath and to provide alignment vicinity of specimens.
for strain-measuring apparatus are required, see figure 1. 7.5 Miscellaneous Equipmem.-Specimen molds and
The strain-measuring apparatus shall have the capability apparatus are specified in the applicable sections of USBR
of measuring strains of 0.00001 inch (0.00025 mm) or 4192.
less.
8. Materials
NOTE 2.-The LVDT (linear variable differential transformer),
with appropriate associated electronic actuating and indicating 8.1 Materials shall be those for which the durability
Transducer ( LVDT
Brass yoke
Sprin
e level
Brass retainin(
strip L LOWE R
"Jnvor" Test
steel rods beom Platinum
thermometer
SIGNAL COMPARER
TO NEATERS
Brass bottom
SIGNAL CONDITION
STRAIN FRAME
MAG. TAPE J [
PRINTOUT ]
557
USBR 4671
information is desired, and conditioned to the moisture The most important variable related to conditioning is
conditions at the in-service location. the degree of saturation of the specimens when tests are
8.2 A supply of kerosene must be available to maintain started. Therefore, the curing and conditioning procedures
the cooling bath at temperatures specified in section 7.1. must be carefully described in terms of the purpose for
which the procedure is being used, and must be closely
9. Precautions followed (see sec. 6).
9.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous ma- 13. Procedure
terials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim to
address all safety problems associated with its use. It is 13.1 Testing shall commence immediately following
the responsibility of the user to consult and establish completion of specimen conditioning.
appropriate safety and health practices and determine 13.2 Test Cycle.-The test cycle shall consist of cooling
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. the specimens in the water-saturated kerosene from 35
to 15 OF (1.7 to -9.4 C) at the rate of 5:t:1 OF (2.8+0.6 C)
10. Sampling, Test Specimens, and Test Units
per hour followed by immediate return of specimens to
the 35 F water bath, where they shall remain until next
10.1 Test specimens shall be concrete cylinders that test cycle.
have been mixed, molded, and cured as prescribed in USBR 13.3 Frequency.-One test cycle shall be carried out
4192. Specimens shall be 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter every 2 weeks.
by 6 inches (152 mm) high, and shall be fitted with axially- 13.4 Measurements.-The measured variables are the
centered stainless steel gauge studs both top and bottom specimen length changes and the cooling bath temperatures
(note 3). Gauge studs shall conform to requirements of during the cooling cycle. From observation of these changes,
USBR 4227. the dilation that occurs in the specimens at the time of
freezing is determined (note 5). Dilation is determined
NOTE 3.-Other sizes of specimens may be used at some expense
by measuring the vertical distance from a straight-line
of efficiency and convenience. However, a 1:3 ratio of aggregate
to specimen size should be preserved. Comparison of concrete projection of the prefreezing length-versus-timecontrac-
must be made on specimens of same size. tion curve (at constant cooling rate) and the maximum
deviation of the strain trace from this projection, see
10.2 Test specimens may also be cores, cubes, or prisms figure 2.
cut from hardened concrete; these specimens should not
be allowed to dry to a moisture condition below that of NOTE 5.-Additional information of value can be obtained by
the structure from which they were taken. This may be measurement of the residual expansion.
accomplishedby wrapping specimens in plastic or by other
13.5 Duration of Test.-Continue test until critical
suitable means.
dilation is exceeded or until specimens have been exposed
NOTE 4.-For cores, cubes, or prisms, the gauge studs and for the period of interest. Determine critical dilation by
method of installation shall comply with sections 6 and 8.3 of taking the differences between dilation values forsuccessive
USBR 4341. cycles. Designate the number of cycles during which the
difference between successive dilations remained constant
11. Calibration and Standardization as the period of frost immunity, and designate the dilation
during the last cycle before the dilation began to increase
11.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- sharply (by factorof 2 or more) as the critical dilation.
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are 14. Calculations
covered under that particular procedure or standard.
11.2 The adequacyto maintain the temperature control 14.1 During the period of frost immunity, the
as described in section 7 for the cooling bath and constant differencebetween dilation values for successive cycles will
temperature water bath will have to be assuredby checking be relatively constant. When numerical difference between
againsta certified thermometer. dilations begins to increase sharply (by a factor of 2 or
11.3 Each strain-measuring device should be calibrated more) from one cycle to the next, the period of frost
before each test to ensure accuracy. Since the device remains immunity has been exceeded. When dilations are very small
on the specimen throughout the test, periodic checking (less than 0.005 percent), the variability associated with
againsta reference bar is not possible. the test method may be of sufficient magnitude to produce
an apparent end point that meets this criterion. Therefore,
12. Conditioning when critical dilation is less than 0.005 percent of original
specimen length, run additional cycles to ensure that the
12.1 Results of the use of this procedure are strongly difference between successive dilations continues to
dependent on the curing and conditioning procedures to increase significantly. Highly frost-resistantconcrete may
which the specimens have been subjected prior to testing. never exhibit critical dilation.
558
USBR 4671
-200
Z - oo
- oo
.j -800
-- I[n = O.0254mrn
bJ
o::
35 C = 5 (oF-32)
25
<{
I-IJ 15
O-
bJ 5 I I I
I-- o I 2 3 4
TIME IN HOURS
14.2 The Bureau has never performed this test; 15.3 Report the period of frost immunity in the form:
therefore, no worksheet for data has been devised. At such -- HX
time as the test is run by the Bureau, calculations will X + I0 (1)
probaby be performed by computer and the results
expressed by digital printout. A supplement or revision where:
to this procedure would then be issued. = mean value, and
H = 95-percent confidence interval of the mean.
15. Report If the mean values of replicate mixtures differ by more
than the square root of the sums of the squares of the
15.1 For each specimen, record the test period of frost standard deviations of the mixtures, then an additional
immunity. This is the total test period for which critical mixture must be tested. This method must be repeated
dilation does not occur, and is measured by the length until two replicate mixtures meet this criterion.
of time in weeks from the start of soaking in the 35 F 15.4 The report shall also indicate if test specimens
(1.7 C) bath to the time of occurrence of critical dilation. are cut from hardened concrete. If so cut, the size, shape,
orientation of specimens in structure, and any other
NOI'E 6.-No relationship has been established between the pertinent information available shall be included in the
frost immunity of specimens cut from hardened concrete and report.
specimens prepared in the laboratory. 15.5 Refer to section 14.2. A cover letter that includes
the data will cover the items listed in section 15.4.
15.2 Compute the mean (average) value and the 16. Precision and Bias
coefficient of variation for the test period of frost immunity
for each mixture-conditioning combination. From these 16.1 Precision of a particular set of tests is as given
values, determine the 95-percent confidence interval of the in section 15.3.
mean from the appropriate curve on figure 3. 16.2 There is no known bias.
559
USBR 4671
-+ I00
+9O
-+80
+ 70
-+60
+50
+40
Z
144
-+30
u.
0
l-
Z -+2O
l,.u
0
IZ:
I.,LJ
11.
V=30%
<>
n,-
_4"10
_+9
I.U +8 V= Z0%
l--
Z +7
W +6
0
Z
14.1
-+.5
V=lO%
14. +4
Z
0
0 +3
I-
Z
LIJ V=Coefficient of voriotion
+2 V=5%
n-
W
Q.
+I I
2 3 4
I II 1/11
5 6 7 8 9 10
I
15
I
20 25
I
30 40
NUMBER OF SPECIMENS
Figure 3. - Number of specimens versus the 95-percent confidence interval for determination of the period
of frost immunity.
560
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4672-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4672; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 672-76.
2.1 USBR Procedures: 5.1 Terms used in this procedure are as defined in
4042 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed ASTM C 125.
Beams or Cubes of Concrete and Shotcrete
4143 Slump of Concrete 6. Interferences
4172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
4173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by 6.1 Results are sensitive to air content and curing
Volumetric Method procedures, and must be closely controlled.
4192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
7. Apparatus
Laboratory
4231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Pressure
Method 7.1 FreezingEquipment.-A chest or room of sufficient
4233 Testing Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete size to hold specimens and capable of lowering temperature
2.2 ASTM Standards: of specimens to 0+5 F (-17.8+2.8 C) within 16 to 18
C 125 Standard Definitions of Terms Relatingto Concrete hours, and maintaining this temperature with a full load
and Concrete Aggregate of specimens.
C 511 Standard Specification for Moist Cabinets, Moist 7.2 Molds.-Molds to be of proper size for test
Rooms, and Water Storage Tanks Used in the Testing specimens used, and shall conform to requirements of
of Hydraulic Cements and Concretes l USBR 4192.
C 672 Standard Test Method for Scaling Resistance of 7.3 Tamping Rod.-Shallconform with USBR 4143.
Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Deicing Chemicals. 7.4 Small Tools=Wood strike-off board, steel trowel,
and moderately-stiff bristle brush suitable for providing
3. Summary of Procedure desired texture of test surface.
7.5 Slump Cone.-Shall conform to requirements of
3A Concrete prisms, with a mortar dike surrounding USBR 4143.
the top surface, are subjected to cycles of freezing and 7.6 Air Meter.-Shall conform to requirements of USBR
thawing in air with the space enclosed by the dike filled 4173 or 4231.
7.7 Scales=Shall conform to requirements of USBR
1 AnnualBook ofASTMStandards, vol. 04.02. 4192.
561
USBR 4672
10.3 Mixing and Testing Plastic Concrete.-Machine 12.1 Except where the method of curing is an element
mix and test in conformance with applicable provisions of study or is otherwise specified, cover specimens with
of USBR 4192. a polyethylene sheet immediately after finishing.Take care
10.4 Specimens shall have a surface area of at least to prevent contact between sheet and concrete surface.
72 in2 (46 452 mm2) and be at least 3 inches (76 mm) 12.2 Remove specimens from molds at an age of 20
in depth. At least two duplicate specimens for each to 24 hours after addition of water to mix, and place in
condition to be tested shall be made. moist storage for 13 days as provided for in ASTM C 511.
562
USBR 4672
Table 1. - Surface rating index. -thoroughly at end of every five cycles. After making a
Rating Condition of surface visual examination, replace solution and continue test.
No scaling
NOTE 5.-Generally, 50 cycles may be sufficient to evaluate
Very light scaling [1/8-inch (3.2-mm) max. depth, no a surface or surface treatment. However, where comparative tests
coarse aggregatevisible] are being made, it is recommended that tests be continued beyond
Slight to moderate scaling the recommended minimum number of cycles if differences have
Moderate scaling (some coarse aggregatevisible) not developed.
Moderate to severe scaling
13.3 Either keep specimens frozen during any
Severe scaling (coarse aggregatevisible over entire
surface) interruption in the daily cycling or maintain them in a
damp condition after removal of solution and flushing
surfaces.
12.3 Remove specimens from moist storage at the age
of 14 days and store in air for 14 days at 73+3 F (23+1.7 14. Calculations
C) and at 45 to 55 percent relative humidity.
14.1 There are no calculations involved in this
12.4 If protective coatings are to be evaluated, apply
procedure.
them in accordancewith manufacturer's recommendations
regarding quantity and method of application at the age 15. Report
of 21 days. When a material proposed for a dual-purpose
curing compound/protective coating is being evaluated, 15.1 The report shall include:
apply it at the proper time of application for curing
Cementitious content, water-cementitious ratio,
compounds. slump, and air content of mix.
Curing and drying if other than standard.
NOTE 3.-When evaluating penetration-type coatings for Type of surface treatment, time of application, and
application to pavement surfaces subject to traffic wear, it may rate of application.
be desirable to abrade treated surface of test specimens by
sufficient wire brushing to break any films remaining on surface Type of deicer, whether solution or solid, concen-
after drying. tration of solution if used, and rate and time of
application.
Visual rating of the surface after 5, 10, 15, and 25
13. Procedure cycles and every 25 cycles thereafter in accordance with
table 1.
13.1 At the age of 28 days, cover flat surface of specimen If test specimens are cut from hardened concrete,
with about 1/4 inch (6 mm) of a solution of calcium chloride the size, shape, orientation of specimens in structure,
and water having a concentration such that each 100 mL and any other pertinent information available.
of solution contains 4 grams of anhydrous calcium chloride. Photographs and/or written description of surface.
15.2 No reporting form has been devised for this
NOTE 4.-0ther chemical deicers and different concentrations
may be used when there is a need to evaluate their specific effect. procedure because, in all probability, a memorandum
In addition, a variation in the procedure may be adopted whereby would cover the above items.
the solid deicer is added directly to ice produced by freezing a
16. Precision and Bias
1/4-inch (6-mm) layer of fresh water during freezing portion
of each cycle, and discarding and flushing resulting solution off
16.1 In statistical analyses of data obtained using
surface at end of thawing portion of cycle. If this procedure is
used, it should be recognized that about 100 cycles or more will this procedure, it is necessary to recognize that the
be required to evaluate a surface treatment. ratings are ranks, and as such may not appropriately
be subjected to analyses based on the calculation of
averages and standard deviations nor to other techniques
13.2 Place specimens in a freezing environment for that assume continuous distribution of measurement on
16 to 18 hours. Then, remove them from freezer and place at least an interval scale. If groups of similar specimens
in laboratory air at 73+3 F (23+1.7 C) and relative are to be reported or compared with other groups, such
humidity of 45 to 55 percent for 6 to 8 hours. Add water nonparametric quantities as median and range may be
between each cycle as necessary to maintain proper depth used.
of solution. Repeat this cycle daily, flushing off surface 16.2 There is no known bias.
563
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4684-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4684; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 684-81.
NOTE 1.-All material that is not designated as belonging 4.1 Concrete specimens are exposed to elevated
specifically to one of the three procedures applies to all three temperatures and moisture conditions adequateto develop
procedures. a significant portion of their ultimate strength within 24
to 48 hours, depending upon procedure selected. Procedures
A and B utilize the storage of specimens in heated water
2. Auxiliary Tests at elevated curing temperatures without moisture loss. The
primary function of the moderately heated water used in
2.1 Establishing adequacy of insulating material to Procedure A is to serve as insulation to conserve the heat
meet criteria as outlined under section 13.1.3.1 and generated by hydration. The temperature level employed
appendix section X1.2 will be in accordance with ASTM in Procedure B provides thermal acceleration. Procedure
C 177. C involves storage of specimens in insulated curing
2.2 The measurement of slump and air content, which containers in which elevated curing temperature is obtained
is a part of this procedure as referenced under sections from heat of hydration of cement. The sealed containers
11.2.1.2, 12.2.1, and 13.2.1, shall be performed in accordance also prevent moisture loss. Sampling and testing methods
with USBR 4031 or 4192. are the same as for normally cured specimens, USBR 4172
and 4039, respectively.
4.2 Important characteristics of the three procedures
3. Applicable Documents are given in table 1.
564
USBR 4684
B. Boiling water Reusableor Water Boiling 23 hours +15 3.5 hours + 28.5 hours
single use min after 5 min +15 rain
casting
565
USBR 4684
566
USBR 4684
household thermostats may be satisfactory but generally they are. 12. Procedure B-Boiling Water Method
not sufficiently sensitive.
12.1 Apparatus:
11.1.3.3 The plate supporting the cylinders shall
12.1.1 The requirements for small tools and molds
have sufficient open perforations so as not to interfere
are the same as those stated in sections 11.1.1 and 11.1.2.
with circulation of water.
12.1.2 The curing tank shall conform to the
11.1.3.4 A lid shall be provided when tank is to
requirements specified in section 11.1.3.
be capable of use for Procedure B as well as Procedure
A. The water level shall be checked periodically and NOTE 6.-Caution. The use of boiling water imposes the
maintained at 4 inches (102 mm) above top of cylinders. need for safety measures to prevent scalding or eye burns resulting
from the sudden escape of steam upon opening the cover and
NOTE 4.-Provision for an overflow pipe is a convenience in immersion of or dropping cylinders into the boiling water. Lifting
controlling maximum depth of water. tongs are suggested.
12.2 Procedure:
11.2 Procedure: 12.2.1 Preparation of Test Specimens.-Specimens
11.2.1 Preparationof Test Specimens: shall be prepared in accordance with section 11.2.1.
11.2.1.1 Take samples of concrete for test spec- 12.2.2 Initial Curing.-Cover cylinder to prevent loss
imens in accordance with USBR 4172. Record location of moisture, and store so that cylinders will not be disturbed
where sampled batch is used in structure. or subjected to vibration or jarring. In storage area,
11.2.1.2 Measure slump and air content, and mold temperature adjacent to cylinders shall be maintained at
specimens as required in USBR 4031 or 4192. 7010 F (21.1___5.5 C). Protection and storage shall
11.2.1.3 Test specimens shall conform to require- conform to requirements of USBR 4031 or 4192.
ments for 6- by 12-inch (152- by 305-mm) cylinders in
USBR 4031 or 4192. NOTE 7.-Strict attention to the protection and storage of
11.2.2 Curing: cylinder during this initial period is necessary for meaningful
11.2.2.1 Cover top of specimen with a rigid plate results because of brief total curing period.
to prevent loss of mortar to water bath (note 5).
11.2.2.2 Immediately place specimen into curing 12.2.3 Accelerated Curing:
tank (note 5). The water at time of immersion and 12.2.3.1 Place covered cylinder molds in water
throughout the curing period shall be 95 5 F (35 2.8 o C). tank 23 hours 15 minutes after molding. Water shall
Temperature of curing water after immersion of cylinders be boiling at time of immersion and throughout curing
shall not drop more than 5 F (2.8 C) and shall return period (notes 5 and 8). Within 15 minutes after cylinders
to 95+5 F within 15 minutes. are immersed, water shall be returned to boiling.
11.2.2.3 Temperature of curing water should be
NOTE 8.-In confined places, temperature of water may be
continuously recorded or periodically measured throughout kept just below boiling point to avoid excessive evaporation. The
curing period. temperature at which water boils varies because of differences
11.2.2.4 After curing for 23.5 hours 30 minutes, in elevation above sea level. Differences in strengths caused by
remove cylinder from tank and demold. these differences in temperature are not believed to be significant,
but comparison of results among areas so affected should be
NOTE 5.-If cylinders are cast in molds meeting requirements supported by appropriate correlations and interpreted with the
of 11.1.2.3, they may be stored horizontally; otherwise, they are knowledge of the temperature variations.
to be stored in curing tank with long axis vertical.
12.2.3.2 Temperature of curing water should be
11.2.3 Capping and Testing: continuously recorded, or measured at regular intervals
11.2.3.1 Ends of specimens that-are not plane throughout the curing period.
within 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) or which depart from 12.2.3.3 After curing for 3.5 hours 5 minutes,
perpendicularity to center axis by more than 0.25 remove cylinder from boiling water, remove mold, and
(approximately equivalent to 1/16 inch in 12 inches) allow cylinder to cool for not less than 1 hour at room
(1.6 mm in 305 mm) shall be capped as specified in temperature priorto capping.
USBR 4617. 12.2.3.4 Capping and Testing.-Cap and test
11.2.3.2 When tested in accordance with provi- cylinders in accordance with 11.2.3 except that age at time
sions of USBR 4617, capping material shall develop, at of test shall be 28.5 hours +15 minutes.
the age of 30 minutes, a strength equal to or greater than 12.2.3.5 Figure 1 shows a typical data form.
strength of cylinders to be tested.
11.2.3.3 Do not test specimens prior to 30 minutes 13. Procedure C-Autogenous Method
after capping.
11.2.3.4 Test cylinder for strength at the age of 13.1 Apparatus:
24 hours 15 minutes in accordance with requirements 13.1.1 The requirements for small tools and molds
of USBR 4039. (note 9) are the same as those stated in sections 11.1.1
11.2.3.5 Figure 1 shows a typical data form. and 11.1.2.
567
USBR 4684
568
USBR 4684
use of results from these procedures for the prediction Type of fracture, if other than usual cone.
of specification compliance of strengths at later ages must Defects in either specimen or caps.
be applied with caution. As stated in section 16, variability Age of specimens.
of the procedures is the same or less than that from Acceleratedcuring method used.
traditional methods. Thus, results can be used in rapid Initial mix temperature to nearest F (C).
assessment of variability for process control and signaling Maximum and minimum temperature to nearest F
the need for indicated adjustments. However, the ( C) if Procedure C used.
magnitude of the strength values obtained is influenced Method of transportation used for shipping spec-
by the specific combination of materials so that use of imens to laboratory.
results from either conventional tests at any arbitrary age Ambient temperature of specimen or container
or those from these procedures must be supported by during storage for Procedures B and C.
experience or correlations developed by the specific agency
for the existing local conditions and materials. Factors 16. Precision and Bias
influencing relationships between measured strengths and
those of concrete inplace are no different from those
16.1 The single-laboratory coefficient of variation has
affecting conventional strength tests.
been determined as 3.6 percent for a pair of cylinders cast
15. Report from same batch. Therefore, results of two properly
conducted strength tests by same laboratory on two"
15.1 Figure 1 may also serve as a reporting form when individual cylinders made with same materials should not
used as an attachment to a cover letter. The report shall differ by more than 10 percent of their average.
include: 16.2 The single-laboratory, multiday coefficient of
variation has been determined as 8.7 percent for the average
Identification number. of pairs of cylinders cast from single batches mixed on
Diameter (and length, if not standard), in inches 2 days. Therefore, results of two properly conducted
(millimeters). strength tests each consisting of the average of two cylinders
Cross-sectional area, in square inches (square from same batch-made in same laboratory on same
millimeters). materials should not differ by more than 25 percent of
Maximum load, in pounds-force (newtons). their average.
Compressive strength calculated to nearest 10 lbf/in2 16.3 There is no currently known bias for this
or 0.05 MPa. procedure.
569
USBR 4684
e'
4.a
e'
e.,
.-.q
I i
8Z
57O
USBR 4684
APPENDIX
X1.1.1 Curing tanks similar to the tank shown on figure X1.2.1 .A heat seal is required at the joint face between
X1.1 have been used successfully. the separable parts of the container. This may be a labyrinth
X1.1.2 Properly designed cabinets will ensure an or a gasket-type seal, provided the requirements of 13.1.3.1,
almost uniform temperature throughout the curing tank 13.1.3.2, and 13.1.3.3 are met. A suitable gasket is flexible
without the need for a mechanical stirrer. The immersion polyurethane foam,2 lbm/ft3 (32 kg/m3), maintainedwhen
heaters should be located centrally in plan, as near to bottom closed at 50 percent compression.
of tank as possible. The water above the heater will then X1.2.2 Foamed-in-place, closed-cell polyurethane
be kept in circulation by convection currents. having a density between 2 and 3 lbm/ft3 (32 and 48 kg/m3)
X1.1.3 For a tank containing two or three cylinders, and a thermal conductivity equal to or less than
two coupled elements (1500 and 5000 W) have been found 0.15 Btu'in/(h'ft2" F) (0.02 W/(m'K)), in accordance with
suitable for use with Procedure B. While smaller elements ASTM C 177, has been found to be a suitable insulating
will maintain specified curing, the larger element is required material at the thicknesses specified to meet the heat
as a booster to reestablish boiling within specified time retention requirements of section 13.1.3.1.
after cylinders have been immersed. Where the tank is X1.2.3 The maximum-minimum thermometer, if used,
to be used only for Procedure A, the above heaters are should cover a range from 20 to 150 F (-7 to 66 C)
also suitable; however, a single element (3000 W) has also in 1 increments.
been found to be suitable. With the 3000-W element, the X1.2.4 A typical autogenous curing container is shown
tank, when used for Procedure A, may be of larger on figure X1.2.
dimensions to hold more than two or three cylinders.
X1.1.4 The overflow pipe, closely fitting lid, and
exterior insulation are not essential for curing tanks used
only for Procedure A.
i
0ver fl0w...,
Water level D W0ter level
.Thermostot
__. ,.Ther mostot
II It
2--- ,---2
fg Holes,
I IJ
, -dO
o o oToJo ooo:o
Electric immersion heoters j JA
I inch= 25.4 millimeters
SECTION A-A SIDE ELEVATION
571
USBR 4684
' i i. . ,il, , ,i
B!
B -------pB B,---V-'( .,'-.':)l --*'-
''o ", '.
. . - "0.','.
:" 'o
"---IN
.---INNER F
FF
W
" .
.... ,
]..e" .... A
'"'"' . . ....
lr.
:' :';: I.:'""''o"
v
..
,,-, 2",," rl "11,i,.1111.o...
Z
i F..,.,. .o.
LIJ
Z ._i o .... .. INSULATION .._i Z
i!d
g Z
""" I li III1" o . ..
% =--IN
3" 6" Z In iu
6to _ 6" _ _2
iF---C_ --
I
12 to 12 inches -.
i r- L "nces _
SECTION B-B 18 to 19 I
SECTION B'-B'
Figure X1.2. - Autogenous curing container for one or two cylinders (basic requirements)
572
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4702-92
PROCEDURE FOR
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4702; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 702-80.
573
USBR 4702
the SSD condition, fine aggregate particles no longer cling the two halves of sample following splitting. Splitter shall
together but will have just reached the free-flowing state without also be equipped with a hopper or straightedged pan, which
any moisture present to dampen the surfaces of a sample splitter has a width equal to or slightly less than overall width
and impede the flow as sample is fed to splitter chutes. When of assembly of chutes, by which sample may be fed at
using quartering method, some free moisture on particle surfaces
a controlled rate to chutes. The splitter and accessory
is desirable to avoid loss of fines. Methods of determining the
SSD condition are described in USBR 4128. As a quick equipment shall be so designed that sample will flow
approximation, if the fine aggregate will retain its shape when smoothly without restriction or loss of material, see figure
molded in the hand, it may be considered to be wetter than 1.
SSD.
NOTE 2.-Mechanical splitters for dividing samples into
4.2 Coarse AggregatesandMixturesofCoarse andFine representative halves are commonly available in sizes adequate
Aggregates.-Reducesample usinga mechanicalsplitterin for coarse aggregate having the largest particle not over
accordance with method A (preferred method) or by 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm). For fine aggregate,a splitter having
1/2-inch (13-mm) wide chutes will be satisfactory when entire
quarteringin accordance with method B. The miniature
sample will pass a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) sieve. Mechanicalsplitters
stockpile(method C) is notpermittedfor coarse aggregates
can be fabricated to divide samples into other than halves (e.g.,
or mixturesof coarse and fine aggregates. one-quarter size fractions, three-quarter and one-quarter size
fractions, etc.) provided samples obtained as the result of the
5. Precautions
size reduction process are representative of original field sample.
5.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous 9.2 Procedure.-Place field sample in hopper or pan
materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim and uniformlydistributeit from edge to edge so that when
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It it is introducedinto chutes, approximatelyequal amounts
is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish willflowthrough each chute. The rate sample is introduced
appropriate safety and health practices and determine shall be such as to allow free flowingthrough chutes into
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. receptacles below. Reintroduce portionof sample in one
receptacleintosplitter as many times as necessaryto reduce
6. Sampling sample to size specified for intended test. The portion
of materialcollectedin the otherreceptacle may be reserved
6.1 The field sample of aggregate shall be taken in for reduction in size for other tests.
accordance with USBR 4075, or as required by individual
test methods. When tests for sieve analysis only are 10. Method B-Quartering
contemplated, the size of the field sample listed in USBR
4075 is usually adequate. When additional tests are to be 10.1 Apparatus.-The apparatus shall consist of a
conducted, the user shall determine how large the field straightedged scoop, shovel, or trowel; broom or brush;
sample should be to accomplish all intended tests. and a canvas blanket about 6 by 8 feet (2 by 2.5 m).
10.2 Procedure.-Useeither the procedure described in
7. Calibration and Standardization
section 10.2.1 or 10.2.2, or combination of both.
10.2.1 Place field sample on a hard, clean, level
7.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- surface where there will be neither loss of material nor
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests accidental addition of foreign material. Mix material
listed under the ApplicableDocuments of section 2 are thoroughly by turning entire sample over three times. With
covered under that particular procedure or standard directly last turning, shovel entire sample into a conical pile by
or by reference to another. depositing each shovelful on top of preceding one. Carefully
flatten conical pile to a uniform thickness and diameter
8. Conditioning by pressing down on apex with a shovel so that each quarter
sector of the resulting pile will contain the material
8.1 The only conditioning involved in these methods originally in it. The diameter should be about four to eight
would be as discussed under sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2. times the thickness. Divide flattenedmass into four equal
quarters with a shovel or trowel and remove two diagonally
9. Method A-Mechanical Splitter
opposite quarters, including all fine material, and brush
the cleared spaces clean. Successively mix and quarter
9.1 Apparatus: remaining material until sample is reduced to desired size
9.1.1 Sample Splitter.-Sample splitters shall have an (fig. 2).
even number of equal-width chutes, but not less than 8 10.2.2 As an alternative to the method described in
for coarse aggregate or 12 for fine aggregate, which section 10.2.1 for when floor surface is uneven, the field
discharge alternately on each side of splitter. The minimum sample may be placed on a canvas blanket and mixed with
width of individual chutes shall be about 50 percent larger a shovel as described in 10.2.1, or by alternately lifting
than largest particles in sample to be split (note 2). The each corner of the blanket and pulling it over sample toward
splitter shall be equipped with two receptacles to hold diagonally opposite corners causing material to be rolled.
574
USBR 4702
Feed Chut
At Least 12
Openings
Flatten and divide sample as described in 10.2.1, or if surface 11.2 Apparatus.-The apparatus shall consist of a
beneath blanket is uneven, insert a pipe or pole of some straightedged scoop, shovel, or trowel for mixing aggregate;
kind beneath blanket and under center of pile and then and either a small sampling thief, small scoop, or spoon
lift both ends of pipe, dividing sample into two equal parts. for sampling.
Remove pipe, leaving a foldof the blanket between divided 11.3 Procedure.-Place field sample of damp, fine
portions. Insert pipe under center of pile, at right angles aggregate on a hard, clean, level surface where there will
to first division, and again lift both ends of pipe, dividing be neither loss of material nor accidental addition of foreign
sample into four equal parts. Remove two diagonally material. Mix material thoroughly by turning entire sample
opposite quarters, being careful to clean fines from blanket. over three times. With last turning, shovel entire sample
Successively mix and quarter remaining material until into a conical pile by depositing each shovelful on top
sample is reduced to desired size (fig. 3). of preceding one. If desired, conical pile may be flattened
to a uniform thickness and diameter by pressing down
11. Method C-Miniature Stockpile Sampling on apex with a shovel so that each quarter sector of resulting
pile will contain material originally in it. Obtain a sample
for each test by selecting at least five increments of material
11.1 Method C is for damp, fine aggregate sampling at random locations from miniature stockpile, using any
only. of the sampling devices described in section 11.2.
575
USBR 4702
Quarter after
fla#teni_ng
cone
"='t
Sample
divided into
qua rters
Quarter after
flattening
cone
f'='t
Sample
divided into
quarters
Figure 2. - Quartering a field sample on a hard, clean, level surface. Figure 3. - Quartering a field sample on a canvas blanket.
12.1 No calculations are involved in this procedure. 14.1 Since this procedure produces no numerical test
results, determination of precision is not possible. However,
13. Report failure to carefully follow the methods described herein
could result in providing a biased sample to be used in
13.1 No report is necessary for this procedure. subsequent testing.
576
@ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
USBR 4803-92
PENETRATION RESISTANCE
OF HARDENED CONCRETE
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4803; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 803-82.
4. Significance and Use NOTE 3.-A conventional counter chronograph and appropriate
ballistic screens may be used to measure velocity 6.5 feet (or
4.1 This procedure may be used to assessuniformity 2.0 m) from end of driving unit.
of concrete, delineate zones of poor quality or deteriorated
5.2 Probe.5-Each probe shall be a hardened alloy-steel
concrete in structures, and indicate strength development
device, cadmium- or zinc-plated, with a blunt conical end
of concrete. This procedure is not an alternative for strength
that can be inserted into driver unit and driven into concrete
determination of concrete; however, it may be used as a
surface in such a manner that probe will remain firmly
supplement to strength determination.
embedded so that length of projecting portion can be
577
USBR 4803,
n-Jeas.redl ,:note i). Ex:posed end c,t: p>obe shall be: :h:'eldled
:,:> aco:,,mn:odate acce'sso:ie.s 8esigrj, ated o facilitate
measurement: and witk, drawal (n<,e 5).
c., ms:is.tie, g of a sF,.ning and a ntt that can be screwed onto @,e.aded
en,3 o,f p,::,,be may be used 6. Precautions
as; softest at ( I ) t,::,, hlde_s': a ( 11:?,,, l,Jeni fiers a re as: I[,:>l].,:w s: 6.5 The dri!'vi!ng unit, iif: F,,:>vede: aett:e,d,, shJ]l cc,,nform
t,o aF:,,plikb]e :equie.mer:ts ,f ANSI S, tandardi A 103.
!:]::, %]ic (,(;) Fell,dspar
(2::, (.ypsum (7:, Quartz 7. Test Area Location
(:3:, Ca]c-spar ,:: Calcite <8). Tc, paz:
(41 Flu,ca:spar c,r F]u,ori:e (9) Sapphire or Co,:undln::, 7] The concrete t,c, be tested mr]st l]a','e reLc]sec, a
(5 I Ap, adte ,:1,0:, D,:ian;,,ond suff]ciien: degree ,:re re'siis:,nce to:, penetratk,n s.,: that pro, be
5 7 >:l
USBR 4803
will not penetrate more than one-half the thickness of raised around base of probe, the crushed concrete shall
the concrete, but will remain firmlyembedded. No probe be removed to allow reference plate to lie flat. Install probe
shall be located less than 7 inches (178 mm) from any measuring cap and plate retainer, as appropriate, and
other probe nor less than 4 inches (102 mm) from edge measure distance from reference plate to end of probe
of a concrete surface. or to upper surface of measuring cap to nearest 0.025 inch
7.2 A minimum of three firmlyembedded test probes (or 0.5 ram). If probe is slanted with respect to surface
in a given test area shall constitute one test. of concrete, make four measurements equally spaced around
and parallel to probe and average them to get measurement.
NOTE 10.-Number of tests to be made depends on intended 10.4 Provision shall be made to decrease amount of
use of results. energy delivered to probe by driving unit or to increase
dimensions of probe when tests are to be made on concrete
8. Calibration and Standardization
having a density less than 125 lbm/fO (2002 kg/m3) or
a strength less than 2,500 lbf/in2 (17.2 MPa).
8.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane-
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests 11. Calculations
listed under the ApplicableDocuments of section 2 are
covered under that particular procedure or standard. 11.1 Figures 2 and 4 show typical calculation forms.
8.2 Calibrate the measuring equipment in accordance
with USBR 1000. 12. Report
8.3 The calibration curves for the penetration
resistance that compares the exposed length of probe to 12.1 Figure 4 may also be used as a typical reporting
a compressive strength need to be developed. These curves form. The report shall include:
may be developed by several different methods:
Driving unit identification and energy level used
On cylinders fabricatedfrom a mix representing the Structure identification
structure to be investigated, either standard laboratory Location of test area
cure or field cure. Description of test area
On cylinders fabricated from a mix representing a Description of concrete including type of aggregate
test slab for purposes of providing replicate cores and/ and surface finishing technique
or cubes for providing test readings as well as those Approximate thickness of concrete tested
physically broken in a compression machine. Dimensions of probes
On the structure itself from which cores may be Exposed length of all probes
taken; the cores will also be subjected to both methods Description of all other pertinent test conditions
of compressive strength determinations. including probes rejected for data analysis
8.4 Refer to figures 2 and 3 for typical calibration data 13. Precision and Bias
and curves.
13.1 The precision of probe measurements has been
9. Conditioning
found to vary with the maximum size of coarse aggregate.
The indexes of precision shown in table 1 apply to
9.1 The concrete surface should be reasonably smooth. measurements on same concrete, made with same
Surfaces coarser than a broom finish shall be stoned or materials, procedures, equipment, and curing conditions
ground over an area larger than that which will be covered which are obtained by a single operator using same
by positioning device and measuring baseplate. instrument.
13.2 The bias for this procedure has not been
10. Procedure established.
579
USBR 4803
[3] Malhotra, V.M., Testing Hardened Concrete: [4] Strong, H., In-Place Testing of Hardened Concrete
Nondestructive Methods, ACI Monograph No. 9, Iowa With the Use of the Windsor Probe, Idaho Test Method
State University Press/ACI, Detroit, MI, 1976. T-128-79.
Table 1. - Precision 1.
No. 4 (4.75 mm) (mortar) 0.08 (2.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.23 (5.8) 0.13 (3.3)
1 inch (25.0 mm) 0.10 (2.5) 0.33 (8.4) 0.28 (7.1) 0.16 (4.1)
2 inches (50 mm) 0.14 (3.6) 0.46 (11.7) 0.40 (10.2) 0.22 (5.6)
580
USBR 4803
..-k
.8
O
.m
.N
w.
o
I
d
I
e,i
581
USBR 4803
e. Ol
,..,
Qar
. .
' O -
u N
I I ,
ase
xl
"8
t-
.8
o .
-DR," 0
_,..
I
r-i
- .
$
. .. ,a ,,
o ,,. "g ,-
_
g,I . . -
0
582
USBR 48O3
ON
m
o
O--.
O
coto
O
GO
CNC
$3HONI '3B0cl 03S0clX3 n
583
USBR 4803
o _
!
e
I
,4
584
@ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
USBR 4805-92
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4805; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 805-79.
585
USBR 4805
9. Pr'ocedure
10. Calcula:ion
8..[ The test area sha]]l be a ]least i; iin,,L:te:,. ,:1 5'2 ram), 1]1.1 ReboLmd rnm:,be.rs sho.ulld be cc,,rrelaed wiith co,'e
iin diameter. He'aviily tex:ured, soft.,, or surfaces wit,h loose :est:ing informaii,,:n. Due tn t--],e difficulty of acquiring
m,:rtar shah be grc,,u-d srnoo, th with abrash.,e stone appropriate c,oelatii,:,na:l .data iic a given iinstance,. he
described m s.ect,i,::m: 4.2 SLffaces cc, aed with curing reboucld hamme is n:-Jc, st, ase.fLd for rapiidl[y surveying large
cc,,n:Jpourds c, c, ther sealants s[:,ou]ld be: scraped to xemc, ve areas;. af simi]lar ,:oncrees in ttne corJszact,iorJ tmde'
a] soft coating. Smooth-formed ,: ,>,:we]led sulra.c:es sha]l ccmsiideaii,,,n.
be tested wJibl,:7:,ut grinding:. The e.ffe., of d/ing and
cabmatii,,:m can be. mi:nimi:zed ky tl-Jc,>,:mgh]ly wetting :L2.. Report
s.uface., tim 2,i hours prii,or to:, testing: C:,ncetes over :51
,n,,.mhs c,,d ,-a>, require grinding t,: a dep,h of ]1,.."4 i,,ch 12:.1 Figure 2 may also serve as. a repc,t,iing form. The
((!i ram:, if th, ey ae o be:' conqpaed c,, markedl[y younger e.port, shall inc]lude the: fnJc, vvir, g infc, rmatioc fc,. each
concre.es GirJdi,g tc, hiis .de:p, tl- is. not feasib]e wit:In, out. t,est, area::
powe equipment,. An a ntomob[e b.,:dy slT:op .g:inde work:s , . Stru.cure iderificaii,m.
well for these situations. Ground and unground surfaces , . L,:)cat,iion of test. area.
s.l-i,::.tll[dl no be c,mpared , . Descriiprikn c,,f test area, e'g.:, woc, d-fl[oatedl surface:,
8.2 Otkler Cac:t-os that may a:e.c esu][ts c,. test are' dpy,. and grr.,nd w'ith abrasion sone.
as fcaH,,,ves: ,. Descriprikm ,::d cc:,n,c:xe.te:
82] Corcrete at 32 F' ,i:0 ':'C),. c,, ]iess, may exhiibiit (at:, Comp,:sitiZ,m, t: known:, such as. aggregates,
very q,i.g,:h rebc,.nd valises.. Concret,e sl-Jc,.Ll!d be es.ed c, niy cemecJr content., water'-ce.n-Jent taxi,o:, aii content, and
af:e.r if ilas [t:law'ed admis:tues us.edl.
5 86
USBR 4805
587
USBR 4805
! I
,%
J
O
.)
e-
I
15
x 'X
.x,I
kl
8Z
tL
588
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4823-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730,Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4823; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 823-83.
589
USBR 4823
590
USBR 4823
of available data on ser,)ice conditions, petrographic A thorough examination of the concrete construction
examination in accordance with USBR 4856, and the testing Surveys and field tests to define and evaluate
of a few selected samples of concrete and secondary chemical condition of inplace concrete and safety of the
deposits in or on the concrete. The deflection, expansion, construction
or shrinkage of typical portions of a structure might Acquiring samples for examination and testing by
appropriately need to be measured. The condition of the laboratory procedures
concrete can be estimated using nondestructive testing
procedures, such as impact devices, see USBR 4803 and 9.2 Scope of Field Examination.-A detailed visual
4805, and ultrasonic methods, see USBR 4597. Selected examination should be made by personnel familiar with
critical portions of structures may be probed and sampled concrete and concrete construction. This examination
by drilling (USBR 4042). The concrete cores may be tested should locate and describe all categories of the concrete.
in accordance with USBR 4215. Borehole cameras and All affected construction or portions thereof should be
viewing devices have been found to be helpful in specific identified and the external aspects of failure should be
instances [1,2,3] 5 . described as quantitatively as possible. The examination
7.3 Conclusions.-The findings of the preliminary may be extended to aggregate sources in accordance with
investigation may remove all concern with respect to the the procedures described in USBR 4295. Photographs of
condition of the concrete. In certain cases, the findings pertinent features of the construction, their environs, and
may be adequate for a final conclusion on the significance the manifestations of failure are valuable and should be
of observed distress. Otherwise, care should be taken to obtained.
assure that the preliminary investigation provides the 9.3 Observadons.-Specific features of the concrete to
information necessary to delineate a plan for further be noted include:
investigations as discussed in sections 8 through 14.
Nature and extent of cracking and fractures
8. Assembly of Records Evidence of volume change, deflection, or dislocation
of construction or portions thereof, which may include
8.1 Reports and Legal Documents.-The investigation closing or opening of joints, tilting, shearing, or mis-
of concrete performance should be preceded or accompan- alignment of structural elements and shifting or mis-
ied by the assembly and critical review of records pertaining alignment of machinery
to the project specifications, construction contract, Conditions of exposed surfaces, such as spalling,
construction operations, concrete-making materials, popouts, unusual weakness, disintegration, excessive'
weather conditions during and after construction, and the wear, or discoloration
actual conditions of service. Such records should establish Evidence of cement-aggregate reactions
specified requirements for the materials and completed Secondary deposits on surfaces, in cracks, and in voids
work, and may reveal circumstances or conditions that Presence and extent of repair work and quality of
caused or contributed to the distress of the concrete. Records its bond to original concrete
of operation and maintenance may describe the beginning
and progress of unsatisfactory performance. 9.3.1 Other properties of the concrete requiring
8.2 Interviews.-Interviews with contractors, engineers, observation would include:
inspectors, tradespeople, and suppliers should be conducted
to obtain pertinent information that is not included in Thoroughness of consolidation
the written record. Owners, occupants, and users of the Whether the concrete is air-entrained
construction should be questioned concerning the onset Evidence of segregation and bleeding
and progress of evident distress, especially with respect Indications of extremely high, low, or normal water
to the possible relationship to any change of the conditions content
of use and service. For reinforced concrete, condition of steel and its
location in section
9. Detailed Investigations of Concrete in Nature and condition of other embeddeditems
Construction
9.3.2 Any phenomena indicating distress of the
9.1 Procedures.-A detailed investigation of concrete in concrete should be studied in relation to possible causative
construction should include all procedures required to or contributory factors,, such as varying conditions of
achieve approved scope and objectives within the exposure over the area of the construction; sequence of
authorized budget and time schedule. After the preliminary placing operations; conditions prevailing during construc-
investigation to establish the general condition of the tion; sources of supply of concrete and concrete-making
concrete and extent of any unsatisfactory performance, the materials; identifiable problems of handling, placing, and
detailed investigation may include: finishing; conditions of curing and early protection; and
adequacy of structural design and conformance to plans.
Varying conditions of exposure over the areaof construction
5 Numbers in brackets refer to entries in References, section 22. during and after construction may include the following:
591
USBR 4823
592
USBR 4823
(up on vertical-surfaces). If such a move is not feasible, move of any distress, economics of maintenance, need for repair
east, south, or west (right, down, or left), alternatively considered, (if any), and the desired service life of the structure.
in that order. 11.4.3 For situation 2 (set. 11.1.2), each separate
category of exposed surface of the concrete construction,
11.3 Sample Size.-For samples to be subjected to tests or each category of test specimen or concrete product,
yielding a numeric value, the number of samples should should be treated individually, as described for situation
be determined in accordance with the recommendations 1 (set. 11.1.1). This is to establish sampling locations and
of ASTM E 122, based upon the degree of confidence desired number of samples, and to select particular specimens or
to be placed in the resulting numerical value. The quantity product units for examination. For example, completely
of concrete and the dimensions of pieces secured in the scaled, partially scaled, and unscaled areas of pavement
sampling operation should conform with the stipulations .concrete of a specified level of quality should be sampled
of the applicable method of test. separately so that three sets of samples are secured. Each
11.4 Evaluation of Test Results.-TeSt results from set would be comprised of concrete of a specific category
samples obtained in accordance with situation 1, section conforming with the recommendations of ASTM E 105
11.1.1 are evaluated on the basis of statistics computed and E 122. Any number of sets of samples may be required
as follows: for the proper investigation of concrete that is within the
scope of an approved plan so as to adequately evaluate
concrete of differing specified levels of quality, and in
_ Y,X; (1) differing condition followingservice exposure.
n
593
USBR 4823
Slabs, pavements, walls, linings, foundations, 1.0 (0.3) or less Entire depth
and structural elements accessiblefrom 1.0 (0.3) or greater 1.0 (0.3)
one side only
Suspended slabs, 2 walls, conduits, foundations, 0.5 (0.15) or less Entire depth
structural elements exposed to atmosphere 0.5-2.0 (0.15-0.6) One half thickness or
on two or more sides, and concrete products 0.5 (0.15), whichever
is greater
1 The requirements shown in this "table may not provide the quantities or dimensions of samples that are required
by the stipulations of sections 11 and 12. In such cases, the necessary additional quantity of concrete in pieces of
appropriate minimum size should be taken at each sampling location in accordance with the requirements of section 13.
2 When suspended slabs are cored, it is desirable to leave the lower 1 inch (25 mm) uncored so as not to lose
the core by its falling from the barrel and to make it easier to patch the core hole.
594
USBR 4823
595
USBR 4823
[13] Axon, E. O., "Investigation of the Performance of [16] Mather,K.,"Petrographic Examination of Hardened
Concrete in Service," Special Report 106, Highway Concrete," ASTM STP 169-A, Am. Soc. Testing Mats., pp.
Research Board, HRBRA, pp. 5-8, 1970. 125-143, 1966.
[15] Brink, R. H., "Physical Tests for Investigating [18] Feld, J., "Lessons from Failures of Concrete
Performance of Concrete," Special Report 106, Highway Structures," Monograph No. 1, Am. Concrete Inst., p. 179,
Research Board, HRBRA, pp. 18-20, 1970. 1964.
596
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4856-92
PROCEDURE FOR
PETROGRAPHIC EXAMINATION
OF HARDENED CONCRETE
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4856; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 856-83.
597
USBR 4856
including results of prior testing, should be made available. Determination on presence and nature of surface
If petrographer is highly experienced, his advice and treatments such as dry shake applications on concrete
judgment should be sought regarding extent of examination floors.
and on the information discussed in section 3.3.
3.3 This procedure may form the basis for establishing 4.3 Test Specimens fromActual or Simulated Service.-
arrangements between the Government and a consulting A petrographic examination may be conducted on concrete
service. In such a case, both parties should determine the or mortar specimens that have been subjected to actual
kind, extent, and objectives of examination and analyses or simulated service conditions for most of the purposes
to be made; and should record their agreement in writing. listed in section 4.2.
The agreement may stipulate specific determinations to 4.4 Concrete Products.-A petrographic examination
be made, observations to be reported, funds to be obligated, can be used for investigation of concrete products of any
or a combination of these or other conditions. kind including masonry units, precast structural units,
piling, pipe, and building modules. The products or samples
4. Purposes of Examination of those submitted for examination may be from current
production, from elements in service in a construction,
4.1 Examples of purposes for which a petrographic or from elements that have been subjected to tests or to
examination of concrete is used are given in sections 4.2 actual or simulated service conditions. The examination
through 4.5. The probable usefulness of a petrographic could include:
examination in specific instances may be determined by
discussion with an experienced petrographer on the Determination of features listed in section 4.2.
objectives of the investigation. Determination on effects of manufacturing processes
4.2 Concrete from Construction.-A petrographic and variables such as methods for mixing, molding,
examination on concrete from construction could include: demolding, consolidation, curing, and handling.
Determination on effects of use of different concrete-
A detailed determination on condition of concrete making materials, forming and molding procedures,
in a construction. types and amounts of reinforcement, and embedded
Determination on causes of inferior quality, distress, hardware.
or deterioration of concrete in a construction.
Determination on probable future performance of 4.5 Laboratory Specimens.-The purposes of a petro-
concrete. graphic examination on laboratory specimens of concrete,
Determination on whether concrete in a construction mortar, or cementitious paste are usually to investigate
was or was not as specified; other tests may be required effects of the test on the specimen or on one or more
in conjunction with petrographic examination. of its constituents to provide examples of the effects of
Description of cementitious matrix including a process, and to provide petrographer with visual evidence
qualitative determination on type of hydraulic binder on examples of reactions in a specimen of known materials,
used, degree of hydration, degree of carbonation if proportions, age, and history. Specific purposes may
present, evidence of unsoundness of cement, presence include:
of a mineral admixture, nature of hydration products,
adequacy of curing, and unusually high water-cement Determine if alkali-silica reaction has taken place,
ratio of paste. what aggregate constituents were affected, what
Determination on whether alkali-silica or alkali- evidence of reaction exists, and effects of reaction on
carbonate reactions, cement-aggregate reactions, or concrete.
reactions between contaminants and matrix have taken To establish whether one or more alkali-carbonate
place and their effects on the concrete. reactions have taken place, which aggregateconstituents
Determination on whether concrete has been were affected, what evidence of reaction exists, and
subjected to and affectedby sulfate attack, other chemical effects of reaction on concrete properties.
attack, early freezing, or to other harmful effects of Determine if any other cement-aggregate reaction
freezing and thawing. has taken place. In addition to alkali-silica and alkali-
Part of a survey on safety of a structure for a present carbonate reactions, other reactions are hydration of
or proposed use. anhydrous sulfates, rehydration of zeolites, wetting of
Determination on whether concrete subjected to fire clays; and reactions involving solubility, oxidation,
is essentially undamaged, or moderately or seriously sulfates, and sulfides [2,3,4].
damaged. Establish whether an aggregateused in a test has
Investigation on performance of coarse or fine been contaminated by a reactive constituent when, in
aggregatein structure, or determination of composition fact, aggregatewas not reactive.
of aggregate for comparison with aggregate from To establish effects of a freezing and thawing test
approved or specified sources. or other physical or mechanical exposure of concrete
Determination of factors that caused a given concrete on aggregateand matrix.
to serve satisfactorily in the environment in which it Determine extent of a reaction, nature of reaction
was exposed. products, and effects of reaction produced in exposure
598
USBR 4856
599
USBR 4856
5.3.9 Bottles with Droppers=For applying acid, is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish
water, and other reagents during examination. appropriate safety and health .practices and determine
5.3.10 Assorted Forceps.-Preferablystainless steel, applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
including fine-pointedwatchmaker's forceps. 7.2 Specific precautions are given in note 2 of section
5.3.11 Refractometer and Immersion Media.- 5.2.10 on the toxicity of certain materials.
Covering the range of refractive indexes from 1.410 to
at least 1.785, in intervals not larger than 0.005. Stable 8. Samples
immersion media, calibrated at a known temperature and
of known thermal coefficient, are preferable and should 8.1 Cores shall be obtained in accordance with USBR
be used in a temperature-controlled room. A thermometer 4042. The minimum size of sample should be at least one
graduated in tenths of a degree Fahrenheit, or Celsius, core; preferably 6 inches (152 mm) in diameter and 12
should be used to measure air temperature near microscope inches (305 mm) long for each mixture, condition, or
stage so that thermal corrections of refractive index can category of concrete; except that for pavement, the full
be made if needed. depth of pavement shall be sampled with a 4- or 6-inch
5.3.12 Miscellaneous Equipment=Otherequipment (102- or 152-mm) core. Broken fragments of concrete are
needed includes linear measurement devices, ovens, and usually of doubtful use in a petrographic examination
lens paper. because damage to concrete cannot be clearly identified
as a function of sampling technique or representative of
6. Selection and Use of Apparatus real condition of concrete. Cores smaller than 6 inches
in diameter can be used if aggregateis small enough. In
6.1 Laboratories should be equipped to provide deteriorated concrete, core recovery is much poorer with
photographs, photomacrographs, and photomicrographs to a 2-1/8-inch (54-mm) diameter core than with a 6-inch
illustrate significant features of the concrete. While diameter core.
ordinary microscope lamps are sometimes satisfactory for 8.2 Samples from Construction.-The most useful
photomicrography in transmitted and reflected light, lamps samples for petrographic examination of concrete from
providing intense point or field sources, such as tungsten construction are diamond-drilled cores with a diameter at
ribbon-filament bulbs or zirconium or carbon arcs, are more least two times, preferably three times, the maximum size
desirable. of the coarse aggregate in the concrete. If 6-inch (150-mm)
6.2 The minimum equipment required for a petrogra- aggregate is used, a core at least 10 inches (254 ram) in
phic examination of concrete, where both specimen diameter is desirable.
preparation and examination are completed within the 8.2.1 The location and orientation of all cores,
laboratory, consists of a selection of apparatus and supplies including cores or core lengths not sent to laboratory, should
for specimen preparation; a stereomicroscope, preferably be clearly shown. Each core should be properly labeled.
on a large stand so that 6-inch (152-mm) diameter cores For vertically drilled cores, the elevation or depth at top
can be conveniently examined; polarizing microscope and and bottom of each section should be shown, and any core
accessories; lamps for each microscope; and a stable, loss and fracturesprior to the drilling should be marked.
calibrated, immersion media of known thermal coefficient. For cores taken horizontally or obliquely, direction of
Specimens for petrographic examination may be obtained vertical plane and tops and bottoms should be marked.
by sending samples to individuals or firms that offer custom A field log similar to the log shown on figure 1 should
services in preparing thin or polished sections and finely- be provided.
ground surfaces. However, it is more convenient to prepare 8.2.2 Broken pieces of concrete from extremely
specimens in-house if possible. deteriorated structures, or pieces removed while preparing
6.3 X-ray diffraction, X-ray emission, differential for repair work, are sometimes used for the petrographic
thermal analysis, thermogravimetric analysis, analytical examination. The samples will be more useful if their
chemistry, infrared spectroscopy, and other techniques may original locations in the structure are clearly described or
be useful in obtaining quick and definite answers to relevant indicated on a sketch or photograph.
questions where microscopy will not do so. Some 8.2.3 Figure 1 also shows a typical form for sample
undesirable constituents of concrete, some hydration of information, which should include:
products of cementitious materials, and some reaction
products that are useful in defining effects of different Location and original orientation of each specimen,
exposures, and many contaminating materials may not be see USBR 4823.
identified unless techniques that supplement light Mixture proportions of concrete.
microscopy are used [5,6]. Sources of concrete-making materials, and results of
any testing on these materials.
7. Precautions Description of mixing, placing, consolidation, and
curing methods.
7.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous Age of structure or, for a structure that required
materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim several years to complete, dates of placement of concrete
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It sampled.
600
USBR 4856
Conditions of operation and service exposure. scopes or by X-ray diffraction and other instrumental
Reason for and objectives of examination. methods, and for other chemical or physical tests. Methods
Symptoms believed to indicate distress or for specimen preparation are outlined in section 10. Tables"
deterioration. 2, 3, 4, and 5 summarize characteristics of concrete
Results of field tests such as measurements of conveniently observed with the stereomicroscopic,
Fundamental Transverse, Longitudinal, and Torsional petrographic, and metallographic microscopes. During each
Frequencies of Concrete Specimens (USBR 4215); Pulse examination, the petrographer should note specific
Velocity (USBR 4597); Rebound Hammer (USBR examinations to be subsequently made in detail, and may
4805); or Probe Readings (USBR 4803). recognize the need to reexamine specimens. Possible
8.3 Samples from Test Specimens from Natural observations using different types of microscopes are shown
Exposures, Concrete Products, andLaboratorySpecimens: in table 6, and properties of some relevant compounds
8.3.1 Information on these types of samples should are listed in table 7.
include materials used, mixture proportions, curing, age 9.3 Photography.-It is frequentlydesirable to maintain
of concrete when placed in service or test,.orientation in a photographic record as illustrations for the report and
exposure, present age, condition surveys during exposure, for future reference. The followingsections describe the
characteristics of natural or laboratory exposure, and types of photographs that may be useful.
method of manufacture of the concrete products. Large 9.3.1 Overlapping close-up photographs of a core
concrete products may be sampled similar to those from laid out in sequence, including a dimensional scale, are
construction (sec. 8.2), and smaller concrete products may often useful. It is convenient to use a view camera at a
be represented by one or more samples showing range constant distance with same lighting in all photographs.
of condition from service or fabrication,or both. 9.3.2 Photographs and photomacrographs of
8.3.2 The exposure of laboratory specimens should features of interest on a core surface, ground surface, or
be described with the test results in addition to age at an old or new crack surface at magnifications of 0.7X to
test and available test results on aggregates, hydraulic 3X are particularly useful if specimen will be destroyed
binders, and admixtures used. This information should during subsequent examinations. A camera equipped with
accompany test specimens from natural exposures and a long extension bellows, lenses of focal length from 2.9
concrete products or samples therefrom, if available. to 6.5 inches (73.7 to 165.1 mm), and a ground-glass back
8.3.3 Figure 1 may also serve as a typical form for is desirable.
reporting the information required on these samples. 9.3.3 Photomacrographs at magnifications of at least
3X to 10X and sometimes higher, may be used to illustrate
9. Examination of Samples reaction products or growths on specimen or significant
crack patterns. Black and white photographs, such as 4
9.1 Choice of Method.-Specific techniques and by 5 inches (102 by 127 ram) taken at 1X magnification
methods used in examination of a sample depend on on fine-grained film with a long gray scale, convey a great
purpose of examination and nature of sample. The method deal of information and may be more useful than a
to be used should be selected after questions that photograph taken at a higher magnification on a smaller
examination is intended to answer have been clearly for- format. As a general guide, subject should be illuminated
mulated. The method should answer those questions as by oblique lighting at a low angle if relief on subject surface
unequivocally and economically as possible. Details that is low, and at a higher angle if relief is high. The object
need to be resolved will be dictated by objectives of of the oblique illumination is to show detail and contrast
examination and will vary for different situations. without obscuring features by long shadows. Details can
Consequently, selection and location of specimens from also be enhanced by using colored filters,such as Wratten
samples submitted for examination should be guided by G or other yellow filters. Cross lighting from two sides
objectives of study. For relevant subjects not described in is sometimes successful in showing detail and obliterating
this procedure, refer to USBR 4295 and 4457 and ASTM confusing shadows.
C 294. 9.3.4 Photomicrographs of thin sections, immersion
9.2 Visual Examination and Outline of Additional mounts, and polished sections at magnifications from 2X
Examination.-A petrographic examination of concrete, to an upper limit appropriate to the subject and dependent
mortar, or cementitious paste should begin with a review on quality of equipment and skill of photographer may
of all available information about the specimefi, followed be used to illustrate textures, compounds, and crack
by a visual examination of each sample. An outline of patterns.
the information that can be obtained from the visual 9.3.5 The range of photographic techniques used
examination is given in table 1. The visual exam should should be adequate to provide a good selection of
be followed by an examination using a stereomicroscope, illustrations for the report and record. The subjects for
see table 2 and section 12.1. In some cases, further study illustrations are usually selected during the visual and
is unnecessary and a final report can be prepared. In other stereomicroscopic examinations.
cases, specimens are selected during the visual and
stereomicroscope examinations for further processing and 10. Specimen Preparation and Conditioning
additional stereomicroscope study, more detailed exami- 10.1 Preparation for Visual and Stereomicroscope
nation using the petrographic or metallographic micro- Examination:
601
USBR 4856
602
USBR 4856
603
USBR 4856
aggregate particles that may indicate chemical reaction examination of the cement paste matrix. It is sometimes
between cement and aggregate.Rims on gravel or natural necessary to abandon the normal thickness and use a thicker
sand should be presumed to be a result of weathering in section to preserve fragile deposits in voids such as alkali-
the deposit unless samples of aggregatesused are available silica gel, ettringite, calcium hydroxide, calcite, aragonite,
and show that rims were not present before aggregate or thaumasite. When it is desired to preserve contact
was used in concrete. Rims produced in the concrete on between mortar and coarse aggregate, it may be preferable
particles of sand and gravel are absent or relatively thin to have the section thicker than normal with the highest
and faint at locations where particles are in contact with birefringence color of the quartz a pale first-orderyellow.
an air void. Rims produced by weathering may mask rims In normal concrete, material bordering the aggregate
produced by alkali-silica reaction. Rimmed crushed stone consists of amorphous cement gel, with calcium hydroxide
m concrete usually indicates an alteration in the concrete crystals evenly distributed but with slight concentrations
from alkali-silicaor alkali-carbonatereactions [7,8,9]. Pale along undersides of fine and coarse aggregate if section
rims in mortar bordering coarse aggregate[6,11] and pale is cut parallel to placement direction. For an alkali-silica
areas in mortar may be gel-soaked paste [10] or highly reaction, there is usually a zone depleted in or free of
carbonated paste adjoining carbonate aggregate that has calcium hydroxide surrounding reacted aggregate particles.
undergone an alkali-carbonatereaction. Gel is occasionally present surrounding the aggregate or
12.1.6.3 Deposits in old cracks may include calcite, soaking the paste so that it is completely dark with crossed
ettringite, calcium hydroxide, or more unusual crystalline polars and brown grading hazily to a more normal paste
substances, and occasionally include sand, silt, clay, and in plane polarized light. Gel-soaked paste is fairly easy
freshwater or saltwater organisms. Such organisms may to recognize, and it is possible to recognize depleted calcium
provide evidence that part of a structure that is not hydroxide around a reacted aggregate particle if the fine
ordinarily submerged has been submerged. aggregate of any crusher dust present does not contain
12.1.6.4 Quantitative determination of concrete much colorless mica. Thin flakes of muscovite can be
constituents can be made by microscopical point-count or confused with thin tablets of calcium hydroxide when both
linear-traverse methods in general accord with require- are viewed on edge; they can be distinquished if the higher
ments of USBR 4457. A total analysis may include index of the mica is observed.
proportional amounts of coarse aggregate,fine aggregate, 12.2.1.2 It is sometimes preferable to lose part
cementitious matrix, and air voids. The differentiation of of the section or crack the quartz in order to distinguish
coarse and fine aggregateis not accurate unless the two among quartz (birefringence 0.009), calcium hydroxide
fractions are distinquishable lithologically because (birefringence 0.027), and calcite (birefringence 0.172).
maximum dimension of particles usually is not intersected When these three materials occur together, the quartz
by prepared surface. Similarly, the proportion of individual particles will be shaped like sand grains or rock fragments
rock types can be determined quantitatively by these while the calcium hydroxide will be present either as tablets
methods, such as the content of unsound or reactive tangential to aggregate or as poikilitic crystals in the paste
constituents in the coarse or fine aggregate, or both; enclosing residual cement grains or areas of gel. The
proportions of lightweight and normal weight aggregate; birefringence of calcium hydroxide is three times that of
and abundanceof granular contaminating substances. quartz, birefringence of calcite is 6.4 times that of calcium
12.2 Polarizing Microscope Examination: hydroxide, and birefringence of aragonite is 5.7 times that
12.2.1 Characteristics of Good Concrete Thin of calcium hydroxide. While aragonite is fairly uncommon
Sections.-Features that characterize good, thin sections of in concrete, calcite is common as a product of carbonation
concrete or mortar include: (1) mounted lower surface is and as an ingredient of aggregate. At the normal thickness
free of abrasive and has been ground to a smooth matte of 1181 microinches, (30 #m) the highest birefringence
finish normally obtained by finishingsurface with optical of calcium hydroxide viewed parallel to the cleavage is
alumina or equivalent, (2) lower surface of blank is entire, bright first-orderyellow with an occasional orange or first-
(3) air voids have complete peripheries, (4) there is a order red. Calcite in the same section has high-order white
sharp boundary between void and surrounding mortar, (5) birefringence except in very minute grains where it is very
deposits in voids are preserved, and (6) aggregate that thin, approximately rhombic in shape, and birefringence
has been observed under stereomicroscope to be entire is first-order white. The birefringence relationships
when blank was selected has remained entire and discussed in this section are the basis that makes possible
microfractures have not been produced in sectioning. It much of the interpretation of concrete thin sections.
is very difficult to avoid production of microfractures when 12.2.2.2 Choice of Areas for Thin Sections of
aggregate is principally quartzite and quartz if it is desired Concrete.-Areas from which thin sections are to be
to reduce section to a thickness of 1181 microinches (30 #m) prepared usually should be chosen after examining the
so that brightest birefringence color of quartz is of first- sawed or sawed and ground surface with a stereomicro-
order white. Some cracks will be formed and some loss scope. Selection of the area may depend on the directed
of paste that is softer than quartz aggregate will occur. examination features, or selection may be affected by the
12.2.1.1. The desirable thickness of the thin presence of highly deteriorated concrete and the desire
section ranges from about 787 to 1575 microinches (20 to choose a volume strong enough to endure sectioning
to 40/m). Thinner sections may be required for detailed even after impregnation. In this case, an area of mortar
604
USBR 4856
with coarse aggregateat corners or along sides may be [2] Hansen, W. C., "Anhydrous Minerals and Organic
the best selection. If it is desired to compare the aggregate Materials as Sources of Distress in Concrete," Highway
with an aggregateof known source to establish whether.. Research Record No. 43, Highway Research Board,
both came from the same source, coarse aggregateshould HRBRA, pp. 1-7, 63.
be selected in sufficient quantity to cover the range of
varieties present and their physical condition. If concrete [3] Mielenz, R. C., "Reaction of Aggregates Involving
has been subjected to alkali-silica or alkali-carbonate Solubility, Oxidation, Sulfates, or Sulfides," Highway
reactions, areasselected for sectioning should include coarse Research Record No. 43, Highway Research Board,
aggregatewith cracks inside the periphery but surrounding HRBRA, pp. 8-18, 1963.
the center and cracks in middle of particle, which narrow
toward the border and which may or may not contain gel, [4] Mather, K., "Petrographic Examination of Hardened
in the case of alkali-silica reaction. Reaction-rimmed Concrete in Significance of Tests and Properties of
particles may be chosen for sectioning for either type of Concrete-Making Materials," Symposium on Significance
reaction, but it is usually futile to do so because rims distinct of Tests and Properties of Concrete and Concrete-Making
to the naked eye or to the lower power of the stereo- Materials, ASTM 169-A, pp. 125-143, 1966.
'microscope may not be visible in thin section. Features
[5] Erlin, B., "Methods Used in Petrographic Studies of
visible in the examination of thin sections of concrete are
Concrete," Analytical Techniques for Hydraulic Cements
shown in table 5.
and Concrete, ASTM STP-395, pp. 3-17, 1966.
12.3 Metallographic Microscope Examination[12].-
There are two advantages of examining concrete with a [6] Erlin, B., "Analytical Techniques, Observations of the
metallographic microscope: (1) only one prepared surface Performance of Concrete in Service," HighwayResearch
is required, and (2) the polished surface enhances and allows Board Special ReportNo. 106, Highway Research Board,
etching the residual cement. When the objective of the HRBRA, Publication 309-01790-4, 1970.
petrographic examination is particularly concerned with
the composition and characteristics of the cementitious [7] Brown, L. S., "Some Observations on the Mechanics
materials, polished sections that are produced by grinding of Alkali-AggregateReaction," ASTM Bulletin No. 205,
and polishing a sawed piece of concrete are particularly p. 40ff, April 1955.
useful in detecting unusual amounts of free calcium oxide,
magnesium oxide, or their hydration products and other [8] McConnell, D., R. C. Mielenz, W. Y. Holland, and
cementitious constituents. Although the coarser relict K. T. Greene, "Cement-Aggregate Reaction in Concrete,"
cementitious grains may be far from a representative Journal of the America Concrete Institute, JACIA,
sample, they can reveal characteristics that, if correlated Proceedings, vol. 44, pp. 93-128, October 1947.
with behavior and history of concrete, can be extremely
helpful in interpreting behavior. Table 6 lists constituents [9] Symposium on Alakali-Carbonate Rock Reactions,
of concrete visible, after preparation, using different HighwayResearch RecordNo. 45, HRBRA, Washington,
microscopes. Table 7 is a list of substances reported as DC, 1964.
occurring in concrete.
[ 10] Idorn, G. M., Durability of Concrete Structures in
13. Report Denmark, Technical University of Denmark, Copenhagen,
Denmark, p. 208, January 1967.
13.1 Figure 1 may serve as a typical reporting form
along with a cover letter. The report for the petrographic [11] Mielenz, R. C., "Petrography Applied to Portland
examination should include: Cement Concrete," ReviewsinEngineeringGeology, edited
Location and orientation of samples in the construc- by T. Fluhr and R. E Legget, Geological Society of America,
tion, products, or types of specimens. GAEGA, vol. 1, pp. 1-38, 1962.
History of samples (as available).
Physical and chemical tests made on the samples, [12] Brownmiller, L. T., "The Microscopic Structure of
with results. Hydrated Portland Cement," Journal of the American
Description of samples and a report on mixture Concrete Institute, JACIA, Proceedings, vol. 39, pp. 193-
proportions (if available or estimated), workmanship, 210, January 1943.
construction practice, and original quality of concrete
in the construction (as available). [13] Lerch, W., E W. Ashton, and R. H. Bogue, "The
Interpretation of nature of materials, and chemical Sulfoaluminates of Calcium," National Bureau ofStandards
and physical events that contributed to success or distress Journal of Research,JRNBA, vol. 2, pp. 715-731, 1929.
of the concrete.
[14] Idorn, G. M., "Concrete Deterioration of a
14. References Foundation," Acta Polytechnia, Copenhagen, Denmark,
APOBA, No. 4, pp. 5-48, 1957.
[1] Handbook for Concrete and Cement, Corps of
Engineers, U.S. Army Waterways Experiment Station, [15] Idorn, G. M., Disintegration of Field Concrete,
Vicksburg, MS, with quarterly supplements, 1949. Danish National Institute of Building Research and
605
USBR 4856
Academy of Technical Science, Commission on Alkali [20] Taylor, H.EW., "Crystal Structures of Some Double
Reactions in Concrete, Progress Report N1, DNBRA, 39 Hydroxide Minerals," Mineralogical Magazine, MNLMB,
pp., 1956. vol. 39, No. 304, pp. 377-389, December 1973.
[16] Hutton, C. O., "Two Unusual Occurrences of [21] Smith, Peter, "Investigation and Repair of Damage
Paraluminite," New Zealand Journal of Science and to Concrete Caused by Formwork and Falsework Fire,"
Technology, NZTBA, vol. 26B, pp. 242-244, 1945. ACIJournal, JACIA, No. 11, November 1963; ACI
Proceedings, PACIA, vol. 60, pp. 1535-1566, 1963.
[ 17] Lea, E M., The Chemistry of Cement and Concrete,
[22] Green, j. K., "Some Aids to the Assessmentof Fire
3d ed., Edward Arnold Ltd., London, England, pp. XIV
and 727. Damage," Concrete, COCTA, vol. 10, No. 1, pp. 14-17,
January 1976.
[18] Mather, B., "Cracking of Concrete in the Tuscaloosa [23 ] Winchell, A. N., and H. Winchell, The Microscopical
Lock," HighwayResearchBoardProceedings, HRBRA, vol. Characters of Artificial Inorganic Solid Substances,
51, pp. 218-233, 1951. AcademicPress, New York and London, 1964.
[19] Erlin, Bernard, and David C. Stark, "Identification [24] Dana, E. S., Textbook of Mineralogy, revised by W.
and Occurrence of Thaumasite in Concrete," Highway E. Ford, 4th ed., pp. 273-274, John Wiley and Sons, New
Research RecordNo. 113, HRBRA, pp. 108-113, 1966. York, NY, 1932.
606
USBR 4856
O
8
-.-o
o
e', ,.
o 0a
-o 8 .=_ 2
o -u
,. ,,o
0
0
+ ".'. cs 0 < "F .
.o ._
-
'- 8
_ "
o , r, - o
< o "8 ' '
+ .,- . o
o , o- , o "-'
. o o .o
.- -
=o ,,8
o
o0--
o 8
X (,. ,_ C e"
0 ,,, V _.
8
r
o
.r + o 8 "no 0
"-'0 m 8
: o o
z - o
I.
8
8
0 o
o
! 0
o
"r. 8
o .,...
<
% o 8
Z
+
u zo o .. ..
-
.
8
=;
'A
o e''x' :
"-- O M O
=N ,-
0 . N:-=
o .o oo
o oO e" e.. . e-
< O
",
o oN ._ .m
607
USBR 4856
8 ,-, ,.
0 ,-,
o. o c
.c .- E
g s
.- o N
- _ ..=
o o 8
g
._
O
c .,.
,
K8 0
.o
o 0 ._, e
E '
oo
.
e'
-
o
- 0 0
N ._
8
r 8
. 8
E
8
r
O o
I.
<
Z _ &-
o0 o0 %9
o
-'So
o
o
X
G '..O
Ou'a
#
o O
<
o .- .. "
< go
,. _-
._
L)
0 e
= .- ,
e-,
w.
o . "
"N :_= m e
.o
.__. = o e-, O
. = "
0
o'3
608
USBR 4856
Surface Hardness Dehydration to 212 F (100 C) removes Beneath the softened concrete, which can be
free water; dehydration is essentially corn- tested in accordance with USBR 4805, con-
plete at 1004 F (540 C); calcium hydrox- crete is probably normal if it has not under-
ide goes to calcium oxide between 842 gone color change. Establish by coring for
and 932 F (450 and 500 C). Paste for compressive tests, by wear tests
expands with thermal coefficient effect and (CRD-C 52) [21], and by scratching with
then shrinks, cracks, decrepitates, and a knife.
becomes soft [21].
Cracking Perpendicular to face and internal, where Examination of surface, ultrasonic tests,
heating or cooling caused excess tensile coring, and petrographic examination [21].
stresses. In some new concrete, resembles
large-scale shrinkage cracking; may pene-
trate up to 3.9 inches (100 ram) but may
heal autogenously [21].
Color Change.-When concrete Concrete made with sedimentary or meta- Color change is the factormost useful to
has not spalled, observe depth morphic aggregate shows permanent color investigator; permits recognizing how
of pink color to estimate fire change on heating. Color normal to 446 F deeply a temperature of about 572 o F
exposure. (230 C); goes from pink to red between (300 C) occurred [22].
554 and 1094 F (290 and 590 C);
between 1094 and 1652 F (590 and
900 C), color changes to gray and then to
buff [21]. For temperatures up to about
932 F (500 C), temperature distribution
is little affected by using carbonate rather
than siliceous aggregate [22]. At 1063 F
(573 C), low quartz inverts to high with a
0.85-percentincrease in volume, producing
popouts. Spalling over steel to expose one-
fourth of bar at 1454 F (790 C); white-
powdered decomposed hydration products
at 1652 F (900 C). Surface cracking at
about 554 F (290 C); deeper cracking at
about 1004 F (540 C).
Aggregate Beha vior.-Aggregate Aggregates differ in thermal diffusivity, con- Changes upon heating are often accompan-
behavior affects strength, ductivity, and coefficient of expansion. ied by a volume change [21].
modulus, spaUing, cracking, Heat transmission decreases from concrete
surface hardness, and residual made with highly siliceous aggregate,
thermal strains [21]. sandstone, traprock, limestone, and light-
weight aggregates[21].
Spa/ling Occurs subparallel to free face; followed by
breaking off of saucer-like pieces especially
at corners and edges [21].
Compressive Strength and Elastic Reduction in strength of concrete containing Determinations by compressive tests and
Modulus.-For concrete at least siliceous gravel after heating, then cooling static modulus of cores; USBR 4805 for
1-year old, strength will increase and testing: qualitative determination; USBR 4597 [21].
after cooling from 572 F Heated to temperature, Reduction,
(300 C) if design strength was F (oC) percent
attained [22].
356 (180) 25
698 (370) 50
1058 (570) 80
609
USBR 4856
Alkali-aggregate Silica Gel Generally clear and colorless or white and porcelaneous; generally hard and
reaction desiccated; occurs in voids, fractures, rock sockets, porous aggregateparti-
cles, and cementitious paste and as an exudation on exposed surfaces.
Reaction Rims Often clarified; occur around reactive aggregateparticles; incipient fractures
associatedwith reaction rims may occur within aggregateparticles.
Sulfate attack Sulfate Minerals Generally white, fibrous, subspherulitic, or platy crystals; occurs in voids,
(gypsum, ettringite, etc.) fractures, and rock sockets.
Fractures Generally occur in paste; pattern cracking occurs on exposed surfaces; gener-
ally associated with formation of sulfate minerals; often filled with sulfate
minerals.
Freeze-thaw Carbonation Generally white, calcium carbonate deposits; occurs in voids, fractures, rock
sockets, and paste.
Fractures Generally occur in paste and around aggregate particles near and parallel to
exposed surfaces; may also occur within absorptive, clayey, and/or poor
quality aggregateparticles; associatedwith formation of ice crystals in con-
crete or aggregateparticles due to freezing; often filled with calcium
carbonate.
610
USBR 4856
ca
Z
U-I ca ---
N
U
<
-0
<
u .. ._
8
e" Z
.<
.o <u
8 OQ
=nO
e"
O 0
o
I
' ca
o '- "'=
",-. E . E
ca m -- 0
o
o._ '-
<D
0
-.. 2 - .-
.<
u
ca U
Z N i c c
o 'o
caoo8 ca ca=
Q - -' 0
Z "- E ;'=:-= =
<
9
._ .:
8-One=
< , '- '
o ca' ca--,
u
z 2
611
USBR 4856
612
USBR 4856
o "
,, c-
rr A
Z o
.s ,
o .-
Z
.<
.=_
8 oo
o0
0
e0 '-- o
.,o 8 .o -a E -r
- z ..
'- ,.., E
II ii II II II II , , , ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, , : ,,,, II II II II ii " o o
= o"8
._ = .o
.
o
z
0 0 0
< 8 8 8 o ,.
o
-- 8
o v v v
0
d d d
o 8 .s
613
USBR 4856
++" ,++ + +
d' I I
z.- I I
i:"+q
EO
.. .-.:13
d'i u
1 h ,1=
8
. -
' Z 8 8
0 "
..
8Z u
614
USBR 4856
E
v
E
g ..
v
k
0
m
E
E .0 o 0
v ,, 0
r eL eL
e" "_, ", "_,
O (U
oZ.=
w'.-- (13 "
8 E IU
z 5 "
o0 eL
E 2
o ,
g.
8
r" e.,
.- - .Iw
C c d.---',P o
8
o ZC ,-' "S
O
o
"5
g
m m
,.-,-(,Dr-
":-: " 0 ",
' eL m eL
.E b
% % ,,, , ,.
f
e"
8 O..
K
"
e- !
I
E'5
- .
eL
615
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR )
" BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4900-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4900; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: C 900-82.
3. Summary of Procedure 6.1 The apparatus requires three basic subsystems: (1)
a pullout insert, (2) a loading system, and (3) a load-
3.1 A metal insert is embedded in fresh concrete or measuring system (fig. 1).
shotcrete; after either has hardened, the pullout strength
is determined by measuring the maximum force required NOTE 1.-A center-pull hydraulic jack with a suitable pressure
to pull insert from the mass. The configuration of the gauge and bearing ring have been used satisfactorily.
embedded insert and bearing ring of the loading system
affects shape of pullout fracture within the mass and the 6.1.1 The pullout insert shall be made of metal, and
shall consist of a cylindrical head to be embedded in the
measured pullout strength.
fresh concrete or shotcrete, and a shaft firmly attached
to the head.
4. Significance and Use
6.1.2 For tests where the conic fracture intersects
the exposed surface of the concrete or shotcrete, the loading
4.1 For a given concrete or shotcrete and test apparatus, system shall consist of a bearing ring to be placed against
the pullout strength is related to other strength test results. hardened surface concentrically around pullout insert shaft,
Such strength relationships depend on configuration of and a loading apparatus with necessary load-measuring
embedded insert, bearing ring dimensions, depth of devices that can be readily attached to pullout shaft. For
embedded tests where conic fracture surface does not
1 AnnualBook ofASTMStandards,vol. 04.02. intersect exposed surface, a bearing ring shall be provided
2 Annual Book ofASTM Standards, vol. 04.03. on the concrete or shotcrete by using a highly compressible
616
USBR 4900
Conic fracturef
Pullout insert
Note - Concrete or shotcrete surfacemay be top or bottom of slab or verticalor inclined wall.
617
USBR 4900
9.i The pullout apparatus shall be calibrated at least 11.1 Pullout inserts may be attached to forms prior
annually, and after all repairs or adjustments. Calibration to placement of concrete (fig. 3), embedded in horizontal
shall be by one of the methods prescribed in USBR 1104 unformed concrete or shotcrete surfaces, or embedded deep
or with a compression testing machine conforming to within the concrete or shotcrete.
requirements of USBR 4039 using the calibration 11.1.1 Attach pullout inserts to forms using bolts
procedures described in appendix X1. or other acceptable methods that firmly secure inserts in
their proper location prior to concrete placement. All
10. Conditioning inserts for same test shall be embedded to same depth,
and each shaft shall be perpendicular to formed surface.
10.1 Because it is the intent of this procedure to 11.1.2 Place surface pullout inserts directly into the
evaluate strength of concrete or shotccrete inplace in a fresh concrete or shotcrete such that uniform depth of
structure, no special conditioning should be given to the embedment and a plane bearing surface perpendicular to
portion to be tested. insert shaft axis are ensured (fig. 4).
(,Ploic disc
I Wood I,
Wosher--I I o form J,
ir- i uu
(o) Form mus$ be removed prior fo (b) Tes pullour prior fo form
pullouf fesr. removal.
J
Wood form -- " o '* F -- fCompressible disc
f -
Washer--- O
-Plosftc disc
#
618
USBR 4900
A
fHold here with fingers
h = height of conic frustrum from insert head to
f large-base surface, in inches (millimeters).
,---Nut
12.2 Convert test readings to force on the basis of the
Plos'l'ic disk ---Wosher
F calibration data. When a stress calculation is required,
I ' o
I calculate pullout strength by dividing pullout force by
assumed area of frustrum (fig. 2) resulting from pullout
a .,3
0 fracture using the following equations:
o
o P
'F- #v = (2)
---].
o
Figure 4. - Method of placing insert into horizontalsurface of pullout strength, in pound force per
fresh concrete or shotcrete. square inch (megapascals);
p= pullout force, in pound force
NOTE 6.-The placing of inserts into unformed surfaces requires (kilonewtons);
special awareness Training and supervision of field personnel A= fracture surface area, in square inches
may be necessary to ensure proper installation. For placement (square millimeters); and
of inserts deep within a concrete or shotcrete, follow d2, d3, and h = as previously defined.
manufacturer's instructions.
12.3 Figure 5 shows a typical calculation form.
11.2 When concrete or shotcrete is to be tested, remove 12.4 A curve must be plotted, depicting cone pull-out
all hardware used for securing pullout inserts in position. strength against compressive strengths of whatever
Before mounting hydraulic ram for testing, ensure a smooth configuration or method of obtaining comparison samples
normal bearing surface by removing debris and surface that are desired, to establish a factor to convert from pull-
abnormalities. out strengths. No typical curve is included with this pro-
11.3 Use a bearing ring for all surface pullout test cedure because so many variables exist. To plot such a
configurations. Place bearing ring around pullout insert curve, a series of points would have to be established for
shaft, connect shaft to hydraulic ram, and tighten pullout whatever mix is chosen, desired age of mix, and a method
assembly snugly against bearing surface, ensuring that of fabrication and curing.
bearing ring is centered around shaft and flush against
bearing surface. 13. Report
11.4 If insert is to be tested to rupture of specimen,
load at a uniform rate that will cause pullout rupture to
13.1 Figure 5 may also be used as a reporting form.
occur in 120+30 seconds. Record maximum gauge reading The report shall include:
to nearest half of the least division on dial. If insert is
to be tested only to a specified level for acceptance, load Identification, from which specific location of pullout
at a uniform rate that will reach specified level in 120+30 test can later be determined.
seconds. Type of concrete or shotcrete surface tested; e.g.,
formed surface, unformed surface, or interior.
12. Calculations Dimensions of the pullout insert and bearing ring
(sketch or define dimensions).
12.1 To ensure maintaining a cone fracture with an
Maximum load.
apex angle between 65 and 70 , calculate the apex angle
Abnormalities in ruptured specimen and in loading
as follows:
cycle.
Curing methods used and moisture condition of
(1) concrete or shotcrete at time of test.
Other information regarding unusual job conditions
where: that may affect strength.
a = apex angle of conic frustrum in degrees;
d2 = diameter of pullout insert head, in inches 14. Precision and Bias
(millimeters);
d3 = inside diameter of bearing ring or large-base 14.1 The precision for this procedure has not been
diameter of assumed conic frustrum, in determined.
inches (millimeters); and 14.2 Bias.-Existing stress may affect results.
619
USBR 4900
APPENDIX
(Mandatory Information)
X1.1 Calibrate pullout-hydraulic loading system calibration load level. With available center-pull jacks,
(pump, gauge, and hydraulic ram) with a testing machine friction in system produces different calibration curves
meeting applicable requirements of USBR 4039. on an increasing series of loads as opposed to decreasing
X1.2 Place hydraulic ram between the two testing loads; therefore, only increasing loads should be used.
machine bearing blocks. Position ram and bearing blocks In general, readings should be taken at about every 20
to ensure concentric and axial loading, and extend piston load levels distributed within range of loads anticipated
to level anticipated for actual pullout testing. Carefully in use.
position testing machine head against pullout ram. X1.4 Using readings obtained during calibration
loading, calculate a linear regression equation using the
NOTE Xl.l-Protection of bearing blocks is required to least-squares curve-fitting method. Pullout testing may
prevent damage to testing machine. Cold-rolled steel plate occur within a narrow range of the capacity of pullout
at least 0.5 inch (13 mm) thick is recommended. jack. If the test results fall within a narrow range,
calculate regression equation based on calibration
X1.3 Using hydraulic pump, apply loads progres- readings in that range, excluding those outside test range.
sively over range of anticipateduse, and record hydraulic X1.5 Figures 1 and 2 in USBR 1430 show a typical
pressure gauge reading and testing machine load at each calibration form and a calibration plot, respectively.
620
USBR 4900
t, 8
I
II
=
.o
..
E
<1o- : -
o
.=
o . -.-
E- -.
,1.. -. N N N N
[]
I 1, '.
i ( I 1 I
I I I I I I
<-.-.
'
II
621
@ UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
( USBR 4901-92
PROCEDURE FOR
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4901; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This procedure is somewhat similar to ASTM
C 157 (Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Cement Mortar and Concrete). The major item of variation is:
ASTM C 157-Includes length change of concrete and mortar due to causes other than externally applied forces and temperature
changes.
USBR 4901-A procedure primarily for determining drying shrinkage of concrete using specimens of larger size than those
described in ASTM C 157.
1.1 This designation covers the procedure for 4.1 Measurementsof length change permit the assess-
determination of length change of concrete due to a ment of the potential for linear and volumetric contraction
moisture loss from the concrete. of the concrete when subjected to a loss of moisture. This
1.2 The term "length change," as used herein, is defined procedure is particularly useful for comparative evaluation
as "the decrease in a linear dimension of a test specimen of the drying shrinkage potential of different concrete
caused by loss of moisture from specimen." mixtures.
622
U S BR 4:90
Fdgure I. - M,]d {,,r <;utin.4 d- b> i- l: ,:k' %0-inclu .: IO5!- b/ ]02 :,!;
7(i2-1nm: ]icrlgth cHI]I;L ip.l(il:]:]ea]5 ]l]i(!r[5 JIL ITl;llLIn{ed ()Ill} a{
1215
Figure 2 - Split sl:,eel rq:,,r;/I :m,>]d f,:f cring I;!.!.- b> AI!,-Jnc]-3 : i57.
b y 511 i! i - : n r n :, 5; pe < i r :: u .
Fiigute d FLJ]lcrum pllale slu;nin gauges used f,:,r detem-nining length
char, ges ol ihn, vu- steel bars pllaced ahm, gside thlC gauges serve as;
ff n, ecess;p/, it ,car, I-:,u pafiullil), ,at o:,,mph.:dy reJ!e.ased :he st,dal:ds, f,,r" auge dial setings
C{)]71F)Cti{:I]I :1 C:l:.)J-]['rc[[e i[-J ].:l'l:)]iI;;l.
6.13 ,Gae;e p:,inrs t,:: be: threadle,J into Msets when and :L a tempe.ature ,a,f 73,.d+3.0 "F (23,.0:].7 'C:)Tanks
speciim, ens ,re unl:n,::lded, shal bc staindess seell, as shown :,i lime-saturated water also mailnained at 73.43.0 'F
e,,n figure 2 ,,{ USBP, .?!1'08 The h::,,cking nut shall be: h,,ass. may be. used s; an a]:ernae to, a mc,,{st to.am.
I5.2 Z<'tcrnli'.,!' I'%,r:i'h;,v_,, nS,/e V6Brd'r,;,rs, ,m,3' Z',%,? g ,15.4.2 A drying r,,:x::,m wih suit:able rcks s, hail be
Rc;,ds.-These ]items sl-,,t]i] ocm(c, rm u::: he requ[zemencs of prc,.viicled t.,:)r storing spec:[nmns in air The 'acks shall be
U S,B ]q .l 1 '!) 2:. designed t:,:r fee d,cu]latic,,n of air a>,:mnd the specimens
G3 Ze,g, gk, Mea',:,.er'men'ga: aidl sha]ll be so siima/edl:, with, respect to n, eares wail or
6.3.] The 'i- k,:y 4- b'.i ',0-iinch ,:l(K:l-by 100-by <.:,:he obsucth::,,n:, that ai circuiati{:,n is no:,: estrict:ed! in
"'l(.iCll-]'-l-.IZ]-J )F]I]['[SJIIS shiIll I've' me4suret.;I t:,:lr ]e:lgt[- c:t'al-g;e, usJFg ilner''en[ng sF:,ac:e. Ai maintaine.d at 73.4--:2.0 F
a fiat-bed o:m:panau,r ,{fig. !i,i:l. The ,c,,:mparator c:.,:nsiiss :27k0_+].1 C) andl at a rehtive I-mm, idity c,.f 50!4 percent
c,# a igiid:, in'Jar smel t:ramle whh a ma.vabe tah,e :hat sln]l be drcuae.d through the re, ore in a uniform, manne
suippc,.rs specJimen at d:lee pa:ins. Each end ff: the fiame
h,oids an t:lF,igh invr steel pos. One l:,,,st is fined >.'rM- 7. Precautions
an adljluls;uble head a the cx.F,:, :nd the other post is fitted
with a diall gauge The head c,f rl-e dlius6ng screw md 7.1 This test prc,,cedure may in',c,,lve haz:adous
stem ,,: d:ial gauge .oc, nuct -*e s,ain]le.ss ste'el .gauge F:,,nms m;::eia]s,. ,:pe'r:mions, and eqn:ipment:, and dXe:.s no: claim
in each end of sF,,ecin-,er. A sumd.>rdl bar :,,f imp:at seel t,:, d,ffress lll safety pra, b,]iems as.s,c, ciated wh:]h, its use. It
:111; )S i ;i,: n i c,n c.,; ) 11 n,p,k]l rdb,[ } F iS 1Ltsed tO, ].)lk:}t a i *-
V.' it [F]I ITICa kll[ll'q bid
is. he resp.ns.ib][iky ,of the use. , .c,onsuh and establlish,
a consumt ,:]:id setting. appn,,p'iate sa{ety and hea]Ith, F,actices andl deterrnm, e
632 Fulcruln- phe scniin gges ,,:# d-ae vyF, e st,own appliicabffilt), ,:ff re.gu]ar.c, ry ]limh:afions prior t., 'use
o.n flgu, re d sh, a]] k:,e u, sedl , l:neasuze tt-,e ]erigth change
o.n c?dilnders. Th, ese gmges are invJ steel {mes ssel:nble'd 8. Test S;peciimens
t,o F,,ermii short ]l,,:,ngi]tud[n;t] n:avel usMg a f]la p.hte
spring ar;ngemenv. A dial n:,ge is mC, Lnned between fl-e SI Mix c{m,.:ete in a su.itab[e ]ab,oratcary m:ixe in
mc:,vab]ie frames for Ilengtt-><hange readings In''at steel cc:,.rdan,e uiffh tke F,F:,liicable F:,r,:,visik)ns c,f USBR 4')2:.
bars serve as. standards f:o dhe .dktl g:L]ge se'tJngs. I)ete'lllqline ,,.,:Hqsisleflc}, I[)] concrete b3l, the sIump lelS, t iil:
6,4 h,r:mg m'd 1)O','ni Ro,,:m's: acc ,rdan, ce w i th USBR d I; 43,.
6.-i ] The Jllq,,::ist >Llom uls.ed [or c:uriaq] the spe.ciime.ns 8..1.1 C<:,nce.te t:,:r the 4- by by 3,(l,-iinch (i00- by
mus be maintailnecl ',t : zelafive hunTildit)' ab,,:,,'e i!)'l:X percenh 100-b? 760-ram) test sF,.ec[men, s skali cc:,nta:in a.;.gregate
62!==.
USBR 4901
not exceeding 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm) in size. If test 10.2 Subsequent Storage.-At end of initial curing
specimen is made from a mix having a larger maximum period, make a second length measurement. Store
size, the concrete must be wet-sieved over a 1-1/2-inch specimens in a drying room conforming to requirements
(37.5-mm) sieve. In this case, the effect of wet-sieving of section 6.4.2.
on the mix proportions must be considered in interpreting
the results. 11. Procedure
8.1.2 Place concrete in the cylinder molds in three
layers using internal vibrators to consolidate concrete. Place 11.1 Make length measurements on each specimen
concrete in the beam mold in two approximately equal after periods of air storage of 3, 7, 14, 21, 28, 42, and
layers. Consolidate each layer using external vibration by 60 days and every 30 days thereafter for 1 year for the
placing mold on a table vibrator. As top layer is being 4- by 4- by 30-inch (100- by 100- by 760-mm) prism
placed in beam mold, work concrete thorougly around each specimens and for 2 years for the cylinder specimens.
insert with the fingers. The top layer shall slightly overfill 11.1.1 When making measurements, ensure that
the mold. After consolidation is complete, strike off excess gauge points on specimen and feeler pins on instrument
material with a straightedge. After completion of molding, are clean. When making measurements with horizontal
loosen the device for holding the inserts in position to comparator, carefully place specimens on instrument
prevent any restraint of the inserts during initial shrinkage supports. Place gauge point of specimen against neutral
of specimens. instrument pin. Release the gauge feeler pin to contact
gauge point on opposite end of specimen. Record dial
9. Calibration and Standardization reading to nearest 0.0001 inch (0.0025 mm).
11.1.2 For measurements with fulcrum plate strain
9.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- gauge, clasp gauge firmly with one end in either hand.
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests Bring the fourth and index fingers in contact with specimen.
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are Then, move instrument pins to specimen carefully by
covered under that particular procedure or standard. closing fingers until instrument pins are in contact with
9.2 The comparator and fulcrum plate strain gauge gauge points. The instrument pins shall be perpendicular
shall be checked against a standard reference bar, as to the specimen to ensure correct readings and to prevent
described in ASTM C 490. Table X1.2 in appendix X1 breakage of feeler pins.
shows a typical calibrated dial reading correction factor
for temperature variations. The dial gauge setting of the 12. Calculations
measuring device shall be checked by reference bar, as a
minimum, at beginning and end of each set of readings 12.1 Calculate the length change as follows:
and at intermediate intervals when a large number of
specimens are being measured. ,:Io-4
ALt --
GL (1)
9.3 The adequacy to maintain the temperature and
humidity control have to be assured by checking with a
certified thermometer and humidity gauge. where:
624
USBR 4901
The source and identification of each material used. or by giving details of any procedure not conforming
Type, maximum size, moisture condition, and to this cohdition.
gradation of aggregate. Length of drying period for each observation.
Size of specimens. Length change data reported as percent decrease in
Concrete mixture data, including consistency. linear dimension to nearest 0.001 percent based on initial
Description of consolidation of concrete, including measurement made at start of drying period.
whether rodding or external or internal vibration was Any other pertinent information.
used.
Conditions and periods of moist curing prior and
subsequent to removal of molds if different from those 14. Precision and Bias
specified in section 10.
Description of storage condition, either by indicating 14.1 The precision and bias statements for this
whether air storage outlined in section 10 was followed procedure have not been established at this time.
625
USBR 4901
P,
<I ! !
I1 II
,L
8
"8
o
%- I,
"-
P
i
._
..
a
r
II
._
EL,
'.6., #O W
11 u
._
'
. .
626
USBR 4901
.,i -1
,,4
te 3 "
U
.g
e
g
.o g e,
tk
t, k ._
,:
627
USBR 4901
0
q,D
1,0
0
,-
1,0
0
N
PO
0
0
0
IM
N
t9
Z
o >-
a
-c
o Or)
>-
<[
C
0 Z
J c
(.9 E
0
i
r
0 0
N
0
0
0
oJ
0
O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-- N 0 r.- 0
628
USBR 4901
APPENDIX
X1.1 The Bureau of Reclamationprimarily uses 10-, Was found to be 0.96 x 10-6 inch per inch per F at
20-, and 28-inch reference bars made of annealed invar a base temperature of 70 F (21.1 C). The Bureau's
steel, that most textbooks show as having a coefficient Materials Laborato/ Procedures Manual, dated January 2,
of thermal expansion of 0.6 x 10-8 inch per inch per 1951, shows temperature corrections for a 30-inch
E Reference ASTM C 490 states that reference bars comparator to be applied to invar bars No. 1 and No. 2
"shall be of a steel alloy having a coefficient of thermal based on a base temperature of 73.4 F (23.0 C).
expansion no greater than 2 x 10 -8 inch per inch per X1.3 Based on the above data and that most Bureau
C," which is equivalent to 1.1 x 10-8 inch per inch per gauges used with comparators are designed to be read
oE to 10.4 inches, tables XI.1 and X1.2 were generated to
X1.2 Bureau files reveal that invar steel furnished reflect corrections to gauge readings through different
for reference gauges and fabricated in the Denver temperature ranges, based on a base temperature of
Research Laboratory was checked for the thermal. 73.4 F for a zero reading, for 10-, 20-, and 28-inch
coefficient of expansion in July 1948, along with a 30-inch reference bars.
flat-bed comparator and its reference bars. The coefficient
Total Shrinkage
or Expansion
Gauge Length inch/F mm/C Temperature Range with Zero Corrections
inches mm x 10-8 x 10-6 oF oC
Values shown in this table are based on a thermal coefficient of expansion for invar steel equal to
0.96 10-6 inch per inch per F and gauges accurate to 10-4 inch, based on 73.4 F (23.0 C) as a
zero reading. Table values are not valid for reference bar lengths other than those shown
or for dial gauges with an accuracy other than 10-4 inch.
629
USBR 4901
Table X1.2.-Temperature correction factors for various invar reference bars by gauge length.
10-inch or 254-mm Gauge Lensth 20-inch or 508-mm Gauge Length 28-inch or 711-mm Gauge Length
Temperature Range Correction, Temperature Range Correction, Temperature Range Correction,
F C inch 10-4 F C inch 10-4 F C inch 10-4
1Values shown in this table are based on a thermal coefficient of expansion for invar steel equal to 0.96 10-6 inch per inch
per F and gauges accurate to 10 -4 inch, based on 73.4 F (23.0 C) as a zero reading. Table values are not valid for reference
bar lengths other than those shown or for dial gaugeswith an accuracy other than 10-4 inch.
630
UNITED STATES
INTERIORBuREAU
DEPARTMENT
OF RECLAMATION
OF THE (
USBR 4902-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4902; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM designation: D 3398-81.
63l
USBR 49O2
632
USBR 4902
where:
11.1 Using oven-dried samples for each size fraction,
run determinations of percentage of voids at each of the
V10 = percentage of voids in aggregate compacted at
two levels of compaction in accordance with procedure
10 drops per layer,
given in this section. Use a new sample of material selected Vs0 = percentage of voids in aggregate compacted at
from the oven-dried material for each test. First, run two 50 drops per layer,
tests for each size at the compaction of 10 drops of tamping
M10 = average net mass of aggregate in mold
rod per layer. Then, run test two more times using 50 compacted at 10 drops per layer, in pound
drops of rod per layer as compactive effort.
mass (kilograms),
11.1.1 Place cylindrical mold on a uniform, solid
Ms0 ---- average net mass of aggregate in mold
foundation. Fill mold in three layers. Gently place aggregate
compacted at 50 drops per layer, in pound
into mold by feeding from a hand scoop until mold is
mass (kilograms),
about one-third full. The distance from point of discharge s = bulk-dry specific gravity of aggregate size
from hand scoop to surface of each layer should be about
fraction,
6 inches (150 mm). Level surface by hand and compact
vm = volume of cylindrical mold, in cubic feet (cubic
layer using 10 drops of tamping rod evenly distributed
meters), and
over surface. Apply each drop by holding rod Vertically Dw = density of water (62.4 lbm/ft 3 at 39 F
with its rounded end about 2 inches (50 mm) above surface or 1000 kg/m 3 at 4 C or corresponding
of aggregateand releasing so that rod falls freely. Place
density at measured temperature).
a second layer in mold using same procedure, filling mold
about two-thirds full. As before, level surface and apply 12.1.1 Figure 3 shows a typical calculation form.
10 drops of rod. Fill remaining space in mold with a third 12.2 Determine the particle index Ia for each size
layer and again level surface and apply same compactive fraction tested by using nomograph shown on figure 4
effort, 10 drops of rod. After final layer has been compacted, or as follows:
add individual peices of aggregate to make surface of
aggregatemass even with rim of mold, with no projections Ia = 1.25 V10- 0.25 Vs0- 32.0 (3)
above rim. Determine net mass of aggregatein mold to
12.3 Calculate the weighted particle index of an
an accuracy of at least 0.009 Ibm (4.1 g).
aggregatecontaining several sizes by averagingthe particle
NOTE 6.-In compacting the aggregate, height of drop of index data for each size fraction weighted on basis of
tamping rod may be controlled by using a rule to check height, percentage of fraction in original grading of sample as
or by adding a loose-fitting sleeve over rod with a slot-and-pin received or, preferably, on basis of average grading of
arrangement that will permit rod to move about 2 inches (50 material to be used in work. Figure 4 shows a typical
ram) vertically within sleeve when placed on surface of aggregate. example method for determining the weighted particle
index. For sizes represented by less than 10 percent in
11.1.2 Repeat filling of mold using the same sample the grading, for which no particle index data were obtained,
and compaction, and make a second determination of net use the average of the particle index of the next coarser
mass of aggregatein mold as described in 11.1.1. Use the and next finer sizes for which data are available, or the
average mass of the two runs to calculate the percentage particle index for the next coarser or finer size if a value
of voids at 10 drops for each size. s available only in one direction.
NOTE Z-The net mass obtained in the replicate determinations 13. Report
should agree within about 0.5 percent.
11.1.3 For the higher degree of compaction test, 13.1 Figure 3 along with a cover letter may be used
follow the steps outlined in 11.1.1 and 11.1.2, except use as the reporting form, which shall include:
50 drops of tamping rod in compacting each layer. Again Identification of aggregate
average the net mass from two runs for use in computing Weighted particle index
percentage of voids at 50 drops for each size fraction.
14. Precision and Bias
12. Calculations
14.1 This procedure is primarily used in research work,
12.1 Calculate percentage of voids in each size fraction and the precision has not currently been determined.
of aggregate for both 10 and 50 drops per layer: 14.2 There is no known bias.
633
USBR 4902
%
-
."4
Z' I
-
o
"o
N "3
0
o
"o
o
o
e,i
!-
"4
I,
c-
"O
634
USBR 4902
8 o 8 " 60 ''
t %
-o . , t! t
-, _ *" 0 t$ "-:
o
.. .o,.
," "
oo t
II If
tt N
O
.0
, ..
0
t: .
I
._
t
e s
"8
t
ta . -g 0 k% -.,o
,, tt 'k "_."
t
d e-
tr'x tt. .'
o o ,t, .
c z o z c z o Z .
Z
o .. -:
635
USBR 4902
, - . C
..=
L
C
o
lu
636
USBR 4902
34 50
637
.- -'- UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
"" BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4903-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4903; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is patterned after Test
Methods CRD-C, 119-53, "Method of Test for Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate;" and CRD-C, 120-55, "Method
of Test for Flat and Elongated Particles in Fine Aggregate," both from the Handbook for Concrete and Cement [1] 1.
638
USBR 4903
5. Terminology
r "J
/"
639
USBR 49O3
o
8. Sampling oo-- - -- -- o o o
. ro to
8.1 Samples of coarse and fine aggregateshall be obtained _T
in accordance with USBR 4075 and shall be dry sieved SIEVE SIZE
640
USBR 49O3
Table 1. - Cumulative percent retained or passing various sieves on coarse aggregate fraction
of a 6-inch sieve reduced to a 3-inch sieve.
Retained Passing,
Nominal Sieve Size CPR CPP CPR Times Times
-21 F = 1.266 F = 1.266"
Table 2. - Minimum representative sample size required by test designations USBR 4075, 4136, and 4903.
6 to 3 inches (150 to 75 mm) 4,700 2140 1,175 535 1,375 625 129 58
3 to 1-1/2 inches (75 to 37.5 mm) 600 280 150 70 165 75 54 25
1-1/2 to 3/4 inch (37.5 to 19.0 mm) 80 40 20 10 21 10 29 13
3/4 to 3/8 inch (19.0 to 9.5 mm) 10 4.5 2.5 1.1 2.6 1.2 14.5 6.5
3/4 inch to No. 4 (19.0 to 4.75 mm) 10 4.5 2.5 1.1 1.6 0.7 7.2 3.3
3/8 inch to No. 4 (9.5 to 4.75 mm) 2 1.0 0.5 0.25 0.3 0.15 7.2 3.3
No. 4 to No. 8 (4.75 to 2.36 mm) 0.8 0.4 0.2 0.1 0.04 0.02 0.7 0.3
No. 8 to No. 16 (2.36 to 1.18 mm) 0.8 400 0.2 100 0.005 2.3 - - 0.31 141
No. 16 to No. 30 (1.18 mm to 600 m) - 0.3 - - 0.15 68
No. 30 to No. 50 (600 to 300 m) - 0.026 0.08 36
No. 50 to No. 100 (300 to 150 m) - 0.003 0.04 18
No. 100 to No. 200 (150 to 75 m) - 0.0004 0.02 9
The maximum mass allowed on each sieve to provide accuracy and not overload the sieves was based on the assumption that the Gilson
shaker with an effective sieve area of 14.75 by 22.75 inches = 335.56 in 2 (0.2165 m 2) would be used through the No. 4 sieve, and the 8-inch
(200-mm) sieve would be used through the No. 200 sieve with an effective sievearea of 50.26 in 2 (0.0324 m2). The maximum mass was
assumedto be the volume of the particle just passing the largest sieve size in the fraction times an assumedspecific gravity of 2.75.
retained on the sieves as shown in table 3. From table Four times this amount, (4) (78) = 312 Ibm (141.5 kg),
2, 21 Ibm (10 kg) is required for a minimum mass for determines the size of the field sample required to initiate
300 particles and only 20 Ibm (9 kg) is required for a the test. The 312-1bm sample should be split three times,
sieve analysis sample. Consequently, the mass required for as directed in USBR 4702, until sample is about 78 Ibm.
a 300-particle count would control; however, the gradation A sieve analysis should then be run on this sample. Assume
shown in table 3 shows that only 27 percent of the total that the resulting gradation agrees with that shown in
material was retained on the 3/4-inch (19.0-mm) sieve. table 3, then 21 Ibm plus is available for the flat and/
By proportioning, 27/21 as 100/x, and x = 78 Ibm (35.3 or elongated particle count and does not overload the
kg) to satisfy the criteria for sieve analysis determination. 3/4-inch sieve (29 Ibm, table 2). The analysis may now
641
USBR 4903
proceed with one operation of the Gilson shaker. This 3/4-inch material through the rest of the sieves. To correct
completes preparation of the 1-1/2- to 3/4-inch (37.5- this new grading back to the original 1-1/2-inch grading,
to 19.5-mm) sieve size for the flat and/or elongated see table 4.
determination. 8.2 Number of Particles:
Preparation of the 3/4- to 3/8-inch (19.5- to 9.5-mm) 8.2.1 The number of particles in each nominal size
sieve fraction should now be undertaken. From table 3, range fraction to be examined are minimal and are based
20 percent of the total sieve analysis sample is retained on experience and statistical considerations, see table 5.
between the 3/4- and 3/8-inch sieves. Using this percentage At least 300 particles of each nominal size range fraction
with the 78-1bm sample results in (0.20) (78) = 15.6 Ibm shall be examined, except for sieve size fractionsfiner than
(7.1 kg). From table 2,only 2.6 Ibm (1.2 kg) is required No. 30 (600 #m) where a minimum of 200 particles shall
for the 300-particle count; however, a mass in excess of be examined.
14.5 Ibm (6.5 kg) will overload the 3/8-inch sieve. 8.2.2 If sample of a nominal size range contains many
Therefore, a split down in accordance with USBR 4702 more particles than need to be examined, the range may
will be required for all material passing the 3/4-inch sieve be reduced to the proper number of particles in accordance
and to satisfy the overload criteria. The 78-Ibm sample with methods of USBR 4702 (Method A preferred) or
minus 27 percent of the 1-1/2- to 3/4-inch scalped material as described in section 8 of USBR 4295.
results in 78 - (0.27) (78) = 56.94 Ibm (25.8 kg). To
approximate a closer mass of minus 3/4 inch to the 2.6 NOTE Z-If there is less than 10 percent of sample retained
lbm required to furnish the 300-particle count, it would in any one nominal size range of coarse aggregatefractions, the
be advisable to split the 56.94 lbm four times to obtain flat and elongated particles are not physically determined.
a mass of about 3.6 Ibm (1.6 kg) and process the resulting
9. Calibration and Standardization
Table 3. - Cumulative percent retained on various sieves for the coarse
aggregatefraction of a 1-1/2-inch sieve reduced to a 3/4-inch sieve. 9.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane-
Nominal Sieve Size CPR Nominal Sieve Size CPR ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests
listed in the Applicable Documents of section 2 are covered
1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm) 0 No. 30 (600 #m) 81 under that particular procedure or standard directly or by
3/4 inch (19.0 mm) 27 No. 50 (300 #m) 92 reference.
3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 47 No. 100 (150/am) 98 9.2 Calipers and rule shall be calibrated in accordance
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 58 No. 200 (75 #m) 99.2 with USBR 1000.
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 63 Pan 100
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 71 9.3 Balances or scales shall be calibrated in accordance
with USBR 1012 to comply with section 6.1.4.
CPR = cumulative percent retained.
Corrected Gradings to
CPR of Reflect Original Sample
Split- CPR CPP
Split- Down- CPP of
Down Sample Add Split-Down
Sample Times CPR Sample Times
-3/4 inch CPP of of CPP of
TotalSample (-19.0 mm) Total Total Total
CPR CPP CPR CPP Sample Sample Sample
642
USBR 49O3
Table 5. - Minimum to maximum representative sample size to yield number of particle sizes under section 8.2.
3/8 inch to No. 4 (9.5 to 4.75 mm) 0.8 363 0.1 45 0.3 136
No. 4 to No. 8 (4.75 to 2.36 mm) - 46 - 5.7 - 19.4
No. 8 to No. 16 (2.36 to 1.18 mm) - 5.7 - 0.7 - 2.4
No. 16 to No. 30 (1.18 mm to 600/am) - 0.7 - 0.1 - 0.3
No. 30 to No. 50 (600 to 300 #m) 0.06 - 0.008 - 0.026
No. 50 to No. 100 (300 to 150 #m) 0.008 - 0.001 - 0.003
No. 100 to No. 200 (150 to 75 #m) 0.001 - 0.0001 - 0.0004
Note: The concentration of particles to the maximum or minimum side of the sieve fraction, and the degree of sphericity dictate a wide variation
in the amount of sample required. For values in the probable size of samples, an intermediate size fraction was assumed with perfect sphericity,
and a specific gravity of 2.75 was assumed for mass determination.
10. Conditioning
10.1 Preconditioning and preparation of sample are
required as described in section 8. A. TEST FOR ELONGATION
11. MeasuredCoarse Particles Method-Weighted
Averages Not Required
11.1 Procedure.-Each particle from the coarse
aggregate nominal size ranges, as selected in section 8,
is examined using the proportional caliper device or
appropriate apparatus. The particles are then separated
into four groups: (1) flat, (2) elongated, (3) both flat and
B. TEST FOR FLATNESS
elongated, and (4) not flat or elongated.
11.1.1 Elongation.-When using the proportional
caliper device and testing for elongation, set larger opening Figure 4. - Illustrations on using the proportional caliper device.
of device equal to length of particle by placing particle
between fixed post and point of swinging arm. If width and expressed as the percentage of flat, elongated, flat
of particle can be placed within smaller opening of swinging and elongated, and not flat or elongated present in each
arm and its fixed point, the particle is elongated (fig. 4). sieve size fraction examined, and recorded to nearest whole
11.1.2 Flamess.-When using proportional caliper percent (fig. 5). The flat and/or elongated particles are
device and testing for flatness, set larger opening of device expressed as a percentage by particle count according to:
equal to width of particle by placing particle between fixed
post and point of swinging arm. If thickness of particle
can be placed within smaller opening of swinging arm p= __ff___F (100),or
n
and its fixed point, the particle is flat (fig. 4).
11.1.3 Elongation and/or Flamess.-Meets the E
criteria established under both sections 11.1.1 and 11.1.2. -- n
(100), or
11.1.4 Not Flat or Elongated-Does not meet the
criteria established under either 11.1.1 or 11.1.2.
il.2 CMculadons.-After the examined particles have F&E
(100) (1)
been classified as described in section 11.1, they are counted n
643
USBR 4903
644
USBR 4903
645
USBR 4903
+.gZ 'mm 0 0
/I/e ro /4
/,v"CM 2/,I ,48' 333 .So /5" 7 Z 4 I 272 z /8"
- 4.75",,,, m o o
Totals 44 20 IO0 73
Average
Figure 5. - Saml31e calculation form using the measured coarse particles methodlweighted averages not required.
646
USBR 4903
0o
*u
e ,m
,-o
E
I,,
I
647
USBR 49O3
/So 7...,,. .o 5 3
iVIss A. oo bok I
-7f
m ).o$ I
Figure 7. - Sample calculation form using the microscopic and visual inspection of fine particles method.
648
UNITED STATES
INTERIORBuREAU
DEPARTMENT
OF RECLAMATION
OF THE ()
USBR 4904-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4904; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is patterned after Test
Method No. 205-E, dated September 14, 1964, published by the State of California, Department of Public Works, Division of
Highways.
1 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, vol. 04.02. 5.1 This procedure may involve hazardous materials,
2 Annual Book ofASTMStandards,vol. 04.03. operations, and equipment, and does not claim to address
3 AnnualBook of ASTMStandards, vols. 04.01, 04.06, 05.05, 14.02. all safety problems associated with its use. It is the
649
USBR 4904
responsibility of the user to consult and establish 7.3 The ovens used in drying the samples shall be
appropriate safety and health practices and determine checked in accordancewith USBR 1020.
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
5.2 Wash and oven-dry dirty aggregatesin accordance 8. Procedure
with USBR 4117 if dirt or dust film obscures surface enough
to make it difficult to detect fractured particle faces. 8.1 Determine mass of each test sample to nearest
5.3 Material used in this procedure may be reused for
gram and record as the "Test Sample Mass,"or count not
other tests when there would otherwise be insufficient less than 300 particles and record as the "Total Number
material for all required tests. of Particles."
6. Preparation of Sample 8.2 Spread one test sample on a clean, flat surface large
enough to permit material to be spread thinly for
6.1 Samples for this procedure shall be obtained in inspection.
accordance with USBR 4075. 8.3 Use the knife edge of a large spatula, needleholder,
6.2 Sieve analysis determinations shall be run in forceps, or similar tool to separate crushed particles from
accordance with USBR 4136 after material is split down uncrushed particles. Any particle appearing to have one
to proper size in accordance with USBR 4702. or more freshly fractured faces, regardless of size, shall
6.3 From each aggregate fraction representing 5 be considered a crushed particle.
percent or more of submitted sample, split a representative 8.4 When separation is complete, determine mass of
portion to within 10 percent of mass specified according crushed particles and record as "Mass of Crushed Particles,"
to table 1. This mass determination or not less than 300 or count number of crushed particles and record as
particles of each size fraction, including coarse sand sizes "Number of Crushed Particles."
passing the No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and retained on the 8.5 Repeat 8.2, 8.3, and 8.4 for each test sample
No. 8, 16, and 30 (2.36-mm, 1.18-mm, and 600-m) sieves, representing an individual size fraction.
shall be used for particle count determination. Material
passingthe No. 30 sieve shall not be tested. 9. Calculations
6.4 For further guidelines on handling samples to
obtain the mass required to furnish 300 particles, refer 9.1 Calculate percentage of crushed particles in each
to section 8 and tables 1, 2, and 3 Of USBR 4903. respective test sample using the following formulas:
7. Calibration and Standardization
p = M (100) (1)
Ms
7.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane-
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests where:
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are
covered under that particular procedure or standard. Pm ---- percentageof crushed particles by mass,
7.2 Balancesor scales shall be calibrated in accordance Mc ---- mass of crushed particles, and
with USBR 1012. Ms ---- mass of test sample; or:
Table 1. - Mass required on each sieve size for crushed particle determination.
Mass of
Sieve Sizes for Coarse Aggregate Fraction Test Sample, -I-10%
Passing Retained Ibm kg
650
USBR 4904
651
USBR 49O4
Spec. or Structure
Solic. No. A/'A /A Tested b.*' Ar'C'/4FO'#
Figure la.-Sample worksheet for determination of crushed particle faces (inch-pound units).
652
USBR 4904
Spec. or Date
Solic. No. #V'
structuieHtA Testedbye, a'CXZ'O' O -4 oqi4
Single-Face Fracture
O. OOOo 18 z 7
WEIGHTED AVERAGES
Multiple-Face Fracture
7 .S'6 g
72
to 600 tim
NOTE: A, B, and C indicate summation of fractional individual percent retained (/) on the "as received" sample. D=, E=, F=, D, F., and F indicate
summation of fractional product (Pi) (Pro) or (Pi) (Pc), respectively.
653
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4905-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4905; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM C 1170-91.
1.1 This designation covers the procedures for deter- 2.1 USBR Procedures:
mining the consistency and density of no-slump concrete 4029 Density and Voids in Aggregate
when standard slump test procedures, as outlined in USBR 4031 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in Field
4143, and density procedures, as outlined in USBR 4138, 4138 Density, Yield, Clean, Separation, and Air Content
are not applicable. These procedures are applicable in both (Gravimetric) of Concrete
the laboratory and field. 4143 Slump of Concrete
4172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
4192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
NOTE 1.-These procedures are considered applicableto plastic
concrete having coarse aggregate up to 2 inches (50 mm) in Laboratory
size. If coarse aggregateis larger than 2 inches, procedures are 2.2 ASTM Standards:
applicable when made on the fraction of concrete passing the C 1170 Standard Test Methods for Determining Con-
2-inch sieve, with larger aggregatebeing removed in accordance sistency and Density of Roller-Compacted Concrete Using
with USBR 4172 with the exception that a 2-inch sieve is used a Vibrating Table 1
instead of a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve. The USBR 4172 E 1 Specification for ASTM Thermometers2
procedure is not considered applicable for nonplastic and non- E 11 Specification for Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing
cohesive concrete. Purposes1, 3
2.3 A CI Standards:
207.5R-89 Roller-Compacted Concrete 4
1.2 These procedures, intended for use in testing roller-
compacted concrete, may be applicable to testing other 211.3-75R-89 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions
for No-Slump Concrete 4
types of concrete such as cement-treated aggregate and
mixtures similar to soil-cement.
1.3 Two alternate test methods are provided to deter- 3. Summary of Procedure
mine the consistency and density of concrete using a Vebe
vibrating table: 3.1 This procedure is used to measure the consistency
1.3.1 Test Method A [using a 50-1bm (22.7-kg) of stiff to extremely dry concrete mixtures (note 2).
surcharge mass placed on top of the test specimen].-Test Consistency is meaasured as the time required for a given
Method A shall be used for testing concrete of very stiff mass of concrete to be consolidated by vibrating in a
to extremely dry consistency in accordancewith ACI 211.3- cylindrically shaped mold. Denisty of the compacted
75 (R 1989). specimen is measured by determining the mass of the
1.3.2 Test Method B (no surcharge).-Test Method B consolidated specimen and dividing by its volume, which
shall be used for concrete of stiff to very stiff consistency is determined using water-displacement methods.
or when the Vebe time by Test Method A is less than
5 seconds. NOTE 2.-Further description of concrete of this consistency
1.4 The recommended vibration table for this test is given in ACI 207.5R-89 and ACI 211.3-75 (R 1989).
procedure is the Vebe vibrating table. To date, all Bureau
testing has been performed using this testing apparatus.
An alternate vibrating table may be substituted for the 1 Annual Book ofASTMStandards, vol. 04.02.
Vebe apparatus provided it meets the specifications for 2 Annual Book ofASTM Standards, vols. 05.03, 14.03.
the sinusoidal vibration as shown in section 9.3 and the 3 Annual Book ofASTMStandards, vols. 04.01, 04.06, 04.07, 05.05, 14.02.
4 ACIManualofConcretePractice, part 1, 1990. Available fromAmerican
alternate testing requirements of sections 11 and 12. Concrete Institute, PO Box 19150, Redford Station, Detroit, MI 48219.
654
USBR 4905
655
USBR 4905
{;I ;.{ The V<3c' vibl;[R:l,N *:lbJi< ,:)r" g}le gtlce:i n;1,te tJbk
sh:liN p.rili,dltlCe a .<-;iNitls(:,icI,] lnlll]ltik.)l-J
I} [k:Ill'ttll wi[hl a:l Ise.qtlieil.c}s
jlr'i I
,: ,1: : i,()()+ ]il },() v ]!>,{a i,:;},:llS per il :i N, LIte ({ i.(k. 1 67 H z: :, a i>.4. a 1
implikLude ,::,. vik:,,rali<:,.Cl ,:J7 Ci i{)(;I.85>(I,,{1,1:)] % iincl:l ,i:0.220 0.7
l/-Jil'i) vd-lt:.N l+ 115:7{)4 2.i-]bll-ii (-!:72> ] 1 kg :, st:rch, arge :is. b,:!lte.,d
ro center ,,Nc rab]l,m as sl-xc,a.,li ,:,n fiat:i>.. 2.
9'.d Ira a:dldM,:m .,: ih, e calibral:i],:l.:ri freqlLlersc.S:' re.c:,:.)nn-
mended ii:, s.bsecti<:,n !;a.],.. lile ,rJlbr:tlii]g; C,]]e NS.,: shc,,u]ld
I::>e. calibrated are; an},, e"c, eliai ,;iiiqckidiTng repaksl, which
m{ght a f:fe,c: :it s , ,pe:s ic,.n , nd W]lmm_:.cr e'st re's.L]lts are
,qt:ies.e ic,,n, N,e.
9.5 At ][east:, :fer ere'r}, 3 m,{Hich,,_a m,{ C(t, INi{]iNLJICt, NS USe,
Nm cmdle.rsakle <:, : tte vib.n::Nn, g k:,,le' t, aF:,. s.h,,,:l, Nd be iinspe:,o:ed
;Eid dleaned ].]l']y ]haKkened C:l(:lnCC:C I ,:}]" L:enq'qll paste 'wl-liCt-,
I]l
1t).. C:onditionlng;
]1.. P'rocedu'e
8;. Sampling,, Test: Specimen, s,. and Test Units
8,.l S, arnp.iles c,t iE:res.]q ,ol, nclTece sh,m;H t:,e <:,.btainedl in 11.1 I, gL;,c ,C;ge:sLsee, o ' Z,i,r':e ,: ',0'id- a sl:irch, arge)
acco:dance ,Ni[h I_.TN, B' 172
1].].1 Llsi{rlg sq,tare-ended ,Nq,,,:)ve]s and sc:,t,,i)ps,
8.2 Corcret:e sam, p, Jles .<;lm, LNd ha're a n,*tnm, al nTIktXilT]l.INlJl
,o, lctain a ,;e.preserltatiive :Sl topic., in cc{,,>dance '<7th s.ecti, :,EI 8,
size agg;egate c,.2 ir, ches .i 50 ]iN, m,) c,,F ].ess. If <,,:Jr, ere.re has
aggregate lage.r titian, 2 inc}i,e.s., s:mF, le.s S]l,a]d be ,:i,Jine.d
by we sie,,ing over a 2:-m{]{, ..;.ie.ve in accc,>dance wikh L!SBR
4 7'7:
8.3 C,:,,nce{e sar]JF:,e. esirJ, g sh, aN be ,::,:mlp]leted wRhin
4 m i n u t e' s , f t e 1 c' ,:,: :a, p 1 e : i c:, l ,:, f n i :x i m-g J n ] e s. >:. ,z:,. 1 e r w Ji s; e
stiipt,lae:.d.
,17, , " ,.
USBR 49O5
with a minimum mass of 50 Ibm (22.7 kg). Handle concrete 11.1.7 Determine the density of the specimen in
in such a manner that coarse aggregatedoes not separate accordancewith section 11.2.
from the mortar. 11.2 Vebe Density ofFreshly Consolidated Concrete:
11.2.1 Followingdeterminationof the Vebe time,
NOTE 5.-Concrete in the range of no-slump consistency is remove the surcharge. Vibrate the specimen withoutthe
highly susceptible to segregation during handling. To minimize
surcharge for an additional 10 seconds to level the top
this, it is essential that care be used in obtaining samples and,
surface of the sample.
during transporting, remixing and testing of the concrete. Square-
ended shovels and scoops should be used to obtain a representative 11.2.2 Remove the mold with the consolidated
sample. Concrete should be handled in such a way that large- specimen from the Vebe table, and wipe any mortar from
sized coarse aggregatedoes not separate from the mortar. the inside wall of the cylinder mold above the level of
the consolidatedconcrete.Place the flatplateon the cylinder
11.1.2 Dampen the interior of the mold and fill with mold and determine to the nearest 0.01 Ibm (4.5 g) the
29.5+1.5 Ibm (13.4+0.7 kg) of concrete. Using a square- mass of the cylindrical mold, consolidatedconcrete speci-
edged scoop and tamping rod, place and distribute the men, and flat plate. Determine the mass of the specimen
concrete evenly to minimize segregation and rock pockets. by subtracting the mass of the cylindricalmold and flat
Level the surface of the loose concrete. plate from the mass of the cylindrical mold, consolidated
11.1.3 Secure the mold on the Vebe table by hand specimen, and flat plate. Remove the flat plate.
tightening the wing nuts. Slide the shaft of the surcharge 11.2.3 Place the moldon a level surface and carefully
mass through the guide sleeve, and rotate the surcharge fillthe mold withwater at room temperature to a meniscus
to its locked position centered over the mold, ensuring level just above the top rim while minimizingwashout
that it will fit inside the mold when released. The surcharge of paste from the specimen surface.
may be lowered into the mold during this procedure to 11.2.4 Determine the temperature of the water to
adjust the position of the mold but it shall not be placed the nearest 1 OF (1 C).
on the specimen. Secure the wing nuts of the Vebe table 11.2.5 Carefully cover the mold with the flat plate
with a wrench to prevent loosening during the test. Gently in such a way as to eliminateair bubblesand excess water.
lower the surcharge onto the surface of the specimen. 11.2.6 Wipe all excess water, and determinethe total
11.1.4 If the surcharge cannot be centered in the mass of the cylinder mold, consolidatedspecimen, water,
mold without binding on the inside wall of the mold, place and flat plate. Determine the mass of the water by
the surcharge directly onto the specimen in the mold subtracting the mass of the mold, specimen, and flat plate
without the use of the guide sleeve, and manually hold as determinedin 11.2.2 from the total mass.
the surcharge shaft perpendicular to the top of the table. 11.2.7 Determine the volume of water by dividing
The surcharge shaft must be held manually throughout the mass of water by the densityof water at the recorded
the remainder of the Vebe test. Do not apply additional temperature in accordancewith the values given in tables
hand pressure to the surcharge when manually holding 1 or 2--interpolatingif necessary.Determine the volume
the surcharge. of water to the nearest 0.001 ft (0.028 L).
11.1.5 Start the vibrator and timer. Using a flash- 11.2.8 Determine the volume of the specimen by
light, observe the concrete in the annular space between subtracting the volume of the water obtained in 11.2.7
the edge of the surcharge and the inside wall of the mold. from the volume of the cylinder mold obtainedin 9.2.
As the test progresses, mortar will fill in the annular space 11.2.9 Determine the density of the specimen in
between the outer edge of the surcharge and the inside accordance with section 13, Calculations. This is referred
mold wall. Observe the mortar until it forms a ring around to as the Vebe densityof the specimen, Test Method A.
the total perimeter of the surcharge. When the mortar 11.3 Vibrating Consistency Time and Density Using
ring forms completely around the surcharge, stop the an Alternative Vibrating Table, Test Method A :
vibrator and timer; determine the elapsed time to the 11.3.1 Determine the consistency time of concrete
nearest minute and second. Record this time as the Vebe in accordance with 11.1. Record the use of an alternative
consistency time, Test Method A. If the wing nuts loosen vibrating table, and record the time as vibrating consistency
during the test, repeat the test with a fresh sample of time, Test Method A.
concrete. If the ring of mortar does not form after 2 minutes 11.3.2 Determine the density of the specimen in
of vibration, stop the vibrator and timer; record this accordancewith 11.2. Refer to this as the vibrating density
condition on the report. of the specimen, Test Method A.
11.1.6 If the following conditions exist after 2 min- 11.3.2.1 When determining the consistency and
utes have elapsed, document them in the report, record density of concrete using an alternative vibrating table,
the elapsed time, and retest if necessary: it may not be possible to vibrate the specimen without
11.1.6.1 A rock pocket in the loose specimen pre- a surcharge. This is due to disturbance of the compacted
vents the mortar ring from forming at one small location specimen when large-amplitude, low-frequency vibration
even though the mortar ring forms in all other locations, waves occur after the vibrator is turned off. If this occurs,
or: leave the surcharge on the specimen after determining
11.1.6.2 The elapsed time in which the majority the vibrating time, and vibrate the specimen for an
of the mortar ring formed is similar to previous readings additional 10 seconds. Record the use of the surcharge
with the same mixture proportions. for the density determination.
657
USBR 49O5
F .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
32 0.999 841 845 848 852 856 860 863 867 871 874
33 .999 878 881 883 886 889 892 894 897 900 902
34 .999 905 908 910 913 915 918 920 923 925 928
35 .999 930 932 933 935 937 939 940 942 944 945
36 .999 947 949 950 952 953 955 956 958 959 961
37 .999 962 963 963 964 965 966 966 967 968 968
38 .999 969 969 970 970 971 971 971 972 972 973
39 .999 973 973 973 973 973 973 972 972 972 972
40 .999 972 971 971 970 969 969 968 967 966 966
41 .999 965 964 962 961 960 959 957 956 955 953
42 .999 952 951 950 949 948 947 945 944 943 942
43 .999 941 939 936 934 931 929 926 924 921 919
44 .999 916 914 911 909 907 905 902 900 898 895
45 .999 893 890 887 883 880 877 874 871 867 864
46 .999 861 858 855 852 849 846 842 839 836 833
47 .999 830 826 822 818 814 810 805 801 797 793
48 .999 789 785 781 778 774 770 766 762 759 755
49 .999 751 746 741 736 731 726 720 715 710 705
50 .999 700 695 689 684 678 673 667 662 656 651
51 .999645 641 637 633 629 625 621 617 613 609
52 .999 605 598 590 583 575 568 561 553 546 538
53 .999 531 525 520 514 509 503 497 492 486 481
54 .999 475 468 460 453 446 439 431 424 417 409
55 .999 402 396 389 383 377 371 364 358 352 345
56 .999 339 331 323 315 307 299 290 282 274 266
57 .999 258 251 244 237 230 223 216 209 202 195
58 .999 188 179 170 161 152 144 135 126 117 108
59 .999 099 090 081 071 062 053 044 035 025 016
60 .999 007 001 *994 *988 "981 *975 *969 *962 *956 *949
61 .998 943 931 920 908 896 885 873 861 849 838
62 .998 826 817 809 800 791 783 774 765 756 748
63 .998 739 728 718 707 696 686 675 664 653 643
64 .998 632 623 613 604 595 586 576 567 558 548
65 .998 539 528 516 505 493 482 470 459 447 436
66 .998 424 414 404 394 384 375 365 355 345 335
67 .998 325 313 301 288 276 264 252 240 227 215
68 .998 203 191 178 166 153 14l 128 116 103 090
69 .998 078 067 056 046 035 024 013 002 *992 "981
70 .997 970 957 943 930 917 904 890 877 864 850
71 .997 837 826 814 803 792 781 769 758 747 735
72 .997 724 710 696 682 668 655 641 627 613 599
73 .997 585 573 561 549 537 526 514 502 490 478
74 .997 466 451 437 422 408 393 378 364 349 335
75 .997 320 308 295 283 270 258 246 233 221 208
76 .997 196 181 166 150 135 120 105 090 074 059
77 .997 044 028 013 *997 *982 *966 *950 *935 "919 *904
78 .996 888 875 862 848 835 822 809 796 782 769
79 .996 756 740 724 707 691 675 659 643 626 610
80 .996 594 583 572 561 550 540 529 518 507 496
81 .996 485 465 446 426 407 387 367 348 328 309
82 .996 289 275 261 246 232 218 204 190 175 161
83 .996 147 130 112 095 077 060 043 025 008 *990
84 .995 973 958 944 929 914 900 885 870 855 841
85 .995 826 808 790 772 754 736 718 700 682 664
i To obtain absolute density of water in pound mass per cubic foot, multiply value shown in table by 62.4278578.
* First three significant digits shown in line below.
11.3.2.2 Determine the density of the consolidated 12.1.1 Obtain a representative sample of concrete
specimen in accordance with 11.2.2 through 11.2.9. having a minimum mass of 50 lbm (22.7 kg) in accordance
with section 8, and place the concrete in the cylindrical
TEST METHOD B -- VEBE TIME
mold in accordance with 11.1.1 and 11.1.2.
12.1.2 Place the mold on the Vebe table, and tighten
12. Procedure the wing nuts to prevent loosening during the test.
12.1.3 Start the vibrator and the timer. Observe the
12.1 Vebe Consistency Time (without a surcharge): contact between the concrete and inside wall of the mold.
658
USBR 4905
C .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
0 999.841 .847 .854 .860 .866 .872 .878 .884 .889 .895
1 .900 .905 .909 .914 .918 .923 .927 .930 .934 .938
2 .941 .944 .947 .950 .953 .955 .958 .960 .962 .964
3 .965 .967 .968 .969 .970 .971 .972 .972 .973 .973
4 .973 .973 .973 .972 .972 .972 .970 .969 .968 .966
5 .965 .963 .961 .959 .957 .955 .952 .950 .947 .944
6 .941 .938 .935 .931 .927 .924 .920 .916 .911 .907
7 .902 .898 .893 .888 .883 .877 .872 .866 .861 .855
8 .849 .843 .837 .830 .824 .817 .810 .803 .796 .789
9 .781 .774 .766 .758 .751 .742 .734 .726 .717 .709
10 .700 .691 .682 .673 .664 .654 .645 .635 .625 .615
11 .605 .595 .585 .574 .564 .553 .542 .531 .520 .509
12 .498 .486 .475 .463 .451 .439 .427 .415 .402 .390
13 .377 .364 .352 .339 .326 .312 .299 .285 .272 .258
14 .244 .230 .216 .202 .188 .173 .159 .144 .129 .114
15 .099 .084 .069 .054 .038 .023 .007 *.991 *.975 *.959
16 998.943 .926 .910 .893 .877 .860 .843 .826 .809 .792
17 .774 .757 .739 .722 .704 .686 .668 .650 .632 .613
18 .595 .576 .558 .539 .520 .501 .482 .463 .444 .424
19 .405 .385 .365 .345 .325 .305 .285 .265 .244 .224
20 .203 .183 .162 .141 .120 .099 .078 .056 .035 .013
21 997.992 .970 .948 .926 .904 .882 .860 .837 .815 .792
22 .770 .747 .724 .701 .678 .655 .632 .608 .585 .561
23 .538 .514 .490 .466 .442 .418 .394 .369 .345 .320
24 .296 .271 .246 .221 .196 .171 .146 .120 .095 .069
25 .044 .018 *.992 *.967 *.941 *.914 *.888 *.862 *.836 *.809
26 996.783 .756 .729 .703 .676 .649 .621 .594 .567 .540
27 .512 .485 .457 .429 .401 .373 .345 .317 .289 .261
28 .232 .204 .175 .147 .118 .089 .060 .031 .002 *.973
29 995.944 .914 .885 .855 .826 .796 .766 .736 .706 .676
30 .646 .616 .586 .555 .525 .494 .464 .433 .402 .371
As the specimen consolidates, a ring of mortar will form 12.3.2 .Density of Fresh Concrete, Test Method'B:
around the perimeter of the specimen against the inside 12.3.2.1 Determine the density of fresh concrete
wall of the mold and will fill in between coarse aggregates. in accordance with 11.2. Refer to the density as vibrating
Observe the formation of the mortar ring around the density of the specimen, Test Method B.
perimeter of the mold. When the mortar ring is completely
formed, stop the vibrator and timer; determine the elapsed
13. Calculations
time to the nearest minute and second. Record this time
as the Vebe consistency time, Test Method B. If the mortar
ring does not form after 2 minutes, stop the vibrator. Record 13.1 Following determination of the Vebe consistency
this condition on the report, and repeat the test with a time, determine density of sample as follows:
fresh sample of concrete using Test Method A if necessary.
If the wing nuts loosen during the test, repeat the test
Ms
with a fresh sample of cohcrete. D--
V
12.1.4 Record the conditions of 11.1.6, if appropriate.
12.2 Density of Fresh Concrete, Test Method B: where:
12.2.1 Determine the density of the specimen in
accordance with 11.2. Refer to the density as Vebe density D = density in pound mass per cubic foot [kilograms
of the specimen, Test Method B. per cubic meter or kilograms per cubic
12.3 Vibration ConsistencyTime and Density Using decameter (note 6)]
Alternate Vibrating Table, Test Method B: Ms = mass of sample in pound mass (kilograms), and
12.3.1 Vibrating Consistency Time, Test Method B: Vs = volume of sample in cubic feet (cubic meters or
12.3.1.1 Determine the vibrating consistency time, cubic decameters)
Test Method B, in accordance with 12.1.1 through 12.1.4.
Record the use of an alternate vibrating table. 13.2 Figure 3 shows a suggested calculation form.
12.3.1.2 If the conditions of 11.3.2.1 are observed,
discontinue the test and do not use Test Method B for NOTE 6.-To convert from cubic decameters to cubic meters,
vibrating consistency time or density. multiply by 1000.
659
USBR 4905
Density Determination
660
USBR 49O5
Density Determination
(7) Mass of mold, sample, and plate 2g. 2 kg
(8) Mass of mold and plate kg
(9) Mass of sample, (7) - (8) /3. 3 q?
kg
(10) Mass of mold, sample, plate, and water 32. Z6? kg
(11) Mass of water, (10) - (7) .9.647 kg
(12) Temperature of water 2AI C
(13) Absolue density of water:
From table 2: qZ q 7O kg/m 3
(14) Volume of water, (11)/(13) 0. oo_q6 S'4 m 3
(15) Volume of sample, (6) - (14) 0.00'637 m 3
(16) Density of sample, (9)/(15) 2377 kg/m 3
66t
USBR 4905
14.1 Figure 4 shows a typical reporting form that was 15.1 Precision.-The precision for this procedure is
produced by computer. currently unknown.
15.2 Bias.-The procedure in these test methods for
determining consistency and density of roller-compacted
concrete has no bias because consistency and density can
only be defined in terms of these test methods.
662
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4906-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4906; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of ASTM C 1176-91.
1.2 These procedures, intended for use in testing roller- 3. Summary of Procedure
compacted concrete, may be applicable to testing other
types of concrete such as cement-treated aggregate and
mixtures similar to soil-cement. 3.1 This test procedure is for making cylindrical
1.3 Method A describes procedures for making test concrete test specimens using the Vebe vibrating table.
specimens in a steel mold attached to Vebe vibrating table. Test specimens are cast vertically in cylindrical molds ridigly
Method B describes procedures for making test specimens attached to the vibrating table under a 20-1bm (9.07-kg)
in disposable plastic molds inserted into a rigid sleeve surcharge to facilitate consolidation.
attached to Vebe vibrating table.
1.4 The recommended vibration table for this test 4. Significance and Use
procedure is the Vebe vibrating table. To date, all Bureau
testing has been performed using this testing apparatus.
4.1 This procedure is intended to be used for stiff to
An alternate vibration table may be substituted for the
extremely dry concrete mixtures commonly used in roller-
Vebe apparatus provided it meets the specifications for
compacted concrete construction. This procedure is used
the sinusoidal vibration as shown in section 9.2.1.
instead of rodding or internal vibration, which cannot
2. Applicable Documents properly consolidate concrete of this consistency.
663
USBR 4906
5. Terminology
6.1 Molds:
lb (g.1 kg)8uroharGo
6.1.1 Type A Mold.-A cylindrical mold conforming
bass plate
to the requirements of ASTM C 470 for 6-inch (152-mm)
AdJuatalblo la
diameter by 12-inch (305-mm) high reusable molds. Molds mold
shall be made of steel or other hard metal not readily 81oovo hinges poolmen
attacked by the cement paste. Aluminum molds shall not God rigid sleeve
olamp
be used. Molds shall be equipped with permanently affixed nut to seouro sleeve
metal slotted brackets on the baseplate so the molds can slot, Sos detail
be rigidly clamped to a vibrating table. The top rim of nut to assure bass
the mold shall be smooth, plane, and parallel to the bottom Table foot
of the mold. The bottom of the mold shall provide a 8witch
watertight seal. Vibrating
6.1.2 Type B Mold.-A single-use plastic, cylindrical
mold 6 inches in diameter and a height of 12 inches (152
by 305 mm). The mold specifications shall conform to
ASTM C 470 for single-use plastic molds.
6.1.2.1 Mold Sleeve.-A Type B cylindrical mold
shall be inserted into a rigid cylindrical sleeve with a bottom
baseplate that is clamped to the vibrating table. The mold
sleeve shall be made of steel or other hard metal that
does not react with concrete containing portland or other
hydraulic cement. The sleeve shall be capable of firmly
and vertically holding the plastic mold in place without performe d using this apparatus. An alternative vibrating table
deformation and shall be slotted vertically with adjustable may be substituted for the Vebe apparatus provided it meets
clamps for tightening around the mold. The sleeve shall the specifications for the sinusoidal vibration given in 9.2 and
be hinged so that it can be opened to remove the mold is in accordance with the alternative testing requirements of
(fig. 1) and shall also have permanently affixed slotted section 11. The Vebe apparatus, including cylindrical mold and
metal brackets so the sleeve may be rigidly clamped to guide sleeves, is manufactured by Dynapac Maskin (formerly
the vibrating table. The mold sleeve shall have a minimum Vibro-Verken), PO Box 1103, 5-171-22, Solna, Sweden; Dynapac
wall thickness of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), and a minimum Manufacturing,Inc., Stanhope NJ 07874; and Soiltest, 86 Albrecht
Drive, PO Box 8004, Lake Bluff IL 60044-9902.
baseplate thickness of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). The inside
diameter of the mold sleeve shall be 1/8 + 1/16 inch
6.3 Swivel Arm andGuide Sleeve.-A metal guide sleeve
(3.2+1.6 mm) larger than the outside diameter of the with a clamp assembly or other suitable holding device
Type B mold and have a height 1/2 to 1/4 inch (12.8
mounted on a swivel arm. The swivel arm and guide sleeve
to 6.4 mm) less than the height of the Type B mold.
must be capable of holding a metal shaft attached to a
6.2 Vebe Vibrating Table.-A vibrating table with .a 20-Ibm (9.1-kg) cylindrical mass in a position perpendicular
3/4-inch (19-mm) thick steel deck with dimensions
to the vibrating surface which allows the shaft to slide
15 inches in length, 10-1/4 inches in width, and 12 inches
freely when the clamp is released. The swivel arm must
in height (381- 260- 305-mm). The vibrating table shall
be capable of maintaining the guide sleeve in a locked
be constructed in such a manner as to prevent flexing position directly over the center of the specimens to be
of the table during operation. The table deck shall be
vibrated. The swivel arm shall also be capable of being
activated by an electromechanical vibrator. The total mass rotated away from the center of the table.
of the vibrator and table shall be approximately 210 Ibm
(95 kg). The table shall be level and clamped to a concrete NOTE 4.-The Vebe vibrating table comes equipped with the
floor or base slab having sufficient mass to prevent dis- swivel arm and guide sleeve.
placement of the apparatus during specimen preparation.
6.4 Surcharge.-A cylindrical surcharge with a metal
NOTE 3.-The recommended vibrating table for these test shaft at least 18 inches (457 mm) long and 5/8 + 1/16 inch
procedures is the Vebe vibrating table.4 To date, testing has been
(16+2 mm) diameter attached perpendicularly to the plate
and embedded through the center of surcharge. The shaft
4 The Vebe vibrating table, including cylindrical mold and guide sleeves,
is manufactured by Soiltest, 86 Albrecht Drive, PO Box 8004, Lake Bluff shall slide through the guide sleeve without binding or
IL 60044-9902. excessive play. The base of the surcharge shall have a
664
USBR 4906
5-3/4 + 1/8-inch (146+3 mm) diameter. Surcharge shall and cleaned of any hardened concrete or cement paste which
have a mass of 20+0.5 Ibm (9.1+0.25 kg) including the may interface with free movement of the table top.
mass of the metal shaft (fig. 1). If the surcharge is hand
held, the length of the shaft may be reduced to 12 inches 10. Conditioning
(305 mm) and fabricated with a "T" or "D" handle to
grip the surcharge shaft to avoid the hand slipping. 10.1 No special conditioning process is required for
6.5 Sieve.-A 2-inch (50-mm) sieve conforming to this procedure.
ASTM E 11.
6.6 Small Tools=Trowels, square-ended shovel and 11. Procedure
hand scoops, steel trowel, wooden float, wrench, tamping
rod, and flashlight as required. 11.1 Method A-- Type A Molds:
11.1.1 Coat Type A molds with a suitable lubricant
7. Precautions
or bond breaker prior to casting the test specimens to
7.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous mate- facilitateremoval from the mold.
rials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim to 11.1.2 Place the mold on Vebe table, and center the
address all safety problems associated with its use. The surcharge so that the edges of the plastic plate do not
user is responsible to consult and establish appropriate touch the walls of the mold. Lower the surcharge into
safety and health practices and to determine applicability the mold to check for proper clearance. Attach the mold
of regulatory limitations prior to use. to the Vebe table, and firmlytighten the wing nuts. Move
the surcharge away from the mold.
8. Sampling, Test Specimens, and Test Units 11.1.3 Place enough concrete in the mold so that
the mold will be filled to one-third of its volume after
8.1 Samples of fresh concrete should be obtained in consolidation [about 9.51bm (4.3 kg)]. A tamping rod may
accordancewith USBR 4172. be used to distribute the loose concrete as it is added. During
8.2 Concrete samples should have 2-inch (50-mm) filling,use square-ended shovels and scoops to Obtain repre-
maximum size aggregate.If concrete has aggregatelarger sentative samples, and handle the concrete in such a manner
than 2 inches, sample shall be obtained by wetsieving that larger sized coarse aggregate particles do not separate
over a 2-inch sieve in accordancewith USBR 4172. from the mortar.
8.3 Concrete test specimens shall be made within 11.1.4 Move the surcharge over the center of the
45 minutes after the completion of mixing concrete unless mold, release the guide sleeve clamp, and place the sur-
otherwise stipulated. charge gently on the loose concrete. The surcharge shall
be able to vertically slide free without binding on the guide
9. Calibration and Standardization sleeve.
11.1.5 If the surcharge cannot be centered in the
9.1 The calibration and standardization of miscel- mold without binding on the inside wall of the mold, place
laneous equipment or apparatus used in performing the the surcharge directly onto the specimen in the mold
tests listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 without use of the guide sleeve, and hold the surcharge
are covered under that particular procedure or standard shaft perpendicular to the top of the table. Hold the
directly or by reference. surcharge shaft manually while vibrating the specimen.
9.2 Vebe Vibrating Table.-The frequency and ampli- 11.1.6 Start the vibrator, and allow the concrete to
tude of the vibrating table shall be determined under consolidate under the surcharge. Using a flashlight,observe
simulated test conditions prior to initial use, and annually the concrete in the annular space between the edge of
thereafter (note 5). Frequency and amplitude shall be the surcharge and the inside wall of the mold. As the
determined in accordance with USBR 4031 or 4192. concrete consolidates, mortar will fill in the annular space
between the outer edge of the surcharge and the inside
NOTE 5.-This determination can be performedby personnel mold wall. Observe the mortar until it forms a ring around
of the Materials Engineering Branch [code D-3735] at the Bureau's the total perimeter of the surcharge. When the mortar
Denver Office, and should be coordinated with the calibration
ring forms completely around the surcharge, stop the
of other vibration testing equipment.
vibrator. If the wing nuts loosen while casting the specimen,
9.2.1 The vibrating table shall produce a sinusoidal retighten the wing nuts, then continue vibrating to ensure
vibratory motion with a frequency of at least 3600+100 complete consolidation of the specimen.
vibrations per minute (60+I.67 Hz) and an amplitude of 11.1.7 If a rock pocket prevents the mortar ring from
vibration of 0.0085+0.0015 inch (0.22+0.04 mm) when forming at one small location, even though it has formed
a 60.0+2.5-1bm (27.2+1.1-kg) surcharge is rigidly bolted in all other locations, the vibrator can be stopped and
to the center of the table. another layer of concrete added. If a significant portion
9.3 Cylindrical Molds.-The cylindrical molds shall of the mortar ring does not form,this indicates the concrete
conform to the dimensional requirements of ASTM C 470. may have insufficient mortar due to either improper
9.4 At least, after every 3 months of continuous use, sampling, segregation, or improper mixture proportioning.
the underside of the vibrating table top should be inspected In these instances, the concrete specimen should be visually
665
USBR 4906
inspected after stripping from the mold, and a decision dislodging aggregateparticles from the surface when using
then made whether to accept or reject the specimen. a wooden float.
11.1.8 Repeat the procedure in 11.1.3 through 11.1.7 11.2 Method B--Type B Molds:
for the second lift of concrete, filling the mold to about 11.2.1 Make concrete test specimens in Type B molds
two-thirds its volume. For the third lift, overfill the mold in accordance with 11.1. Prior to making test specimens,
by mounding the concrete above the top of the mold. Again, insert a Type B mold into the metal sleeve ensuring a
place the surcharge on the loose concrete and consolidate. close fit but not deforming the plastic mold. A sleeve
If the surcharge consolidates concrete below the top level assembly made from an existing steel cylindrical mold is
of the mold, turn off the vibrating table. Place additional shown on figure 1. Rigidly clamp the entire assembly to
concrete in the mold so that, when consolidated, the the Vebe table, and make the test specimen in accordance
concrete will be about 1/8 inch (3 mm) above the top with procedures in 11.1.2 through 11.1.9.
of the mold. Continue vibrating, and slide the surcharge
back and forth across the top of the mold until the 12. Curing
compacted concrete is level with the top of the mold. This
replaces strikeoff with a float since stiff concrete cannot 12.1 Unless otherwise specified, all specimens shall be
be easily floated. Do not allow the srucharge to remain cured in accordance with the sections on curing in USBR
in one position when the concrete is being finished because 4031 or 4192, whichever is applicable. Specimens tested
this can cause aggregates to be forced down and mortar for compressive strength and splitting tensile strength shall
to be forced out of the mold resulting in a nonrepresentative be in accordance with USBR 4039 and 4496, respectively.
test specimen. After the surface has been screeded with
the surcharge, vibrate the specimen for 4+1 seconds without
13. Calculations
the surcharge to fill in minor surface tears unless damage
to the specimen by large-amplitude oscillations of the
vibrator is anticipated. 13.1 There are no calculations involved in this test
11.1.8.1 When making test specimens using an procedure.
alternative vibrating table, it may not be possible to vibrate
the specimen without a surcharge. This is due to the disturb- 14. Report
ance of the compacted specimen when large-amplitude,
low-frequency oscillations occur after the vibrator has been 14.1 A reporting form is not required for this procedure.
turned off. If this occurs, keep the surcharge in place until
the vibrating table has completely stopped. 15. Precision and Bias
11.1.9 Remove the mold with the consolidated
specimen from the vibrating table, and finish the top surface 15.1 Currently, the precision and bias for this procedure
of the specimen with a steel trowel or wooden float. Avoid is unknown.
666
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4907-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4907; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision.
1 AnnualBook ofASTMSrandards, vols. 04.02, 04.03. NOTE 1.-The specific heat apparatus currently in use at the
.2 Annual BookofASTM Srandards, voL 04.06. Bureau's Denver Office has been automated to include data
667
USBR 49'07
cquiskic,;, ca]lculatJ,o-4 a-J,d o::,n>,d. P,::,wer re:, fl-e immesJ:c,n 7.. Materials
-eate: iis. nrmas't]red, k:,y J, '0.'aE-}o,u: cal[]ibratJi,-m standard reaJ.i,g
to 0 ()C,::h5 viatt b.ot Temperature is determi-:,c.d usiig , plJtmu]:n
7.I &J:,)... mare.riall capable of being p,]aced in the
RTD ,::resistance temperargre de.tec:t,:,:,. The ,:,peratio, r c,( thiis
caIc,,rimeer gnay be. t:este.d
cc, nt,:::,lling and rec,::,rdii:,g unJit :is..d:escJ:bed in, se,c:t[<,.n ] 2:. Figure 1
s.b.o.ws an RT'L) wit]* a cah::,.rm:'J,ee'r h; h, as. beet-:, ,::,,ur, d satis;-
8,. Prec:autio, n,s
(ac,::,.y [or 8-b.y 1.6-i:,,J ,:2().- by 40,15-into::..Cl}:'li/ders. F:iguve 2
s.h.ows :[q,e F:,,::,pe]ller irJsi,de i:,e cak:,s-imeer
8.1 Thiis tes.: proce:dure may in, volve hazard,.,:ms
ma:e.riaIs, c,,peratic,q,s.:, ar, d equipment, and .does r,,o. claim
t<:, address al,] safely p>,:ben-J,S associated wid its. se. I:
Jis :he responsibility c:,f the: user ,,, cor,sh nd esab.is]
ap, pro,pHate safety and h, ealtl-, pracdce.s and de.e:mir, e
app]l.cabiIi[y .o( :eguIaor'y ]imitatic, n,s prior c,. use.
9. Test Spec{mens
a normal run.It is recommended that the average results 12.8 Perform the test at each of two mean temperatures
of several runs be used. of about 50 and 140 F (10 and 60 C).
669
USBR 4907
670
USBR 4907
150
.65
/
145
/
6O
it.
o o
or
3 56
t"
tr'
ttJ W
/
O. n
UJ W
I'-
/
5O
SPECIFIC HEAT OF CONCRETE
TEMPERATURE CURVES
SPECIMEN K4M -- KORTES AGGREGATE
45
0
I ,5O 180
Ti To TIME IN MINUTES
Tn Tf
Figure 4. - Typical temperature curves during specific heat test.
671
USBR 4907
672
USBR 4907
Spec.
Solic. or
No. Structure DA ,4 Tested bYe./t./ARSO E //-'-.-8
Date
Project Item 'o,q7- Computed by Date
-CAYo.v FRmY U,v/'r Location E.. /'/A80
Feature Station Offset Checked by Date
CAwvow f..,v" DA g.,o ,oz. Depth to .. I-/oAGLAO //- 8"-4g
Time, Temp., Mass of specimen = 30. '5 kg Heat input = 22. 4" revolutions
Temp. min. C Mass of water = . g8 kg Revolutionstimes 2.169 = kJ
0 2. qo
5 G -- To- Ti _ 3./7- 2.90 _ o.2.___._77 = 0.o45Oc
10 n 6"
15 Tt- To _ /E. 75-/2.69 _ o. 12 =
20 Cb -- n G G O. o 2 OC
25
To 30 3./7 G-G =-o. o25C
T 35 ..F. 22
TO_ T,. + To _ . 9o + ,a. 17
40 5.77 2 = .3. 04-
45 Z o/
T4 50 24 Tb-- -/- TO -- /'75/';3=/.6"J'-
55 q. 34- 2
60 /o. 7
T7 65 Ig '0
70 /2. e;2
Tb- To= .'c
( t
G 75 /3. 2
T10
Tn
80
85
12. ql
/o. g L IIZ + ++ + To+2 (-nT
T2 90 /2. 5"
Tla
Tx4
95
100
/2..4'
1 4
[.
= -/. o8"o,, (o. oozl/)C/q3, se)
";"'9- ":'"
T 105 1.4
T16 110 1,o.47
T7 115 12.4 Temperature rise = To - To+T =/2.-3. 17-0.'7q = t. '8"C
Ts 120 /P.'o To+ T,, _ 3.t7+ /. g = . qto oC
To 125 /. $3 Average temperature -- 2
To 130 /. 6"4
T2 135 1.2.6"7 Heat input ="-.49')(./g)= 4'Z o,97 /<3"
2 140 /2. ' *Heat to water =(g lqg'.)(...,lV')(. ?,')= 211. gZZ A..T
Tua 145 /2. I
**Heat to calorimeter = (3. ,3"1)(g'$')= 2''. 7Z/
T 150 /.o. 6"3
155 Heat to concrete =.4. o ./,_oi?. ZZ-?. 7K---agL/l J
241.11N"
160 Specific heat = (3o. "/5) (,. 8$') = O. /F773 .7"/('. - "C)
165
170
175
T[ 180 /.. 76"
* Obtain factor from figure 7b.
** Obtain factor from figure 8b.
673
USBR 4907
t.0tc i.004
1.00 I.O01,
J
___
\ J
I.OOe 1.00 ---
J
J
\
1.0 O? 1.00:
I.(
1.00
w
I- LOOt i 0.99. --
1.00
'' " 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190
,\
CONTINUATION OF CURVE BELOW
h 1.002 i -
(/3 1.001
I.OOC
0.99g
0.998
0.997
30 40 60 70 90 90 I00 I10 120
TEMPERATURE t F
4229 4.204
J
4.224 -l 4.199
,;220
4.195
4.216 4.191
J
4.187
ta 4.195
w
4.191
, ,\ I
4.187 I I
4.183, i I ,
4.178 B i
4.174 I
0 5
I I 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
TEMPERATURE, C
674
USBR 4907
2.40
2.20
0
Z4-50
1.80
Noe: Use curve T 24-:30 when
method for determining
specific heo? described in
L60 Lob Report NO. CE-39 is used.
1.40
io 30 50 70 90 I10 130 150 170
oF
4.1"
CORRECT ION
FROM AVERAGE TEMPERATURE
3.79
3.4Z
Note: Use curve T 24-30 when method
for determining specific heot
described in Lob Report NO. CE-39
Is used.
04
2.66
-IO o tO 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
eC
675
USBR 4907
1.50
I I J I I
THERMAl. PROPERTIES-SPECIFIC HEAT /
1.45 -- -CORRECTION CHART FOR OBTAINING-
WATER EQUIVALENT FROM AVERAGE
/
TEMPERATURE I 1
1.40
/
1.35 ff
LL
O /
1.30
--i
.- "-y = 1.0548+ 0.002571 T
o0
1.25
J
/
1.20
/
/
1.15
J
/
I.lO
/
1.05
I0 50 50 70 90 I10 1:50 150 170
oF
Figure 8c. - Water equivalent of a calorimeter currently used by Bureau of Reclamation (inch-pound units).
1.70
I .50
/
O
O
I ,40
-y = 1.19964 + 0.0048807 T
I .30
1.20
1.10
-10 10 30 50 70 90
Figure 8d. - Water equivalent of a calorimeter currently used by Bureau of Reclamation (SI-metric).
676
USBR 4907
TEMPERATURE CYCLE 3
TEMPERATURE - DEGREES F
TIME 0 l 2 3 4 S G 7 8 9
420 67.9 67.9 87 9 67.9 67.9 67.9 67. 67.9 67.9 67.9
430 67.9 67.9 67 8 67.9 67.9 67.8 67.9 67.9 67.9 67.9
440 67.9 67.9 67 9 67.9 67.9 67.9 67.9 67.9 67.9 67.9
450 67.9 68.6 69 3 69.9 70.4 70.9 71.4 71.9 72.3 72,8
460 73.2 73.6 74 0 74.4 74.7 75.1 75.5 75.9 76.2 76,6
470 76.9 77.3 77 7 78.0 79.4 78.7 79.0 78.4 79.8 80.1
480 80.5 80.8 81 .I 81.S 81.8 82 2 82.5 82.8 83.2 83.5
490 83.9 84.2 84.6 84.9 85.2 85 6 85.9 86.3 86.6 86.8
500 87.3 87.6 87.8 88.3 87.9 87 6 87.3 87.1 87.0 86.8
510 86,7 06.6 86.5 86.4 86.4 86 3 86.2 86.2 86.1 86,1
520 86.1 86. I 86.0 86.0 86.0 86 0 85.9 85.9 85.9 85.9
530 85.9 85.9 85.8 85.8 85.8 85 8 85.8 85.8 85.8 85.8
540 85.8 85 7 85.7 85.7 85.7 85 7 85.7 85.7 85.7 85.7
550 85.7 85 7 85.7 85.6 85.6 85 6 85.6 85.6 85.6 85.6
560 85.6 85 6 85.6 85.6 85.6 85 5 85.5 85.5 85.5 85.5
570 85.5 85 B 85.5 85.5 85.5 85 5 85.5 85.5 85.5 85.4
580 85.4 85 4 85.4 85.4 85.4 85 4 85.4 85.4 85.4 85.4
590 85.4 85 4 85.4 85.4 85.3 85 3 85.3 85.3 85.3 85,3
600 85.3 85 3 85.3 85.3 85.3 85 3 85.3 85.3 85.2 85.2
610 85.2 85 2 85.2 85.2 85.2 85 2 85.2 85.2 85.2 85.2
620 85.2 85 2 85.2 85.1 85.1 85. I 85.1 BS.1 85.1 85.1
630 85.1 85.1 85.1 85.! 85.1 85.1 85.1 85.0 85.0 85.0
640 85.0 85.0 85.0 85.0 85.0 85.0 85.0 85.0 85.0 85.0
650 85.0 85.0 84.9 84.9 84.9 84.9 84.9 84.9 84.9 84.9
660 84.9
CALCULATION5
Figure 9. - Typical computer output generated from automatic data acquisition system.
677
USBR 4907
O. 300
0.295
0.290
" o.zss
BUFFALO BILL DAM
SPECIFIC HEAT
o.2eo f
(1o
-" 0.275 o
b.I
-I-
0.270
U.
W 0.265 J e. e
n
S = 0.221947 + 0.0004.37 T
0.255
t
0.250
0.245
0.240 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 I00 105 I10 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150
CONCRETE TEMPERATURE , F
Figure 10. - Linear (straight line) versus parabolic curves plot of specificheat.
678
USBR 4907
MIX DATA
Ibm kg mL
Water
Type I_./2" cement 245
Class F" fly ash Io5.
Fine aggregate 2G
Coarse aggregate
Volume of air-entraining admixture,
5-.5oz/94 Ibm (kg), C+ P
Volume of water-reducing admixture,
f. Ooz/ q. Ibm (kg), C+ P
Mineralogic makeup of aggregate: ,,e/,.,/L y z/mZsrox,'E
THERMAL PROPERTIES
Concrete Saturated
Temp. (T) density (P) Diffusivi (D) Specific heat (S) Conductivity (C)
oC oF lbm/ft3 kg/m 3 ft2/h m2/h Btu/(lbm' F) kJ/(kg.C) Btu/(h'h' F) kJ/(m-h-C)
679
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4908-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4908; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision.
680
USBR 4908
10. Conditioning
of the concentration shall be made as necessary to maintain dividing by 127 (5 inches = 127 mm) and multiplying
sulfate concentration between these limits. The entire by 100.
solution shall be replaced with a new solution annually.
13. Report
12. Calculations
12.1 Figure 3 shows a typical data and calculation form. 13.1 Figure 3 may also serve as a typical reporting
12.2 Record expansion of each specimen individually, form when used as an attachment with a cover letter.
but report percent expansion as average of three specimens. Report the type of cement and, if blending materials are
12.3 To convert from expansion in inches to percent used, the amount and identification of blending material.
expansion, divide by 5 and multiply by 100. Although Report expansion as percent expansion using length after
specimen length is 6 inches, effective gauge length is 5 1 day in solution as base length. The amount of expansion
inches. If measurements are made in metric units, convert due to absorption during I day in solution may be reported
from expansion in millimeters to percent expansion by as additional information.
682
USBR 4908
El, I B2: I
Insert c,r 2-by 2-b.y C1..,3-
llooil' slobs,, and for 4-b.y 4.....
:1 b' ,Cl-lC:h, and 8-b,' ;'--"ll i.
di,,amel:er, 48qnch, bmori. Gouge: polntl B'II
2: ise, d n IIl,rgmei, bars al%l! sllob,,
28 NF Onml B" ued ir, smol!l h.ars..
per inch
C:
I
a' linch
,diorneler,,
1 m
2:0 NC in: mold.,
per inch
per inch
NOTES:; }ns,e,rf No."s ;1' 1.2,1:11 i I are Il.rtl:$;:; I No..I's: 4.=,,.on,1 E; ore, sd',n, less s:.eem]l,, ilrlidl INIo. '7 lis: le:c<l clnchl-amch, or.
A.III lour #,olnls ore, llom]lnJless$:tleell, ondl Jl@ckn, ul:s ore b, ros:s.
"A" iir, seris ,re osll or sod' inp.lloc:e "B" lau?e :.ol: !lin411icale Ihlcd' 1l,L, ge su Is scr'eed iind:o inse:rll anl
"C* indica'lles l''llrlll lOlige s;ud! illn:sert is cost Oil- set iinpllocel:.
A, ILI! ,llJJJJleS S'l:owr"% in ttlc:hm-piolLIrtd ,lmJl"l,llts,, ]1 I!o, ol! = 01.30': r'l, Cr4d I Ilrlmch -, 25.,4 ram,,
Figure: 2 - Inserts and gauge pc, iints us,edl iin c,:ncrel:e, andi mortar spe(i[mens, :o,r length and vc, J,tmelric ,deteminatJ,:n.
USBR 4908
Aggregate Source6"dEAat '''ig (4,4t rO_, MSA inch 0am,,.).; Grading: d./A' 4- ,q'4o
CementContent '-'P lbm/yd3(-kg/m; Pozzolan Content At' lbm/yd3(kg/m3); Slag Content ,#', lbm/yd3 (kg/m)
AEA:V/M.t.aAP iAmount oz/yd(-mm/.m;Air-n-ent':.%;Slump inches(-m--
other Admixtures: at',',f" . Amount N'A oz/yd3 (mm/m3);imen Size #-:3 at" d inches (-ram-).
Amount --oz/yd (mm/m);Specimen No. ', $ o / C
Date Cast 7-/-:. ; Concrete Curing: /-Z-,41" ,,"-*$ Pg#... I-OAY" ":"
Datelmmersed dP'-/,-t Immersion Solution: A,"rtoO : ,i/ .,,s,,,,'. g'Ar
Average
No. #"- No. F'AS-8 No. 'A r- C No. No. No. Expansmn
Age Exp., Exp., Exp., Exp., Exp., Exp., inches
Date in Dial inches Dial inches Dial inches Dial mm Dial mm Dial mm or.aza'ri Percent
Days Reading 10- Reading 10-4 Reading 10 - Reading 10 - Reading 10 - Reading i0- 10-
i,,6..g.
O .a;o
0 a.Doa
0 o.o$#
21 ,. 94Z
0 a. IO
6"1 a. 1
Iq6q
4-/" tTO ',ZZ tS Z;/Z q6 ZfO 3 140 l/a" O. Z3
1.'5" 0.I#.
l "t TC*
/-s ESz Z.." t3 Z6 /TZ .@#4. ZZI IqS 0.#0
/qTI
/ql'
Z37 74
t-s3 d Zq6 717 ZOI 304I ZO
so - ta
Figure 3. - Typical data and calculation form for determining the sulfate resistance of concrete.
684
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4909-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4909; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of CRD Method C 36-73.
685
USBR 4909
where:
7.3 Heatingand Cooling.-Test each specimen over four
temperature ranges (note 2). The low range shall be from cc = thermal diffusivity in square feet per hour
35 to 75 + 3 F (1.7 to 23.9 - 1.7 C), the first intermediate
(square meters per hour),
range from 75 to 115 + 3 F (23.9 to 46.1 1.7 C), M = a factordepending on size and shape of
the second intermediate range from 115 to 155 + 3 F
specimen [1] 2 , and
(46.1 to 68.3 + 1.7 C), and the high range from 155 tl and t2 = times in minutes at which specified
to 195 + 3 F (68.3 to 90.6 1.7 C). Place concrete
temperature differences between center
cylinder in a lifting frame and lower into a container that and circumference of specimen are
has enough water to cover specimen, at least 5 gallons reached.
(19 L). Place container with specimen into the refrigerator-
oven and bring to desired starting temperature at lower For a cylinder,
end of temperature range. Maintain temperature of water
bath at upper end of temperature range. The temperature
of chamber, water in container, and center and outside
of specimen must all be in a steady-state condition prior M= (2)
5.783 + 7r 2
to proceeding with test. Then, remove specimen from /-2 L2
refrigerator-oven using the lifting frame and place
immediately into high-temperature water bath. where:
NOTE Z-The thermal diffusivity of concrete varies with T1 and T2 = temperature differences at times
temperature of concrete. Performing the test over four tl and t2,
temperature ranges provides four points to delineate this
variation, although only one or two ranges are usually adequate In (--' = natural logarithm of temperature
k12/
to provide values for diffusivity within the required accuracy. difference ratio,
With the equipment described in this procedure, best results are
/- = radius of cylinder in feet (meters), and
obtained by conducting the test from low to high temperatures;
L = length of cylinder in feet (meters):
however, when using other equipment the reverse may be true.
8.2 The average temperature of the specimen is
7.4 Measurements.-The heating history shall be calculated:
obtained at 1-minuteintervals fromtime specimen is placed
in high-temperature bath until temperature difference Tt = 0.707 (Tel- Tee) + Tee (3)
between center of specimen and water bath is 3F (or
2C), or less. As a check on repeatability, two heating where:
histories could be obtained for each test specimen at each
temperature range. The calculated diffusivities shall check Tt = average specimen temperature at tl or t2, in
within 0.002 ft2/h (0.00018 m2/h) when run at same
F (C);
Tel = circumference temperature at tl or t2, in F
temperature. At least three specimens shall be tested at
(C); and
each temperature range. AppendixXlgives the operation
Tee = center temperature at tl or t2, in F ( C).
instructions for the data acquisition program. Figure X1.1
shows a schematic of the program, table X1.1 shows a NOTE 3.-The factor 0.707 has been determined as the point
typical data printout, and figure X1.2 shows a computer- where the internal volume is equal to the external volume of
generated graphical plot. any cylindrical specimen.
686
USBR 49O9
A sample worksheet is shown on figure 1 using data T" = 74.98 F and T = 54.81 F at tl
from appendix table X1.1 and figure X1.2. The average Tt = 0.707 (74.98-54.81) + 54.81 = 69.07 F
diffusivity should be plotted against the average temper- TtI = 69.07 F at 28.05 minutes
ature on a single graph for all three specimens over all Ttz = 73.93 F at 65.05 minutes
four temperature ranges. A linear or second-order parabolic
curve should be fit to this data by the method of least 69.07 + 73.93
squares, and the curve equation should appearon the graph; T -- 2 -- 71.50 OF
refer to computer-generated data (table 1) and the resulting
graph (fig. 2). Then,
T1 = 20.17 F at tl = 28.05 minutes
Table 1. - Measureddiffusivity data points used in regression /'2 = 4.94 F at t2 = 65.05 minutes
analysis and diffusivity regression equations. *
20.17'
Temperature Average Measured
60 In \ 4.--] 60 In 4.083
Specimen Range, Temperature, Diffusivity,
No. F F ft2/h 5.783 + 3.14162 92.528 + 9.870
0.252 12
1 155 to 195 191.76 0.0226
2 155 to 195 191.86 .0230
3 155 to 195 191.91 .0229 = (60)(1.407) = 0.82433
102.398
1 115 to 155 151.77 .0226
0.82433
2 115 to 155 151.73 .0227 OC --
-- 0.0223 ft2/h
3 115 to 155 151.71 .0225 65.05 - 28.05
687
USBR 49O9
I',.
o o %
,q ,q
r., xl- O'-
qt,
,q
8
"B
% q,.
o
-o
G
o o q,. t
g
%
4
%
04
ix.
q,.
- .
.,
' } oo
.
,q
8Z x
o,
z o
688
USBR 4909
xl-
N N
%
I,,,
O4
8
"S
.-_,
,-,G
o ,.O
., -. z <
,= . . e
._tL
e...
d
8z
689
USBR 49O9
>-
=L
x z
__ 8
1
e,i
X
I-- -
QO
I
O
4-
X
!
to
o
4.
X . g
! -2"
O OJ
II
X O
i o
It') " - b-
-2
OJ
II
o
D
J | ! ! Ilia i J I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l I I I I- o
ir)
o o o 0
o
o o 6 0
0
0
0
0
6
HOOH H3d 133J 3HVNOS N! AIIAISR910
690
USBR 4909
APPENDIX
OFF TAPE
5. When asked to input test title, type in test title (up to 25 characters), then push END LINE.
6. When asked to input specimen ID, type in specimen ID (up to 25 characters), then push END LINE.
7. When asked to input date, type in as shown, then push END LINE.
8. Program will now measure all temperatures and print them out each time you press FRIG TEMP (button kl).
This button may be pressed as many times as needed to ensure that everything has reached steady state.
9. When everything has reached steady state, you are ready to start test:
Place specimen in hot bath and press START (button k4) as soon as possible.
10. Computer will start taking data as soon as you press START, and will take a reading every 15 seconds.
After a few readings, temperature will not change as fast and 15 seconds between readings is too short. The
screen will show:
To double the time between readings, push TIME+ (button kl). Push this button only once, then wait. The
next time a reading is taken, the reading interval will change to 30 seconds. If you then push TIME+ again,
the reading interval will change to 60 seconds the next time it reads. To shorten the time between readings,
push TIME- (button k2). This will cut the reading interval in half.
11. When test is finished (center temperature and water temperature about equal), press FINISHED(button k4).
The computer will then stop taking data.
12. The screen will now ask what's next? To store the data, press STORE (button kl).
13. You will now be asked for a data file name. Type in file name (up to six characters), and press END
LINE.
This example file name is MFD (Middle Fork Dam), S1 (Specimen 1), and H (high temperature).
14. Computer will store data on tape, which will take several minutes. When screen stops blinking, data has
been stored.
691
USBR 4909
15. You are now ready for next test. Press NEWTEST (button k4).
16. You will be warned that the previous data will be lost if it has not been stored. If data has been stored,
type in Y END LINE. If you type in N END LINE, screen will show same as in step 12, and you can press
STORE (button kl) if you have not stored the data.
17. You are now ready for next test, go back to step 5 and repeat sequence.
REFRIGERATOR
WATERII II
BATH " I I
[ -o2, 2 1231d 5 DATA ACQUISITION UNIT I
T-type Thermocouple J
Input module-slot I J
Ambien'l"
I]]]]]] PRINTER
=1
Air
f - Specimen
Circumference
Specimen
HOT WATER BATH
:RTABLE COMPUTER
692
USBR 4909
0.00 34.62 75.28 40.67 75.20 32.05 57.65 75.01 17.35 75.03
0.25 34.63 75.18 40.55 75.10 33.05 58.31 75.01 16.69 74.98
0.50 34.63 75.14 40.52 75.07 34.05 58.95 75.03 16.07 74.99
0.75 34.65 75.13 40.48 75.11 35.05 59.57 75.01 15.44 75.00
1.00 34.67 75.13 40.46 75.03 36.05 60.17 75.02 14.85 75.00
1.25 34.68 75.11 40.42 75.09 37.05 60.73 75.03 14.30 75.02
1.50 34.72 75.09 40.37 75.05 38.05 61.27 75.03 13.76 75.02
1.75 34.76 75.07 40.31 75.05 39.05 61.82 75.03 13.22 75.03
2.00 34.79 75.06 40.27 75.03 40.05 62.32 75.06 12.74 75.03
2.52 34.87 75.03 40.17 74.99 41.05 62.83 75.09 12.26 75.06
3.02 34.96 75.01 40.05 74.97 42.05 63.30 75.07 11.77 75.06
4.05 35.17 75.00 39.83 74.98 43.05 63.74 75.10 11.36 75.07
5.05 35.45 74.97 39.52 74.95 44.05 64.19 75.08 10.89 75.06
6.05 35.79 74.97 39.18 74.94 45.05 64.60 75.11 10.51 75.08
7.05 36.24 74.95 38.71 74.94 46.05 65.00 75.10 10.09 75.11
8.05 36.80 74.96 38.16 74.92 47.05 65.41 75.12 9.72 75.11
9.05 37.43 74.94 37.51 74.92 48.05 65.79 75.16 9.37 75.12
10.05 38.18 74.93 36.74 74.90 49.05 66.15 75.12 8.97 75.14
11.05 39.01 74.94 35.92 74.89 50.05 66.50 75.17 8.67 75.14
12.05 39.90 74.92 35.02 74.87 51.05 66.83 75.14 8.31 75.14
13.05 40.84 74.92 34.08 74.90 52.05 67.16 75.16 8.00 75.15
14.05 41.81 74.93 33.11 74.91 53.05 67.46 75.17 7.70 75.17
15.05 42.83 74.92 32.09 74.89 54.05 67.77 75.20 7.44 75.19
16.05 43.84 74.92 31.08 74.93 55.05 68.05 75.22 7.17 75.21
17.05 44.84 74.96 30.12 74.92 56.05 68.35 75.24 6.89 75.22
18.05 45.85 74.96 29.12 74.93 57.05 68.61 75.23 6.62 75.22
19.05 46.82 74.95 28.13 74.92 58.05 68.86 75.26 6.40 75.25
20.05 47.81 74.93 27.12 74.93 59.05 69.11 75.28 6.17 75.29
21.05 48.77' 74.95 26.18 74.93 60.05 69.36 75.30 5.94 75.29
22.05 49.59 74.95 25.26 74.93 61.05 69.59 75.31 5.72 75.30
23.05 50.60 74.95 24.34 74.94 62.05 69.82 75.34 5.53 75.34
24.05 51.49 74.94 23.44 74.94 63.05 70.01 75.35 5.34 75.35
25.05 52.34 74.96 22.63 74.94 64.05 70.23 75.37 5.14 75.34
26.05 53.19 74.98 21.79 74.95 65.05 70.44 75.38 4.94 75.36
27.05 54.02 74.98 20.96 74.95 66.05 70.62 75.42 4.80 75.41
28.05 54.81 74.98 20.17 74.96 67.05 70.80 75.42 4.63 75.42
29.05 55.56 74.96 19.41 74.96 68.05 70.99 75.43 4.45 75.43
30.05 56.28 75.00 18.72 74.97 69.05 71.15 75.43 4.28 75.43
31.05 56.98 74.99 18.01 74.97 70.05 71.32 75.46 4.14 75.43
693
USBR 49O9
o
Go
O3
/
W o
r,,-
>- I
/
>Od
OJ
h !
!/
e" I.L o
!
Jm
,-J
cnU
I/ o
1 u') u
WO
..-U
w.< i
/ W
I-
Z
o
13 b.-
Oh,.
z :D
Z -8
g
j-
a
W
E
n 8
"S
J
W
0
I
/
N
0
8 o
Ao NI 30N33AAIO 3IFLLVW3clPI31
694
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4910-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4910; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision.
695
USBR 4910
dried at 190 F (87.8 C) to initiate testing under equal Step 21.-Set range selector to CAL and bring needle
conditions. to 100 with CAL SET adjustment.
5.2.1 During initial drying of first set of specimens, Step 22.-Bring range selector back to 10.
mass is determined until no loss of the mass is observed. Step 23.-Set ABC selector switch to B. Insert shim.
Specimens are immediately dipped in heated paraffin wax Step 24.-Adjust needle to 100 with span B adjustment
to sustain this 100 percent dry condition. screw.
5.2.2 After initial drying, second set of specimens Step 25.-Set ABC selector switch to C. Insert shim.
are vacuum saturated and their mass determined until no Step 26.-Repeat step 24 with span C screw.
increase in mass is observed. Specimens are immediately Step 27.-Check zero of A+B+C.
submerged in a water bath of constant temperature to Step 28.-Repeat steps 18 through 27 with second
sustain this 100 percent saturated condition. amplitude.
5.2.3 The second set of specimens, which were Step 29.-With range selector at 10 and ABC selector
previously tested in a fully saturated state, are also used switch at A+B+C, begin test by moving rheostat to about
for obtaining data in a partially saturated condition. The 55 and turning on all other switches. Turn recorder to
fully saturated specimens are dried and their mass "select-o-print."
determined until they reach a condition of 75 percent Step 30.-Temperature is adjusted with knob on
saturation. To remain in this state, specimens are temperature controller.
immediately dipped in heated paraffin wax. The highest 6.3 Temperature control shall be verified as conform-
values for coefficient of thermal expansion are normally ing with section 3 by adequate thermometers certified by
obtained in this 75 percent saturated condition. manufacturer.
6. Calibration and Standardization 7. Conditioning
696
USBR 4910
CE -- y= -)'1 where:
0.55 S (1)
a = constant derived from the average temperature
where: multiplied by the slope of the line,
b = slope of line,
CE = coefficient of thermal expansion, in (in/in)/F c = constant derived from a, minus the average
x 10-6 or (cm/cm)/C x 10-6; meter readings,
= intercept of line at 35 F (1.7 C); x = temperature in F (C),
= intercept of line at 90 F (32.2 C); and f = average temperature in F (oC),
S = summation of gauge lengths, in inches y = measurement in inches per inch (centimeters
(millimeters). per centimeter),
y = average measurement in inches per inch
9.2.2 A more precise method of calculating the (centimeters per centimeter), and
coefficient of thermal expansion is by the least squares CE, S, yl, and y = as previously defined.
method of calculation for determining the slope of a line
(fig. 3):
10. Report
CE = 2.g-z
0.55 S (1) 10.1 A cover letter along with figures I and 2 or figure 3
should serve as a report for this procedure.
yl = -c + 35b (2)
11. Precision and Bias
yz = -c + 90b (3)
11.1 The precision and bias for this procedure have
C = ;/--J7 (4) not been established.
697
USBR 4910
Specimen: lg Prism 1-1 Cylinder; Jl Sawed [] Fabricated; Nominal Size2- v2-aV4 inches xcmm-)-
Aggregate Source: CoarseAL, rHopF os 7:. Fine r/opp Cos. ('')
MSA: / inches (-mm /.6 ro 3-,// CI/-,//EO
IX 100% Vacuum Saturated [] 75% Vacuum Saturated [] 100% Oven Dried
Gauge Lengths: (1)__ (2) 4.____q_ (3) "._____o (4)L(5) 1. (6) ".O inches (-ram-)Summation:./" inches (-ram-).
No. 1 No. 2
Range /O Range /0 Average
Time Temperature O. o/sv'cW /oo Meter Remarks
F C Meter Reading Meter Reading Reading
'*.l/,f(/5 '), /,/. Ce.4"'.,) / (3.4"$g').,
8:@0 74 o o o
9:03 74. 9
698
USBR 4910
(0o) 3rllVl:13dlti31
oi
ro
Z
r7
8
I
w
OC
OC
---:-Y---
=_,== -T=..:---;----+
= =-- ::_. iT;--_=i--T l: '-- ....... '-+= -+-+ +-'- +-+= +-+= =-- l--
W
o
. -+.... ..........+_ ..... -_++.
:+,. +, , .+++-
+_ =+ =:-= ++ : = .=. =
" . =_.
+=.. +_
++
' .... _T: ....... - ....... -- ....... i-+++ ............
....... + ......
..... r+..: .--+-,..: --i.++--,- ==--P+L=-I=:'++- -.-:-r=: .--_____r
, + ::= ;, .+|. ....... ,_.+, ..... +.<+ -'-!-- i-rp-ul ++ -' -._+__.. , . ---- .... + . -'.:. .... _..,. _+__
!
-}4+ ":- ! *
+---,.-..
++*+ 6 +
-+.........--.--++--+---.
...... v-+++-+- .
---- +. 7+-- =-" : :-=:: :-'--
-+,........... --:- + ++_++i--r..--l--r--l-u-1, !_+-I :ll]-.
-+-,- - 7++-+ + ;'----- --- ...... 4- L-uL r;i= .'.-I--,- , -+-=-- - ? --' " - ..... + ..... .+eJ-. --,---- -- ........
-'-+-+- .+---++-- -+--4 .... +'-:+ +;---;',' +';-t7 +-I
!E .__
" ' :','. ':+ ----5--="= ....
" " ==_ '.........
:+__'_= " =-_.--_-i_
_.2 .- _------ " --__.
' " ....
-'---: -=- =---=-: :-: o
o
o 0 0 0 0 0 0 +
("Io) 3IrllVN3dlti31
699
USBR 4910
X
y
Temperature Meter x-' (3l- X--") 2
y-y (x- ) 0"- )
oF oC Reading
x= x= x=-8'2.+ x =a-.a.?/
JP23.
7O0
UNITED STATES OF RECLAMATION
INTERIORBuREAU
DEPARTMENT OF THE ()
USBR 4911-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4911; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision.
701
USBR 4911
SATU i: A BL E
FAN n
BFiI,C)WN
RE CO R D ER -"
- HI E F M O M E T E R S
_.____J,
SHIELD
EiiglLI3"e !! (:DLI!IN ;>:C[i(:,] rj C' ,IIIL],F:il}QII,U]" rl)lll]: ]?;esenl c,:nli;urati,:,n ,::< the ,tdli, l,$ h:Hic, te[ r,::,,,.lq, ilq use 41 I:lh,(; ::,rcti' *itm:ue is shightl, dillFter',t
:,uc adE,ILIJE'II'}' p{I, rEr ys Ihe fimcti,,,n:,ll F, urpc, se
71-12:
USBR d911
so that air e.nte'[s, re,ore un]if:c:,rn:]ly a.cr.,:ss entire side .of . A marchedl F, air u,f e[ectrica] esistance rherm, orne:ers
oc,m. A simi.la ilacket is placed ,,m return, side of n>a,m. o. Honeywell[ s;triltc,, chart pro,p.,:.rrioning controlller.
With r]-Jis un]f,::)rm meth,:}d ,:}f air' cii>L u]!aJc, n, a[]! te'n-@eratu'e , Honeywe]l]l E]k.c:rr-o-va]: unit
gradie.nrs hrc, ng:b,,:m:t room are. reduced o a mirfimum. , S,aarable reactor, 3 kV'A, General Ele.c:tri;c M.Jdel
The perforated wall iackets, iin some c,,f ]he. roo.ms are made Nc,,. 9XM38A 1.
,::>f No 20 gauge gaDv.anized Jir.,m WM:l 5/'16-inch, {8.-ram)
diameter h(::,[e.s on 2-]/'8-irJ, ch, r5,l-mm) centers. In other 52.6 'I"lne. resistance the'n-c:,n-Jleters are nickel-vdre
>::oms, ii/'8-inch (3-ram) tempered masonite is ased wt:h budl:l.s w'tb a re'sistance ,::if about (!i()0 ,u, hnql.S at 100 F
1.,."2-inclJ, (]3-n-in-K:, hc,.ies O13 2.@irlch ({d-mm)c:entez's (!;?..8 . . C),.. Th, e @mrmome:ers are a balan, ced pair
(nu.:e 1). AI!] iinsdle surfaces are .coa:ed w:kh alrnJinnql matchedl to witl'fin (),1 o F' (C)'.06 '::'C) hroughoat their
pain.:. ange: T'he spedmen :hezmometer, whk:h, is. encased
in, a cIa.se.-firt[ng s:a[nlless-sted tube:. 2 ] inches { 5,33 ram)
NCE-'E 1-The :metal wa!ll i, acke{s are F.re.:ered because mas,:mize k:,ng i:or F:,>:recti,;m, is a H.,:ne'v'weE Ins.trmnen, Co.
has. been fou:nd! C, expand and buckle fr.um lS;e:. a: high Part 73,72:d. The air therma.mleter has the same s.en, sitb'e
t e HTh per a{ u; r e s ele.men encased n s.raiirJe'ss-stee]i tubing
5.2:.7 The tempe:.ra{re sensing and r'ecc,.ding
5.2.3 Ample ac,ces;s into the,c:alc.rirn, eter room for small
iln, strumen: is a Hc,,n,e.ywe]l][ Ele.,cr'onik p.roporri,:>ning
e.lectric liift txcks nnd fi:,r handling large spe.cMne.ns is
re.cording: cantro]lez The iniria ntfl]: ic,.oiinr ,:,f ::h:is. in-
pr<,,vii.de.d by a Ste.x, ensc,.n ,:r'erlap.-ype.,, c:a.]d-st.,:.rage do, or
strun-,ent ils; a {:he ce.n, ter c,,t: the scale:,, and the t'ulI-scale
'wid- a d- by 7-f,u,,;:t (] 2-by 2.1-m).pening (figure 3.:1.
defle:c::ii,,:}r is; - 110 to:, + 10 o C,
5.24 Ternperatulre c:,::lnt>;:xl is mlaim-a;in, ed IDly dl awiin, g
5..2.8 Pc,.wex o the ro,::ma l:xe:ate.s, is re.gu]ared
air over o>a,]ing coils and heatez units. ]located in du,ct over
thr,ugh the: Elec:r-o-vo.]t unit c, the. (ontro]lle> This
ca]lor':imeer >,:<:,m The 'in-tyg:,e o;c,]ing cc, ils are: capabte <:,.
produces a varying d-c contro.1 v,::dtage w.h, ictq, egula:es.
trarJsfe.rr[ng: 18,000 Bt u./'h, (5,272 W), 'with a 22: c, F' ,: 12:2 o C)
the pow'er flow ttJr,:mgh :lne. sarur'abe reactor
diffeeniall between k,rM, e and ro,,,:m? emperamre. Brme
5.2:9 T,u, read temperature in rc:,orn, two additi,::>na]l
refrigeran cc,.mes from a st]ppl'.r maintahmd ar abo,u l r_!i F
thermm,e.e.rs sirrJ, i]lar m, t}-m t:h, ermometers used in the
(-9 ::"C) Electrically u,,perated vallve.s proviide re'friigera:ion
cc,,n:rc:,l c:ircuit are. used, one for re>diing raom ai
adjusm-,ent The hea:iing unit cc:,.nsiss <:;, a frame ,:m wI-Jich
tempe:ture :rod one for reading: speciimer tempe.ratare..
are:. muunred he.lira[ coiiRs ,:f N,;>. ]9 C:hD::une] "=A" wire
Leads f>,::>rn these ff,erm,:me.te.rs are b>cug]-t tu. the:
dles[gr:ed f:,::r a peak :emperature c,,f 400 F ,:12:(],4 C) at
cc,.mF, Lrer cc:,ntro.lJledl data acquisitikm system iin. control
d lJp ,::';!:!)'Sl3 ',7:1, and :11"3 %L The air in "c:,e r,,:l<:m is ch, arJ, g:ed
ro,u,m TEl!s. system makes a fc,.ur-wiie zesiis.:ance
four {limes per n:qinue by an A,nerican B]owe.r Co. Modal
inegsure.n'sent c;,n earth c, the: thermometers.
No 35CI c:erJt:ifag:al n:iUlltivarJ, e blower, be]: driven at:
5.2.]0 ID'her types. ,:f omro.]l systems and m-
380 rT"mJin by a 15-hp (11 L9-W) induction motor.
strurnen, tatii,:m can also provide sais.:ac::ory c:on:ol. This
323 The ternpera:ure-con:zolMg :[nstrun-,e.rJ:s.
system, has beer described s.ome.wtaat iin, de'ail f.c, the
,C:,l>nSiSt ,,f w'ha: s known as :he "Horm,ywe]l Electrx,nk
benlefit c,,t: Bureau persorm, el wh,:, wi][I be: cc, ndu<:iing the
] 51 prOpll:)rtiCllElirlg rec,:rdlh-Jg CClnltrO[]lers " *Illhe ' e]errJlen,s o{
test w:kE {>,is ]ins.:a]llatilan. T'iq, e systern used mus cc, n-
t[Js system c:,::]rsis.r ,,)f:
t>,]l the :en-J, perarure 'within a ole:.rael.e of 0.01 F
(=0,,,0Ct55 o C).
5..3 Zr]'e';oa'.,!' vibrators w:kh
2-inch ,'51-n-Jin:l, F, oker vibraro, r heads operaiing , a
minimum of ]0,00'() viibratk,ns p,e. m]r:,ute.
54: i!mpi)]? Rod.-The ramping >,:)d shall be
5/'8-Jinc]:l ,::16-m,-n) diame.er w:kh a 2d-mch .l:6]0-mrnl
long bu:l]let-nos.edl ro.d.
6, Pre, cam:iors
7 ,i: ) ?',
USBR 4911
are covered under that particular procedure directly or 9.3 After entire test batch has been placed in the
by reference. container, it may be necessary to use the tamping rod
7.2 Thermometers shall be calibrated by taping the to form holes for the brass tubes that are soldered to
thermometers together along with a standard calibrated the container lid (sec. 5.1).
thermometer and placing them in an oil bath within 9.4 Put lid on specimen container and solder in
the calorimeter room or chamber. Calibration shall be place. Attach a tire pump to air valve and induce air
made at each 10 o F (6 o C) increment within the expected to a pressure of 2 to 3 inches (50 to 75 mm) of mercury
range of the temperature rise. into container. Test solder joints for leaks using a soap
solution. Disconnect pump and release air pressure. Add
8. Conditioning a few drops of light oil to each thermometer well to
8.1 Concrete test mixtures containing aggregatein form a liquid contact between thermometer and well.
the 3- to 6-inch (75- to 150-mm) size fraction should Place insulation jacket around container. Place control
be selectively hatched to produce a 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) thermometer in one of the wells and connect to control
maximum size aggregate. instrument after disconnecting the decade resistance box
8.2 Two percent additional cement, pozzolan, and which has been maintaining the room temperature at
water shall be added to the temperature rise specimens 70 F (21.1 C). The room temperature will now be
to compensate for heat absorbed by metal container controlled by temperature of specimen. Place specimen
and one-half the insulation surrounding specimen. This reading thermometer in second well and take readings
2 percent is a correction factor and should not be included of the air and specimen temperatures so that control
when repormg mixture proportions. index on controller can be adjustedto maintain the room
8.3 The calorimeter room should be under temper- temperature to exactly the same temperature of the
ature control the day before a temperature rise test is specimen.
to be initiated. This provides an opportunity to check 9.5 Record temperatures hourly at beginning of test
operation of controller and readings of thermometers period and at greater intervals as test progresses. Test
and to bring all equipment in room, as well as room should continue for 28 days, and values of temperature
itself, to starting temperature. The test may be started rise and heat of hydration of cement reported at 1, 3,
at any initial temperature of the concrete; however, the 7, 14, and 28 days. Because of the slightly different
initial temperature greatly affects the rate of hydration characteristics of the thermometers, the specimen and
during the first few days. Accordingly, concrete aggregate air reading thermometers shall be matched after the
and mixing water should be tempered to produce an first day of testing and at greater intervals as test pro-
initial temperature as close to 70 F (21.1 C) as can ceeds. This matching operation shall be done by wiping
be obtained unless rate of hydration at some other initial the oil film from the surface of the specimen ther-
temperature is specifically desired. To maintain mometer, and suspending it with the air thermometer so
temperature of room at 70 o F prior to test, the specimen that their sensitive elements are together as described
controlling thermometer should be replaced with a previously. Any variation of the air temperature from
decade-resistance box. that of the specimen should be corrected by adjusting
8.4 Before starting test, the specimen and air- the control index.
reading thermometers shall be matched by placing them
so that their sensitive elements are together and at same 10. Calculations
temperature. Several readings should be taken on each
thermometer and the difference in their resistance 10.1 Typical values of temperature rise and heat of
reading noted. Accordingly, when test is started, the hydration for various types of cement are shown on
control should be set to maintain this difference between figure 4, and typical data for determining same are shown
the air and specimen thermometer resistance readings. on figure 5. Although frequent temperature readings
should be taken during the test to maintain close control,
9. Procedure only sufficient readings need be calculated to plot a
9.1 Concrete shall be prepared for testing in smooth curve of temperature rise. The heat of hydration
accordance with USBR 4192. Prime mixer before is equal to temperature rise times average specific heat,
making test batch. Test batch shall be about 700 Ibm times total mass of mix divided by mass of cement.
(320 kg) of concrete made in a sample batch. The entire The result is a value in British thermal units per pound
batch shall be placed in the specimen container so that mass of cement (or joules per kilogram). The average
exact quantities are known. specific heat for a given temperature range is used
9.2 Immediately after mixing, make an initial because the specific heat of the concrete varies with
temperature reading on concrete with a precision temperature. For example, at the initial temperature,
mercury thermometer. Place concrete in container the specific heat of the concrete was 0.2139 Btu/(Ibm . F)
through the 7-inch (178-mm) diameter lid opening in [895.5 J/(kg'C))]. At age of 28 days, the concrete had
two layers, with each layer being about one-half the attained a temperature of 127.8 F (53.2 C) and a
volume of container. Compact each layer with the temperature rise of 56.0 F (31.1 C). At this tem-
internal vibrator. perature, the specific heat of the concrete was 0.2281
704
USBR 4911
I i I I i I
X X X
U.
o
G
1
tO 40
n,"
:3 Grand Coulee Aggregates
I---
initial Temperatures
30
tO
n
Approximately 70 F
tO
I--- 2O
Temperature Rise
I0
0 I I I I I I I
0 2 4 6 8 I0 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
180 I I 1 i i I I I I 1 I 1
Normal Cement
M
160
Modified Cement
140
Low-Heat Cement
120
E
llI I00
Z
tO 80
=E
tO Heat of Hydration
0
60
4O
20
0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I
0 2 4 6 8 I0 12 14 16 18 20 22 :)4 26 28
Figure 4a. - Temperature rise and heat of hydration versus time (English units).
7O5
USBR 4911
5O I I I I I I I I I I I I I
o 40
G X X X
E X N X X
: 30
380 I i I i I t i I I ] , , i
N
360
X
340
320
300
28O
260
8,
"-a 24O
Z
LIJ
220
hi
(D Heof of Hydrofion
200
180
160
t40
120
or- 0
I
2
I
4
I
6
I
8
I
I0
I
12
I
14
I
16
I
18 20
I I
22
I
24
I
26
Figure 4b. - Temperature rise and heat of hydration versus time (metric units).
706
USBR 4911
Specimen Number: /4 Date Cast: ,4--24- "q& Test Number: 4- Room Number: 2
Initial Temperature: 7/, F *Constant: 7o2.2 "-- 56.0 = /2. $4-
Age Age Temperature Rise Average Specific Heat Heat of Hydration
day h min day F C Btu/(lbm F) J/(kg C) Btu/lbm kJ/kg
o o 53 o.oq- o.q-5 0.25 o. 2t@O g9S'. 9 1.2.1 2.
0 5 23 o, ZZ 7..qo 4.11 ,2149 ?q. 7 1!.9,q-. ,.'q"
o IO ,43 o.45 16, o5 8.92 .2160 cJO.3 4-3.4- Io1.2
[ O o 1. oO 2.47 13,57 .21 70 =log. 5 6g,.9 IS'4.g
2 o og 2.01 - 3s, z5 /.sg . /g4- 9/':F.3 c);.5 2z.l-.s
o o 3,oo 41,Z zz..gz. .2_.19Z 917.7 //3.3 cJ zB 3-i"
,5- o o S, oo 4-7,,/0 2.17 ,Z/'9 92o./= / 2 9.3"9 3oz./
6 o o ,oo 4g.47 2.6.95 . ZZOl 9Z/,G /33;79 _%//.z
7 o o 7.00 "q 9.,,S- ZT, 6,9 .2203 ZZ.3 /3"7,72 32-0.3
0 0 IE.oo 50.?S- 2E. 19 . Z2O'/c 922.7 /4Go.Z7 3'26.2
o) o I' %o/ -1.79 2'. 77 . Z2o5" 923./ },3oZI 3-3.l)
/O o o /o.:x; 52.7 2 9. 3f _ Z'zo& 92,3, 6 1#-S.9. -3-9.
12. o 123 tz,ol 53.33 z9.63 . Z7-o7 ?xq, O /,,q--Z go 34-3.3
/3 O 41 13, o3 53.'76 g9,3 .ZZO7 9z.':t*,o /4',6 3,q-,-,,6
14 0 o /'%01 53,99 29.99 .2ZOg 9z4, / Y. KO 326
/5 0 0" /..O/ 5-.SI 30, 17 . .Z Do 92dr. ]- /."0, 3E 369. 7
/6 O O /6,OO S", 39 30.7--z. .ZX.Og 92"..4 IGO.bO 35"0.3
I 9 o o 19.oo 55.01 3 o.5"6 . zxo? 9z,q-. 15z.39 5S.t
Zo o o XO, OO _a./6 3Cxg/ .2ZO9 9Z,oo ]2.64 33:5;0
2. I O c, 21,oo 5.z 3o, ,-9 . Z'z-iO ?ZS.Z 153, J2 356.1
27_ O og' "z.. O I ,. ..,'. o" O. 7,.,R"
. Z.Z./0 ?ZS.?- / 53,,-0 $6,
Z " ,"F 3 z3.19 SS.O .o.7 .2z/, 9z5, Z 153.5"/- 3EZ I
26, o 3 z6, oz.. 5,2o 3/,0o .ZzlO Y28.7... /,.S-',q.,6S- $S,
Z.'7 0 2.,3 ZT,Z ,5"S. o9 3/, o5" .7-7-1o 9 Z.5", "Z /"gd 36o.Z
2.7 ZZ 13 z'/, 9 3 5&.oo :1,/I .ZZlO c)zs',x lS.,xo 3r..o. 9
7O7
USBR 4911
Btu/(lbm" F) [955.0 J/(kg'C)]. The average specific 10.2 A data acquisition system has been assembled
heat over this interval of temperature rise would be: which takes measurements of temperature at predeter-
mined intervals during the temperature rise test and stores
0.5 (0.2139 + 0.2281) = 0.221 Btu/(lbm.F), or the data. These data can then be printed or plotted. A
0.5 (895.5 + 955.0) = 925.3 J/(kg-C) computer program has also been developed for calculating
heat of hydration. A complete description of this system
This average value of specific heat should be used and the computer program are given in appendix X1.
to calculate the 28-day heat of hydration. The heat of
hydration at 28 days is equal to temperature rise times 11. Report
average specific heat times mass of concrete divided
by mass of cement, which would be: 11.1 Figure 12, of USBR 4909, includes relevant data
on the cement, pozzolan, aggregate, mixture proportions,
(56.0) (0.221) (702.2) and initial temperature; it may be used as a reporting form.
(56.0) = 155.2 Btu/lbm, or A table prepared similar to table 1 provides calculations
of average specific heat through given temperature rise.
(31.1) (925.3) (318.5) Figure 4 shows a plot of temperature rise and heat of
(25.4) = 360.9 kJ/kg
hydration. Figure 5 shows calculations of average specific
heat and heat of hydration.
NOTE 2.-Normal practice in cement industry testing has been
12. Precision and Bias
to use the CGS system of metric units. In that system of units,
heat of hydration is reported as calories per gram of cement.
To convert British thermal units per pound mass to calories per 12.1 The precision and bias statements for this
gram, divide by 1.8. procedure have not been determined at this time.
708
USBR 4911
Table la. - Sample calculation of average specific heat through Table lb. - Sample calculation of average specific heat through
given temperature rise for calculation of heat of hydration, t given temperature rise for calculation of heat of hydration.
709
USBR 4911
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1.1 Scope resistance of these thermometers is measured by the
HP-3497A using the four-wire ohms method for the most
X1.1.1 The program for the adiabatic temperature rise accuracy. A third-order polynomial is used to convert these
testing of concrete has two main functions: (1) to acquire resistance readings to temperature. Four thermometers are
temperature rise data, and (2) present these data in used in the test, two are placed in specimen and two are
graphical and printed forms. The first function of acquiring suspended in room to measure room temperature. One
the data is accomplished using the following equipment: of the specimen thermometers and one of the room
thermometers are conncected to the HP-3497A for data
HP-85A Desktop Computer with I/O ROM, Printer/ acquisition. The other two thermometers are used by the
Plotter ROM, Advanced Programming ROM, Mass room temperature control equipment for control and
Storage ROM, IEEE-488 interface, and 16K memory recording.
module.
X1.2 Procedure
HP-3497A Data Acquisition and Control Unit with
a 20-channel multiplexer card in slot 0 configured
X1.2.1 Operation of the program was designed to be
for four-wire resistance measurement.
self explanatory; however, a step-by-step procedure is as
HP-82901M Dual Flexible Disk Drive follows:
The second function of printing and plotting the data Step 1. Load main program from tape by typing: LOAD
uses the following equipment: "Autost," followed by using END LINE key. (Hereafter, all
typed commands are followed by pressing END LINE key).
HP-7225B Plotter, and HP-82905A Printer
Step 2. Press RUN key.
Other equipment could be used with this program, but
would require modification of the software. The program
Step 3. You now have 10 seconds to push function
was written to allow for a maximum of two tests to be
key INIT to start initialization sequence. This key is marked
performed simultaneously. The program takes temperature k7 and for proper operation, the shift key must be held
measurements at predetermined intervals, and stores these down while this key is pressed.
measurements and total elapsed time on a disk. Program
will print or plot the stored data either during the test
or after its completion. Step 4. Then, you will be asked for the following:
X1.1.2 A temperature rise test usually is run for 28 days.
Because of this extended length of time, it is important a. Room A Test Title
that the data be protected from loss and that the program b. Room A Specimen ID
can restart automatically in the event of a power failure. c. Room B Test Title
To guard againstloss of data, the data is stored on a flexible d. Room B Specimen ID
disk immediately after data is acquired. To guard against
a defective disk, all data are put on two flexible disks, Type in titles and ID's when asked, and follow each
one on each side of the dual drive. In the event of a power answer by pressing END LINE key. Answers to these
failure, the Auto-Start feature on the HP-85A is used. When questions must be 18 characters or less.
power is restored, program is read from tape cassette in
tape drive of HP-85A, and execution begins. When main
program begins execution in this manner, it initially loads Step 5. You will then be asked to enter data file names.
data file from tape that has reading intervals stored on These are the names used for the files that the test data
it and then checks time and date to see if any readings will be stored on. Enter these names, 7 characters or less,
were missed. The time and date are read from the and press END LINE key.
HP-3497A, which has a battery-backed clock that was set
at start of test. If any readings were missed or if it is Step 6. The reading intervals are now entered. You
time for another reading, program takes a reading and will be askedfor reading frequency and number of readings
fills any missed readings with this reading. at that frequency. A maximum of 300 readings can be
X1.1.3 The temperature rise test uses nickel bulb stored, so plan your work carefully. The following example
resistance thermometers for sensing temperature. The illustrates this step:
710
USBR 4911
To read every hour for first week, every 3 hours for elapsed time, and prints these values on the computer's
second week, and every 6 hours for third and fourth weeks, internal printer. Press kl and you will be asked how many
make the following entries: minutes you want between printings. If you enter 10, then
every 10 minutes a reading of these values will be made
1,168 1-hour intervals for 168 readings (7 days and printed out. This will continue until kl is pressed
times 24 readings per day = 168) again and a new time is entered. If a zero is entered, the
3,56 3-hour intervals for 56 readings (7 days process is terminated. This is a nice feature to use for
times 8 readings per day = 56) providing additional backup of the data. Please note that
6,56 6-hour intervals for 56 readings (14 days none of the data printed using this function will be stored
times 4 readings per day = 56) on the floppy disks.
0,0 Terminates entries
PLOT.-Pressing k2 will make a plot of the data to this
Step 7. At this point, data files are created on disks point in the test on an external HP-7225B plotter. This
and a special file named BASDAT is created on tape. This should be done at a time that will not conflict with a
file contains the data file names and the reading interval regularly scheduled temperature reading.
information entered in step 6. When the statement "DATA
FILE CREATION COMPLETE" is displayed, this process
is complete. RESIS.-Pressingk3 causes immediate temperature and
resistance readings on all four thermometers, and these
Step 8. You will then be asked to enter the current values are then printed on the computer's internal printer.
time and date in the sequence MMDDHHMMSS. A "zero- This function is useful for finding a problem within the
fill" and military time must be used for proper entry; e.g., system.
July 9 and 1:32 p.m., the proper entry is 0709133200. The
date and time entry sets the clock and calendar in the X1.2.2 After test is completed, the data can be
HP-3497A.
printed and plotted as desired, and is available on disk
for future manipulations if required.
Step 9. The preliminary setup is now complete. The
program has now stopped and the next step is to press X1.3 Connection of Thermometers
the RUN key. This time however, when the statement
10 SECONDS TO INITIALIZE is displayed, do NOr press
the INIT key. X1.3.1 Connection of the thermometers to the data
acquisition unit should be done as follows:
Step 10. The specimen should now be prepared. During
the preparation process, note the exact time that mix is Channels 0 and 10.-Room A thermometer
completed and the temperature of the mix at that time. Channels 1 and 11.-Specimen A thermometer
The computer screen will display a list of options after Channels 2 and 12.-Room B thermometer
step 9 is executed. The option of interest at this time Channels 3 and 13.-Specimen B thermometer
is the START option, which corresponds to function key
k8. Hold shift key down and press k8. You will then be Channels 0, 1, 2, and 3 are used as voltage reading inputs,
asked to enter the starting time of the specimen. Enter and channels 10, 11, 12, and 13 are used as current source
this date and time in the same manner as date and time outputs. The inputs and outputs are connected in parallel
were entered in step 8. The starting mix temperature and at the thermometer leads. It is important to note that
room temperature should also be entered when asked for. if two tests are to be run simultaneously, the specimen
initially used to start test must be placed in the room
Step 11. The program is now off and running. If a
designated as Room A.
second specimen is to be tested, start it in the same manner
as described in step 10.
Xl.4 Example of Computer Output
Step 12. The other options mentioned in step 10 that
are displayed on the screen can be used during the test
to perform several data display functions: X1.4.1 Figure X1.1 is an example of adiabatic
temperature rise.
PRINDAT-Pressing k5 (SHIFT and k5) causes all data X1.4.2 Figure X1.2 is a plot of adiabatic temperature
taken to this point in the test to be printed on an external rise.
HP-82905A printer. This can be done at any time during X1.4.3 Figure X1.3 is a computation of specific heat.
a test, but should be done when it will not interfere with X1.4.4 Figure X1.4 shows computer generated specific
a regularly scheduled temperature reading. heat curves.
X1.4.5 Figure X1.5 consists of average specific heat
T-PRINT.-This function provides an independent and heat of hydration. The computer generated data had
reading of specimen and room temperatures and the been established in English units; metric data were added.
711
USBR 4911
Test: BUFFALO BILL DAM Buffalo Bill Dam -- High sand mix --
Specimen: SAMPLE 1 Measuredspecific heat data.
Test Started: 6 FEB 1989
Average Measured
Specimen Temperature Specimen Temperature Specific Heat
Day Temp., F Rise, F No. (F) Btu/(lbm F)
!-
is
TIME (ORYS)
712
USBR 4911
.29
285
J
.28
Yt = 0.231 + 0.348 x 10")) X m
m
.J X 10 "9) X z ...... L ....
\ .27S Y2 = 0.224 + 0.516 x 10-3) X - (893
m,H .26
u
w I
n .25S
tl)
BUFFRLO BILL DRH-HIGH SRND HIX SPECIFIC HERT
.25
,/i Y2 and. YS
. . . I. . . I.. .
.24S
| | imll Jill ||Bli Ill Ill! lilt Imlllllll III lilt IIII Llll Ill! lllJltll! till Illl]lll! llil
.24 ?S OB 8S gB gS 188 llJ 118 115 12B 12S 138 135 140 145 158
48 45 SO 55 GO 85 70
713
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
" BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4913-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4913; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision.
714
USBR 4913
I I
Io
Pressure
regulofor,
I
I
J
5001bf/in
shield I
I
gauge I
I
, gloss
OI
I inc
I lbf/in2=6.8948
:J I
I
I
kPo I
I
I
Container I
!
6-by. I2-inch I
I
. I
I
I
I
regulator. The main line is connected to the reservoir and out the bottom without any lateral flow. This cast
through individual regulators of the heavy oxygen-cutting nickel steel container is also designed to withstand a
type that are capable of transmitting pressures from 0 pressure of 500 lbf/in 2 (3447 kPa). The inside diameter
to 500 lbf/in 2 (0 to 3447 kPa). This arrangement lends of the container is sufficient to provide a 1/2-inch (12.7-
itself to flexible operation because the pressure on the mm) clearance on all sides of the specimen for a sealing
units may be varied individually to supply any desired compound. A machined ledge is provided at the bottom
pressure up to a maximum of 450 lbf/in 2 (3103 kPa). This to ensure a seat for the test cylinder and to prevent extrusion
apparatus is provided with double extra-heavy brass pipe, of sealing compound when under pressure. The top is
fittings, and valves; and all joints are made with a Teflon secured against a neoprene gasket. Water passing through
base pipe compound. specimen is caught in a collecting container.
6.1.2 Water Reservoir.-Each test unit includes a 6.1.4 Distilled Water o Sand Filte and Cotton
water reservoir that consists of a 30-inch (762-mm) length Bacting.-If distilled water is not available or if steel test
of 4-inch (100-mm) brass tubing that is attached to a side units must be used, a 1/2- to 2-inch (13- to 51-mm) deep
arm gauge glass provided with a graduated scale. Each sand filtershall be placed over a thin layer of cotton batting
reservoir shall be connected with suitable fittings and valves covering the specimen to remove rust or other impurities.
for fillingreservoir with water, for admitting air pressure 6.1.4.1 The sand filter should be composed of
up to 450 lbf/in 2 (3103 kPa), and for connecting to Ottawa sand, graded to contain about 70 percent of No.
specimen container. Reservoir should be made of a 30 to No. 50 (600- to 300-#m) and 30 percent of No.
noncorrosive material such as brass or stainless steel and 50 to No. 100 (300- to 150-#m) sand particles.
be able to withstand an internal pressure of 500 lbf/in 2 6.1.5 SupplementaryEquipment.-A portable electric
(3447 kPa). retort with double pot to heat stearin pitch sealing
6.1.3 Specimen Container.-The specimen container compound, a vacu-blaster for cleaning surfaces, air-operated
(fig. 3) is designed so that water entering the top covers wrenches for tightening flange bolts, and miscellaneous
upper surface of specimen and passes through the concrete trucks and dollies are required.
715
USBR 454' 171,
7 ] (i
USBR 4913
I i I i Z5 inch drillfor_3 I 3 I
12 137113 I' I 19 3 14 inch bolt 4 7 7 7" o . s s- , : ,d ,4 2 y
8
i
71 9 I
I i inchdrillfor 5
472 I0 2 i. inchbolt 8 4
I 7 123
8 ,d, ,
'" 16 - 252"1T2 2
3
I I Jnchdrillfor5 I 7 10-2 "r .,=-2824I IiI 2iI 14 8i 2 3
6 13! 7 I I 12 27 8 2 I- inchbolt e 4 e i 16 .lV 8
N = NUMBER OF BOLTS
PLENGTH OF BOLT
I I ,t \ / -r "'.. I g, li
i,Lk "/ ' 'L,,' , l
GENERAL NOTES
Cop ond shell to be of chrome
nickel cost steel.
Bolts to be S.A.E. cop screws,
hex. heod ond hex. nut com-
plete with woshers.
v Spotfoce
Steel costingsof o density su-
ficient to w,thsfondO hydr-
stoticpressure of 500 IbfAnT
'
mochining.
I ;n = 25.4 mm
I Ibf/in2= 6.8948 kPo
-i .I
-inch Semi- -'--r
. =,
' G
717
USBR 4913
A/g ""
reading on s.cale Applly air pressure t,:. '(',u:il ]bf,'m
!2758 kPa> ,,r* d-,e reservc,,il'. Bleed wace:: f>::mn system nriil
wter M -cse:rv,::,,h: is at zer,;)mark ,:m s,c;ale }{em,:ve waecr K- = ,c,,:)e:{{iciler, t c,,f permeb,i!lky in l:eet per second
fr,::,li s.ysee.n-a tlh>:ugh the v.u,t]let vcl["c,e [n 5()0-cm ,:1 meters per secon,,Jl ),
{itcre.merl,s i:,e,; m ;;:a,duaced cylMdler. ,A{tc-:r ea,c:h iricremeFJt Qt = h-reme'n, ,:{ f]i,,:)w :i:r:, cubk: fee.t per se.o:md
klas beerl reiin,:>,,,e,d., level of water in g.luge g;lilss sha]! bc' (cubic tnc'e:s, per s;e,oa, nd',,
reaJ c,n, dhc s,c:,k: aJq,,t ec,mdled T'hc cdiibradi,c:,n ,:arastm,t k = ezgth ,:,; spe.cimeq, in t:ee (meters),
.c:, tank fmsc,:l s]la]ll be c:]cu]ced {>,:ui,q these rea,:Jlmgs a:; A =: c>:ss-s.ecd,:m,a] aeu ,,4 spech32er, irJ SqlU;nxe :ee:
.c.lJc: cel]til//ece:Ts l::,cr ceLlJinloter. (square metezs),, ardl
H = apF:,liied pressure pe: f,:.o (mete:) od water
I i, P"rocedm"e (c,.,:te 3).
I{
11. l A f:e] all ,,.:.:ll, ciect J{,,ns. ]lave been secured., fi]li s.ys[elin,
w ith, v,'ter lit 7 q, 4+2 ': ' P i: 23 ,I], l ] o C :1 App]iy aih pres.scu:c Q' = f:kl,v ir cubic fee: per year (cubic meters F,e
c:,f 4(:i(1 1k:,7,"i- :'-!:7SI kF"ai:, t=, tke v,,ace': rese':v<,,ir. Read yea)=, and
.Q" =: increrneEt ,,:/fl,:w M cub:k: ce.ndmeters p,e:
wt:er ]e.ve] <,.n gauge g]ass. Ir,,i:]o,v me;tsJre:e:Ets s.hc,uN
-Jl ,[]llL] r,
k,e takee, f+e,quet+tl., ,dt:lsh-xg fJirs dcly and twice ;+i day 1f-c,,:
rel:naMdl,er c,,{ re'st pe'rJi,,:l,d ReJ,dJings sha]!l be +eoL,rded ,,n T'hen,,
= <,, ( > Ii
v,,,:rks.h=eet :{{g: Ill]i)A caxe+{,:i[ [rxs.F,.ectiori o{: tl:e k,,,,r)t:,,)l:l:q
SLl:trfaCe ,L.t rest spe'cin-Jer, sh<;,LtJld be lliat!le t,t,, .dete.r nil[he ex<
lime o{ ]In s,:mle cases=. OLttIow may i-}(i,{ ,)ccur.
]].2 Tcs.dng s]hn]l ol.ntillue fc, about S0(I t-l,::,us. A
c,c:,mp,]ech:,r ,:f test:, c:,:ntaJlne:r s.h, al] be: ,de.tac:[ed fr,,:;,rcJ c,,;
unk and he;ted wid hc:,t wat<r t-c,, sc,,{en Fdt,ch s,o t:h;t
st-:,eciqe.r: :nay be re:rtcve.,d. ) (' ]1 :x ll{i'cm s,
12.1 P]I,,:> m{ll,,w data s shc,,ws ,:n {igulre I [ S,e]lec iin 'i_s'7! " S. kPa, equals a head
a :l(l(:i,-]<:,ur perii,,,d {::,- wlliclh :h::aw a:e was e,_;sentiallly
,,,::,rtstmt Rcco>J [he lest age as. he age c,,{ the c:,,nc-ete
t mid.p,, d,it :,.f ]l,:E<l<:,,,u F, eri .d. ": 'I]IIIIIII)@YS iFI ',,FItL]@'{S Iielt.r I,;:, ..IIF[efi II] 'i[teK::Ii,:.N 5,E:C[i,:],l I!,
7 18
USBR 49'13
FieHre 8. "..'ie'w .::,f h,.,tt,:.n: ,:.P specimen o::,n*air'ier sh,::,',, in, g t'ne'N>::,,J
1 Ntplyin/; plasre. c,f F%ris t,::. con, rsinel fl r@:e.
12.5 The adjusurent fo.r end effe:ct ,::table' 2 and fig. I41',,
12_!:, For the tstJal lab,oratory ttest:s.=, a colIectic, n t,c)r d.eperds, o.n specimen ]iength ic th, e engih ;is. ess tin, an 30
ternperae from 73q +it: o F ,: 230 1 1 o C) tc, the s.tar,dard inches ,:762 rnm) Thiis adliulsu-nen is. n,0,t required if ,he
t:en:-peame c,f 68 o F' (20 'C::, need nc, t be made because specimens tested have fes,)@..' bro.ken surfaces ,;:l.n the '::*t::'
th, e s:lnal zesLi;hiing vallcte d:ilfe.ze,,c:e is; nor consCdlered o: and b,:tt:om as. opposed to ch, ipF, ed ,0,r vacu-b]lastedl surfaces..
F:,.rctca] ilmp,,:'ta nce. The chipping of the fo.med s.rface crealedl by l-ae cc, Hr
12.4 The test age ,.U a spe,cirnen is the: nt:lmber of dl%vs o,n top of specimen is nee c,:nsidered t:o be a ch:ipped or
from estirag dh< <:,. the tm-e us,:d ,o,n he iiniClk*v'-Nme vacJ-basred surface.
&r''e ,;: deeHrine ,,;ak:e c,f rate c,{ inI,::,,w When a series 1'<, The amount ,:_: outflow is deermiine.d by
c,: c:,,:rcrete mixes arc: ,, be: compared f:or permeability iYesstJrirJg tl-e mss ,o,r volume c:,f >..rate:: in collecting j:,r
at eaNiy ages, d,e l-lydrat[,:,,: ,c,f the cemert dte.rs the c:,. o::,,r::aine ar regn]lar h-,ter,,'als. This value is. entered ,:::r
perlnesbli lit.,,, w J( ]:q, age, and h e results s.h,/)ll dl k:,e conve rted th, e w,/,ksh, ee.r ({ig. 10), it k,i. n,s,r used in the ca]kul.ackm
to a omp.aab.,le test age. T%N.e 1 and t:igutre 13 show flct,s.rs c,,f: pe:zmeabi]ity but s<:,mecimes Fro.vi:de.s useRfl i:ni:c,,matior,.
tak:ei f;c,m averlg;e ,,,aIt:ies that (:sE, be' us.ed for acijits.tiir.g:
perrneabil:it 7 vaJu=e5; tt,i, (i0-d3ys age. Becmse cements and 13. Repor::
p.c, zzc, lar, s h, ydhlze t cl:i:fi%.r'es: 'ates.:,. na.oze os.mF, arab{e
re.sulcs can h,,e ,::h, taiinedl wDen ime p,e.rn:-its debating 1%] A report ,:m dhiis p>,:>cedure is best a.occ, mp]Iiished
perl:neabilik:y test umil specimens are in excess c,,f: 240- by s lette subrnhtiing the p>:>peNte's c,.f the nNix de.siig.n
days age, when hydrati<m, its. esse.ntiaHy comple.te mve.sti:gati,,ts.. Tl-e e.f,or shall inc]l,ud, e:
7 ](i
USBR 4913
Table 1. - Age factors for adjustingpermeability values to 60-days age (from fig. 13).
Age, Factor Age, Factor Age, Factor Age, Factor Age, Factor
days days days days days
720
USBR 4913
[3] Vidal, E. N., and G. A. Sampson, "Apparatus and Table 2. -Adjustment factors for end effect (from fig. 14).
Technique for the Bureau of Reclamation Concrete
Permeability Tests," ASTM Proceedings, vol. 36, part I, Lenth of FactorI, Length of Factori,
1936. specimen, percent specimen, percent
[4] Calculatidns ofPermeabili(yTest Results, Bureau of inches (ram) inches (mm)
Reclamation Concrete Laboratory Report No. C-80, Jan.
1 (25) 21 18 (457) 112
4, 1940.
2 (51) 38 24 (610) 119
[5] Apparatus and Tentative Test Procedure for
3 (76) 50 28 (711) 124
Permeabili(y Tests of Concrete, Bureau of Reclamation
4 (102) 60 36 (914) 127
Materials Laboratories Report No. C-426 (Unpublished).
6 (152) 75 48 (1219) 134
.8 (203) 86 60 (1524) 136
9 (229) 90 120 (3048) 143
12 (305) 100 240 (6096) 147
15 (381) 106 480 (12 192) 149
L The value of this factor approaches 150 percent as the length approaches
infinity: Ratio of specimen length to its length plus 6 inches for the
end effect is oo/(ao + 6) = 100. For the standard 12-inch specimen, the
ratio of specimen length to its length plus 6 inches for end effect would
be 12/(12 + 6 )= 0.667. Since the end effect factor for this standard
12-inch specimen is 100 percent, the factor at infinity must be the ratio
for an infinitely long specimen divided by the ratio for the 12-inch
specimen, or 100/0.667 = 150.
NOTE: The permeability computed from the test data for the length
of specimen at any age, divided by the appropriate factor, should be
equal to the permeability for the same concrete at the same age when
tested in a 12-inch-long specimen when the end effect equals 6 inches
of additional representative concrete
72l
USBR 4913
Mix No.RCC Nb. Z-4 MSA / inches Source: Cto'a','O SNosroAtE-4/Pe ST"/Zv'ArER
Cement No. A4-7/O Type }T/-.A Brand/Source Z#t8 SrO./EV/Z$ -Z/O o' Mass/J2.o Ibm
Pozzolan No./t-d4q8 Class f" Source/Supplier ZA$ Sro./CA//Cd6o, IL Mass25.o Ibm d___ %
Mix Proportions: % -- to inch (am), .-q" %/ to 3/4 inch LmeeO, a9-% a/4 to 3/8 inch Lum'r),
___ % to ,q inch (m.r), % to inch (am) Sand 34. 5 %
Mix Properties: W/(C+P) O,44- , Density 148. 41 lbm/ft 3 , Slump inchesm.mg"
Air Content: Press. % Grav. /. o %
Curing: CoNr/tt,oLt o CtR /oo R/v' Alm/o/-y A 7o *
Specimen No./_.L_, Sizedxg, anches (.ramS, Date Cast 4-/-P, Test Age23___$ Unit No. B , Tank Factor//._.._3cmS/cm
Test Press. ,400 lbf/in 2 2.31 or.0,.H= '$t feet r of Head, Purpose r/ya,.r/ar/oW$
Inflow Outflow
Test Hours Gauge Diff. in Tank Factor)lq.43 Direct Mass
Date Time Individual (I) Reading, Gauge Times Diff. in or Volume Remarks
Cumulative (C) Reading, Gauge Reading, cm3 Measure, cm 3
I C cm cm I C
o o Z$o o o 0
A9 e ors/o#?
/l-q :Oom 2 2 7.40 0.1o II. q //. 9 o/ /es/" wo,
II- I0 7:ooom 14 /6 7. 70 o.3o 3.8 4Z7
IL-18 8:00o ,qq 6" gl" 0.4" 53.7 /Ol.4
a-/V :ooo/. 72 /3 7 oo.0 o.3 4I.& 143.
II-/g :ooom 4 /g / $. go 0.1o I/. q /55.I
t1-17 : aOam 24 / J" g. 70 o.lo II, q /7.0
:OOa 24 209 0%75 o.o .o 173.o
II-/q :dOo 24 e33 g.ro o.o 6.0 /7q, o
/ t-,%* 8: oo =., 9./5 O.B #L& 22o.
/l-2 :ooa .2o 0. o d. o 226.8
11-24 ?:#oa,,i 24 3' q.20 0
o 22.8
11"2g 7:4am 4& o/ q.o o. o 23. q 2o. 7
i/- q f:ooam' 7e 473 ?.go 0.8o 23.q 274.6
11-3o ..o#atn 24 497 9.70 0.1o I/. 9 od.
12-1 :OOatm 4 J'e/ q. 7 @.o d,. o eqe.K
12-2 8: ooa 4 S'4t. %8"0 o.o [,. o eq#.
I 2-3 8:ooam! eel s'[, q q.&S 0.0 g.O 304.9
Figure 10. - Sample data and calculation form for water permeability of concrete.
722
USBR 4913
350
I I
I I I I I I I I I I
(/)
tie
W
I-
u..I 300
=E
I-
400 Aotar_
Z
t.l.I
U
250
U
m oUJ'S
.)
Z 2OO
f
J
ne
bJ
I--
<[
: 150
3: , no,[d t r r7 hocatr
o
-J
- /
i,
Z I00
W --
_>
. 5o
o I f I I I I I I I I I
0 5O I00 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 6OO
723
USBR 4913
STEP 1:
Let Q' = flow in ft3/yr (m3/yr). If flow rate Q1 is reported in cmS/h,
Q' = 0.309355 )1 fO/yr, or
= 0.008760 Q1 m3/yr (from section 12.2)
= (0.3o73'S) #oSS'f ) = O./o?dP ft/yr L0a26y,e
STEP 2:
Let/(1 = 0'L in (fO/ft2)/yr or (m3/m)/yr, K is unit hydraulic gradient
AH
STEP 3:
Adjust K1 value to 60-day age using table 1:
100K = (100) (O.ooo.o) = 6".#'at/O - (fO/ft2)/yr or
K1 = Factor from table 1 ( ta" )
Th/ a/cu/a/,'oa , $owt, oa/y for t'//aa'rai toaroo$$. T/$ rep was no
ased /oecauae ZAe procedure a$sexoe$ a @Aet de3ree a/Aydra/,'oa of
.cetmea/t'//oasmaert'a/s a do de)Is' aee #Aan ,'s aeA/'ewed o,', ecc.
STEP 4:
For specimens with broken ends, K2 = Kq, and this step is not required.
Adjust K2 value:
100/(2 (100) (O.OOO ) ], l '/0 -4t (fO/ft)/yr or
Kq = Factor from table 2 = ( 7 ) =
724
USBR 4913
35O
I-
..J
-- 300
m
W
25O
W
8.
>- 200
0
I
0 150
0 I00
Z
W
0 . 50 --
r
W
a.
0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 2 I0 240 270
I- 140
z
"r
Z 120
i>.....-.-v
O I
0 m
z f
_J 80 Vorio t/on in permeobili fy is
/ bosed on on end effecf
/
w
equol to 6 inches of concrete--
/
-- 40
i
I inch = 25. 4 mm
I- < 20
Z
I,LI 0 2 4 6 8 I0 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
725
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4914-92
PROCEDURE FOR
INTRODUCTION
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Materials Engineering Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4914; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision.
1. Scope
of any type capable of imposing a load at the rate and
1.1 This designation covers the procedures for magnitude prescribed in this test procedure. A self-aligning,
determining the chord modulus of elasticity (Young's static spherically seated, alignment assembly shall be mounted
modulus), Poisson's ratio, and the direct tensile strength on the testing machine. This assembly provides precise
of molded concrete cylinders and diamond-drilled concrete alignment through an adaptor plate that bolts into the
cores under longitudinal tensile stress. crosshead, and holds a spherical brace and bearing to seat
the alignment rod.
2. Applicable Documents
5.2 Longitudinal Strain Gauges.-A bonded sensing
2.1 USBR Procedures: device for measuring strain to the nearest 5 microunits
1104 Load Verification of Testing Machines per unit shall be used for determining the modulus of
elasticity. The deformation shall be calculated from the
4031 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in Field
4042 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed average of measurements made by diametrically opposite
Beams or Cubes of Concrete and Shotcrete gauge lines, each parallel to the longitudinal axis, centered
at midheight of the specimen. The effective length of each
4192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
Laboratory gauge line shall be greater than two times the maximum
2.2 ASTM Standards: concrete aggregate size but less than two-thirds the height
C 174 Standard Method of Measuring Length of Drilled of the specimen.
Concrete Cores 5.3 Transverse Strain Gauges.-For Poisson's ratio, the
E 6 Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Methods transverse strain shall be the average value determined
of Mechanical Testing 2 by two bonded gauges mounted circumferentially, at
diametrically opposite points, at midheight of the specimen.
3. Significance The strain gauges shall have the capability of measuring
the circumferential strain to the nearest 5 microunits per
3.1 This procedure is of primary significance in unit.
determining the direct tensile properties of various concrete 5.4 End Plates and Connecting Assembly.-End plates,
materials. to be bonded to ends of cast or cored specimens, shall
be made of high-quality steel with diameters not larger
4. Terminology than 1.4 times the diameter of the cylindrical test specimen.
The plates shall be of such thickness and strength to
4.1 Tensile Strength.-As defined in ASTM E 6. minimize flexing under the ultimate tensile load. A double
4.2 Modulus ofElasticity.-As defined in ASTM E 6. end plate design, as shown on figures 1 and 2, has been
4.3 Poisson's Ratio.-As defined in ASTM E 6. found to give the best performance. In this design, stress
from the testing machine is distributed by a ring of bolts
5. Apparatus to an end plate that is bonded to the specimen. Threaded
connectors attach the end plates to an alignment rod of
5.1 Testing Machine.-The testing machine shall
the testing machine. With this type of end plate, a specimen
conform to the requirements of USBR 1104, and may be
with a length-to-diameter ratio as low as 1.5 may be tested.
With a single-plate, center-pull, end plate, the length-to-
I Annual Book ofASTMStandards, vol. 04.02. diameter ratio should exceed 2.0 because of the greater
2 Annual Book olcASTMStandards, vols. 03.0l, 08.03. length of end effect on the specimen.
726
USBR 4914
I e hole for
AL
AL t A
\ / internal threads
O ()... O
*z -13 UNC x 2"hex. I I / ', / " head bolts.lZ each,
i
head bolts,12 each,
SAE Grode Ior2, I
I 09'J8=
/ / /-Outer steel plate
torque to 37 ft-lbf
Figure 2. - Steel end plate assembly for testing 10-inch (250-mm) concrete
Figure 1. - Steel end plate assembly for testing 6-inch (150-mm) concrete cylinders in tension (2 required).
cylinders in tension (2 required).
727
USBR 4914
be boaded perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the and Poisson's ratio are not to be measured, continue loading
specimen. to failure on first loading. Record maximum applied load
8.2 Attaching BondedStrain Gauges.-Smooth theareas at failure and note type of failure.
to receive gauges by wire brushing or sanding. Remove
loose dust from the surface by air jet or brushing. Dry 11. Calculations
surface of concrete to receive gauge. Apply a leveling and
11.1 Calculate the modulus of elasticity to the nearest
sealing precoat of epoxy adhesive to the concrete. After
50,000 lbf/in2 or 0.350 GPa as follows:
sealing coat has hardened, abraid the surface with silicon-
carbide paper. Bond gauge to specimen using a high- &-&
strength epoxy adhesive. Other adhesives recommended E -- (1)
{2 - 1
where:
9.1 The calibration and standardization of the
r = Poisson's ratio,
miscellaneous equipment or apparatus used in performing
t2 = transverse strain at midheight of specimen
the tests listed under the Applicable Documents of section
produced by stress $2 (sec. 11.1), to
2 are covered under that particular procedure or standard.
nearest 5 microunits per unit;
tl = transverse strain at midheight of specimen
10. Procedure produced by stress &(sec. 11.1), to
nearest 5 microunits per unit; and
10.1 An ambient temperature and humidity, as e2 and el = as previously defined in equation (1).
constant as possible, shall be maintained throughout the
test. All unusual fluctuations in temperature or humidity 11.3 Calculate direct tensile strength to nearest
shall be noted in the report. 10 lbf/in 2 (0.069 MPa) as follows:
10.2 If comparison specimens are available, the L
ultimate tensile strength shall be determined prior to T = - (inch-pound units)
testing for modulus of elasticity.
L (3)
10.3 Attach a threaded connector into the bonded end
T -- 1000A (metric units)
plate at each end of the test specimen. Ensure that rods
of the alignment assemblies move freely in the spherical
where:
heads. Thread specimen connectors to rods of the top and
bottom alignment assemblies. Attach strain gauge leads T
direct tensile strength in pound force per square
to indicating or recording instrument. inch (megapascals),
10.4 Apply load continuously and without shock at a L= ultimate total load in pound force (kilonewtons),
constant rate between 100 and 200 (lbf/in2)/min (689 to and
1378 kPa/min) to what is anticipated to be about 40 percent A= cross-sectional area in square inches (square
of ultimate load. If instruments are not of the continuously meters).
recording type, record strain at every 20-1bf/in 2 (138-kPa)
increment of stress. Reduce load to zero at about the same 11.4 Figure 3 shows a typical calculation form and
rate that load was applied. Repeat the loading and the figure 4 shows a typical plot of the data. Data acquisition
readings. If the two test runs appear compatible, make and calculations may be performed automatically by
a final continuous loading to failure. If modulus of elasticity computer and are represented by figures 5 and 6.
728
USBR 4914
Date: /- / "7 - q/ Time: 9 : 4-0 a.ln.,'T:," ,Cylinder: Idenc A/o. A I ; Dimensionsa,.oo byl.2.a$ india)..
Area: 2g. 27 in2Prn4 Type' of Curing: F-o 9 c..ee
lob S
a3o ?
46
in#. Jr5
zo? b3 II
23J "72 13
21ol ZP/ 1q-
28 7 9O
Jo0
39 109
.65 12o
9Z 13o
.q-/t' /4-/
/S/
J(,,3 2-(,
494 1"/4
52o /g6
4-6 19,9"
57'/ :2-11
597 224
7
672
'2.37.
Zs
:z.7o
g
.87
let/
294"
st/
7/o
?/9
E= ($2 - St) + (e2 - et) = (286' - ;oq.) + ( ?__O_O - 3.__.OO ) x 10 -6 =18" + 60 x 10 - =3.$'x 10 .6 lbf/in2 (la
729
USBR 4914
800 L , I , i , I , ' i
USBR Concrete Laboratory
Elastic Properties Testing
700
600
Test: Tension
Spec: No. A1
Date and time: 01/17/91 09:40
- 500
Longitudinal Transverse
400 Stress Strain Strain
Ibf/in 2 (MPa) e 10"6 t 10.6
/ Specimen: Cylinder AI
300 20 6 0
/ ;;;:;o:::::::;2
.... Transverse Strain 20 6 0
200
46 17 3
71 21 4
I00
104 30 5
130 38 7
50 I00 i50 20C 250 300
156 46 8
5TRAIN. microinches pet ih (m/m
183 55 10
209 63 11
Figure 4. - Graphical plot of data from figure 3. 235 72 13
261 81 14
800 , i i i i 287 90 15
313 100 17
339 109 18
365 120 19
392 130 21
418 141 23
444 151 24
/ 469
494
163
174
26
28
520 186 29
546 198 31
571 211 32
597 224 34
622 239 35
I00 647 254 37
672 270 39
698 287 40
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
704 291 41
STRAIK. mlcrolnchesper inch (,m 'm)
707 294 41
Figure 6. - Computer generated graph. 710 296 41
713 298 41
F
716 300 42
I000 719 302 42
,,./' ..-'"
""* I
I
250 500
STRAIN #in/in(#m/m)
730
USBR 4914
Specimen identification number. 13.1 The precision and bias of this procedure have not
Dimensions of specimen in inches (millimeters). been determined.
Curing and environmental history of concrete.
73l
' UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4915-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4915; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision.
732
USBR 4915
Test Feamte.-Specific zone of material on or in a The specimen length on either side of shear zone must
specimen to be tested such as an open joint, lift line, or be long enough to ensure that a firm grip is achieved
rock-concrete contact. by encapsulating material. Specimen size and corresponding
Test Gap.-Distance between the two holding rings where shear surface area should be maximized within limits of
shear and normal forces are applied. sampling, shear box dimensions, and test apparatus load
capabilities.
5. Apparatus and Materials 7.2.1 The area of shear surface, or expected shear
surface, must be measured. Cylindrical specimen diameters
5.1 Equipment for sampling specimens is outlined in should be determined within 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) by
USBR 4823. Preparation of specimens for testing is averaging two diameter measurements taken at right angles
outlined in USBR 4192. to each other near test feature. The inclination of test
5.2 The test apparatus consists of a pair of specimen feature (inclination at which test feature is oriented with
"holding" rings to support the two halves of the specimen, respect to axis of specimen) must be measured to nearest
which may or may not be intact. Specimens are encapsulated degree. The average diameter and inclination are used to
in the rings with cement, epoxy, or a similar strong calculate cross-sectional area.
adhesive. Specimen is positioned in shear device so that 7.2.2 The area of irregular-shaped specimens is
resultant of an applied normal force acts perpendicular determined by planimetric measurement of a peripheral
to shear plane, where a force is applied along the plane trace of specimens. If preferred, area of cylindrical-shaped
of test feature. The apparatus should have low friction specimens may also be determined using this method.
rollers, cables, or other devices to ensure that frictional 7.3 The moisture condition of specimen at time of
resistance of equipment to shear forceis less than i percent testing shall be noted.
of the maximum shear force applied in the test. The 7.4 If a specific shear direction is selected prior to
apparatus should also be capable of applying the specified testing, specimen must be marked accordingly and care
normal force and maintaining it within 2 percent must be taken during casting process to maintain marking.
throughout the test, and be capable of shearing the 7.5 For concrete specimens with open test features,
specimen at a uniform rate of load or displacement with joint roughness should be described prior to testing.
10 percent deviation.
5.3 Indicators to measure displacement normal to test 8. Calibration and Standardization
feature should have a sensitivity of 0.001 inch (0.025 mm).
5.4 Indicators to measure shear displacement should 8.1 The calibration and standardization of equipment
have a sensitivity of 0.001 inch (0.025 mm), and a capacity used in performing the tests listed under the Applicable
in excess of expected total shear displacement. Documents of section 2 are covered under that particular
5.5 Normal and shear forces and displacements should procedure or by reference to another.
be recorded or plotted continuously, or at a minimum of 8.2 Regular calibration of all load-indicating devices,
10 regular increments, before reaching peak value. such as load cells and hydraulic pressure gauges, should
be maintained for the testing range.
6. Precautions
8.3 Regular calibration of all displacement measuring
devices, such as the LVDT (linear variable differential
6.1 Safety.-This procedure may include the use of
transformer), must be in accordance with USBR 1008, and
hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. Therefore,
dial gauges in accordance with USBR 1007. These devices
personal safety devices such as glasses, shoes, and gloves
should be maintained for the anticipated testing range.
are required. It is the responsibility of the user to establish
8.4 If an automatic recording system is used, regular
appropriate safety practices and to determine applicability
calibration should be maintained for the testing range.
of regulatory limitations prior to use.
6.2 TechnicaL-Specimens must be protected against 9. Conditioning
mechanical damage during casting and insertion into test
apparatus.Specimens with open features must be cast with
9.1 No specific conditioning atmosphere is required
care so that foreign material is not introduced onto test
to perform the test; however, temperature and humidity
surfaces.
observations should be included with results of each test.
7. Test Samples, Testing Units, and Test
Specimens 10. Procedure
733
USBR 4915
10.2 The specimen holding rings should be cleaned can subsequently be tested for shearing resistance under a sequence
and greased before use to aid in removal of specimens of normal stresses; i.e., return to procedure of section 10.8.
after testing.
10.3 Casting Intact Specimens in Holding Rings: 10.11 Once peak shear stress is determined, shear load
10.3.1 Specimen is centered in one holding ring and is released, normal force is changed to next value, and
test feature is aligned parallel to line of shearing action procedures of sections 10.8 through 10.10 repeated.
of test apparatus. Shearing resistance tests for open features are performed
10.3.2 Encapsulate lower half of specimen in holding by applying a minimum of three normal forces in order
ring, and fill to top of ring. If test feature is irregular of increasing magnitude.
and extends beyond test gap provided by test apparatus, 10.12 If excessive shear displacement occurs during
then only fill holding ring to within 1/8 inch (3.2 ram) testing, normal force may be removed, specimen realigned
of test feature. to original position, and test sequence continued. The
10.3.3 Spacer blocks should be placed around 'test correlation of results may vary, depending upon nature
feature, and all possible avenues for encapsulating material of test feature and position of specimen at each normal
to escape should be pluggedwith clay. The second holding stress. Alternatively, specimen can be remated for every
ring is then positioned over specimen and aligned parallel normal stress, and procedures of 10.8 through 10.10
to firstring. repeated.
10.3.4 Encapsulate specimen in second ring as 10.13 Specimens ate again photographed as described
described in 10.3.2 for firstring. in section 10.1.
10.3.5 After curing encapsulate material, remove
11. Calculations
spacer blocks, clay, etc., from between holding rings.
10.4 Casting Specimens With Open Features in
11.1 Formulas:
HoldingRings:
10.4.1 One-half of specimen is positioned in a ring S
so that test feature is centered and aligned with line of
= (1)
shearing action of test machine. The two halves of the
N
specimen are then mated. a,- A (2)
10.4.2 Encapsulate first specimen half as described
in 10.3.2.
where:
10.4.3 Spacer blocks are placed around test feature,
and all possible channels for encapsulating material to r = shear stress, in pound force per square inch
escape should be plugged to ensure that no material will (megapascals);
flow onto test surface. The second ring is then positioned S = shear force, in pound force (Newtons);
over specimen and aligned with firstring. A = initial cross-sectional area, in square inches
10.4.4 Encapsulate remaining specimen half in (square millimeters);
second ring as described in 10.3.2. a, = normal stress, in pound force per square inch
10.4.5 After encapsulating material has cured, rings (megapascals); and
can be separated and spacer blocks, clay, etc., removed. N = normal force, in pound force (Newtons).
10.5 Specimen holding rings should be bolted, clamped,
or wired together while being transported or assembled d= arc tan (-) (3)
in test apparatus to minimize mechanical damage of test
feature. where:
10.6 Specimen holding rings are positioned in test
apparatus, and bolts, clamps, or wires removed. d = effective dilatancy of slides,
10.7 Load and displacement measurement devices are d = normal component of tangent line drawn to
checked, activated, and zeroed. rising leg of normal displacement versus
10.8 The required normal force (computed from the shear displacement graph, and
specified stress multiplied by cross-sectional area) is applied ds = shear component of tangent line drawn to
and the corresponding normal displacement recorded. rising leg of normal displacement versus
10.9 Shear force and shear displacement are "zeroed" shear displacement graph.
along with recording device.
10.10 Specimen is sheared at a "controlled" rate of NOTE 2.-Conditions of dilatancy prompting the need for
equation (3) occur so infrequently that no typical data are included
stress or displacement until a peak shear stress is reached. in this procedure.
Continuous readings or a minimum of 10 data points
including shear, normal stress, and displacement should NOTE 3.-For each specimen, plot graphs of shear stress versus
be recorded before reaching peak value. normal and horizontal displacementand peak shear stress versus
normal stress. Failure envelopes are computed for the following
NOTE 1.-For an intact specimen, break value is determined three types of combined data using least-squareslinear regression:
from peak shear stress of initial run for that specimen. The (1) peak sliding resistance data for individual specimens
open feature created by shear failure of original intact specimen (2) Peak (breakingstrength) datafor similar, intact specimens
734
USBR 4915
(3) peak sliding resistance data for specimens with similar or across feature and amount o.f crushing, shearing, etc.
open features Include photographs and other notes, description of
Better results may be obtained by using curvilinear failure possible interference with casting material, and
envelopes. The friction angle and cohesion are computed to roughness (with respect to direction of shearing).
represent each failure envelope. Moisture condition at time of testing.
11.2 Figures 1 and 2 show typical graphs, and figure 3 Test information-data, type, rate, etc.
Tabulation of all recorded data-normal and shear
shows a typical data and calculation form.
stresses and displacements.
12. Report Tabulation of all computed results-break values,
dilatancy, friction angle, cohesion.
Graphs as described in note 3 of section 11.
12.1 The report should include the following
information: Calibration data.
12.2 A cover letter accompaniedwith figures 1, 2,
Identification of specimen-type, history. and 3 will serve as a reporting form.
Description of test feature before testing. An open
surface feature should describe roughness with respect 13. Precision and Bias
to orientation; include photographs.
Description of sheared surfaces after testing. Type 13.1 The precision and bias statements for this
of failure.If originally intact, percent of aggregate along procedure have not been established.
-r 700 700
z
soo "'
u
600
cc
g o
,", soo!
n z
g
O 400 Z Z 400
=.
uj'
3OO 300
O.
z
ZOO I 800
,oo .03
n
uJ. lO0 /
2
O0 IB I O
I
u) 0.05 O.I O.15 O.2 0.25 0.3 O =OO ZOO 300 400 500 600 700
RELATIVE SHEAR DISPLACEMENT IN INCHES NORMAL STRESS IN POUND FORCE PER SQUARE INCH
Project: Central Utoh Cycle No. Normal Stress, Peak Shear Stress, Relative Displacement, Sliding FrictionResults:
Feature:Upper Stillwoter Dam Ibf/in Z Ibf/inZ inches tou : 9+ 1.324 O"n
Type:RCC-Solid Core (JT-PM) B 25 664 0.0514 Cohesion : 9 Ibf/inz
Specifications No.: DHZ2-117.2 2 26 46 0.2231 phi : 53
Index N0.: 3 50 70 0.1056 Correction Coefficient= 0.9994
Tested By: JM 4 I00 143 0.0259
Dote Tested : 8- 10-87 S 200 273 0.0324
Nominal Area: 26.61 in z
Figure 1. - Typical plots of direct shear data for an intact specimen followed by multistage sliding friction tests along the shear surface.
Arrows show locations of peak shear stress. The peak shear stress versus normal stress plot shows the least squares fit to the sliding
friction peak shear strength data using a Coulomb-Navier failure criterion.
735
USBR 4915
w 700
o
rr
o 6O0
h
500
Z
0 --
n
LIJ 400
Z tl
--
U 0 300
hl
n a 20O
I.- uJ
n- 100
l.iJ
"1" 0
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 008 0.1 0.12
RELATIVE SHEAR DISPLACEMENT IN INCHES
l-
z 0.01
hi
0.0
hi
(J -0.01
.--I -0.02
Q.
(/)
-0.03
ILl
-0.04
_jT
-0.05
n-
O -0.06
Z z
-0.07
hi
- 0.08
I-- -0.09
t
--I
I,I -0.1
rr 0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 O. J O. J2
RELATIVE SHEAR DISPLACEMENT IN INCHES
Figure 2. - Typical plots of direct shear data for one increment of normal stress. Plots shown are
for an intact specimen, and the arrows show where failure occurred.
736
USBR 4915
II I I I ! ! I I I I I I
- "
xl
II
!
I I I I ! I I I f I I
0
737
, UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4916-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research andLaboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4916; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure was established from
a report of February 1981 on "The Use of Fly Ash in Air-Entrained Concrete-Report of Recent NSGA-NRMCA Research Laboratory
Studies" by Richard C. Meininger, Director of Engineering Research, National Sand and Gravel Association and National Ready
Mixed Concrete Association, 900 Spring Street, Silver Spring, Maryland 20910. Credit was extended to Vance Dodson of the
W. R. Grace Co. on a report given at the January 1980 meeting of the Transportation Research Board in Washington, DC,
on the introduction of this test.
7. Materials
3.1 A mixture of fly ash, cement, air-entraining
admixture, and water is shaken in a glass bottle to produce 7.1 Cement shall comply with requirements of ASTM
a foam. The foam is considered stable if it completely covers C 150; fly ash shall comply with requirements of ASTM
the water surface after a 45-second waiting period following C 618, class F or C; and air-entraining admixture shall
15 seconds of vigorous shaking. The minimum amount comply with requirements of ASTM C 260.
of admixture required to produce a stable foam when fly
ash is present is compared with amount required when 8. Calibration and Standardization
only cement is used.
8.1 No special calibration is required.
4. Significance and Use
9. Conditioning
4.1 One of the potential disadvantages in the use of 9.1 No conditioning of materials is required.
fly ash in air-entrained concrete is an abnormally high
demand for air-entraining admixture with some ashes,
10. Procedure
usually attributed to the quantity and form of carbon in
the ash. This test procedure identifies such ashes and 10.1 Place 16 grams of cement, 4 grams of fly ash,
1 AnnualBook ofASTlVlStandards,vol. 04.02. and 50 mL of water in jar. Cap jar and shake for 15 seconds.
2 AnnualBook ofASTMStandaMs, vol. 04.03. 10.2 Add a small-measured amount of diluted (1 in
3 Annual Book ofASTM Standards, vol. 04.01. 20 solution) air-entraining admixture, cap jar, and shake
738
USBR 4916
vigorously for 15 seconds. Allow jar to stand for 45 seconds. a stable foam is recorded as the foam index for that mixture
10.3 Observe the foam. If foam completely covers for both the 5- and 45-minute test.
surface, it is considered stable; if it does not, it is unstable.
10.4 If first trial produces unstable foam, add another 12. Report
increment of air-entraining admixture and repeat
procedure. If first trial produces stable foam, discard sample
and repeat procedure with a smaller quantity of air- 12.1 A report on this procedure would probably be
entraining admixture. Continue repetitions until it is done by letter. Figure 1 shows a typical form for recording
possible to estimate amount of admixture necessary to test results, this form should include:
produce a stable foam. Identification of cement, fly ash, and air-entraining
10.5 Repeat the entire procedure using a mixture of admixture.
20 grams of cement and 50 mL of water. Foam index for cement-fly ash mixture for both the
10.6 This procedure is considered to be a 5-minute 5- and 45-minute test.
test. After a successful 5-minute test, let specimen stand Foam index for cement mixture without fly ash for
for 45 minutes, shake vigorously for 15 seconds, allow to both the 5- and 45-minute test.
stand for 45 seconds, and then observe the foam. If now
considered unstable, measure and add additional admixture
13. Precision and Bias
to stabilize the foam. This is called the 45-minute test.
11. Interpretation of Results
13.1 The precision values for this procedure have
11.1 The minimum quantity of admixture, expressed not been determined.
in concentrated form, required in each mixture to produce 13.2 There is no known bias.
739
USBR 4916
Foam Index,
ounces or mE
Fly of AEA
Ash Brand Plant Cement Brand Plant Admixture Brand Cement-
Sample Name ID Class Sample Name ID Type Sample Name Supplier Cement Fly Ash
No. No. No. 5 45 5 45
min min rain min
0. 0." 0.7 1.0
0. 0.7 0.9 LZ
NOTES:
740
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4917-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4917; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of an ASTM draft proposal for a new designation entitled "Standard Test Method for Determining Water Content of Freshly
Mixed Concrete," and "Technical Report M-85/06 (revised) July 1985, Operations Guide and Modification Analysis for Use of
the Corps of Engineers Concrete Quality Monitor on Roller-Compacted Concrete and Soil Cement" as presented by the Department
of the Army Construction Engineering Research Laboratory, Champaign, Illinois.
741
USBR 4917
742
USBR 4917
9.1 The calibration and standardization of miscellane- 11.1 Obtain two equal masses of 4.41+0.44 Ibm
ous equipment or apparatus used in performing the tests (2000200 g) each for test specimens from sample
listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 are obtained in accordance with 8.1. Record exact mass of each
covered under that particular procedure or standard. test specimen to nearest 0.002 Ibm (1 g).
9.2 Blank Equivalent Constant.-Using an automatic
pipet, place 0.34 fluid ounce (10 mL) of the 0.5 N AgNOa NOTE Z-The reason for the wide range of sample mass is
solution into a beaker. Using fixed volume dispensers, add to prevent mortar-aggregate ratio from being biased through
0.34 fluid ounce of HNOa (1 + 1), 0.17 fluidounce (5 mL) adjustment of sample size.
of ferric alum indicator solution, and 0.07 fluid ounce (2 11.2 Place each specimen into individual wide-mouth
mL) of nitrobenzene. Shake well for a few seconds, and jars. Using a volumetric flask, add 16.9 fluid ounces (500
then titrate solution using a 3.38-fluid ounce (100-mL) mL) of 0.5 N NaCI solution to one specimen (sample)
buret of 0.05 N KSCN solution. Swirl contents of beaker and 16.9 fluid ounces of distilled water to other specimen
during titration. Stop titration when an initial, permanent, (blank). Secure lids on jars.
reddish-brown color appears. Record volume of KSCN 11.3 Turn the two jars end-over-end, either by hand
required to reach endpoint; this volume is the blank or in an end-over-end mixer. At least 75 complete
equivalent constant. revolutions are recommended if jars are turned by hand;
9.3 Water Content Versus PotassiumTMocyanate End- if turned by a 40- to 60-r/min mixer, at least 2 minutes
point.-Determine a mass of 100.0+0.1 grams for 3.38 fluid of mixing are recommended. Under no circumstances
ounces (100 mL) of water. Place water in a clean, wide- should jars be turned at a speed exceeding 80 r/min because
mouth jar. Using a volumetric flask, add 16.9 fluid ounces any higher speed would prevent salt solution and distilled
(500 mL) of 0.5 N NaC1 solution. Secure lid and mix in water fromcompletely mixing with concrete samples.
a universal mixer for 3 minutes. Remove jar from mixer 11.4 Remove jars from mixer, loosen lids, allow
and withdraw a 0.84-fluid ounce (25-mL) sample of contents to settle for 3 to 5 minutes; then withdraw 0.84
intermixed solution using a volumetric pipet. Place this fluid ounce (25 mL) from each jar. Using a volumetric
sample in a conical beaker. Using an automatic pipet, add pipet, place the two withdrawals in separate conical beakers.
0.84 fluid ounce of 0.5 N AgNO3 to beaker and, with Using an automatic pipet, add 0.84 fluid ounce (25 mL)
fixed volume dispensers, add 0.34 fluid ounce (10 mL) of 0.5 N AgNO3 solution to sample specimen and 0.34
of HNOa (1 + 1), 0.17 fluid ounce (5 mL) of ferric alum fluid ounce (10 mL) of 0.5 N AgNOa solution to blank
indicator solution, and 0.07 fluid ounce (2 mL) of specimen. Using fixed volume dispensers, add 0.34 fluid
nitrobenzene. Shake well. Titrate using a 3.38-fluid ounce ounce (10 mL) of HNOa (1 + 1), 0.17 fluid ounce (5
(100-mL) buret of 0.05 N KSCN solution. Swirl contents mL) of ferricalum indicator solution, and 0:07 fluidounce
of beaker during titration. Titrate to a permanent, reddish- (2 mL) nitrobenzene to each beaker. Shake well.
brown color endpoint. Record volume of KSCN; this is 11.5 The chloride strength of the sample and blank
KSCN volume required for a chloride-free concrete solutions in the beakers are determined by titration using
specimen containing 100 grams of water. the 0.05 N KSCN solution that is in a 3.38-fluid ounce
9.4 Water Content Versus Total Potassium TMocya- (100-mL) buret. Titration may be accelerated by initially
nate Calibration Curve.-Repeat procedure outlined in adding 0.84 fluid ounce (25 mL) of 0.05 N KSCN with
section 9.3 for 140.0+0.1 and 180.0+0.1 grams of water. an automatic pipet, and then completing titration with
Plot water content in grams versus KSCN in milliliters, the KSCN. Swirl contents of sample and blank beakers
and draw a smooth curve through calibration data. during titration. Stop titrations when first, permanent,
9.5 Calibration Requirements.-Thecalibration proce- reddish-brown color appears. Record volumes of KSCN
dures outlined in sections 9.2, 9.3, and 9.4 are required solution required to reach endpoints. These volumes are
each time new reagents are used. A single-point calibration represented by x in equation (1) and s in section 12.2.
check, in accordance with procedure outlined in 9.3, is If concrete being tested does not contain chlorides, use
required on a weekly basis before testing concrete of blank specimen may be discontinued after initial
specimens. If single-point calibration check differs from determination.
established value by more than 0.02 fluid ounce (+0.50
mL) of KSCN, a complete recalibration is required. 12. Calculations
9.6 The Bureau has never performed this test;
therefore, no typical worksheets, calculations, etc., are 12.1 Calculate KSCN equivalent of blank specimen as
included for method A. follows:
743
USBR 4917
Water content in pound mass per cubic yard NOTE 5.-One known device meeting these requirements is
(kilograms per cubic meter) the Corning Model 920M Chloride Meter.
744
USBR 4917
16. Precautions ibility. If meter's blank light is on, no chlorides are present.
If concrete being tested does not contain chlorides, use
16.1 Refer to section 7.1. of blank specimen may be discontinued after initial
determination. When an air entrainer or a component
17. Sampling which causes foam when centrifuged is present, an extra
step is necessary. After centrifuging sample, wipe foam
17.1 The sample of concrete from which water content layer out of centrifuge tube with a cotton swab, and
test specimens are made shall be representative of entire recentrifuge sample before obtaining the 0.0034-fluid ounce
batch, and shall be not less than 4.41 Ibm (20 kg). The (100-#L) specimen.
sample shall be obtained in accordance with USBR 4172 19.7 To determine chloride strength of actual sample,
and/or 4094; the latter designation outlines procedures use an Eppendorf pipet to transfer a 0.0034-fluid ounce
for sampling for uniformity of concrete produced in truck (100-#L) specimen from actual sample centrifuge tube into
mixers. meter's 0.68-fluid ounce (20-mL) beaker. Press titration
switch. Record result and repeat test to ensure reproduc-
18. Calibration and Standardization ibility to +1 percent.
19.8 To determine chloride strength of the 0.5 NNaCI
18.1 Refer to sections 9.1 and 19.6. solution, use an Eppendorf pipet to transfer 0.0034 fluid
ounce (100 #L) of 0.5 N NaCl solution into meter's 0.68-
19. Procedure fluid ounce (20-mL) beaker. Press titration switch. Record
result and repeat test to ensure reproducibility to +1
19.1 Obtain two equal masses of 4.41+0.44 Ibm percent.
(2000+200 g) each for test specimens (note 2) from sample
obtained in accordance with 17.1. Record exact mass of 20. Calculations
each test specimen to nearest 0.002 lbm (1 g).
19.2 Place each specimen into individual wide-mouth 20.1 Calculate water content by using chloride
jars. Using a volumetric flask, add 8.4 fluid ounces (250 mL) strengths determined in accordance with procedure
described in section 19:
of 0.5 N NaCl solution to one specimen (sample) and
8.4 fluid ounces of distilled water to other specimen (blank). Water content in fluid ounces (mL)
Secure lids on jars.
19.3 Turn the two jars end-over-end, either by hand Sod
or in an end-over-end mixer. At least 75 complete = (250) ( -1 (3)
revolutions are recommended if jars are turned by hand; Sa - BI \ BIM /
if turned by a 40- to 60-r/min mixer, at least 2 minutes
of mixing are recommended. Under no circumstances where:
should jars be turned at a speed exceeding 80 r/min because
Std = relative chloride strength of 0.5 N NaC1 solu-
any higher speed would prevent salt solution and distilled
water from completely mixing with concrete samples. tion, in milliequivalents per liter (sec. 19.8);
Sa= relative chloride strength of sample solution,
19.4 After mixing, remove lids and pour solutions from
in milliequivalents per liter (sec. 19.7);
each jar into two separate, centrifuge, tubes. Place tubes
131= relative chloride strength of blank solution, in
into the centrifuge, and centrifuge at 2,000 to 3,000 r/min
for 3 to 4 minutes. milliequivalents per liter (sec. 19.6);
19.5 To prepare chloride meter for analysis, place SaM ---- mass of sample to nearest 0.0022 Ibm (1 g);
and
sample selector toggle switch on 0.0034 fluid ounce
BIM = mass of blank to nearest 0.0022 lbm (1 g).
(100 tL), place ON/OFF switch in ON position, pour
0.51 to 0.57 fluid ounce (15 to 17 mL) of acid buffer solution
NOTE 9.-Computed water content is often stated as a percent
into meter's 0.68-fluid ounce (20-mL) beaker, place beaker of total specimen mass by dividing computed water content by
onto stand, lower silver electrodes into beaker, and press recorded mass of test sample and multiplying by 100:
conditioning switch to start conditioning cycle.
Water content (percent)
NOTE 8.-These steps are for use with the Coming Model
920M Chloride Meter; if another device is used, steps should Water content in fluid ounces (milliliters)
be modified to meet manufacturer's calibration and operation = Mass of sample in pound mass (grams) (100)
procedures.
NOTE 10.-Computed water content may also be expressed
19.6 To determine chloride strength of blank sample, as shown in equation (2), note 4, section 12.2.
use, an Eppendorf pipet to transfer a 0.0034-fluid ounce
(100-#L) specimen from blank sample centrifuge tube into 20.2 The Bureau has never performed this test;
meter's 0.68-fluid ounce (20-mL) beaker. Press titration therefore, no typical worksheets or calculations are included
switch. Record result and repeat test to ensure reproduc- for method B.
745
USBR 4917
746
USBR 4917
solution to a 2-kg concrete sample, intermixing the two, into meter's 20-mL beaker (note 15). Press titration switch.
and determining the chloride concentration of the Record result and repeat test to ensure reproducibility to
intermixed supernatant salt solution using the Corning 1 percent, Sa in equation (3).
920M chloride meter. If the concrete contains chlorides 28.9 Determine chloride strength of the 0.5 N NaC1
from other sources, both an actual and a blank sample solution by pipetting 20 L of this solution, using an
must be used. The blank sample should be 250 mL of Eppendorf pipet, into the meter's 20-mL beaker. Press
distilled water added to a 2-kg concrete sample. titration switch. Record result and repeat test to ensure
28.2 Obtain a 12- to 15-kg sample of fresh concrete, reproducibility to +1 percent, Std in equation (3). The
mix to ensure homogeneity, and prepare two subsamples water content can now be calculated using equation (3)
of at least 20.2 kg each (note 13). Record exact mass in section 20.
of each subsample to nearest gram. Place one subsample 28.10 If concrete being tested does not contain
in a wide-mouth jar and, using a volumetric flask, add chlorides; that is, if chloride strength of blank sample equals
250 mL of distilled water. Secure lid on jar. This is the zero, the blank sample tests may be terminated.
blank sample required for estimating chlorides in the
concrete itself. 29. Comparison With Mix Design Values
NOTE 13.-The reason for the wide range of sample mass 29.1 The water contents determined using the CQM
is to prevent biasing the mortar/aggregate ratio of the sample method should be compared with the batch proportion
by adjustingthe sample size. values. If this comparison varies by less than 10 percent,
it may be assumed that the CQM method is working
28.3 Place the second 2-kg sample in another wide-
properly, the concrete batch is homogeneous, and that the
mouth jar, add 250 mL of 0.5 N NaC1 solution, and secure
hatched proportion values are correct. If the compared
lid.
results vary by more than 10 percent, a second complete
28.4 Turn both jars end-over-end, either by hand or
CQM test should be run. The 2-kg test samples for this
in an end-over-end mixer. A minimum of 75 complete
rerun should be taken from the original 12- to 15-kg sample
revolutions is recommended if the jars are turned by hand;
collected for the initial runs. Use extreme care on the rerun
if turned by a 40- to 60-r/min mixer, a minimum of 2
to ensure that no procedural errors are made. If second
minutes is recommended.
test agreesclosely with the batch proportion values, it may
be assumed that initial test was in error. If second test
NOTE 14.-Under no condition should the jars be turned so
rapidly that the centrifugal force would exceed the gravitational is significantly different from both the batch values and
force because the excess speed would prevent the salt solution initial test or if second test agrees closely with initial test,
and distilled water from completely mixing with the concrete. one of three possibilities has occurred:
28.5 After mixing, remove jar lids and pour the water- (1) concrete sample is not representative of bulk,
cement slurry from the blank sample and the NaC1 which indicates poor mixer efficiency and
solution-cement slurry from the actual sample into the nonhomogeneity;
centrifuge tubes. Place these tubes into the centrifuge and (2) batch is not the same as indicated by batch
run at 2000 to 3000 r/min for 3 to 4 minutes. proportions; or
28.6 Prepare chloride meter for analysis by (1) placing (3) CQM system is incorrectly calibrated.
sample selector toggle switch on 100 #L and placing ON/
29.2 Figure 2 shows a series of analytical steps for
OFF switch to ON, (2) placing 15 to 17 mL of acid buffer
determining which of the three possible problems has
solution into the 20-mL beaker of the meter, (3) placing
occurred. It is recommended that an inquiry be made as
beaker on stand, (4) lowering the silver electrodes, and
to any possible changes or problems that may have occurred
(5) starting the conditioning cycle by pressing the
at the batch plant.
conditioning switch. These five steps are required only
29.3 Figure 3 shows a sample worksheet with typical
at the beginning of each day or when buffer solution sign
data and calculations.
indicates that it needs changing (about every five to eight
readings). 30. Report
pipetting 20 #Lof blank sample, using an Eppendorf pipet,
into meter's 20-mL beaker (note 15). Press titration switch. 30.1 No sample reporting form is included for this
Record result and repeat test to ensure reproducibility, BI test procedure.
in equation (3). If meter's blank light is on, no chlorides
are present. 31. References
NOTE 15.-The 20-BL sample will result in a reading of about [1] Rosen,Joseph, Reagent Chemicals andStandards, D.
100 on the NaC1 chloride meter; if desired, a 100-L sample Van Nostrand Co., Inc., New York, NY.
may be used.
[2] United States Pharmacopeia andNational Formulary
28.8 Determine chloride strength of actual sample by XV, 20th ed., Mack Publishing Co., 20th and Northampton
pipetting 20 L of actual sample, using an Eppendorf pipet, Streets, Easton, PA, 18042, 1980.
747
USBR 4917
[3] Kelly, R. T. and J. W. Vail, "Rapid Analysis of Fresh Content of Fresh Concrete, Construction Engineering
Concrete," Concrete, April 1968, pp. 140-145, and May Research Laboratory Technical Report M-212/ADA
1968, pp. 206-210. 039120 (USA-CERL), Interstate Research Park, P O Box
4005, Champaign, IL, 61820, April 1977.
[4] Howdyshell, E A., Operations Guide: Water and
Cement Content of Fresh Concrete, Technical Report
[6] Howdyshell, E A., Corps of Engineers Concrete
M-177/ADA 022697, U.S. Army Construction Engineering
Quality Monitor: Operations Guide, Technical Report M-
Research Laboratory,USA-CERL, September 1975. 293/ADA 102753, USA-CERL, May 1981.
[5] Howdyshell, E A., Revised Operations Guide for a
Chemical Technique co Determine Water and Cement
748
USBR 4917
2 Hand scoop 1 1 1 One piece, cast-aluminum, bowl size about 3 inches wide by 5
or 8 inches long (76 by 127 or 230 mm). ES
4 Wide-mouth jar 2 2 2 Polyethylene, 0.5-gal (1.9-L) capacity, with screw closure and
lid. LGS
10 Rubber stopper No. 6 size, one with two holes and one with three holes. LGS
12 Automatic pipet, Glass pipet with Teflon plug. To allow for breakage,
10 mL two cases (two per case) are normally ordered. LGS
25 mL
13 Eppendorf pipet 1 1 Tip ejector, fixed volume, one of 0.0034-fl. oz. (100-/aL)
capacity, and one of 0.0007-fl. oz. (20-/aL) capacity. LGS
14 Disposable As 3 Disposable tips for the pipets listed in item 13. LGS
pipet tips req'd.
15 Buret, 100 mL Acrylic body with Teflon plug, class A or B accuracy. LGS
250mL - 1 1
17 Fixed volume
dispensers
2 mL Polyethylene with polypropylene measuring chambers. LGS
5 mL
749
USBR 4917
19 Double buret
clamp 1 Double buret holder clamp, nonferric alloy die casting,
nickel-plated. LGS
20 Utility clamp 1 Three-pronged grip and vinylized jaws. LGS
21 Rubber tubing 10 ft Amber rubber latex tubing, 0.25-inch (6.4-mm) i.d., std.
(3.05 m) 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) wall thickness. Normally sold in
96-foot (29.3-m) lengths. LGS
22 Glass tubing 3 lines Glass tubing, 0.276-inch (7-mm) o.d. by 10 inches (254 mm)
long, standard wall thickness. LGS
23 Centrifuge - 1 Variable speed, four-place centrifuge for 0.5 l-ft. oz. (15-mL)
tubes. LGS
24 Centrifuge tubes - (2 per (2 per Disposable polystyrene tubes of 0.51-fl. oz. (15-mL) capacity. LGS
test) test)
25 Chloride meter - 1 A chloride meter that will accept a 0.0007- or 0.0034-fl. oz.
(20- or 100-#L) sample of chloride for coulometric deter-
mination. The Corning Model 920M Chloride Meter is LES or
one known device that meets requirements. LGS
750
USBR 4917
q
i:5
0--
O0
O0
o
F-
h
d
I
n---w nr
0o
u___l_
0 E
A 4
w
II
E
--0
O0 .
@
I- -
7- I z
I II ) f,/) .
I II
&-
'l
I
,
111 -II -6 OW
.-
I II J
>
I II --
O I ._ oo
h
Z
W m
,n t'
o
oo
oo.
oo
751
USBR 4917
--I
Z
Z i
o
I-
. -
09 r o
a .Lv
zwrl
I-- 7 i
mW
o
..J 1
.t) (J
i,i hi
"r
0', O
i__ m
I-- ,W
Z
el
IUD .Z
w
I--
Z Zo I--
0
u
o ..r U
W(/)
0< E1
OD v
I- {J(n U) 0
:7 ZW
--nr
LLI I.-- m
::E
(0 "-: ,
W x
U ! i
IT ..IU
0
liE: "ZO
8
W OOa.
I-- DO
Wor"
un
< 0
Ow 8
Z L
I:Z: ro
0 0 ,0
rr mO u
I:E
W ZJ WD
0
LL OZ U
0 0--
ZE
ILl OxE
-- Z
(.0 EZO 9
D 8
< C,,,
I-
U 0 I
U i
LIJU) rd
D 1 El--
E1
E_
z OD
OCt;
v ,. -,- Zl, LT,,,
u --E:
w UOI--
0,,
PI
T I-. E ,
i_n
1
U --0 ol
WI--
rr
0
LL W'
Zo
LIr I
W J
rr
D -J U Z
I---- - o 0
W ZOn" I--
U Z 0
oz
U
0 U
rY
I:1_
O: O_ LIJ WE J
(J
1 m
o I
' / Z I
0
W
I -o
wW "r _l 1 EE
0
....
l 1 OO
/
Do lI
00 I / UZO I
WO
752
USBR 4917
q'4 $7 O
Figure 3. - Sample calculation form for determining water content using method C.
753
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 4918-92
PROCEDURE FOR
This test procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 4918; the number immediately
following the designation indicates year of original adoption or year of last revision. This test procedure is a modified version
of an ASTM draft proposal for a new designation entitled "Standard Test Method for Determining Cement Content of Freshly
Mixed Concrete," and "Technical Report M-85/06 (revised) July 1985, Operations Guide and Modification Analysis for Use of
the Corps of Engineers Concrete Quality Monitor on Roller-Compacted Concrete and Soil Cement" as presented by the Department
of the Army Construction Engineering Research Laboratory, Champaign, Illinois.
1.1 This designation covers the procedures for three 3.1 A given mass of freshly mixed concrete is washed
physical-chemical methods for determining cement content with a given volume of water over a nest of sieves. The
of a sample of freshly mixed concrete. These three methods water is agitated so as to uniformly suspend cement and
are applicableto all freshly mixed portland cement concrete other fine particles washed from concrete (those particles
batches for which calibration can be obtained in advance, passing finest sieve). A constant-volume representative
except for those containing certain aggregates,fly ash, or sample of the cement suspension is obtained and diluted
admixtures that, when washed over a No. 100 (150-#m) with a known volume of nitric acid and water. The diluted
sieve, yield significant and varying amounts of calcium ions sample is agitated without heat to dissolve calcium
in solution under conditions of test. The choice of which compounds in the cement. The calcium ion concentration
method to use is up to the discretion of the user; existing of resulting solution is determined by manual volumetric
environmental conditions may have some bearing on the titration in Method A [3,4] or by instrumental fluouro-
choice. metric determination in Method B [5], and is correlated
to cement content of specimen by a previously developed
calibration curve. Method C [6] uses somewhat different
2. Applicable Documents
equipment to separate the aggregateand cement to obtain
a representative sample of the cement suspension. This
2.1 USBR Procedures: method includes the use of a commercially availablecalcium
4094 Specifications for Ready-MixedConcrete analyzer and chloride meter for determining the calcium
4127 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse and chloride solution strengths, respectively [4].
Aggregate
4138 Density, Yield, Clean Separation, and Air Content
4. Significance and Use
(Gravimetric) of Concrete
4172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
4917 Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete 4.1 Test results can be used to determine variability
2.2 ASTM Standards: of cement content within a single batch of concrete, and
C 670 Standard Practice for Preparing Precision also the variability of cement content between batches of
Statements for Test Methods for Construction Material1 nominally identical concrete. If test is used to indicate
E 11 Standard Specification for Wire-Cloth Sieves for concrete uniformity, correct and appropriate sampling
Testing Purposes 2 procedures must be followed. Sampling procedures are
2.3 American Chemical Society Reagent Chemicals referenced in section 8.
Specifications;3 4.2 The water-cement ratio of a concrete sample can
be estimated when test is used in conjunction with USBR
4917.
i AnnuMBook ofASTMStandards, vols. 04.01, 04.02, 04.03, 04.08. 4.3 This procedure is not applicable to concretes
2 Annual Book ofASTM Standards, vols. 04.01, 04.02, 04.06, 05.05, 14.02. containing certain aggregates,fly ash, or admixtures that,
3 "Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society Specifications," Am. when washed over a No. 100 (150-#m) sieve, yield
Chemical Soc., Washington DC. For suggestions on testing reagents not significant and varying amounts of calcium ions in solution
listed by the American Chemical Society, see references [1,2],
section 31. under conditions of the tests, see section 1.1.
754
USBR 4918
755
USBR 4918
of NH4OH (ammonia hydroxide), assay as NHa (ammonia) 9.3 Cement.-Using materials and mix proportions of
(w/w) 28 to 30 percent, to 0.039 pound mass the concrete to be tested, hand mix a 4.4-1bin (2-kg) sample
(17.5 g) of NH4C1 (ammonia chloride), and dilute to 8.4 of concrete. Determine mass of cement and water for this
fluid ounces (250 mL) with water. The ammonium mix to nearest 0.022 Ibm (1 g), and determine mass of
hydroxide in the buffer solution evaporates rapidly. The aggregatesto nearest 0.022 lbm (10 g). Ensure that all
solution should be kept under cover except when dispensing cement from tools, mixing bowl, etc., is washed into
reagents to minimize evaporation. washing machine. Determine relative calcium ion content
6.4 Eriochrome Black T Indicator Solution.-Dissolve of this mix by following the steps outlined in sections
0.5 gram of Eriochrome Black T, color index No. 14645, 11.2 through 11.5. Record volume of EDTA solution
in 0.84 fluid ounce (25 mL) of triethanolamine. The required for cement calibration specimen (note 4).
indicator solution has a storage life of about 2 months. 9.4 Calibration Curve.-To construct the linear
6.5 Nitric Acid Solution (1 + 19).-Add 1 volume of calibration curve of cement content versus volume of EDTA
concentrated HNOa (nitric acid, sp. gr. 1.42) to 19 volumes required, plot zero cement and volume of EDTA required
of water. for aggregateblank (sec. 9.2) as one point. Plot mass of
6.6 Di-Sodium Ethylenediaminetetracetate (0.01N).- cement in 4.4-Ibm (2-kg) concrete calibration sample and
Dissolve 3.72+0.01 grams of EDTA (di-sodium ethylene- volume of EDTA required (sec. 9.3) as a second point.
diaminetetracetate) in water and dilute to 33.8 fluid ounces Connect the two points by a straight line to complete
(1 L). Store EDTA solution in polyethylene bottles. calibration curve for these sources and types of cement
and aggregate.All unknown cement contents are linearly
7. Precautions proportional in terms of calcium ion content [5].
9.5 Calibration Requirements.-Both the cement
7.1 This test procedure may involve hazardous calibration test (sec. 9.3) and aggregate blank test (sec.
materials, operations, and equipment, and does not claim 9.2) must be repeated each time tap water sources, additives,
to address all safety problems associated with its use. It aggregatesources, cement source, or cement type change;
is the responsibility of the user to consult and establish and each time a new EDTA reagent solution is used. A
appropriate safety and health practices and determine daily cement calibration test should be made. The results
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. of the three most recent daily tests must agree within
7.2 A precaution is given in section 11.5 on color 5 percent; if they do not, three tests should be made each
perception. day. After 3 days of three-a-day test averagesbeing within
5 percent of each other, one test per day may be resumed
8. Sampling until deviation exceeds 5 percent.
9.6 The Bureau has never performed this test;
8.1 The sample of concrete from which cement content therefore, no typical worksheets, calculations, etc., are
test specimen is taken shall be representative of entire included for Method A.
batch, and shall have a mass of not less than 44.1 Ibm
(20 kg). The sample shall be obtained in accordance with 10. Conditioning
USBR 4172 and/or 4094, the latter designation outlines
procedures for sampling for uniformity of concrete 10.1 Conditioning of concrete for calibration is covered
produced in truck mixers. under section 9.
9.1 The calibration and standardization of mis- 11.1 Obtain a 4.41+0.44-1bm (2000+200-g) test
cellaneous equipment or apparatus used in performing the specimen from concrete sample in accordance with
tests listed under the Applicable Documents of section 2 section 8.1. The concrete shall contain aggregatesizes up
are covered under that particular procedure or standard. to 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm). Record exact mass of test
9.2 AggregateBlank.-Prepare a representative 4.4-1bm specimen to nearest 0.0022 Ibm (1 g). Also, obtain a
(2-kg) sample of concrete using materials and mix 6.6+0.66-1bm (3000+300-g) test specimen of sample for
proportions of the concrete to be tested minus the cement. concrete containing aggregate sizes greater than
The sample mass should be 4.4 Ibm minus the mass of 1-1/2 inches. Correct for coarse aggregate variance as
cement which would be contained in a 4.4-1bm sample described in section 22.
of concrete. To determine the relative calcium ion content
of these materials, follow the steps outlined in sections NOTE 5.-The reason for the wide range of sample mass is
11.2 through 11.5. Record the volume of EDTA solution to prevent the mortar-aggregate ratio from being biased through
required for "aggregate blank." adjustment of sample size.
NOTE 4.-If 6.6-Ibm (3-kg) specimens are tested, procedure 11.2 Fill washing machine with 10-t-0.1 gallons
should be followed for 6.6 Ibm instead of 4.4 Ibm. (37.9+0.4 L) of tap water. Transfer test specimen to sieves
756
USBR 4918
757
USBR 4918
17. Sampling
14.6 Sieves.-A nest of standard, stainless-steel sieves
of 12.0-inch (305-mm) diameter and consisting of No. 4 17.1 Refer to section 8.1.
(4.75-mm), No. 50 (300-#m), and No. 100 (150-m) sieves
is required (notes 2 and 10). 18. Calibration and Standardization
NOTE 10.-If washing machine is used instead of cement 18.1 Refer to section 9.1.
suspension tank, the sieve nest described in section 5.1.6 should 18.2 Cement.-Using materials and mix proportions of
be used. concrete to be tested, hand mix a 4.4-1bm (2-kg) sample
of concrete. Determine mass of cement and water for this
mix to nearest 0.0022 ibm (1 g), and determine mass of
14.7 Magnetic Stirrer.-Refer to section 5.1.11.
aggregate to nearest 0.022 Ibm (10 g). Ensure that all
14.8 Syringe-Type Pipet.-Syringe-type, variable
volume, transfer pipet of 1.01-fluid ounce (30-mL) capacity. cement from tools, mixing bowl, etc., is washed into
washing machine.
14.9 Eppendorf Pipets.-Tip ejector, fixed volume
pipets, one of 0.0007-fluid ounce (20-#L) capacity and one NOTE 13.-If 6.6-Ibm (3-kg) specimens are tested, procedure
0.0034-fluid ounce (100-#L) capacity. should be followed for 6.6 lbm instead of 4.4 Ibm.
14.10 Disposable Pipet os.-Disposable tips for
0.0007- and 0.0034-fluid ounce Eppendorf pipets. 18.2.1 Fill washing machine or cement suspension
14.11 Flasks.-One polycarbonate, 16.9-fluid ounce tank with water to 10-gallon (38-L) mark on side of tank.
(500-mL) capacity Erlenmeyer flask; and one polyprop- Place nested sieves on tank and turn on agitator.
ylene, 8.4-fluid ounce (250-mL) capacity volumetric flask 18.2.2 Transfer the 4.4-Ibm specimen to sieves over
are required. tank. Start recirculating pump and wash residue from
14.12 Calcium Analyzer.-The calcium analyzer accepts specimen container into tank using water jet from
samples from 0.0007 to 0.0034 fluidounce (20 to 100/zL), recirculating pump hose (note 13).
and makes fluorometricdetermination of calcium with 18.2.3 Wash the plus No. 4 (+4.75-mm) aggregate
precision of duplicate calcium analysis performed having carefully using water jet from recirculating pump hose.
a coefficient of variation of 1.4 percent for 0.0034-fluid After all cement has been washed from the aggregate
ounce samples and 1.7 percent for 0.0007-fluid ounce retained on the No. 4 sieve (about 1 to 1.5 minutes of
samples. washing), remove No. 4 sieve.
NOTE 11.-One known device meeting these requirements is NOTE 14.-For greater accuracy, aggregateretained on No. 4
the Corning Model 940 Calcium Analyzer. sieve may be used in procedure of section 22.
758
USBR 4918
(about 1 to 1.5 minutes of washing). Remove No. 50 sieve. 18.2.9), add a 0.0034-fluid ounce sample to cuvette using
an Eppendorf pipet (note 14).
NOTE 15.-When both the No. 50 (300-/1m) and No. 100 (150- 18.4 Calibration Curve.-To construct the linear
m) sieves are used, aggregateretained on the No. 100 sieve calibration curve of cement content versus calcium analyzer
should be washed an additional 1 to 1.5 minutes after No. 50 reading, plot zero cement and aggregate blank calibration
sieve has been removed. Remove No. 100 sieve when washing result (sec. 18.3) divided by five as one point. Plot mass
is complete. of cement in the 4.4-Ibm concrete calibration sample and
its calcium analyzer reading (sec. 18.2.9) as the other point.
18.2.5 Obtain a 1.01-fluid ounce (30-mL) represen- Connect the two points by a straight line to complete the
tative sample of the cement suspension in the tank using calibration curve for these sources and types of cement
the 1.01-fluid ounce syringe pipet. Place suspended material and aggregate. All unknown cement contents are linearly
in a 16.9-fluid ounce (500-mL) Erlenmeyer flask. Refill proportional in terms of calcium ion content [7] (note
syringe pipet with 5 percent nitric acid solution and add 13).
it to material in Erlenmeyer flask, occasionally shaking 18.5 Calibration Requirements.-Both the concrete and
pipet while discharging to ensure that all cement that aggregate blank calibration tests must be repeated each
settled out when cement sample was taken is dissolved time the water, aggregate, cement, or additive source
and flushed out with the acid solution. Using a volumetric changes. A daily cement calibration test (sec. 18.2) should
flask, add 8.4 ounces (250 mL) of tap water to Erlenmeyer be made. The results of the three most recent tests must
flask. agree within 5 percent; if they do not, three tests should
18.2.6 Place magnetic stirring bar in Erlenmeyer be made each day. After 3 days of three-a-day test averages
flask, and place flask onto a magnetic stirrer. Turn on being within 5 percent of each other, one test per day
stirring motor and verify stirring action is working. may be resumed until deviation exceeds 5 percent.
18.2.7 Prepare calcium analyzer by switching power 18.6 The Bureau has never performed this test;
on, place MEQ/MG toggle switch to MG, fill cuvette to therefore, no typical worksheets, calculations, etc., are
mark with 1.0 N potassium hydroxide, and add 0.0034 included for Method B.
fluid ounce (100-/L) of reconstituted calcein reagent to
cuvette using the Eppendorf pipet. Place cuvette in analyzer, 19. Procedure
use an Eppendorf pipet to add 0.0034 fluid ounce of calcium
standard solution, and push titration button to condition
19.1 Refer to section 11.1.
cuvette for analysis. This latter step is required only after
19.2 Follow the procedures outlined in sections 18.2.1
cuvette has been filled with a new potassium hydroxide
solution. through 18.2.9.
NOTE 16.-These steps are for use with Corning Model 940 20. Calculations
Calcium Analyzer; if another instrument is used, steps should
be modified to meet manufacturer's calibration and operation 20.1 Determine cement content of sample by first
procedures. correcting the result from section 18.2.9 to an exact 4.41-
Ibm (2000-g) sample, and then referring to the calibration
18.2.8 To calibrate the calcium meter, add 0.0034
graph. Correct data by followingformula:
fluid ounce (100-#L) of calcium standard to cuvette using
the Eppendorf pipet, and then press titration button. ME
Record result and repeat test by adding another 0.0034 (4)
fluid ounce of the calcium standard and titrating. Repeat
test until consecutive results are less than 1.5 percent apart. where:
Push calibration button and run an additional 0.0034-fluid
ounce sample of calcium standard to ensure that calcium TI = calcium reading obtained for sample of tap
standard readout value is 10 (+0.1 mg percent) (note 17). water only;
18.2.9 To determine strength of cement solution in Mew = mass of cement and water from section 18.2, in
Erlenmeyer flask, pipet a 0.0007-fluid ounce (20-/zL) pound mass (kilograms); and
sample from flask into cuvette using the Eppendorf pipet, Other terms as previously defined in equation (1).
press titrate button, and record result. Repeat test until
all values are less than 1.5 percent apart (note 17).
NOTE 17.-If desired, the cement content in pound mass per
18.3 Aggregate Blank.-To determine the aggregate cubic yard may be calculated as shown by equation (2), section
blank calibration constant, repeat the procedures outlined 12.1.
in sections 18.2.1 through 18.2.9, excluding the addition
of the 4.4-Ibm (2-kg) concrete sample to the tank. Instead, NOTE 18.-If desired, the cement content can be expressed
add to the tank the same amount of aggregate,additives, as a percent (Cv) of the total specimen mass by dividing the
and water that would be in a 4.4-1bm concrete sample. result of equation (4) by the mass of sample that the calibration
Also, instead of adding a 0.0007-fluid ounce sample (sec. chart is based on, and multiplying by 100:
759
USBR 4918
G = M (100) (5) sieve analysis. Such values will be in error to the extent that
the sieve analysis of the coarse aggregatepassing the No. 4 (4.75-
mm) sieve varies in individual batches.
21. Precision
21.1 The single operator standard deviation has been METHOD C - CORPS OF ENGINEERS
found to be 1.02 percent; therefore, results of two properly CONCRETE QUALITY MONITOR
conducted tests by same operator on same material should
CEMENT CONTENT OF SOIL CEMENT
not differ by more than 2.89 percent. Multilaboratory
precision data have not been obtained. OR ROLLER-COMPACTED CONCRETE
24. Reagents
where:
24.1 Nitric Acid Solution (1+ 19).-Refer to section 6.5.
B = SSD mass of coarse aggregate in air, in pound 24.2 Ethylene Glycol Bis (aminoethylether) Tetra-
mass (kilograms); Acetic Acid (EGTA) Solution.-Refer to section 15.3.
C = immersed mass of coarse aggregate, in pound 24.3 Calcein Indicator Solution.-Refer to section 15.4.
mass (kilograms); and 24.4 Calcium Standard Solution.-Refer to section 15.5.
sg = SSD specific gravity. 24.5 Potassium Hydroxide (1.0 N).-Refer to section
15.6.
22.1.2 Determine coarse aggregate content of a
larger sample of concrete, 0.0185 ydz (0.014 m3) for 25. Precautions
example, which is representative of the batch or load of
concrete. Express the SSD mass of aggregate as a decimal 25.1 Refer to section 7.1.
fraction of mass of concrete.
22.1.3 Correct the determined cement content (set. 26. Sampling
20.1) by multiplying it by the following fraction:
26.1 Refer to the requirements for calibration and
1 -At standardization under section 27.
1 - As
27. Calibration and Standardization
where:
760
USBR 4918
NOTE 20.-The Corning 940 calcium analyzer provides readouts 28.4 Transfer the 4kg sample to the nest of sieves
in metric units only; therefore, the following procedural steps over the tank. Turn on tank's recirculating pump and wash
addressonly metric quantities. residue from the 4-kg sample container into the tank using
the water jet from the recirculating pump hose.
27.2 For the concrete calibration test, a 4-kg concrete 28.5 Wash the plus 4.75-mm aggregatecarefully using
sample is hand mixed using the materials and mix the water jet from the recirculating pump hose. After all
proportions of the concrete to be tested (sections 28.2 cement has been washed from the aggregateretained on
through 28.11), and the results recorded. the 4.75-mm sieve, which takes about 1 to 1.5 minutes,
remove the sieve.
NOTE 21.-The sieve arrangement used in the calibration 28.6 Wash aggregate retained on the 300-m sieve
procedure should be consistent with that used in the test until all cement has been removed (about 1 to 1.5 minutes),
procedure; that is, if only the 4.75mm and 300-tm sieves are then remove the sieve. -
used to calibrate the cement test, the same sieves should be used
during the testing. If the 4.75-mm, 300-/zm, and 150-#m sieves
are used, they should be used for both calibrating and testing. NOTE 23.-When both the 300- and 150-gtm sieves are used,
the aggregateretained on the 150-#m sieve should be washed
27.3 The cement calibration curve is a linear plot of an additional 1 to 1.5 minutes after the 300-um sieve has been
the cement content in grams versus the calcium analyzer removed. Remove the 150-/m sieve when washing is completed.
reading in milligrams-percent, with zero cement being the
aggregate blank calibration result in milligrams-percent 28.7 Obtain a representative sample of the cement
divided by five. The mass of the cement in the 4-kg concrete suspension in the tank using the 30-mL syringe pipet. Place
calibration sample and corresponding calcium analyzer this suspended material in a 500-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
reading is the other set of coordinates. Refill syringe pipet with 5 percent nitric acid and add
27.4 The concrete calibration test must be repeated this solution to the contents of the Erlenmeyer flask. While
each time the cement, aggregatesource or type, or water discharging the acid solution from the pipet, shake pipet
source used to produce the concrete changes; or weekly occasionally to ensure that all material that settled out
if the aggregateand cement sources or aggregatetype do when sample was taken has dissolved and is flushed with
not change. the acid solution. Use a volumetric flask to add 250 mL
of tap water to the Erlenmeyer flask.
28. Procedure 28.8 Put a magnetic stirring bar in Erlenmeyer flask
and place bar on a magnetic stirrer. Turn on stirring motor
28.1 The CQM (Concrete Quality Monitor) cement
and ensure that stirring has begun.
content test is based on the following assumptions:
28.9 Prepare calcium analyzer by switching power on
Cement of a given type from a given source is uniform and filling cuvette to the mark with 1.0 N potassium
in calcium content; that is, the aggregates either do hydroxide. Then, add 100 #L of reconstituted calcein
not contain calcium or are uniform in calcium content reagent using an Eppendorf pipet. Place cuvette in analyzer
for that proportion of the aggregatesthat pass the finest add 100#L of calcium standard solution using the
sieve over the cement suspension tank. Eppendorf pipet, and push titration button to condition
When agitated, cement can be dispersed uniformly cuvette for analysis. This latter step is required only after
and suspended in water so that a representative sample cuvette is filled with a new potassium hydroxide solution.
can be obtained. A single cuvette filling is enough for 15 to 20 readings.
Stirring without external heat will produce a 28.10 Start the analysis by placing the meq/mg%
quantitative solution of cement in nitric acid. toggle switch at rag% and adding 100#L of the calcium
Calcium content of cement solution can be determined standard to the cuvette using an Eppendorf pipet. Press
by titration with the Corning 940 calcium analyzer. titration button. Record result and repeat test by adding
another 100-tL sample. Repeat testing until consecutive
28.2 Fill cement suspension tank with tap water to results are within 1.5 percent. Push calibration button and
the 37.8-L mark on the side of the tank. Place nested sieves run an additional 100-/L sample of the calcium standard
on tank and turn on tank's agitator. to ensure that calcium standard readout value is 10 0.1
mg%.
NOTE 22.-If calcareous fines are present, it is recommended 28.11 Determine strength of cement solution in
that a 150-/.tm sieve be nested below the 300-/m sieve. The Erlenmeyer flask by analyzing a 20-tL sample in the
combination of sieves used for calibration and cement content calcium analyzer. Repeat this analysis until all values are
testing must be consistent. within 1.5 percent. Determine cement content by referring
to the calibration graph.
28.3 Obtain the 15- to 30-kg concrete sample, mix 28.12 For a sample recording of the calcium analyzer
sample to ensure homogeneity (or remix if used in readings on the raw materials, see figure 1.
conjunction with water test), and weigh out 4 0.4 kg 28.12.1 To make an accurate prediction of a calcium
of fresh concrete. Record this mass to the nearest gram. analyzer reading on cementitious materials for a particular
761
USBR 4918
size sample representing a particular batch size, a linear values and initial test values or if second test agreesclosely
regression equation should be developed from readings with initial test, one of three possibilities has occurred:
obtained:
(1) Concrete sample is not representative of bulk,
y = ax + b (7) which indicates poor mixer efficiency and
nonhomogeneity;
where:
(2) Batch is not the same as indicated by batch
y = calcium reading in mg% (milligrams-percent), proportions; or
x = cementitious content in grams or kilograms,
a = slope value, and (3) CQM system is incorrectly calibrated.
b = value where plotted line intercepts y-axis.
29.2 Figure 5 shows a series of analytical steps for
Examples of equation (7) using data from figure 1 and determining which of the three possible problems has
plotted on figure2: occurred. It is recommended that an inquiry be made as
to any possible changes or problems that may have occurred
a = 0.1024 at the batch plant.
x ---- 76.9 grams of cement for a 4-kg concrete
sample 30. Report
b = 2.082
y = 0.1024 (76.9) + 2.082 30.1 No typical reporting form is included with this
= 9.96 mg% test procedure.
762
USBR 4918
6 Cement suspension
tank 1 1 Polypropylene, 10-gal. capacity "Nalgene" tank with
recirculating pump and hose; 1/20-hp, d-c motor with
an a-c/d-ccontroller for use on 115/120-V, a-c lines;
watertight bushing; Jiffy mixing blade coupled through
a universal joint to a 1/12-hp stirrer motor; and a
cutout ring to hold 12-inch (305-mm) diameter sieves. LES or
LGS
763
USBR 4918
15 Automatic pipet Automatic glass pipet with three-way tap, 10.14-fl. oz.
(300-mL) capacity. To allow for breakage, 'two are
normally ordered. LGS
18 Pipet tips As As Disposable tips for pipets listed in item 17. LGS
req'd, req'd.
23 Suction bulb 1 Rubber suction bulb for use with the pipet in item 13. LGS
24 Rubber tubing 20 ft Amber rubber latex tubing, 0.5-inch (13-mm) i.d. LGS
(6.1 m)
26 Calcium analyzer - 1 1 A calcium analyzer that will accept samples from 0.0007
to 0.0034 ft. oz. (20- to 100-1zL), and makes
fluorometric determination of calcium to the precision
noted in section 14.12. LES
764
USBR 4918
765
USBR 4918
20-
FOr 0/oo-/L somple bosed on o ._ -kg) mixture somple
I
140
766
USBR 4918
Spec. or
Structure Tested by Date
Solic No A/or AVAIL/SZ oeA- CoMPA c ra CowcCr6
Project/*qL,o w C'R'lc DA Item ESEA.CM Computed by Date
/-/'PPA/E OgWoN' Location 7"ourOAd OGo,t"
Feature Station Offset --!...- Checked by Date
//ow CEIe DA
Depth ..,.. to
Total Mass
Calcium Analyzer
Readin in rag%
Cement
Fly Ash
Water
Total Mass
Calcium AnalTzer
R*din in m%
Remarks:
Figure 3. - Sample worksheet for aggregateblank calibration and the concrete mix calibration curve.
767
USBR 4918
20 M
I-
Z For a/--/zL solution sample based on o __4-E(kg) mixture sample
lid
(J
W
(1. 16
i
t
ew
--I
.d
12
Z
1
Z
I
O
II 8
laJ
N
b
Z
4
u
J
I I L I = I i I i I " I I i I
0.5 Lo 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
CEMENT CONTENT IN PERCENTAGE OF CEMENT OF
CONCRETE MIXTURE
Figure4.-Graphicalilltrationofdatageneratedonfigure3.
I
I
ERROR IN'RESULTS
GREATER THANtlO%
RERUN FROM SAME
SAMPLE
,
RERUN CONCURS WITH BATCH
PROPORTIONS. ASSUME PROCEDURAL
ERROR ON FIRST TEST, BATCH OK.
I
RERUN AGREES WITH FIRST RUN.
NO PROCEDURAL ERROR. ERRORS
I
I
I TEST WITH NEW 12- TO 15-kg
SAMPLE FROM SAME BATCH. I ==='=-o+-=. I
i
I I i i
I
RESULTS OF SECOND SAMPLE RESULTS OF SECOND SAMPLE I RESULTS OF SECOND SAMPLE RESULTS OF SECOND SAMPLE
AGREE WITH FIRSTtiNDICATING DISAGREE WITH FIRST t DISAGREE WiTH SECOND RUN, AGREE WITH SECOND RUN,
HOMOGENEITY IS NOT A INDICATING HOMOGENTY iS A FIRST SAMPLE. HOMOGENEITY FIRST SAMPLE. HOMOGENEITY
PROBLEM. PROBLEM. IS A PROBLEM. iS NOT A PROBLEM.
__l__
[ CHECK CALIBRATION 1
I
CHECK CALIBRATION
l
I
I
CALIBRATION OK, J
I
CALIBRATION INCORRECT.
I
I CALIBRATION INCORRECT. I I
I
CALIBRATION OK,
INDICATING ERROR IN RECOMPUTE RESULTS.
BATCH PROPORTIONS. RECOMPUTE RESULTS. INDICATING ERROR IN
BATCH PROPORTIONS.
I I
RECOMPUTED
l
RESULTS
I i
RECOMPUTEDRESULTS RECOMPUTEDRESULTS I RECOMPUTED RESULTS
CONCUR WITH BATCH DISAGREE WITH BATCH DISAGREE WITH BATCH
I PROPORTIONS INDICATING CONCUR WITH BATCH
PROPORTIONS. BATCH OK. ERROR IN BATCH PROPORTIONS. PROPORTIONS. BATCH OK. PROPORTIONSt INDICATING
ERROR IN BATCH PROPORTIONS.
768
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
_ BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 9300-89
PROCEDUREFOR
CHECKING, ROUNDING,
AND REPORTING OF LABORATORY DATA
INTRODUCTION
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Concrete and Structural Branch, code D-3730, and the Geotechnical Services Branch,
code D-3760, of the Research and Laboratory Services Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under"
the fixed designation USBR 9300. The number immediately following the designation indicates the year of acceptance or the
year of last revision.
4. Recording Data on Original Data Forms NOTE 2.-Example data forms included in the other USBR
procedures contained in this manual do not show checkmarks
4.1 The heading of each data form must be completed in order to illustrate the required data in a neat and legible manner.
in full. The initials and surname of appropriate persons Completed data forms should be similar to figure 1 or 2.
are to be entered in the space for "tested by," "computed
by," and "checked by" (see example on fig. 1). 5.4 If recorded data are incorrect, draw a line through
4.2 The portion of the data form for auxiliary test;s the number and Write the correct number to the side or
must show the year of the version of the procedure used above the incorrect value. In No Circumstance Shall the
(see fig. 1). Original Value Be Erased or Written Over.
5.4.1 The same method or system of computation
NOTE 1.-Since procedures may be revised, it is important that must be used for checking the data as was used in calculating
the version of the procedure used be identified. the recorded values.
769
USBR 9300
NOTE 3.-Numbers calculated by "chain" computations with When the first The last digit Examples
a calculator or computer may result in different values than digit dropped is: retained is:
rounding values for each entry and using the rounded value in
subsequent calculations. The calculator or computer carries more
digits than the rounded number when a "chain" computation <5 Unchanged 2.44 to 2.4
is being used. >5 Increased by 1 2.46 to 2.5
Exactly 5 Increased by 1 2.55 to 2.6
5.4.2 Data corrected by the checker should be verified 5 followed only by zeros Increased by 1 2.5500 to 2.6
by a person other than the checker and a checkmark shown
by the correct value. An entry should be made on the data The same rules apply when rounding a number with many
form "corrections verified by (Name) "
digits to a number with few digits. A computer!or calculator
5.5 The name of the checker and the date the data may display the answer to a computation as ten digits
were checked must be entered on the form heading. The and the answer is to be recorded to two digits. For example,
last name of the checker must be completely written out. the number 2.3456789 would be rounded to 2.3; the first
5.6 It is the responsibility of the checker to ensure digit dropped would be the 4.
that all numbers are correct, recorded to the proper number Other examples:
of places specified in the procedure, and that rounding
is in conformance with this designation. The checker should
also review the measured data for reasonableness (e.g., 2.49999 to 2.5
2.49999 to 2
a recorded mass of 179 Ibm when the maximum capacity
2.55555 to 2.56
of a scale is known to be 100 Ibm). 2.55555 to 3
5.7 If necessary changes are made to data subsequent 2.50000 to 3
to the final checking, changes must be checked and the
changes explained in the Remarks section of the data form.
7.2 The examples shown above, exactly 5 or 5 followed
6. Checking Data Presented on Graphs, Tables, by zeros, are rounded differently than indicatedin the USBR
and Figures Reporting Laboratory Data Metric Manual, ASTM E 380, and ASTM E 29. These
documents all indicate that the number is tO be rounded
6.1 All data shown on graphs, tables, and figures must to the closest even number. In the example (shown above)
be checked by an individual other than the person who 2.50000 would be rounded to 2 and not 3. Unfortunately,
originally prepared the graph, table, or figure. calculators and computers do not follow this rule and always
6.2 The original figure should not show checkmarks round up. Recognizing the wide-spread use Of calculators
for each value. It is recommended that a copy of the original and computers, the policy as stated in subpgragraph 7.1
graph or figure be made and checkmarks be placed by should be followed.
each value on the copy (see example on fig. 2).
6.3 Once the graph, table, or figure is considered 8. Reporting Data
correct, the name of the person who prepared the graph,
table, or figure; the date prepared; the name of the checker;
and the date the data were checked must be entered in 8.1 Data reported as result(s), of the test, must conform
the space provided or in the lower left corner of the original with instructions in: the respective procedure, since some
reported values are different than what is recorded on the
graph, table, or figure.
data form. (For example, the computed value for liquid
7. Rounding Numbers limit of a soil is recorded on the data form to the nearest
0.1 percent but is to be reported to the nearest 1 percent.)
7.1 When a numerical value is to be rounded to fewer If the reported value is not specified, the data should be
digits than the total number available, the following reported in accordance with the rules of significant digits
procedure is to be followed: as described in USBR 3000.
770
USBR 9300
7-1391 (I 2-8b) ]
LABORATORY COMPACTION TEST I DesignationUSBR
Bureau of Reclamation 5500 _ 8 9
SAMPLE NO. 55T_131/ I PROJECT Example FEATURE
XYZ Dom
i
TESTED BY DATE ICOMPUTED BY DATE CHECKED BY DATE
Mass of tamping rod 5.50 I// Ibm Volume of mold 0. 0497 I ft3
Specimen No. I i I 2
Wet unit weightdeterminations
Mass of mold+ wet soil (Ibm) 11.15 II.52 I 1.87 I 1.64 i I 1.69
Needle No. - 40 40 20 10 4
I , 72 45 50 50 40
Penetrometerreading (Ibf) 73 47 49 49 37
72 46 51 49 39
72 J 46 J 50v 49 v/ 39I/
Average reading (Ibf)
-6e-
Penetrationresistance (Ibf/in2) 2880 V 1840W 1000v" 490 v 156v
Moisturecontentdeterminations
Dish No. 15 44 45 55 20
Mass of dish + wet soil (g) 382.4 386.7 382. I 381.5 369.5
Mass of dish + dry soil (g) 359. I 359.6 352.4 347.3 330.6
Mass of dish (g) 129.4 v" 133.8 140.6 V' 138.6 V" I t 8.0 v"
Mass of water (g) 23.3V" 27.1 I/ 29.7 34.2 I/ 38.9
USBR 5205- 8 9
USBR 5300 - 89
USBR 532O - 8 9
USBR 5505 - 8 9
GPO 849-889
771
USBR 93OO
%1414 (9-85) I
COMPACTION - PENETRATION RESISTANCE CURVES I
Bureau of Reclamation Designation USBR 55O0 - 89
I
;AMPLE NO. IFEATURE [PROJECT
55T-13v' XYZ Dom Exornple
Hole No. AP-5A' Plotted by B. Brown Date 5128/89
Depth :3.2- 7.8 v/ ft [] m [] Checked by C. White Date 5/29/89
D[] ,/
. 3000 pv
i
\
U
z V
< 2000 I
F-
(/)
m
o')
LU
\
rr \
z
0 1000
I-
-\
<
J
l--
uJ
Z v"
,,, C
V"
THEORETICAL CURVE AT
COMPLETE SATURATION;
NUMBERS INDICATE
PERCENTAGE OF VOIDS
Vlr
J
12o "30v /
/ \/ /
/
i- v" 1 /3 5 "
"1-
(.9
I10
/,
/,v
LU
v"
9O
tOw" t5v" 20/
MOISTURE CONTENT (%)
Shrinkage Limit
%
GPO 848-759
772
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 1000-89
PROCEDURE FOR
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 1000. The number immediately
following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
773
USBR 1000
GGG-C-105B. Inch-pound scale outside micrometers which 6.2.3 Occasionally rub or wipe the linear measure-
have a measuring range of 0 to 1.000 inch must be graduated ment device with an oily rag if it is used in a wet or
to read to at least one-thousandth of an inch (0.001 in). damp environment (not applicable for hardwood rules).
Metric scale outside micrometers which have a measuring 6.2.4 Use extreme caution when marking control
range of 0 to 25 mm must be graduated to read to at numbers on linear measurement devices. Under no
least two one-hundredths of a millimeter (0.02 mm). A circumstances should the precision gauge blocks be marked
certificate of inspection certifying that the outside or scribed by the purchaser. The manufacturer stamps the
micrometer meets the Federalspecification is to be obtained dimensions and serial number on the block at the time
from the manufacturer when ordering the micrometer. of manufacture and calibration.
5.6 Inside Micrometers.-A device which is used to
obtain precise inside measurements. Inside micrometers 7. Calibration and Standardization
should meet the requirements of Federal Specification
GGG-C-105B. Inch-pound scale inside micrometers which 7.1 Verify that the certificate of inspection is current.
have a measuring range of 2 to 12 inches must be graduated If it is not current, the linear measurement device should
to read to at least one-thousandth of an inch (0.001 in). not be used.
Metric scale inside micrometers which have a measuring It is recommended that linear measurement devices be
range of 50 to 300 mm must be graduated to read to at returned to the manufacturer or to an appropriate
least two one-hundredths of a millimeter (0.02 mm). A certification agency biennially for recertification.
certificate of inspection certifying that the inside microm-
8. Conditioning
eter meets Federal specifications is to be obtained from
the manufacturer when ordering the micrometer. 8.1 Not applicable, special conditioning requirements
5.7 Depth Micrometers.-A device which is used to are not needed for this procedure.
obtain precise depth measurements. Depth micrometers
should meet the requirements of Federal Specification 9. Procedure
GGG-C-105B. Inch-pound scale depth micrometers which
have a metering range of 0 to 10 inches must be graduated 9.1 Purchasing:
to read to at least one-thousandth of an inch (0.001 inch). 9.1.1 All information is to be recorded on the "Linear
Metric scale depth micrometers which have a measuring Measurement Device Acceptance Form" as shown on
range of 250 mm must be graduated to read to at least figure 1.
two one-hundredths of a millimeter (0.02 ram.) A certificate 9.1.2 Determine the type of measurement device that
of inspection certifying that the depth micrometer meets is needed, e.g., when determining the volume of relative
Federal specifications is to be obtained from the density measures, one needs a depth micrometer with a
manufacturer when ordering the micrometer. measuring range of 0 to 10 inches and an inside microm-
5.8 Rectangular Gauge Blocks.-Precision steel rectan- eter with a measuring range of 2 to 12 inches.
gular gauge blocks are designed to be used individually. 9.1.3 Determine the nominal range of the item or
Gauge blocks are suitable for checking dial caliper, vernier items to be measured.
caliper, micrometer caliper, and dial indicator travel. Inch- 9.1.4 Obtain a catalog froma reputable supplier that
pound and metric scale gauge blocks are to be compatible supplies precision linear measurement devices.
with the calibration requirements; i.e., dial gauges, calipers, 9.1.5 Determine if the supplier can furnish the linear
etc. A certificate of inspection certifying that the rectangular measurement device needed to accomplish the task.
gauge blocks meet Federal specifications is to be obtained 9.1.6 Determine if the supplier can furnish a
from the manufacturer when ordering the gauge blocks. certificate of inspection and if construction and accuracy
5.9 Square Gauge Blocks.-Precision steel square gauge comply with applicable Federal specifications.
blocks are designed for stack assembly. An accessory hole 9.2 Upon receipt of the linear measurement device,
is drilled through the center of each gauge block to allow the followingitems should be noted.
the tie rod to pass through for assembly. A certificate of
inspection certifying that the square gauge blocks meet Date of receipt
Federal specifications is to be obtained from the Type of linear measurement device
manufacturer when ordering the gauge blocks. Name of the manufacturer
Serial number of the linear measurement device
6. Precautions Are the range and scale markings on the linear
measurement device as specified on the purchase order?
6.1 Safety Precautions.-Examine the linear Check the certificate of inspection to ensure that it
measurement devices (as received or before their use) for is current and that the data listed on it are applicable
sharp edges or burrs. to the device (serial number and type).
6.2 Technical Precautions:
6.2.1 Examine the linear measurement devices for 10. Interpretation of Results
bent or missing components each time they are used.
6.2.2 Store the linear measurement devices in a 10.1 Use the instructions and tables listed in the appli-
suitable case when not in use. cable Federal specifications to aid in determining if the
774
USBR 1000
4. SERIALNUMSER DM-'q'967550
8. DO THE RANGE AND SCALE MARKINGS COMPLY WITH THE SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS?
[] Yes [] NO
[ACCEPT D REJECT
775
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
"" BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 1007-89
PROCEDURE FOR
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services *
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 1007. The number immediately
following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision
1. Scope within the specified range, when the dial indicator reading
is approachedfirst with increasing and then with decreasing
1.1 This designation outlines the procedure for cali- spindle displacements.
brating dial indicators for laboratory and field applications.
5.2.4 Range.-The measured values over which the
1.2 Method A outlines the calibration procedure using
dial indicator is intended to measure, specified by upper
precision gauge blocks; Method B outlines the calibration and lower limits.
procedure using a micrometer fixture.
5.2.5 Repeatability.-Thedegree to which displayed
dial indicator readings vary for successive measurements
2. Applicable Documents
of the same reference.
2.1 USBR Procedures:
USBR 1000 Standards for Linear Measurement Devices 6. Apparatus
USBR 3900 Standard Definitions of Terms and Symbols
6.1 Dial Indicator.-A dial indicator used for standard
Relating to Soil Mechanics
laboratory or field applications.
2.2 ASME Standard:
6.2 Method A -- Precision Gauge Block Calibration:
ANSI B89.1.10 Dial Indicators (for Linear Measurement)
6.2.1 PrecisionGauge Blocks (fig. la).-A set of steel
2.3 Federal Specification:
gauge blocks (inch-pound or metric), usually rectangular,
GGG-G-15C Gage Blocks and Accessories
meeting the requirements of Federal Specifications GGG-
G-15C and those requirements identified in USBR 1000
3. Summary of Method
forprecision gauge blocks. A gauge block set should contain
3.1 Comparison readings between a dial indicator and sizes (or combination of sizes) necessary to satisfactorily
perform the calibration procedure as outlined in
either precision gauge blocks (method A) or a micrometer
paragraph 10.
fixture (method B) are used to determine the accuracy,
repeatability, and hysteresis of the dial indicator. The results 6.2.2 Dial Indicator Comparator Stand (fig. lb).-A
are used to evaluate the acceptability of dial indicators for stand consisting of a base; ground to a guaranteed flatness
laboratory and field use. and warp-free stability; a support column and an adjustable
arm onto which the dial indicator can be securely attached.
4. Significance and Use 6.3 Method B- Micrometer Fixture Calibration:
6.3.1 Micrometer Fixture (fig. 2a).-A precision
instrument capable of obtaining comparison readings over
4.1 Accurate ,linear measurements are required to
the full range of the dial indicator. The spindle must be
obtain proper data for laboratory and field use.
4.2 Calibrate dial indicators when purchased and nonrotating and spring loaded. The micrometer fixture
annually thereafter. is to be calibrated annually by the manufacturer.
6.3.2 Magnetic Base Dial Indicator Holder (fig. 2b).-
5. Terminology A magnetic base with a solid upright post adapted with
a swivel snug, gauge rod, and dial indicator clamp with
fine adjustment capabilities.
5.1 Definitions are in accordancewith USBR 3900.
5.2 Terms not included in USBR 3900 specific to this
7. Precautions
designation are:
5.2.1 Accuracy.-The degree to which displayed dial 7.1 Safety Precautions.-The dial indicator case, stem,
indicator readings vary from known spindle displacements. spindle, and contact point are to be examined for burrs
5.2.2 Graduation.-The least measured value which and sharp edges.
is marked on the dial indicator face. 7.2 Technical Precaution.
5.2.3 Hysteresis.-The difference in displayed dial 7.2.1 The dial face is to be examined for clarity of
indicator readings at any particular spindle displacement graduations.
776
USBR Hff)'7
i
I
"'""' i
lr'igtHt I IlicJi ili,:l:i,, m:,l: ,:zJJibrsticHi L,:i'i;ipll'i,L'il;:: ', ]:liet l:,, =.d ,
81 Verii:.v tl-],at gmge M, li,L,,::ks. LSe..d for c,b-aJq, ing <!li]
indica,,r cc,n:-q-:,ariis,:>n re>diiiLgs ,:]i-i, cilq.c.)cll A'J are cN:e.n, dy
7.2:2 Th, v di:l in.diicrt,,,r i,. c,:, bee eet:=,la,c:ed i d,ere ca]ik:,rtteed i:n aco::,d;nce widJ USBR 1@:)(: f d-e .gaLge
ils <Jriy e.videl:lcee ,af b, in,:.;lJlng i, ewiisiNig ',A.hielr, ti-Je spind{e k:IIC'IiC:: iC:IJbiratJl:}' iSi n4:I,{ the c:iHbratq,:Hl
(Ttlirei'J[: ]7:l, erill:]lr'rrJ
is pLishe,.] inv,,, i-h,e aeclin t:,,et,,:)re u, silq, g llle: gauge N,c>,::ks for d',i< F,r,:cedtlre:.
723 Extreme t;;INtiOn iTS. {.i:) ['J, tJ liS.eed vct"ierJ iirJ':i.L.:irik:,ni; 8"7 ',.i'eriCy th,i the lqi],i,c>;k,]:Nete]: t:iX:tLre: has ,oerl
Ci [ ] 121 . F k i 1-] g t ) !] i{ ]: (} ] ] { i I 1 ] t% ee r <l ,{ :, ] {+ } ]1 c {I i a ] i ]!l d i (2t {c, { i a p. re v e n cl:irelq,]y c:a]J:t,,'a{e.d k,.:!, N-Je i:lailuf>lc{Lrer ]7 lk, ee ,..x]liibrad,,,*
ime.*:fere:n, ce wicl ,:q-,.emfi,:m ,:st ielik,,ilJt), ,,:,f N-Je dJa] is; r,L,t ,:rrenc, pc:-<:,,rm ]e' caiJk,.;:R:,n b,c:,re si:ng l,e
i! n,:ti c a t<a r, i:n Jicr,c, nq, eter l:Jxtti re ,: lmiell,:J V, :;, for d-ais pr.,:)ccd e.
77'7
USBR 1007
778
USBR 1007
7.2349 (546)
Bureau of Reclamation DIAL INDICATOR CALIBRATION SHEET Dauon USeR 1oo7._8_9
TRIAL REFERENCE DIAL DIFFER- TRIAL REFERENCE DIAL HYSTER- BASE RETRACTED RETURN REPEAT-
NO. STANDARD INDICATOF ENCE NO. STANDARD INDICATOR ESIS DIAL READING READING ABILITY
LENGTH READINGS (2)-(3) LENGTH READING (3) - (7) READING
(1) (2) (31 (4) (5) (6) (?) (8) (9) (10) (11) (9) - (11)
3 0.050 0.050 0.000 87 O. 050 O. 050 O. 000 0.000 0.050 0.000 0.000
5 0.100 0.100 0.000 85 O. I00 0. I00 0.000 0.000 0.050 0.000 0.000
9 0.200 0.200 0.000 81 0.200 0. 199 0.001 0.000 0.250 0.000 0.000
GPO 850--947
779
USBR 1007
FigL]rC 5 Dial indiicc<,w caliL:,rai,,,J: ,s;e]mbly {:nedm,:,,,J B :, (a):magnt:i,L h,,;c dlbl iindkmr
h,,Id(< ', f::,),:lb] indicacc, r., m:d ,:,:, n:,i,:r,>rr,_re r head.
12:.] Table ] shows ma::immT], a]k:,v,,bb,de,',iat]i,,n rJd 13. 1 The re:.F,,:rt is t:o consist .c,f a o :m-p]le:ed and checked
is t,,:, be used c,, eva]uae ]le, :Jccepab]liiy ,:ff the diial " 1_',1 i a ]1 I n d i c a ',: r C a I i b r a t i, I, n, S h e e t '' ( f ]i g % ),. T h, i s, i n f,L)r m a tic,, n
is _:,. be filed whh tie ]al:,,c:,at,:>ry equiipment ca]ibrmic;,n
]2.1!: D: ,de'viaG:)n of he. diia]! indlicac,,r exceeds d:,e ]lhniis C,:3, DJ S,
l]isted m, :ab]le ] t:or re.pern:bJilgy, hysteresis, (:,r accurac3<,. 1!:,.2 All ca]l.c:,L]lati{,,n,s; ;{re:. to sk,,:.v,, a chec:kmak.
78.0
USBR 1007
Accurat7
Smallest Repeatability Hysteresis First 2-1/3 First 10 First 20*
graduation revolutions revolutions revolutions
inch mm
781
o '% uNITED STA ESBUREAU
DEPARTMENT OF
OF RECLAMATION ,NTER,OR
USBR 1008-89
PROCEDURE FOR
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 1008. The number immediately
following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
1. Scope one end of the total linear range; i.e., one-half of the total
linear range.
1.1 This designation outlines the procedure for cali- 5.2.4 Range.-Total distance traveled by the core
brating LVDTs (linear variable differential transformers). expressed in terms of percent plus or minus full-scale
1.2 Method A outlines the calibration procedure using displacement.
precision gauge blocks; method B outlines the calibration 5.2.5 Repeatability.-Thedegree of LVDT measure-
procedure incorporating a micrometer fixture. ment variation for successive measurements of the same
reference standard.
2. Applicable Documents 5.2.6 Linearity.-Thevariation of LVDT measure-
2.1 USBR Procedure: ments from a straight line. The measurements are obtained
USBR 1000 Standards for LinearMeasurementDevices using a series of reference standards applied over the total:
linear range of the LVDT.
USBR 3900 Standard Definitions of Terms and Symbols
Relating to Soil Mechanics 5.2.7 Percent Error.-The ratio (expressed as a per-
cent) of (1) the difference between an LVDT measure-
2.2. FederalSpecification:
ment of a reference standard and the actual length of the
GGG-G-15C Gage Blocks and Accessories
reference standard to (2) the total linear range of the LVDT.
3. Summary of Method Percent error also may be determined over a fraction of
the total linear range.
3.1 Readingsfrom an LVDT and from either the pre- 5.2.8 VoltageError.-The difference in LVDT voltage
cision gauge blocks (method A) or the micrometer fix- output for successive measurements of the same reference
ture (method B) are compared to determine the linearity standard.
and repeatability of the LVDT. The results are used to "t"
determine the acceptability of the LVDT for laboratory use. VOLTAGE OUTPUT
, /
CORE DISPLA=CEMENT II
5. Terminology (see fig.l) CORE DISPLACEMENT
! /"
I
position of maximum voltage output at one end of the TOTAL UNEAR DISPLACEkENT
782
t, SBR
" i, 1008
,: a :, k v I T ,core/c ,re. e'ee'r s IIL:I] rod assemk,,l F a I. t:ef],:n guide, bl N,:, l.ii-4O I LIN F hre>:l:ed
Sl['te l`}l , 7) I LVL)'Tl COl-e ex:lensiOlql [-iod, d) Iocc IqlJl{, and e:; LVDT ClE:l]'e.
i, (i
i
I
7:!;
USBR 10,1}8
J'. Precautior, s
FigL,rV ", ]L'vq)T' 'i:7],Lil:rl,/,ulr;il,i,r sl;lri,:l and LVDT
I:ilc),iil:ll:ii, bll,i, ck (l:t/rhii, ct A) a) ,Lli]?,]->(I,l[
7 IlL 5)+#'C' t"7"';!uM vsi's: c<,luir!,n :,) ;,,liu'luble urm, c:, LVI'J,T bu,,d 7
7 ]. 1! T'hie. LV[)T bc,,3y sk,,:,uld be ><Jiq!]inc.d ,:lr ]:-:lurlrs d) ] V])'] ITIG, III:'I'ilT, L l)l,.Kk:, ,LI I 'i'l"] r' ,,.liFt_ l:,i:[LII
78i
USBR t @1}8;
ir v,ehicl- they are to, be. cal!ih,,LJed f:,,r at lease h.,:urs 1081. ] A.'cta,L]i the ].VI2i, T i]lci, u[K[ng; bh_:,ck {::o t:he
pz]i,/,r to c:atibrati,:m, adjt,s;l:nble arm .,:)f t}q,e c,,l,l-tlF,,;tral:,l,r stand as sl-io, wn o.n
tigre 3
]LO,, Procedure ]():S. 1.2: S]ide the IA,IL)T core and o:re e.:::tersic:,e
rod assemlDI 7 imx,, the LVI)T bod,.i,
]01 A]IL Ulaa are: t,:a be reccrde.d ,:,,n he "Lineg, r V'ahb[e 108.1.3 P]iace the IVDT l>0dy into d-,e LVDT
D,i{fe'en, qal T'ransfc, rn-Jer Caibrati,:lrJ," f,0,r'm as shown on m<:,.unting 'bl,:ck and tJTg.]cen the aF, p.,,i::,riace' screw ,s.n he
fiigtii re 5, irl<,undn; b.ll.,xk (D() N( YI-' <:,ver[g;hten the s.,crew ,:)rl tl-le.
]02 tqLe:,<:,>rcl type llqid se:.ria] nmnbe ,ff zhe LVI_),T (:,. m<l.uming blc, ct,:::, Ibis can cl, eforn-i the UVDT bc, dy )
be ,calibnlced; if: i7 has n,: i,er{al number, record the model 108.1..qi Apply v,:lhage to. the I_X.ZDT t-h:isure t1iat
number and amy c:,he ideniify{ng markin, gs. the lir, e v,;Atage: is c<mrpadble with he' p.,:rw.'e requiemenis,
103 Record. the tor_al linear rarL_a;e ,:if: the LV'D,T c,,: @J,C signa]i c,tmdAtic,,n, er }Ttefer t,n the mam, ufactu'e.'s
104 lqLe.cord tle type and serial number c,f the rePerence: c, per'a*ng instruc:ri,:_ms For v.,:Atage requiiremenes.
standard used. ],i3.,vl. ] S Place .galutg< b,l,:ck (o.u se.ries ;,f L,,l!t,,c:ks)
]05 Attach th, e cable fro.m {:h,e LVDT co the: si;gl-a]l '<,.'}71id-i lilaS, al height e.qulad ,: ,s, nc-ha]: the eota]l linear rallge
,c,:)l-Jd Jil:i,one: ;l al-d attuc]-J the:, ,a,,bJc :z',,:>m d-,e signal O:)l-Jid]it i,olle; ,:ff d-e 1.VI)T ulnde ,he LV[),T ,c,=e. exen..iic,,n to, d; iie
,mpin t,0, the read,c,,Lt equipl:nent. PJlug [n the read!out ::, ii[. LVDT hanqng a 2-inch ,:i 5il]',LL mm) <:,,:al linear range,
equipment c,c,, s r:,,.we s,urc:e rsd. ai]o.w a X]llirliTXYJlC.lIil 3[}" a ]-inch, (25.4-mm)gauge bh:,ck is used.
H-J, i ]-]11.]l " e vearllltp i I{),II({, Us[l-l; t]nie ;,djiustal:4e lrni,, adjust the
licit_51 Slide an L.VDT Tefl,:r g:uJide, c:,mit<;:i, ewc}-i end ,;:if L.VI)T bodl)' 'a[:, ,:r .dc, wn c:,n lqe' c:,:m:lparat,r s;:n,:/ SLIpp('.,r:
else LVlT)T core as shown on figure 2a. c:,:>l u, mn :s; necess.ar]i s,,:, [h,e OLlt ls, Llt C,[: []:IC rE:;/,d,;*tll' equipmen
]()7 Attach the LVDT ,oo, re extensii.on rc, d t,s. the end is appr,::aximate.ly e,qua] t,,:, ()v,:Ac.
,,,f the LVDT c,,:,re by scve, v,.Ang he' L\/DT core e::,A:erJ, Sic, ri ]i I:).I$ L7 SCt. Lilrc tilt_' ,td]ckiEIb]e 8I'11, ,:L)II the SlILiIpILI+I'
rod into the th, re.ade.d L)JDT core ,,.,;)]LIIF]Pi Llf []le ,L,:mparail,:,r ilta/]lld ilr] lhc p< x.s h" i,: :m described
78S
USBR 1008
in subparagraph 10.8.1.6, by tightening the screw of the 10.8.3.3 Record the gauge block(s) height in
adjustable arm. column 1 and the corresponding output of the LVDT
10.8.1.8 Use the ZERO adjustment on the signal readout equipment in column 2 as shown on figure 5.
conditioner to obtain a reading of exactly 0.000 volt.This 10.8.3.4 Continue to displace the LVDT core at
is the null position of the LVDT. the selected increments until it has been displaced through
its total linear range.
NOTE 1.-Adjustment of the signal conditioner may vary. 10.8.3.5 Record the gauge block(s) height and the
slightly depending on the type of signal conditioner used. Refer corresponding output of the LVDT readout equipment at
to the manufacturer's operating instructions for adjustment of
each displacement increment as shown on figure 5.
the specific signal conditioner used.
10.8.3.6 Calculate and record values of percent of
10.8.2 Signal Conditioner Span Setting (LVDT factor TLR and percent error for each displacement increment
determination): as shown on figure 5.
10.8.2.1 Remove the gauge block (or series of 10.8.3.7 Check the linearity of the LvDT in
blocks) from beneath the LVDT core extension rod. accordancewith provisions in subparagraph 12.1.
10.8.2.2 Place a gauge block (or series of blocks) 10.8.4 Repeatability of the L VDT.
which has a height equal to the total linear range of the 10.8.4.1 Remove the gauge block(s) frombeneath
LVDT (as recorded in subpar. 10.3) under the core the LVDT core extension rod.
extension rod; i.e., for an LVDT with a 2-inch (50.8-mm) 10.8.4.2 Repeat subparagraphs 10.8.3.2 through
total linear range, a 2-inch gauge block is used. 10.8.3.5 using the same displacement increments (gauge
10.8.2.3 Adjust the signal conditioner, using the blocks) selected in subparagraph 10.8.3.1.
GAIN control screw, so that the output of the LVDT is 10.8.4.3 Calculate and record the voltage error at
equal to +10.000 volts d.c. (Polarity depends on the wiring each corresponding displacement increment as shown on
of the LVDT.) figure 5.
10.8.4.4 Check repeatability of the LVDT in
NOTE 2.-For convenience, subparagraph 10.8.2.3 specifies a accordance with provisions in subparagraph 12.2.
setting of 10.000 volts d.c. for the LVDT output at full-scale 10.9 Method B--Micrometer Fixture Calibration:
displacement. Other values of output at full LVDT displacement 10.9.1 Secure the LVDT body into the chuck of the
may be used, if desired. micrometer fixture as shown on figure 4. (DO NOT
overtighten the chuck around the LVDT body.)
10.8.2.4 Remove the gauge block (or series of 10.9.2 Slide the LVDT c0re with the Teflon guides
gauge blocks) from beneath the core extension rod and and core extension rod assembly into the LVDT body.
replace it with a gauge block (or series of gauge blocks) 10.9.3 Attach the LVDT core extension rod to the
having a height equal to one-half the total linear range spindle of the micrometer head carrier using an appropriate
of the LVDT. The readout should indicate 0.000 volt; if' 'attachment assembly as shown on figure4.
it does not, reset by adjusting the ZERO adjustment. 10.9.4 Applyvoltage to the LVDT. Ensure that the
10.8.2.5 Repeat subparagraphs 10.8.2.2 through line voltage is compatible with the power requirements
10.8.2.4 until values of 0.000 and +10.000 (see note 2) of the signal conditioner. Refer to the manufacturer's
volts are obtained. operating instructions for voltage requirements.
10.8.2)6 Record the value of LVDT output at full- 10.9.5 Ensure that the signal conditioner has had
scale displacement -+-10.000 volts (see note 2) as "LVDT a minimum 30-minute warmup time.
output 1" as shown on figure 5. 10.9.6 NullPositionofLVDT'.
10.8.2.7 Remove the gauge block (or series of 10.9.6.1 Turn the GAIN control of the signal
gauge blocks) from beneath the LVDT core extension rod conditioner (see note 1) to the minimum gain setting.
and allow the LVDT core extension rod to rest on the 10.9.6.2 Adjust the ZERO control of the signal
comparator stand base. conditioner to achieve an output of zero volt.
10.8.2.8 Record the LVDT output obtained as 10.9.6.3 Turn GAIN control to approximately the
"LVDT output 2" as shown on figure 5. midpoint position.
10.8.2.9 Calculate and record the LVDT output 10.9.6.4 Remove the LVDT core by sliding the
change and the "LVDT factor"as shown on figure 5. micrometer head carrier along the bed of the micrometer
10.8.3 Linearity of the LVDT: fixture until the output is approximately 0 volt. Tighten
10.8.3.1 Select appropriate displacement incre- the micrometer head carrier to the bed of the micrometer
ments (gauge blocks) to displace the LVDT core through fixture.
its total linear range. It is recommended that the gauge 10.9.6.5 Rotate the micrometer head to achieve
blocks be selected such that a minimum of four readings-- a reading of exactly 0.000 volt. This is the null position
equally spaced throughout the LVDT total linear range-- of the LVDT.
are used. 10.9.7 Signal Conditioner Span Setting (LVDT factor
10.8.3.2 Raise the LVDT core extension rod, and determination):
place the appropriate gauge block(s) on the comparator 10.9.7.1 Reset the electronic digital micrometer
stand base beneath the LVDT core extension rod. to read 0.000.
786
USBR 1008
10.9.7.2 Rotate the micrometer head until the 10.9.9.3 Calculate and record the voltage error at
LVDT core has been displaced a distance equal to one- each corresponding displacement increment as shown on
half the total linear range of the LVDT; i.e. for an LVDT figure 5.
having a 2-inch (50.8-mm) total linear range, the digital 10.9.9.4 Check repeatability of the LVDT in
micrometer should read +1.000 inch (25.4 mm). Record accordancewith provisions in subparagraph 12.2.
the value of LVDT output achieved as "LVDT output 1."
10.9.7.3 Adjust the signal conditioner, using the 11. Calculations
GAIN control screw, so the output of the LVDT readout
equipment is equal to 10.000 volts d.c. (see note 2). 11.1 Calculations are as shown on the "Linear Vari-
Polarity depends on the wiring of the LVDT. able Differential Transformer Calibration" form. (fig. 5).
10.9.7.4 Rotate the micrometer head in the
opposite direction until the electronic digital micrometer 12. Interpretation of Results
reads 0.000 volt. The readout equipment should indicate
0.000 volt; if it does not, reset by adjusting the ZERO 12.1 Linearit.-Table 1 is to be used for evaluation of
adjustment. LVDT linearity.
10.9.7.5 Repeat subparagraphs 10.9.7.2 through 12.1.2 If percent error, at the listed percent of total
10.9.7.4 until values of 0.000 and +10.000 volts (see note linear range, exceeds the amount listed in table I the LVDT
2) are obtained. should be rejected.
10.9.7.6 Rotate the micrometer head until the 12.2 Repeatability.-The voltage error should not
electronic digital micrometer indicates the LVDT has been exceed +0.05 volt at any displacement. If the voltage error
displaced a distance equal to one-half the total linear range (col. 8, fig. 5) exceeds +0.05 volt, the LVDT should be
of the LVDT. (This is to be equal displacement but opposite rejected.
direction as that achieved in subpar. 10.9.7.2.)
10.9.7.7 Record the LVDT output obtained as 13. Report
"LVDT output 2."
10.9.7.8 Calculate and record the LVDT output 13.1 The report is to consist of a completed and checked
change and the "LVDT factor." "Linear Variable Differential Transformer Calibration"
10.9.8 Linearity ofthe LVDT'. form (fig. 5).
10.9.8.1 Select appropriate displacement incre- 13.2 All calculations are to show a checkmark.
ments to displace the LVDT core through its total linear
14. Background Reference
range. It is recommended that the displacement increments
be selected such that a minimum of four readings--equally
.spaced throughout the LVDT range--are used. "Handbook of Measurementand Control," Handbook HB-
10.9.,.8.2 Rotate the micrometer head until the 76, copyright 1976 by Schaevitz Engineering, Pennsauken,
electronic digital micrometer output corresponds to the NJ, Library of Congress Catalog No. 76-24971.
desired displacement increment.
10.9.8.3 Read and record the digital micrometer Table 1. - LVDT percent error tolerances.
output and corresponding LVDT output voltage. Total Range, Allowable percent error
10.9.8.4 Continue to displace the LVDT by
linear plus or minus over indicated percent
rotating the micr6meter head to the selected increments
range of total linear range, %
until ihe LVDT core has been displaced through its total
in mm in mm 50 75 100
linear range.
10.9.8.5 Record the LVDT displacement as 0.10 2.5 0.050 1.25 0.10 0.25 2.00
indicated by the digital micrometer and the corresponding 0.20 5 0.100 2.5 .10 .25 2.00
voltage output at each displacement increment. 0.40 10 0.200 5.0 .10 .25 2.00
10.9.8.6 Calculate and record values of percent of 0.60 15 0.300 7.5 .10 .25 2.00
TLR and percent error for each displacement increment. 0.80 20 0.400 10 . .15 .25 2.00
10.9.8.7 Check the linearity of the LVDT in 1.00 25 0.500 12.5 .15 .25 2.00
accordance with provisions of subparagraph 12.1. 2.00 50 1.000 25 .25 .25 2.00
10.9.9 Repeatability ofthe LVDT: 4.00 100 2.000 50 .25 .25 2.00
10.9.9.1 Rotate the micrometer head until the 6.00 150 3.000 75 .15 .25 2.00
digital micrometer reads 0.000 volt. 8.00 200 4.000 100 .15 .25 2.00
10.9.9.2 Repeat subparagraphs 10.9.8.2 through 10.00 250 5.000 125 .15 .25 2.00
10.9.8.5 using the same displacement increments selected 20.00 500 10.000 250 .15 .25 2.00
in subparagraph 10.9.8.1.
787
USBR 1008
LI N EAR ITY
TRIAL REFERENCE PERCENT LVDT CHANGE IN LVDT PERCENT ERROR
NO. STANDARD OF OUTPUT LVDT OUTPUT MEASUREMENT (5) = (a
1 4 x 100
LENGTH TLR (VOLTS (3) = (2) - (C) (4) = (3) X (e)
[] in [7 mm (%) (VOLTS) [] in I--] mm
I 0 0 -9.978 0 0 0
R EPEATABILITY
788
: , UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
- BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 1010. The number immediately
following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
789
USBR IOKI,
E LEVAT I OIWI
?"!;0
USBR 1010
8.2 Technical Precautions.-Examine the measure to 11.5 Determination ofMeasure Volume by the Linear-
ensure that it has a smooth finish on the inside and top Measurement Method:
surfaces. Rough machining could produce ridges or gouges 11.5.1 Using the inside micrometer, determine the
which affect volume measurements. inside diameter of the measure. Make three measurements
of the diameter; one near the top of the mold, one near
9. Calibration and Standardization the midheight, and one near the bottom. These measure-
ments should be spaced equally around the circumference
9.1 Verify that equipment is currently calibrated in of the mold. Record these values to the nearest 0.001 inch
accordancewith the applicablecalibration procedure. If the (0.02 ram).
calibration is not current, perform the calibration before 11.5.2 Using the depth micrometer, determine the
Using the equiIment for this procedure. inside height of the measure. Make three measurements
USBR 1000 Standards for Linear Measurement Devices of the inside height equally spaced around the circumference
USBR 1007 Calibrating Dial Indicators of the mold. Record these values to the nearest 0.001 inch
USBR 1012 Calibrating Balances or Scales (0.02 mm).
11.5.3 Calculate the average inside diameter and
10. Conditioning average inside height of the measure. Record these values
to the nearest 0.001 inch (0.02 mm).
10.1 Perform this calibration in an area isolated from 11.5.4 Calculate and record the volume of the
-measure to the nearest 0.0001 ft3 (1 cm3).
drafts and/or extreme temperature fluctuations.
11.5.5 Calculate and record the volume per unit
10.2 The measure, measurement equipment, water, and
height of the measure to the nearest 0.00001 ft3/in (0.01
laboratory environment must all be at about the same
temperature while performing this procedure. cm3/mm) as shown on figure 3.
11.6 The volumes calculated from the two methods
must be within 0.0005 ft3 for the 0.1-fO measure and within.
11. Procedure 0.0025 ft for the 0.5-ft3 measure.
11.1 All data are to be recorded on the "Unit Weight 11.6.1 If the two volumes are not within the above
limit, check all calculations and verify that all equipment
Measure Calibration" form as shown on figure 3.
11.2 Record the nominal volume, identification is performing correctly, that all calibrations are correct,
and that the procedures and techniques used are correct.
number, and type of measure.
If problems are not discovered, then repeat subparagraphs
11.3 Determine the volume of the measure using the
11.3 through 11.6. If the values are still inconsistent, then
.water-filling method as described in subparagraph 11.4 and
then use the linear-measurement method as described in failureto obtain agreement is an indication that the measure
is badly worn or deformed and must be replaced.
subparagraph 11.5. Compare the results for acceptability
11.7 Compare the volumes with previously determined
in accordancewith subparagraph 11.6.
11.4 Determination of Measure Volume by the Water- values to verify that they are consistent and reasonable.
FillingMethod: If they are not, go to subparagraph 11.6.1.
11.8 Determination of ReferenceBracket Reading:
11.4.1 Lightly grease the top of the measure; be
11.8.1 Place the dial indicator in the dial indicator
careful not to get grease on the inside of the measure.
reference bracket and record the dial indicator reading on.
Determine and record the mass of the measure and the
the calibration form and in a conspicuous location on the
glass or plastic plate using a scale of appropriate capacity
reference bracket. If a spacer ring is used, the dial indicator
to the nearest 0.01 Ibm.
reading with the spacer ring also should be determined
11.4.2 Place the measure on a firm, level surface
and fill the measure slightly above its rim with water. and posted.
11.4.3 Slide the glass or plastic plate over the top
surface of the measure so the measure remains completely NOTE 1.-The reference bracket reading is used as a check
of the dial indicator to ensure consistent dial indicator readings.
filled with water and no air bubbles are entrapped. A bulb
The reference bracket reading should be checked before using
syringe may be useful to add or remove water as the plate the dial indicator. If reference bracket readings are inconsistent,
is sliding into place. the dial indicator should be recalibrated prior to its use.
11.4.4 Completely dry excess water from the outside
of the measure and plate. 11.9 Determination of Reference Dial Reading,
11.4.5 Determine and record the mass of the Constant:.
measure, glass, or plastic plate, and water to the nearest 11.9.1 With an outside micrometer, measure the
0.01 Ibm. thickness of the calibration bar at a point approximately
11.4.6 Remove the plate. Determine and record the 1 inch (25 mm) from one end. Mark the point measured
temperature of the water to the nearest 0.5 C. and record the bar thickness on the calibration form. The
11.4.7 Determine and record the absolute density of point measured is the point of contact of the dial gauge
water from table 1. indicator on the calibration bar.
11.4.8 Calculate and record the volume of the 11.9.2 Place the calibration bar across the top of the
measure to the nearest 0.0001 ft3 (1 cm 0. measure along the axis of the guide brackets (fig. 4). The
791
USBR 1010
7-1708 (9-86)
Bureau of Reclamation
I
UNIT WEIGHT MEASURE CALIBRATION
I
I DesignationUSBR 1010-_8_9
I
MEASURE NO. [NOMINAL " ] O,AL ,ND,CATOR NO. D,._,.
I VOLUME 0.1 rk"l. 3 D cms
CALIBRATION PERFORMED BY DATE I COMPUTED BY DATE [ CHECKED BY DATE
1.639
Dial indicatorreadings,left side .....................................
1.639
1.639
1.636
rightside ....................................
1.635
1.635
0.508
Surcharge base plate thickness ............... .......................
0.508
0.513
0.5l 3
792
USBR 1010
0 ().5'9'!)841 847 854 86(I 86.,:!i, 872 878. 88d 185' 8!i:t5
] ,9(t(1, 905 909 914 918 923. 927 '930 !.,a'3zi !;:'5.8
) 9;i1! 994 947 9'5.0 953. 955 958 !!;t(gCl. 9'(i2 954
3 :'<:;5 9(;7 %8 9'6'9 970, '>71 '.)72 !972:,0'73 5;'73
4 97% 9'73 973 !)'7'2: 972:972 970 9't'{9 ,;;,(i8 {9<;0,
% ,)<;5 .a'63 9(;il 9'59 957 935 952: 9'.%CI <'47 c,44
,: !;;'S I !a'5,8 935, 9'31 927 '924 92CI, 51,]16 9111 !l,,l::a7
7 ,;;,(12 :,98 8;9'3 8.8,;S 883. 877 872: 8.,5E !;:'.1[ 8.55
8 81;{5) 143 83,7 830 824 8] ' 810. 8:,1113 79(i, 78 c)
' 71 7'7i ?4;,5 75,8 751. 7'4_7:7'34 72(}i 7'1.7 70 c)
1.9 700 ,:,'!)1 i.82 _573. 5<:i.4 654 .,5.'i5 (;35 ,:125 (115
1] (;(}5 i,!)5 %8"i 574 5(,4 553 ,42 531 520 509
12 .ii98 '86 475 4,:53 451 43';:' 42 ' 415 {02 3<10,
13 377 3,(51 352 33.!i) 32,5, 31_7!: 29!> 2:85 2:72 258
1" 24.* -;:30 21(3 202:188 ]!73 159' 144 12:cl ' 114
2(] 2!:(,3 18% ](;2 14] 120 (:,9,3:' (178, 0i6 0.55 013
.7,111 0.9979,)'2 970 c:,4g 926 904 882: S6qZl, :837' {1115 >92
2:2 770 747 72:4 7(I,]1 d.78 (-55 .1532 ,15(]{a; 585 5,5][
23 5:!i8 ".,i4 490, d(!;( 44-7:418 394 3(i!;,' 345 32:(1,
-7:{ 2:c*({, 2711 24d. 2:2:] I9',{; ]?1 ]46 120 (I.95 0,59'
2:, (].4i 01.8 '5'{3:'2:*96,7 "941 *9']d "8!;88 '8,152 *83,{{ *8.{:c)
2(5 0.!;<;l',ST,'!;:.:. 756 72!) 705. riP'(i, ,54,;:' ,l!i2] i.'94 5d7 540.
2:7 5]2 185 457 429 401 373. 345 .-%37 _7!:853' 251. 'ligTll"! 4 [)eterrnir]lI[,n ,:ll{ re/e'rerce lalia, rela,J]ir;g ,Cl::lrtSt0ant
2.:8 2:32 2!(tq 175 147 118 ()8 c:, ,0I-;O 031 002"9'75,.
2'9 0.!;,.';,'59d4 '91q 88;.5 855 82:,:!; 796 7<56 :'3{5 ,'l:)5; 67(5.
11.9. 7 Calculate and rec, ard fhe L{'l,e:la;:e dlia]l indlica-Cl:C
30 ,:;1.4<, ,l'.,:16. 58(g 5.,5 52:5 49 4(:,4 433 02 37]
reading:,
I For ]nch-p.,_,lnd .pplii.cat i,::,*sb, rT,:uhi]I-:,]y the vanes in, bis ah.le Ih,y 1:!,2:4:21i.0
,(ti1,[]\'(!]'[ {'(1 ]l,F]l/'i[' 11.10'.] With an outs, Jide mlicr,cln-leter, measure 0e
* -;'iirq.e Clree sign, ifi<J nt liig:'ues sil-<awn ir-i ]ir)e below. hickne, s,s o} he: surcharge basep]la:e a f,c>u equlal]y spac:ed:
poiins around the: pe, riimerer appro>cimately ]/2 iln,ch
m, easurec] e'rM ::,t: the ca]h,,rat]c,,n b,ar s,h, ould be f]nsh with
(i][3, turn:l, from the edlge. Record the values tx, t[*e ceares:
d-e ,,auger edg;e of the top ,a,f he measure,
().001 ir*c:h (ell 1(]12 l-ln:]':l.
]I.93 {nser the dial gauge as, sembly ir he guide
11.102 De{ermine. and re.c,:rdl tee average hlas.eF:,late
bracket c,,n the measure keepiln, g the dial c2;auge' stem on,
zhiic:krmss to the n,e.aresr 0.001 in, ch {002 mini:,.
c,p .of dr, e calJlbration bar an,'] on the. axis ,af the guide
11.1()3 C:lculae and r'e'c,rd rl:-e s.p, eciscler heJighw a
brackets, as shown c,,n fig;are 4. The dial gauge assembly zerc:, dial
s.hcaJd be placed sxcl- that nnatchmarks on rlqe guide.
brack:ets and assen-by are: ahigned arm rl-e tip c,, the dial
12Ill Cak:ulatio, ns
gauge is o,n, he mark .or, the call]br'ati<,,n: bar' Rec:(rd :he
dial iln, di!ca>:3r re:'ad:in, g ,a the nearest 000] ]inch (0.02: ram)
]1 lg'4 Reltn, ove he. dia]l gauge asse:.n-Ny f>:m the.
Measare Ca]libration f'CIr]i]']l (fig: lI ).
m, easure.
I '
.pp,:}sie gauge I::,rack:e: ie, accordarace witb subparag;alc:,hs . . Ulit '%"eight- N}ieasure (ht]ibath:lnl:" {o.nl i :[g. 31::'.
][3..2: AH calc:uh,illnS a,re t,: s.]:,:,l,,' a ch, eckmarh:
7 I'} .2:l
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 1011-89
PROCEDURE FOR
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 1011. The number immediately"
following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
794
USBR 1011
6.4 Inside Micrometer.-For inch-pouncl applications, /then use the linear-measurement method as described in
an inside micrometer having a measuring range of 2 to subparagraph 11.5. Compare the results for acceptability
12 inches, readable to at least 0.001 inch. For SI applications, in accordance with subparagraph 11.6.
an inside micrometer having a measuring range of 50 to 11.3.1 If the shape of the measure is such that the
300 mm, readable to at least 0.02 mm. linear-measurementmethod is not practical, perfor m the
6.5 Gauge Blocks.-A set of precision gauge blocksthat water-filling method twice and compare the results for
may be used to extend the measuring range of the depth acceptability in accordance with subparagraph 11.8.
micrometer if necessary. 11.4 Determination of Measure Volume- Water-
6.6 Thermometer.-O to 50 C, 0.5 C divisions, FillingMethod:
conforming to the requirements of ASTM E 1. 11.4.1 Lightly grease the top of the measure; be
6.7 Plasticot Glass Plate.-One plastic or glass plate, careful not to get grease on the inside of the measure.
about 12 by 12 inches by 1/4-inch thick (300 by 300 by Determine and record the mass of the measure and plastic
6-ram). or glass plate to the nearest 0.01 Ibm (either 1 or 10 g,
6.8 Stopcock grease or similar sealant. as appropriate).
6.9 Miscellaneous Equipment.-Bulb syringe and 11.4.2 Place the measure on a firm, level surface
towels. and fill the measure slightly above its rim with water.
11.4.3 Slide the glass or plastic plate over the top
7. Reagents and Materials surface of the measure so that it remains completely filled
with water and no air bubbles are entrapped. A bulb syringe
7.1 Tapwater near room temperature (20 C) should may be useful to add or remove water.
be used for calibrating the measure. 11.4.4 Completely dry any excess water from the
outside of the measure and plate.
8. Precautions 11.4.5 Determine and record the mass of the
measure, glass or plastic plate, and water to the nearest
8.1 Safety Ptecautionw. 0.01 Ibm (either 1 or 10 g, as appropriate).
8.1.1 This designation may involve hazardous 11.4.6 Calculate the mass of water used to fill the
materials, operations, and equipment. measure.
8.1.2 Examine the measure for sharp edges or burrs.. 11.4.7 Remove the plate. Determine and record the
8.2 Technical Ptecautions.-Examinethe measure to temperature of the water to the nearest 0.5 C.
ensure that it has a smooth finish on the inside and top 11.4.8 Determine and record the absolute density of
surfaces. Rough machining could produce ridges or gouges water at the measured temperature from table 1.
which affect volume measurements. 11.4.9 Calculate and record the volume of the
measure to the nearest 0.0001 ft3 (1 cm3).
9. Calibration and Standardization 11.4.10 Empty the water from the measure.
11.4.11 Clean and dry the measure thoroughly.
9.1 Verify that equipment is currently calibrated in 11.5 Determination of Measure Volume -- Linear
accordance with the applicable calibration procedure. If the Measurement Method:
calibration is not current, perform the calibration before 11.5.1 Using the inside micrometer caliper, deter-
using the equipment for this procedure. mine the inside diameter of the measure. Make six
USBR 1000 Standards for Linear Measurement Devices measurements of the diameter; three near the top of the
USBR 1012 Calibrating Balances or Scales measure, and three near the bottom. Space the measure-
ments equally around the circumference of the measure
10. Conditioning at each location. Record these values to the nearest 0.001
inch (0.02 mm).
10.1 Perform this calibration in an area isolated from 11.5.2 Using the depth micrometer, determine the
drafts and/or extreme temperature fluctuations. inside height of the measure. Make three measurements
10.2 The measure, measurement equipment, water, and of the inside height equally spaced around the circumference
the laboratory environment must all be at about the same of the mold. Record these values to the nearest 0.001 inch
temperature while performing this procedure. (0.02 mm).
11. Procedure NOTE 1.-If the measuring range of the depth micrometer
is not sufficient, place a gauge block of known height on the
11.1 All data are to be recorded on the "Measure for bottom of the measure and add its height to the measured depth
Calibrated Sand Calibration Sheet" form as shown on of the depth micrometer.
figure 4.
11.2 Record ,the nominal sizes (capacity, diameter, 11.5.3 Calculate the average inside diameter at top
height) and control number along with any other and at bottom of the measure. Record these values to the
identifying markings of the measure to be calibrated. nearest 0.001 inch (0.02 mm).
11.3 Determine the volume of the measure using the 11.5.4 Calculate and record the average inside diam-
water-filling method as described in subparagraph 11.4 and eter of the measure to the nearest 0.001 inch (0.02 mm).
795
USBR 1011
Table 1. - Absolute density of water in grams per cubic centimeter.Y of the measure. If the value of the ratio falls outside the
Degrees 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 limits, go to subparagraph 11.7.
C 11.6.1 Compare the volumes with previously
determined values to see if they are consistent and
0 0.999841 847 854 860 866 872 878 884 889 895 reasonable. If they are, go to paragraph 13. If they are
1 900 905 909 914 918 923 927 930 934 938
2 941 944 947 950 953 955 958 960 962 964 not, go to subparagraph 11.7.
3 965 967 968 969 970 971 972 72 973 973 11.7 Check calculations and verify that all equipment
4 973 973 973 972 972 972 970 969 968 966 is performing correctly, that all calibrations are correct,
c-
and that the procedures and techniques used are correct.
5 965 963 961 959 957 955 952 950 947 944
6 941 938 935 931 927 924 920 916 911 907 Check the measure for out-of-roundness. If problems are
7 902 898 893 888 883 877 872 866 861 855 not discovered, then repeat subparagraphs 11.3 through
8 849 843 837 830 824 817 810 803 796 789 11.6. If the values are still inconsistent, then failure to
9 781 774 766 758 751 742 734 726 717 709 ,obtain agreement between the methods within the limits
10 700 691 682 673 664 654 645 635 625 615 is an indication that the measure is badly worn or deformed
11 605 595 585 574 564 553 542 531 520 509 :and must be replaced.
12 498 486 475 463 451 439 427 415 402 390 11.8 If the water-filling method was performed twice
13 377 364 352 339 326 312 299 285 272 258
14 244 230 216 202 188 173 159 144 129 114 (see subpar. 11.3.1) determine the acceptability of the two
results by dividing either value by the other. If the value
15 099 084 069 054 038 023 007 "991 *975 *959 .of the ratio is between 0.995 and 1.005, inclusive, average
16 0.998943 926 910 893 877 860 843 826 809 792 the two values and use the average as the volume of the
17 774 757 739 722 704 686 668 650 632 613 measure. If the value of the ratio falls outside the limits,
18 595 576 558 539 520 501 482 463 444 424
19 405 385 365 345 325 305 285 265 244 224 .go to subparagraph 11.9.
11.8.1 Compare the value with previously deter-
20 203 183 162 141 120 099 078 056 035 013 mined values to check if it is consistent and reasonable.
21 0.997992 970 948 926 904 882 860 837 815 792 ilf so, go to paragraph 13. If not, go to subparagraph 11.9.
22 770 747 724 701 678 655 632 608 585 561
23 538 514 490 466 442 418 394 369 345 320 11.9 Check calculations and verify that all equipment
24 296 271 246 221 196 171 146 120 095 069 is performing correctly, that all calibrations are correct,
and that the procedures and techniques used are correct.
25 044 018 *992 *967 "941 "914 *888 *862 *836 *809 If problems are not discovered then repeat subparagraphs
26 0.996783 756 729 703 676 649 621 594 567 540 11.3 through 11.4 and subparagraph 11.8. Failure to obtain
27 512 485 457 429 401 373 345 317 289 261
28 232 204 175 147 118 089 060 031 002*973 agreement is an indication of equipment malfunction or
29 0.995944 914 885 855 826 796 766 736 706 676 the procedure has been performed incorrectly.
30 646 616 586 555 525 494 464 433 402 371
* For inch-pound applications,multiply the values in this table by 62.4280 12. Calculations
to convert to lbm/ftL
* First three significant figures shown in line below.
12.1 The calculations are as shown on the "Measure
11.5.5 Calculate and record the averageinside height for Calibrated Sand Calibration" form (fig. 4).
of the measure to the nearest 0.001 inch (0.02 mm).
11.5.6 Calculate and record the volume of the
13. Report
measure to the nearest 0.0001 ft 3 (1 cm3).
11.6 Determine the acceptabilityof the values obtained
from the linear-measurement method and the water-filling 13.1 The report is to consist of a completed and checked
method by dividing either value by the other. If the value "Measure for Calibrated Sand Calibration Sheet" form
of the ratio is between 0.995 and 1.005, inclusive, use the (fig. 4).
value obtained by the water-filling method as the volume 13.2 All calculations are to show a checkmark.
796
USBR lOll
A+2
Dimension A
(diameter of opening)
must be equal to or
slightly smaller than " A
p end plate, bore
the template ope
to fit over outside
diameter, t
I diameter of pipe
C
II
A+2
Bottom end plate,
SAND CALIBRATION MEASURES weld watertight
to pipe
NOTES
May be fabricated from s'ondord
weight steel pipe. NOMINAL A B C
Weld fop and bottom end plates VOLUME NOMINAL NOMINAL WALL*
perpendicular to bore of pipe. (CU. FT.) DIAMETER HEIGHT THICKNESS
( INCHES} (INCHES)
0.35 8 12 0.322
0.92 12 14 0.575
*If standard pipe is used
797
USBR IOI1
..
.3
.ol -i
8
S
-e,
. 1
-1-
I
798
USBR 1011
:1i
.-t I
-I--,
.e
/
-Z
,4I
8
"8
rl
1
.
G
0
"I
I
rF_ ol.
.t*
l.li
- \
799
USBR 1011
MEASURE NO. 9
NOMINAL VOLUME 0.35
NOMINAL INSIDE DIAMETER 8 [] in [] mm NOMINAL INSIDE HEIGHT 12
1 8.008 8.010
INSIDE DIAMETER OF MEASURE []in Qmm 2 8.009 8.008
3 8,009 8.008
(1) Average insidediameter= (top + bottom)/2 ........... [in []ram ............ 8.009
1 12.001
INSIDE HEIGHT OF MEASURE [in [] 2
mm 12.004
3
12.000
(6) Mass of water = (4) - (S) ...................... [] Ibm r'=]g ............ 2[.80
(8) Absolutedensityof water** . ...... 0.998.099 ...... [] Ibm/ft3 [] g/cm3 .......... 82.31
GPO 849--727
800
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 1012-89
PROCEDURE FOR
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, Code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 1012. The number immediately
following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
80l
USBR 1012
7.2 TechnicMPrffcautions.-Tables and floorson which 10.4.4 Record the mass of the precision mass
the balances or scales are placed must not deflect. standard applied and the balance or scale reading for each
mass measurement.
8. Calibration and Standardization
10.4.5 Calculate error for each mass measurement.
10.4.6 Calculate percent error for each mass
8.1 Verify that the precision mass standards used for measurement.
comparison readings are currently calibrated and meet the
standards outlined in ASTM E 617. If the calibration is 11. Calculations
outdated, the precision mass standards should be calibrated
before they are used for this procedure. 11.1 Calculate error for each mass measurement.
9. Conditioning (4) ----- (2)-(3) (1)
where:
9.1 Perform this calibration procedure in an area that
is isolated from heat sources, air currents, and vibrations. (4) = error, g or Ibm
It is recommended that this calibration be performed in (2) = mass of precision mass standard, g or Ibm
an environment which is as close to 68 F (20 C) as (3) = balance or scale reading, g or Ibm
possible.
9.2 The balance or scale and the precision mass 11.2 Calculate percent error for each mass
standards are to be placed in the environment in which measurement.
they are to be calibrated for a period of at least 24 hours -(5) = 100(4) (2)
prior to calibration. (2)
where:
10. Procedure
(5) = percent error
10.1 All data are to be recorded on the "Balance or (4) = error, g or Ibm
Scale Calibration" form as shown on figure 1. (2) = mass of precision mass standard, g or Ibm
10.2 Check the balance or scale to ensure that it is 100 = convert from decimal to percent
level and isolated from heat sources, air currents, and/or
vibrations. 12. Interpretation of Results
10.3 Mechanical Balances or Scales:
10.3.1 Balance the beam with no mass applied. 12.1 The following tables (1 and 2) are to be used
10.3.2 Place precision mass standards corresponding to determine the acceptability of a balance or scale for
to 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of the capacity of the balance most soil laboratory applications. If the computed error,i
or scale on the beam or pan. for any precision mass standard placed on the calibrateff
10.3.3 Record the mass of the precision mass balance or scale, is outside the acceptabletolerances--given
standard applied and the balance or scale reading for each in these tables--the balance or scale should be adjusted
mass. by certified personnel. These tables have been adapted in
10.3.4 Calculate error for each mass measurement. part from the National Bureau of Standards Handbook
10.3.5 Calculate percent error for each mass 44.
measurement.
10.4 Electronic Balances or Scales: 13. Report
10.4.1 Plug the power cord into a power supply
compatible to the power requirements of the electronic
balance or scale. 13.1 The report is to consist of a completed and checked
"Balance or Scale Calibration" form (fig. 1).
NOTE 1.-A warmup period may be required for some electronic
balances or scales. 13.2 All calculations are to show a checkmark.
10.4.2 Tare the balance or scale and check for a zero 14. Reference
balance reading. Record the balance or scale reading as
shown on figure 1. [1] National Bureau of Standards, Handbook 44,
10.4.3 Place precision mass standards corresponding "Specifications, Tolerances, and Other Technical Require-
to 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent capacity of the balance or ments for Weighing and Measuring Devices," U.S.
scale on the beam or pan. Department of Commerce, Washington, D.C., 1983.
802
USBR 1012
Table 1.-Basic tolerances for balancesor scales, inch- Table Z-Basic tolerances for balancesor scales,
pound units. SI units.
803
USBR 1012
Zero balance reading 0.00 groms Date of calibration of precision mass standards 118189
Calibration performed by Example Date 2/I 5/89
Calibrationchecked by Example Date 2/I 5/89
Mass of precisionmass
Trial standard Balance or scale Error % Error
(2) reading (4) =
(4)
(1) [] grams (3) (2) -- (3) (5) = (2) x 100
[3 pounds
0.00
4 2250 2250.89 -- O . 89 -- 0 04
REMARKS
Balance is acceptable.
GFO 848-600
804
" , UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 1020-89
PROCEDURE FOR
CALIBRATING OVENS
INTRODUCTION
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 1020. The number immediately
followingthe designation indicates the year of acceptance or the year of last revision.
805
USBR 1020
9.3 Remove any material (sample containers, pans, 9.10 If the thermometer reading is within +5 C of
etc.) from the oven. the thermostat reading, the calibration procedure is
9.4 Carefully hang the thermometer by its eye-hook completed. If the thermometer reading differs from the
with a piece of wire as close to the center of the oven thermostat reading by more than 5 C, or if a more stringent
chamber as possible. Make sure that the thermometer hangs calibration is desired, see subparagraph 1.2.
freely. 9.11 Adjust the thermostat by the amount of the
9.5 Determine the applicabletemperature at which the thermostat correction.
oven will be calibrated and set the thermostat of the oven 9.12 Repeat subparagraphs 9.6 through 9.11 until the
to that temperature. desired calibration accuracy has been achieved.
NOTE 2.-For most geotechnical purposes, the oven will be 10. Calculations
calibrated at 110 C. If calibration is desired at another
temperature, the procedure is similar. If a range of calibrated 10.1 Calculate the thermostat correction using the
temperatures is desired, the calibration should be performed in following expression:
intervals of 5 C over the desired range of temperatures.
Thermostat correction = (1) - (2)
9.6 Allow sufficient time for the oven temperature to where:
stabilize and record the oven thermostat reading.
9.7 Determine the thermometer reading and record (1) = oven thermostat reading
the value. (2) = thermometer reading
NOTE 3.-The oven temperature will drop drastically when 11. Report
the oven door is opened. The thermometer reading should be
taken as quickly as possible once the door is opened. 11.1 The report is to consist of a completed and checked
"Oven Calibration" form (fig. 1).
9.9 Calculate the thermostat correction and record the
value. 11.2 All calculations are to show a checkmark.
806
USBR 1020
7-2306 (6-85)
Bea of Reclamation
OVEN CALIBRATION
I10 C 116 = C -6 C
104 C I I 0 C 0
COMMENTS:
GPO 847- 97 t
8O7
UNI:TED STATES DEPARTMENT' OF THE: INTERIOR
BURE,,6,U OF RECLAMATION
CHECKING SIEVES
INTRODUCTION
TEllS. F,.r<:<:ec]iure is L:,nclex ]ile ]luris.dict],oc, of the: Geo,rechnica]l Serviices B'anch, code E)-2,.730 Fi:esea-ch an,,ll kabozat,'.>ry S.er"vi.ces
DMsi,::,n. Den';'cr '{]trice, E:< n've, C,::,kl, rad,::,, This. proce.dure is issued utq, de.r he fixed de.s.]gnaG, m USBR ]102:5. The hi'am, her icnrcl, e&iarely
f,:,H(,.whJ:g the. de';ignatioc, indicates be year of ac,ce:ptance ,:, lTle year ,L: ,t Ias revis.io.n.
1. Scope
] i This ,3esigrJat:ion out]lines the. proc:edure flOr
checking sieves used in lal:,o;a:ory g:radaioln ana]lys.is
proce,dt:lres. Th{s prc,lce&L]re can be: used for' checking both
wqre clch and! perfora:ed-pate sieves The siieves shah
oc, nfc,ln:, t.o ASTM spe.c]!fications. E-] I fc wire-cloth sieves
and E-%23. for perforated plate siieves.
12 F'ou' meHods ae discussed tc,, check he confo, r-
mance .,::,f sieves Mc,.e than c:,n,e method may apply for
he same sieve as C,lutliined.
l:a) Me.bc:,d A desc:ibes the procedure for checking w'ire
c[ofl sieves having ape'ures as: large as: 4.75 mm (No.. 4111
and as sn,a]l as; 38l #m (No, 400)using a "s:ieve inspec:or"
w'h]ick, iSl a mecl-Janica[ device using: d:ial ind/carc,s OlZ liiclear
variable Jlifferen,ia]l tranlSf,l:>rmer's (LVD, Ts) c,, make lielear
me.asuren'JerJtS as sl>:wq, :,.n figure 1. --.....
NfK"E 1 -Th, e siie.ve i:i>;pe.c{.,:r shown o.n figure 2 ,r:an be aclap.ed
u, ,a;e. IVDTs an:d a oorrpu:e" 0o fac:ilirate, wire dliameter and 9 14 "8:
aperture dlimensic, n meas;Lremems ]r.,h,,rfnatic, n c,m<e'r, irJg these
11
adaptai,:,ns cJq he obtined b'.s ,o::,cltacing the Bureau's ll,
(b) Mer}c:,d B desc:ibe,. lne pr.,:)cedure for checking NCITE: Sieve ic, spectt.r is ad,pable t.0 \ario.us sieves anJ .::,d-,er
wire-cl,lh siievesl havJing al-:,e:ru'es, from 95 mm (3/8-in:1 linear measuIemer:,t devices.
,.> ]()lJ, mm !14 in) Ls;ng plug gauges and a iin, ear
meas,L:emer device, see fiigure 3. Figure I - Siieve: ;n, spe;:t.:r wikh dial indkal:,::,rs 1 ) mvcH:::,cular
(c) Metk,,cl C describes the p>:ceduze for che.ckm, g mkr.LL.<,,p.e, 2:]:, m:i,:,:,.scope .L:?F,,:,rr aim. !i.) ,3icrosl,L:,pe
wire-ch:,{h sileves having apertures [>,)m 236 mm (Nol :8:1, adjusmne:r* knob, 4111' wap .d[r<:cti,,:,n,. 51. s.tage, ,i)]o.ckiing boll<
: o 15 (:, m -n ,:; {:; i n ) , s i rJ g a i n e a r m e a Sl re n e n: d e v i ce ( f i g. 3 ).. 7) k:,e'ze[, 'il) glLlide rail: 9} xrdI 1 adj, ustment kn,,,b, 10:, shoc, t
adjll.ltl;n:e:r/t kF]l:}b, ] I ) Si]'IOGI IG{l'e,.'ril:lr ] 2) guMe rail lJil]
(d) MettT, o,d [) describes he prc<::edure for checkilng
{ [l:}
8[()l[[
USBR 1025
9.5 2.00 0.15 0.3550 0.4043 1 - 25'. 6 - 32 - NC Fs-in Hex. X 2JA in 9.20 9.80 10.16 9.97
12.5 2.50 0.15 th 0.4625 0.5375 1 - 43" 6 - 32 - NC -in Hex. X 2-SA in 12.11 12.89 13.31 13.10
16.0 3.00 0.20 th 0.5686 0.6814 2 - 9" 10 - 24 - NC -in Hex. X 2-sA in 15.5 16.5 17.0 16.7
19.0 M 3.00 0.20 V2 0.6825 0.8175 2 - 35" 10 - 24 - NC -in Hex. X 2JA in 18.4 19.6 20.1 19.9
22.4 3.00 0.20 0.7962 0.9537 3 - 0" 10 - 24 - NC -in Hex. 2JA in 21.7 23.1 23.7 23.4
25.0 1 3.00 0.25 9 0.9100 1.0900 3 - 26" IA - 20 - NC -in Hex. Y 2-A in 24.2 25.8 26.4 26.1
31.5 l-lA 3.00 0.25 1.1600 1.3400 3 - 26' 'A - 20 - NC -in Hex. X 3 in 30.5 32.5 33.2 32.9
38.1 1- 3.00 0.25 A 1.4100 1.5900 3 - 26' IA - 20 - NC -in Hex. X 3 in 36.8 38.6 39.5 39.1
45.0 l-SA 3.00 0.25 sA 1.6450 1.8551 3 - 45" IA - 20 - NC Vz-in Hex. X 3 in 43.6 46.4 47.4 46.9
50.0 2 3.00 0.25 A 1.8800 2.1200 4 - 34" IA - 20 - NC V2-in Hex. X 3 in 48.5 51.5 52.6 52.1
63.0 2- 3.00 0.25 5A 2.3500 2.6500 5 - 44' aA - 20 - NC V2-in Hex. X 3 in 61.1 64.9 66.2 65.6
75.0 3 3.00 0.30 3A 2.8200 3.1800 6 - 52" *A - 20 - NC -in Hex. X 3 in 72.8 77.2 78.7 78.1
90.0 3-'A 3.00 0.30 3A 3.3070 3.7800 9 - 0' tA - 20 - NC -in Hex. X 3 in 87.3 92.7 94.4 93.6
100.0 4 3.00 0.30 A 3.7600 4.2400 9 - 9" 'A - 20 - NC tA-in Hex. X 3 in 97.0 103.0 104.8 104.0
\ -,eqF
< Go Go to No-Go
No-G
> Max.
c ;i
thhllltltllhl fm
to
Max l,l,l,l,llPi -----
/
PLAN VIEW -JF
SECTION F-F
A lilt II II IIlllllll
SIDE VIEW
Material:
High carbon or alloy steel to be
hardened before final grinding.
Li- ^x/
I-Lt4'
--6
ivet
i
809
USBR 1()25
t::igurw 2 ]::'laci,kg m :!:I irJ,.cl>dkmncl,er k:,rass sieve .,,r ;: sic',< iins.pect,,}t ]:lavirhg
IVI I'T>, I) I \ilbTi 2 :; ]/l<:,:;iJig b,,]L lnd 3 I ]igi[Git swhch
81()
1LJSBE 3025
:iI ].i[llLdF ;llllilStllli('Ill de'4 i(,<_' ILL{[]:Jb]qL ibl; I:J]CIStHTiH E(;, ghtz JJt:ll"251 ,: I:, ) B[ug ,_;l:e,
() (7'2 ram.
METHOD A
'eEl eck i 17, t,,'r i e-CII ,: , t h Si:ev e U s i: ng 1 iI ie'lk ,' e nsr>ec c,,
,::()F:,,i:c:i] Linear MeasLre'meri, L; Wich D, iial ]m, di,:::,,:>rs,
i,,-;i
7.1 Me:]hc, d A is l:ls.ed x::, ,clhe.cT siieve.s haviing ape:reuse
-=i d { inelSlici.ns fr,c,n'J 12"8;-iC{]:*Cl ( N 'l:.). *i 0C li ) [.(]i ,t i 75 ]7Cl nI- Ii Nci. 4 '1.
Pc'f<:,,rm a v:is.ual inspecii.,:)n c::,: te. sieve. P%ce :he sieve
v
in ehe sieve ins;e>ecc,r and check a nl, lr, inmST:i :,.: ]0 set-s
I--,
C:: <,,t 10, aperture dimensk,ns an, d wie di:arnees F'ive se.cs
C::
--: are ,checked i!n cbe warp X,diirect {<:m, and five sees are checked
i]] 1,I've: SI'II::)(]I{ Ydirecti<:,,I:l (tig S, ieve TF:iertclre: dl]merlsii.,:)ns
i: '71
i i,
LS ]:IIR ] I[]l: 5
8. Apparatus.... Me:hod A
dne dia] ir, dbceltors for direct measuremen[ arid wi]ll k:,rek
awa}: if over ira's:el ,occzs Rapid traverse of eirl-Jer Xor
}" axis i;s. pr:lv[ded Cll]i' lifting either drive screw <]l]J{ IL}f i[i:
haf-nu nd l:idmg :l-e suge t:,,: the new ],:c]io,
The sieve ;irJ, spe:,,r is, a,dapable to check a 117-b?
25-iinch fanlC with a Gi]ls,,:n TM sieve s shown on fi,gLre
The SleeVe m,:,undng brgl,[,[e iS ulsed to [':lilac:e: [he Gillslon TM
sJieve civil thle sJieve iinspectc, r. The II]I];CFCIISOI[)pe pi,ki,[)[[;]g ar]:I;i
alh::l,W'S the mi r,::,sc:,:q;:,.e :, re;ch a]] aF, ertLre:',:; Cl, n the siieve
I 1. plrlOc:edurle -- ,leltlqlod ,
aSi Shown I:)]F fiigtrc ,:;i. {il;m--fl;iws :ire r-,,l aFlparen or iii suitable epairs are made,i
1.4 Visually examiin.e :he s.e"'e pleferak, ly 'wirh a check the ;,o:eF,ed box:, if *<"L, cl-eck rl-e ejected box The
magcJifyin g g.]ass, f{il, any eJs,, exlces.s.ive wea:l andl/':,r wire Se',:e:, if re:jie'c:te',f[, shah klle clisc;]IElde:d.
',!. ] 2:
USBR 1025
AIIowable Measured
min max X Y
Average Wire Diameter (mr'n) 1,46 1.62 i.55 1.54
Average Aperture (rrrn) 4.60 4.90 4.80 4.83
Largest Aperture (ram) 5.14 4.88 4.88
5 % of Apertures can exceed 5.02 (ram) 0 %
Accepted []
Rejected []
SHEET OF
813
USBR 1025
814
USBR 1025
Cross has. Sieve wire set containing a minimum of 10 wire diameters and 10
aperture dimensions has been measured.
/---- -Aligning cross hairs with 11.24 Adjust the position of the stage so that the
center left side of sieve crosshairs coincide with position 22 at the center of the
aperture/wire (reading 1) bottom edge of the bottom wire (top of aperture) running
in the shoot Y direction, of set 2 -- shown as position
Cross hairs 2 22 on figure 8.
Sieve wire
11.25 Slide the magnetic holder for the shoot direction
i '\/" dial gauge along its guide rail until the dial indicator-
Aligning cross hairs with
registers nearly zero. Rotate the bezel to 0.00 and record
;/ center bottom of sieve
aperture/w!re (reading22)
as Initial reading in the "Wire Diameter" section (fig. 6).
11.26 Move the stage of the sieve inspector by turning
the shoot adjustment knob until the crosshairs coincide
with a point directly across the wire from position 22
shown as position 23 on figure 8.
11.27 Read and record the dial indicator reading as
f4
A Final reading in the "Wire Diameter" section (fig. 6).
41J
11.28 Record the dial indicator reading obtained in
subparagraph 11.27 as Initial reading in the "Aperture
z @- Dimension" section (fig. 6)
11.29 Move the stage along the shoot axis until the
I-
U . ,6",g
crosshairs coincide with a pointdirectly across the aperture
A,.-
from position 23 -- shown as position 24 on figure 8.
Read and record the dial indicator as Finalreadingin the
"Aperture Dimension" section (fig. 6). :
11.30 Record the dial indicator reading obtained in
w w
subparagraph 11.29 as Initial reading in the "Wire
Diameter" section (fig. 6).
11.31 As necessary, slide the magnetic holder for the
6e3. warp direction dial gauge along its guide rail until the
dial indicator registers nearly zero. Rotate the bezel to
,- 0.00 and record in the appropriate column.
11.32 Repeat subparagraphs 11.26 through 11.31 using
.. the appropriate position (shown on figure 8) until the
i/ second set containing a minimum of 10 wire diameters
and 10 aperture dimensions has been measured. Movement
WARP (X) DIRECTION of the crosshairs during measurements, for each set, should
1 -- Reading location
follow the sequence shown on figure 8; however the exact
Al -- Aperture number position of the sets may vary.
W -- Wire number 11.33 Repeat subparagraphs 11.15 through 11.32 until
a minimum of 10 sets, 5 sets running in the warp X
Figure 8. - Sequence of aperture dimension and wire diameter readings
direction and 5 sets running in the shoot Ydirection,have
for one set.
been checked (see subpar. 11.13).
11.19 Record the dial indicator reading obtained in 11.34 Obtain the following values from table 4 and
subparagraph 11.18 as Initial reading in the "Aperture record as shown on figure6:
Dimension" section (fig. 6). Average wire diameter limits
11.20 Move the stage along the warp axis until the Average aperture dimension limits
crosshairs coincide with a point directly across the sieve Largest allowable aperture dimension
aperture from position 2 --shown as position 3 on figure 8. Aperture dimension of which 5 percent of the
Read and record the dial indicator as Final reading in the measured apertures can exceed
"Aperture Dimension" section (fig. 6).
11.21 Record the dial indicator reading obtained in NOTE 4.-If table 4 does not list the tolerances needed for
a certain size sieve, refer to appendix X1, table XI.1.
subparagraph 11.20 as Initial reading in the "Wire
Diameter" section (fig. 6). 11.35 Calculate and record to the nearest 0.01 mm,
11.22 As necessary, slide the magnetic holder for the the average aperture dimension and average wire diameter
warp direction dial gauge along its guide rail until the in both the warp X and shoot Y directions as shown on
dial indicator registers nearly zero. Rotate the bezel to figure6.
0.00 and record in the appropriate column. 11.36 Locate and record to the nearest 0.01 mm the
11.23 Repeat subparagraph 11.17 through 11.22 using largest sieve aperture dimension in both the warp X and
the appropriate positions (shown on figure 8) until one shoot Ydirection as shown on figure6.
815
USBR 1025
Note: If table 4 does not list the sieve size needed, refer to appendix X1, table X1.1.
12.2 Calculate the average aperture dimension in both Wa Wl+ w2+ w8...+ wn
N,, (3)
the warp Xand shoot Ydirection for the entire sieve.
where:
Wa -- average wire diameter in either the Xor Y
al + a2 + as... + a,
Aa = Na (1) direction, mm
wl, w2, wa, and wn = measured individual wire
where:
diameters in either the Xor Ydirection, mm
Aa = average aperture dimension in either the Xor Y
Nw = total number of wire diameter measurements in
direction, mm
either the Xor Ydirection
al, a2, as, and an = measured sieve aperturedimension
in either the Xor the Ydirection, mm 13. Interpretation of Results -- Method A
Na = total number of aperture measurements in either 13.1 The sieve will be accepted if the followingcriteria
the Xor Ydirection
are met:
The visual inspection is acceptable
12.3 Calculate the measured percentage of aperture The average wire diameter, of the warp Xand shoot
dimensions greater than the allowable percentage (5% of Ydirections (taken seperately), falls within the specified
apertures can exceed) for the entire sieve. limits
816
USBR 1025
J
discarded. go to no-go
METHOD B
linear measurement device is to meet requirements of
Checking Wire-Cloth Sieve Using a Plug Gauge
Federal Specifications GGG-C-111B, and conform to any
and Linear MeasurementDevice
additional requirements specified in USBR 1000.
15. Summary of Method q Method B
17. Calibration and Standardization q Method B
15.1 Method B is used to check sieves having aperture
17.1 Initially (when received) verify that plug gauges
dimensions from 9.5 mm (3/8-in) to 100-mm (4-in).
conform to the requirements as specified in table 1. If
Perform a visual inspection of the sieve. Check a minimum
a linear measurement device is used, verify that it meets
of 10 sets of 10 aperture dimensions and wire diameters.
the requirements of USBR 1000. If the calibration is not
Five sets are checked in the warp X direction and five
current, perform the calibration before using the linear
sets are checked in the shoot Y direction (fig. 4). A plug
measurement device for this procedure.
gauge is used to check aperture dimensions againstrequired
"go/no go" criteria. A linear measurement device is used 18. Conditioning-- Method B
to measure wire diameters adjacent to the apertures.
Average wire diameters are calculated for both the warp 18.1 Prior to performing this procedure, place the plug
Xand shoot Ydirections and compared to maximum and gauges, linear measurement devices, and sieves in the same
minimum allowable diameters. Aperture dimensions are environment in which they are to be checked for several
checked for allowable oversize and maximum aperture hours until their temperatures are approximately the same
dimension. A decision to accept or reject the sieve for
laboratory use is based on the sieve meeting specified 19. Procedure -- Method B
dimensions.
19.1 All data are to be recorded on the "Checking Wire-
16. Apparatus -- Method B Cloth Sieve (Plug Gauges)" form as shown on figure 10.
19.2 Record the sieve size in both SI and inch-pound
16.1 Plug Gauges.-A set of plug gauges (fig. 3), con- units. Also, record the sieve control number, if applicable.
forming to the requirements in table 1, and a schematic 19.3 Visually examine the sieve--preferably with a
is shown on figure 9. Each plug gauge is inscribed with magnifying glass, for any tears, excessive wear, and/or wire
three parallel lines at blade widths corresponding to--in displacement. If--upon completion of the visual inspec-
order of increasing dimension--the "go" dimension, the tion-flaws are not apparent or if suitable repairs are made,
"no-go" dimension, and the "max." dimension. Thus check the accepted box; if not, check the rejected box. The
inscribed, the face of the blade is divided into four regions. sieve, if rejected, shall be discarded.
The regions--in order of increasing blade width--are 19.4 Locate a minimum of 10 sets--each containing
referred to as the "< go" region, the "go to no-go" region, 10 aperture dimensions and wire diameters--as shown on
the "no-go to max." region, and the "> max." region. When figure 7. Five sets will run in the warp X direction and
the plug gauge is inserted into an aperture in a sieve, five sets will run in the shoot Ydirection. The sets should
the dimension of the aperture can be visually classified be selected to uniformly cover the entire surface of the
into one of the four regions. For most soil and concrete sieve or wherever excessive wear is shown. If there are
laboratory applications, plug gauges are required for the fewer than 100 apertures in the sieve, check all apertures.
following sieve sizes: 9.5-, 19.0-, 37.5-, 75-mm, (3/8-, If 10 sets of 10 aperture dimensions and wire diameters
3/4-, 1-1/2-, and 3-inch, respectively). cannot be located, then randomly select 100 apertures and
16.2 Linear Measurement Devices.-A vernier or dial wire diameter, 50 in the warp X direction and 50 in the
caliper (fig. 3) used to measure the wire diameters. The shoot Ydirection to evenly represent the sieve.
817
USBR 1025
[] Accepted
visual Inspection: Sieve Control No. 8"-2
r-] Rejected
No. No.
x Y X Y X Y Y X Y
1 I
,/ 2.27
2 2.17
,,Z
,/ 2.22
2.23
2.29
,,/ 2.31
,Z
v/
2.27
2.28
v/
,J
2.26
10 2.31
11 2 2.23
12 2.25
2.27
13
v" 2.29
14
v/
15
v/ 2.30
16
x/ 2.31
1"7
v/ 2.32
2.27
18
v/ 2.26
19
v/
20
v/ 2.28
21
22
23
24
25
Average Aperture
X Y
Total No. Measured 50 50 Average Wire Diameter
Remarks: Average wire diameter and total percent Include oil pages.
(Only partial sieve checking data shown)
Accepted []
Rejected []
SHEET OF
818
US, BR 1025;
15<5 O, btain de cc,.iie.ct plu.g gauge f:or he sieve, to s.h, ow rJ, on table 4, ,2,1e,airJ, due s.p.ecified vahaes from appendix
be: tested:,, matc:h[ng the steve siz;e wkh he plug; gauge X1,. table XI.I.
size, 19.14 Calculate the percentage o,f c,,peMngs wl-ich f;tl
19.6. In, sert fire. plug gauge in, the first aperture ,IA) ir the "rc,,-go to max." region for both the warp X and
of the iciis.t set widl the long horiz:o.nta]l axJis of d-m gauge shoo.t Y d/trecti,::ms and reco>l to:, the nearest I percent
blade oriented i, the warp X direcrio, n (fiig. 8). Visuallly as; shown, o:, figure ]_0. Cak:uat:e the:. total percentage and
dete'mine d-e re.gi,:m of the. plug gauge blade that is reo::.:d as sl-c, wn ors fiigure 10.
intersected, by the surface o.f the sieve arJ.d pIac:e a checkmark 15;'.15 CMct:date and record to the rm.arest: CIl,O] iT, hi the
in the ap.prc,,piate coh:ln-m co.rre.sponding ,; t}-J,e pIag gauge aveg, ge w're diameter m both the x, arF,, X and s;hoot Y
reading: as shc,,wn ,:::m figure i0. Figure 11 shows a p, lug dire.cuons as. shown on figure 10.
gauge p]laced in a sJ[eve..
P9.7 Using the lire.ai" measu, rement device,, measure
the fk'st wire diameter W\ c,,f the first set (hg. 81:, to the
nearest 0.01 mm arJ.d record as;. sho.wn on fJigure 10.
19.8. Repeat s.ubparag'aphs 19.6 and 19'.7 tJsing the
apprloprJiat:e poslJEJ]:l-iS unti]l a mic, imum Gill: ll() apelr[ure
.din'ensiorJ, san, d ;ire diameters fo.r the set rurm[ng Jin the
warp X directiion have be.en checked (see subpa> 1%4).
lcI.9 Insert the pl[ug gauge in the. f{rst apeIture As1
of the set:trod set with the c,,ng horizontal axis; o,f the gauge
bllade..orierJ, ted m the: sh,:o.t Y directiion (fig. 8;), Vis.ual][v
de:te.rmire the regio.n of: the p]ag gauge blade that: is
intersected by the surface of the:. s.ieve an, d p]lace a mark
it, the appropriiat:e cc, lumn, c,arresporMing: to, the plug gaug:e
reading as show'n on f:igure ] 0.
lchl0 Usiing the ][iine:ar ,leasure.nent device, measui'e
the fk's wire: diiame.er W;'il of: de second set (f'g. 8) to.
the nearest 01,1[ nn,n and zecc,d as; sho, wn on figure 10..
lc1'11 Repeat subparag:raph 19..9 and 19.]0 using the
ap.propriate pc,,s.kkms, until a miinimum of 10 aperture
dimensikms and wire diameters for the set ianning in dm
shoot: Ydire.c:don have been, cl-J, ecked (see subpar. 19.4).
119.12 Repeat subparagraphs 119'.8 and I'9.11 umil a
mJinimun-, o, f l CI, sets.,. 5 sets running in the warp Xdire.ction
and 5 s.ets, runniing iin the: sabc,c,,t Y .diirecti.c,,n:,. have been
checked.
1!5).] 3 O'bta[n t}]e ap.prci, piate n]ivirniutln dtl,d rFJaxJ.Fnun'l
a]Iowable lhnits for the average whe diameter from tah,,b 4
and re.cord as; shown, c,,n fiigue 10. If the s.b.ve size is not
8] 9
USBR 1025
Either all the checkmarks are in the "go to no-go" environment in which they are to be checked for several
columns or less than 5 percent of the checkmarks fall hours until their temperatures are approximately the same.
in the "no-go to max." column.
There are no aperture dimensions in the " go" or 27. Procedure -- Method C
" max." columns
21.2 If there are greater than 5-percent openings in 27.1 All data are to be recorded on the "Checking Wire-
the "no-go to max." column, recalibrate the sieve using Cloth Sieve (Measurement Devices)" form as shown on
method C. figure 12.
21.3 If the sieve does not meet the criteria of
27.2 Record the sieve size in both SI and inch-pound
subparagraph 21.1, except as noted in subparagraph 21.2, units. Also record the sieve control number, if applicable,
the sieve is to be rejected. It may be repaired and rechecked,
as shown on figure 12.
otherwise discard if rejected.
27.3 Visually examine the sieve--preferably with a
magnifying glass, for any tears, excessive wear, and/or wire
22. Report-- Method B
displacement. If--upon completion of the visual inspec-
22.1 The report is to consist of a completed and checked tion-flaws are not apparent or if suitable repairs are made,
"Checking Wire-Cloth Sieve (Plug Gauges)" form (fig. 10). check the accepted box; if not, check the rejected box. The
22.2 All calculations are to show a checkmark. sieve, if rejected, shall be discarded.
27.4 Locate a minimum of 10 sets -- each containing
METHOD C 10 aperture dimensions and wire diameters -- as shown
Checking Wire-Cloth Sieve Using on figure 7. Five sets will run in the warp X direction
a Linear Measurement Device and five will run in the shoot Ydirection. The sets should
be selected to uniformly cover the entire surface of the
23. Summary of Method -- Method C sieve or wherever excessive wear is shown. If there are
fewer than 100 apertures in the sieve, check all apertures.
23.1 Method C is used to check sieves having aperture If 10 sets of 10 aperture dimensions and wire diameters
dimensions from 2.36 mm (No. 8) to 150 mm (6 in). cannot be located, then randomly select 100 apertures and
Perform a visual inspection of the sieve. Use a linear wire diameters, 50 in the warp X direction and 50 in the
measurement device to check a minimum of 10 sets of shoot Ydirection to evenly represent the sieve.
10 aperture dimensions and wire diameters as shown in 27.5 Beginning with the first aperture (A1, fig. 8) of
figure 7. Five sets are checked in the warp X direction the firstset, measure the aperture dimension using a linear
and five sets are checked in the shoot Y direction (fig. measurement device. Measure the aperture dimension in
4). Average wire diameter and aperture dimensions are the warp X direction, and record the value to the nearest
calculated for both the warp X and shoot Y directions 0.01 mm as shown on figure 12.
and compared to maximum and minimum allowable 27.6 Using the linear measurement device, measure
dimensions. Aperture dimensions are checked for allowable the first wire diameter W1 of the first set (fig. 8) to the
oversize percentage and maximum aperture dimension. A nearest 0.01 mm and record as shown on figure 12.
decision to accept or reject the sieve for laboratory use 27.7 Repeat subparagraphs 27.5 and 27.6 until a
is based on the sieve meeting specified dimensions. minimum of 10 aperture dimensions and wire diameters
each have been checked for the set.
24. Apparatus -- Method C 27.8 Beginning with the first aperture (All, fig. 8) ofJ
the second set, measure the aperture dimension using a
24.1 Linear Measurement Devices.-A vernier or dial linear measurement device. Measure the aperture
caliper (fig. 3) is used to measure aperture dimensions dimension in the shoot Y direction, and record the value
and wire diameters. The linear measurement device is to to the nearest 0.01 mm as shown on figure 12.
meet requirements of Federal Specifications GGG-C-111B, 27.9 Using the linear measurement device, measure
and conform to any additional requirements specified in the first wire diameter Wll of the second set (fig. 8) to
USBR 1000. the nearest 0.01 mm and record on figure 12.
27.10 Repeat subparagraphs 27.8 and 27.9 until a
25. Calibration and Standardization--Method C minimum of 10 aperture dimensions and wire diameters
each have been checked for the set.
25.1 Verify that the linear measurement device has 27.11 Repeat subparagraphs 27.7 and 27.10 until a
been calibrated in accordance with USBR 1000. If the minimum of 10 sets, 5 sets running in the warp Xdirection
calibration is not current, perform the calibration before and 5 sets running in the shoot Y direction, have been
using the linear measurement device for this procedure. checked.
27.12 Obtain the following values from table 4 and
26. Conditioning-- Method C record as shown on figure 12:
Average wire diameter limits
26.1 Prior to performing this procedure, place the Average aperture dimension limits
linear measurement device and sieves in the same Largest allowable aperture dimension
820
USBR 1025
7-2397 (12-86)
Bureau of Reclamation CHECKING WIRE-CLOTH SIEVE (MEASUREMENT DEVICES) I)esignationUSBP, 1025 - @9
PROJECT FEATURE ILAB. LOCATION
EXAMPLE
CALIBRATION PERFORMED BY DATE CALIBRATION CHECKED BY DATE
[] Accepted
Visual Inspection: [] Rejected Sieve ControlNo. 8'L 3
Allowable Measured
min max X Y
Average Wire Diameter (mm) 5.51 6.09 5.79 5.79
Average Aperture(ram) 73.8 77.2 74.6 75.0
Largest Aperture(mm) 78.7 75.0 76.0
5 % of Aperturescan exceed 78. I (ram) 0 %
Accepted []
Rejected []
SHEET__OF__
821
USBR 1025
Aperture dimension of which 5 percent of the The average wire diameter, of the warp Xand shoot
measured apertures can exceed Ydirections (taken separately), falls within the specified
limits
NOTE 6.-If table 4 does not list the tolerances needed for The average aperture dimension in both the warp
a certain sieve size, refer to appendix X1, table XI.1. Sand shoot Ydirection is within the specified limits
27.13 Calculate and record to the nearest 0.01 mm the The largest measured aperture dimension is less than
the specified limit
average aperture dimension and average wire diameter in
both the warp X and shoot Y directions as shown on The percentage of measured aperture dimensions
greater than the specified limit is 5 percent or less
figure 12.
27.14 Locate and record to the nearest 0.01 mm the 29.2 If the criteria in subparagraph 29.1 are met, check
largest sieve aperture dimension in both the warp X and the accepted box; if not, check the rejected box. If the
sieve is rejected and cannot be repaired it should be
shoot Ydirections as shown on figure 12.
27.15 Calculate and record to the nearest one percent discarded.
the percentage of apertures greater than the allowable limit
as shown on figure 12. 30. Report-- Method C
28. Calculations -- Method C 30.1 The report is to consist of a completed and checked
"Checking Wire-Cloth Sieve (MeasurementDevices)"form
28.1 Calculate the average aperture dimension in both (fig. 12).
the warp Xand shoot Ydirection for the entire sieve. 30.2 All calculations are to show a checkmark.
822
USBR 1025
environment in which they are to be checked for several as shown on figure 13. Preferably this should be done
hours until their temperatures are approximately the same. on the bridges that show the most wear--apparent by the
smallest bridgewidth dimension. Repeat subparagraphs
35. Procedure -- Method D 35.6.1 and 35.6.4 until the required number of apertures
or a distance of 100 mm have been checked.
35.1 All data are to be recorded on the "Checking 35.6.4 Calculate and record to the nearest 0.01 mm
Perforated Plate Sieve" form as shown on figure 13. the pitch distance as shown on figure 13.
35.2 Record the sieve size in both SI and inch-pound 35.7 Beginning at subparagraph 35.6.1 and continuing
units. Also record the sieve control number, if applicable, through subparagraph 35.6.4 check the sieve in the other
as shown on figure 13. Locate from figure 14 and record, direction of travel along line 2 as shown on figure 14.
as shown on figure 13, sieve aperture dimension limits, Record the data on a second form. If the aperture
bridgewidth dimension limit, pitch dimension limits, and dimensions, pitch dimensions, bridgewidth, and plate
plate thickness dimension limits for the appropriate sieve thicknesses fall within the required limits, place a
size. If the sieve size is not shown on figure 14, specified checkmark in the approved box. Record any remarks at
values can be obtained from appendix X1, table X1.2. the bottom of figure 13.
35.3 Visually examine the perforated plate sieve--pre-
ferably with a magnifying glass, for any flaws. If--upon 36. Calculations -- Method D
completion of the visual inspection--flaws are not apparent
or if suitable repairs are made, check the accepted box; 36.1 Calculate the pitch dimension.
if not, check the rejected box. The sieve, if rejected, shall
be discarded. A typical perforated plate sieve is shown Pitch = Xi+ V2Xi+I+ Zi (10)
on figure 15. where:
Pitch = center-to-center distance of adjacent apertures,
NOTE 6.-The plug gauges which where used for the wire- mm
cloth sieves are unacceptable for the perforated plate sieves due Xi = aperture dimension; Xfor line 1; Yfor line 2,
to the change in allowable dimensions.
mm
35.4 Check all dimensions using a linear measurement Xi + 1 ---- aperture dimension of the following aperture:
Xfor line 1; Yfor line 2, mm
device. Because of the manner in which the sieve is
Zi = bridgewidth of bridge between apertures Xi
fabricated, each aperture is tapered so be sure to make
measurements on the side of the plate on which the and Xi + 1 or Y," and Y," + 1, mm
manufacturer indicated the aperture size.
35.5 The two straight lines used for checking square 37. Interpretation of Results -- Method D
apertures are separated by either 90 degrees (perpendic-
ular), or 63 degrees 26 minutes to each other as shown 37.1 The sieve will be acceptedif the following criteria
on figure 14. The two straight lines used for checking are met:
round apertures are separated by 60 degrees. The visual inspection is acceptable
35.6 The apertures selected to verify that the sieve All aperture dimensions are within specified limits
is within allowable dimensions are those which lie along All bridgewidth dimensions are within specified
two straight lines, each at least 100-mm (3.94-in) in length, limit
or a total of 20 apertures (10 in the direction of each All pitch distances are within specified limits
line) whichever is greater. If these requirements cannot Plate thickness falls within specified limits
be met, check all apertures in the sieve. 37.2 If the criteria in subparagraph 37.1 are met,
35.6.1 Beginning with straight line 1 (0 degrees), check the acceptedbox; if not, check the rejected box. If
measure and record the aperture dimensions to the nearest the sieve is rejected and cannot be repaired, it should be
0.01 mm in both the warp X and shoot Y directions as discarded.
shown on figure 13.
35.6.2 Measure and record the bridgewidth dimen- 38. Report -- Method D
sions (Zi, fig. 14) to the nearest 0.01 mm between the
apertures measured in subparagraph 35.6.1. 38.1 The report is to consist of a completed and
35.6.3 Measure and record the plate thickness to the checked "Checking Perforated Plate Sieve" form (fig. 13).
nearest 0.01 mm on 25 percent of the bridges measured 38.2 All calculations are to show a checkmark.
823
USBR 1025
0o
Directionof Travel Line No. I
Sieve Aperture
Bridgewidth Pitch
Dimension
Dmension Dime nsion Plate Thickness
Lrnits (ram)
Less than The Limits (rr) Limits (nTn)
4.61 to 4.89
Limit (ram). 1.03 5.8 .to, 7.8 0.8 to 1.5
Remarks:
Accepted []
Rejected []
SHEET OF
824
USBR 1025
XI
100 mm (minimum)
NOTE: This drawing denotes the two straight lines when seperated by 63 degrees 26 minutes.
Figure 14. - Allowable dimensions --perforated plate sieves. Measuring sequence for perforated plate sieves.
825
[]SB, R 1 (/'25
Appendix X1
Table X 1.1 - Nominal dimensions, permissible variations for wire cloth of standard test sieves (U.S.A. Standard Series) [ASTM E 11].
Sieve Designation PermissibleVaria-
Nominal tion of Average Maximum Open- Nominal
ing Size for Not Maximum Indi- Wire Diame-
Sieve Open- Opening from the More than 5 % of vidual Opening
Standardb Alternative ing, in. Standard Sieve ter, mm
Designation Openings
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
The averagediameterof the warpand of the shoot wires, taken separately, of the cloth of any sieve shall not deviatefrom
the nominal values by more than the following:
Sieves coarserthan 600 p.m 5 %
Sieves 600 to 125 p.m 7 %
Sieves finer than 125 p.m 10 %
b These standard designations correspond to the values for test sieve apertures recommended by the International Standards
Organization, Geneva, Switzerland.
Only approximately equivalent to the metric values in Column I.
a These sieves are not in the standard series but they have been included because they are in common usage.
These numbers (3 to 400) are the approximate number of openings per linear inch but it is preferred that the sieve be
identified by the standard designation in millimeters or p.m.
/ I000 ttm= I mm.
827
USBR 1025
Table X1.2. - Nominal dimensions, permissible variations, and ranges for perforated plate in standard sieves [ASTM E 323].
Sieve Designation and Maxi- Centers Plate Thickness
Aperture Size a mum
Varia- Preferred Preferred
tion of
Permissible Permissible
Stand- Alternative Aper- Stand- Alter- RangeD Stand- Range
arda ture Alternative
SizcC ard native ard
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (91 (10)
125 5 +-i.0 160 6Y4 144 to 184 3.4 0.1345 10 2.5 to 4.0
106 4/4 +-0.9 135 5V4 122 to 155 3.4 0.1345 10 2.5 to 4.0
100 c" 4 +-0.9 128 5 115 to 147 3.4 0.1345 10 2.5 to 4.0
90 3/z +-0.8 III 4% lOOto 128 2.7 0.1046 12 2.5 to4.0
75 3 +-0.7 95 3Y4" 86 to 109 2.7 O. 1046 12 2.5 to 4.0
8.0 "f, +-0.19 I 1.0 /1 9.5 to 12.6 1.9 0.0747 14 1.0 to 2.0
6.7 17/ +-0.17 9.9 8.3 to 11.4 1.5 0.0598 16 0.8 to 1.5
6.3a V4 +-0.16 9.5 :'M 8.0 to 10.9 1.5 0.0598 16 0.8 to 1.5
5.6 7/.r +-0.15 8.7 'u 7.2 to 10.0 1.5 0.0598 16 0.8 to 1.5
4.75 :'t +-0.14 6.8 /4 5.8 to 7.8 1.5 0.0598 16 0.8 to 1.5
1.70 0.066 +-0.08 2.9 7/ 2.5 to 3.3 0.8 0.0299 22 0.4 to 0.8
1.40 0.055 +-0.08 2.6 0.100 2.2 to 3.0 0.8 0.0299 22 0.4 to 0.8
I. 18 0.045 0.07 2.2 0.090 1.9 to 2.5 0.8 0.0299 22 0.4 to 0.8
1.00 0.039 +-0.07 2.0 0.077 1.7 to 2.3 0.8 0.0299 22 0.4 to 0.8
A The values shown in this table refer to both round and square apertures.In general,square-aperture perforated-sieve
plates are available only in 3.35 mm and larger.
a These standard designations, progressing from a base of I mm in the ratio of approximately to I, correspondto the
values for test sieve apertures recommended by the International Organization for Standardization, Geneva, Switzerland.
c This permissible variation applies to both the standard aperture sizes and the alternative aperture sizes.
o A range of +-15 % is allowed except that in no case shall the minimum bridge (bar between apertures) be less than one
halfof the differencebetween the nominalapertureand the preferred center.
Only approximatelyequivalentto the standard values.
e The gage values are for carbonsteel. For other materials, the gage used should be the nearest decimal equivalentof the
U.S. standard gage for steel.
" These sieves are not in the standard series but they have been included because they are in common usage.
828
- UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 1030-89'
PROCEDUREFOR
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The calibration procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 1030. The
number immediately following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
829
USB, R 1030
9. ] \.er'if,}, tin, a the: balance ,:r scale used is. ,currenl'y 12:. Calculao, ns;
call{brateJI in a,c,c,,:,rdan, ce with USBR ] 0 il 2. If the calibration 121 CMcuIate d-m volume ,:f the specific graviLv fask
iis not current, perc,.m t>e calibrati,:m bef,c,e using the using th, e express:ian:
bMan,,Le o.r scale f,:l.r this F,>:,cedue
r7 = /5:__2
10. Conditioning ' (,{51)
wl-,ere':
1.(',,1 Perf,:,rm this .calibr;6<)n in arl area iis,,:)]late,d from
(7) = volume c,.f f]lask,, cm s
excessiive heat sources .,:)r air currents and is n:sain, tained
(5) = (3) {2} is the: mass Clif s,aer, g
at ,,r near >c,m tem, pe:.aare ,o,f (,8. :' F (2:()':' C).
1,0,2 T'h,e specific gn.lvih'.i fIasks and water bath should < 31 = mass iCl {llas.k: file!l with ware'n, g
be pllace.d m, @e c!n, viir,a,mn,(rn in which, they are: to E,e {2) = mass ,0,:( f]las.k, g
(G) = ah,,s,,:]lute ,dens[t 7 c,f water at temperature
calibrated {,;;lit" LL perjill*C;I IL){ at le:lsit 2'J: hours belf(_-:lle Ca]k:lr at Jtci, n,
(taMe 1),, g/cm"
1 I. Pro, cedlure
13,. Repo't
] ]. 1 All! da< are It:, be re,o,:,rdedl ,,:)r th, e "SF:,ecifi!,J (Sraviipy'
Flask CMlibratii,,,n (Vo]lum, e Meth,,,:dl),"' foHr, as. s]bown c,,n ]13.. 1 The re:p,:Jrt s t,a. o3irJSiSt o, a comp]leted and checked
tig re 2 S peci fic (.31ra
.... FI ]a S k Ca ] ibrat [olrj ( CII1UI nl-ie }li et h odl )" fl()rm
l' ] 1'
] 11.2 Rec,,r.d tk, e identi{icati,a.n n=umber o.{ the s.pecifiic (fiig. 2111.
gavir.r' {las;k :<: , k:,e c;:ffibredl 3..2 All cM,:ul:nions are. t,,:, show a checkmark
111.3 De.termine th, e mass ,,:,f he. dean, dry s.pecifi!,L: 113.3 A pem, anent ze.cod should be. made fa, r e<h
g.ravv.p' fask c,, tn, e nearest (]1,,{1,1 gram and record spe,ufic gravi: 7 I]ask used :in, th, e iaboratry.
831)
USBR 1030
Degrees 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
C
0 0.999841 847 854 860 866 872 878 884 889 895
1 900 905 909 914 918 923 927 930 934 938
2 941 944 947 950 953 955 958 960 962 964
3 965 967 968 969 970 971 972 972 973 973
4 973 973 973 972 972 972 970 969 968 966
965 963 961 959 957 955 952 950 947 944
941 938 935 931 927 924 920 916 911 907
902 898 893 888 883 877 872 866 861 855
849 843 837 830 824 817 810 803 796 789
781 774 766 758 751 742 734 726 717 709
10 700 691 682 673 664 654 645 635 625 615
11 605 595 585 574 564 553 542 531 520 509
12 498 486 475 463 451 439 427 415 402 390
13 377 364 352 339 326 312 299 285 272 258
14 244 230 216 202 188 173 159 144 129 114
15 099 084 069 054 038 023 007 "991 *975 *959
16 0.998943 926 910 893 877 860 843 826 809 792
17 774 757 739 722 704 686 668 650 632 613
18 595 576 558 539 520 501 482 463 444 424
19 405 385 365 345 325 305 285 265 244 224
20 203 183 162 141 120 099 078 056 035 013
21 0.997992 970 948 926 904 882 860 837 815 792
22 770 747 724 701 678 655 632 608 585 561
23 538 514 490 466 442 418 394 369 345 320
24 296 271 246 221 196 171 146 120 095 069
25 044 018 *992 *967 "941 "914 *888 *862 *836 *809
26 0.996783 756 729 703 676 649 621 594 567 540
27 512 485 457 429 401 373 345 317 289 261
28 232 204 175 147 118 089 060 031 002 *973
29 0.995944 914 885 855 826 796 766 736 706 676
30 646 616 586 555 525 494 464 433 402 371
t For inch-pound applications, multiply the values in this table by 62.4280 to convert
to lbm/ftL
* First three significant figures shown in line below.
83l
USBR 1030
7d453 (1o-86)
SPECIFIC GRAVITY FLASK CALIBRATION
Bureau of Reclamation (VOLUME METHOD) DesignationUSBR 1030-__
P ROJECT FEATURE
Example
CALIBRATION PERFORMED BY DATE COMPUTED BY DATE CHECKED BY DATE
86
1. FLASK NO.
79.88
2. MASS OFFLASK (o)
TRIAL NO.
1 2
325.81 325.80
3. MASS OF FLASK + DISTILLED WATER (o)
23.5 23.0
4. TEMPERATURE OF WATER ( oc}
245.93 245.92
5. MASS OF WATER = (3) - (2) (o)
0.997418 0.997538
6. ABSOLUTE DENSITY OF WATER AT TEMP. (4) (9/cm3 )
246.57 246.53
7. VOLUME OF FLASK - (5)/(6) (cm3)
8. AVERAGE (cm3)
246.55
1. FLASK NO._
8. AVERAGE (cm3)
832
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 1040. The number immediately
following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
2.1 American National Standard, ANSI B40.1-1980; 6.1 Safety Precautions.-Safety glasses are to be worn
Gauges-Pressure Indicating Dial Type -- Elastic Element when applying pressure to the gauges.
2.2 Federal Specification GG-G-76E, Gauges, Pressure,
7. Calibration and Standardization
and Vacuum, Dial Indicating, 1981
3. Summary of Method 7.1 Verify that the primary pressure standard has been
currently calibrated in accordance with manufacturer
3.1 A master gauge is calibrated using a primary specifications. If the calibration is not current, it is to be
pressure standard (see subpar. 9.2, figs. 1 and 3a). The performed before using the primary pressure standard for
pressure gauge to be calibrated is connected to the master this calibration procedure.
gauge as shown on figure.3b. Pressure is applied to the
pressure gauge at predetermined pressure increments over 8. Conditioning
its full operating range. The value indicated by the pressure
gauge is compared to the corresponding value indicated 8.1 Not applicable; special conditioning requirements
by the master gauge at each pressure increment. The are not needed for this procedure.
percent error between the two values is calculated and
the gauge is adjusted as necessary. 9. Procedure
4. Significance and Use 9.1 All data are to be recorded on the "Pressure Gauge
Calibration" form as shown on figure 2.
4.1 Pressure gauges used in the laboratory must be
9.2 Master Gauge Calibration:
calibrated to ensure reliable test results.
9.2.1 Connect the master gauge to the primary pres-
4.2 This calibration procedure is to be performed upon
sure standard and pressure source as shown on figure 3a.
receipt of a pressure gauge and annually thereafter.
9.2.2 Apply pressure to the master gauge in incre-
5. Apparatus ments (a minimum of five) over the full range of the
master gauge.
5.1 Pressure Gauge.-A pressure gauge meeting 9.2.3 Record the value of pressure indicated by the
requirements of Federal Specification GG-G-76E and the primary pressure standard and the corresponding value
American National Standard ANSI B40.1-1980. of pressure indicated by the master gauge for each pressure
5.2 Primary Pressure Standard (fig. 1).-A high increment.
accuracy, deadweight tester designed for precision meas- 9.2.4 Compute the percent error for each pressure
urement of applied gas pressure. The device consists of increment and compare the values obtained with
a weighted piston which becomes suspended in static permissible error values in table 1.
equilibrium when a prescribed gas pressure is introduced. 9.2.5 Adjust the master gauge if necessary (see
Calibrated masses are used for a range of pressures. subpar. 1.1) and repeat subparagraphs 9.2.2 through 9.2.4
833
USBR 1040
l:,,iil de cali,L:laed percent error Jis within the permi..s.ible. TaMe I }:aiest;,Nre gattge aocur,cy gr>dles.:
range specified io table 1. A.o:ura,:y F"erm:is.si!be erro, r, percent c,: span
9,2,6 After th, ree triais, if :he percec, error va]'nes gr a de: Lo.w er Midldle U F'per
ca1cmlat:edl for the master gauge are not whhin th,:tse shown, c, ne- c,.u,r tin, ,,:ne-i:,a 1t: c,,ne- fv, oKh
in ::ab.]le 1, a new rnas.:er gauge shtu, ld be <ab, rain, ed. and c,: scale: o]f: scal!e ,:-xl: s.ca]le
ca]ibratedl in accordance with slbparagraph ,t.2 4A 0 ]l 0 ]1 (I,, ]
9'.3. (;:me (7/ibr3txi;,,n':: 3,,, 0 25 0, 25 (I, 25
9.3 1 C,o, nneer he gaage to be .calib, raed t,o, the maste. 2A 05 05 (I,,5
gauge and. pressure so.nrce as sn, owt:, c,,n, fgnre 3b. A 2 (I ] 0 20
9.32 Apply pesst.e ,,:> the gauge t,::,, be ca]ik:,ratedl B 3 0 2:0 3,0
iln ilncremer, ts ,:ia minimmn Jf five::, c, ver the full alge: c,.f ,171 i (} % () 4 ()
the gauge L':, 5 (} !i 0 5 0
9.3.3 Rec,,:>rd t-e. va],ae c:,t: pre.ssore indicaed by the Wk,,le: at,:en f,,m, ANS]I I!i, li@, 1-1 )8C,.
master gatg:e, and he cc:,rrespo.nding vahJe of pres:s;re Accu, ra<y e*ade is Sl:,eitied by the rnanufacrurer AN,
indicated by :he. gaage being caNibrare.c[ f:,or earn pres.s.re J,ccoraq,, g;dle ,:t 3A gen, era]ly is; s,itak, Je I,u,r most
i] ne re:'fl- e t71 t ge,,,te,Nmic] Lb,at,,t}, testing apg]ka6,cms,
9.3.4 C.orn, pute th, e percent errc,, for ea,ch pressure
increment and compare the: vaie.s t::buined wiidT permis- I0. C:allc:ulatiions
sible error vallue.s, in table 1
9'.3.5 Adjms. the gauge ill oecessary (see subpa. 1.11>
10.1 Calculati,::,ns required are as; shown .on figure 2.
ar, d repeat subpaHgraplns 9'.3.2 thrc@gtl 9.34 unrii] .l-le:
callcLNted percent error va]l,aes ae wkhiin dq, e permiissible 11. Repo.rt
ranges spee:iNed iln :ab,]e 1.
93,6 Ah:er :hree trias, i!f the perc:en, e.rr.or valises 11.. 1 Th, e repc,.t iis. to oo, nsiZs;t of a oon-,p]e:ed and che.cked
calcalaed lf:,:r the gauge ae n.c,: wkh:in, those sh,,,:)wrt iin "Pes.s.ure Gauge Ca]ibratk:,n,:" form ,:6ig. 2111.
ab,]e 1, he gag;e shouldl be rejected f.c, lab{:,ato.ry wise'. "11.2: AH calcu,]athms ae. K,, sho.w a checkmark.
El; } 4
USBR 1040
7-2328 (]0-85)
Bureauof Reclamation
PRESSURE GAUGE CALIBRATION
De=ignation USBR 1040 - 89 --
MANUFACTURER
EXAMPLE
FULLSCALE MASTERGAUGEINDICATION(FCG)1400kPe
Gaugecalibration
0 0 0,0
GPO 849-232
835
USBR 1040
Primary Pressure
Bleed valve ( Standard
Pressure
cutoff valve
Pressure
regulator
Pressure source
(a) Schematic of master gauge calibration
I
Gauge to be calibrated
Pressure
regulo-tor ( )
Pressure source
(b) Schematic of gauge calibration
836
UNITED STATES OF RECLAMATION
INTERIORBuREAU
DEPARTMENT OF THE ,
.USBR 1405-89,
PROCEDURE FOR
CALIBRATING HYDROMETERS
INTRODUCTION
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 1405. The number immediately
following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
837
USBR 1405
dispersion cup. A special dispersion cup conforming to 7.3 In general, a 4-percent solution of sodium
either of the designs shown on figure 1 should be provided. hexametaphosphate is used in performing the calibration
6.4 Thetmometer.-O to 50 C, 0.5 C divisions, procedure stated in subparagraph 7.2 (see subpar. 7.4 for:
conforming to the requirements of ASTM E 1. preparing 8 and 12 percent solutions). To prepare a 4-
6.5 Balance or Scale.-A" typical balance or scale used percent solution, the following procedure is to be followed:
for this designation must be readable to 0.1 g and have 7.3.1 Fill a 1000-mL graduated cylinder with distilled,
,a capacity of about 500 g. water to approximately 750 mL.
6.6 Rubber Stopper.-An appropriate size rubber. 7.3.2 Obtain 40 grams of reagent grade or better:L
stopper to adequately seal the hydrometer cylinder. sodium hexametaphosphate and place it into the dispersion I
6.7 Water Bath.-An automatic temperature-controlled; cup. Add approximately 100 mL of distilled water to thel
water tank or an insulated container large enough to hold, sodium hexametaphosphate. Mix the sodium hexameta-
the hydrometer cylinder is required. It is important that phosphate and water using the malt mixer until the sodium'.
the water bath, hydrometer, and the hydrometer cylinder hexametaphosphate is dissolved. To dissolve the sodium
and its contents be maintained at a constant temperature hexametaphosphate into solution typically requires
for each hydrometer reading. approximately 5 minutes of mixing in the malt mixer.
6.8 Sodium Hexametaphosphate.-A chemical agent in, 7.3.3 Add the solution from the dispersion cup to
powder, crystal, or granular form, used as a dispersingI the graduated cylinder. Fill the graduated cylinder to the
agent. 1000-mL line with distilled water. Take the rubber stopper
6.9 Graduated Cylindet.-lO00 mL capacity, graduatedi and securely place it on top of the graduated cylinder. With
to 10 mL. one hand over the top of the graduated cylinder and the
6.10 Graduated Cylinder.-250 mL capacity, graduated other on the bottom, shake the graduated cylinder to
to 2 mL or other suitable container or method to measure thoroughly mix the solution.
125 mL of the dispersing agent solution. 7.4 In some circumstances, an 8- or 12-percent solution.
may be desired as a dispersing agent. The following
7. Reagentsand Materials
amounts of sodium hexametaphosphate are to be used for
7.1 Distilled water is to be used for obtaining hydrome- the desired percent solution of sodium hexametaphosphate:
ter corrections for gradation analysis that will be performe d
using distilled water as the fluid medium. Solution desired, Sodium hexameta-
7.2 A sodium hexametaphosphate and distilled watet phosphate required, g
4 40
solution is to be used for obtaining hydrometer corrections
8 80
for gradation analysis that will be performed using sodium
12 120
hexametaphosphate as a dispersing agent.
7.5 If an 8- or 12-percent solution is desired, the proce-'
t'-3.75"dio.--,. 3.75"dia. dure outlined in subparagraph 7.3 is to be used along witl
the appropriate amount of sodium hexametaphosphate as'
given in subparagraph 7.4.
7.6 A prepared sodium hexametaphosphate dispersin
Pemanent Removable A
1111 Baffle solution may be stored for no more than 21 days if theI
BRafflse /H/lld
storage temperature remains near room temperature (73[
e
F), and for no more than 7 days if the temperature of
the storage area consistently exceeds 73 E t
7.7 All containers of the dispersing solution must have i
Baffle
the date of preparation and percent solution marked on
Location them.
Plan
8. Precautions
8.1 Technical Ptdcautions:
8.1.1 Sufficient time should be allowed for the.
._j
hydrometer and liquids to reach a temperature equilibrium.
Usually 30 minutes are required for the hydrometer to
.each equilibrium after the liquids have attained the desired
temperature.
8.1.2 Because sodium hexametaphosphate in
Metric Equivalents powder, granular, or crystalline form absorbs moisture, the
material must be stored in airtight containers.
in. 1.3 2.6 3.75
mm 33 66 95.2 9. Preparation of Apparatus
838
USBR 1405
with soapy water and then rinsing it with alcohol and This will either be distilled water or a solution of sodium
again in clean water. hexametaphosphate, as described in subparagraph 7.3 or
7.4.
10. Calibration and Standardization 12.4 The hydrometer is calibrated by taking hydrome-
ter readings at four different temperatures covering the
10.1 Verify that the balance or scale used is currently range of expected test temperatures.
calibrated in accordancewith USBR 1012. If the calibration 12.5 Adjust the temperature of the water bath to the
is not current, perform the calibration before using the lowest calibration temperature desired.
balance or scale for this procedure. 12.6 Place 125 mL of dispersing agent solution into
10.2 Hydrometer Zero Reading Check.-The zero the hydrometer cylinder.
reading must be checked upon receipt of the hydrometer 12.7 Fill the hydrometer cylinder to 1000 mL with
and annually thereafter or anytime hydrometer readings distilled water.
are suspect. 12.8 Apply a rubber stopper and securely place it on
10.2.1 Fill a clean hydrometer cylinder to the top of the hydrometer cylinder. With one hand over the
calibration mark with 1 liter of distilled water. top of the hydrometer cylinder and the other on the'
10.2.2 Prepare a water bath at 20 C and place the hydrometer cylinder bottom, shake the hydrometer cylinder
hydrometer cylinder and distilled water in the bath. Stir until the dispersing agent and distilled water are thoroughly
the water in the cylinder occasionally and allow sufficient mixed.
time for the temperature of the water in the cylinder to 12.9 Place the hydrometer cylinder into the water bath.
come to equilibrium with the bath temperature. 12.10 Dry the hydrometer, if necessary; Carefully place:
10.2.3 Wash the hydrometer to be calibrated witb the hydrometer into the hydrometer cylinder and wait at
soap and distilled water and clean the neck with alcohol. least 30 minutes to allow the temperature of the
Rinse the hyclrometer in distilled water ancl di it with hydrometer, hydrometer cylinder, and liquids to equalize.
a clean towel. 12.11 Record the temperature of the liquid in the
10.2.4 Place the hydrometer in the cylinder and allow hydrometer cylinder to the nearest 0.5 C.
adequate time for the temperature of the hydrometer and 12.12 Determine and record the water level at the top
water to stabilize. of the meniscus on the hydrometer to the nearest 0.5 unit.
10.2.5 Take the reading of the hydrometer at the If the water level is above the zero mark on the hydrometer i
top of the meniscus (see note 1) to the nearest 0.5 unit then the hydrometer correction is recorded as a negative
and record as shown on figure 2. This reading should be value of that reading. If the water level is below the zero
between +0.5 and -1.5. Insert the thermometer so that .marking on the hydrometer, then the hydrometer
the tip is about 8 inches (200 mm) into the hydrometer correction is recorded as a positive value of that reading
cylinder, and check that the water temperature has (see fig. 3).
remained at 20 C. The thermometer should be read to 12.13 Verify the hydrometer reading by removing the
the nearest 0.5 C. ;hydrometer, drying it, and replacing the hydrometer into
the hydrometer cylinder. If the hydrometer readings are
NOTE 1.-Hydrometers are graduated by the manufacturer tc ;not the same, remove the hydrometer and repeat subpara-
be read at the bottom of the meniscus formed by the liquid on graphs 12.10 through 12.12 until a reading can be verified.
the stem. Since it is not possible to secure readings of soil 12.14 Remove the hydrometer and elevate the
.suspensions at the bottom of the meniscus, readings must be temperatureof the water bath to the next desired calibration
taken at the top. By calibrating the hydrometer, using the top temperature. Allow the temperatures of the water bath,
of the meniscus, this correction is automatically accounted. the hydrometer cylinder, and the dispersing agent solution!
to equalize.
10.2.6 If the hydrometer reading does not fall within
12.15 Repeat subparagraphs 12.10 through 12.14 until
the required range, the hydrometer is to be rejected for
ihydrometer readings at four different temperatures
laboratory use. covering the range of expected test temperatures have been
,obtained and verified.
11. Conditioning
12.16 Determine the calibration equation.
11.1 Perform this calibration procedure in an are 12.16.1 Plot the temperature versus hydrometer
where there will not be a large temperature fluctuation :reading data pairs on a graph similar to that shown on
while performing the procedure. figure 4.
12.16.2 Draw a best-fit struight line through the
12. Procedure plotted points (or perform a linear regression analysis and
construct the resulting best-fit straight line on the graph).
12.1 All data are to be recorded on the "Hydrometer 12.16.3 Compare the data points to the straight line
Calibration for Gradation Analysis" form as shown on for acceptability.
figure 2. 12.16.3.1 All data points should plot within +0.5
12.2 Locate and record the hydrometer number. hydrometer unit of the straight line (or the correlation
12.3 Record the type of and percent solution of Coefficient for the linear regression should be equal to or
dispersing agent to be used for the calibration procedure. greater than +0.95).
839
USBR 1405
CALIBRATION DATA
TEMPERATURE
HYDROMETER READING
oC
18.0 6.5
21.0 5.5
25.0 4.0
28.0 5.0
SELECTED POINTS
TEMPERATURE
HYDROMETER READING
C
I y .... b I
m .1.1
(A)" -0.35
GPO 852-933
840
USBR 1405
_ Positive value
y = -0.35 (18.0) + 12.8
y= 6.5
m
14. Report
13.1 Determine the linear equation of the hydrometer Temperature, C Hydrometer correction
calibration line and calculate the hydrometer corrections
"or the temperature range calibrated. 18.0 6.5
13.2 Select the two datapairs closest to the straight 18.5 6.5
!ine and calculate the equation of the straight line. The 19.0 6.O
.luation of the calibration line is determined in the form: 19.5 6.0
20.0 6.0
y= mx+b 20.5 5.5
a,here: 21.0 5.5
y ---- hydrometer correction 21.5 5.5
m = slope of line 22.0 5.0
x : temperature, aC 22.5 5.0
b = hydrometer correction intercept 23.0 5.0
23.5 4.5
13.3 The "Hydrometer Calibration for Gradation 24.0 4.5
Analysis" form illustrates an example calculation of the 24.5 4.0
slope of the calibration line, m, and the intercept, & 25.0 4.0
13.4 Calculate hydrometer corrections using the 25.5 4.0
calibration equation in subparagraph 13.2 and substituting 26.0 3.5
the appropriate temperatures. The temperature range is 26.5 3.5
generally between 18 and 28 C, using 0.5 oC increments. 27.0 3.5
These hydrometer corrections are to be rounded to the 27.5 3.0
nearest 0.5 unit as shown in table 1 for the example 28.0 3.0
calibration equation.
841
USBR 1405
6,0'
Iy---0.35 x +12.8 I CALIBRATION EQUATION
0 ........
O')
(D
Z
5.0-
LU
tJ
I--
LIJ
2.0 I I I I" I I I I I I
18.0 19.0 20.0 21.0 22.0 23.0 ?.4.0 25.0 26.0 27.0 28.0
TEMPERATURE
(C)
842
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 1430-89
PROCEDURE FOR
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760, Division Research and Laboratory
Services Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 1430. The number
immediately following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
1. Scope two steel bearing blocks with hardened faces; the upper
one of which is a spherically seated headblock and the
1.1 This designation outlines the procedure for
lower of a plain rigid block. The faces of the bearing blocks
calibrating the loading device used for permeability tests
as performed in accordancewith USBR 5600 or 5605. when new should not depart from plane by more than
0.0005 inch (0.013 mm) at any point and should be
1.2 This calibration procedure is used to determine the
acceptability of the loading device. maintained within 0.001 inch (0.02 mm). The bearing faces
should be perpendicular to the axis of loading of each
2. Applicable Documents bearing block. The center of the bearing face of the
2.1 USBR Procedures: spherically seated block should coincide with the center
USBR "1104 Load Verification of Testing Machines of the sphere. The moving portion of this block should
USBR 5600 Determining Permeability and Settlement be held closely in the spherical seat, but the design should
of Soils [8-in (203-mm) Diameter Cylinder] be such that the bearing face can be rotated freely and
USBR 5605 Determining Permeability and Settlement tilted through small angles in any direction to prevent
of Soils Containing Gravel eccentric loading conditions.
5.2 LoadingDevice.-A hand-operated hydraulic pump
3. Summary of Method loading device, fitted with a pressure gauge of sufficient
capacity to safely load the ram to at least 75 to 80 percent
3.1 The loading device is placed in a testing machine
of its load rating, including flexiblehose with quick-connect
and is loaded incrementally to the maximum capacity of
couplings for attaching to rams.
the ram. The reading on the pressure gauge of the loading
device is compared to the testing machine load reading 5.3 SteelPlate.-A steel plate equivalent to the top plate
of the permeability apparatus to be placed between the
at each loading increment.
loading device and the upper bearing block of the testing
3.2 The repeatability of the loading device at several
loads is checked, and the loading device is adjusted or machine.
repaired as necessary. 6. Precautions
3.3 A calibration plot definingthe relationship between
pressure gauge readings and testing machine load readings 6.1 Technical Precautions:
is used to determine which pressure gauge readings to 6.1.1 Visually check the condition of the loading
use for a particular load when performing permeability device each time it is used. Be sure that all hydraulic hoses
tests in accordance with USBR 5600 or 5605. and fittingsare connected to the proper inlet and outlet
4. Significance and Use connections of the pump cylinder.
6.1.2 During loading and when the maximum
4.1 A calibrated loading device must be used in the capacity of the ram has been reached, visually check the
laboratory to ensure that correct loads are placed on the system for leaks and malfunctions which could affect test
permeability specimen when the specimen is tested in results.
accordancewith USBR 5600 or 5605. 6.1.3 Use a steel plate between the loading device
4.2 This calibration procedure is to be performed upon and the upper bearing plate of the testing machine. Do
receipt of the loading device and biennially thereafter. not allow the saddle of the ram to come into contact with
the upper bearing plate of the testing machine while it
5. Apparatus
is being loaded because the apparatus may be damaged.
5.1 Testing Machine.-Any type having sufficient load 6.2 Safety Precautions.-Extremecare should be
capacity. The testing machine should be equipped with exercised when working with hydraulic hoses and loading
devices. Safety devices, such as safety glasses and safetv
* Concrete Manual, Bureau of Reclamation, part 2, in press. shoes, must be used while performing the calibration.
843
USBR 1430
RAM CAPACITY 7 t0n .(I 4T000 Ibf) RAM SERIAL NO. 72691 4
o o o o o
REMARKS
844
USBR 1430
7. Calibration and Standardization for defects and adjust or repair as necessary. Repeat the
procedure until the readings meet the criteria.
7.1 Verify that the testing machine has been recently 9.11 Compute the average of the three load readings
calibrated in accordancewith USBR 1104. If the calibration for each pressure increment.
is not current, perform the calibration before using the 9.12 Prepare a plot of average load versus pressure
testing machine. gauge reading, and draw a best fit line from the origin
through the data points as shown on figure 2.
8. Conditioning
10. Calculations
8.1 The room temperature should not vary more than
+5 C during the calibration. 10.1 Determine the averageof the three load readings.
8.2 Place the loading device and other apparatus in RI + R2+ R3
the environment in which it is to be calibrated for at least A--
3
24 hours before performing the calibration procedure. where:
A = average load
9. Procedure
R1, R2,/ = individual load readings
9.1 All data are to be recorded on the "Loading Device
11. Report
Calibration for Permeability Tests" form as shown on
figure 1. 11.1 The report is to consist of the followingcompleted
9.2 Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for and checked form and plot:
guidelines on operating the testing maching. "Loading Device Calibration for Permeability Tests"
9.3 Assemble the ram, hydraulic line, pressure gauge, form (fig. 1).
and pump. Ensure that all air is removed from the system. A plot of the calibration results (fig. 2).
See manufacturer's instructions for the recommended 11.2 All calculations are to show a checkmark and
method to remove air from the loading device. all plotting must be checked.
9.4 Place the ram in the load frame of the testing
machine. Be sure there is .sufficient clearance between the sooo
and the upper bearing plate of the testing machine. ooo Pump Stral NO. USBR 3)30
i .
9.6 Pump the loading device until a pressure gauge
reading equal to about 10 percent of the maximum capacity
4000
of the pressure gauge is reached. Read and record the
pressure gauge reading as shown on figure 1. w
9.7 Using the most sensitive range possible of the g 3O00
845
tc
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
( )
USBR 1440-89
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. This procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 1440. The number immediately
following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
846
USBR t440,
:, i7'
USBR 1440
oscillation. The resulting amplitude at the center of the 10.3.7 Align the match marks on the masses, and
out-of-phase table can be considerably less than that on securely bolt the pieces together using three socket head
either side. bolts.
7.2.4 Examine the condition of all the mounting 10.3.8 Place the vacuum plate and adjustable stand
holes on the vibratory table deck to ensure that the threads directly in front of the vibratory table.
are not stripped. If the threads are stripped, rotate the 10.3.9 Attach a vacuum line from the vacuum plate
bolt pattern 180 degrees, if possible, and redrill the to a vacuum pump, turn on the vacuum pump, and check
mounting holes. to see if the stand and plate are secure by shaking the
7.2.5 Ensure that the flat surfaces of the three-piece mast of the stand. There will be some movement due to
calibration mass are ground to a smooth finish as described flexing of the steel pipe; however, the vacuum plate should'
in subparagraph 6.3.1. not move.
7.2.6 Ensure that the LVDT extension rods have 10.3.10 Slide the two calibration stand brackets over
been made in accordance with subparagraph 6.2.1. The the mast, and attach and secure the bracket extension arms.
rods are to be made of a nonmagnetic metal, preferably 10.3.11 Position the lower bracket over the right
brass. side of the calibration mass and the upper bracket over
the left side of the calibration mass, and secure each using
8. Calibration and Standardization the locking bolts on the calibration stand bracket.
10.3.12 Ensure that all personnel in the vicinity of
8.1 Ensure that the LVDTs are currently calibrated in the vibratory table are wearing ear protectors.
accordance with USBR 1008. Verify the calibration of the 10.3.13 Turn the rheostat located on the control box
LVDTs each time a vibratory table is calibrated in to the 100-percent setting, and activate the vibrator by
accordance with procedure in subparagraph 10.4. moving the on/off switch to the "on" position.
8.2 Verify that the oscilloscope and voltmeter have 10.3.14 Allow the vibratory table to operate at this
been calibrated within the last year. If the calibrations are setting for a minimum of 5 minutes, and then deactivate
not current, the oscilloscope and voltmeter should be sent the vibrator by moving the on/off switch to the "off"
to a qualified calibration agency for calibration prior to use. position.
10.4 Verification of LVDT Calibration:
9. Conditioning
10.4.1 Connect the oscilloscope and amplifier to a
power supply in accordance with the manufacturer's
9.1 Allow all electronic equipment to warm up for a
specifications.
minimum of 30 minutes prior to use to ensure stability.
10.4.2 Attach LVDT No. 1 cable to channel No. 1
9.2 Calibrate the vibratory table in its permanently
of the amplifier. Similarly, attach the LVDT No. 2 cable
mounted location.
to channel No. 2 of the amplifier.
10. Procedure 10.4.3 Attach the output cable from channel No. 1
of the amplifier to channel No. 1 of the oscilloscope.
10.1 All data are to be recorded on the "Vibratory Table Similarly, attach the output cable from channel No. 2 of
Calibration Sheet" as shown on figure 3. the amplifier to channel No. 2 of the oscilloscope.
10.2 Locate and record all pertinent information as 10.4.4 Connect the voltmeter to the terminal of the
shown on figure 3. Be sure to include Remarks with regard amplifier such that the voltage output of the LVDTs can
to voltage source characteristics as well as table mount be constantly monitored.
location and condition. 10.4.5 Attach the LVDT mounting block to the
10.3 Calibration Using the 300-1bin Calibration Mass: LVDT mounting block carrier as shown on figure X2.2.
10.3.1 Place the bottom one-third of the 300-1bin 10.4.6 Slide the LVDT mounting block assembly
(136-kg) calibration mass on the vibratory table deck. onto the bracket extension arm, and loosely secure it in
10.3.2 Align the bolt down tabs with the appropriate place by slightly turning the thumb screw.
mounting holes, being sure that the front mark on the 10.4.7 Attach the Teflon guides and LVDT core
calibration mass is to the frontof the table. extension rod to the core of LVDT No. 1 as shown on
10.3.3 Secure the calibration mass to the table using figure 4a. The purpose of the Teflon guides is to ensure
three 3/8-inch-diameter bolts having a minimum length that, when the LVDT core is being displaced for calibration
of 1-1/4 inches. verification, there is no horizontal movement which could
10.3.4 Place the second one-third of the 300-1bin affect the calibration.
calibration mass on top of the bottom calibration mass. 10.4.8 Slide the body of LVDT No. 1 into the
10.3.5 Align the match marks on the masses, then mounting block assembly attached to the bracket extension
securely bolt the two pieces together using three socket arm located over the right side of the calibration mass,
head bolts. and secure the LVDT body in place by tightening the
10.3.6 Place the top one-third of the 300-1bin mounting block screw.
calibration mass onto the two calibration masses already 10.4.9 Position the LVDT core with the extension
bolted in place. rod attached (fig. 4a) into the body of the LVDT.
848
USBR 1440
7-2330 (11-85) l 1
Bureau of Reclamation VIBRATORY TABLE CALIBRATION SHEET Designation USBR 1440 - 8 9
Manufacturer Example
Calibrationperformedby Date
VP75 A 6035
Table
V75 C22724
Vibrator
230 Vac 60 Hz
Rated voltage
Remarks (voltage) Voltage drops from 240 Vac at generator to 236 Vac at table.
Yes No
Top mountsreplaced X
Bottommountsreplaced X
Dismantled
X
Cleaned x
Adjusted
x
Table mounfed inside 8-by 10-fool metal shed power to the vibratory table
Remarks
849
USBR 1440
8O 0,012 6, I
60 O. 007 5,3
40 0,004 4,4
20 0,003 3,8
0
0.002 3.5
100
Recommended Rheostat Setting
Remarks
95 Ibm calibrationmass
100=
0.OI4 0.014 0,014 6, I
60 0.012 5.7
4O 0.008 4.6
20 0.003 4.4
0 0.002 3.5
8o%
RecommendedRheostatSetting
Remarks Striking of pole faces observed at this selling, DO NOT OPERATE VIBRATOR AT I00 %.
GPO 849-230
850
USB, R 1440
,% I
USBR 1440
10,.5.8 Check the vc,,kage output o.f LADT No. 1 and. RFLAT]IVE b,ENSITY TIABLE C.,,L]3%RATION
readjust to 0.0 vc,,k, it: necessary.
10.5.9 Ensur'e that all[ persorme], in :l-e vicinity of Lo(adon,:: De.m.,er Offke Geoechclkal Se.rvke:.s Banclnt
the ,dbrata, ry tak,,le are wearing ear prci, tec::ors. Dte:: February 2:2, ]gIBe;'
10.5.10 Ensure t:hat he heostat llocaed on the M,:Jdl: No. \.P-75.A Unit 2 Setiia] No. t:itZl'[0i.l:h: .(Con, mhc,]llerll
cc,,ntrc,,][ box is at the ll{}0-percent s, ettng.
10.5.11 Activate the viibrator by moving the o,n/'a, ff.
switch to t:he. "cx, n '' position..
]0.5,.12 Check: the oscilk,scope race to see that the
traces are:. in the prc,.per l[ocadons; Le.,, ght L3?DT is the
top trace: and left LVID,T ils; the bc,,ttc,,m tace. If they are
not in i]hie, proper Iocatio.ns,, adjust them by turning the
pc,,sitc,,n, k:nobs on r:he c,s;dIlosco,pe.
10.5.13 Lo,ck d-m tzaces o, cJ the o, scll[ci, s.c:ope s,ceen
by pressing: the app, ropriate contro.l[s on the osciilloscope..
11{t.5,..14 Obtain a pl-omgiap.h of the oscilloscope
traces, for F,,ermanent e.cozd as;. sho.wn on fiigure S.
10.5.15 If' tl-e co.ntrc,,l[ box for the vibrator>, table s
equipped wild, an amme.ter, read and recci, rd the amperage
value as showl c,,n figare 3. C,nnt,'oll]er Setting (::, 100 Mass on Unit:: 3110 AMP'S: 72
R.en-,arks: (:er,et as t',,::,und Photo #i
10,,5,16 Deactivate. 4m. vibratoi by mr'ning the o,n/"
off switch to the. "'off" po.sJiriion.
10.5.17 Loosen the locknuts holding the LVDT core
extension rod to the calibration rn, ass o,n either the right
or leR LVD']7'I
10.5.18; Unsc:rew the LVDT core extensior, ro,d frc,,m
d'e calibration mass, tc<sen the locking boks on the
c:al[ibration stand backet, and s.wiing the: h, racket so tl'at
the LVDT is. posiMoned directl? over the: threaded center
ho.le in the: ca]ih, ra:io, n mass.
10.5.1q Screw the LVDT core exte.ns, ic,,n rod ]into the
ho]Ie iln the cente.z' of the cal]h, ration mass, and lock: it h-,
pos.kion.
10.5.20 Carefully adjust the caibratici, n, s;tanid bracket
and I_VDT hc, l[d:er so that the I_.hDT" co.re is in the center
of the LVDT body.
10.5.21 Slide t]h,e LVDT body p. or down accc,,>din, gl 7 Conto]l]er Selting i:!;i) 100 M*; a,n Unit: 300 AMP'F;:: 72
Unltil[ the volrme.te reads at or near' ()'.0 vol[t. t.emarks.:: Le.ft and RJight as l;ound LT'= B,::ltlona, RT = Top Ph,:,to #2
10.5.22: Repeat subparagraph 10.5..9 rlTroagh 10,5.16,
Figure 5. - RdatJve ,de'ns]Lv tJble ,calibratic,n,--s f,:und ,::,sd][k}sa.:pe traces.
10.6 Examine the c, sciHosco, pe trace photc,,grap]hs
obtain, ed in subparagraph 10.5.14 f:cr the: siides and center
c,l[: the calibratk:,,n: mass.. values, c:,f amp]l{tude,, the recessary repaJirs andl,/or
1(],.7 If the: sides, and c:en, te oscilloscope photographs; adjiasrme.n, ts mast be: made o the vibratory unk M oder
iindicate the viibratcary ta, ble is. p.roduciing the cc,,rect vc;, oh, rain the correct amplitude.
amF,.imde ';,a]ae.s; i..e.=,. 0.CIq3_+:0.00,2 inch (0,._:i,3,--0.05 rnm),
NCII'E 4.-For a new ',,ih, rat:ory table, it is recommended that
repeat subparag:raphs 10'.5.9 through 10,.522 with rheostat
the: viibtatc,,<} unit be dlis, mant][ed a>i adl paint be remo'.ed from
sett:ngs of 80, 6;0,:, 40, 20, and 0. the ends of th, e cc, i][ s.pring:s s,n,::e gadeal we:.aziing of the F,,am, t
can ,cas.e changes in cfik,,aric,,n values ,tbtained. This should
N(TFE 3-The ',,;b.rat,,:}ry tame is calibrated air rheostat sertinig:s be ac,cc,,nnp.]lished bef,:re usling d'se vibratory table.
less. than, 1(}0 per'cent so tha a pnc, pe rheost:at s.etting can be
determined for performing :he niaxirnurn index niit weiight .,:ff ] 0.9 l[.<ib,ra tot A d,is;'em!'en rs: :
cokies;ion][es;s s::i,ls, using the. we methc, d, as. ,outlined in USBP, 10..9.1 Check the d.ist:arce Between the top o.{ the
55. 30.
l!ocknut ne.aest the leaf s;p,riing cl[am,p to, :he: bottom of
i07.1 Ze.turr the LVDT ]located n the center of thie. the leaf s.p.rh-hg clamp, item D, fiigure XI2. The distance
ca]Iibaric,.n n:iass o. either the. right ,3. ]left: position thorn ,.,mch should be:. appr,:>:imately 7/"8 inch (2:2 re, m). [f it is no.t:,.
it: was moved h subp, arag;aph ]0.5]8. Repea subF,,a'ag=aph, s k:<sen t:he locknuts. Set the correct distance and re'peat
]0520 and 1052]. sabparagapl-s 10.5i' through 10.516.
10.8 l[f: the slides or center oscil[loscope phc,,togaphs 10.9.2 I: tl-e: double amplitude vaW, es are:. equal to,
indicate: that the vi!braory tabl[e is producing in:coec 0.0 ] 3, +-:'11). 002: ]i , c In, '=:i 0.3, 3,-+: 0' 0' S m m ) , p r o c e ed a s, pe
852
USB;R 1440,
s,ubparagraphs I0.5..17 through 10..7;; if nc,,:.., adldi!donal RELATIVE DENSFFY YT!LE CAL.IBR.,'TIO,N
vibrator adjustmerts need to, be made.. This may be dc,,ne
Locatkm,:: Denver Office Geotech,Jcal Services B.:accln,
by further adjustirJg the: locknuts, item B:,. figare XI 2. I)te:: February 22, "rcl'8.c:l '
1093 Ensure :hat a]:l personnell in the vicir, ity of Mode]l: No,. ,?P-75A Unit: .7.! Sei]:l No,. 60103.6. <Con,:o]ller)
:he viibrarc,,ry table are. wearing ear pro,:ecu:rs.
10.9'4 Ensure that th, e rheostat is, at: 100-p,ercent
se.ting, and turn the vibrator contr,c;]llLer o,n.
10.95 Wkh one peas.on at: each stud (item 9:,. fig;
X1.2),, simukaneo,usly tnrn d:e bottom lock nuts. It the
amplitude of the vibrator is too. k>w, the bottom ]ocknuts
are :c,, be tightened. 1 the amp, Htude .o.f :he vibrator ils:
tc,,,o high, :Be k:,om:m 1ocknuts are to be ]loosened. If the
desk'ed values of amp][imde cannot be obtained by a,djiasting
the hot:ram ][c,,c:knuts, it ma?, be n, ecessary to. eh:her :igl-t:er,
or loosen the :c.ic,, ],:,&nuts; to oh:rain the desired valae.s.
10,9.,6 Secure the loekn, ats agai!ns: cme anot:h, er when
the desired ampUtude values are obtairJed and turn the
vibrator co, ntroller off.
10.9.7 Ensure that :he stopnut (item 15, trig. X1.2)
which hc,,lds d:m. armature casting tc,, ::he coiii assemh,,ly is C,0ntrol]er Seuing .(e?:) 1[00 Mass oll Unit::: 30'0 AMPS:: 74
F.emarks; After adji recc, mmer,ded selt[ng [oi: 1./'2 [:t measure
seciare.. If the s,:c,,pnut needs m be replace&, i: is. to. be ?hot c, 3 Center
replaced with a new one. Never rease a worn stopnut.
10.10 Check t,_ba:ra:n'ee Betu:*een Pole Faces W'tk, (,h:k:
be'at/on Mass fn, PtS'ce' (model V-8;0 only,, fig;.. XI.1, item A)::
10.10.1 Obtaiin twc, strips of paper app, roximatel'y
3./8 inch (10 ram) wide at east ,6 inches (150 ram) l:ong,
and insert one s.trip between each o the: pole faces ot"
rhe viibra:c,,r.
10'.1,{}.2: Ensure: that the. rheostat is set at: 100 percent:
and that aIl persc,,nne.i in the vicilnity are. weaing ear
prc:,:ectors; turn the vibratory tahde on c,,r abo,ut 5 seconds.
10'.10.3 Turn the vibratory taNe off and check the
paper'. Marking:s or the F,,aper irdicate that the pole traces.
are makieg: contact.
10.10'.4 Adjiust the. vibrarc,,r iin accordance with
subp.aragaph 10.9, and repeat s.ubparagraph, s I0,.10.1
Cc,.rm:dler S,e:ming ('%) 100 Mass o,n ]m.lrllit: .,Cl,0 AMPS: 7.4
rhrovgh 1.0.I0.3 until markings are nor seen on the paper.
Remarks: After adji recorrunended s.eming fc, r ?/2 f:: measure
ll0. I0.5 Repeat subparagrap, hs 10.10.2 through F'h,nto #4 L.t" = Bortc:,m, KT'= To,p
10.10.4 irs.erting the second F, aper strip on d:e opposite
side c,.f the vilt:,ratory tablle as: heft>re. Figure 6. - Relat:Ne: de.nsi:ry ::able calibari.on -- a,f'mr sdjus:in,g
10.10,6 Exami!ne the. c,,sci]loscope trace. I the: CtSCilk)scope, :l',a:ces,
85q
USBR 1440
10.12.1 Place the 95-1bm (43-kg) calibration mass air gap be checked at this setting as prescribed in either
on the vibratory table. subparagraph 10.10 or 10.11, whichever is appropriate.
10.12.2 Align the boltdown tabs with the approp-, 10.12.13 Loosen the locknuts holding the LVDT core
riate mounting holes in the table top; be sure that th extension rods to the calibration mass, and unscrew the
front mark on the mass is to the front of the table. rods from the mass.
10.12.3 Secure the calibation mass to the table using 10.12.14 Move the adjustable stand as required, and
three 3/8-inch-diameter bolts having a minimum length remove the 95-1bm mass from the table deck.
of 1-1/4-inches. Use washers if necessary. 10.12.15 Disconnect all electronic equipment, and
10.12.4 To measure the double amplitude of the carefully store the calibration masses in a suitable container.
vibratory table with the 95-1bm calibration mass, repea
subparagraphs 10.3.8 through 10.3.11 and 10.5.1 through, 11. Interpretation of Results
10.5.22.
10.12.5 Examine the oscilloscope trace photographs
obtained in subparagraph 10.5.14. 11.1 If the vibratory table fails to produce the required
10.12.6 If the sides and center oscilloscope photo- double amplitude as specified in this procedure, it should
graphs indicate the vibratory table is producing the correct either be repaired or rejected.
amplitude values; i.e., 0.0130.002 inch (0.330.05 mm), 11.2 Under no circumstances should the vibratory table
repeat subparagraphs 10.5.9 through 10.5.22 with rheostat be operated with a power source which provides 5 percent
settings of 80, 60, 40, 20, and 0. less than, or 10 percent greater than (approximately), the
10.12.7 If the double amplitudeexceed the prescribed rated power requirements of the vibratory table. If the
value, the rheostat is to be adjusteduntil the correct double power source is insufficient, it is recommended that a step-
amplitude value is obtained. up transformer be installed to obtain the desired voltage.
10.12.8 Turn on the vibratory table with the rheostat
set at 100 percent. 12. Report
10.12.9 Slowly turn the rheostat counterclockwise,
and monitor the oscilloscope until the correct value of
amplitude is obtained. 12.1 The report is to consist of a completed and checked
10.12.10 Obtain a photograph of oscilloscope trace, "Vibratory Table Calibration Sheet" (fig. 3) along with
and record the recommended rheostat setting that is the photographs obtained at each rheostat setting.
required in order to obtain the correct double amplitude. 12.2 See appendix X1 for sketches of vibratory table
10.12.11 Turn off the vibratory table. component parts.
10.12.12 After determining the recommended 12.3 See appendix X2 for drawings of vibratory table
setting for the vibratory table, it is recommended that the calibration equipment.
854
USBR 1440
855
USBR 1440
APPENDIX Xl
856
USBR 1440
857
USBR 1440
APPENDIX X2
OscilloscopeJ
Staff onary
.Frame I ,., I
Volt met er
body
DT core
on Moss
Vibrator
Control ]
I
Vibrating
Table
858
USBR 10
9.200 B.C.
- 63/See note 7
859
USBR 1440
See note 7
ONE REQ'D
860
USBR 1440
41
-5 Drilled thr,u counter,bor,e
ee x 0.70 deep, equally spaced
i
izo'.
t , See note 7
PART C-TOP MASS
ONE REQ e D
,//0.312 Rf-0.6875
0
0
.,--j__ -',
m
1- 2.300 .!
SOCKET HEAD SCREW PART D-HOLD DOWN TABS
6 REQID 3 REQtD
861
USBR 1440
it*
No. 6-4OUNF x deep
equally spaced.
2-1-11NCxl'deep
\
equally spaced.
F//A VA__
6.750
2.85
4.85
CALIBRATION MASS
PART A
ONE REQUIRED
862
USBR 1440
PART A 7
Dio. round rod.----t-- ONE REQUIRED i ..... --,
/ k i u, ends)
CENTER STEEL ROD AND NUTS iHex nut(Both
PART B
ONE REQUIRED
' PART C
" TWO REQUIRED
,o 'nc squ:,:i
d,1,o. in'
Hex nut
18.0 _--! 2 Sched. 40 block pipe.
863
USBR 1440
is Oia.
"' 6NC
-II:I:I:I:I,%$111] -_
EXTENSION ARMS
STANDARD :5/8 NC BOLT AND NUT
PART F
TWO OF EACH REQUIRED PART G
TWO REQUIRED
5 J II:
i
III
,I,
T I
tit
i-- f- 18 NC
,- 1.9 I
864
USBR 14O
I ,o / _
.. 1-8
4.0__0 i
I LVDT NO.I * |
J TO VM* SCOPE* LVOI' Oi'hle
I
o
/ - Oio. h,e-" I / I /
I LVDT NO.Z* | LVDT NO.Z*
I scoPE, ,v-o,.I
2.25 1.75
3.60
8.00
865
USBR 1440
COl I -- PAR T
DESCRIPTION
"NO.
I Signol conditioners CASO25mfg. Schoevitz Engr, 2
LI 2 LVDTS Model IO00HRmfg. Schoevitz Engr. 2
"Top 3 Straight female plug type ASF (Switchcroft) 2
I 4
4 Moleponel socket type DSM (Switchcroft) 2
,Yljl
5 Phono j0ck plug type 3SOIFP (Switchcroft) I
Ph._ono iock plu 9 tpe 3,502 (Switchcroft) I
-io
1-
I
I
...... I
I
-,--r.J, I, L%,on,
INSTRUMENTATION BOX
PART L
ALL SIDES I/2" PLYWOOD,WITH FORMICA FINISH
l
TI (o.zs"
I
I
II
T"
J
I5
30"
0.375" ( ; : . ;" ,. ,( ;:
f * 'NC HOleS drill Ond top :thru.
,A, Ezisting holes
866
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
PROCEDURE FOR
INTRODUCTION
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 5005. The number immediately
following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
This procedure is similar to ASTM D 2488, Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure)
except for the following: (1) change in title and format, (2) references to USBR procedures, (3) note 2 in ASTM D 2488 is
required in this procedure, (4) note 4 in ASTM D 2488 is required in this procedure, (5) the maximum particle size is in millimeters
with prescribed increments of measurement, (6) the specimens for the dry strength test are one-fourth inch (6 mm) in diameter
rather than one-half inch (12 mm), (7) note 14 is not used, and (8) moisture content is used here instead of water content
and mass is substituted for weight.
For circumstances where it may be required or expedient to use ASTM standards, ASTM D 2487 or D 2488 may be substituted
for USBR 5000 or 5005, respectively. However, it must be clearly stated in written comments, tables, figures, and logs that the
ASTM standards were used.
867
USBR 5005
.)
I I
G
G
o
E
v
v
-g
0
0
G
G
0
m m
I
I
868
USBR 5005
869
USBR 5O05
that do not distinctly place the soil into a specific group Coarse -- Passes 3-inch (75-mm) sieve and retained
(see app. X3). on 3/4-inch (19.0-mm) sieve
Fine -- Passes 3/4-inch (19.0-mm) sieve and
4. Significance and Use retained on No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve
4.1 The descriptive information required in this 5.2.2 Sand.-Particles of rock that will pass a No. 4
procedure can be used to describe a soil to aid in the evalu- (4.75-mm) sieve and be retained on a No. 200 (75-/zm)
ation of its significant properties for engineering use. sieve with the followingsubdivisions:
4.2 The descriptive information required in this
procedure should be used to supplement the classification Coarse -- Passes No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and retained
of a soil as determined in USBR 5000. on No. 10 (2.00-mm) sieve
4.3 This procedure may be used in identifying soils Medium -- Passes No. 10 (2.00-mm) sieve and retained
using the classification group symbols and names as on No. 40 (425-#m) sieve
prescribed in USBR 5000. Since the names and symbols Fine -- Passes No. 40 (425-#m) sieve and retained
used in this procedure to identify the soils are the same on No. 200 (75-/m) sieve
as those used in USBR 5000, it shall be clearly stated in
5.2.3 Clay.-Soil passing the No. 200 (75-#m) U.S.A.
reports, etc., that the classification symbol and name are
Standard sieve that exhibits plasticity (putty-like
based on the visual-manual procedures.
properties) within a range of moisture contents, and which
4.4 This procedure is to be used not only for
exhibits considerable strength when air-dried. For
identification of soils in the field but also in the office,
classification, a clay is a fine-grained soil, or the fine-grained
in the laboratory, or wherever soil samples are inspected
and described. portion of a soil, having a plasticity index equal to or greater
than 4 and the plot of plasticity index versus liquid limit
4.5 The procedure has particular value in grouping
falls on or above the "A'-line (see fig. 3, USBR 5000).
similar soil samples so that only a minimum number of
5.2.4 Silt.-Material passing the No. 200 (75-am)
laboratory tests need be run for positive soil classification.
U.S.A. Standard sieve that is nonplastic or very slightly
NOTE 2.-The ability to describe and identify soils correctly plastic and that exhibits little or no strength when air-
is learned more readily under the guidance of experienced dried (ASTM). For classification, a silt is a fine-grained
personnel, but it also may be acquiredsystematically by comparing soil, or the fine-grainedportion of a soil, having a plasticity
numerical laboratory test results for typical soils of each type index less than 4 or if the plot of plasticity index versus
with their visual and manual characteristics. liquid limit falls below the "A"-line (see fig. 3, USBR 5000).
5.2.5 Organic Clay-A clay with sufficient organic
4.6 When describing and identifying soil samples from content to influence the soil properties. For classification,
a given boring, test pit, or group of borings or pits, it an organic clay is a soil that would be classified as a clay
is not necessary to follow all of the processes in this except that its liquid limit value after ovendrying is less
procedure for every sample. Soils which appear to be similar than 75 percent of its liquid limit value before ovendrying.
can be grouped together. One sample from the group can 5.2.6 Organic Silt.-A silt with sufficient organic
be completely described and identified, with the others content to influence the soil properties. For classification,
referred to "as similar" based on performing only a few an organic silt is a soil that would be classified as a silt
of the descriptive and identification processes described except that its liquid limit value after ovendrying is less
in this procedure. than 75 percent of its liquid limit value before ovendrying.
5. Terminology 6. Apparatus
5.1 Definitions are in accordance with USBR 3900. 6.1 Required Apparatus:
Terms of particular significance are: 6.1.1 Small supply of water.
5.1.1 Boulder.-A particle of rock that will not pass 6.1.2 Pocket knife or small spatula.
a 12-inch (300-mm) square opening. 6.2 Useful Auxiliary Apparatus:
5.1.2 Cobble.-A particle of rock that will pass a 6.2.1 Small bottle of dilute hydrochloric acid, one
12-inch (300-mm) square opening and be retained on a part HC1 (10 N) to three parts distilled water.
3-inch (75-mm) U.S.A. Standard sieve. 6.2.2 Small test tube and stopper, or jar with a lid.
5.1.3 Peat.-A soil composed primarily of vegetable 6.2.3 Dish for wash test.
tissue in various stages of decomposition with an organic 6.2.4 Small hand lens.
odor, a dark brown to black color, a spongy consistency, 6.2.5 Ruler.
and a texture ranging from fibrous to amorphous (ASTM
D 2487-83). 7. Precautions
5.2 Terms Specific to This Designation:
5.2.1 GraveL-Particles of rock that will pass a 3-inch 7.1 When preparing the dilute HC1 (hydrochloric acid)
(75-mm) sieve and be retained on a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve solution of one part concentrated HCI (10 N) to three
with the followingsubdivisions: parts of distilled water, slow!y add acid into water following
870
USBR 5005
necessary safety precautions. Handle with caution and store Table 1. - Criteria for describing angularity of coarse-grained particles
safely. If solution comes in contact with skin, rinse: (see fig. 3).
thoroughly with water.
Rounded - Particles have smoothly curved sides and no edges
CAUTION.-Do not add water to acid. Subrounded - Particles have nearly plane sides but have well-
rounded corners and edges
8. Sampling Subangular - Particles are similar to angular description but
have rounded edges
Angular - Particles have sharp edges and relatively plane
8.1 The sample shall be considered to be representative sides with unpolished surfaces
of the stratum, from where it was obtained, by an
appropriate acceptedor standard procedure.
NOTE 3.-The sampling procedure should be identified as ) ( ROUNDED
having been conducted in accordance with a USBR procedure
or an ASTM standard, or other appropriate standard or procedure.
Smoothly curved sides and edges.
8.2 The sample shall be carefully identified as to origin.
NOTE 4.-Remarks as to the origin may take the form of a SUBROUNDED
boring number and sample number in conjunction with a job
number, a geologic stratum, a pedologic horizon, or a location
description with respect to a permanent monument, grid system, Nearly plane sides with well-
or station number and offset with respect to a stated centerline,
and a depth or elevation.
rounded corners and edges.
8.3 For accurate description and identification, the SUBANGULAR
minimum amounts of the specimen to be examined shall
be in accordancewith the following schedule:
9.5
mm
4.75
in
No. 4
3/8
kg
0.1
0.25
Ibm
0.2
0.5
e
19.0 3/4 1.1 2.5 Sharp edges and relatively plane
37.5 1-1/2 10 20
75.0 3" 70 150 sides with unpolished surfaces,
NOTE 5.-If random, isolated particles are encountered that as freshly broken rock.
are significantly larger than the particles in the soil matrix, the
soil matrix can be accurately describedand identified in accordance Figure 3. - Typical angularity of coarse-grained particles.
with the above schedule.
Table 2. - Criteria for describing particle shape (see fig. 4).
8.4 If the field sample or specimen being examined
is smaller than the minimum amount, the report shall The particle shape shall be described as follows where length,
width, and thickness refer to the greatest, intermediate, and least
include an appropriate remark.
dimensions of a particle, respectively.
9. Descriptive Information width _> 3
Flat - Particles with thicknes-----
9.1 Describe the angularityof the sand (coarse sizes
only), gravel, cobbles, and boulders as rounded, subrounded, Elongated - Particles with length > 3
width
subangular, or angular as indicated by the criteria in table Flat and
1 and on figure 3. A range of angularity may be stated elongated - Particles meet criteria for both flat and elongated
such as subrounded to rounded.
9.2 Describe the shape of the gravel, cobbles, and
boulders as flat, elongated, or flat and elongated if they of varying colors, this should be noted and all representative
meet the criteria in table 2 and on figure 4; otherwise, colors should be described. Color should be described for
do not remark. Indicate the fraction of particles having moist samples. If color represents a dry condition, this
that shape such as one-third of gravel particles are flat. should be stated in the report.
9.3 Describe the color. Color is an important property 9.4 Describe the odor if organic or unusual. Soils
in identifying organic soils and within a given locality it containing a significant amount of organic material usually
may also be useful in identifying materials of similar have a distinctive odor of decaying vegetation. This is
geologic origin. If the sample contains layers or patches especially apparent in fresh samples; but if the samples
871
USBR 5005
872
USBR 5005
9.13 Additional comments should be noted such as: 12.2 The soil is coarse grained if it contains less than
Presence of roots or root holes 50 percent fines; followparagraph 14.
Difficulty in drilling or augeringhole
Caving of trench or hole 13. Procedure for Identifying Fine-Grained Soils
Presence of mica
13.1 Selection.-Select a representative sample of the
9.14 A local or commercial name and/or a geologic
material for examination. Remove particles larger than
interpretation for the soil may be added if identified as
the No. 40 sieve (medium sand and larger) until a specimen
such. equivalent to about a handful of material is available. Use
9.15 A classification or identification of the soil
this specimen for performing the dry strength, dilatancy,
according to other classification systems may be added if
and toughness tests.
identified as such.
13.2 DrySrrength.-From the specimen, select enough
10. Identification of Peat material to mold into a ball about 1 inch (25 mm) in
diameter. Mold the material until it has the consistency
10.1 A sample composed primarily of vegetable tissue of putty; add water if necessary.
in various stages of decomposition that has a fibrous to 13.2.1 From the molded material, make at least three
amorphous texture--usually a dark brown to black color-- test specimens. A test specimen shall be a ball of material
and an organic odor should be designated as a highly organic about 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. Allow the test
soil and shall be identified as peat, PT, and not subjected specimens to dry in air or sun or dry by artificial means
to the identification procedures described hereafter. as long as the temperature does not exceed 140 F (60 C).
13.2.2 If the test specimen contains natural dry
11. Specimen Preparation for Identification lumps, those that are about 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter
may be used in place of the molded balls.
11.1 The soil identification portion of this procedure
is based on the minus 3-inch (75-mm) particle sizes. The NOTE &-The process of molding and drying usually produces
plus 3-inch (75-mm) particles must be removed, manually, higher strengths than are found in natural dry lumps of soil.
for a loose sample, or mentally evaluated, for an intact
13.2.3 Test the strength of the dry balls or lumps
sample before classifying the soil.
by crushing between the fingers and note the strength
11.2 Estimate and note the percentage of cobbles and
as none, low, medium, high, or very high according to
the percentage of boulders. Performed visually, these
the criteria in table 8. If natural dry lumps are used, do
estimates will be on the basis of volume percentage.
not use the results of any of the lumps that are found
NOTE &-Since the percentages of the particle-size distribution to contain particles of coarse sand.
in USBR 5000 are by dry mass and the estimates of percentages 13.2.4 The presence of high-strength water-soluble
for gravel, sand, and fines in this procedure are by dry mass, cementing materials, such as calcium carbonate, may cause
it is recommended that the report state that the percentages exceptionally high dry strengths. The presence of calcium
of cobbles and boulders are by volume. carbonate usually can be detected from the intensity of
11.3 Of the fraction of the soil smaller than 3 inches the reaction with dilute hydrochloric acid (see subpar. 9.6).
(75 mm), estimate and note the percentage, by dry mass, 13.3 Dilatancy.-From the specimen, select enough
of the gravel, sand, and fines. (See app. X4 for suggested material to mold into a ball about 1/2 inch (12 mm) in.
procedures.) diameter. Mold the material; add water if necessary until
it has a soft, but not sticky, consistency.
NOTE 7.-Since the particle-size components appear visually 13.3.1 Smooth the soil ball in the palm of one hand
on the basis of volume, considerable experience is required to with the blade of a knife or small spatula. Shake
estimate the percentages on the basis of dry mass. Frequent horizontally, striking the side of the hand vigorously against
comparisons with laboratory gradation analyses should be made. the other hand several times. Note the reaction of water
appearing on the surface of the soil. Squeeze the sample
11.3.1 The percentages shall be estimated to the
nearest 5 percent. The percentages of gravel, sand, and
Table 8. - Criteria for describing dry strength.
fines must add up to 100 percent.
11.3.2 If one of the components is present, but not None -The dry specimen crumbles into powder with
in sufficient quantity to be considered 5 percent of the mere pressure of handling.
minus 3-inch (75-mm) portion, indicate its presence by Low - The dry specimen crumbles into powder with
the term trace (for example: trace of fines). A trace is some finger pressure.
not to be considered in the total of 100 percent for the Medium - The dry specimen breaks into pieces or crumbles
components. with considerable finger pressure.
High - The dry specimen cannot be broken with finger
12. Preliminary Identification Procedure pressure. Specimen will break into pieces
between thumb and a hard surface.
Very High - The dry specimen cannot be broken between the
12.1 The soil is fine grained if it contains 50 percent
thumb and a hard surface.
or more fines; follow paragraph 13.
873
USBR 5005
Low
- Only slight pressure is required to roll the thread NOTE 10.-In some cases, through practice and experience,
near the plastic limit. The thread and the lump it may be possible to further identify the organic soils as organic
are weak and soft. silts or organic clays, OL or OH. Correlations between the
Medium - Medium pressure is required to roll the thread to dilatancy, dry strength, and toughness tests and laboratory tests
near the plastic limit. The thread and the lump can be made to identify organic soils in certain deposits of similar
have medium stiffness. materials of known geologic origin.
High - Considerable pressure is required to roll the thread
to near the plastic limit. The thread and the lump 13.9 If the soil is estimated to have 15 to 25 percent
have very high stiffness. sand or gravel or both, the words "with sand" or "with
gravel" shall be added to the group name (see figs. la
874
USBR 5005
and lb) (for example: lean clay with sand, CL; silt with 14.5.2 The group name shall correspond to the first
gravel, ML). If the percent of sand is equal to the percent group symbol plus "with clay" or "with silt" to indicate
of gravel, use "with sand." the plasticity characteristics of the fines (see fig. 2) (for
13.10 If the soil is estimated to have 30 percent or example: well-graded gravel with clay, GW-GC; poorly
more sand or gravel or both, the words "sandy" or "gravelly" graded sand with silt, SP-SM).
shall be added to the group name. Add the word "sandy" 14.6 If the specimen is predominantly sand or gravel
if there appears to be more sand than gravel. Add the but contains an estimated 15 percent or more of the other
word "gravelly" if there appears to be more gravel than coarse-grained constituent, the words "with gravel" or
sand (see figs. la and lb) (for example: sandy lean clay, "with sand" shall be added to the group name (see fig. 2)
CL; gravelly fat clay, CH; sandy silt, ML). If the percent (for example: poorly graded gravel with sand, GP; clayey
of sand is equal to the percent of gravel, use "sandy." sand with gravel, SC).
14.7 If the field sample contained any cobbles and/
14. Procedure for Identifying Coarse-Grained or boulders, the words "with cobbles," or "with cobbles
Soils (contains less than 50 % fines) and boulders" shall be added to the group name (for
example: silty gravel with cobbles, GM).
14.1 The soil is a gravel if the percent gravel is
estimated to be more than the percent sand. 15. Report
14.2 The soil is a sand if the percent gravel is estimated
to be equal to or less than the percent sand.
15.1 The report shall include information as to sample
14.3 The soil is a clean gravel or clean sand if the
origin as well as the items indicated in table 13.
percent fines is estimated to be 5 percent or less.
14.3.1 Identify the soil as a well-gradedgravel, GW, NOTE 11.-Example: CLAYEY GRAVEL WITH SAND AND
or as a well-graded sand, SW, if it has a wide range of COBBLES (GC): About 50 percent fine to coarse, subrounded
particle sizes and substantial amounts of the intermediate to subangular gravel; about 30 percent fine to coarse, subrounded
particle sizes. sand; about 20 percent fines with medium plasticity, high dry
14.3.2 Identify the soil as a poorly graded gravel, strength, no dilatancy, medium toughness; original field sample
GP, or as a poorly graded sand, SP, if it consists had trace of hard, subrounded cobbles; maximum size, 150 mm;
predominantly of one size (uniformly graded) or if it has weak reaction with HCI.
a wide range of sizes with some intermediate sizes obviously
In-place conditions: firm, homogeneous, dry, brown
missing (gap or skip graded).
Geologic interpretation: alluvial fan
14.4 The soil is either a gravel with fines or a sand
with finesif the percent fines is estimated to be 15 percent NOTE 12.-Other examples of soil descriptions and identifi-
or more. cations are given in appendixesX1 and X2.
14.4.1 Identify the soil as a clayey gravel, GC, or
a clayey sand, SC, if the fines are clayey as determined 15.2 If, in the soil description, the soil is identified
by the procedures in paragraph 13. using a classification group symbol and name as described
14.4.2 Identify the soil as a silty gravel, GM, or a in USBR 5000, it must be distinctly and clearly stated in
silty sand, SM, if the fines are silty as determined by the log forms, summary tables, reports, etc., that the symbol
procedures in paragraph 13. and nae are based on visual-manual procedures.
14.5 If the soil is estimated to contain 10 percent fines,
give the soil a dual identification using two group symbols. 16. Precision and Accuracy
14.5.1 The first group symbol shall correspond to
a clean gravel or sand (GW, GP, SW, SP) and the second 16.1 This method provides qualitative information
symbol shall correspond to a gravel or sand with fines only; therefore, a precision and accuracy statement is
(GC, GM, SC, SM). nonapplicable.
875
USBR 5005
1. Group name
2. Group symbol
3. Percent of cobbles and/or boulders (by volume)
4. Percent of gravel, sand and/or fines (by dry mass)
5. Particle-size range: Gravel- fine, coarse
Sand - fine, medium, coarse
6. Particle angularity: angular subangular subrounded rounded
7. Particle shape (if appropriate): flat elongated flat and elongated
8. Maximum particle size or dimension
9. Hardness of coarse sand and larger particles
10. Plasticity of fines: nonplastic low medium high
11. Dry strength: none low medium high very high
12. Dilatancy: none slow rapid
13. Toughness: low medium high
14. Color (in moist condition)
15. Odor -- mention only if olganic or unusual
16. Moisture: dry moist wet
17. Reaction with HCI: none weak strong
Additional comments:
Presence of roots or root holes
Presence of mica, gypsum,etc.
Surface coatingson coarse-grained particles
Caving or sloughing of auger hole or trench sides
Difficulty in augeringor excavation
Etc.
876
USBR 5005
APPENDIX
X1.1 The following examples show how the informa- weight was 106 lbf/ft 3 and in-place moisture was 9 percent.
tion required in subparagraph 15.1 can be reported. The
information that is included in descriptions should be based Example 3: ORGANIC SOIL (OL/OH): About 100 percent
on individual circumstances and need. fines with low plasticity, slow dilatancy, low dry strength, low
toughness; wet, dark brown, organic odor; weak reaction with
HCI.
Example 1: WELL-GRADED GRAVEL WITH SAND (GW):
About 75 percent fine to coarse, hard, subangular gravel; about Example 4: SILTY SAND WITH ORGANIC FINES (SM):
25 percent fine to coarse, hard, subangular sand; trace of fines; About 75 percent fine to coarse, hard, subangular reddish sand;
maximum size, 75 mm; dry, brown; no reaction with HCI. about 25 percent organic and dark brown nonplastic fines, no
dry strength, slow dilatancy; wet; maximum size, coarse sand;
Example 2: SILTY SAND WITH GRAVEL (SM): About 60 weak reaction with HCI.
percent predominantly fine sand; about 25 percent fines with
low plasticity, low dry strength, rapid dilatancy, low toughness; Example 5: POORLY GRADED GRAVEL WITH SILT, SAND,
about 15 percent fine, hard, subrounded gravel (a few gravel- COBBLES AND BOULDERS (GP-GM): About 75 percent fine
size particles fractured with hammer blow); maximum size, 20 to coarse, hard, subrounded to subangular gravel; about 15 percent
mm; no reaction with HCI. Note: field sample size smaller than fine, hard, subrounded to subangular sand; about 10 percent
recommended. nonplastic fines; moist, brown; no reaction with HCI. Original
field sample had a trace of hard, subrounded cobbles and a trace
In-place conditions -- firm, stratified and contains lenses of of hard, subrounded boulders, having a maximum dimension of
silt 1 to 2 inches thick, moist, brown to gray; in-place dry unit 500 mm.
X2.1 The identification method may be used as a HCI. After slaking in water for 24 hours, material identified
descriptive system applied to materials that exist in situ as "SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL)" --About 60 percent fines with
as shale, claystone, sandstone, siltstone, mudstone, etc., but medium plasticity, high dry strength, no dilatancy, medium
convert to soils after field or laboratory processing toughness; about 35 percent fine to medium sand; about 5 percent
(crushing, slaking, etc.). gravel-size pieces of shale.
X2.2 Materials such as shells, crushed rock, slag, etc.,
should be identified as such. However, the processes used Example 2: CRUSHED SANDSTONE: Product of commercial
crushing operation; "POORLY GRADED SAND WITH SILT
in this procedure for describing the particle size and
(SP-SM)" -- About 90 percent fine to medium sand; about 10
plasticity characteristics may be used in the description
percent nonplastic fines; maximum size, medium sand; dry,
of the material. If desired, an identification using a group
reddish-brown; strong reaction with HCI.
name and symbol according to this method may be assigned
to aid in describing the material.
Example 3: BROKEN SHELLS: Natural deposit of shells;
X2.3 The group symbol(s) and group names should "POORLY GRADED GRAVEL WITH SAND (GP)" -- About
be placed in quotation marks or noted with some type 60 percent gravel-sizebroken shells; about 35 percent sand and
of distinguishing symbol (see examples). sand-size shell pieces; about 5 percent fines.
X2.4 Examples of how group names and symbols could
be incorporated into a descriptive system for materials that Example 4: CRUSHED ROCK: Processed from gravel and
are not naturally occurring soils follow. cobbles in Pit No. 7; "POORLY GRADED GRAVEL (GP)" --
About 90 percent fine, hard, angular gravel-size particles; about
Example 1: SHALE CHUNKS: Retrieved as 2- to 4-inch pieces 10 percent coarse, hard, angular sand-size particles; maximum
of shale from power auger hole, dry, brown, no reaction with size, 20 mm; dry, tan; no reaction with HCI.
877
USBR 5005
X3.1 Since this practice is based on estimates of particle X3.1.5 A borderline symbol may be used when a
size distribution and plasticity characteristics, it may be fine-grained soil has properties that indicate that it is at
difficult to clearly identify the soil as belonging to one the boundary between a soil of low compressibility and
category. To indicate that the soil may fall into one of a soil of high compressibility (for example: CL/CH,
two possible basic groups, a borderline symbol may be MH/ML).
used with the two symbols separated by a slash (for X3.2 The order of the borderline symbols should reflect
example: SC/CL, CL/CH). similarity to surrounding or adjacent soils (for example:
X3.1.1 A borderline symbol may be used when the soils in a borrow area have been identified as CH. One
percent fines is estimated to be between 45 and 55 percent. sample is considered to have a borderline symbol of CL.
One symbol should be for a coarse-grained soil with fines and CH. To show similarity, the borderline symbol should
and the other for a fine-grained soil (for example: GM/ML, be CH/CL).
CL/SC). X3.3 The group name for a soil with a borderline
X3.1.2 A borderline symbol may be used when the symbol should be the group name for the first symbol,
percent sand and the percent gravel is estimated to be except for:
about the same (for example: GP/SP, SC/GC, GM/SM).
It is practically impossible to have a soil that would have CL/CH - lean to fat clay
a borderline symbol of GW/SW. ML/CL - clayey silt
X3.1.3 A borderline symbol may be used when the CL/ML - silty clay
soil could be either well graded or poorly graded (for
example: GW/GP, SW/SP). X3.4 The use of a borderline symbol should not be
X3.1.4 A borderline symbol may be used when the used indiscriminately. Every effort should be made to place
soil could either be a silt or a clay (for example: CL/ML, the soil into a single group.
CH/MH, SC/SM).
X4.1 Jar Method=The relative percentage of coarse- fines in the minus sieve size No. 4 material then can be
and fine-grainedmaterial may be estimated by thoroughly estimated from the wash test (see subpar. X4.3).
shaking a mixture of soil and water in a test tube or jar, X4.3 Wash Test (for relative percentages of sand and
and then allowing the mixture to settle. The coarse particles fines).-Select and moisten enough minus No. 4 sieve size
will fall to the bottom and successively finer particles will material to form a 1-inch (25-mm) cube of soil. Cut the
be deposited with increasing time; the sand sizes will fall cube in half, set one-half to the side, and place the other
out of suspension in 20 to 30 seconds. The relative half in a small dish. Wash and decant the fines out of
proportions can be estimated from the relative volume the material in the dish until the wash water is clear, and
of each size separate. This method should be correlated then compare the two samples and estimate the percentage
to particle-size laboratory determinations. of sand and fines. Remember that the percentage is based
X4.2 VisualMethod.-Mentally visualize the gravel size on mass, not volume. However, the volume comparison
particles placed in a sack (or other container) or sacks. will provide a reasonable indication of grain size
Then, do the same with the sand size particles and the percentages.
fines. Then, mentally compare the number of sacks to While washing, it may be necessary to break down lumps
estimate the percentage of plus No. 4 sieve size and minus of fines with a fingerto get the correct percentages.
No. 4 sieve size present. The percentages of sand and
878
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 5325-89
PROCEDURE FOR
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 5325. The number immediately
following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
879
USBR 5325,
7. Appara:us
N<Tf'E ]-A typk:a set c,f bai!ances ,::, scabs tl2,t wc, ula c,,'e
the eqluirem, ens .of this designaiozq are::
,c@:l
USBR 5325,
9'. Sampling.,. Test Spec, mens, and! Test Units i,)di',idual soil p.artic]les, wi]]l be free f:k:,.win, g and suc:ln chat
tle s.i]l can be: s.eparate.d by the sieving l-:,>:>cess.
9'. 1 :,rnpie. >epa'ra'diJ,n::
Ill ]!.1 Prepatc:,n, .,:f a s.smple in accordance wids,
91.1 F"i'epare a :e's*: sample of minus 3-is,ch marerilal
US, BF: 52,1:)5 will no.rim, ally re.stile iin an, ap.F:,>opriiae mo.stu, re
in accordance with USBR 520,5,.. The mass of the specimen
c:,c, nt'ent :c:,. siev:isg.
to be. tested depends o,n de n,axim,LUm, particle silze pre:sem
1 ].1.2 ]If the entbe amc, utt c:,,f soil avsi]lah,.[e is to.
in :he soJil as fo.ilows::
be testes and iis: r,or reduced iin size iin accordance with
US, BR 52:05:, he' s.oi] must be conSitic:,sed to. /e: ap.F:,.,pri!s:e
m<dstur'e c<:,stent n ;,::,c::,,:)rclsrce whh USBR 52()5.
11.1.3. F.c, s.o.:[s tc,, be testedl at their natura ma.istue
contempt, tiT, e. test spechnen siT,:>uIcl be separated ..m a No. {
3/' 8; 9.5 0.5" 0,.21,"
sieve whh the minus No. { mcgee.rio] not al],:,wed t.o be:c,,me
3./4 19.0' 2. !, L. ;t *
driler th, an th, e r,turaI rn,:41stu, re cc, s, te:.n,t. The plus N,:* 4
1 - 1/" 2 :!, 7.5 20 ] O,
maceria] can thec be condidore8 an, d tested in acc:,danc:e
3. 7 Ii, ] 50, 70,
wiith dis 8esignatio.r. H,:_wever, [qe dry mass o,f dle minus.
* Fo, tlc, e eq,W.,r,ent c!.:F.Jkaly u;.:l in thL'; No 4 mate.la] must be detenTfilne.d and aS,ded t.,: the dry
F,r,ccedluFe,, 11 le!s{ spec:iulen ta,;:ss ,,:,: at ]eus mass ,::[ the tots] .specirneq, as 8eter,nin, ed it, th, is; procedure.
10 ]t:,n:, (q.5 kg:. b; eo::,mnc, e,:lded ,:see suit,-
par 122-:!:). 12. Procedure
Tt',ese values; are iin :ertns of dry mass. Vaue.;, fis,
12:.11 A]I data are t,, be rec,:rdled ,:m a "Gsdatiio, n
wet mass c,,f the s.pecimen wiI have tc, be: adliusted based
Analysis" f,onn as s;h,:ves :,n, fgL:'e 3. C, 4
o,n, an e'.simated tn,,;zfilsn:re o:ntcnu
12:2 F',:)r a speciimen mass ,:f i0 lbn-i (4.5 kg),,:r larger,
10. Calibratio.t and S.tan, dardizatio, n aill meast:ements o,f msss; are to be dee.r,niined and recorded
c.c, the neaes.t 0,8,1 ]]b,m ((I, 01 kg)
1(],.] Verify that equipn:mnc is cu, zzec, c]iy calibracecl iin 112.21 A mlFJi:llTLlm specimec, mass ,,:f 10 h,m (d i!;.
accordan, ce wth, the applilcable ,sliibratiiot- procedure If de
kg) iis re.c.omn-et-dled when :he mecq, at-ic:a][ sicvJin, g devi:ce,
ca]bratio.n is. r,0,t cuen,., perform the ca]ibcacior before shown el, n, figu,e 1, is. usec] ic combinatii.,:.n vi4tb a balance
using te:. equiipment for this prc,,c:ed,ere. or sca]e reaJlable t,: ().01 ibm ,::(IX}I kg)
USBR 1012 CLa][ibradng Balances :1, Scales
]2.2:.2 TBe equire'd minm-mm s.pe,cimen mass is; 8.5
USBR 1025 Checking Sie"'es
]b.,n f<c,,r soill nsviclg a nqsxm,-sulm F,.aricle s;ize of 3/8-incl'*,
and 25 Ibm for a max:imum pastil,tie s:ize o1 3..".i mc:h ]if
1i. Condiitoning
:ol so-m reasc:,n tlse specimell mass for these sc,,ls is. ]ess
11.1 Before a s,0,iil can be. s.eparaed b,y silevng, h mus.t tiT, an 0 Ibm, ,:ttl, er combinatns ,m: sieving equipment
be st . moisture cc,,ent such tq,a s.,::aii hm:,ps and/'o. ,::suct: as; described in USBR 53!i0)and balances, and scales
S.81
USBR 5325
7-14Sl (9-s6)
Bureau of Reclamation
GRADATION ANALYSIS Designation USBR 5325._8_
Designation USBR 5330-__
DesignationUSBR 5335-__
SAMPLE NO. PROJECT FEATURE
Example
AREA EXC. NO. DEPTH
(individuQI)
GRADATION OF GRAVEL SIZES
TESTED AND COMPUTED BY DATE % MOISTURE CONTENT OF + NO. 4 WET MASS OF TOTAL SPECIMEN
assumed 1.8 162.07
CHECKED BY DATE % MOISTURE CONTENT OF - NO. 4 TOTAL DRY MASS OF SPECIMEN
12.3 149.47
3,m 1-112" 3/4" 318" NO. 4
SIEVE SIZE (75 ram) (37.5 mm) (19.0 mm) (9.5 mm)
PAN
(4.75 mm)
MASS OF CONTAINER AND
RETAINED MATERIAL 18.94 33.33 24.23 28.28 124.94
IEVINGTIME DATE
5O
"" 0 300pm
01--
100 150pm
2OO 75#m
PAN
TESTED AND COMPUTED BY DATE CHECKED BY DATE
TOTAL
HYDROMETER ANALYSIS
I rain 37/Jm
uJ
4 rain 19#m
0 0-
U-J
19 rain
,,,'0
9/Jm
AUXILIARY TESTS:
60 min OF- 5/am USBR 5205-8 9
USBR 5300-8 _9
7 h 15 min* 2pm
25 h 45 min* I,lm
TESTED AND COMPUTED BY DATE CHECKED BY DATE
882
USBR 5325
7-1451 (9.86)
Bureau of Reclamation GRADATION ANALYSIS DeslBnationUSBR S325-.
Destlation USBR 5330-__
DestaUon USBR 5335-__
SAMPLE NO. PROJECT FEATURE
Exomple
IAREA EXC. NO. DEPTH
(cumulative)
GRADATION OF GRAVEL SIZES
TESTED AND COMPUTEDBY DATE % MOISTURE CONTENT OF + NO. 4 WET MASS OF TOTAL SPECIMEN
ossumed 1.8 162.07
CHECKED BY DATE % MOISTURE CONTENT OF - NO. 4 TOTAL DRY MASS OF SPECIMEN
12.3 149,47
3'a 1-1/2" 314" 3" NO. 4
SIEVE SIZE (75 ram) (37.5 mm) (19.0 ram) (9.5 mm) (4.75 mm)
PAN
DRY NASS PASSING 149.47 142.86 122.11 110.30 94.52 NIb Okg r-lg
o OF TOTAL PASSING 100.0 95.6 81 .7 73.8 63.2
GRADATION OFSAND SIZES
DRY MASS OF SPECIMEN % TOTAL PASSING NO. 4
g FACTOR- DRY MASS OF SPECIMEN
)ISH NO. DRY MASS OF SPECIMEN (SIEVED)
16 1.18 mm
u0.
30 6OOpm
50 3OOpm
"0
O-
100 k-,, 150pm
tOTAL
HYDROMETER ANALYSIS
I min 37 #m
Wu-J
4 rain 0 19pro
U-I
19 min 9pm
0cO AUXILIARY TESTS:
60 rain OI- Spm USBR 5205-8 9
l-u_ USSR 5a00-
7 h IS min 2pm
25 h 45 min" Im
TESTED AND COMPUTED BY DATE CHECKED BY DATE
883
USBR 5325
may be used. In this case, a balance or scale must be used sieving must be done-in accordance with the directions
such that the mass is determined and recorded to at least in USBR 4136 or ASTM C 136. If hand sieving is used
0.1 percent of the total specimen mass. for part or all of this procedure, it should be noted on
12.3 Determine and record the wet mass of total the data forms.
specimen (or dry mass, if appropriate -- see notes 2 and 3). 12.7 Any significant amount of minus No. 4 particles
adhering to the plus No. 4 particles must be brushed or
NOTE 2.-In this designation, "wet mass" refers to material wiped off and placed in the minus No. 4 fraction.
that has not been ovendried and "dry mass" to material that 12.7.1 If the minus No. 4 material cannot be easily
has been ovendried or the dry mass calculated. removed from the plus No. 4 particles, the plus No. 4
particles should be soaked and/or washed on a No. 4 sieve
NOTE 3.-The gradation analysis may be performed on until all minus No. 4 material is removed. If tests are
ovendried material. In this case, substitute "dry mass" for "wet to be performed on the minus No. 4 material, the minus
mass" in this designation and disregard the steps pertaining to No. 4 particles must be collected and added to the minus
determining moisture content and calculating the dry mass. The
No. 4 material and thoroughly mixed in. The plus No. 4
data should be recorded in the spaces on the form for "dry mass."
material must then be rescreened.
12.8 Determine and record the mass of container(s)
12.4 Separation of specimen prior to sieving:
to be used.
12.4.1 If the amount of material to be tested is greater
than the capacity of the sieving equipment (do not overload 12.9 Starting with the coarsest sieve, remove all
particles retained on each sieve and place in the
the sieves), divide the specimen into appropriate portions
container(s). Determine and record the mass of container
for testing. For each portion, follow the steps in
and retained material. The mass may be determined and
subparagraphs 12.5 through 12.11. Calculate the sum of
recorded as the mass for each individual sieve size (fig. 3)
the wet masses retained on each sieve and in the pan,
or as the mass on a cumulative basis (fig. 4). When
and record as wet mass retained for each sieve size and
,in the pan and proceed with subparagraph 12.12. removing the particles, take care to avoid permanent
deformation of sieve openings or the sieve cloth.
12.4.2 Alternately, if the amount of material to be
12.10 Remove all particles retained in the pan and
tested is greater than the capacity of the sieving equipment
place into a container. Determine and record the mass
or to not overload the sieves, the specimen may be separated
of container andretained material.
using a No. 4 sieve prior to testing. Separation on the
12.11 Calculate and record the wet mass retained on
No. 4 sieve also may be necessary for (1) testing the minus
each sieve size (individual or cumulative) and in the pan
No. 4 portion of a soil before or during the testing of
by subtracting the mass of container from the mass of
the plus No. 4, (2) convenience of test scheduling, or (3)
container andretainedmaterial.
when the plus No. 4 particles need to be soaked in water
(see subpar. 12.7.1). The wet mass of the separated minus NOTE 4.-As a check, the sum of the wet mass retainedon
No. 4 material must be determined and then added to each sieve (or cumulative on the No. 4 sieve) and the wet mass
the wet mass of any minus No. 4 particles collected and retained in the pan should be about equal to the wet mass of
measured during the sieving of the plus No. 4 material. totalspecimen.
12.5 Assemble the set (nest) of sieves to be used in
order of decreasing size of opening from top to bottom 12.12 Determine and record to the nearest 0.1 percent
and place in the sieving device. The sieves may be the the moisture content of the plus No. 4 material and the
standard set as described in subparagraph 7.3, or others moisture content of the minus No. 4 material in accordance
as required by the specifications covering the material to with USBR 5300.
be tested. If desired, sieves coarser than the maximum 12.12.1 A moisture content may be assumedfor the
particle size may be omitted from the set. However, a plus No. 4 material if previous tests on similar material
sieve at least one size larger than the anticipatedmaximum have been performed and the value is relatively constant.
particle size should be included in the set. Additional sieve Note on the form that the value s assumed
sizes may be added to restrict the amount of material on 12.13 Using the moisture content of the plus No. 4
a particular sieve (see subpar. 12.4.1) or to protect individual material and the wet mass retained, calculate and record
.sieves from excessive wear. the dry mass retained on each sieve (individual or
12.6 Place the soil specimen on the top sieve and turn cumulative).
on the sieving device. To avoid overloading the top sieve, 12.14 Using the moisture content of the minus No. 4
it may be necessary to feed the soil onto the top sieve material and the wet mass of soil retained in the pan
gradually. Sieve the material for about 15 minutes, or longer (passing the No. 4 sieve), calculate and record the dry
if necessary, to separate all the material. A satisfactory mass retained in the pan.
end-point is considered to have been reached when an 12.15 Calculate and record the total dry mass of
additional one minute of sieving does not change the mass specimen by one of the followingmethods:
on any individual sieve by more than 1.0 percent. 12.15.1 Mass determined for each individual sieve
12.6.1 Hand sieving may be used; however, use of (fig. 3).-Calculate the sum of the dr), mass retained on
a mechanical sieving device is the most common and each sieve and in the pan. Also, record this value as dry"
accepted method of performing this procedure. Hand mass passing under the 3-inch sieve size column (or under
884
USBR 5325
the columnfor the next larger sieve size than the sieve 13. Calculations
size on which particles were retained).
12.15.2 Mass determined on cumulative basis 13.1 Calculate the percent of total passing for each
(fig. 4).-Calculate the sum of the dry mass retained on sieve using the following expression:
the No. 4 sieve and the dry mass retainedin the pan.
12.16 Calculate and record the dry mass passingeach
sieve by one of the followingmethods. Percent of total passing = 100 ( total dr,/mass
dry mass passing
of specimen )
12.16.1 Mass determined for each individual sieve
(fig. 3).-Starting with the coarsest sieve on which particles 14. Report
were retained, calculate the dry mass passing each sieve
by subtracting the dry mass retained from the dry mass
passing the next larger size sieve. 14.1 The report is to consist of a completed and checked
12.16.2 Mass determined on cumulative basis "Gradation Analysis" form (fig. 3 or 4).
(fig. 4).-Calculate the dry mass passing each sieve by 14.2 All calculations are to show a checkmark.
subtracting the dry mass retained from the dry mass of 14.3 If required, the results are to be plotted as shown
total specimen. on the "Gradation Test" form (fig. 5).
14.4 For reports, summary tables, etc., the gradation
NOTE 5.-As a check, the dry mass passing the No. 4 sieve percentages are generally reported to the nearest i percent.
must equal (+0.01 Ibm or kg)the dry mass retainedinthe pan. The percentages may be reported as either percent passing
or percent retained.
12:17 Calculate and record to the nearest 0.1 percent 14.5 In many cases, the gradation is reported in terms
the percent of totalpassingeach sieve. Record 100.0 percent of percent gravel, percent sand, and percent fines. The
in the sieve size column that is one sieve size larger than percentages must add to 100 percent. Due to rounding,
the coarsest sieve size on which material was retained. the total may be either 99 or 101 percent; 1 percent must
12.18 If required, plot the results as shown on figure 5. be added to or subtracted from the component (gravel,
Typically, this procedure is performed in conjunction with sand, or fines) with the largest percentage so the total
USBR 5330 or 5335 to determine the gradation of the is 100 percent. If the percentages, when rounded to the
minus No. 4 material and the plot is prepared after the nearest 1 percent are equal, make the adjustment to the
minus No. 4 gradation has been determined. coarser component.
885
USBR 5325
LLI
LU
o= 8Z
<z
5 d
,,r
_o
i11
E
.J
I
r-- z /
w
.o
o LU n, I
m
u.
.0
n,-
< L
0 I
Z -I to
<
I--
to
[I o
E
<
z--l[
<
m E
U,IZ
J
p-
/
W
uJ
i kU .
.j/
0
Z
g
/ g o o
W
)NISSVd J. N::IOM::Id tO
.%
m
886
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 5330-89
PROCEDURE FOR
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, Code D-3760, Research and Laboratory Services
Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under the fixed designation USBR 5330. The number immediately
following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
The method is similar to ASTM D 422-63, the principal difference being the sieve sizes used and the separation on the No. 4
instead of No. 10 sieve (4.75 and 2.00 mm) for the hydrometer test.
887
USBR 5330
4.3 After sedimentation and sieving, the percentage dispersion cup. A special dispersion cup conforming to
of particles passing specified sizes are calculated, recorded, either of the designs shown on figure 1 should be used.
and plotted. 7.5 Water Bath (optional).-A water bath for main-
taining the soil suspension at a constant temperature during
5. Significance and Use the hydrometer analysis. A satisfactory constant temper-
ature bath is an insulated tank with automatic temperature
5.1 Gradation is a descriptive term which refers to the control that maintains the soil suspension at a convenient
proportions by dry mass of a soil or fragmented rock constant temperature at or near 68 F (20 C). Such a
distributed in specified particle-size ranges. , device is shown on figure 2. If a constant temperature
5.2 The gradation of a soil gives an indication of the i water bath is not used, a water-filled container (such as
engineering properties of the soil. Permeability, compres- an additional hydrometer cylinder) must be used to store
sibility, and shear strength are all influenced by the the hydrometer between readings. The water in this storage
gradation characteristics of a soil mass. Therefore, reliable cylinder must be at the same temperature as the solution
determination of the amount of fines, sand, and gravel in the test hydrometer cylinder.
in a representative soil sample is of extreme importance 7.6 Thermometer.-O to 50 C range, 0.5 divisions,
for design considerations. conforming to the requirements of ASTM E 1.
5.3 Normally, the mechanical stirring device is used 7.7 Rubber Stopper.-An appropriate size rubber
to disperse the soil specimen. Its use may cause degradation stopper to adequately seal the hydrometer cylinder.
of some soil particles. Performing the gradation analysis 7.8 Sodium Hexametaphosphate.-A chemical agent in
on a mechanically dispersed specimen and on an air- powder, crystal, or granular form, used as a dispersing
dispersed specimen may be useful in evaluating the agent, of technical grade or better.
durability and hardness of sand size particles. 7.9 Evaporating Dish.-A porcelain evaporating dish,
300-mL capacity, approximately 4-1/2 inches in diameter
6. Terminology by 2 inches (115 by 50 mm) deep.
7.10 Tubing.-Flexible tubing of sufficient length and
6.1 Definitions are in accordance with USBR 3900. diameter to direct the flow of water for washing the soil
Terms of particular significance are: specimen through a No. 200 (75-#m) sieve.
6.1.1 Dispersing Agent.-An agent used to assist in 7.11 Timing Device.-A clock or stopwatch with a
separating individual fine soil particles and to prevent them second hand.
from flocculating when in suspension. 7.12 Sieve Set.-A set of sieves, of square-mesh, woven-
6.1.2 Fines.-Portion of soil finer than a No. 200 wire cloth, conforming to the requirements of ASTM E 11.
(75 #m) U.S.A. Standard sieve (ASTM definition). A full set of sieves includes the following:
6.1.3 Gradation.-The proportions by mass of a soil
or fragmented rock distributed in specified particle-size A lid
ranges (ASTM). No. 8 2.36 mm
6.1.4 Gradation Analysis.-The process of determin- No. 16 1.18 mm
ing gradation (ASTM). No. 30 600 #m
No. 50 300 #m
7. Apparatus No. 100 150 #m
No. 200 75 #m
7.1 Balance or Scale.-A typical balance or scale used A pan
for this designation must be readable to 0.1 g and have
a capacity of about 500 g. 7.13 Washing Sieve.-No. 200 washing sieve may be
7.2 Soil Hydrometer.-A soil hydrometer, graduated to fabricated, or 8-inch (203-mm) brass No. 200 sieve may
read in grams per liter of suspension and conforming to be used.
the requirements for hydrometer 152H in ASTM E 100. 7.14 Sieve Shaker.-A motor-driven electric sieve
7.3 Hydrometer Cylinder.-A glass cylinder essentially shaker, equipped with timer as shown on figure 3, should
18 inches in height and 2-1/2 inches (457- by 64-mm) be used.
in diameter, and marked for a volume of 1000 mL. The 7.15 Brush.-A fine brass wire brush used for removing
inside diameter is to be such that the 1000-mL mark is soil from the sieves and pan.
14+1 inch (355+25 mm) from the bottom of the inside. 7.16 Drying Oven.-An oven, thermostatically controll-
7.4 Stirring Apparatus (malt mixer).-A mechanically ed, preferably of the forced-draft type, and capable of
operatedstirring devicein whicha suitably mountedelectric maintaining a uniform temperature of 230+9 F
motor turns a vertical shaft at a speed of not less than (110+5 o C) throughout the drying chamber.
10,000 revolutions per minute without load. The shaft 7.17 Air Dispersion Tube and Air Supply=An air
shouldbe equippedwitha replaceable stirring paddle made dispersion tube conforming to the requirements of figure 4.
of metal, plastic, or hard rubber. The shaft is to be of The air supply must be capable of producing 2 cubic feet
such a length that the stirringpaddle will operate not per minute for each dispersion tube. A water trap on the
less than 1-1/2 inches (38 ram) above the bottom of the air line may be useful to remove water that condenses
888
USBR 5330
889
USBR 5330
J
LT V-I
3-- --r-=-IJ
--2tl
,__ [
L\
)verflow
711
Metric Equivalents
7 I
in. I 3 6 14 37
mm 22.2 25.4 76.2 158.2 356 940
i
USBR 5205. If 500 grams of soil is not available, obtain 10.5 Dispersion of Soil Specimen (mechanical
at least enough soil to have an ovendried test specimen stirring):
that meets the requirements of subparagraph 10.3. 10.5.1 Place the soil specimen in an evaporating dish.
10.2 Place the test sample into a suitable container 10.5.2 Add 125 mL of 4-percent sodium hexameta-
and ovendry the sample for a minimum of 16 hours. phosphate solution and enough distilled water to cover
10.3 Thoroughly mix the soil and obtain a specimen the soil.
of approximately 100 grams for sandy soils and about 50 10.5.3 Soak the soil specimen in the sodium hexa-
grams for silty or clayey soils by splitting in accordance metaphosphate solution for a period of at least 16 hours.
with USBR 5205. Determine the mass of the specimen 10.5.4 Wash the specimen into a dispersion cup with
to the nearest 0.1 g and record on the "Gradation Analysis" distilled water.
form as shown on figure 5. 10.5.5 Continue adding distilled water until the
10.4 The test specimen must be dispersed in accordance dispersion cup is within 2 inches (50 mm) of being filled.
with either subparagraph 10.5 or 10.6 (see subpar. 5.3). 10.5.6 Mix the contents of the dispersion cup using
If the air dispersion method is used, it must be noted on the malt mixer for 1 minute.
the test form. 10.6 Dispersion of Soil Specimen (air dispersion):
890
USBR 5330
] 3. Procedure
13.1 All data are t:o be: recorded o.n t:h,e '"Gadaion
AnaLvs.is" fc,,rm as sh<:,vn on figure 5.
] 3.2: Record he I-ydrcl, meter number.
]3.3, PIace rl-e, dilspe.sed so.i] spec:imen d,at was
prepared accordJirg rc,, subparagrapt-J 10.5 into a k, ydlromee
.cyliirJde.r c, take the hy'dron-mte.' cylinder cc,.ntaiMr, g the'
specimen as pepared in sL]bF,.aragraph ]0.,5 and fill] he:.
c:yliinder t,, a level aF,,proxh'naelly 2: iinc:hes (50' ram,)beh:>w
the: l Cl,()0,-mL mark vcitlJ: distilled water. T'he byd>::me:te:
cyimde and its. contents, ,:he: ,L::ost+_nt temperature wate
bath (or extra hydrometer cylinder ill]led with water), and
tte, hydn:::maeter mus.t al] h,,e at d-Je s.ame ten-Jperartne before
s;tatiing tle. :est
F:igL,re 3. S:ie,ve a,n, al,'si!; e,quipn:,e,,m
]3.4 Place a rubber stopper over ,:he: m, ouh of the
hydrcame.er cy]ffnder. \l/it:h one hand over tl-,e top o4 the
10.(i..1 P']ace the so, ill specimen irm,:> a h'.dromem
hydrc:,rneer cylinder and t7:e, o, the; on *:he: by.alto.meter'
cylinder
c'y]inder b,c,rtorn,, thorc,.ugh, iy mix the contents by mnin.g
10'..5.2 Add 125 mL c,.f 4-pe'rcent s.c,dimn hexam, ea-
:l'e cylinder end c,,ve.z end fc, ] minute.
pk,0.spt,ate s.o]iuticm t. the hyd>,:rneer cyffnder.
135 Place the: byd>,:m,e,:er cy]l]nder into the con, s.tan
10.{{.3 +Add e.no.ug> dis.tilled wa,:er to. fire' h)'dronaete
e.mperature water b.ath (if avai]al::,][e.) and start ff, e timing:
cyilinder c, h,.ing rhe volume t.o ab,:>tlt 250 mL and stir.
device.
10.{..4 Soak the soil specilmen iin the s,>dium h, ex:a-
]3..[5 Remc,,ve the sc:>pper and quickly and caeful, ly
me:aphosph, a:e scd[utii,::],n ;{:or a perh>d c,f at least 16 bo,rs. wash irn:,l.> the c:ylJlnde:--w, ith d]stil]!ed water--any soil that
10.5.5. Turn on the. air sup.ply to the aJir di!spers.ic, n
may be p.re.sen on ffe sr,,ppe.r c,r along the. top c,f
tube so th, ere is a s.ma]l] ai pressure ,(about ] to, 2: bf/in2) , hydrc,,n'xeter c',]iinder. The water leve.] should be approx-
and ins, err ,:he. tube irJt,, the' hydr,;me.te. cylinder. imately a the: l(]'00-mL mark.
10{-..6 Increase the aiir F, ressure t(:, about 15 ilbf./]n 2 13,7 Careful]? place the hyd>::me:.rer into, the hydro-
and ILe.t the mixture disperse for 1,{], minutes. Oceasi.o.na]ly meter c3dinder Record: hydrc,,meter rea,diings; after elapsed
rJins.e the silde.s c,,f he. cy]ind.er wiB distilled water' Fc,< times ,of 1,4:=. 19:, and 60 mmu, tes;. The h''dromerer is read
some sc,l.s corJ, ta[Mng c:oars.e sacJd partic]les, it may be' o the nearest 0.5 gram per ]Jter at the top of the meniicus
nece.s;sary o increase the air p.re.ssure ,:o adequate]ly agitat:e. formed by the suspens:[o.n around its ste.m.
and disperse, the partiic]es.
10.(5,.7 De.crease the air pressure re, a very bw pres- N(E'E i-When tke hydec,.meter is; iMtiaIy p,11a.c:ed in the
sure and slowly wilthdrav+, tn,e, a:ir d]spers.ion tube. tZJins.e dispe.sed s.,::,]l specimen=, f,aam may appear >ound thee. h'ydrcmrJe*e
rl-e tube with dis.tilled wae.r as it: is being whd-Mrax,n and stem n-mkiing it diffJic:'t:h t,;a read. A few .drops of alcoBo,]l <::an
rinse the sides c,,tf the. l'Jydrometer c3inder. h:,e added t,:> cemc.ve t]'le [oam and aiid in making an ac.curate
'eadlmg of the. hydlcmeer.
11. Calibration and Standardiz:at[on
138 Rec:.ord the tempe.ature of ,:he: bqu{d in l-ae hydro,-
meter cyrJde.r t,,:) the ;mar'es.t 0.5 C at each h,ydron'm.rer
11.1 Veriify :hat equipmem is current]ly .calibrated in
r'e.ading iinterva]l Over tl-Je periodl of i{}; minutes the teigll.
accordance wiff tk, e app]iicable ca]!]b'a,:ic, n procedure. If the
peatare of the s(::,]lm]on m, the hydrometer cyndie.r must
c:a]ibratic, n s nc,. current, perfc,m the calibration belt, re
nCll{ vally hi}, thaql -I-:2 c'C. If i!t does,, r:he es:t niT**IS*
],l:)re:
us;lug the: equiprrm.nt for ths p,r,:>cedue.
be ah,,andoeed and started c, ve.z
USB.R 11{]112 CalJibratiing Ba[an.c:e <:r Scales
LJSBR 1()2:0 CnlJibratiing Ovens ]3..9 After d-se 4-mJinute re:adtrg,,, remove the hydro.-
USBR 1()25 Checkin, gSieves meter fron' the hydros.meter c),iinde after earl-J, e.ading
and wash off the: h,y'drc, mere in the constant temperavure
USBR 1405 Calibratm, g Hydr,,nm, eters
wa, ter ha*h,. Place the hlydome:ter irJ the. constant
te.mp, eratue water k, ath until] it: Jis; needed for tte, next
12. Conditioning
readirg.
12:1 A water bath is e'c:omn*ended for n-Jaiintaming
N(G'E Z-If a c.,mstant temperature w'ater I:,,aff is. n.,:}t avaiLable,
the soil suspensc,,n at a ,L::orsstar, te'mpe.rature .during ,:he. rlqe, h, ydromete; is. t:,a. be stored betweerJ readings in a waer-
hydron:eter a nalysils. fi]l]ed hydz,::,merer cy'Jinder Tl'e. water is; :c,. be of rhe ,qua]Ji D,
12:2 T't,e tempeature of th, e sc,,l suspensi<m and water de.s.cJibed in subpaagraF,.h 8.][. The v,,ater mus; be: at ffJ, e same
bath shc,,ulld be: clJecked to ensure that they remain wffhin tel71pear'are as t]'J,e s..o]ilu':i.ot irJ the test hydl,::m'J, ete. cy]liinder
ffi;!51) 1
USBR 5330
#t
14-
Plexiglass
tubing and rod'
Glued
"imperial
bross nipple
Grooves
In
on tip
3- deep.
END VIEW
13.10 Place the hydrometer in the hydrometer cylinder accepted method of performing this procedure. Hand
approximately 30 seconds before subsequent readings are sieving must be done in accordance with the directions
to be taken. in USBR 4136 or ASTM C 136. If hand sieving is used
13.11 If the 60-minute reading indicates that 40 percent for part or all of this procedure, it should be noted on
or more of the specimen is smaller than the 0.005-mm the data forms.
size, continue the test by taking temperature and 13.17 Sieve the soil specimen for approximately 15
hydrometer readings at 7-hour 15-minute and 25-hour and minutes using the powered sieve shaker and record the
45-minute time intervals. If the 60-minute reading indicates mass of the soil retained on each sieve to the nearest 0.1
that less than 40 percent of the specimen is smaller than gram as shown on figure 5.
the 0.005-mm size, the test is complete. (See subpars. 14.3 13.18 Calculate and record to 0.1 percent the percent
and 14.4 for the necessary calculations.) If the temperature of total soil mass passing each size for both the hydrometer
is more than +2 C from the last temperature reading, and sieve analysis.
keep taking temperature readings over the next 30 minutes 13.19 Plot the percent of total mass passing versus
to ascertain whether the system was at equilibrium when the particle diameter as shown on figure 6.
the hydrometer reading was made. If more than +2 C
temperature change occurred in the 30-minute period, do 14. Calculations
not use the reading.
14.1 Computations required on the "Gradation
13.12 After the hydrometer readings have been com-
Analysis" form are divided into three parts:
pleted, carefully wash the soil specimen on a No. 200 sieve
until all fines are removed. Gradation of gravel sizes
13.13 Pour the remaining soil into an evaporating dish Gradation of sand sizes
and decant excess water. Hydrometer analysis
13.14 Place the evaporating dish into an oven at
230+9 F (110+5 C) and dry for 16 hours. 14.2 Gradation of Gravel Sizes.-The method and.
13.15 Remove the specimen from the oven after 16 calculations required to determine the percentages and
hours and obtain the dry mass of the specimen. distribution of particles larger than the No. 4 sieve size
13.16 Place the specimen into the top sieve of a sieve are outlined in USBR 5325.
set and place the lid on the top sieve. Place the sieve. 14.3 Gradation of Sand Size
set into a sieve shaker. The sieve set should consist of 14.3.1 Calculate the factor used to compute the
the six sizes noted in subparagraph 7.12. percentage of the total sample mass passing a given sieve
13.16.1 Hand sieving may be used; however, use of or the percentage of the total sample mass smaller thar,
a mechanical sieving device is the most common and' a given particle size as follows:
892
USBR 5330
APPENDIX
Xl. COMMENTS ON CERTAIN ASPECTS OF THE HYDROMETER TEST
X1.1 A review of procedures and standards published have approximately equal spacing when plotted on the
by various sources revealed a variety of recommended form. The three longer time readings (60 min, 7 h 15 min,
reading times for the hydrometer test. The times and 25 h 45 min) correspond to particular particle sizes
traditionally used by the Bureau of Reclamation (and of interest (0.005, 0.002, and 0.001 mm, respectively).
continued with this procedure) were selected based on the X1.3 There are various recommendations concerning
following rationale. storage of the hydrometer between readings. These
X1.2 It has been found to be convenient to assume recommendations range from placing in clean water to
a value of specific gravity for the hydrometer test. The distilled or demineralized water. While distilled water is
value assumed is 2.65. This is a reasonable assumption, required for preparing the soil suspension, the hydrometer
and moderate variations from this value have only a small may be stored between readings in either distilled water
effect on test results. By assuming a value of specific gravity, or tapwater that is free of acids, alkalies, or oils and is
it was possible to print gradation forms with both particle suitable for drinking. The tapwater will not cause a
diameter and time of reading values on the abscissa. This flocculating reaction with the soil, and allows laboratories
eliminates the need to calculate Stoke's Law (or use a that use water baths for controlling hydrometer test
nomograph) for each reading, thus reducing the chance temperatures to store the hydrometer in the water bath
for error. The particular times selected -- at which readings between readings. Test results are not affected as long as
are to be taken -- were based on both convenience in the hydrometer bath water is changed regularly (about once
performing the test, and in obtaining data points which per week).
893
USBR 5330
%1451 (9-86)
Bureau of Reclamation
GRADATION ANALYSIS Designation USBR $325-__
Designation USBR 5330.J=19
Designation USBR 5335-__
SAMPLE NO. PROJECT FEATURE
MASS OF CONTAINER
TOTAL 39. I
HYDROMETER ANALYSIS
894
USBR 5330
03NIVL3 LN3083d
8
I o 8 g 8 o
D o 8 o
i
' to
/
8
=- z >.
-,,=,
-r
..=,
/
< I-
r 1- 0
/
>.
"I"
A
e
E
/ I
i e
/
I--
tt)
tel
.J
z ,
2 / c
I,- z Z Z
< J
/
r I
,'7 ,'
<
a
Z
<
5" o
I,-
- , -I,
.i
I
to
,.<
z--l[ f
/
<
/ =: E
MlZ / .c
,,>,
/
f
mc
<--
0
Z
g o 8 o o o o
g
)NIgSVd .L N =lDkF:ld
895
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
BUREAU OF RECLAMATION
USBR 5450-89
PROCEDURE FOR
This procedure is under the jurisdiction of the Geotechnical Services Branch, code D-3760 and the Applied Sciences Branch, code
D-3740, Research and Laboratory Services Division, Denver Office, Denver, Colorado. The procedure is issued under fixed designation
USBR 5450. The number immediately following the designation indicates the year of acceptanceor the year of last revision.
7. Apparatus
4. Summary of Method
4.1 Distilled water is mixed with soil and agitated 7.1 Sample PreparationApparatus.-Sample splitter.
frequently over a period of 4 days to extract water soluble 7.2 Extraction Apparatus:
solids from soil. The solution containing the dissolved solids 7.2.1 Pan Balance.-A balance that is readable to 0.1 g
is separated from the soil-water mixture by filtration and and has a capacity of about 1200 g.
a portion is evaporated to obtain a dry residue. The percent 7.2.2 Graduate.-5OO-mL capacity, readable to 5 mL.
water soluble solids in soil is determined from the mass 7.2.3 Flask.-5OO-mL Erlenmeyer flask with rubber
of the dry residue, stopper.
7.2.4 Flask.-5OO-mL capacity vacuum filtrationflask.
5. Significance and Use 7.2.5 Paper.-Filter paper, 20 to 25 /am particle
retention; 7-, 9-, or 11-cm diameter, having high wet
5.1 Water soluble soil minerals, referred to as "water strength for vacuum filtration.
soluble solids," may be dissolved and transported by flowing 7.2.6 Funnel.-Buchner type porcelain filtering
water from exposed soil. The resulting reduction in soil funnel with flask adapter; 83-, 100-, or 126-mm diameter
volume may allow compression of the soil and subsidence (to fit filter size selected).
of the ground surface. Additionally, where removal of soil 7.2.7 Vacuum.-Vacuum source or water aspirator
material occurs by solutioning of solids by water, soil pore device.
spaces are increased which may allow more water to flow 7.2.8 Bottle.-lOOO-mL capacity, glass-stoppered
through the soil. glass bottle.
5.2 The method presented does not predict actual field 7.3 Apparatus for Drying the Extract Solution:
soil performance due to leaching by water. However, the 7.3.1 Porcelain evaporating dish, 75-mL capacity.
896
USBR 545O
7.3.2 An analytical balance readable to 0.0001 g 11.1.1 Dissolve 744.0 mg of potassium chloride
having a capacity of about 200 g. (KCI) in water and dilute to 1000 mL at 20q-2 C in a
7.3.3 Steam-heated or low-temperature electric hot volumetric flask. This is the standard reference solution
plate. (0.01 N) which has a conductivity of 1408/zS/cm at 25 C.
7.3.4 Desiccator (containing anhydrous calcium Store solution in a glass-stoppered glass bottle.
sulfate).
7.3.5 Convection oven set at 105+5 C. 12. Sampling, Test Specimens, and Test Units
7.4 Apparatus forMeasuring Conductance:
7.4.1 Wheatstone bridge conductivity meter, +3.0 12.1 Prepare a sample of about500 g of U.S.A. Standard
percent accuracy, meeting requirements of ASTM D 1125. series minus No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve size material in
7.4.2 Pipet or dip-type conductivity cell (cell con- accordance with USBR 5205.
stant ---- 1 cm- ) meeting requirements of ASTM D 1125. 12.2 Mix the 500-g sample thoroughly and reduce to
7.4.3 Thermometer, 0 to 50 C, 0.5 C divisions, a test sample of about 60+10 g using a sample splitter
conforming to the requirements of ASTM E 1. in accordance with splitting procedure and equipment
7.4.4 1000-mL volumetric flask. described in USBR 5205. Save remainder of sample--in
a properly labled container--for possible futureuse.
8. Reagents and Materials
13. Preparation of Extract Mixture
8.1 Distilled water is to be used any time water is
13.1 All data are to be recorded on "Water Soluble
called for in this test method.
Solids Determination" form as shown on figure 1.
8.2 Potassium chloride (KC1), reagent grade quality as
13.2 Record the sample number and any other required
designated by the American Chemical Society, dried at
identification data.
105 C for 2 hours.
13.3 Mix the 60-g test sample thoroughly and measure
out a test specimen of 40+0.5 g. Determine and record
9. Precautions the mass of test specimen to the nearest 0.1 g.
13.4 Place test specimen in a clean 500-ml Erlenmeyer
9.1 Safety Precautions.-This procedure may involve
flask.
hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. Heating
13.5 Measure 400+5 mL of distilled water into a
equipment and hot containers can cause serious burns if
graduated cylinder. Determine and record volume of water
handled improperly. Use a container holder whenever
to nearest 5 ml.
handling hot containers.
13.6 Add water to flask containing the test specimen.
9.2 Technical Precautions:
Stopper flask tightly.
9.2.1 Saturation of the extract mixture must be
13.7 Calculate and record the extraction ratio to nearest
checked by determining the conductivity of the extract
0.1 mL/g.
mixture. Soil samples that contain large amounts of soluble
13.8 Agitate mixture of soil and water in flask by
solids may exceed solution capacity of the extract mixture.
swirling flask. Agitate mixture at least four times daily
If all soluble solids are not in solution, water soluble solids
for 4 days.
determination will not reflect the true percentage of soluble
solids in the sample. NOTE 1.-A standard agitation time of 4 days has been adopted
9.2.2 Electrical conductivity increases with temper- for this procedure. The agitation time may be modified (either
ature at a rate of 1.9 percent per degree Celsius. Procedures shortened or lengthened) depending on the solubility of the solids
(used in this method) correct for measurements--not at in the soil being tested. The standard agitation time may be
25 C--by applying the response of a conductivity cell modified if testing is performed to determine the relationship
to a potassium chloride (KCI) reference solution at the between extract mixture conductivity (an indication of solubility)
same temperature as the extract mixture. and agitation time. If conductivity becomes constant with
increasingagitation time, the shortest agitation time which results
in constant conductivity may be used for routine testing of the
10. Calibration and Standardization
soil. If no trend develops in the data or if extremely long agitation
times are required to reach constant conductivity use of the 4-
10.1 Verify that equipment is currently calibrated in
day standard time is recommended.
accordance with applicable calibration procedure. If the
calibration is not current, calibrate conductivity equipment 13.9 After final agitation, allowsoil particles to settle--
in accordancewith ASTM D 1125. typically overnight. The extract mixture is the clear liquid
remaining over the settled soil particles.
11. Preparation of Potassium Chloride Reference
Solution 14. Conductivity Determination
11.1 The reference solution is prepared to determine 14.1 Measure temperature of extract mixture. Measure
the response of the conductivity cell at the temperature temperature of KCI reference solution prepared in
of the extract mixture prepared in paragraph 13. paragraph 11. If temperatures are not within 2 C of
897
USBR 5450
each other, store the liquids in the same area until 15.10 Determine and record the mass of dish and
temperatures are within +2 C of each other. residue to nearest 0.0001 g.
14.2 Determine response of the conductivity cell to 15.11 Calculate and record mass of residue to nearest
the KCI reference solution as follows: 0.0001 g.
14.2.1 Rinse the conductivity cell with distilled 15.11.1 If mass of residue is less than 0.01 g or more
water. than 0.25 g, results cannot be used. Repeat subparagraphs
14.2.2 Rinse conductivity cell three times with the 15.2 through 15.11 using more or less extract solution as
KC1 reference solution. appropriate.
14.2.3 Fill conductivity cell with enough KC1 15.12 Calculate to the nearest 0.1 percent and record
reference solution to cover electrodes; be careful to avoid the water soluble solids content determined by evaporation.
entrapment of air bubbles in the cell.
14.2.4 Determine and record conductance, K1, of the 16. Calculations
KCI reference solution, to nearest 10 #S, using conductivity
meter following instructions provided by manufacturer of 16.1 Specimen Preparation:
instrument. 16.1.1 Calculate extraction ratio.
14.3 Determine and record conductance, Kx, of the
extract mixture according to subparagraphs 14.2.1 through V
14.2.4 using the extract mixture in place of the KCI R = -- (1)
ms
reference solution. where:
R = extraction ratio, mL/g
NOTE Z-This procedure also can be performed using the V = water volume, mL
extract solution prepared in subparagraph 15.2.
ms = specimen mass, g
14.4 Calculate and record cell response, J, to nearest 16.1.2 Calculate cell response.
0.01 cm-k
14.5 Calculate and record conductivity, K, of extract 1408
mixture to nearest 10/zS/cm. J- K (2)
14.5.1 If conductivity is larger than 2200 #S/cm, where:
extract mixture may be saturated and cannot be used. J = cell response to KCI reference solution at
Discard the entire soil and water mixture and prepare -1
measurement temperature, cm
another extract mixture in accordance with paragraph 13 K1 = measured conductance of KCI reference solution
except use less soil (higher extraction ratio). The at temperature of extract mixture,/S
conductivity of the new extract mixture is checked to 1408 = conductivity of the KCI reference solution at
determine that saturation of the extract mixture has not 25 C, #S/cm
been exceeded.
16.1.3 Calculate conductivity of extract mixture.
15. Procedure
K = JKx (3)
15.1 All data are to be recorded on "Water Soluble where:
Solids Determination" form (fig. 1). K = conductivity of extract mixture, #S/cm
15.2 Take the extract mixture (prepared in par. 13) J = cell response to KC1 reference solution at
-1
and filter70+10 mL of the clear liquid by pouring through measurement temperature, cm
a paper filter using the vacuum apparatus. The filtered Kx = measured conductance of extract mixture,/aS
fluidis the extract solution. If the extract solution is cloudy,
16.1.4 Calculate mass of residue.
refilter using a finer filterpaper.
15.3 Dry an evaporating dish in a convection oven nlr m- md (4)
for 1 hour at 105+5 C and cool in a desiccator. Determine where:
and record mass of evaporating dish to nearest 0.0001 g. mr = mass of residue, g
15.4 Obtain 50+1L mL volume of extract solution. m = mass of dish and residue, g
15.5 Pour the 50+5-mL volume of extract solution into me = mass of dish, g
evaporating dish.
15.6 Determine and record the mass of dish and extract 16.1.5 Calculate water soluble solids content.
solution to nearest 0.0001 g.
15.7 Place dish and solution on a steam-heated or
electric hot plate set at 98 C and evaporate liquid. Wss = 100 (mrR)
rex- me" (5)
15.8 Place dish and residue in to a convection oven where:
at 1054-5 C and dry 1 hour. Was = water soluble solids content, %
15.9 Place dish and dried residue into a desiccator to R = extraction ratio, mL/g
cool. mr = mass of residue, g
898
USBR 5450
899
USBR 545O
SPECIMEN NO.
17
"
SPECIMEN PREPARATION
K1 1440 #s
(S) CELL RESPONSE, J-1408"/(4) 0. 98 cm. 1
w.=xtoo I . I %
900